084-105

User's Manual
Ladder Support Soft

KV-H1WE Ver.4.0

Before using this software, be sure to thoroughly read this User's

Manual. After you are finished with this User's Manual, be sure to store
it in a safe place for quick reference.
Preface
The KV BUILDER ladder programming software features easy operation and high-
grade programming capabilities.

This manual provides a brief outline of KV BUILDER and describes how to use KV
BUILDER functions.
Be sure to thoroughly read and fully understand this manual before you start to use
KV BUILDER. Also, store this manual in a safe place after use.
Safety Precautions
This manual describes how to handle, operational procedures, and precautions
when using the KV BUILDER (KV-H1WE). Before you start to use KV BUILDER
(KV-H1WE), be sure to thoroughly read this manual in order to fully understand its
functions.

Store this manual in a safe place so that you can retrieve it whenever necessary.
Also, make sure that this document is handed over to the end user.

Symbols
This manual uses the following symbols to alert you to important information.

Failure to follow these instructions may lead to injury.

Failure to follow these instructions may lead to physical

damage (product malfunction, etc.).

Important: Provides additional information on precautions and restrictions that

must be followed in operation.

Note: Provides additional information on proper operation.

[Tip]
Indicates useful information or information that aids understanding of text
descriptions.

General Precautions
• When using KV BUILDER, make sure that the function and performance of the
KV-700 CPU Unit, KV series Basic Unit and KZ-300/350 CPU Unit are normal.
• At startup and during operation, be sure to monitor the functions and performance
of the KV series.
• From a fail-safe viewpoint, provide a safety circuit by some means that does not
operate via the programmable controller in the event that an abnormality occurs
on the programmable controller body so that the overall system functions safely.
• Control sometimes can no longer be operated normally due to output circuit or
internal circuit trouble. Be sure to provide a safety circuit in control systems that
may result in serious accidents such as fire.
• Do not modify the KV series or use it in any way other than described in the
specifications. The functions and performance of products used or modified in
this way cannot be assured.
• When the KV series is used in combination with other instruments, functions and
performance may be degraded depending on operating conditions and the
surrounding environment.
• Do not use the KV series for the purpose of protecting the human body.

i
Request
When using the KV series under conditions and environment indicated below, use
with sufficient margin with respect to ratings and functions, adopt safety
countermeasures such as fail-safe measures, and consult your sales
representative.

• Use under conditions and environment not described in this manual

• Use for nuclear power control, railroad facilities, aircraft facilities, vehicles,
combustion units, medical equipment, amusement machines, and safety devices
• Use in applications where a major influence on human life or property is
anticipated, and where safety in particular is required

ii
Software License Agreement
Before you use this software, be sure to read the terms of this agreement.
Once you have started to use this software, it is assumed that you have consented
to these terms, and an agreement is established between KEYENCE
CORPORATION and the user.

Terms
1. Rights of Use
KEYENCE CORPORATION shall permit the user the non-exclusive rights to use
this software in accordance with the terms of this agreement.

2. Copyright
Copyright relating to this software and manual shall belong to KEYENCE
CORPORATION, and the user shall not have rights other than the rights of use.

3. Forbidden Items
The user shall not be able to copy this software, nor be able to sell or distribute it
to a third party. The user, however, shall be able to copy this software for the
purpose of making backups for the user's own use.

4. Exemption of Liabilities
KEYENCE CORPORATION shall not be subject to liability with respect to
damage on the part of the user or a third party as a result of having operated this
software.

5. Cancellation of Agreement
Should the user have violated any terms of this agreement, KEYENCE
CORPORATION shall immediately be able to cancel this agreement, and the user
shall destroy or return this software and copies to KEYENCE CORPORATION.

Trademarks
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows NT are registered trademarks or trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States or other respective countries.
• PC-9800, PC-9821, and PC98-NX are registered trademarks of NEC.
• IBM is a registered trademark of IBM Corporation.
• Other company names, product names, and model names used in this manual
are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

iii
How This Manual Is Organized 1
Chapter 1 PREPARATIONS
This chapter describes an outline of KV BUILDER, how to check the package contents, how to connect to a PC, how
to install KV BUILDER, common operation methods, and other basic information. 2
Chapter 2 QUICK GUIDE TO FUNCTIONS
This chapter briefly introduces the functions of KV BUILDER.
3
Chapter 3 MANAGING PROJECTS
This chapter describes batch management of data files for each ladder system using project folders, and
management of projects. 4
Chapter 4 MEMORY CARD
This chapter describes how to transfer ladder diagrams, comments, and other unit setup information with the PLC
via the Memory Card.
5
Chapter 5 UNIT EDITOR
This chapter describes how to select connected units to create unit configurations, and how to transfer unit 6
configurations you have created, and how to use Unit Editor.

Chapter 6 EDITOR
This chapter describes how to use the Editor to edit ladder programs, and how to convert ladder programs for
7
transfer to the KV-700.

Chapter 7 MONITOR 8
This chapter describes how to use monitor functions, Unit Monitor, and the high-speed Time Chart Monitor, and
communications settings.

Chapter 8 SIMULATOR
9
This chapter describes how to use Simulator functions, Ladder Monitor, Batch Monitor and Registration Monitor.

Chapter 9 KV-H20S/H40S/H20G POSITIONING UNIT EXTENDED FUNCTIONS 10

This chapter describes the "pack instruction, "simple setup" and "exclusive unit monitor" extended functions when
the KV-H20S/H40S/H20G is used.

Chapter 10 KV-P SERIES PANEL EDITOR

This chapter describes the display of the "data access panel" and "message panel" two panels on the KV-P series,
and how to set switch operations.

Appendices
These appendices list error codes, how to remedy errors that may occur, instructions, a quick reference and other
information. Read them as required.

v
Contents
Preface
Safety Precautions .................................................................................... i
Software License Agreement ................................................................. iii
How This Manual Is Organized................................................................ v
Contents ................................................................................................... vi
Conventions Used In This Manual ..................................................... xxiii
Page Configuration and Symbols.................................................. xxiii
Terminology ...................................................................................xxiv
Symbols ........................................................................................xxiv

Chapter 1 PREPARATIONS
1-1 Checking the Package Contents.................................................1-2

1-2 Outline of KV BUILDER................................................................1-3

Operating Environment and System Configuration ........................1-3
KV BUILDER Features and Functions ...........................................1-4
Features ...............................................................................1-4
KV BUILDER Functions......................................................1-12

1-3 Connecting Devices ...................................................................1-14

Items to Prepare...........................................................................1-14
About Data Compatibility..............................................................1-18
About Changes and Additional Functions in KV BUILDER Ver.2,
Ver.3, Ver.3.5, Ver.4.0...................................................................1-18
About Changes and Additional Functions in KV BUILDER Ver.3.5.....
.....................................................................................................1-19
About Changes and Additional Functions in KV BUILDER Ver.4.0.....
.....................................................................................................1-19

1-4 Installing the Software ...............................................................1-20

Preparing for Installation ..............................................................1-20
Precautions in Windows 2000/XP ................................................1-20
Installing KV BUILDER.................................................................1-21
Uninstalling KV BUILDER ............................................................1-24

1-5 Installing the USB Driver ...........................................................1-25

Installing on Windows 98/98SE....................................................1-25
When installing the USB driver for the first time. ................1-25
Updating the USB driver pre-installed in Ver.1 ...................1-27
Installing on Windows Me ............................................................1-31
When installing the USB driver for the first time. ................1-31
Updating the USB driver pre-installed in Ver.1 ...................1-32
Installing on Windows 2000 .........................................................1-36
Installing on Windows XP.............................................................1-39

1-6 Precautions Upon Use ...............................................................1-42

vi
 1-7 Basic Operations........................................................................1-43
Programming flow and modes......................................................1-43
Starting Up and Exiting KV BUILDER ..........................................1-45
Starting Up KV BUILDER ...................................................1-45
Exiting KV BUILDER...........................................................1-46
About Screens..............................................................................1-46
Mode windows ....................................................................1-46
Current window...................................................................1-47
Mouse and keyboard operations ..................................................1-48
How to execute functions (instructions) ..............................1-48
Basic mouse operations ...............................................................1-49
What is "clicking?" ..............................................................1-49
What is "dragging-and-dropping?"......................................1-49
Differences in Key Operations According to Model......................1-50
Help..............................................................................................1-50

Chapter 2 QUICK GUIDE TO FUNCTIONS

2-1 Quick Guide ..................................................................................2-2

Chapter 3 MANAGING PROJECTS

3-1 Managing Projects .......................................................................3-2
About project folders ......................................................................3-2
Creating project folders ..................................................................3-2
User Data Files ..............................................................................3-4
Project Folder File Operations .......................................................3-5
Creating new projects ...........................................................3-5
Changing project names.......................................................3-5
Deleting projects ...................................................................3-6
Copying projects ...................................................................3-6

Chapter 4 MEMORY CARD

4-1 Operations Possible on the Memory Card.................................4-2
Operations Possible on the Memory Card .....................................4-2

4-2 Enabling Use of Memory Cards ..................................................4-3

To Use Memory Card .....................................................................4-3
Required hardware ...............................................................4-3
When the PC is equipped with a USB port ...........................4-5
Using the PCMCIA card slot for connecting Memory Cards ..........4-6
Checking operation of the PCMCIA card slot .......................4-6
Attaching the Memory Cards ................................................4-8
Using the USB Card Reader/Writer for connecting Memory Cards4-9
Checking operation of the USB Card Reader/Writer ............4-9
Attaching the Memory Card ................................................ 4-11

4-3 Managing Data on Memory Cards ............................................ 4-11

Managing Data on Memory Cards ............................................... 4-11
Data Stored on Memory Cards.....................................................4-14

vii
 Saving and Reading Data from KV BUILDER to Memory Card ...4-15
Saving and reading ladder programs, device comments
and unit setup information ..................................................4-15
Saving and reading DM/CM values, and relay and control
relay ON/OFF states...........................................................4-17

Chapter 5 UNIT EDITOR

5-1 Outline of Unit Editor ...................................................................5-2
Outline of Functions .......................................................................5-2
Settings on Unit Editor ...................................................................5-3

5-2 Table of Unit Editor Tool Bar Functions .....................................5-6

Standard.........................................................................................5-6

5-3 Table of Tool Bar Functions on Slave Device Setup Screen ....5-7
Standard.........................................................................................5-7

5-4 Screen Menus ...............................................................................5-8

File .................................................................................................5-8
Edit .................................................................................................5-8
Convert...........................................................................................5-9
Slave Setup ....................................................................................5-9
View..............................................................................................5-10
Option...........................................................................................5-10
Window ........................................................................................ 5-11
Help.............................................................................................. 5-11

5-5 List of Menu Items in Slave Device Setup Screen...................5-12

File ...............................................................................................5-12
Edit ...............................................................................................5-12
Convert.........................................................................................5-13
View..............................................................................................5-13
Window ........................................................................................5-13
Help..............................................................................................5-14

5-6 Building Systems .......................................................................5-15

Flow Up to KV-700 System Building ............................................5-15
Flow of Unit Editor Operations .....................................................5-16

5-7 Names and Functions of Screen Parts.....................................5-17

Names and Functions of Unit Editor Parts ...................................5-17
Unit placement area ...........................................................5-18
Unit configuration window...................................................5-19
Unit selection window .........................................................5-19
Unit setup window ..............................................................5-20
Message window ................................................................5-20

5-8 Basic Operation of Unit Editor ..................................................5-21

Flow of System Operations ..........................................................5-21

viii
5-9 Unit Editor Operations ...............................................................5-24
Unit Editor Operations ..................................................................5-24
Starting Up Unit Editor .................................................................5-26
Creating a new system .......................................................5-26
Adding/modifying an existing system..................................5-26
Exiting Unit Editor.........................................................................5-27
Displaying Windows .....................................................................5-27
Placing Units ................................................................................5-28
Deleting Placed Units ...................................................................5-29
Copying/Moving Placed Units ......................................................5-30
Automatically Assigning Relays/DMs for Placed Units.................5-31
Manually Assigning Relays/DMs for Placed Units........................5-32
Batch Assigning Relay Nos. for Placed Units...............................5-33
Checking System Relay/DM Assignments ...................................5-35
Displaying Unit Detailed Settings .................................................5-36
Setting Currently Placed Units .....................................................5-37
Using the Unit Registration Wizard ..............................................5-38
Importing Unit Setup Information and Unit Comments.................5-40
Entering Comments......................................................................5-41
Reserving Units ............................................................................5-42
Jumping the Cursor ......................................................................5-42
Jumping to Error Rungs ...............................................................5-43
Displaying the Slave Device Setup Screen ..................................5-44
Importing Slave Device Information .............................................5-44
Copying KL Unit Information ........................................................5-45
Pasting KL Unit Information .........................................................5-46
Starting Up KL Address Setup Software ......................................5-46
Switching Editing of Units KZ-300/350 and KV-700 .....................5-46
Automatically Creating KV-700 Unit Configurations based on
KZ-300/350 Unit Configurations ...................................................5-46
Manually Creating KV-700 Unit Configurations based on
KZ-300/350 Unit Configurations ...................................................5-47
Changing Unit Illustration Display Mode ......................................5-47
Displaying Help ............................................................................5-48

5-10 Using the Slave Device Setup Screen ......................................5-49

Names of Parts and Functions in Slave Device Setup Screen ....5-49
Slave device placement area .............................................5-50
Unit selection window .........................................................5-50
Unit setup window ..............................................................5-51
Address setup window........................................................5-51
Slave Device Setup Screen Operations .......................................5-53
Displaying the Slave Device Setup Screen ..................................5-54
Exiting the Slave Device Setup Screen........................................5-54
Displaying Windows .....................................................................5-55
Placing Slave Devices..................................................................5-56
Deleting Placed Slave Devices ....................................................5-56
Copying/Moving Placed Slave Devices........................................5-57
Automatically Assigning the Addresses of Placed Slave Devices.......
.....................................................................................................5-58
Manually Assigning the Addresses of Placed Slave Devices.......5-58

ix
 Checking System Address Assignments......................................5-59
Displaying Detailed Settings of Slave Devices.............................5-60
Setting Placed Slave Devices ......................................................5-61
Using the Slave Device Registration Wizard................................5-62
Importing Slave Device Information .............................................5-63
Entering Comments......................................................................5-64
Reserving Slave Devices .............................................................5-64
Jumping to Error Rungs ...............................................................5-65
Displaying Help ............................................................................5-65

5-11 Using Print Functions ................................................................5-66

Printing System Configurations ....................................................5-66
Setting the Print Preview ..............................................................5-68
Setting the Printer ........................................................................5-69

5-12 Environmental Settings .............................................................5-70

About Unit Editor Environmental Settings ....................................5-70
Setting View .................................................................................5-71
Changing the Unit Display Scale ........................................5-71
Changing the Font Size ......................................................5-72
Setting the Cursor Movement Unit......................................5-73
Setting Color ................................................................................5-74
Changing the Unit Editor Display Color ..............................5-74
Setting Device Assignments ........................................................5-75
Relay setup (KV) ................................................................5-75
DM (KV) ..............................................................................5-76
Setting Unit Color .........................................................................5-77
Changing the Display Color of Units Placed in the Box
Display Mode ......................................................................5-77
Other Settings ..............................................................................5-78
Changing Printing Details ...................................................5-78
Changing the Window Display Order..................................5-79
Changing Confirmation Message Display...........................5-80
Manually Enabling KL-N20V Address Settings...................5-80
Enabling the Auto-layout Function......................................5-81

Chapter 6 EDITOR
6-1 Outline of Functions ....................................................................6-2
Notes When Editing Ladder Programs...........................................6-2

6-2 Outline of Tool Bar Functions .....................................................6-3

Standard.........................................................................................6-3
Edit .................................................................................................6-4
Conversion and transfer .................................................................6-4
Display ...........................................................................................6-5
Instruction palette...........................................................................6-5
Add-ins ...........................................................................................6-6
Instructions 1..................................................................................6-6
Instructions 2..................................................................................6-7
CPU Positioning Instructions..........................................................6-7

x
 Suffix ..............................................................................................6-8

6-3 Outline of Menu Functions ..........................................................6-9

File .................................................................................................6-9
Edit ...............................................................................................6-10
Comment......................................................................................6-12
Find and replace ..........................................................................6-13
Monitors/Simulator .......................................................................6-14
Convert.........................................................................................6-14
View..............................................................................................6-15
Tools.............................................................................................6-16
Window ........................................................................................6-17
Help..............................................................................................6-17

6-4 About the Edit Screen................................................................6-18

Names of Screen Parts and Functions ........................................6-18
About the Ladder Program window screen.........................6-20

6-5 View Modes.................................................................................6-22

Changing the View Size ...............................................................6-22
Changing the View Mode .............................................................6-22
Displaying Devices for Units ........................................................6-24
Displaying/Hiding Comments .......................................................6-25
Displaying Labels .........................................................................6-25
Displaying/Hiding Tool Bars/Status Bar........................................6-26

6-6 File Management ........................................................................6-27

Creating New Projects .................................................................6-27
Setting and changing the PLC type ....................................6-29
Inputting user information.............................................................6-30
Setting Auto-reading of Files ........................................................6-31
Setting Auto-saving of Files .........................................................6-32
Saving, Reading and Deleting Files .............................................6-34
Saving Files ........................................................................6-34
Reading files.......................................................................6-36
Deleting project folders .......................................................6-37
Saving and Reading Mnemonic Lists ...........................................6-38
Saving mnemonic lists ........................................................6-38
Reading mnemonic lists .....................................................6-39
Saving Unit Specifications as CSV Files ......................................6-41
Verifying Files ...............................................................................6-42

6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines ....6-44

Entering Instructions ....................................................................6-44
Entering instructions from the instruction palette................6-45
Selecting instructions for entry (instruction palette) ............6-50
Directly entering instructions by mnemonic ........................6-56
Directly entering instructions ........................................................6-59
Entering NO contacts/NC contacts .....................................6-59
Entering coils ......................................................................6-61
Entering sets/resets ............................................................6-63

xi
 Entering timers and counters..............................................6-65
Entering differential contacts and outputs...........................6-67
Entering data move instructions .........................................6-69
Entering CPU positioning instructions ................................6-71
Delete Instruction .........................................................................6-74
Specifying the Default Suffix ........................................................6-75
Changing Operands .....................................................................6-76
Entering/Deleting Connecting Lines .............................................6-78
Entering connecting lines ...................................................6-78
Deleting connecting lines....................................................6-80
Extended Ladder mode ................................................................6-82
Canceling Edit Operations ...........................................................6-83
Undoing the previous edit operation (Undo) .......................6-83
Redoing the previous undo operation (Redo).....................6-83

6-8 Editing Mnemonic Lists .............................................................6-84

Displaying and Editing Mnemonic Lists........................................6-84
Displaying and editing mnemonic lists................................6-84
Ending editing of mnemonic lists ........................................6-85
Format of mnemonic lists ...................................................6-85
Copying, Moving and Deleting Areas ...........................................6-86

6-9 Copying, Moving and Deleting Ladder Programs ...................6-87

Copying, Moving and Deleting .....................................................6-87
Selecting areas ...................................................................6-87
Copying, moving and deleting areas ..................................6-90
Inserting and Deleting Rungs .......................................................6-93
Inserting free rungs.............................................................6-93
Deleting rungs ....................................................................6-94

6-10 Circuit Libraries..........................................................................6-96

Cautions When Using Circuit Library ...........................................6-96
How a Circuit Library is Structured...............................................6-96
Displaying Circuit Libraries and Other Functions .........................6-97
Registering Circuits ......................................................................6-98
Deleting Registered Circuits.........................................................6-98
Pasting Registered Circuits ..........................................................6-99
Importing and Exporting Circuit Libraries ...................................6-100

6-11 Inputting Comments and Labels.............................................6-102

Editing Comments and Labels ...................................................6-102
Editing comments and labels............................................6-103
Copying labels/comments from other devices ..................6-107
Deleting registered labels/comments................................6-107
Block copying, moving and deleting comments of other
devices .............................................................................6-108
Moving and copying comments between comment types 6-109
Directly Changing Comments and Labels on Ladder Diagrams 6-110
Multi Comment Window ............................................................. 6-111
Reading Comments from Other Files......................................... 6-112
Saving and Reading Comments in Text Format......................... 6-114

xii
 About the format of text format comment files. ................. 6-114
Saving comments ............................................................. 6-114
Reading comments........................................................... 6-115
Reading and saving comments files on other software .... 6-116
Editing Rung Comments ............................................................ 6-118
Turning Ladders into Rung Comments ...................................... 6-119
Setting Transfer of Comments ...................................................6-121

6-12 Jump, Find and Replace ..........................................................6-122

Jump ..........................................................................................6-122
Jumping to specified rungs or steps .................................6-122
Jumping to the top or bottom rungs of ladder programs...6-123
Jumping to registered rungs .............................................6-123
Jumping to the previous/next block ..................................6-126
Jumping to previous/next symbols....................................6-127
Jumping to the start and end of rungs ..............................6-128
Jumping to previous/next program change blocks ...........6-129
Searching for Instructions and Operands...................................6-130
Replacing Operands ..................................................................6-132
Replacing a Range of Operands ................................................6-134
Converting NO/NC Contacts ......................................................6-136

6-13 Displaying Use Status..............................................................6-137

Displaying the use status of devices as a list .............................6-137

6-14 Unit Viewer................................................................................6-139

Displaying Unit Viewer ...............................................................6-139
Changing Display Items .............................................................6-140

6-15 Conversion ...............................................................................6-141

Executing Conversion ................................................................6-141
Displaying Errors ........................................................................6-142
Clearing Invalid Operands..........................................................6-143
Setting the Device Auto-conversion Function ............................6-144
Checking for Redundant Coils ...................................................6-145
Setting a Password ....................................................................6-146

6-16 Starting Up External Tools ......................................................6-147

Starting Up Edit CPU Positioning Parameter .............................6-147
Converting Ladder Programs for KZ-300/350 ............................6-152
Cautions during conversion of ladder programs for
KZ-300/350.......................................................................6-152
Automatically setting corresponding units ........................6-153
Manually setting corresponding units ...............................6-155
Converting Ladder Programs for KV-10/16/24/40 ......................6-159
Starting Up MOTION BUILDER (Japanese) ..............................6-160
Starting Up PROTOCOL BUILDER (Japanese).........................6-160

6-17 Printing Ladder Programs .......................................................6-161

Executing Printing ......................................................................6-161
Preview ......................................................................................6-170

xiii
 Setting Up the Printer .................................................................6-172

6-18 Changing the Screen Display Color .......................................6-173

Changing Screen Display Colors ...............................................6-173
Changing Unit Colors .................................................................6-175
Setting Animation of Title Screen ...............................................6-177

Chapter 7 MONITOR
7-1 Outline of Monitor Functions ......................................................7-2
Outline of Functions .......................................................................7-2
Monitor Restrictions .......................................................................7-2
Cautions during Communications ..................................................7-3
Cautions when the USB Port Is Used ............................................7-3

7-2 Outline of Tool Bar Functions .....................................................7-4

Standard.........................................................................................7-4
Unit Monitor ....................................................................................7-5
Custom Monitor ..............................................................................7-5
Display ...........................................................................................7-6
Instruction Palette.................................................................7-6
Instructions 1 ........................................................................7-7
Instructions 2 ........................................................................7-7
CPU positioning Instructions ................................................7-8
Suffix.....................................................................................7-8

7-3 Outline of Menu Functions ..........................................................7-9

File .................................................................................................7-9
Edit ...............................................................................................7-10
Comment...................................................................................... 7-11
Search..........................................................................................7-12
PLC ..............................................................................................7-13
Monitor .........................................................................................7-14
Online Edit....................................................................................7-14
Setting ..........................................................................................7-15
View..............................................................................................7-16
Tools.............................................................................................7-17
Window ........................................................................................7-17
Help..............................................................................................7-17

7-4 Communicating with PLCs........................................................7-18

Setting PLC Communications Parameters...................................7-18
Selecting the Communications Port .............................................7-20
Serial port detailed setting ..................................................7-20
Setting the Unit No. ............................................................7-22
Modem Communications .............................................................7-23
Outline of Modem mode .....................................................7-23
Initializing the modem .........................................................7-23
Communications in Modem mode ......................................7-28
Ethernet Communications ............................................................7-31
Outline of Ethernet Communications ..................................7-31

xiv
 Setting Ethernet..................................................................7-32
Editing the Connection Destination ....................................7-33
Testing the Connection .......................................................7-36

7-5 Starting Up and Exiting Monitors .............................................7-39

Starting Up and Exiting Monitors..................................................7-39
Reading and monitoring programs .....................................7-39
Transferring and monitoring ladder programs ....................7-40
Reading programs ..............................................................7-41
Verifying the PLC program..................................................7-42
Editing devices offline .........................................................7-43
End Monitors ......................................................................7-44
Names of Screen Parts and Functions ........................................7-45

7-6 Ladder Monitor ...........................................................................7-46

Outline of Ladder Monitor.............................................................7-46
Ladder Monitor window ................................................................7-46
Ladder Monitor window ......................................................7-47
Status display .....................................................................7-48
Changing view size and view mode .............................................7-49
Changing the view size.......................................................7-49
Changing the view mode ....................................................7-49
Displaying Devices for Units ...............................................7-51
Displaying/Hiding Comments..............................................7-52
Displaying Labels ...............................................................7-52
Displaying/hiding tool bar, status bar and dialog bar ..........7-53
Displaying the Ladder Monitor window at the bottom of
the screen...........................................................................7-54
Selecting Devices.........................................................................7-54
Turning Bit Devices ON/OFF........................................................7-55
Changing Current Values/Setting Values/Attributes .....................7-56
Jump and Search .........................................................................7-58
Jumping to specified rungs or steps ...................................7-58
Jumping to the top or bottom rungs of ladder programs.....7-59
Jumping to the previous/next block ....................................7-60
Jumping to previous/next symbols......................................7-61
Jumping to the start and end of rungs ................................7-62
Jumping to the previous/next program block ......................7-63
Searching for instructions and operands ............................7-64
Starting the Monitor ......................................................................7-66
Exiting the Monitor .......................................................................7-66
PLC Error Check ..........................................................................7-67

7-7 Setting Up and Operating PLCs................................................7-68

Setting the PLC Run mode...........................................................7-68
Operating the PLC (Run mode) ..........................................7-68
Stopping PLC operation (Program mode) ..........................7-68
Setting Inhibit Input Refreshing and Inhibit Output.......................7-69
Inhibit input refreshing ........................................................7-69
Inhibit output .......................................................................7-69
Setting the Calendar Timer ..........................................................7-70

xv
 Clear All Devices ..........................................................................7-72
Clearing Control Memory (CM) for KV-D30..................................7-72

7-8 Batch Monitor .............................................................................7-73

Outline of Batch Monitor...............................................................7-73
Batch Monitor Display ..................................................................7-73
Registering Devices .....................................................................7-74
About the Batch Monitor Window .................................................7-76
Saving/Reading Batch Monitor Window .......................................7-76
Saving the Batch Monitor window.......................................7-76
Reading Batch Monitor files................................................7-77
Selecting and Changing Devices .................................................7-79
Selecting devices................................................................7-79
Turning bit devices ON/OFF ...............................................7-80
Changing current values/setting values/attributes ..............7-81
Resetting device values......................................................7-83

7-9 Registration Monitor ..................................................................7-84

Outline of Registration Monitor.....................................................7-84
Displaying Registration Monitor....................................................7-84
Registering Devices .....................................................................7-85
About the Registration Monitor Window .......................................7-87
Saving/Reading Registration Monitors .........................................7-88
Saving Registration Monitor ...............................................7-88
Reading Registration Monitor files......................................7-89
Selecting and Changing Devices .................................................7-90
Selecting devices................................................................7-90
Turning bit devices ON/OFF ...............................................7-91
Changing current values/setting values/attributes ..............7-91
Copying device attributes ...................................................7-94
Moving devices ...................................................................7-95
Deleting devices .................................................................7-96
Sorting devices ...................................................................7-97
Resetting devices ...............................................................7-98
Time Chart Operations .................................................................7-99
Setting the number of time chart gradations.....................7-100
Printing Registration Monitor ......................................................7-101
Preview .............................................................................7-101
Executing printing .............................................................7-102

7-10 Custom Monitor........................................................................7-103

Custom Monitor Features...........................................................7-103
Displaying Custom Monitor ........................................................7-103
Registering Custom Monitors .....................................................7-104

7-11 High-speed Time Chart Monitor..............................................7-106

Features .....................................................................................7-106
Displaying High-speed Time Chart Monitor................................7-106
Names and Functions of Parts in High-speed Time Chart Monitor .....
...................................................................................................7-107

xvi
 7-12 Unit Monitor .............................................................................. 7-116
Features ..................................................................................... 7-116
Displaying Unit Monitor .............................................................. 7-116
About Unit Monitor Windows ...................................................... 7-117
16-, 32- and 64-point Unit Monitor .................................... 7-117
A/D Conversion Unit Monitor, D/A Conversion Unit Monitor
.......................................................................................... 7-119
KL Unit Monitor .................................................................7-123
Positioning Unit Monitor....................................................7-128
High-speed Counter Unit Monitor .....................................7-130
Ethernet Unit Monitor........................................................7-132
Temperature Controller Unit Monitor.................................7-136

7-13 Batch Change ...........................................................................7-139

Displaying Batch Change ...........................................................7-139
Saving/Reading Batch Change Windows...................................7-141
Saving Batch Change windows ........................................7-141
Reading Batch Change windows......................................7-142
Writing/Reading Devices to and from PLCs ...............................7-143
Writing devices to PLC .....................................................7-143
Reading devices from PLC ...............................................7-143
Saving/Reading Devices from and to Files ................................7-144
Saving device values to file ..............................................7-144
Reading device values from files ......................................7-146
Saving/Reading Devices Values to Memory Card......................7-147
Saving devices values to Memory Card ...........................7-147
Reading device values from Memory Card.......................7-148

7-14 Online Edit Functions ..............................................................7-149

Outline of Functions ...................................................................7-149
Online Edit Features ..................................................................7-149
Cautions Upon Using the Online Edit Function ..........................7-149
Starting/Editing Online Edit ........................................................7-150
Transferring the Ladder Programs .............................................7-152
Stopping Online Editing..............................................................7-153
Stopping online editing and returning to a Monitor ...........7-153
Stopping online editing and returning to the Editor...........7-153
Setting Clearing of Program Change Display.............................7-154
Clearing the Background Color in Program Change Display .....7-155

Chapter 8 SIMULATOR
8-1 Outline of Simulator Functions...................................................8-2
Outline of Functions .......................................................................8-2
Simulator Restrictions ....................................................................8-2
Common restrictions.............................................................8-2
Restrictions when using KV-10/16/24/40 and KZ-300/350 ...8-3
Restrictions when KV-700 is used ........................................8-5

8-2 Outline of Tool Bar Functions .....................................................8-7

Standard.........................................................................................8-7

xvii
 8-3 Outline of Menu Functions ..........................................................8-8
File .................................................................................................8-8
Search............................................................................................8-9
Run...............................................................................................8-10
Settings ........................................................................................ 8-11
View..............................................................................................8-12
Window ........................................................................................8-12
Help..............................................................................................8-13

8-4 Starting Up and Exiting Simulator ............................................8-14

Starting Up and Exiting Simulator ................................................8-14
Starting up Simulator ..........................................................8-14
Exiting Simulator.................................................................8-15
Names of Screen Parts and Functions ........................................8-15

8-5 Executing Simulator...................................................................8-16

Scan Execution ............................................................................8-16
Outline of scan execution function......................................8-16
Continuous scan execution ................................................8-16
Executing Single Scan........................................................8-17
Setting Break Conditions ....................................................8-18
Changing and deleting registered details ...........................8-19
Setting the wait time ...........................................................8-20
Setting the scan time ..........................................................8-21
Setting the watchdog timer .................................................8-22
Step Execution .............................................................................8-22
Outline of step execution function ......................................8-22
About the Mnemonic list window ........................................8-23
1 step execution .................................................................8-23
Continuous step execution .................................................8-24
High-speed step execution .................................................8-25
Back 1 step execution ........................................................8-26
Execute back continuous step ............................................8-26
Specifying breakpoints .......................................................8-27
Stopping and Resetting Execution ...............................................8-28
Stopping/pausing execution ...............................................8-28
Reset ..................................................................................8-28

8-6 Ladder Monitor ...........................................................................8-29

Outline..........................................................................................8-29
Ladder Monitor window ................................................................8-29
Ladder Monitor window ......................................................8-30
About status display ...........................................................8-31
Changing view size and view mode .............................................8-31
Changing the View Size......................................................8-31
Changing the View Mode....................................................8-32
Displaying Devices for Units ...............................................8-33
Displaying/Hiding Comments..............................................8-34
Displaying Labels ...............................................................8-34
Displaying/hiding toolbar, status bar and dialog bar ...........8-35

xviii
 Displaying the Ladder Monitor window at the bottom of
the screen...........................................................................8-36
Selecting Devices.........................................................................8-36
Turning Bit Devices ON/OFF........................................................8-37
Changing Current Values/Setting Values/Attributes .....................8-38
Jump and Search .........................................................................8-40
Jumping to specified rungs or steps ...................................8-40
Jumping to the top or bottom rungs of ladder programs.....8-41
Jumping to the previous/next block ....................................8-42
Jumping to previous/next symbols......................................8-43
Jumping to the start and end of rungs ................................8-44
Searching for instructions and operands ............................8-45
Clearing All Devices .....................................................................8-47

8-7 Batch Monitor .............................................................................8-48

Outline of Batch Monitor...............................................................8-48
Batch Monitor window ..................................................................8-48
Registering Devices .....................................................................8-49
About the Batch Monitor Window .................................................8-51
Saving/Reading Batch Monitor Window .......................................8-52
Saving the Batch Monitor window.......................................8-52
Reading Batch Monitor files................................................8-53
Selecting and Changing Devices .................................................8-54
Selecting devices................................................................8-54
Turning bit devices ON/OFF ...............................................8-55
Changing current values/setting values/attributes ..............8-56
Resetting Devices...............................................................8-58

8-8 Registration Monitor ..................................................................8-59

Outline of Registration Monitor.....................................................8-59
Displaying Registration Monitor....................................................8-59
Registering Devices .....................................................................8-60
About the Registration Monitor Window .......................................8-62
Saving/Reading Registration Monitors .........................................8-63
Saving Registration Monitor ...............................................8-63
Reading Registration Monitor files......................................8-64
Selecting and Changing Devices .................................................8-65
Selecting devices................................................................8-65
Turning bit devices ON/OFF ...............................................8-65
Changing current values/setting values/attributes ..............8-66
Copying device attributes ...................................................8-68
Moving devices ...................................................................8-69
Deleting devices .................................................................8-70
Sorting devices ...................................................................8-71
Resetting devices ...............................................................8-72
Time Chart Operations .................................................................8-73
Setting the number of time chart gradations.......................8-75
Printing Registration Monitor ........................................................8-76
Preview ...............................................................................8-76
Executing printing ...............................................................8-77

xix
 Chapter 9 KV-H20S/H40S/H20G POSITIONING UNIT EXTENDED
FUNCTIONS
9-1 KV-H20S/H40S/H20G Outline of Positioning Unit Extended
Functions ......................................................................................9-2
Outline of Positioning Unit Pack Instructions..................................9-2
Outline of Positioning Unit/Simple Setup........................................9-2
Outline of Unit Monitor ...................................................................9-3
KV-H20→KV-H20S/H40S/H20G Device Conversion.....................9-3

9-2 Positioning Unit Extended Functions Tool Bar and Menu .......9-4
Tool Bar/Menu ................................................................................9-4
Pack palette/simple setup window........................................9-5

9-3 Positioning Unit Pack Instructions.............................................9-6

Structure of Pack Instructions ........................................................9-6
Pack Instruction Restrictions ..........................................................9-6
Entering Pack Instructions .............................................................9-7
Entering instructions from the pack palette ..........................9-7
Directly entering pack instructions using mnemonics ...........9-8
Expanding Pack Instructions ..........................................................9-9
Expanding/turning off individual pack instructions ................9-9
Expanding/turning off all pack instructions ...........................9-9
Displaying pack instruction symbols in device annotation
during expansion ................................................................9-10
List of Positioning Unit Pack Instructions ..................................... 9-11
Cautions when Using Pack Instructions .......................................9-12

9-4 Positioning Unit/Simple Setup (Japanese) ..............................9-13

What Is "Positioning Unit/Simple Setup?" ....................................9-13
Restrictions when Using Positioning Unit/Simple Setup ..............9-13
Starting Up and Editing in Positioning Unit/Simple Setup ............9-14
Positioning Unit/Simple Setup and Other Functions ....................9-16
Printing settings ..................................................................9-16
Loading/transferring settings ..............................................9-18
Appropriating settings from other project files ....................9-19

9-5 Positioning Unit/Unit Monitor....................................................9-20

Description of Unit Monitor Screen Items.....................................9-20

Chapter 10 KV-P SERIES PANEL EDITOR

10-1 Starting Up and Exiting Panel Editor........................................10-2
How to Start Up Panel Editor .......................................................10-2
Selecting or creating a new project ....................................10-2
Starting Up Panel Editor .....................................................10-2
How to Exit Panel Editor...............................................................10-3
Closing Panel Editor ...........................................................10-3
10-2 Panel Editor ................................................................................10-4
Menu Buttons ...............................................................................10-5
Ladder Edit view .................................................................10-5

xx
 Data access panel ..............................................................10-5
Message panel ...................................................................10-5
Panel preview .....................................................................10-5
Print/print preview ...............................................................10-6
Load device comment ........................................................10-6
Option .................................................................................10-7
"OK" button .........................................................................10-7
"Cancel" button ...................................................................10-7
"Help" button.......................................................................10-7

10-3 System Parameters ....................................................................10-8

System Parameters Window ........................................................10-8
Data access panel system parameters...............................10-9
Message panel system parameters..................................10-10
Switch/buzzer configuration.............................................. 10-11

10-4 Setting the Data Access Panel................................................10-12

Panel edit (Data access panel on edit) .............................10-13

10-5 Setting the Message Panel ......................................................10-14

Panel edit (Message panel on edit) ..................................10-15

Appendices
1 Error Messages ........................................................................... A-2
System Errors ............................................................................... A-2
Memory Errors............................................................................... A-3
File Errors...................................................................................... A-3
Installer Errors ............................................................................... A-4
Errors That Occur on Editor .......................................................... A-4
Errors That Occur by Conversion.................................................. A-6
Errors That Occur on Simulator..................................................... A-8
System Errors (displayed on Monitor) ........................................... A-8
File-related Errors (displayed on Monitor) ..................................... A-8
Errors That Occur When Monitor is Started Up and
Communications Errors................................................................. A-9
Errors during Ethernet Communications ..................................... A-10
PLC Unit Errors ............................................................................A-11
Errors That Occur on Unit Editor ................................................. A-13

2 List of Instructions .................................................................... A-16

Basic Instructions ........................................................................ A-16
Applied Instructions ..................................................................... A-21
Arithmetic Operation Instructions ................................................ A-23

3 List of Device Nos. .................................................................... A-42

Relay, Timer, Counter Memory No. by Device ............................ A-42
KV-10/16/24/40 Devices ............................................................. A-43
Special auxiliary relays ...................................................... A-43
Special Memory Lists ........................................................ A-46
KV-700 Devices .......................................................................... A-47

xxi
 Control Relays CR ............................................................. A-47
Control Memory CM........................................................... A-52

4 List of Conversion Rules .......................................................... A-59

Device Conversion Rules when KZ-300/350→KV-700 Conversion
Function is Used ......................................................................... A-59
KZ-300/350→KV-700 Relay Conversion ........................... A-59
KZ-300/350→KV-700 Data Memory Conversion............... A-61
KZ-300/350→KV-700 Other Device Conversion ............... A-62
KZ-L2→KV-L20 Device Conversion............................................ A-62
KZ-TH4/TC4→KV-TF40 Device Conversion............................... A-62
KZ-R1A→KL-N20V Device Conversion ...................................... A-62
KZ-AN6→KV-AD40/DA40 Device Conversion............................ A-63
KZ-H2→KV-H20 Device Conversion........................................... A-64
KL-N20Z→KL-N20V Device Conversion..................................... A-64
Device Conversion Rules When KV→KV-700 Conversion
Function is Used ......................................................................... A-65
KV-10/16/24/40→KV-700 Relay Conversion..................... A-65
KV-10/16/24/40→KV700 Data Memory Conversion.......... A-67
KV-10/16/24/40→KV700 Other Device Conversion .......... A-69

5 List of Sample Programs .......................................................... A-70

Explanation of Sample Ladder Programs.................................... A-70

6 List of Circuits Registered to Circuit Library.......................... A-71

Circuits Registered to Circuit Libraries ........................................ A-71

7 List of Shortcut Key Commands.............................................. A-74

Unit Editor ................................................................................... A-74
Unit Editor (Slave Device Setup screen) ..................................... A-76
Editor........................................................................................... A-77
Monitor ........................................................................................ A-80
Simulator ..................................................................................... A-83

8 Programming Hints ................................................................... A-85

Circuits Requiring Rewriting ........................................................ A-85
Programming Precautions........................................................... A-86
Programs That Cannot be Reverse Converted ........................... A-87

9 Remedies for Frequently Occurring Communications Errors . A-88

10 Index........................................................................................... A-90

Revision History

xxii
Conventions Used In This Manual
The following shows how pages are configured, and the symbols and terminology
used in this manual.

Page Configuration and Symbols

Headline

Mid-heading
Display the flow for
executing commands
Sub-heading from the menu bar using
This describes .
operation procedures. Icons are also displayed
when there are icons on
the tool bar.
Thumbnail index
indicates the chapter. Operation screen

Indicates the page or

Chapter title manual to refer to. The
page or manual
Other procedure containing the related
This information is information is indicated
provided if the same result here.
can be obtained by a
procedure other than that Warning and Caution
described above. Failure to observe the
caution described here
Note: may result in product
Describes cautions for trouble.
easily mistaken
operations. Be sure to Tip
read these. This describes related
information in more detail
and provides reference
information.
* This page was made for the purpose of explaining page
components, and differs form an actual page.

xxiii
Terminology
This manual uses the following terminology excluding some instances.
Term Description
KV-700 series Any model in the KEYENCE PLC KV-700 series
CPU Unit
KV-10/16/24/40 Any model in the KEYENCE PLC KV-10/16/24/40 series
Basic Unit
KV-P series Any model in the KEYENCE PLC KV-P series
Basic Unit
KZ-300/350 Any model in the KEYENCE PLC KZ-300/350 series
CPU Unit
PLC Programmable controller system in which units are mounted on the
Basic Unit or CPU Unit. Refers to the overall system.
PC Stands for personal computer. Refers to an IBM PC/AT compatible
(DOS/V) machine and the NEC PC-9800 series.
<KV BUILDER> KV BUILDER ladder support software
Ladder The program created using KV BUILDER ladder support software
program

Symbols
This manual uses the following symbols to show menus and buttons.
Symbol Description
{ } These are menu items. Menu items can be selected from the menu
bar.
[ ] These are dialog box names or items names.
" " These are buttons containing text that are used for executing
operations or canceling in dialog boxes, for example.
Ctrl These are keys on the PC's keyboard.

xxiv
Preface
The KV BUILDER ladder programming software features easy operation and high-
grade programming capabilities.

This manual provides a brief outline of KV BUILDER and describes how to use KV
BUILDER functions.
Be sure to thoroughly read and fully understand this manual before you start to use
KV BUILDER. Also, store this manual in a safe place after use.
Chapter 1
PREPARATIONS
This chapter describes an outline of KV BUILDER, how to check the package
contents, how to connect to a PC, how to install KV BUILDER, common
operation methods, and other basic information.

1-1 Checking the Package Contents ...................................... 1-2

1-2 Outline of KV BUILDER ..................................................... 1-3

1-3 Connecting Devices......................................................... 1-14

1-4 Installing the Software..................................................... 1-20

1-5 Installing the USB Driver................................................. 1-25

1-6 Precautions Upon Use..................................................... 1-42

1-7 Basic Operations ............................................................. 1-43

 1-1 Checking the Package Contents

1 1-1 Checking the Package Contents

The package contains the following items. Before you start using KV BUILDER,
PREPARATIONS

make sure that the package contains everything that it is supposed to contain.

„ KV BUILDER master disk

This disk contains the KV BUILDER program and

Installer. Keep this disk in a safe place when you have
finished installing KV BUILDER.

Important: We recommend backing up the CD-ROM in case it is damaged.

KV BUILDER User's Manual (PDF Manual) is contained on the CD-
ROM.

Separate cables are required for connecting the PC to the KV-10/16/24/40, KV-
700 and KZ-300/350.
Prepare the required cable to match the PC model you are using.
"1-3 Connecting Devices" page 1-14

1-2
 1-2 Outline of KV BUILDER

1-2 Outline of KV BUILDER 1

This section describes the system configuration and operating environment of KV

PREPARATIONS
BUILDER, its features and functions.
Be sure to read this section before you start to use KV BUILDER.

Operating Environment and System Configuration

The following environment is Display
required for operation of KV Resolution 800 x 600 dots,
BUILDER. 256 colors or more
Make sure that the system you
Printer
are using meets the following
conditions and that you have all Printer
of the required equipment. Windows-compatible
printer that can be
connected to the PC
Compatible machines (300 dpi or more)
A PC on which Windows
98/98SE/Me/2000 or Windows
NT4.0 and Windows XP is pre-
installed and that is equipped KZ-300/350
KV-700 series KV-10/16/24/40 series
with an RS-232C or USB KEYENCE KV-700

interface
0 0
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
11 11

(When the PC is equipped with a

12 12
HYPER ACCESS WINDOW 13 13
14 14
15 15

USB interface, the PC is limited RUN

STOP

CARD RD SD USB

to one pre-installed with Windows SERIAL

98/98SE/Me/2000/Windows XP.)
• IBM PC and PC/AT compatible (DOS/V) machine

CD-ROM drive

CPU memory requirements

Pentium 133MHz or faster
(Pentium 200MHz or faster recommended)
Expanded memory 64MB or more

Compatible OSs
• Windows 98 • Windows 98SE • Windows Me
• Windows 2000 • Windows NT4.0 • Windows XP

Free space on hard disk

At least 80MBytes

KV-700 CPU Unit, KV-10/16/24/40 Basic Unit, KZ-300/350 CPU Unit

To enable use of monitor functions or transfer of programs on these units, the PC
must first be connected to the respective unit.
"1-3 Connecting Devices" page 1-14

Note: KV BUILDER does not support KZ-10/16/24/40.

1-3
 1-2 Outline of KV BUILDER

1 KV BUILDER Features and Functions

PREPARATIONS

KV BUILDER is software for creating sequence programs, and features easy

operability and high grade programming capabilities.

Features
„ Work efficiency improved by multi-file editing function and mouse-based
easy operation
Two or more files can be edited at the same time, allowing ladder diagrams to be
copied-and-pasted between files. Symbols can be copied and moved, and
connecting lines can be easily manipulated with the mouse. Functions can be
called up by one-touch operation from the toolbar, enabling efficients
programming.

„ Editing, setup, monitoring/debugging, generation of specifications, and all

other functions integrated
The software required for creating PLC systems is provided on an integrated
environment with KV BUILDER as its core. Editing can be performed more
efficiently as all software is started up from KV BUILDER.

1-4
 1-2 Outline of KV BUILDER

„ Intuitive 4-way entry 1

KV BUILDER provides the user with a flexible entry environment that can be

PREPARATIONS
operated easily by anyone.

• Entry by selecting instructions

Double-click the mouse at the location
where you want to insert the instruction.
All the user has to do is to select the
instruction from the instruction tree and
enter by following the guide.
An easy-to-use new function "real-time hint
box" is also provided for beginners.

• Instruction palette
All instructions are incorporated in a visual
catalog. A new function "ladder catalog
function" is incorporated. All the user has to
do is to paste at the desired insertion
location while viewing the symbols.
Even beginners will find this function handy
as it allows them to create ladders visually.

• Entry by icon and

function
After interviewing several
hundred ladder
programmers, we carefully
selected only highly frequently used instructions and turned them into icons.
You can enter instructions by using only the mouse by clicking these icons.
Instructions can also be entered by function keys just like on conventional
software.

• Entry by mnemonics
The "mnemonic entry function" is provided for power users who want to enter
functions quickly without using the mouse. This mouse allows the user to build
ladders successively by entering mnemonics.
Not only entry but also copying and deleting have the look and feel of word
processing software.

1-5
 1-2 Outline of KV BUILDER

1 „ Ladder index search function: Jump to the desired search line merely by
clicking the line comment in the "Search" window.
PREPARATIONS

When editing ladder programs with

many rungs, normally a rung comment is
entered at the start of each circuit block.
This is used as a guide mark when
debugging the program.
KV BUILDER allows you to move and
store these rung comments on the KV-
700.
Rung comments are relied on when
debugging ladder programs. If you use
the new function "ladder index search
function," all rung comments in the
ladder program can be displayed as a list.
Directly clicking any comment in this
window immediately causes the program
to jump to that comment, enabling even
smoother debugging.

„ Reserve device function: Devices can be temporarily reserved without

operand and setting values set.
The "reserve device function" is handy for the
provisional design of circuits. Use this function if you
want to leave a device in the ladder circuit so as not to
forget it later even though it is not decided which relay
is to be used, and if you want to leave a timer even
though the setting value is not clearly known.
The reserve device function involves no special
operation. Devices for which an operand or setting value is not entered are
indicated as "???". This allows you to distinguish at a glance devices that have
and have not been determined to prevent you from forgetting to correct them
later. The "ladder index search function" also allows you to display reserved
devices as a list, facilitating corrections.

„ KZ-300/350 ladder conversion function: KZ-300/350 ladder resources can

be converted for utilization on KV-700.
KV-700 is a higher version of KZ-300/350.
KV-700 is provided with a KZ-300/350 ladder conversion function for effectively
utilizing extensive ladder resources created so far.
A newly developed intelligent calculation routine automatically creates the
optimum unit configuration on the KV-700 based upon the unit configuration
used on KZ-300/350. Ladder conversion enables ladder diagrams to be used
almost as they are without modification.
KEYENCE KV-700
0 0
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
11 11
12 12
HYPER ACCESS WINDOW 13 13
14 14
15 15

RUN
STOP

CARD RD SD USB

SERIAL

KZ-300/350 KV-700

1-6
 1-2 Outline of KV BUILDER

„ Data can be saved in CSV format for further processing on spreadsheet 1

software

PREPARATIONS
Internal device
KV-700
values of device
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
comment file
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15

KV-700
Logging data by Excel or other
Memory Card spreadsheet
software

KV BUILDER has substantial functions for saving various internal data on the
KV-700 to files. Data is saved to "CSV format" files. CSV format is an easily
expandable format that enables further processing of KV-700 data on Microsoft
Excel or other spreadsheet software.

• Creating daily manufacturing reports • Editing device comment data on Excel

from uploaded internal data

„ High-speed time chart function: Powerfully assists debugging, the biggest

drawback when creating ladder programs.
The limits of Windows processing
speed have been excelled.
KV BUILDER is provided with a
professional time chart function
that utilizes the ultra-fast 100 s
(reference value) sampling
speed as part of the standard
specification.
Ladder programs are tracked in
scan time increments also during
debugging. This is a severe
requirement as an ultra-fast CPU is used on the KV-700.
KV BUILDER is also equipped with trigger and logging functions. This allows you
analyze data brought back from site in your office.
* The high-speed time chart function improves debugging capabilities.

1-7
 1-2 Outline of KV BUILDER

1 „ Monitoring windows exclusive for individual units such as Function Unit

When you look at ladder programs, the functions assigned to each unit differ in
PREPARATIONS

various ways even at the same DM or relay. Up till now, it has been difficult to
reliably monitor this. KV BUILDER, however, is provided with a unit monitor
function. With this function, exclusive monitor windows for each unit are
displayed based upon the connected unit information. You can confirm the
desired information of each unit merely by opening the required window.

You can tell the ON/OFF states of each I/O

terminal at a glance.
KV BUILDER is provided with a device
comment display function to make things
easier.
This allows you to tell straight away which
unit is assigned to which relay No.

KV BUILDER allows you to monitor the

operating status of positioning units. It is
also provided with a simple test run
function for testing return to origin,
emergency stop and test run.
Debugging of motor control can be
performed with greater efficiency as the operating status of positioning units can
be confirmed simultaneously with ladder program debugging.

The I/O status of analog units is batch-

managed according to each channel. KV
BUILDER is provided with a simultaneous
digital/analog data display function, which
allows you to confirm the input (output)
status from actual measurement
equipment. This allows you to separate
external devices from the ladder program
for verifying numerical values when an
abnormal value has been entered. The
debugging environment has also been further enhanced as KV BUILDER
incorporates an upper/lower setting and peak/bottom hold value monitor
comparable to third-party analog controllers.

KV BUILDER is provided with a Remote

System Management tool, the first in
industry.
This tool batch-manages the data I/O
status of the KL series, that comprises
large-scale systems made up of a
maximum 2048 points or 128 units, and
data communications status according to
individual unit.
KV BUILDER is also provided with an error
history function that quickly searches for
and displays any errors that may occur
during data communications.

1-8
 1-2 Outline of KV BUILDER

„ Unit Editor: New-concept software for software-based batch setup of

individual units
1
KV BUILDER contains the Unit Editor unit setup software. Unit Editor allows you

PREPARATIONS
to set up the functions of individual units in software, something that had to be
performed on the hardware up till now.
All the tasks of setting switches and creation of ladder programs, that had to be
performed separately up till now, can now be performed on a single PC.

Connection status of units

can be confirmed visually
at a glance. This allows the
Automatically calculates the user to confirm layout
total weight and current status when units are
consumption of connected housed in the control
units. panel.
This reduces trouble at CE
acquisition.

Flexible relay assignments

1 Assignment by connection order 2 Assignment by I/O

Unit setup information is linked in real time on the ladder software. The entire
process from hardware setup through to creation of the ladder program is
performed within a single item of software, resulting in an improved development
environment.

Operand color-coded display function

The color of operands on the Edit Ladder screen is interlocked with the color of
units set in Unit Editor. This allows you to tell at a glance which units relay Nos.
belong to.

KV BUILDER also has a specifications sheet generation function. This function

automatically generates and prints a visual representation of unit configuration,
relay assignments, setup details, and other information.
The printout can be used as a specifications sheet as it is, reducing man-hours.

1-9
 1-2 Outline of KV BUILDER

1 „ Exchanging ladder data with LADDER BUILDER for KZ

Ladder data created on LADDER BUILDER for KZ can be used as it is, allowing
PREPARATIONS

already available ladder resources to be effectively utilized.

KV BUILDER also has a conversion function for converting ladder data for KZ-
300/350 created on LADDER BUILDER for KZ for use on KV-700.

„ Connected units easily registered by mouse operation

On devices up till now, each unit had to be set up individually on DIP switches.
On KV-700, however, this is no longer required, as each unit can be easily set up
on Unit Editor. Setups can also be changed even after the system has been built
without the need to remove units.
With the KV-700 series, connected units must be pre-registered to the CPU
before the ladder program is executed. To do this, use Unit Editor to select the
connected unit, create a unit configuration in advance, and transfer the unit
configuration you have create to the KV-700 CPU Unit. The functions of each
connected unit and QL or KL slave devices can also be set.

„ Speedy selection of devices to be monitored by dragging-and-dropping from

ladder diagram
Devices to be monitored can be easily and quickly registered.

1-10
 1-2 Outline of KV BUILDER

„ Ladder programs, and movement of contacts and time charts confirmed at 1

a glance

PREPARATIONS
Three monitors are available: a Ladder Monitor for displaying ladder programs, a
Batch Monitor for displaying a list of devices, and a Registration Monitor for
confirming operation of contacts on the time chart. The windows for these three
monitors can be placed anywhere on screen so that you can monitor and
simulate operation of ladder programs simultaneously on each of these
windows.

„ Simulator function enables testing without the need for a PLC

When you use the Simulator, you can simulate and monitor program operation
even in an environment where a PLC is not connected. In this way, operation of
ladder programs can be checked without transferring the program to the PLC.
Also, scan execution, step execution and reverse modes for each of these
execution types are available to improve debugging efficiency.

„ Screen sizes adjustable in five stages. Use to match specific display

requirements
The screen display size can be adjusted in five stages. To confirm the overall
flow, choose reduced size, and to edit individual contacts, choose enlarged size.
Choose the desired screen size according to your particular requirements.

1-11
 1-2 Outline of KV BUILDER

1 KV BUILDER Functions
KV BUILDER has the following functions.
PREPARATIONS

„ Unit Editor...
• Builds KV-700 series
systems.
• Sets up each of the units in
the KV-700 series and
assigns relays.
• Can convert ladder
programs for KZ-300/350
for use on KV-700.
• Can print unit configuration
diagrams and a list of
settings.

„ Editor...
• Allows you to create ladder
programs using the various
instructions in ladder
programming language.
• Allows you to register
comments to devices and
transfer these comments to the
PLC. Rung comments can also
be transferred to KV-700.
• Allows you to convert ladder
programs you have created to
machine code.
• Allows you to display and print
the ladder program you have
created, a list of mnemonics, label comments, device state of use, and other
information.

„ Simulator...
• Allows you to simulate
operation of the ladder
program you have created
without the KV-700, KV-
10/16/24/40 and KZ-300/350
connected to debug the
program.
• Allows you to select
continuous real time, single
scan only, single step, for
example, as the debugging
execution mode so that you
can reliably find erroneous
locations in the ladder
program.
• Can execute debugging in reverse step mode.

1-12
 1-2 Outline of KV BUILDER

„ Monitors... 1
• Allow you to monitor the ON/OFF state of contacts in real time on-line using

PREPARATIONS
the ladder program you have created.
• Allow you to display time charts and transfer ladder programs to KV-700, KV-
10/16/24/40 and KZ-300/350.

1-13
 1-3 Connecting Devices

1 1-3 Connecting Devices

This section describes how to connect the KV series to the PC you are using, and
PREPARATIONS

compatibility of data prepared using different programs.

Items to Prepare
Prepare the following items.

„ USB port connection

USB cable Model No.: OP-35331

Take care when connecting connector cables. Connecting cables to the printer ports
on the PC may damage the PC or the KV series Basic Unit or KV-700 CPU Unit.

Note: • Be sure to use the special cable (OP-35331). Use of a different cable
may cause malfunction.
• Before you connect the KV-700 to the USB connector on the PC, install
KV BUILDER.
"1-4 Installing the Software" page 1-19
• The USB driver for KV-700 must be installed on the PC only when the
KV-700 is connected to the PC for the first time.
"1-5 Installing the USB Driver " page 1-24

1-14
 1-3 Connecting Devices

„ D-Sub 9-pin serial port connection 1

Connector cable Model No.: OP-26487

PREPARATIONS
D-Sub 9-pin conversion connector Model No.: OP-26486

Take care when connecting connector cables. Connecting cables to the printer ports
on the PC may damage the PC or KV-10/16/24/40 Basic Unit, KV-700 CPU Unit, or
KZ-300/350 CPU Unit.

Note: Be sure to use the special cable (OP-26487, OP-26486). Use of a different
cable may cause malfunction.

1-15
 1-3 Connecting Devices

1 „ D-Sub 25-pin serial port connection

Connector cable Model No.: OP-26487
PREPARATIONS

D-Sub 25-pin conversion connector Model No.: OP-26485

Take care when connecting connector cables. Connecting cables to the printer ports
on the PC may damage the PC or KV-10/16/24/40 Basic Unit, KV-700 CPU Unit, or
KZ-300/350 CPU Unit.

Note: Be sure to use the special cable (OP-26487, OP-26485). Use of a different
cable may cause malfunction.

1-16
 1-3 Connecting Devices

„ 14-pin half-pitch serial port connection 1

Connector cable Model No.: OP-26482

PREPARATIONS
Note: Be sure to use the special cable (OP-26482). Use of a different cable may
cause malfunction.

1-17
 1-3 Connecting Devices

1 About Data Compatibility

Though KV BUILDER is ladder programming support software for KZ-10/16/24/40,
PREPARATIONS

KV-700 and KZ-300/350, ladder programs created on KZ, KV series support

software KZ-LADDER and LADDER BUILDER for KZ can be re-used on KV
BUILDER.
The following table shows data compatibility between ladder software and PLC
devices.

PLC Device
KZ-10/16/24/40/80* KZ-300/350 KV-10/16/24/40
Software
KZ-LADDER Change the PLC model to "KZ- Read the data on
300", read the data on LADDER LADDER BUILDER, and
BUILDER, and then read the read the converted data
converted data on KV BUILDER. on KV BUILDER.
LADDER BUILDER Change the PLC model to "KZ-
for KZ 300/350" or "KZ-10/16" "KV-24/40". Can be imported to KV BUILDER without
LADDER BUILDER This enables the data to be read on modification.
for KZ ver 1.5 KV BUILDER.
* Only importing of ladder programs is supported. KV BUILDER does not allow transfer of data to
KZ-10/16/24/40/80.

About Changes and Additional Functions in KV BUILDER Ver.2, Ver.3, Ver.3.5,

Ver.4.0
In KV BUILDER Ver.2 and Ver.3, various functions have been changed and added
from KV BUILDER Ver.1.
Data made using KV BUILDER Ver.2 and Ver.3 are completely compatible with KV
BUILDER Ver.1.

Item KV BUILDER Ver.2 KV BUILDER Ver.1 See Page

Windows 98/98SE
USB communications Windows 98/98SE 1-25
Windows Me
compatible OS Windows Me
Windows 2000
Selection of ladder program
Freely selectable Fixed to "Project" 4-16
directory
Unit Editor system information Width, height, depth, power Width, power consumption,
5-18
display items consumption, weight weight
Automatic startup of Japanese
language FEP when entering Available Not available. 6-27
project names
Automatic registration of
special device comments Available Not available. 6-27
when creating new projects
User information entry
Available Not available 6-30
function
Saving unit pin assignments
Available Not available 6-41
as CSV file format
Circuit library Available Not available 6-96
Entry of comments/labels Editable in individual units Batch editing only 6-103

1-18
 1-3 Connecting Devices

Item KV BUILDER Ver.3

Batch entry in multiple rungs
KV BUILDER Ver.1, 2 See Page
1
Entry of rung comments Editing by one rung at a time 6-118
possible

PREPARATIONS
Operand replace function
Available Not available 6-134
within selected range
Cover sheet print function Available Not available 6-163
Printing of ladder diagrams Color printing possible Black-and-white printing only 6-164
Comments/labels/reference Comment entered devices
For all devices used 6-166
information printing items only
Printing of unit pin
Available Not available 6-167
assignments
Communications setup Possible on Editor Set in setup mode 7-18
Ethernet communications Possible Not possible 7-31
High-speed Counter Unit KV-
Supported Not supported 7-130
SC20
Ethernet Unit KV-LE20 Supported Not supported 7-132
Temperature Control Unit KV-
Supported Not supported 7-136
TF40
Usable when KV-700 is
Online editing function Not usable 7-149
selected
1 word/2 word specification
Simulator break conditions 1 word specification only 8-18
selection

„ About Changes and Additional Functions in KV BUILDER Ver.3.5

Item KV BUILDER Ver.3.5 KV BUILDER Ver.3 See Page
Multi comment window Supported Not supported 6-111
Instruction words/operand
Supported Not supported 6-130
history function during search
Detailed explanation of verify
Supported Not supported 7-42
function
Addition of printing of program
Supported Not supported 6-166
name
Positioning Unit KV-
—
H20S/H40S
Positioning Unit pack
Supported Not supported 9-6
instruction
Positioning Unit simple
9-13
setup

„ About Changes and Additional Functions in KV BUILDER Ver.4.0

Item KV BUILDER Ver.4.0 KV BUILDER Ver.3.5 See Page
Positioning Unit KV-H20G Supported Supported (Ver.3.52) —
KV-P16 series panel editing
function Supported Not supported —
Panel Editor
Loopback ladder auto-
Supported Not supported *
insertion function
* About the loopback automatic insertion function
The loopback automatic insertion function can be used by the following methods:
• A loopback is automatically set when a contact, bit contact or compare contact instruction is
entered at the right edge, and each of these instructions is entered.
• A loopback is automatically inserted at the cursor position if {Edit} → {Insert loopback ladder}
(CTRL key + SHIFT key + F8) is selected.

1-19
 1-4 Installing the Software

1 1-4 Installing the Software

This section describes how to install KV BUILDER on the PC's hard disk.
PREPARATIONS

Preparing for Installation

Check the following before you start to install KV BUILDER.

Note: We recommend backing up the KV BUILDER master disk CD-ROM in

case it is damaged.

„ Free space on hard disk

KV BUILDER can be installed only on hard disks with at least 60MBytes of free
space at the directory where it is to be installed. If there is not enough free space,
clean up the hard disk so that there is at least 80MBytes of space.

„ Windows environment and installation directory

KV BUILDER runs on Windows, and is installed from Windows.
Before you install KV BUILDER, make sure that Windows 98/98SE/Me/2000/XP
or Windows NT4.0 is installed on the PC you are using, and that the OS is
functioning properly.

Note: KV BUILDER does not run on Windows 3.1. Use Windows 98 or later as
the OS.

„ USB (USB port)

To transfer ladder programs or other information to the KV-700 CPU Unit or use
the monitor functions via the USB port on the PC, the USB port on the PC must
be enabled for use. For details on how to set the USB port, refer to the manual
for the PC you are using.

„ RS-232C (serial port)

To transfer ladder programs or other information to the KV-700 CPU Unit, KZ-
300/350 CPU Unit, or KV-10/16/24/40 Basic Unit or use the monitor functions via
the RS-232C port on the PC, the RS-232C (serial port) on the PC must be
enabled for use. For details on how to set the USB port, refer to the manual for
the PC you are using.

Precautions in Windows 2000/XP

„ User rights
Set access rights as follows when KV BUILDER is installed on the standard
folder (C:\Program files\Keyence\KVBE\):

• Assign "Power User" rights or higher to users using KV BUILDER.

1-20
 1-4 Installing the Software

Installing KV BUILDER 1
The following describes how to install KV BUILDER taking the following drive

PREPARATIONS
configuration as an example and assuming that a DOS/V machine is to be used as
the PC.

C drive: Hard disk drive

E drive: CD-ROM drive

Normally, when an NEC PC-9800 series machine is used, the B drive is the floppy
disk drive and the A drive is the hard disk drive. Specify the drive according to the
operating environment.

1 Turn the PC ON, and boot up Windows.

Applications that are already started up may shut down.

Note: When installing KV BUILDER on Windows 2000/XP, log in as a user with

"Power User" rights or higher.

2 Insert the KV BUILDER master disk into the CD-ROM drive on the PC.

3 Select "Run" from the Start menu.

The Run dialog box is displayed.

4 Enter "e:\setup" and click

the "OK" button.
This starts the Installer.

5 Click the "Next" button.

To cancel installation, click
the "Cancel" button.

1-21
 1-4 Installing the Software

1 6 Enter your name and

name of company, and
click the "Next" button.
PREPARATIONS

7 Check the directory to

which KV BUILDER is to
be installed, and click the
"Next" button.
If you continue the
installation without changing
the installation directory, KV
BUILDER will be installed to
"C:\Program
Files\KEYENCE\KVBE\". To
change the installation
directory, click the "Browse"
button, and specify the drive
name and folder.

8 Click the "Next" button.

9 Click the "Next" button.

This starts the installation.

1-22
 1-4 Installing the Software

10 Click the "Next" button. 1

PREPARATIONS
This completes installation of KV BUILDER.

1-23
 1-4 Installing the Software

1 Uninstalling KV BUILDER
The following procedure describes how to uninstall KV BUILDER when it is no
PREPARATIONS

longer required.

1 Turn the PC ON, and boot up Windows.

Note: When uninstalling KV BUILDER on Windows 2000/XP, log in as a user with
administrator rights.

2 Select {Settings} {Control Panel} in order from the Start menu.

The Control Panel is displayed.

3 Double-click the
Add/Remove programs
icon.
The Add/Remove
Programs Properties
dialog box is displayed.

4 Select [KV BUILDER [Eng]], and click the "Add/Remove" button or

"Change/Remove" button (in the case of Windows 2000).
The confirmation message is displayed.

Windows 98 Windows 2000 Windows XP

5 Click the "Yes" button.

This deletes KV BUILDER.

1-24
 1-5 Installing the USB Driver

1-5 Installing the USB Driver 1

The USB driver must be installed on the PC to connect the PC to the KV-700 via the

PREPARATIONS
USB interface. This section describes how to install the USB driver.

Installing on Windows 98/98SE

Connect the KV-700 to the PC on which Windows 98/98SE is running. The USB
driver for KV-700 must be installed on the PC only when the KV-700 is connected to
the PC for the first time. The USB driver need not be connected from the second
connection onwards as the KV-700 is automatically recognized.

Note: Before you install the USB driver, install KV BUILDER.

"1-4 Installing the Software" page 1-19

When installing the USB driver for the first time.

1 Turn the PC ON, and boot up Windows.

2 Turn the KV-700 ON.

3 Connect the USB cable B (square) connector to the USB connector on

the PC.

4 Connect the USB cable A (elongated) connector to the USB port on the
KV-700.
The KV-700 is automatically recognized, and the Add New Hardware Wizard
dialog box is displayed.

5 Click the "Next" button.

6 Select the "Search for a better driver

than the one your device is using now.
(Recommended)" radio button, and
click the "Next" button.

1-25
 1-5 Installing the USB Driver

1 7 Mark only the "Specify a location" check box.

8
PREPARATIONS

Enter "C:\Program
Files\KEYENCE\KVBE" and click the
"Next" button.

Note: "C:\Program Files\KEYENCE\KVBE" in this procedure is the directory

where KV BUILDER is installed. Rewrite this directory according to your
operating environment.

9 Click the "Next" button.

This starts installation of the USB driver.

10 Click the "Finish" button.

This completes installation of the KV-700 USB driver. From the second time that
Windows is booted up, the USB driver need not be installed as the KV-700 is
automatically recognized. KV-700 can be used as it is.

1-26
 1-5 Installing the USB Driver

Updating the USB driver pre-installed in Ver.1 1

PREPARATIONS
1 Enable the USB connection on the KV-700.

2 Select [Settings] [Control Panel] in order from the Start menu.

The Control Panel is displayed.

3 Double-click the system icon.

System Properties is displayed.

4 Click the Device Manager tab.

5 Select the KV-700 driver under [Universal Serial Bus Controllers].

6 Click the [Properties] button.

This displays the KV-700 properties.

7 Click the Driver tab.

1-27
 1-5 Installing the USB Driver

1 8 Click the "Update Driver" button.

This displays the device driver upgrade wizard.
PREPARATIONS

9 Click the "Next" button.

10 Select the "Display a list of all drivers in a specific location, so you can
select the driver you want" radio button, and click the "Next" button.

1-28
 1-5 Installing the USB Driver

11 Click the "Have Disk" button. 1

PREPARATIONS
12 Click the "Browse" button.

13 Check the directory to which KV BUILDER is to be installed, and click the

"OK" button.

Note: Normally, KV BUILDER is installed in "C:\Program

Files\KEYENCE\KVBE".

14 Click the "OK" button.

1-29
 1-5 Installing the USB Driver

1 15 Click the "Next" button.

PREPARATIONS

16 Click the "Next" button.

17 Click the "Finish" button.

This completes installation of the KV-700 USB driver.

1-30
 1-5 Installing the USB Driver

Installing on Windows Me 1
Connect the KV-700 to the PC on which Windows Me is running. The USB driver for

PREPARATIONS
KV-700 must be installed on the PC only when the KV-700 is connected to the PC
for the first time. The USB driver need not be connected from the second connection
onwards as the KV-700 is automatically recognized.

Note: Before you install the USB driver, install KV BUILDER.

"1-4 Installing the Software" page 1-19

When installing the USB driver for the first time.

1 Turn the PC ON, and boot up Windows.

2 Turn the KV-700 ON.

3 Connect the USB cable B (square) connector to the USB connector on

the KV-700.

4 Connect the USB cable A (elongated) connector to the USB port on the
PC.
The KV-700 is automatically recognized, and the Add New Hardware Wizard
dialog box is displayed.

5 Select the "Automatic search for

better driver (Recommended)"
radio button, and click the
"Next" button.

6 Mark only the "Specify a location" check box.

7 Enter "C:\Program
Files\KEYENCE\KVBE" and click
the "Next" button.

Note: "C:\Program Files\KEYENCE\KVBE" in this procedure is the directory

where KV BUILDER is installed. Rewrite this directory according to your
operating environment.

1-31
 1-5 Installing the USB Driver

1 8 Click the "Next" button.

This starts installation of the USB
PREPARATIONS

driver.

9 Click the "Finish" button.

This completes installation of the KV-700 USB driver. From the second time that
Windows is booted up, the USB driver need not be installed as the KV-700 is
automatically recognized. KV-700 can be used as it is.

Updating the USB driver pre-installed in Ver.1

1 Enable the USB connection on the KV-700.

2 Select [Settings] [Control Panel] in order from the Start menu.

The Control Panel is displayed.

3 Double-click the system icon.

System Properties is displayed.

4 Click the Device Manager tab.

1-32
 1-5 Installing the USB Driver

5 Select the KV-700 driver under [Universal Serial Bus Controllers]. 1

PREPARATIONS
6 Click the "Properties" button.
This displays the KV-700 properties.

7 Click the Driver tab.

8 Click the "Update Driver" button.

This displays the device driver upgrade wizard.

1-33
 1-5 Installing the USB Driver

1 9 Select the "Specify the

location of the driver
(Advanced)" radio
PREPARATIONS

button, and click the

"Next" button.

10 Mark only the [Specify

a location] checkbox,
and click the "Browse"
button.

Note: Make sure that only the [Specify a location] checkbox is marked. If you
proceed with the [Removable Media (Floppy, CD-ROM...)] checkbox
marked, the wrong driver will be installed, and operation is sometimes not
correctly performed.

11 Check the directory to which KV

BUILDER is to be installed, and
click the "OK" button.

Note: Normally, KV BUILDER is installed in "C:\Program

Files\KEYENCE\KVBE".

1-34
 1-5 Installing the USB Driver

12 Click the "Next" button. 1

PREPARATIONS
13 Select the "Updated driver (Recommended)" radio button. Make sure that
"KEYENCE KV-700 (USB)" is displayed, and then click the "Next" button.

14 Click the "Next" button.

15 Click the "Finish" button.

This completes installation of
the KV-700 USB driver.

1-35
 1-5 Installing the USB Driver

1 Installing on Windows 2000

Connect the KV-700 to the PC on which Windows 2000 is running. The USB driver
PREPARATIONS

for KV-700 must be installed on the PC only when the KV-700 is connected to the
PC for the first time. The USB driver need not be connected form the second
connection onwards as the KV-700 is automatically recognized.
The following describes the procedure for installing the driver for KV-700 for the first
time on Windows 2000.
The hardware must be detected before installing the USB driver for KV BUILDER.
Install the USB driver by the following procedure.

1 Boot up Windows 2000, and log on by a user such as Administrator who

has privileges for changing system settings.

2 Connect the PC and KV-700 by the USB ports using the USB cable.
The messages "New hardware is found." is displayed, and the Found New
Hardware Wizard is displayed.

3 Click the "Next" button.

4 Select the "Search for a suitable driver for my device (recommended)"

radio button, and click the "Next" button.

1-36
 1-5 Installing the USB Driver

5 Mark only the "Specify a location" checkbox, and click the "Next" button. 1

PREPARATIONS
6 Specify the directory in which KV BUILDER is installed, and click the
"Open" button.

Note: Normally, KV BUILDER is installed in "C:\Program

Files\KEYENCE\KVBE".

7 Click the "OK" button.

1-37
 1-5 Installing the USB Driver

1 8 Click the "Next" button.

This starts installation of the USB driver.
PREPARATIONS

Note: Sometimes the message "Could not find digital signature." and a dialog
box are displayed depending on the PC you are using. If this happens,
click the "OK" button to continue installation.

9 Click the "Finish" button.

This completes installation of the KV-700 USB driver.

1-38
 1-5 Installing the USB Driver

Installing on Windows XP 1
Connect the KV-700 to the PC on which Windows XP is running. The USB driver

PREPARATIONS
for KV-700 must be installed on the PC only when the KV-700 is connected to
the PC for the first time. The USB driver need not be installed from the second
connection onwards as the KV-700 is automatically recognized.
The following describes the procedure for installing the driver for KV-700 for the
first time on Windows XP.

The hardware must be detected before installing the USB driver for KV
BUILDER.

Install the USB driver by the following procedure.

1 Boot up Windows XP, and log on by a user such as Administrator who

has privileges for changing system settings.

2 Connect the PC and KV-700 by the USB ports using the USB cable.
The message "New hardware is found." is displayed, and the Found New
Hardware Wizard is displayed.

3 Select the "Install from a list or specific location (Advanced)" radio

button, and click the "Next" button.

1-39
 1-5 Installing the USB Driver

1 4 Select the "Search for the best driver in these locations" radio button,
and mark the "Include this location in the search" checkbox.
PREPARATIONS

Next, enter "C:\Program Files\Keyence\KVBE2", and click the "Next"

button.
Note: "C:\Program Files\Keyence\KVBE2" is located in the directory in which KV
BUILDER in installed. Change the directory according to your particular
environment requirements.

5 Click the "Continue Anyway" button.

This starts installation of the USB driver.

1-40
 1-5 Installing the USB Driver

6 Click the "Finish" button. 1

PREPARATIONS
This complete installation of the KV-700 USB driver.

1-41
 1-6 Precautions Upon Use

1 1-6 Precautions Upon Use

This section describes the precautions to follow when using KV BUILDER. Be sure
PREPARATIONS

to read this section.

Confirmation of personal computer settings

Before you start using a PC, first make sure that it has been set for use of the USB
or RS-232C interfaces. If these interfaces are not set, a communications error will
occur during Monitor operation, and the Monitor cannot be operated correctly.
For details on how to set use of the USB or RS-232C interfaces, refer to the manual
for the PC you are using.

When operating the Monitor

If the KV-10/16/24/40, KV-700 or KZ-300/350 is turned OFF or the connector cables
are disconnected while the Monitor is being operated, a communications error
occurs and the Monitor is forcibly ended. Do not do this until the Monitor has been
exited.

Using Monitor after making changes to ladder diagrams

When performing Monitor operations after making changes to ladder diagrams, be
sure to select "Convert→Move→Monitor" from Menu to transfer the ladder program
to the PLC.

Display resolution
Be sure to use a display having a resolution of 800 x 600 dots at 256 colors or more.
Also, use as large a display as possible for ease of operation. (1280 x 1024 dots or
more is recommended.)

Precautions when using USB

For a USB connection, directly connect to the USB port on the PC without
connecting via the USB hub. Communications may be interrupted if noise or other
factors cause unstable communications. If communications are interrupted, re-insert
the USB cable.
Also, attach a ferrite core to the cable in environments subject to considerable noise
or in unstable communications conditions.

1-42
 1-7 Basic Operations

1-7 Basic Operations 1

This section describes the programming flow, modes, how to start up and exit the

PREPARATIONS
software, and other basic information you should know before you start to use KV
BUILDER for actual programming.

Programming flow and modes

KV BUILDER has four modes: Unit Editor, Editor, Monitor and Simulator. The
following shows the procedure to follow in actual programming, the modes used for
each procedure, and the main functions available in each mode.

1 Configuring the system Create the system configuration based

upon the design diagrams.

Unit Editor
• Save and read unit information files. • Set the KL and QL addresses.
• Assign units. • Convert the ladder programs for use on KZ-
• Set unit details. 300/350.
• Print the unit configuration diagram.

Create ladder diagrams based upon the

2 Creating ladder diagrams design diagrams that instruct how the PLC
should be operated.

Editor
• Save and read ladder programs. • UNDO function
• Save and read mnemonic lists and • Jump
comments. • Search for instructions/operands.
• Enter and delete symbols, and enter and • Replace operands.
delete connecting lines. • Convert NO/NC contacts.
• Insert and delete rungs. • Edit list.
• Move and copy ladders. • Display operating status of devices.
• Enter device/rung comments. • Set auto-save.
• Edit labels. • Print ladder program.
• Change screen display color.

1-43
 1-7 Basic Operations

1
3 Converting ladder diagrams
PREPARATIONS

Convert the ladder diagrams you have created to machine code so that they can be read by KV-
10/16/24/40, KV-700 and KZ-300/350. Ladder programs are automatically converted when the
Simulator is started up (only when "Convert→Move→Monitor" is selected). However, conversion
only is also possible.

Editor
Select the ladder program when shifting to "Move program to PLC→Monitor".
Select and convert the ladder program when shifting to Simulator.
Convert.

4 Debugging programs
Read the machine code created by Editor, and check the operating status such as changes of
devices. This allows you to detect locations that will result in an error so that you can rewrite the
ladder program before actual operation.
Use the Simulator to simulate a KV-10/16/24/40, KV-700 or KZ-300/350 connected state for
debugging the ladder program. Use the Monitor for actually connecting to a KV-10/16/24/40,
KV-700 or KZ-300/350 to write the ladder program for debugging.
Details of how to use the Ladder Monitor, Batch Monitor and Registration Monitor that are used
to display the operating status of the devices, how to set current value/setting value/attribute
from the dialog bar, and printing the Registration Monitor are the same in the Simulator and
Monitors (excluding some items).
When a CPU Unit is not connected When a CPU Unit is connected
Simulator Monitor
Set break conditions. Set serial port.
Set wait time. Set USB port (KV-700 only).
Set scan time and other settings. Start and stop Monitor.
Execute continuous scan/single scan. Set PLC mode.
Execute continuous step/reverse Prohibit refreshing of inputs.
continuous step/single step/reverse Prohibit output.
single step. Move program. (The program is moved and
Change time chart size. the Monitor is shifted to when Menu is
Display mnemonic list. selected from Editor and executed.)
Search device. Search devices.
Unit Monitor (KV-700 only)
High-speed Time Chart Monitor (KV-700
only)
Online editing (KV-700 only)

Items common to Simulator and Monitor

Save and read Ladder Monitor/Batch Monitor/Registration Monitor.
Display operating status of Ladder Monitor/Batch Monitor/Registration Monitor.
Display time chart (on Registration Monitor).
Set current value/setting value/attribute.
Print Registration Monitor.

1-44
 1-7 Basic Operations

1
5 Debugging

PREPARATIONS
in ladder diagrams and transferring
programs
In addition to debugging by Monitor or Simulator, correct and modify ladder diagrams in the
Editor. You can also read the program (machine code) that have been transferred to the Basic
Unit or CPU Unit, and display the ladder diagrams.

Editor
When all debugging has finally ended, and a normal working program has been made, transfer
and write the program (machine code) that you have created again to KV-10/16/24/40, KV-700
or KZ-300/350.

Starting Up and Exiting KV BUILDER

The following describes how to start up and exit KV BUILDER.

Starting Up KV BUILDER
The following describes how to start up KV BUILDER.

1 Select {Program} {KEYENCE KV BUILDER} {KV BUILDER

[English]} from the Start menu.
This starts up KV BUILDER.

Other procedure
Click the icon.

[Tip]
Display of the title screen can be omitted at startup.
"Setting Animation of Title Screen" page 6-175

1-45
 1-7 Basic Operations

1 Exiting KV BUILDER
The following describes how to exit KV BUILDER.
PREPARATIONS

1 Select {File} {Exit} from the Editor menu.

Other procedure
• Press the Alt + F4 keys.
• Click the button at the right edge of the title
bar.

About Screens
Mode windows
The screens for each of the KV BUILDER modes are interlinked as follows:

The name and functions of each window are described on the following pages:
Editor "Chapter 6, EDITOR" (page 6-1)
Monitor "Chapter 7, MONITOR" (page 7-1)
Simulator "Chapter 8, SIMULATOR" (page 8-1)

1-46
 1-7 Basic Operations

Current window 1
The active or currently selected window is called the "current window."

PREPARATIONS
To select the window to work in when two or more windows are opened in the
screen for each mode, perform either of the following. (Normally, the topmost title
bar indicates the current window.)

Other procedure
• Click the title bar of the window you want to specify as the current window.
• Select {Window} from Menu, and select the title of the window you want to
specify as the current window.

1-47
 1-7 Basic Operations

1 Mouse and keyboard operations

All KV BUILDER operations excluding text entry can be performed using the mouse,
making ladder programming and debugging more efficient. Operations can be
PREPARATIONS

proceeded with even more efficiently by using keyboard operations (short-cut keys)
together with mouse operations.
How to execute functions (instructions)
Operations on KV BUILDER can be executed quickly by one-touch operation as
frequently used functions are assigned to toolbars and function keys. Functions can
be quickly executed by using short-cut keys or the short-cut menu that is displayed
by clicking the right mouse button.
[Tip]
• In this manual, menus, buttons and keys that are used for each function can be
seen at a glance as they are displayed at the right edge of each title.
• Short-cut keys are displayed at the right edge of menus in the software.
[Example]
There are three ways of entering connecting lines.
„ By pressing keys
F8 , / : Draws a vertical connecting line downwards from the cursor
position.
F9 , : Draws a horizontal connecting line rightwards from the cursor
position.
Alt + : Draws a connecting line to the top/bottom/left/right according
to the arrow key you press.
Ctrl + Tab , Alt + : Draws a connecting line from the cursor position to the end of
the rung.

„ By clicking icons
: Draws a vertical connecting line downwards from the cursor position.
: Draws a horizontal connecting line rightwards from the cursor position.

„ By using the mouse and arrow keys in the Connecting Line Edit mode
In this mode, connecting lines can be drawn using the mouse and arrow keys.
Set the Connecting Line Edit mode as follows.
Perform the same to return to the normal Edit mode from the Connecting Line Edit
mode.

1 Right click on the ladder

program window, and
select {Edit connecting
line} from the pop-up
menu.

Other procedure
• Select {Edit} {Edit connecting line}
from Menu.
• Press the Ctrl + K keys.
• Press the ¥ key.

As described above, two or more ways of performing an operation are provided.

Choose the method most suited to how you program to proceed efficiently with
work.

1-48
 1-7 Basic Operations

Basic mouse operations 1

The following briefly describes how to use the mouse. Only users unfamiliar with

PREPARATIONS
Windows operations need read this item.

What is "clicking?"
„ Left double-click
This is the operation of quickly pressing the
left mouse button continuously two times in a
row. It is used, for example, for opening the
Instruction Entry dialog box on the ladder
program window. This manual refers to this
operation simply as "double-click."

„ Left click
This is the operation of pressing the left
mouse button once. It is used, for example,
for pressing buttons or for moving the cursor
to the entry location in text entry boxes. This
manual refers to this operation simply as
"click."
„ Right click
This is the operation of pressing the right mouse
button once. It is used for displaying the short cut
menu matched to the current operating
circumstances to facilitate and speed up tasks.
For example, if you right click on the ladder
program menu, "Cut", "Copy", "Paste", "Edit
connecting line" and other functions (instructions)
can be executed.

What is "dragging-and-dropping?"
This operation involves the following. Press the left mouse button at the first position
for selecting something, move the mouse cursor with the button held down, and
release the button at the final position. Dragging-and-dropping is used for selecting
a range or drawing connecting lines. Bringing a selected object onto another
position or window and releasing the button is called "dropping." Dropping is used
for moving and copying, or registering something. With KV BUILDER, devices can
be registered by selecting the device in the Ladder Monitor and dragging-and-
dropping the selected device in Registration Monitor or Batch Monitor.

1-49
 1-7 Basic Operations

1 Differences in Key Operations According to Model

The tops of keys differ between PC-9800 series and DOS/V machines (106 or 109
PREPARATIONS

Japanese keyboards). This manual uses the DOS/V keytops in its descriptions. So,
when you are using an NEC PC-9800 machine, take the differences shown the
following table into consideration.

106/109 Japanese language OADG

NEC PC-9800 series, etc.
specifications
Esc ESC
Tab TAB
BackSpace BS
Insert INS
Delete DEL
End HELP
HOME
Home CLR
PageDown ROLL UP
PageUp ROLL DOWN
Ctrl + Pause STOP
Enter
Shift SHIFT
Alt GRPH
F1 to F10 f•1 to f•10

Help
KV BUILDER is provided with on-line help.
If you are unsure of an operation, you can display the Help window either by clicking
the button on the toolbar, or by selecting {Help} on the menu bar.

Operation help window Instruction help window

1-50
Chapter 2
QUICK GUIDE TO FUNCTIONS
This chapter briefly introduces the functions of KV BUILDER.

2-1 Quick Guide........................................................................ 2-2

 2-1 Quick Guide

2-1 Quick Guide

2 Example Illustration Function

Name of Function
and Reference Page
QUICK GUIDE TO FUNCTIONS

Saving to Memory
Ladder programs and logging data Card
can be saved to Memory Card.
Page 4-1

Setting by DIP switches on each unit

is no longer required. System Unit Editor
configuration diagrams are also Page 5-1
automatically generated.

KV/KZ-350→KV-700
Ladder software up to date is ladder conversion
upwardly compatible. Page 5-46
Page 6-152

The user-friendly designed interface

with guide allows even first-time users
of KV BUILDER to easily create
ladder programs. The substantial Instruction Palette
instruction guide allows you to create Page 6-50
ladder programs even faster, and
unfamiliar instructions can be utilized
more and more.

Instructions can be selected visually,

and dragged-and-dropped to the Instruction palette
desired entry location, enabling ladder
Drag-and- Page 6-50
programs to be created as if your
drop
were drawing them.

Ladder programs you have created

can be registered and pasted as Circuit Library
desired, allowing efficient creation of Page 6-96
ladder programs.
Copy

2-2
 2-1 Quick Guide

Name of Function
Example Illustration Function
and Reference Page

Comments from other ladder Reading Other File 2

programs can be re-used, improving Comments

QUICK GUIDE TO FUNCTIONS

work efficiency. Page 6-112

The range of device comments to be

transferred to the PLC can be Setting Comment
automatically set. Rung comments Transfer
can also be transferred to the KV-700 Page 6-121
CPU unit.

Search for instructions or relay Nos. in

an instance on the ladder program. Search
The ladder index search function
drastically improves the searchability Page 6-130
of circuit blocks.

Spare relays are displayed as an at-

a-glance list, ensuring effective use of Operating Status List
devices and checking of careless Page 6-137
mistakes.

Password Functions
Secure password functions are
Page 6-146
incorporated.

Editing Positioning
Parameters
Though easy-to-operate, the software
incorporates professional positioning Page 6-147
functions. Positioning parameters can Positioning
be prepared by selecting from a list. Instructions
Page 6-71

2-3
 2-1 Quick Guide

Name of Function
Example Illustration Function
and Reference Page
USB transfer enables transfer of data
much faster that conventional serial
2 data transfer, enabling the smooth
Setting the USB Port
Page 7-20
transfer of ladder programs and
monitoring of device operation.
QUICK GUIDE TO FUNCTIONS

You can correct and modify ladder Online editing

programs online while monitoring
Page 7-149
them.

Setting the Calendar

The PLC is equipped with a calendar Timer
timer.
Page 7-70

Registration Monitor
You can monitor the current values Page 7-84
and setting values of timers and Page 8-59
counters as a list while monitoring
execution of the ladder program, Batch Monitor
enabling an improved debugging Page 7-73
environment. Page 8-48

The built-in high-speed Timer Chart High-speed Timer

Monitor function facilities the checking Chart Monitor
of even detailed sensor inputs. Page 7-106

Before you configure units into the

control panel or instrumentation, you Simulator Functions
can debug ladder programs in Page 8-1
software.

2-4
Chapter 3
MANAGING PROJECTS
This chapter describes batch management of data files for each ladder
system using project folders, and management of projects.

3-1 Managing Projects ............................................................. 3-2

 3-1 Managing Projects

3-1 Managing Projects

This section describes how to manage projects by using project folders to batch
manage data files according to each ladder system.

About project folders

3 Various data files exist on KV BUILDER. Project folders are used to batch manage
data files according to each ladder system.
MANAGING PROJECTS

A single project folder contains data for the following support tools:
• KV BUILDER
• Unit Editor
• CPU Positioning Parameter Editor
• MOTION BUILDER (Japanese)/Positioning Unit/Simple Setup
• PROTOCOL BUILDER (Japanese)

When a project is created on KV BUILDER, the project folder and data files for KV
BUILDER are automatically created. The data for each of the other support tools
(Unit Editor, CPU Positioning Parameter Editor, MOTION BUILDER (Japanese) and
PROTOCOL BUILDER (Japanese)) is automatically created in the project folder
containing the ladder data that was active when the respective support tool was
created.

Note: Unit Editor, CPU Positioning Parameter Editor, Positioning Unit/Simple

Setup, MOTION BUILDER (Japanese) and PROTOCOL BUILDER
(Japanese) can be used only when "KV-700" or "KV-700+M" is selected in
the PLC setting.

Creating project folders

Project folders are created in the directory indicated below.

The project folder is generated inside sub-folder "PROJECT" at the directory in

which KV BUILDER is installed.
The default installation directory is as follows:

C:\Program Files\KEYENCE\KVBE\PROJECT

3-2
 3-1 Managing Projects

[Example]
When the project folder "USER" has been created

The directory of the project folder "USER" is as follows:

C:\Program Files\KEYENCE\KVB\PROJECT\USER
3

MANAGING PROJECTS
and, data files for KV BUILDER and other user data files are stored under the
folder "USER".

„ Structure of folders
In this example, let's assume that the project folder "USER" has been created.
The structure of the folder is as follows:

[Tip]
Hatched areas are fixed and predetermined folders. As the default, project
folders are created under folders.

3-3
 3-1 Managing Projects

User Data Files

User data files such as data files for KV BUILDER are stored in the project folder.
Data files for KV BUILDER
*.LDC : Ladder program source file
*.RCM : Device comment 1 file

3 *.CM2
*.CM3
: Device comment 2 file
: Device comment 3 file
*.LVL : Label file
MANAGING PROJECTS

*.ERR : Error file (This file is generated when a conversion error

occurs.)
*.MNM : Mnemonic list file (This file is generated when conversion is
performed.)
*.COD : Code file (This file is generated when conversion is performed.)
*.KRE : Registration Monitor information file (This file is generated
when the Registration Monitor window is saved.)
*.KAL : Batch Monitor information file (This file is generated when the
Batch Monitor window is saved.)
*.KDV : Batch Change information file (This file is generated when the
Batch Change window is saved.)
*.INT : Ladder program comment transfer range setup file
*.KEN : MDI setup file (This file is generated when Monitor or Simulator
is executed.
UnitSet.inf : Unit setup file
UnitSet2.inf : Unit setup 2 file
UnitSet3.inf : Unit setup 3 file
CpuMbPrm.inf : CPU positioning parameter setup file
UserInfo.txt : User information file (Created automatically when user
information is entered.)
*.PNL : KV-P Panel Editor file
(only when KV-P series Panel Editor is used)
Positioning Unit Simple Setup/data file for MOTION BUILDER (Japanese)
*.MB2 : Files for Positioning Unit

Data file for PROTOCOL BUILDER (Japanese)

*.PB2 : Parameter files for KV-L20 PROTOCOL BUILDER (Japanese)
Note: Hatched files are generated only when "KV-700" or "KV-700+M" is
selected in the PLC setting.

[Tip]
• Files for MOTION BUILDER (Japanese) and PROTOCOL BUILDER
(Japanese) in the project folder can be appended separate file names.
"MOTION BUILDER User's Manual (Japanese)"
"PROTOCOL BUILDER User's Manual (Japanese)"
• Data files for KV BUILDER are created automatically under the same file name
as the project folder name.
• If the project folder (folder "USER" in the example on page 3-3) is copied when
the ladder program file is copied, all programs in the project folder are copied.
"Copying Projects" page 3-6

3-4
 3-1 Managing Projects

Project Folder File Operations

The following describes the operations that can be performed on project folders
from the Select File dialog box.

Creating new projects

Create a new project and create the ladder program for that project.
3
For details on how to create new projects, see "6-6 File Management" (page 6-27).

MANAGING PROJECTS
Changing project names
To change a project name, click the project name and enter the new name.

1 Select {File (F)} {Open ladder (O)}.

The Open dialog box opens.

Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + O keys.

2 Select the folder whose project name is to be changed, and click the right
mouse button.
The pop-up menu is displayed.

3 Select "Rename" and enter the new file name.

This changes the project name.

Note: Only the name of the project folder can be changed when "changing
project names." The data in the project folder is not changed even if its
name is changed. To also change the names of data files in the project
folder, use "Save ladder diagram as..." in the Edit screen.
"Saving Files" page 6-34

3-5
 3-1 Managing Projects

Deleting projects
To delete a project, either select the name of the project, and press the Delete key, or
click the right mouse button, and select "Delete" from the pop-up menu.
1 Select {File (F)} {Open ladder (O)}.
The Open dialog box opens.
Other procedure
3 • Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + O keys.
MANAGING PROJECTS

2 Click to Select the folder containing the project to be deleted.

3 Click the right mouse button, and select "Delete" from

the pop-up menu.
This deletes the project.
Other procedure
Press the Delete key.

Note: When you delete a project folder, all of the data in that project folder is
deleted.
Copying projects
To copy a project, either select the name of the project, press the Ctrl + C keys to
copy and the Ctrl + V keys to paste the project, or click the right mouse button, and
select "Copy" followed by "Paste" from the pop-up menu.
1 Select {File (F)} {Open ladder (O)}.
The Open dialog box opens.
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + O keys.

2 Select the folder containing the project to be copied.

3 Click the right mouse button, and select "Copy" from

the pop-up menu.
The project is copied to the Clipboard.
Other procedure
Press the Ctrl + C keys.

4 Move to the drive or folder at the copy destination,

click the right mouse button, and select "Paste" from
the pop-up menu.
The project copied to the Clipboard is pasted to the drive
or folder.
Other procedure
Press the Ctrl + V keys.

3-6
Chapter 4
MEMORY CARD
This chapter describes how to transfer ladder diagrams, comments, and other
unit setup information to the PLC via the Memory Card.

4-1 Operations Possible on the Memory Card ...................... 4-2

4-2 Enabling Use of Memory Cards........................................ 4-3

4-3 Managing Data on Memory Cards ...................................4-11

 4-1 Operations Possible on the Memory Card

4-1 Operations Possible on the Memory Card

This section describes operations possible on the Memory Card.

Operations Possible on the Memory Card

With the KV-700 series, Memory Cards can be used to transfer ladder programs,
comments, and various unit setup information. Also, ladder programs can be
transferred, or device values saved and read using only Memory Cards even
without KV BUILDER.

4
„ Examples of Memory Card use
MEMORY CARD

• Ladder programs can be easily maintained. Memory Cards support the easy
maintenance of devices and transfer of ladder data resulting from changes
made to specifications.

Save to Memory Card. Read ladder

program from
Memory Card.
A special terminal is not
required.

• Device values can be easily logged. Data can be easily totalized on

spreadsheet software and used for preparing materials.

Save data log. Get log from

Memory Card.
Use data log for
totalizing or preparing
materials on PC.

4-2
 4-2 Enabling Use of Memory Cards

4-2 Enabling Use of Memory Cards

This section describes the procedure for enabling use of Memory Cards.

To Use Memory Card

A Memory Card and an adapter or Card Reader for reading Memory Cards are
required. Be sure to use OP-42137 specified by KEYENCE CORPORATION as the
Memory Card. Operation by any other type of Memory Card is not assured.

Type Multimedia card 4

Storage device Flash ROM

MEMORY CARD
Memory capacity 16MBytes
Max. number of rewrites 300,000
Operating temperature -25 to +85°C
Storage temperature -40 to +85°C

• Data saved on Memory Cards may become lost in the following instances. Note
that KEYENCE CORPORATION cannot assume any liability for lost data
recorded on Memory Cards.
• When the user or a third party has used a Memory Card in the wrong way
• When a Memory Card has been subjected to static electricity or electrical noise
• When a Memory Card has been removed or other equipment has been turned
OFF during accessing of the Memory Card for saving or deleting data
• We recommend saving important data to MO disk, floppy disk or other storage
media, and keeping backups at all times.

Required hardware
How the adapter or Card Reader is connected varies according to whether or not
the PC is equipped with a PCMCIA slot or USB port.

„ When the PC is equipped with a PCMCIA slot (e.g. laptop PC)

Attach the Memory Card to the Card Adapter, and insert the Card Adapter into
the PCMCIA slot on the PC.

PC equipped with Card Adapter Memory Card

PCMCIA slot BN-SDAAP3 OP-42137

The following hardware is required:

• PC equipped with a PCMCIA slot
• Card Adapter (BN-SDAAP3)
• Memory Card (OP-42137)

4-3
 4-2 Enabling Use of Memory Cards

[Tip]
Memory Card Adapter
This unit is used for inserting the Memory Card (OP-42137) into the PC card slot
on the PC or Card Reader/Writer. When the Memory Card Adapter BN-SDAAP3
is used, Memory Cards can be treated as PCM-CIA2.1/JEIDA4.2 compliant PC
cards (TypeII).
For details on the Memory Card Adapter, refer to the user's manual provided with
the Memory Card Adapter.

4
MEMORY CARD

Model No. Compatible Machines Contact

Matsushita Electric Industries
NEC PC-9821 series, PC-9821
BN-SDAAP3 /Matsushita Battery Industries
NX series, DOS/V PC
Tel.: 06-6991-11410

4-4
 4-2 Enabling Use of Memory Cards

When the PC is equipped with a USB port

Connect the USB Card Reader/Writer to the USB port on the PC. Then, attach the
Memory Card to the USB Card Reader/Writer.

Note: Only PCs pre-installed with Windows 98/98SE/Me/2000/XP can be used.

MEMORY CARD
PC supporting USB Memory Card
Card Reader/Writer
interface OP-42137

The following hardware is required:

• PC (pre-installed with Windows 98/98SE/Me/2000/XP)
• USB Card Reader/Writer
• Memory Card (OP-42137)

[Tip]
USB Card Reader/Writer
This unit is for reading data on Memory Card (OP-42137) on a PC equipped with
a USB port. This unit cannot be used on a PC not equipped with a USB port.
For details on USB Card Reader for multimedia cards, refer to the user's manual
provided with the USB Card Reader.

Model No. Compatible Machines Contact

PC supporting the USB interface Matsushita Electric Industries
BN-SDCAP3 and pre-installed with Windows /Matsushita Battery Industries
98/98SE/Me/2000/XP Tel.: 06-6991-1141

4-5
 4-2 Enabling Use of Memory Cards

Using the PCMCIA card slot for connecting Memory Cards

Before you connect Memory Cards to the PCMCIA card slot, make sure that the
PCMCIA card slot is functioning properly.

Checking operation of the PCMCIA card slot

Make sure that the PCMCIA card slot is functioning properly. Though the following
describes an example of checking operation in Windows 98, operation can be
checked in the same way in Windows 98SE and Windows Me. The screens that are
displayed in these OSs may differ.
How you check operation differs when you are using Windows 2000/XP. If you are
4 running KV BUILDER on Windows 2000/XP, see "Checking operation on Windows
2000/XP" (page 4-7).
MEMORY CARD

„ Checking operation on Windows 98/98SE/Me

1 Select {Start} {Settings} {Control Panel}
in that order.
The Control Panel is displayed.

2 Double-click the
System icon.
The System Properties
dialog box is displayed.

3 Click the Device Manager tab to

display the connected devices,
and make sure that the PCMCIA
controller is displayed.

Note: The PCMCIA controller varies

according to the type of PC you
are using.

4-6
 4-2 Enabling Use of Memory Cards

„ Checking operation on Windows 2000/XP

1 Log into Windows as a user having Administrator rights.

2 Select {Start} {Settings}

{Control Panel} in that order.
The Control Panel is displayed.

MEMORY CARD
3 Double-click the System
icon.
The System Properties dialog
box is displayed.

4 Click the Device Manager tab to

display the connected devices, and
click the "Device Manager" button.
The Device Manager dialog box is
displayed.

5 Make sure that the PCMCIA

controller is displayed.

Note: The PCMCIA controller varies

according to the type of PC you
are using.

4-7
 4-2 Enabling Use of Memory Cards

Attaching the Memory Cards

Follow the procedure below to attach the Memory Cards.
1 Make sure that the PCMCIA card slot is functioning properly.
"Checking operation of the PCMCIA card slot" page 4-6
2 Attach the Memory Card to the Memory Card Adapter.

4
MEMORY CARD

Pay attention to the direction that the Memory Card is facing when you attach the
Memory Card to the Memory Card Adapter. If you try to force the Memory Card into
the Memory Card Adapter facing the wrong direction, you might damage the
Memory Card or the Memory Card Adapter.

3 Attach the Memory Card Adapter to the PCMCIA slot on the laptop PC or
Card Reader/Writer.
When you are using the Memory Card Adapter for the first time, the message
"New hardware is found." when you are running Windows 2000/XP, or the Add
New Hardware Wizard is displayed when you are running Windows 98. This
message or Wizard is not displayed from the second Memory Card attachment
onwards.
For details on how to use the Memory Card, refer to the user's manual
provided with the Memory Card Adapter.
Connect to laptop PC.

• For details on how to connect the Memory Card Adapter, refer to the user's
manual provided with the laptop PC or Card Reader/Writer.
• Pay attention to the direction that the Memory Card Adapter is facing when you
connect the Memory Card Adapter to the PCMCIA slot.
If you try to force the Memory Card into the PCMCIA slot facing the wrong
direction, you might damage the Memory Card Adapter or the PCMCIA slot.

4-8
 4-2 Enabling Use of Memory Cards

Using the USB Card Reader/Writer for connecting Memory Cards

Before you connect Memory Cards to the USB Card Reader/Writer, make sure that
the USB Card Reader/Writer is functioning properly.
[Tip]
For details on how to install the USB Card Reader/Writer, refer to the user's
manual provided with the USB Card Reader/Writer.
Checking operation of the USB Card Reader/Writer
Make sure that the USB Card Reader/Writer is functioning properly. Though the
following describes an example of checking operation in Windows 98, operation can
be checked in the same way in Windows 98SE and Windows Me. The screens that
are displayed in these OSs may differ. 4

MEMORY CARD
1 Select {Start} {Settings} {Control
Panel} in that order.
The Control Panel is displayed.

2 Double-click the
System icon.
The System Properties
dialog box is displayed.

3 Click the Device Manager tab to display the connected devices, and
make sure that USB Reader Writer for SD Memory Card is displayed.

4-9
 4-2 Enabling Use of Memory Cards

Attaching the Memory Card

Follow the procedure below to attach the Memory Card to the USB Card
Reader/Writer.

1 Make sure that the USB Card Reader/Writer is functioning properly.

"Checking operation of the USB Card Reader/Writer" page 4-9

2 Attach the Memory Card to the USB Card Reader/Writer.

4 Memory Card
Access lamp
MEMORY CARD

USB Reader/Writer

• Pay attention to the direction that the Memory Card is facing when you attach the
Memory Card to the USB Card Reader/Writer. If you try to force the Memory Card
into the USB Card Reader/Writer facing the wrong direction, you might damage
the Memory Card or the USB Card Reader/Writer.
• For details on how to attach the Memory Card to the USB Card Reader/Writer,
refer to the user's manual provided with the USB Card Reader/Writer.

4-10
 4-3 Managing Data on Memory Cards

4-3 Managing Data on Memory Cards

This section describes how to manage data on Memory Cards, and save or read
data to or from Memory Cards.

Managing Data on Memory Cards

„ Structure of folders
In this example, let's assume that the project folder "usr1" has been created. The
structure of the folder is as follows:
4

MEMORY CARD
Important: On Memory Cards, only one level can be created for folders. For this
reason, additional project folders cannot be created within project
folders.

[Tip]
• When saving ladder program files on the KV-700 CPU Unit access window, the
project folder "KVSAVE**" (** stands for any number) is automatically created
each time that a save is executed.
• When using the auto-load function on the KV-700 CPU Unit, provide
"autoload" as the name of the project folder when saving data.
"KV-700 Series User's Manual"

4-11
 4-3 Managing Data on Memory Cards

„ Usable file names and project folder names

File names and project folder names that can be used on Memory Cards are
subject to the following restrictions:

• Length of file names (project folder names)

8 characters
• Characters that can be used for file names (project folder names)
Only single-byte alphanumeric characters can be used. The following
4 characters cannot be used:
\ / . _ (space) * ? , " : ; < > = +
MEMORY CARD

• Maximum number of project folders

200

Note: Only single-byte alphanumeric characters can be used for file names and
project folder names. The following characters cannot be used:
\ / . _ (space) * ? , " : ; < > = +

„ Types and size of data that can be saved

The following table shows the maximum size and types of data that can be
saved to each project folder.

Data Type KV-700 KV-700+M

CPU Unit extended memory Not available Available
*1
Intermediate code file 16K-steps 32K-steps
Number of device comments 5,000 10,000
Changes according to number of units Changes according to number of
Unit setup information and unit type. units and unit type.
(max. 32,640 bytes) (max. 65,408 bytes)
DM 20,000 40,000
CM 4,000 4,000
Number of device files*2
R 9,600 9,600
CR 640 640
Changes according to file type Changes according to file type
Extender ZSH files
(max. 130,944 bytes) (max. 130,944 bytes)
*1 A single step in an intermediate code file is roughly five bytes.
*2 A single devices is roughly six bytes.

4-12
 4-3 Managing Data on Memory Cards

„ Maximum number of projects that can be saved to 16MByte Memory Cards

(OP-42137)
The following shows the maximum number of projects that can be saved to a
16MByte Memory Card (OP-42137) when the data per project is at maximum
size.
Without extended memory: Approx. 34 projects
With extended memory: Approx. 14 projects

„ Maximum number of project folders

4
The maximum number of project folders that can be created on a single Memory
Card is 200.

MEMORY CARD
Note: Only single-byte alphanumeric characters can be used for file names and
project folder names. The following characters cannot be used:
\ / . _ (space) * ? , " : ; < > = +

4-13
 4-3 Managing Data on Memory Cards

Data Stored on Memory Cards

The data stored on Memory Cards differs from the data that is created by selecting
"Save Ladder Diagram" or "Save Ladder Diagram As..." on KV BUILDER's menu to
save data. The same applies when saving data on PROTOCOL BUILDER
(Japanese) or MOTION BUILDER (Japanese).
When saving data to Memory Card, be sure to use "Write to Memory Card". Data
that was not saved using "Write to Memory Card" cannot be read on the KV-700
CPU Unit access window.

4 „ Types of files saved on Memory Card

MEMORY CARD

Model File Type File Name Software to Save File Under

*1
Ladder program †.ZCD
Device comment †.ZCT*1
Unit setup information †.ZLB*1
DM DM.ZDV
KV BUILDER CM CM.ZDV KV BUILDER
Device file
RLY R.ZDV
CR CR.ZDV
CPU positioning function CPUMB.ZSH
parameter file
PROTOCOL PB∗.ZSH*2 PROTOCOL BUILDER
BUILDER PROTOCOL BUILDER file
(∗=1A to 9B) (Japanese)
(Japanese)
MOTION MB∗.ZSH*2 MOTION BUILDER
BUILDER Positioning Unit parameter file
(∗=1 to 7) (Japanese)
(Japanese)
*1 "†" stands for same text name as project folder.
*2 File cannot be saved to Memory Card from CPU access window.
The content of the parameters set in the KV-BUILDER Simple Setup window are saved on KV-BUILDER.

"User Data Files" page 3-4

Note: Only single-byte alphanumeric characters can be used for file names and
project folder names. The following characters cannot be used:
\ / . _ (space) * ? , " : ; < > = +

4-14
 4-3 Managing Data on Memory Cards

Saving and Reading Data from KV BUILDER to Memory Card

File (F) Read Memory Card (M)
Write Memory Card (W)
Data can be saved to Memory Card from KV BUILDER and read from Memory
Card.
How data is saved or read differs according to the type of data.

Saving and reading ladder programs, device comments and unit setup information
Follow the procedure below to save or read ladder programs, device comments and
unit setup information. 4
1 Connect the Memory Card to the PC.

MEMORY CARD
"Attaching the Memory Card" pages 4-8, 4-10

2 Select {File (F)} {Read Memory Card (M)}

or {Write Memory Card (W)}.
The Memory Card dialog box is displayed.

Note: • {Read Memory Card} or {Write Memory Card} cannot be selected when
the PLC model setting for the currently active ladder program is not KV-
700 or KV-700+M.
• When you save device comments to Memory Card, you can select the
comment save range beforehand in the comment transfer setting.
"Setting Transfer of Comments" page 6-121

3 Specify the folder to save to or read from.

When saving new ladder program files to Memory Card on KV BUILDER, be
sure to create a new folder at the Write to Memory Card dialog box, and save
the ladder program file to that folder.

1Select the drive assigned to

Memory Card. Creates new folders.
The "New" button is not
displayed when reading data
from Memory Card.
2 The types of files saved in
Select the folder to save
data to. the currently selected folder
are displayed.

If you select an existing folder and save the ladder program file to that folder, the
data in the folder will be overwritten, and the previous data will be lost.

4-15
 4-3 Managing Data on Memory Cards

[Tip]
• To create a new folder and save data
to that folder, click the "New" button
and enter the folder name.
A new project folder is created.
• Data on Memory Cards is managed in project folder units.
• When using the auto-load function on the KV-700 CPU Unit, provide
"autoload" as the name of the project folder when saving data.
"KV-700 Series User's Manual"
4 • The types of files currently saved to the selected folder are displayed using the
following abbreviations in the Memory Card dialog box:
MEMORY CARD

UNIT: Unit setup information

PROG: Ladder program
CMT: Device comments
CPUM: CPU positioning function parameter file
DM: DM values
CM: CM values
R: Relay ON/OFF states
CR: Control relay ON/OFF states

4 Click the "OK" button.

This saves data to Memory Card or reads data from Memory Card.

4-16
 4-3 Managing Data on Memory Cards

Saving and reading DM/CM values, and relay and control relay ON/OFF states
DM/CM values, and relay and control relay ON/OFF states can be saved to Memory
Cards from monitors or read from Memory Cards.
Pay attention to the following points:
• Data on Memory Card is read from the Batch Change window.
• Data is saved to Memory Cards within the device range selected on the
Batch Change window.
• Only devices currently displayed on the Batch Change window are read.
• When reading two or more devices, display the respective Batch Change
window.
• Only DM/CM/R/CR data is saved to or read from Memory Card. Also, file
4
names are fixed to DM.ZDV, CM.ZDV, R.ZDV, and CR.ZDV.

MEMORY CARD
„ Saving data to Memory Card or reading data from Memory Card while on-
line (in monitoring state) with KV-700
Follow the procedure below to save data to Memory Card from a monitor or read
data from Memory Card.

1 Connect the Memory Card to the PC.

"Connecting the Memory Card" pages 4-8 and 4-10

2 Select
{Monitor/Simulator (M)}
{PLC Monitor (M)}
from Menu in the Editor.
The Monitor is displayed.

3 Select {File (F)} {Batch Change (H)} from Menu.

The Batch Change window is displayed.

Other procedure
Click the button.

[Tip]
Two or more Batch Change windows can be displayed simultaneously.

4 Select the device to be read from on the

dialog bar, and click the "Reg" button.
All of the selected devices are read to the Batch
Change window.

5 Enter the device range to be saved or

read from "Dev rng" in the Batch
Change window.

4-17
 4-3 Managing Data on Memory Cards

6 To save data to Memory Card, click the

"Rd PLC" button to read the data from
the PLC.

7 Click the "Wr MMC" button or "Rd

MMC" button on the Batch Change
window.
The Memory Card dialog box is displayed.

4 8 Specify the folder to save to or read from.

MEMORY CARD

1Select the drive assigned to

Memory Card. Creates new folders.
The "New" button is not
displayed when reading data
from Memory Card.
2 The types of files saved in
Select the folder to save
data to. the currently selected folder
are displayed.

[Tip]
• To create a new folder and save
data to that folder, click the "New"
button and enter the folder name.
A new project folder is created.
• The types of files currently saved to the selected folder are displayed using the
following abbreviations in the Memory Card dialog box:
UNIT: Unit setup information
PROG: Ladder program
CMT: Device comments
CPUM: CPU positioning function parameter file
DM: DM values
CM: CM values
R: Relay ON/OFF states
CR: Control relay ON/OFF states

4-18
 4-3 Managing Data on Memory Cards

9 Click the "OK" button.

This saves or reads the data to or from the Memory Card.
To write read data to the KV-700, click the "Wr PLC" button.
"7-13 Batch Change" page 7-139

„ Saving data to Memory Card or reading data from Memory Card while off-
line (not in monitoring state) with KV-700
Follow the procedure below to save or read data to or from Memory Cards in an
off-line state. 4
1

MEMORY CARD
Connect the Memory Card to the PC.
"Connecting the Memory Card" pages 4-8, 4-10

2 Select {Monitor/Simulator (M)} {Edit offline device (D)} from Menu in

the Editor.
The confirmation dialog box is displayed.

3 Click the "OK" button.

The device setup mode for the monitor is
started up.

4 Select {File (F)} {Batch Change (H)} from

Menu.
The Batch Change window is displayed.

Other procedure
Click the button.

[Tip]
Two or more Batch Change windows can be displayed simultaneously.

5 Select the device on the dialog bar, and

click the "Reg" button.
The selected device is displayed in the
Batch Change window.

4-19
 4-3 Managing Data on Memory Cards

6 To save data to Memory Card, write the value

to be saved to Memory Card at "Current
value".

7 Enter the device range to be saved or read at

"Dev rng" in the Batch Change window.

4
MEMORY CARD

8 Click the "Wr MMC" button or "Rd

MMC" button on the Batch Change
window.
The Memory Card dialog box is displayed.

9 Specify the folder to save to or read from.

1Select the drive assigned to

Memory Card. Creates new folders.
The "New" button is not
displayed when reading data
from Memory Card.
2 The types of files saved in
Select the folder to save
data to. the currently selected folder
are displayed.

[Tip]
• To create a new folder and save
data to that folder, click the "New"
button and enter the folder name.
A new project folder is created.
• The types of files currently saved to the selected folder are displayed using the
following abbreviations in the Memory Card dialog box:
UNIT: Unit setup information
PROG: Ladder program
CMT: Device comments
CPUM: CPU positioning function parameter file
DM: DM values
CM: CM values
R: Relay ON/OFF states
CR: Control relay ON/OFF states

4-20
 4-3 Managing Data on Memory Cards

10 Click the "OK" button.

This saves or reads the data to or from the Memory Card.
To write read data to the KV-700, execute the monitor to establish
communications with KV-700 and then click the "Wr PLC" button.
"Starting Monitors" page 7-66
"7-13 Batch Change" page 7-139

MEMORY CARD

4-21
Chapter 5
UNIT EDITOR
This chapter describes how to use the Unit Editor functions.

5-1 Outline of Unit Editor......................................................... 5-2

5-2 Table of Unit Editor Tool Bar Functions........................... 5-6

5-3 Table of Tool Bar Functions on Slave Device Setup Screen

............................................................................................. 5-7

5-4 Screen Menus..................................................................... 5-8

5-5 List of Menu Items in Slave Device Setup Screen ........ 5-12

5-6 Building Systems............................................................. 5-15

5-7 Names and Functions of Screen Parts .......................... 5-17

5-8 Basic Operation of Unit Editor........................................ 5-21

5-9 Unit Editor Operations..................................................... 5-24

5-10 Using the Slave Device Setup Screen............................ 5-49

5-11 Using Print Functions...................................................... 5-66

5-12 Environmental Settings................................................... 5-70

 5-1 Outline of Unit Editor

5-1 Outline of Unit Editor

This section describes an outline of Unit Editor and the cautions to follow when
using Unit Editor.

Outline of Functions
With the KV-700 series, connected units must be registered to the CPU before the
ladder program is executed.
Use Unit Editor to select connected units to create a unit configuration, and transfer
the unit configuration you have made to the CPU. You can also set the functions of
each unit and set QL and KL slave devices in Unit Editor.
On conventional PLC types, hardware settings had to be made on each unit by
5 setting the DIP switches. However, with the KV-700, hardware settings are basically
no longer required, and units can be set up simply in Unit Editor. After you have built
your system, you can change settings without having to remove units.
UNIT EDITOR

Note: • Unit Editor can be used only when the PLC type is set to "KV-700" or
"KV-700+M".
• The unit setup information that can be set on Unit Editor is basically one
information file per ladder program.
• Unit Editor cannot be started up independently. A ladder program must
be opened first before Unit Editor is started up.

5-2
 5-1 Outline of Unit Editor

Settings on Unit Editor

The following information is set on Unit Editor.

„ Creating unit configuration information for the KV-700 system

Create a list of configured units currently connected to the KV-700 system, and
create a unit configuration table. This table is used for checking whether or not
the actually connected units are operating normally when the system is running.
Unit Editor is also provided with an "automatic device swap function" that
automatically changes relay/DM Nos. on the ladder program when the relay/DM
Nos. of each unit are changed on Unit Editor. There are now no longer device
assignment errors as the unit configuration information is integrated with the
ladder program.
5

UNIT EDITOR
„ Setting relay/DM assignments for units
When setting relays/DMs other than for the CPU unit on the KV-700, set relay
Nos. within the range 01000 to 59915, and DM Nos. within the range DM00000
to DM19999 ((DM00000 to DM39999) when extended memory (OP-42138) is
mounted).
Relay/DM assignments can be set either manually or automatically.
Setting relays/DMs separately by input/output and by special unit

Assigning relays for each hardware block

5-3
 5-1 Outline of Unit Editor

„ Setting unit functions

The functions of each unit can be set.

Mistakes are possible as you set up units Easy setup. Just select according to the menu.
while reading the manual.

5
„ Building/setting QL and KL systems from Unit Editor
UNIT EDITOR

QL Link systems and KL Link systems can be set on Unit Editor. QL Link
systems are built into the KV-700 CPU Unit, and KL Link systems use the KL
Master Unit KL-N20V for the KV-700.
Master unit setups can be transferred as they are from
Switch setup used to be difficult. Unit Editor.

„ Printing system configuration diagrams

Connected unit configuration diagrams, and unit setups, relay assignments by
individual unit, and other system information can be printed.
The Unit Editor printing functions allows you print all details set on Unit Editor for
preparing specification sheets, for example. The following information can be
printed:
• Connected unit configuration diagrams
Unit illustration and relay assignments are printed.
• Connected unit detailed setup tables
Settings of each unit are printed in table format.
• KL and QL systems
KL and QL system configuration illustrations, and relay and address
assignments of each unit are printed.

5-4
 5-1 Outline of Unit Editor

„ Ladder conversion function for KZ-300/350

This function converts ladder programs that have been prepared for use on the
Keyence KZ-300/350 PLC for use on the KV-700. As KZ-300/350 instructions
words are upwardly compatible with the KV-700 system, this conversion function
differs from the conventional conversion utility in that relay assignments and not
instructions are swapped.
As conversion is performed to create an optimum KV-700 system based upon
the unit configuration that was used on the KZ-300/350, you can manually set
and convert units to be assigned to other units between existing systems and
the new KV-700 system.

UNIT EDITOR

5-5
 5-2 Table of Unit Editor Tool Bar Functions

5-2 Table of Unit Editor Tool Bar Functions

This section provides a table of tool bar functions available on Unit Editor. For
details of each function, see the page reference number listed in the far right of the
table.

Standard

Icon Name Function See page

Saves the setup information of the unit currently being edited and
Save and exit 5-27
returns to the Edit Ladder screen.
Unit Registration
Starts up the Unit Registration Wizard. 5-38
5 Wizard
Import Reads unit setup information from other projects. 5-40
UNIT EDITOR

Print Prints the unit setup information. 5-66

Print preview Displays a preview of the unit setup information in its printed form. 5-68

Cut Cuts the selected area. 5-30

Copy Copies the selected area. 5-30
Paste Pastes cut data at the cursor position. 5-30
Displays the Enter Unit Comment dialog box for entering unit
Enter unit comment 5-41
comments.
Reserve unit Reserves and cancels reservation of units. 5-42
Automatically assign
Automatically assigns relays and DM. 5-31
relay/DM
Batch enter relay Manually sets the relay Nos. of connected units displayed in the form
5-33
Nos. of a list.
Checks whether or not relay and DM assignments are unique to
Device check 5-35
units.
Jumps to the position in the ladder program corresponding to the
Jump to error rung 5-43
erroneous unit displayed in the message window.
Automatically
Automatically generates corresponding units on the KV-700 based
generate KV-700 5-46
upon the unit configuration created on KZ-300/350.
unit
KZ-300/350→KV- Selects and converts KZ-300/350 units to corresponding units on the
5-47
700 conversion KV-700.
Slave device setup Opens the Slave Device Setup window. 5-44
Import slave device
Reads slave device unit setup information from other projects. 5-44
information
Copy KL unit
Cannot be used on the English version. 5-45
information
Paste KL unit
Cannot be used on the English version. 5-46
information
KL address setup
Starts up the KL address setup software. 5-46
software
Option-set Sets the Unit Editor configuration. 5-70
Display unit as Switches between bitmap display and box display of the units on the
5-47
bitmap unit layout area.
Help Displays Help describing how to use Unit Editor. 5-48

5-6
 5-3 Table of Tool Bar Functions on Slave Device Setup Screen

5-3 Table of Tool Bar Functions on Slave Device Setup Screen

This section provides a table of tool bar functions available in the Slave Device
Setup screen. For details of each function, see the page reference number listed in
the far right of the table.

Standard

Icon Name Function See page

Close the Edit Slave
Closes the Slave Device Setup window currently being edited. 5-54
Device window
Slave Device
Registration Wizard
Starts up the Slave Device Registration Wizard. 5-62
5
Import slave device
Copies slave device setup information from other projects. 5-63

UNIT EDITOR
information
Print Prints slave device setup information. 5-66
Displays a preview of the slave device setup information in its printed
Print preview 5-68
form.
Cut Cuts the selected area. 5-57
Copy Copies the selected area. 5-57
Paste Pastes cut data at the cursor position. 5-57
Enter unit/slave Displays the Enter Unit (Slave Device) Comment dialog box for
5-64
device comment entering unit and slave device comments.
Reserve slave Reserves and cancels reservation of slave devices.
5-64
device
Automatically assign Automatically assigns slave device addresses.
5-58
addresses
Address check Checks whether or not slave device addresses are unique to units. 5-59
Jump to error rung Jumps to the position in the ladder program corresponding to the
5-65
erroneous unit displayed in the message window.
Help Displays Help describing how to use Unit Editor. 5-65

5-7
 5-4 Screen Menus

5-4 Screen Menus

This section provides tables of the various menus available on Unit Editor. For
details of each function, see the page reference number listed in the far right of the
table.

File
This menu groups file operation and printing related items.

5
UNIT EDITOR

Item Function See page

Unit Reg Wizard Starts up the Unit Registration Wizard. 5-38
Import Reads unit setup information and unit comments from other projects. 5-40
Print Prints the unit setup information. 5-66
Print preview Displays a preview of the unit setup information in its printed form. 5-68
Printer setup Sets the printer. 5-69
Saves the setup information of the unit currently being edited and
Save 5-27
returns to the Edit Ladder screen.
Returns to the Edit Ladder screen without saving the setup
Exit 5-27
information of the unit currently being edited.

Edit
This menu groups the various items that can be used when editing unit information.

Item Function See page

Cut Cuts the selected area. 5-30
Copy Copies the selected area. 5-30
Paste Pastes cut data at the cursor position. 5-30
Delete Deletes the selected area. 5-29
Displays the Enter Unit Comment dialog box for entering unit
Unit comment 5-41
comments.
Reserve unit Reserves and cancels reservation of units. 5-42
Manually sets the relay Nos. of connected units displayed in the form
Batch enter relay No. 5-33
of a list.

5-8
 5-4 Screen Menus

Convert
This menu groups items relating to relay/DM assignments and items relating to KZ-
350→KV-700 conversion functions.

Item Function See page

Jumps to the position in the ladder program corresponding to the
Jump to error rung 5-43

Auto relay/DM
erroneous unit displayed in the message window.
Automatically assigns relays and DM. 5-31
5
Checks whether or not relay and DM assignments are unique to

UNIT EDITOR
Device check 5-35
units.
Selects which side the unit configuration is to be created for when
Edit KV-700 the KV-300/350→KV-700 conversion function is used to convert 5-46
ladder programs for KZ-300/350.
Automatically generates corresponding units on the KV-700 based
Generate KV-700 5-46
upon the unit configuration created on KZ-300/350.
Selects and converts KZ-300/350 units to corresponding units on the
KZ-350→KV-700 conv 5-47
KV-700.

Slave Setup
This menu groups items relating to KL/QL slave device settings.

Item Function See page

Setup Opens the Slave Device Setup window. 5-44
Reads slave device unit setup information and comments from other
Import slave info 5-44
projects.
Copy KL info Cannot be used on the English version. 5-45
Paste KL info Cannot be used on the English version. 5-46
Setup KLADR Starts up the KL address setup software. 5-46

5-9
 5-4 Screen Menus

View
This menu groups items relating to functions for changing window views.

Item Function See page

Toolbar Displays the toolbar. 
Status bar Displays the status bar. 

5 Message area Displays the message area.

Displays the Unit Setup window of the unit at the current cursor
5-20
5-32
Unit setup
position. 5-36
UNIT EDITOR

Jumps to the display position on the unit layout area of the unit
Jump 5-42
selected in the Unit configuration window.
Switches between bitmap display and box display of the units on the
Display bitmap 5-47
unit layout area.

Option
This menu groups items relating to environmental settings on Unit Editor.

Item Function See page

Setup Sets the Unit Editor configuration. 5-70

5-10
 5-4 Screen Menus

Window
This menu groups items relating to functions for changing the window display.

Item Function See page

Unit place area 1 Selects unit layout area 1. 5-18
Unit place area 2 Selects unit layout area 2. 5-18
Unit Config Win Selects the Unit configuration window. 5-19 5
Unit Select Win Selects the Unit selection window. 5-19

UNIT EDITOR
Unit Setup Win Selects the Unit setup window. 5-20
Message area Selects the message area. 5-20

Help
This menu displays items for displaying Help and version information.

Item Function See page

Unit Editor Displays Help describing how to use Unit Editor 5-48

5-11
 5-5 List of Menu Items in Slave Device Setup Screen

5-5 List of Menu Items in Slave Device Setup Screen

This section provides tables of the various menus available in the Slave Device
Setup screen. For details of each function, see the page reference number listed in
the far right of the table.

File
This menu groups file operation and printing related items.

5
UNIT EDITOR

Item Function See page

Slave Reg Wizard Starts up the Slave Device Registration Wizard. 5-62
Import slave info Copies slave device setup information from other projects. 5-63
Print Prints the slave device setup information. 5-66
Displays a preview of the slave device setup information in its printed
Print preview 5-68
form.
Printer setup Sets the printer. 5-69
Close Slave Setup screen Closes the Setup Slave Device window currently being edited. 5-54

Edit
This menu groups the various items that can be used when editing unit information.

Item Function See page

Cut Cuts the selected area. 5-57
Copy Copies the selected area. 5-57
Paste Pastes cut data at the cursor position. 5-57
Delete Deletes the selected area. 5-56
Displays the Enter Unit (Slave Device) Comment dialog box for
Unit/slave comment 5-64
entering unit and slave device comments.
Reserve slave Reserves and cancels reservation of slave devices. 5-64

5-12
 5-5 List of Menu Items in Slave Device Setup Screen

Convert
This menu groups items relating to slave device address assignments.

Item Function See page

Jumps to the position in the ladder program corresponding to the
Jump to error rung 5-65

Auto addr
erroneous unit displayed in the message window.
Automatically assigns the addresses of the slave devices. 5-58
5
Check addr Checks whether or not slave device addresses are unique to units. 5-59

UNIT EDITOR
View
This menu groups items relating to functions for changing window views.

Item Function See page

Opens the Unit Setup window for the slave device at the current 5-60
Slave setup
cursor position. 5-61

Window
This menu groups items relating to functions for changing the window display.

Item Function See page

Place slave Selects the slave device layout area. 5-50
Select unit Selects the Unit selection window. 5-50
Set unit Selects the Unit setup window. 5-51
Set address Selects the Addresses setup window. 5-51

5-13
 5-5 List of Menu Items in Slave Device Setup Screen

Help
This menu displays items for displaying Help.

Item Function See page

Unit Editor Displays Help describing how to use Unit Editor. 5-65

5
UNIT EDITOR

5-14
 5-6 Building Systems

5-6 Building Systems

This section describes the flow up to building a system with the KV-700 and the
general procedure for using Unit Editor.

Flow Up to KV-700 System Building

As units can be set up on the personal computer, the operator is all but freed from
the trouble of placing and wiring units, allowing the KV-700 system to be installed
effectively in a short time.
The following figure illustrates the difference in system building when a KV-700 is
used and when a conventional KZ-350 is used.

UNIT EDITOR

5-15
 5-6 Building Systems

Flow of Unit Editor Operations

The figure below illustrates the flow of the general procedure for using Unit Editor.

5
UNIT EDITOR

5-16
 5-7 Names and Functions of Screen Parts

5-7 Names and Functions of Screen Parts

This section describes the screens that are displayed on Unit Editor.

Names and Functions of Unit Editor Parts

The following screen is displayed when Unit Editor is started up.

Unit selection window

Unit configuration window
Unit setup window
Use these windows for selecting
units to be placed, or displaying the
Unit layout area information of already placed units or
Displays the unit configuration. changing their setups. 5

UNIT EDITOR

Unit layout area Message area

Displays operation information and errors that
occur during operation of Unit Editor.
Displays the unit configuration.

5-17
 5-7 Names and Functions of Screen Parts

Unit placement area

This area displays the unit configuration that has been set in Unit Editor.
When the "KV/KZ350→KV-700 conversion function" is used, the unit placement
area is divided in to area 1 and area 2.
The following operations are possible in the unit placement area:

• Placement and deletion of units, changing of connection locations

• Selection of units to be set in detail
• Display of current consumption, weight and dimensions of overall system
• Display of assigned relay addresses for each unit
• Display of unit placement image
5
UNIT EDITOR

System information
Displays the width (mm), height (mm), depth (mm), current consumption
(mA) and weight (g) of units in a linked connection for each stage.

Unit No.
Displays the connection No. of
the unit assigned 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 and
so forth starting from the CPU.

Extension cable
Extension cables are displayed as a broken line when Extension
Unit KV-EB1 is used in a multi-stage configuration.

Unit cursor (red frame)

Displays the currently selected cursor position.

Unit information
Displays the model No. of placed units and assigned relay Nos.

5-18
 5-7 Names and Functions of Screen Parts

Unit configuration window

This window display unit connection information that has been created in the edit
screen in the form of a tree. It also displays the comments of units that have been
registered to each unit.

Displays the overall system.

Displays the block unit used for

categorizing blocks by Extension
Unit KV-EB1.
5

UNIT EDITOR
Displays unit links.

Unit selection window

This window is used when placing units in the edit screen. Select the unit you want
to place from the unit selection window. Also, select units when you use
[KV/KZ350→KV700 ladder conversion] to build a KZ-300/350 system.

Displays the type of unit.

Displays the model No. of the unit.

5-19
 5-7 Names and Functions of Screen Parts

Unit setup window

This window displays the mode of units placed on the unit placement area and
assigned relay Nos. and other details. You can also change settings in this window.

Displays the setting item. " " is

displayed for items whose setting
can be changed, and " " is
displayed for items whose setting
cannot be changed.

5 Displays the setting of each item.

Setting values can be changed.
"*" is displayed for selection item
UNIT EDITOR

defaults.
See "Setting Currently Placed
Units" on page 5-37.

Message window
This window displays errors that occur during Unit Editor operations and the results
of conversion.

Displays errors and conversion

result messages.

Displays the position of units for

the message in question.

5-20
 5-8 Basic Operation of Unit Editor

5-8 Basic Operation of Unit Editor

This section describes how to use Unit Editor.

Flow of System Operations

The following example describes the procedure for creating a new system using
Unit Editor in the following unit configuration.

1 Select {File(F)} {New project(N)}

5
from the KV BUILDER [Editor] screen.
The Input Project Name dialog box is

UNIT EDITOR
displayed.

Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + N keys.

2 Enter the name of the new project

and where it is to be stored, and click
the "OK" button.

To change the directory, click the "Set" button, select the new directory,
and click the "OK" button.

The Change PLC Type dialog box is displayed.

3 Select either "KV-700" or "KV-700+M" from

the pulldown list from the Change PLC Type
dialog box, and click the "OK" button.
The Start up Unit Editor confirmation dialog box
is displayed.

4 Click the "Yes" button.

This starts up Unit Editor.

5-21
 5-8 Basic Operation of Unit Editor

5 Double-click the "Unit selection"

tab.
The Select Unit window is displayed.

Other procedure
• Click {Window (W)} {Unit selection
(2)} from Menu.
• Press the Alt + 2 keys.

6 Select the unit to connect from the Unit selection window, and drag-and-
drop the unit to the unit placement area.
5 The unit is displayed on the edit screen.
UNIT EDITOR

In this example, drag-and-drop in the following order:

Power Supply Unit: KV-U7
CPU Unit: KV-700
Add-on I/O Unit (input): KV-C32XA
Add-on I/O Unit (output): KV-B16TA
Add-on I/O Unit (output): KV-B16TA
Multi-communication Unit: KV-L20
Positioning High-speed Counter Unit: KV-H20
A/D Conversion unit: KV-AD40

Other procedure
Double-click the units currently displayed in the unit selection window.

[Tip]
• The CPU Unit and end unit are already placed when Unit Editor is first started
up.
• The end unit is automatically placed when the CPU Unit is placed.

7 Select {Conv (P)} {Auto

relay/DM(A)} from Menu.
The confirmation dialog box is
displayed.
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the F5 key.

[Tip]
The following describes the procedure for automatically assigning relays/DMs.
For details on manually assigned relays/DMs, see "Manually Assigning
Relays/DMs for Placed Units" (page 5-32).

5-22
 5-8 Basic Operation of Unit Editor

8 Click the "OK" button.

The relay No. is automatically assigned, and the result is displayed in the
message window.

9 Select the unit whose details are to be set on the unit placement area.

5
10 Click the "Unit setup" tab, and set the unit setting values, etc.

UNIT EDITOR
Other procedure
Double-click the unit to be set on the unit placement area.

[Tip]
For details on how to set each unit and content of settings, refer to the manual of
the respective unit.

11 Select {File (F)} {Save (S)} from Menu.

This saves the system you have created, and
returns to the Editor.

Other procedure
Click the button.

5-23
 5-9 Unit Editor Operations

5-9 Unit Editor Operations

This section describes how to perform the following operations in the unit place area
and each window.

Unit Editor Operations

The following operations can be performed on Unit Editor.

• Starting up/Exiting Unit Editor

"Starting Up Unit Editor" page 5-26
"Exiting Unit Editor" page 5-27
• Displaying Windows

5 "Displaying Windows" page 5-27

• Placing/Deleting Units
"Placing Units" page 5-28
UNIT EDITOR

"Deleting Placed Units" page 5-29

• Copying/Moving Placed Units
"Copying/Moving Placed Units" page 5-30
• Assigning Relays/DMs for Placed Units
"Automatically Assigning Relays/DMs for Placed Units" page 5-31
"Manually Assigning Relays/DMs for Placed Units" page 5-32
"Batch Assigning Relay Nos. for Placed Units" page 5-33
• Checking Relay/DM Assignments
"Checking System Relay/DM Assignments" page 5-35
• Setting Currently Placed Units, Displaying Detailed Information
"Displaying Unit Detailed Settings" page 5-36
"Setting Currently Placed Units" page 5-37
• Unit Registration Wizard
"Using the Unit Registration Wizard" page 5-38
• Importing Unit Setup Information
"Importing Unit Setup Information and Unit Comments" page 5-40
• Entering Comments
"Entering Comments" page 5-41
• Reserving Units
"Reserving Units" page 5-42
• Jumping the Cursor
"Jumping the Cursor" page 5-42
"Jumping to Error Rungs" page 5-43
• Slave Device Settings
"Displaying the Slave Device Setup Screen" page 5-44
"Importing Slave Device Information" page 5-44
"Copying KL Unit Information" page 5-45
"Pasting KL Unit Information" page 5-46
"Starting Up KL Address Setup Software" page 5-46

5-24
 5-9 Unit Editor Operations

• KZ-300/350→KV-700 Conversion
"Switching Editing of Units KZ-300/350 and KV-700" page 5-46
"Automatically Creating KV-700 Unit Configurations based on KZ-300/350
Unit Configurations" page 4-46
"Manually Creating KV-700 Unit Configurations based on KZ-300/350 Unit
Configurations" page 5-47
• Changing the Unit Illustration Display Mode
"Changing Unit Illustration Display Mode" page 5-47
• Display the Help Version
"Displaying Help" page 5-48
• Printing Unit Configuration Diagrams
"Printing System Configurations" page 5-66
"Setting the Print Preview" page 5-68 5
"Setting the Printer" page 5-69

UNIT EDITOR
• Environmental Settings
"About Unit Editor Environmental Settings" page 5-70
"Setting View" page 5-71
"Setting Color" page 5-74
"Setting Device Assignments" page 5-75
"Setting Unit Color" page 5-77
"Other Settings" page 5-78

5-25
 5-9 Unit Editor Operations

Starting Up Unit Editor

Tool (T) Unit Editor (U) Ctrl + U
Start up Unit Editor by the following procedure.
Creating a new system
1 Select {File (F)} {New project (N)}
from Menu.
The Input Project Name dialog box is
displayed.

Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + N keys.
5
2 Enter the name of the new project
and where it is to be stored, and click
UNIT EDITOR

the "OK" button.

To change the directory, click the "Set" button, select the new directory,
and click the "OK" button.

The Change PLC Type dialog box is displayed.

3 Select either "KV-700" or "KV-700+M"

from the pulldown list from the Change
PLC Type dialog box, and click the "OK"
button.
The Start up Unit Editor confirmation dialog
box is displayed.

4 Click the "Yes" button.

This starts up Unit Editor.

Adding/modifying an existing system

1 Select {Tools (T)} {Unit Editor (U)}

from Menu.
This starts up Unit Editor.
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + U keys.

5-26
 5-9 Unit Editor Operations

Exiting Unit Editor

File (F) Save (S)
Exit (X)
Exit Unit Editor by the following procedure.

1 Select {File (F)} {Save (S)} from Menu. To

exit without saving the unit setup information
you have created, select {Exit (X)}.
This closes Unit Editor, and the Editor is returned
to.

Other procedure 5
Click the button.

UNIT EDITOR
Unit setup information is required for running the KV-700. If you have exited without
saving, create the unit setup information again when you transfer the ladder
program to the CPU Unit.

Displaying Windows
Window (W) Unit configuration window (1) Alt + 1
Unit selection window (2) Alt +2
Unit setup window (3) Alt +3
Three types of windows are displayed on the right side of Unit Editor: unit
configuration window, unit selection window and unit setup window. Each of these
windows is switched and displayed by clicking the respective tabs.

"Unit configuration window" page 5-19

"Unit selection window" page 5-19
"Unit setup window" page 5-20

[Tip]
When Unit Editor is first started up, the unit selection window is displayed.
The next time that Unit Editor is started up, the window that was currently active
when Unit Editor was last exited is memorized and displayed.

In the following example, let's display the unit configuration window.

1 Double-click the [Unit

configuration] tab.
The unit configuration window is
displayed. To display the unit
selection window or unit setup
window, click the respective tab.

5-27
 5-9 Unit Editor Operations

Other procedure
Unit configuration window
• Press the Alt + 1 keys.
• Select {Window (W)} {Unit Config Win (1)}.
Unit selection window
• Press the Alt + 2 keys.
• Select {Window (W)} {Unit Select Win (2)}.
Unit setup window
• Press the Alt + 3 keys.
• Select {Window (W)} {Unit Setup Win (3)}.

5 Placing Units
UNIT EDITOR

Place units on the unit placement area.

1 Select the unit to be connected from the unit selection window, and
drag-and-drop it to the edit window.
The unit is placed/inserted at the drag-and-drop position.

Other procedure
Place the unit at the red-framed unit cursor on the slave device placement
area.
• Select the unit to be placed on the unit selection window, and press the
key.
• Double-click the unit to be placed on the unit selection window.

Note: • When Unit Editor is first started up, the CPU Unit and end unit are
already placed.
• The Power Supply Unit can be placed at only the leftmost position.
• Only one CPU Unit is allowed per system, and can be placed at the
leftmost position of the upper row or next to the Power Supply Unit.
• Extension Unit KV-EB1 is automatically placed when each unit is placed
at positions on the lower row even if KV-EB1 is not placed.
• The end unit is automatically placed when the CPU Unit is placed, and is
automatically deleted when the CPU Unit is deleted.
• The maximum number of units that can be connected to a single system
is 16 (excluding Power Supply Unit, CPU Unit and Extension Unit) units
per horizontal gang-mounted row. Three rows are provided.

5-28
 5-9 Unit Editor Operations

[Tip]
Position where Unit is Inserted by Other procedure
When a unit where the unit cursor is already located is selected, the unit is
inserted before the currently selected unit.

UNIT EDITOR
Deleting Placed Units
Edit (E) Delete (D) Delete

Delete placed units by the following procedure.

1 Select the unit you

want to delete, click
with the right mouse
button, and select
[Delete].
This deletes the unit.

Other procedure
• Press the Delete key.
• Select {Edit (E)}
{Delete (D)}.

[Tip]
• To delete multiple continuous units, select the multiple units with the mouse
and then delete.
• After a unit is deleted, the other units are pushed up to fill the deleted space.

Note: If you delete the unit of a system already assigned relays/DMs, the
relay/DM Nos. of the units that were deleted from the ladder program is
displayed in red as invalid operands, and the program can no longer be
transfer to the PLC.
Either delete the invalid operand relay/DM No. in the ladder edit screen, or
edit the relay/DM Nos. If use of the automatic swap function has been set
to OFF at {Tools (T)} {Option (O)} in the ladder edit screen, the relay/DM
No. do not become invalid operands.
("Clearing Invalid Operands" page 6-143.)

5-29
 5-9 Unit Editor Operations

Copying/Moving Placed Units

Edit (E) Cut (T) Ctrl + X
Copy (C) Ctrl + C
Paste (P) Ctrl + V
Copy/move placed units by the following procedure.

[Tip]
When a unit is moved to a lower row for the first time, Extension Unit KV-EB1 is
automatically placed.

1 Select the unit you want to copy/move, and click with the right mouse
button.

2 To copy, select [Copy], and to move, select [Cut].

5 Other procedure
Copy
UNIT EDITOR

• Click the button.

• Select the unit, and press the Ctrl + C keys.
• Select the unit, and press {Edit (E)} {Copy (C)}.
Move
• Click the button.
• Select the unit, and press the Ctrl + X keys.
• Select the unit, and press {Edit (E)} {Cut (T)}.

[Tip]
• To copy/move multiple continuous units, select the multiple units with the
mouse and then copy/move.
• After a unit is moved, the other units are pushed up to fill the deleted space.
Note: If you cut a unit in a system already assigned relays/DMs, the relay/DM
Nos. of the units that was cut from the ladder program is displayed in red
as invalid operands, and the program can no longer be transferred to the
PLC.
The relay/DM Nos. of the pasted unit will not be inherited even if [Paste] is
executed. Either delete the invalid operand relay/DM Nos. in the ladder edit
screen, or edit the relay/DM Nos.
("Clearing Invalid Operands" page 6-143.)
If use of the automatic swap function has been set to OFF at {Tools (T)}
{Option (O)} in the ladder edit screen, the relay/DM No. do not become
invalid operands.

3 Move the unit cursor to the unit paste position,

right click the mouse button, and select [Paste].
This pastes the unit.
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + V keys.
• Select {Edit (E)} {Paste (P)}.

5-30
 5-9 Unit Editor Operations

„ Moving Units with Relays/DMs Assigned

Select the unit, and drag-and-drop the unit to place
where you want to move it to. When you do this, the
relay Nos. do not change even if the unit is moved after
relays have been assigned.

Automatically Assigning Relays/DMs for Placed Units

Conv (P) Auto relay/DM (A) F5

Automatically assign relays/DM Nos. by the following procedure.

5
1 Select {Conv (P)} {Auto relay/DM (A)} from

UNIT EDITOR
Menu.
The relays/DMs are automatically assigned.

Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the F5 key.

[Tip]
• KV BUILDER is provided with an "automatic replacement function" that
automatically changes the relays/DM Nos. on the ladder program when the
relays/DM Nos. of a system to which relays/DMs are already assigned are
changed.
• In the default setting, automatic replacement is enabled. To disable the
automatic replacement function, select {Tools (T)} {Option (O)} from the
ladder edit screen, and change the setting.
"Setting Device Assignments" page 5-75
• Automatic assignment rules are set in the option settings.
In the default setting, relays are set to fill the space starting from No. 30000
next to the CPU unit, and DMs are set in 100 units starting from No. 10000.
"Setting Device Assignments" page 5-75

5-31
 5-9 Unit Editor Operations

Manually Assigning Relays/DMs for Placed Units

View (V) Unit setup (R)
Manually assign relays/DM Nos. by the following procedure.

1 Select the unit to set, click with the right mouse

button, and select [Unit setup].
The settings of the unit currently selected in the unit
placement area are displayed in the unit setup window.

Other procedure
• Press the key.
5 • Select {View (V)} {Unit setup (R)}.
• Double-click on the unit whose settings are to be
UNIT EDITOR

changed in the unit placement area.

2 Select "Leading DM No." under

"Item" or "Setting value" under
"Leading input relay No.", and
enter the new setting value.

[Tip]
• KV BUILDER is provided with an "automatic replacement function" that
automatically changes the relays/DM Nos. on the ladder program when the
relays/DM Nos. of a system to which relays/DMs are already assigned are
changed.
• In the default setting, automatic replacement is enabled. To disable the
automatic replacement function, select {Tools (T)} {Option (O)} from the
ladder edit screen, and change the setting.
"Setting Device Assignments" page 5-75
• Automatic assignment rules are set in the option settings.
In the default setting, relays are set to fill the space starting from No. 30000
next to the CPU unit, and DMs are set in 100 units starting from No. 10000.
"Setting Device Assignments" page 5-75

Note: • Enter the leading relay No. in channel units. The channel No. is the part
remaining after removing the lower two digits of the relay No.
For example, when the relay No. is 10000, the channel No. becomes
100ch.
• The leading relay or DM No. that can be assigned to each unit is defined
in Unit Editor option settings. (In the default setting, the leading relay No.
is No. 30000, the leading DM No. is No. 10000.) When a No. before the
defined relay or DM No. is defined manually, the "Relay/DM/address is in
error" dialog box is displayed, and is not accepted when "Save" or
"Device check" is selected. To change assignable leading relay or DM
Nos., set them again in the option settings.
"Setting Device Assignments" page 5-75

5-32
 5-9 Unit Editor Operations

Batch Assigning Relay Nos. for Placed Units

Edit (E) Batch enter relay No. (A)
Batch assign relay Nos. by the following procedure.

1 Select {Edit (E)} {Batch enter relay

No. (A)} from Menu.

5
The Relay No. Batch Input dialog box is displayed.

UNIT EDITOR
2 Click the "Relay No." field, and enter the relay No. to be assigned in
channel units.

5-33
 5-9 Unit Editor Operations

3 Click the "OK" button.

[Tip]
• KV BUILDER is provided with an "automatic replacement function" that
automatically changes the relays/DM Nos. on the ladder program when the
relays/DM Nos. of a system to which relays/DMs are already assigned are
changed.
• In the default setting, automatic replacement is enabled. To disable the
automatic replacement function, select {Tools (T)} {Option (O)} from the
ladder edit screen, and change the setting.
"Setting Device Assignments" page 5-75
• Automatic assignment rules are set in the option settings.
5 In the default setting, relays are set to fill the space starting from No. 30000
next to the CPU unit, and DMs are set in 100 units starting from No. 10000.
UNIT EDITOR

"Setting Device Assignments" page 5-75

Note: • Enter the leading relay No. in channel units. The channel No. is the part
remaining after removing the lower two digits of the relay No.
For example, when the relay No. is 10000, the channel No. becomes
100ch.
• The leading relay or DM No. that can be assigned to each unit is defined
in Unit Editor option settings. (In the default setting, the leading relay No.
is No. 30000, the leading DM No. is No. 10000.) When a No. before the
defined relay or DM No. is defined manually, the "Relay/DM/address is in
error" dialog box is displayed, and is not accepted when "Save" or
"Device check" is selected. To change assignable leading relay or DM
Nos., set them again in the option settings.
"Setting Device Assignments" page 5-75

5-34
 5-9 Unit Editor Operations

Checking System Relay/DM Assignments

Conv (P) Device check (C) F6

This function checks whether or not there are any errors in unit placement set on
Unit Editor and in relay/DM assignments for each unit.
Check the system by the following procedure.

[Tip]
When Unit Editor is exited, devices are checked automatically. If an error is
found, a message regarding the error content is displayed.

1 Select {Conv (P)} {Device check

(C)} from Menu. 5
Checking of the unit configuration and

UNIT EDITOR
relay/DM assignments is started.

Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the F6 key.

2 The check results are displayed in the message area.

If an error is found, the error content is displayed in the message area. If no
error is found, a message to that effect is displayed in the message area.
"Jumping to Error Rungs" page 5-43

Note: • Enter the leading relay No. in channel units. The channel No. is the part
remaining after removing the lower two digits of the relay No.
For example, when the relay No. is 10000, the channel No. becomes
100ch.
• The leading relay or DM No. that can be assigned to each unit is defined
in Unit Editor option settings. (In the default setting, the leading relay No.
is No. 30000, the leading DM No. is No. 10000.) When a No. before the
defined relay or DM No. is defined manually, the "Relay/DM/address is in
error" dialog box is displayed, and is not accepted when "Save" or
"Device check" is selected. To change assignable leading relay or DM
Nos., set them again in the option settings.
"Setting Device Assignments" page 5-75

5-35
 5-9 Unit Editor Operations

Displaying Unit Detailed Settings

View (V) Unit setup (R)

Display the setup of the unit currently selected in the unit placement area in the unit
setup window.

5
Display the setup of the unit currently selected in the unit placement area in the unit
setup window by the following procedure.
UNIT EDITOR

1 Select the unit to be set, click with the right mouse

button, and select [Unit setup].
The setup of the unit currently selected in the unit
placement area is displayed in the unit setup window.

Other procedure
• Press the key.
• Select {View (V)} {Unit setup (R)}.
• Double-click on the unit whose setting is to be changed in
the unit placement area.

5-36
 5-9 Unit Editor Operations

Setting Currently Placed Units

View (V) Unit setup (R)
Set the details of the unit currently placed in the unit placement area. For details on
the setup items of each unit and details of how to set these items, refer to the
manual for the respective unit.

1 Select the unit to be set, click with the right

mouse button, and select [Unit setup].
The setup of the unit currently selected in the unit
placement area is displayed in the unit setup
window.

5
Other procedure

UNIT EDITOR
• Press the key.
• Select {View (V)} {Unit setup (R)}.
• Double-click on the unit whose setting is to be
changed in the unit placement area.

2 Click the item whose setting is to be changed, and enter the new setting
value.

When entering from the text

box:
Enter numerical values from the
text box that is displayed.

When entering from the

pulldown list:
Select items from the pulldown
list that is displayed.

Note: Only the settings of setup items that are preceded with " " can be
changed. The settings of setup items that are preceded with " " cannot
be changed. Note, however, that the setting of some setup items can be
changed after other settings are changed.

3 Press the key.

This changes the setup details.

5-37
 5-9 Unit Editor Operations

Using the Unit Registration Wizard

File (F) Unit Reg Wizard (W) Ctrl + W
Use the Unit Registration Wizard to create a system.

1 Select {File (F)} {Unit Reg Wizard (W)} from

Unit Editor menu.
The Unit Registration Wizard is displayed.

Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + W keys.

5
2 Enter system comments and block
UNIT EDITOR

comments, and click the "Next (N)"

button.
[Tip]
Up to 80 single-byte characters can be
entered for both system comments and
block comments.

3 Select the Power Supply

Unit to be used, specify the
number to be used by the
"Up (U)" and "Down (D)"
buttons, and click the "Next
(N)" button.

Other procedure
Select the unit, and directly
enter values.

4 The CPU unit is already

selected. Click the "Next
(N)" button.

[Tip]
The CPU is specified before the
project is created.

5-38
 5-9 Unit Editor Operations

5 Select the add-on input unit

to be used, specify the
number to be used by the
"Up (U)" and "Down (D)"
buttons, and click the "Next
(N)" button.

Other procedure
Select the unit, and directly
enter values.

6 Select the add-on output unit

5
to be used, specify the

UNIT EDITOR
number to be used by the
"Up (U)" and "Down (D)"
buttons, and click the "Next
(N)" button.

Other procedure
Select the unit, and directly
enter values.

7 Next, select special units.

Select the unit according to
the screen to be displayed,
specify the number to be
used by the "Up (U)" and
"Down (D)" buttons, and
click the "Next (N)" button.

Other procedure
Select the unit, and directly
enter values.

8 When you select all special

units, the confirmation
screen is displayed. Check
the content of this
confirmation screen, and
click the "End" button.
This creates the system.

5-39
 5-9 Unit Editor Operations

Importing Unit Setup Information and Unit Comments

File (F) Import (I)
Read unit comments and unit setup information created in other projects.
Read unit comments and unit setup information created in other projects by the
following procedure.

1 Select {File (F)} {Import (I)} from Menu.

The Import Unit dialog box is displayed.
Other procedure
Click the button.

2 Specify the directory of the unit setup information file and unit comments

5 to import.

Displays the unit setup information file to be imported and

UNIT EDITOR

the directory where unit comments are saved.

1 Click the "Browse"

button to display the
Open dialog box, and
specify the unit setup
information file.

2
Clicking the "View"
button displays a list
of units.

Set which comments are to be copied

Specify where in the existing system when unit comments are imported.
the opened unit setup information file
is to be added when the unit setup
information file is imported.

3 Select the unit to import.

To import all units, click the "Select all" button.
To import individual units, select the unit to import. (To select two or more units,
hold down the Ctrl key while selecting the units.)

4 Click the "OK" button.

This imports the unit setup information or unit comment.

5-40
 5-9 Unit Editor Operations

Entering Comments
Edit (E) Unit comment (M) Ctrl + M
Enter unit comments by the following procedure.

1 Select the unit to enter unit comments to, click the

right mouse button and select [Unit comment].
The Unit comment dialog box is displayed.

UNIT EDITOR
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + M keys.
• Select {Edit (E)} {Unit comment (M)}.
• The unit configuration window is displayed.
Select the unit to input comments to, click the
right mouse button and select [Unit comment]
from the displayed unit.

2 Enter the unit comment, and click the

"OK" button.
This enters the unit comment.

[Tip]
• Unit comments that you enter are displayed in the unit configuration window.
• Unit comments can be entered up to 80 single-byte characters.

5-41
 5-9 Unit Editor Operations

Reserving Units
Edit (E) Reserve unit (R) Ctrl + R
Units can be set as dummy units by "reserving" them when designing units
scheduled to be added in the future, or when there are units to be attached or
removed depending on the device configuration within ladder programs.
The setup information of reserved units is not transferred.
Reserve units by the following procedure.

1 Select the unit to reserve, click the right mouse button,

and select [Reserve unit].
This reserves the unit.

5 Other procedure
• Click the button.
UNIT EDITOR

• Press the Ctrl + R keys.

• Select {Edit (E)} {Reserve unit (R)}.

[Tip]
Two or more units can be reserved continuously by selecting with the mouse.

Jumping the Cursor

View (V) Jump (J) Ctrl + J
Display the information of the unit currently displayed in the edit screen in the unit
configuration window.

Displays the unit configuration window for the

selected unit and sets the window to the active
window.

Jump the cursor by the following procedure.

1 Select the unit to jump, to click the right mouse button,

and select [Jump].
This jumps the cursor.

Other procedure
• Press the Ctrl + J keys.
• Select {View (V)} {Jump (J)}.

5-42
 5-9 Unit Editor Operations

Jumping to Error Rungs

Convert (P) Jump to error rung (E) F4

Display the unit concerned in error messages that are displayed when relays/DMs
are assigned, units are added or deleted, etc.

1 Click the error message on the message area.

The selected message is displayed inverted.

UNIT EDITOR
2 Select {Conv (P)} {Jump to error
rung (E)} from Menu.

Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the F4 key.
• Double-click the selected message.

The cursor moves to the unit on the unit placement area where the error
occurred.

5-43
 5-9 Unit Editor Operations

Displaying the Slave Device Setup Screen

Slave (K) Slave setup (N) Ctrl + N
Set the QL and KL slave devices to be connected when KV-700 CPU unit or KL-
N20V are selected.

Set the slave device by the following procedure.

1 Select the CPU unit or KL-N20V to set the

slave device to, click the right mouse button,
and select [Slave setup].
The Slave Device Setup screen is displayed, and
5 the Slave Device Registration Wizard is started
up.
UNIT EDITOR

Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + N keys.
• Select {Slave (K)} {Slave setup (N)}.

2 Set the slave device.

"Using the Slave Device Registration Wizard" page 5-62

[Tip]
For details on how to set QL and KL slave device unit, refer to the manual for the
respective unit.

Importing Slave Device Information

Slave (K) Import slave info (I) Ctrl + I
Read slave device setup information created in other projects. If "Import slave info"
is used when creating a system having the same slave device configuration as a
previously created system is used, the information of the previously created system
can be imported as it is, reducing the setup time.

Note: KL and QL slave device setup information created in the Slave Device
Setup screen is not saved on the KV-700 CPU unit. If read data is
transferred once to the CPU unit for re-editing, the slave device setup
information created on the Slave Device Setup screen must be read .

5-44
 5-9 Unit Editor Operations

Read slave device setup information by the following procedure.

1 Select the CPU unit or KL-N20V
to read the slave device
information from, and select
{Slave (K)} {Import slave
info (I)} from Menu.
The Import Slave Information dialog box is displayed.
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + I keys.
• Select the CPU unit or KL-N20V to read the slave device information from,
click the right mouse button, and select [Import slave info].
5
2 Specify the directory of the slave device setup information format to be
imported.

UNIT EDITOR
Displays the unit setup information file to be imported and the directory where unit comments are saved.

1
Click the "Browse" button to display the
Open dialog box, and specify the unit
setup information file.

2
Clicking the "View" button displays a
list of units.

3 Select the slave device to be imported.

To import all slave devices, click the "Select all" button.
To import individual slave devices, select the slave device to import. (To select
two or more slave devices, hold down the Ctrl key while selecting the slave
devices.)
4 Click the "OK" button.
This imports the slave device setup information.
Copying KL Unit Information
Slave (K) Copy KL info (K)
Copies KL unit information created by
the KL address setup software to the
Clipboard. For details of operation, refer
to the KL-N20V User's Manual.

5-45
 5-9 Unit Editor Operations

Pasting KL Unit Information

Slave (K) Paste KL info (L)
Imports KL unit information pasted to the
Clipboard by [Copy KL info] to the Unit
Editor. For details of operation, refer to
the KL-N20V User's Manual (Japanese).

Starting Up KL Address Setup Software

Slave (K) Setup KLADR (A)
Start up the KL address setup software
5 (Japanese), and set the address of the
KL-N20V. For details of operation, refer
to the KL-N20V User's Manual
UNIT EDITOR

(Japanese).

[Tip]
When using the KL address setup software for setting addresses,
"Communications with other KL master units" in the KL-N20V unit setup window
is automatically set to "ON".

Switching Editing of Units KZ-300/350 and KV-700

Conv (P) Edit KV-700 (K) Ctrl + K
Select which unit configuration is to be
created when the KZ-300/350→KV-700
conversion function is used.

When marked: A KV-700 system is

created.
When unmarked: A KZ-300/350 system
is created.

For details on converting KZ-300/350 ladder programs, see "Converting Ladder

Programs for KZ-300/350" (page 6-150).

Automatically Creating KV-700 Unit Configurations based on KZ-300/350 Unit

Configurations
Conv (P) Generate KV-700 (G) Ctrl + A
Automatically create KV-700 system and
relay/DM assignments based upon an
already created KZ-300/350 system
when the KZ-300/350→KV-700
conversion function is used.

For details on converting KZ-300/350

ladder programs, see "Converting
Ladder Programs for KZ-300/350" (page 6-150).

5-46
 5-9 Unit Editor Operations

Manually Creating KV-700 Unit Configurations based on KZ-300/350 Unit

Configurations
Conv (P) KZ-350→KV-700 conv (T) Ctrl + T
Manually create a KV-700 system for a KZ-300/350 system when the KZ-300/350
→KV-700 conversion function is used.

5
For details on converting KZ-300/350 ladder programs, see "Converting Ladder

UNIT EDITOR
Programs for KZ-300/350" (page 6-150).

Changing Unit Illustration Display Mode

View (V) Display bitmap (B)
Change the display mode of the illustration of the units placed in the unit placement
area and slave device placement area. The default display mode is bitmap display
of units. In the bitmap display mode, the units are displayed as if they are actually
connected. In the box display mode, the assigned relay Nos. can be displayed.

Bitmap display Box display

Switch bitmap display and box display by the following procedure.

1 To set to the box display mode, select {View (V)} {Display bitmap (B)}
from Menu.
{Display bitmap (B)} in Menu is unmarked, and the display is set to box display.
To set the bitmap display mode, select {View (V)} {Display bitmap (B)} again
from Menu. {Display bitmap (B)} in Menu is marked.

Other procedure
Click the button.

[Tip]
Settings are saved to the system, and are still active when the system is next
started up.

5-47
 5-9 Unit Editor Operations

Displaying Help
Help (H) Unit Editor (H)
Display Unit Editor Help by the following procedure.

1 Select {Help (H)} {Unit Editor (H)} from Menu.

This displays Help.

Other procedure
Click the button.

5
UNIT EDITOR

5-48
 5-10 Using the Slave Device Setup Screen

5-10 Using the Slave Device Setup Screen

This section describes how to use the Slave Device Setup screen and its respective
windows.
For details on how to set QL slave devices, refer to the "QL Series User's Manual,"
and for details on how to set KL slave devices, refer to the "KL-N20V User's
Manual."

Names of Parts and Functions in Slave Device Setup Screen

When using the QL series or KL series, the connected slave devices must be set in
the Slave Device Setup screen.
This screen is displayed when "Slave Device Setup" is selected from Unit Editor.
The Slave Device Setup menu can be selected only when a KV-700 CPU Unit or 5
KL-N20V is selected.

UNIT EDITOR
Slave device layout area
Displays the slave device configuration.

Unit selection window

Unit setup window
Address setup window
Use these windows for selecting slave devices to be
placed, or displaying the information of already placed
slave devices or changing their setups.

5-49
 5-10 Using the Slave Device Setup Screen

Slave device placement area

This area displays the slave device configuration set in the Slave Device Setup
screen.
You can perform the following operations in the slave device placement area:

• Placement and deletion of slave devices, changing of connection positions

• Selection of slave devices to set details to
• Display of power consumption and weight of overall slave device system
• Display of assignment relay addresses of each slave device
• Preview of slave device placement

System information
5 Displays the current consumption
(mA) and weight (g) of the overall
slave device system.
UNIT EDITOR

Unit cursor (red frame)

Displays the currently selected cursor
position.

Unit information
Displays the model No. of placed
slave devices and assigned relay Nos.
and addresses.

Unit selection window

Use this window when placing slave device units in the slave device placement area.
Select the slave device unit to be placed from the unit selection window. Slave
device units can also be selected when the "KV/KZ350→KV-700 conversion
function" is used to build a KZ-300/350 system.

Displays the type of slave device.

Displays the model No. of slave

devices.

5-50
 5-10 Using the Slave Device Setup Screen

Unit setup window

Mode and other detailed settings can be displayed and settings changed for slave
devices or master units placed in the slave device placement area.

Displays the setting item. " " is

displayed for items whose setting can
be changed, and " " is displayed for
items whose setting cannot be
changed.

Displays the setting of each item.

Setting values can be changed. "*" is
displayed for selection items defaults.
See "Setting Placed Slave Devices"
on page 5-61.
5

UNIT EDITOR
Address setup window
This window can display detailed address assignment lists, manually assign
addresses and change settings of slave devices placed in the slave device
placement area.

„ QL

Displays which device is assigned to each address. Displays assigned CR/CM Nos.

Displays slave device comments

if entered.

Displays whether the address

in use is a high-speed address
or low-speed address.

Displays whether the assigned

addresses are input or output.
Displays the addresses currently
assigned to each slave device.
Addresses can be set or changed
manually.

5-51
 5-10 Using the Slave Device Setup Screen

„ KL

Displays which device is assigned to Displays assigned relay/DM Nos.

each address.

Displays slave device comments if

entered.

5
UNIT EDITOR

Displays the addresses currently "*" is displayed for slave devices that
assigned to each slave device. require final setup.
Addresses can be set or changed
manually.
Displays whether the assigned address is a receive
address or send address.

5-52
 5-10 Using the Slave Device Setup Screen

Slave Device Setup Screen Operations

The following operations can be performed in the Slave Device Setup screen.

• Displaying/Exiting the Slave Device Setup Screen

"Displaying the Slave Device Setup Screen" page 5-54
"Exiting the Slave Device Setup Screen" page 5-54

• Displaying Windows
"Displaying Windows" page 5-55

• Placing/Deleting Slave Devices

"Placing Slave Devices" page 5-56
"Deleting Placed Slave Devices" page 5-56
5
• Copying/Moving Placed Slave Devices

UNIT EDITOR
"Copying/Moving Placed Slave Devices" page 5-57

• Assigning the Addresses of Placed Slave Devices

"Automatically Assigning the Addresses of Placed Slave Devices" page 5-58
"Manually Assigning the Addresses of Placed Slave Devices" page 5-58

• Checking Addresses
"Checking System Address Assignments" page 5-59

• Displaying Settings and Detailed Information of Placed Slave Devices

"Displaying Detailed Settings of Slave Devices" page 5-60
"Setting Placed Slave Devices" page 5-61

• Slave Device Registration Wizard

"Using the Slave Device Registration Wizard" page 5-62

• Importing Slave Device Information

"Importing Slave Device Information" page 5-63

• Entering Comments
"Entering Comments" page 5-64

• Reserving Slave Devices

"Reserving Slave Devices" page 5-64

• Jumping the Cursor

"Jumping to Error Rungs" page 5-65

• Displaying Help
"Displaying Help" page 5-65

• Printing Unit Configuration Diagrams

"Printing System Configurations" page 5-66
"Setting the Print Preview" page 5-68
"Setting the Printer" page 5-69

5-53
 5-10 Using the Slave Device Setup Screen

Displaying the Slave Device Setup Screen

Slave (K) Slave setup (N) Ctrl + N
Set the QL and KL slave devices to be connected when the KV-700 CPU Unit or
KL-N20V is selected.
Set slave devices by the following procedure.

1 Select the CPU Unit or KL-N20V to set slave devices to,

click the right mouse button, and select [Slave setup].
The Slave setup screen is displayed, and the Slave Device
Registration Wizard is started up.
Other procedure
• Click the button.
5 • Press the Ctrl + N keys.
• Select {Slave (K)} {Slave setup (N)}.
UNIT EDITOR

2 Set the slave devices.

"Using the Slave Device Registration Wizard" page 5-62

Exiting the Slave Device Setup Screen

File (F) Close Slave Setup screen (C)
Exit the Slave Device Setup screen by the following procedure.

1 Select {File (F)} {Close Slave Setup screen (C)}

from Menu.
This closes the Slave Setup screen.
Other procedure
Click the button.

2 When the slave device setup

information has been updated,
and not saved, the "Child
screen information has been
changed. Save?" confirmation
dialog box is displayed. To
save the information before exiting, select "Yes". To exit without saving
the information, select "No".
[Tip]
When "Auto-assign Address" or "Address Check" is executed, the slave device
setup information at that time is automatically saved. The above confirmation
box will not be displayed when you exit without saving changes to the slave
device setup information after you have executed "Auto-assign Address" or
"Address Check".
The relay/DM assignments of KL Master Unit KL-N20V are assigned according to
the slave device information set in the Slave Device Setup screen. When the Slave
Device Setup screen has been exited without saving the slave device information,
either create the slave device setup information again or manually set the
addresses of KL-20V when transferring the ladder program to the CPU Unit.

5-54
 5-10 Using the Slave Device Setup Screen

Displaying Windows
Window (W) Unit selection window (2) Alt +2
Unit setup window (3) Alt +3
Address setup window (4) Alt +4
Three types of windows are displayed on the right side of the Slave Device Setup
screen: the unit selection window, unit setup window, and address setup window.
Each of these windows is switched for display.

"Unit selection window" page 5-50

"Unit setup window" page 5-51
"Address setup window" page 5-51
5
[Tip]

UNIT EDITOR
When Unit Editor is first started up, the unit selection window is displayed. When
the Unit Editor window is next started up, the window that was displayed when
Unit Editor was last shutdown is memorized and displayed.

In the following example, display the unit selection window.

1 Click the [Select Unit] tab.

The Unit selection window is
displayed. To display the Unit
setup window or the Address
setup window, click the
respective tab.

Other procedure
Unit selection window
• Press the Alt + 2 keys.
• Select {Window (W)} {Select unit (2)}.
Unit setup window
• Press the Alt + 3 keys.
• Select {Window (W)} {Set unit (3)}.
Address setup window
• Press the Alt + 4 keys.
• Select {Window (W)} {Set address (4)}.

5-55
 5-10 Using the Slave Device Setup Screen

Placing Slave Devices

Place slave devices on the slave device placement area.

1 Select the slave device to be connected from the unit selection window,
and drag-and-drop the slave device to the edit screen.
The slave device is placed at the red-framed unit cursor on the slave device
placement area.

5
UNIT EDITOR

Other procedure
• Select the slave device to place on the unit selection window, and press the
key.
• Double-click the slave device to place on the unit selection window.

Deleting Placed Slave Devices

Edit (E) Delete (D) Delete

Delete slave devices by the following procedure.

1 Select the slave device to delete, click with the

right mouse button, and select [Delete].
This deletes the slave device.

Other procedure
• Select the slave device, and press the Delete key.
• Select the slave device, select {Edit (E)}
{Delete (D)}.

[Tip]
• After a slave device is deleted, other slave devices are displayed pushed up.
• If you delete a slave device to which an address is already assigned, that
address is not pushed up, and is displayed as an empty address. To set the
address pushed up, set the address again.
"Automatically Assigning the Addresses of Placed Slave Devices" page 5-58
"Manually Assigning the Addresses of Placed Slave Devices" page 5-58

5-56
 5-10 Using the Slave Device Setup Screen

Copying/Moving Placed Slave Devices

Edit (E) Cut (T) Ctrl +X
Copy (C) Ctrl +C
Paste (P) Ctrl +V
Copy/move placed slave devices by the following procedure.

1 Select the slave device to be copied/moved,

and click the right mouse button.

UNIT EDITOR
2 To copy the slave device, select [Copy], and to move the slave device,
select [Cut].

Other procedure
To copy a slave device
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + C keys.
• Select {Edit (E)} {Copy (C)}.
To move a slave device
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + X keys.
• Select {Edit (E)} {Cut (T)}.

[Tip]
After you move a slave device, the moved section is displayed pushed up.
Note: If you execute [Cut] on a slave device to which an address is already
assigned, the address No. will not be inherited to a placed slave device
even if [Paste] is executed.

3 Move the slave device cursor to the location

where you want to paste the slave device, click
the right mouse button, and select [Paste].
This pastes the slave device.
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + V keys.
• Select {Edit (E)} {Paste (P)}.

„ Moving units with address setting intact

Select the slave device, and drag-and-drop the slave
device to the destination move location. When you do
this, the relay and address Nos. will not change even if
the slave device is moved after the address is
assigned.

5-57
 5-10 Using the Slave Device Setup Screen

Automatically Assigning the Addresses of Placed Slave Devices

Conv (P) Auto addr (A) F5

Automatically assign addresses by the following procedure.

1 Select {Conv (P)} {Auto addr (A)} from Menu.

The address is automatically assigned.

Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the F5 key.

5 Note: Relay/DM Nos. on the ladder program are not changed even if the address
of the slave device to which a relay/DM is already assigned is changed.
UNIT EDITOR

[Tip]
As an automatic address assignment rule, addresses are assigned in the order
in which slave devices are placed.

Manually Assigning the Addresses of Placed Slave Devices

Window (W) Address setup window (4)
Manually assign addresses by the following procedure.

1 Select the unit to be set, and select

[Address setup].
The address setup of the unit selected in the
Slave Device Setup screen is displayed in the
address setup window.

Other procedure
Select {Window (W)} {Address setup window (4)}.

2 Select the address of the slave device to be changed, and enter the
address No. to be set.

Note: • Set unique addresses to slave devices. Do not set an address that is
used by another slave device.
• Relay/DM Nos. on the ladder program are not changed even if the
address of the slave device to which a relay/DM is already assigned is
changed.

5-58
 5-10 Using the Slave Device Setup Screen

Checking System Address Assignments

Conv (P) Check addr (C) F6

The system checks unit placement set in the Slave setup screen and address
assignments for each unit for any errors.
Check the system by the following procedure.

[Tip]
When the Slave setup screen is closed, addresses are automatically checked,
and a message is displayed indicating the content of an error if an error occurs.

1 Select {Conv (P)} {Check addr (C)}

from Menu. 5
This starts checking of the unit

UNIT EDITOR
configuration and address assignments.

Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the F6 key.

2 The check results are displayed in the message area in Unit Editor.
If an error is detected, a message indicating the content of the error is
displayed in the message area. If no errors are found, a message to that effect
is displayed.
"Jumping to Error Rungs" page 5-65

5-59
 5-10 Using the Slave Device Setup Screen

Displaying Detailed Settings of Slave Devices

View (V) Slave setup (R)
Display the settings of the slave device currently selected in the slave device
placement area in the Unit setup window.

5 The Unit setup window for the selected slave

device is displayed.
UNIT EDITOR

Display the settings of the slave device currently selected in the slave device
placement area in the unit setup window by the following procedure.

1 Select the unit to be set, click the right mouse

button, and select [Slave setup].
The settings of the unit currently selected in the
Slave setup screen are displayed in the Unit setup
window.

Other procedure
• Press the key.
• Select {View (V)} {Slave setup (R)}.
• Double-click the slave device whose settings are to be changed in the slave
device placement area.

5-60
 5-10 Using the Slave Device Setup Screen

Setting Placed Slave Devices

View (V) Slave setup (R)
Set the slave device placed on the unit placement area.
For details on the setting items of each slave device and how to set items, refer to
the manual for the respective slave device.

1 Select the unit to be set, click the right mouse

button, and select [Slave setup].
The settings of the slave device currently selected
in the Slave setup screen are displayed in the Unit
setup window.
5
Other procedure

UNIT EDITOR
• Press the key.
• Select {View (V)} {Slave setup (R)}.
• Double-click the slave device whose settings are to be changed in the slave
device placement area.

2 Click the item whose setting is to be changed, and enter the setting
value.

When entering from the text

box
Enter setting values in the text
box that is displayed.

When entering from the

pulldown list.
Select the item that is displayed in
the pulldown list.

Note: Only the settings of setup items that are preceded with " " can be
changed. The settings of setup items that are preceded with " " cannot
be changed. Note, however, that the setting of some setup items can be
changed after other settings are changed.

3 Press the key.

This changes the setup details.

Note: • Slave device details that have been set in the Slave setup screen cannot
be transferred to connected slave devices.
• Each slave device must be set individually as set up in the Slave setup
screen.

5-61
 5-10 Using the Slave Device Setup Screen

Using the Slave Device Registration Wizard

File (F) Slave Reg Wizard (W) Ctrl + W
Use the Slave Device Registration Wizard to create a system.

[Tip]
When the Slave setup screen is first started up, the Slave Device Registration
Wizard is automatically displayed.

1 Select {File (F)} {Slave Reg Wizard (W)}

from the Slave setup screen.
The Slave Device Registration Wizard is
displayed.

5 Other procedure
• Click the button.
UNIT EDITOR

• Press the Ctrl + W keys.

2 Select the input slave device to be

used, specify the number to be used
by the "Up (U)" and "Down (D)"
buttons, and click the "Next (N)"
button.

Other procedure
Select the unit, and directly enter values.

3 Select the output slave device to be

used, specify the number to be used
by the "Up (U)" and "Down (D)"
buttons, and click the "Next (N)"
button.

Other procedure
Select the unit, and directly enter values.

4 Check the details of the setup, and

click the "End" button.
This creates the system.

5-62
 5-10 Using the Slave Device Setup Screen

Importing Slave Device Information

File (F) Import slave info (I) Ctrl + I
Import slave device setup information created in other projects. The information of
previously created systems can be imported as it is, reducing setup trouble, if you
use "Import slave info" when creating a system configured in the same way as an
already created system.
Note: The setup information of KL and QL slave devices created in the Slave
Device Setup screen is not saved to the KV-700 CPU Unit. To read data
that has once been transferred to the CPU unit for editing, the slave device
setup information created in the Slave setup screen must be read.

Import slave device setup information by the following procedure.

1 Select {File (F)} {Import slave info (I)} from

Menu. 5
The Import Slave Information dialog box is displayed.

UNIT EDITOR
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + I keys.

2 Specify the directory to import the slave device setup information file
from.

Displays the unit setup information file to be imported and the directory where unit comments are saved.

1
Click the "Browse" button to display the
Open dialog box, and specify the unit
setup information file.

2
Clicking the "View" button displays a
list of units.

3 Select the slave device to be imported.

To import all slave devices, click the "Select all" button.
To import individual slave devices, select the slave device to import. (To select
two or slave devices, hold down the Ctrl key while selecting the slave
devices.)

4 Click the "OK" button.

This imports the slave device setup information.

5-63
 5-10 Using the Slave Device Setup Screen

Entering Comments
Edit (E) Unit/slave comment (N) Ctrl + M
Enter unit or slave device comments by the following procedure.

1 Select the unit or slave device to enter unit

comments to, click the right mouse button and
select [Unit/slave comment].
The "Slave comment" dialog box is displayed for
slave devices, and the "Unit comment" dialog box
is displayed for units.

Other procedure
5 • Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + M keys.
UNIT EDITOR

• Select {Edit (E)} {Unit/slave comment (N)}.

2 Enter the comment, and click the "OK" button.

This enters the comment.
[Tip]
• Comments that you enter are displayed in the
address setup window.
• Comments can be entered up to 80 single-byte
characters.

Reserving Slave Devices

Edit (E) Reserve slave (R) Ctrl + R
Slave devices can be set as dummy units by "reserving" them when there are slave
devices scheduled to be added in the future, or when there are slave devices to be
attached or removed depending on the device configuration within ladder programs.
Reserve slave devices by the following procedure.

1 Select the slave device to reserve, click the

right mouse button, and select [Reserve
unit/slave].
This reserves the unit.

Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + R keys.
• Select {Edit (E)} {Reserve slave (R)}.

5-64
 5-10 Using the Slave Device Setup Screen

Jumping to Error Rungs

Conv (P) Jump to error rung (E) F4

Display the slave device related to error messages that are displayed when an
address is assigned, a slave device is added or deleted, etc.

1 Click the error messages on the message area of Unit Editor.

The selected message is displayed inverted.

UNIT EDITOR
2 Select {Conv (P)} {Jump to error rung
(E)} from Menu.

Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the F4 key.
• Double-click the selected message.

The cursor moves to the slave device on the slave device placement area
where the error occurred.

Displaying Help
Help (H) Unit Editor (H)
Display Unit Editor Help.
Display Unit Editor Help by the following procedure.

1 Select {Help (H)} {Unit Editor (H)} from Menu.

This displays Help.

Other procedure
Click the button.

5-65
 5-11 Using Print Functions

5-11 Using Print Functions

This section describes how to operate the edit screen.

Printing System Configurations

File (F) Print (P) Ctrl + P
Prints the system configuration. To print, an environment that supports printing is
required on the PC. Enable printing on the PC by referring to the User's Manual
provided with the PC.
To change the system configuration to print, see "Changing Printing Details" (page
5-78).
Print the system configuration by the following procedure.

5 1 Select {File (F)} {Print (P)} from Menu.

The Print setup dialog box is displayed.
UNIT EDITOR

In case of Unit Editor In case of

Slave setup screen

Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + P keys.

2 Click the "OK" button.

The system configuration
is printed at the settings
made in the Print setup
dialog box.

Note: Files are printed independently on Unit Editor and the Slave Device Setup
screen.
When printing the system configuration from both the Unit Editor and the
Slave Device Setup screen, execute printing independently.

5-66
 5-11 Using Print Functions

„ Sample Printouts
Printout from Unit Editor

UNIT EDITOR
Printout from Slave setup screen

5-67
 5-11 Using Print Functions

Setting the Print Preview

File (F) Print preview (V)
A preview of the system configuration that will be printed is displayed.
Display a preview of the system configuration by the following procedure.

1 Select {File (F)}

In case of Unit Editor In case of
Slave setup screen
{Print preview
(V)} from Menu.
The print preview
is displayed.
Other procedure
5 Click the
button.
UNIT EDITOR

Reduces the view size. Closes the print preview.

Displays the previous page.

Executes printing.

Specifies the number of print preview Enlarges the view size.

pages to display simultaneously on
screen.

[Tip]
Clicking the "Print" button prints out the displayed preview.

Note: Files are printed independently on Unit Editor and the Slave setup screen.
When printing the system configuration from both the Unit Editor and the
Slave setup screen, execute printing independently.

5-68
 5-11 Using Print Functions

Setting the Printer

File (F) Printer setup (R)
Set the size of the paper to be printed, printing orientation (portrait or landscape),
and other printer information.
Set the printer by the following procedure.

1 Select {File (F)} {Printer setup (R)} from Menu.

The Print dialog box is displayed.
In case of Unit Editor In case of
Slave setup screen

UNIT EDITOR
2 Click the "Properties" button.
The printer properties are displayed.

Note: The details displayed in the printer properties vary according to the printer
you are using.

3 Set up the printer.

[Tip]
For details on how to set up the printer, refer to the User's Manual for the printer.

5-69
 5-12 Environmental Settings

5-12 Environmental Settings

This section describes how to change the Unit Editor environmental settings.

About Unit Editor Environmental Settings

Option (O) Setup (S)
By Setup Options, you can change the environmental settings of Unit Editor. You
can set the following items:

• Display scale of units displayed in the unit placement area and slave device
placement area
• Font size
• Cursor movement unit
5 • Color of text color and background on Unit Editor
• Relay/DM automatic assignment rules
UNIT EDITOR

• Color of units displayed in the unit placement area and slave device
placement area
• Print settings
• Enable/disable of KL Master Unit KL-N20V manual address setup

After you have changed the settings, the new settings are saved to KV BUILDER,
and are reflected in Unit Editor environmental settings when KV BUILDER is next
started up.
Some of the setting items are reflected in the Unit Editor environmental settings
immediately after their settings are changed.
Display the Option Setup dialog box and change each of the setting items by the
following procedure.

1 Select {Option (O)} {Setup (S)} from Menu.

Other procedure
Click the button.

2 The Option Setup

dialog box is displayed.
Change the setting items
as required.
Details of each setting
item are described on the
following pages.

5-70
 5-12 Environmental Settings

Setting View
The following operations can be performed on the [Display setup] tab:

• Changing the unit display ratio

• Changing the font size
• Setting the cursor movement unit

[Tip]
This tab is already selected when the Option Setup dialog box is first selected.

1 Click the [Display setup] tab.

The setting items on the [Display setup] tab are displayed.
5

UNIT EDITOR
Changing the Unit Display Scale
Change the display scale of the units displayed in the unit placement area and slave
device placement area.
Default is 100%.
Change the display scale of the unit by the following procedure.

1 Select the display scale from Unit (Slave) Placement Area Scale.

Selects the view scale

radio button.

2 Click the "OK" button.

The new setting is immediately reflected.

5-71
 5-12 Environmental Settings

Changing the Font Size

Change the display size of fonts displayed in areas other than the unit placement
area and slave device setup placement area.
Default is 12 point.
Change the font size by the following procedure.

1 Specify the display size of fonts.

Clicking here
5 increases/decreases the display
font size (numerical value).
UNIT EDITOR

2 Click the "OK" button.

The new setting is immediately reflected.

5-72
 5-12 Environmental Settings

Setting the Cursor Movement Unit

Set movement of the cursor when the cursor key is pressed in the unit placement
area and slave device placement area.
The default cursor movement is set to movement by blocks.
„ When the cursor is moved by block
When the cursor moves to the end of the block, the cursor will not move beyond
the end of that block.

„ When the cursor is moved by system

When the cursor moves to the end of the block, the cursor will move to the
opposite side of upper or lower blocks.
5

UNIT EDITOR
Move the cursor one system at a time by the following procedure.

1 To set movement by system, unmark the [Move cursor by block]

checkbox.
To set movement by block, mark the [Move cursor by block] checkbox.

The active area moves by

individual systems when this check
box is unmarked.

2 Click the "OK" button.

The new setting is immediately reflected.

5-73
 5-12 Environmental Settings

Setting Color
The following operation can be performed on the [Color setting] tab:

• Changing the Unit Editor display colors

1 Click the [Color Setting] tab.

The setting items on the [Color Setting] tab are displayed.

5 Changing the Unit Editor Display Color

Change the color of text and background displayed on each window in Unit Editor
UNIT EDITOR

by the following procedure.

1 Select the desired item, and set the new color.

1
Select the radio button of the
text color or the background
color to be changed.

2 Displays the color according

Enter the color to be created
as RGB values. Enter each to the value entered at 2.
color using the bar or Hex
values. The color is Returns the item selected by
previewed in the frame on the radio button at 1 to the
the right. default color.

2 Click the "OK" button.

The new setting is immediately reflected.

[Tip]
The details of the new setting are reflected in all files.

5-74
 5-12 Environmental Settings

Setting Device Assignments

The following operations can be performed on the [Device assignment setup] tab:

• Relay setup (KV)

• DM (KV)

1 Click the [Device assignment setup] tab.

The setting items on the [Device assignment setup] tab are displayed.

Relay setup (KV) 5

Set the rules when relay devices on the KV-700 are automatically assigned. The

UNIT EDITOR
start relay and DM Nos. set here are also enabled in the manual setup. When Nos.
preceding already defined relay and DM Nos. are assigned manually, the
"Relay/DM/address is in error" dialog box is displayed when "Save and Exit" or
"Device Check" is selected, and the selected No. is not accepted. To change the
start relay or DM No., set the setting again.

1 Set the start relay No. when devices are assigned automatically.

1
Select the batch setting or
individual setting radio
button. 2
Enter the start relay No.

[Tip]
By the batch setup, relays are assigned pushed up in order from the side of the
CPU unit. By individual setup, relays are assigned pushed up in order from the
side of the CPU unit for each unit type (input, output, special etc.).

2 Click the "OK" button.

The new setting is immediately reflected.

5-75
 5-12 Environmental Settings

DM (KV)
Set the rules when DM devices on the KV-700 are automatically assigned. The start
relay and DM Nos. set here are also enabled in the manual setup. When Nos.
preceding already defined relay and DM Nos. are assigned manually, the
"Relay/DM/address is in error" dialog box is displayed when "Save and Exit" or
"Device Check" is selected, and the selected No. is not accepted. To change the
start relay or DM No., set the setting again.

1 Set the start DM No. when devices are assigned automatically.

5
UNIT EDITOR

2
1 Enter the start DM No.
Mark the checkbox when
assigning DM to units in 100
increments.

2 Click the "OK" button.

The new setting is immediately reflected.

5-76
 5-12 Environmental Settings

Setting Unit Color

The following operation can be performed on the [Unit color setup] tab:

• Changing the display color of units placed in the box display mode

1 Click the [Unit color setup] tab.

The setting items on the [Unit color setup] tab are displayed.

Changing the Display Color of Units Placed in the Box Display Mode 5
Set the display color of placed units when the display mode of units placed in the

UNIT EDITOR
unit placement area is set to the box display mode.

Set the display color of placed units by the following procedure.

1 Change the text color.

1
Select the unit to be
changed. Displays the color according
to the value entered in 2.

2
Enter the color to be created
as RGB values. Enter each
color using the bar or Hex
values. The color is
previewed in the frame on
the right. Returns the item selected in
1 to the default color.

2 Click the "OK" button.

The new setting is immediately reflected.

[Tip]
• Details set here are reflected only in the project currently being edited.
• The colors set here become the color of the relay and DM No. displays of that
unit in the ladder diagram.

5-77
 5-12 Environmental Settings

Other Settings
The following operations can be performed on the [Other settings] tab:

• Changing printing details

• Changing the window display order setting
• Changing confirmation message display
• Manual enabling of KL-N20V address settings
• Enabling the auto-layout function

1 Click the [Other settings] tab.

5 The setting items on the [Other settings] tab are displayed.

UNIT EDITOR

Changing Printing Details

Change the printing details. You can specify the following details:

• Insertion of a page feed at each unit setup

• Insertion of a page feed at each special unit setup
• Printing of a slave device tree

1 Change the printing settings.

Mark the check box for the item

to be set or unmark the check
box.

5-78
 5-12 Environmental Settings

„ New at each unit setup

Set whether or not to automatically insert a page feed for each unit when printing
unit setup information.
A page feed is automatically inserted for each unit when unit setup information is
printed.
As the default, a page feed is set to be inserted for each unit.
„ New at each special unit setup
Set whether or not to automatically insert a page feed for each unit when printing
special unit setup information.
A page feed is automatically inserted for each unit when special unit setup
information is printed.
As the default, a page feed is set to be inserted for each special unit.
„ Print slave tree
Set whether or not to print an image of the slave device unit arrangement when
printing KL and QL slave device setup information.
As the default, the slave device unit arrangement is set to be printed.
5

UNIT EDITOR
2 Click the "OK" button.
The new setting is immediately reflected.

Changing the Window Display Order

Display the Slave Device Setup screen on top of Unit Editor window. As the default,
the Slave Device Setup screen is set to be displayed on top of the active screen and
not the Unit Editor window.
Display the Slave Device Setup screen on top of Unit Editor by the following
procedure.

1 Mark the [Display Slave Setup screen before Unit Editor] checkbox.

Marking this check box displays

the Slave Device Setup screen
on top of Unit Editor.

2 Click the "OK" button.

The settings are reflected after Unit Editor is restarted.

5-79
 5-12 Environmental Settings

Changing Confirmation Message Display

Set whether or not to display the confirmation message that is displayed when
relay/DM No. addresses are automatically assigned. As the default, the confirmation
message is set to be displayed.

Confirmation message that is displayed when addresses are automatically

assigned

5
1 Unmark the [Display confirmation message when address auto-assign is
UNIT EDITOR

execuled] checkbox.

Confirmation messages are no

longer displayed when this
check box is unmarked.

2 Click the "OK" button.

The new setting is immediately reflected.

Manually Enabling KL-N20V Address Settings

Manually enable the KL-Master Unit KL-N20V address settings.
Normally, KL-N20V uses the address settings set in the Slave setup screen or the
KL Address Setup software. You can, however, unmark this checkbox to enable
manual entry in the unit setup screens to manually calculate and enter the address
assignments, for example.

5-80
 5-12 Environmental Settings

1 Mark the [Enable manual setup of KL-N20V addresses] checkbox.

Marking this check box enables

5
manual setup of KL-N20V

UNIT EDITOR
addresses.

2 Click the "OK" button.

The new setting is immediately reflected.
Enabling the Auto-layout Function
Enable the auto-layout function.
When the auto-layout function is enabled, unit arrangements not allowed on an
actual system can no longer be automatically identified and placed by Unit Editor.
As the default, the auto-layout function is set to enabled.

1 Mark the [Enable auto-layout function] checkbox.

Marking this check box enables

the auto-layout function.

2 Click the "OK" button.

The new setting is immediately reflected.

5-81
Chapter 6
EDITOR
This chapter describes how to edit ladder programs using the Editor, and how
to convert ladder programs.

6-1 Outline of Functions .......................................................... 6-2

6-2 Outline of Tool Bar Functions........................................... 6-3

6-3 Outline of Menu Functions................................................ 6-9

6-4 About the Edit Screen ..................................................... 6-18

6-5 View Modes ...................................................................... 6-22

6-6 File Management.............................................................. 6-27

6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines

........................................................................................... 6-44

6-8 Editing Mnemonic Lists................................................... 6-84

6-9 Copying, Moving and Deleting Ladder Programs......... 6-87

6-10 Circuit Libraries ............................................................... 6-96

6-11 Inputting Comments and Labels .................................. 6-102

6-12 Jump, Find and Replace................................................ 6-122

6-13 Displaying Use Status ................................................... 6-137

6-14 Unit Viewer ..................................................................... 6-139

6-15 Conversion ..................................................................... 6-141

6-16 Starting Up External Tools ............................................ 6-147

6-17 Printing Ladder Programs............................................. 6-161

6-18 Changing the Screen Display Color............................. 6-173

 6-1 Outline of Functions

6-1 Outline of Functions

This section briefly describes each of the functions available in Editor. For a detailed
description of each function, refer to the respective page.

Editor is for making ladder programs. As well as allowing you to input instructions
and register comments, it allows you to perform various editing operations.

Editor allows you to perform the following editing operations:

• Create ladder programs using ladder language and instructions

• Copy, move and perform other editing tasks
• Register comments to devices so that they can be transferred to the KV Series
Basic Unit, KV-700 Series CPU Unit, or KZ-300/350 CPU Unit
• Convert and register already made ladder programs so that they can be
6 transferred to the KV Series Basic Unit, KV-700 Series CPU Unit, or KZ-300/350
CPU Unit
EDITOR

• Print ladder programs you have made, lists of mnemonics, labels and comments,
and device states

Notes When Editing Ladder Programs

Maximum number of ladder rungs that can be edited

The maximum number of rungs that can be programmed to a ladder program is
29998. The number of rungs in a ladder program that can be edited on KV
BUILDER is 29998 rungs per program (single ladder program window). The
maximum block size is 100 rungs.
Ladder programs exceeding 29998 rungs cannot be made.

When the KV BUILDER operation speed slows down

If KV BUILDER is started up with many other application programs already started
up, the PC will run out of memory and resources in use by Windows. As a result, the
hard disk will be accessed more frequently, causing KV BUILDER operation to slow
down.
If this happens, exit other application programs or increase PC memory to ensure
memory and resources.

6-2
 6-2 Outline of Tool Bar Functions

6-2 Outline of Tool Bar Functions

This section lists the tool bar functions available in Editor. For a detailed description
of each function, refer to the respective page.

Standard
The tool bar groups together functions provided as standard in the Windows
operating system.
It is used for managing and printing files, cutting and pasting information, and
displaying Help.

Icon Name Function See page

Create project Creates a new project file, and opens the ladder program. 6-27

Open ladder diagram Opens an already saved ladder program. 6-36

Save ladder diagram Overwrites and saves the ladder program currently being edited. 6-34

Print Prints the ladder program. 6-161

6

EDITOR
Print preview Displays a preview of the printer ladder program. 6-170

Cut Cuts the selected range. 6-90

Copy Copies the selected range. 6-90

Paste Pastes cut data to the cursor position. 6-90

Describe operation
Displays Help. 1-50
method

6-3
 6-2 Outline of Tool Bar Functions

Edit
This tool bar groups together auxiliary functions used for making ladder programs.
It also allows you to undo/redo operations, display and edit comments, and find
information.

Icon Name Function See page

Undo Cancels the previous operation to restore the previous state. 6-83

Redo Cancels an undone operation. 6-83

Opens the Edit Comment dialog box and enables entry of device
Edit comment/label 6-103
comments.
Multi comment Opens the multi comment window, and writes the device comments.
6-111
window This enables you to edit comments while editing ladders.
Edit rung comment Writes the rung comment to the current cursor position. 6-118

Display/hide
6 comment
Switches display/hide of device comments on ladder diagram. 6-25

Search Opens the Search dialog box for searching for devices. 6-130
EDITOR

Replace operand Replaces devices such as relay Nos. 6-132

Conversion and transfer

This tool bar groups together functions for converting prepared ladder programs,
transferring them to the KV-10/16/24/40, KV-700 and KZ-300/350, and monitoring
and simulating transferred programs.

Icon Name Function See page

Convert Converts the ladder program currently being edited. 6-141

Display error Re-displays the content of the errors that occurred at conversion. 6-142
Converts the ladder program currently being edited, and transfers it
Transfer to PLC 7-40
to the KV.
Reads ladder programs from KV-10/16/24/40, KV-700 and KZ-
Read from PLC 7-41
300/350.
Reads ladder programs from KV-10/16/24/40, KV-700 and KZ-
PLC monitor 7-39
300/350 for monitoring.
Converts the ladder program currently being edited, and moves to
Simulator 8-14
the Simulator screen.

6-4
 6-2 Outline of Tool Bar Functions

Display
This tool bar groups together functions for setting how screens are displayed.

Icon Name Function See page

View mode Sets the display items of the Edit screen. 6-22

Enlarge view Enlarges the ladder diagram display ratio. 6-22

Reduce view Reduces the ladder diagram display ratio. 6-22

Displays a list of used/unused devices on the ladder program
Usage status display 6-137
currently being edited.
Unit Viewer Displays a list of devices currently assigned to each unit. 6-139
Extended ladder Enables extended ladder annotation for enabling multiple writing of
6-82
mode output instructions to a single ladder rung.

Instruction palette 6
This tool bar groups together the instruction palette for freely pasting instructions to
ladder diagrams, and CPU built-in positioning functions.

EDITOR
Important: "Edit CPU positioning parameters" and "Display/hide CPU positioning
instruction tool bar" can be used only when "KV-700" or "KV-700+M"
is selected at the PLC type setting.

Icon Name Function See page

Displays circuit libraries in which the user can register and paste
Circuit library 6-96
ladder circuits as desired.
Opens a palette of instructions that can be entered from the symbol 6-45
Instruction palette
list. 6-50
Edit CPU positioning
Sets the parameters of the CPU built-in positioning function. 6-147
parameters
Display/hide CPU
Displays and hides the toolbar for CPU built-in positioning function
positioning 6-71
instructions.
instruction toolbar

6-5
 6-2 Outline of Tool Bar Functions

Add-ins
This tool bar groups together tools for starting up the system setup software for
using KV-700 and the various special unit setup software.

Important: • This tool bar can be used only when "KV-700" or "KV-700+M" is
selected at the PLC type setting.
• MOTION BUILDER (Japanese) and PROTOCOL BUILDER
(Japanese) cannot be used if the respective software has not been
installed.

Icon Name Function See page

Unit Editor Sets the connection unit. 5-26
MOTION BUILDER Sets the parameters of the Positioning High-speed Counter Unit KV-
—
(Japanese) H20.
PROTOCOL
6 BUILDER
(Japanese)
Sets the protocol builder functions of the Multi-communications Unit
KV-L20.
—
EDITOR

Instructions 1
This tool bar groups together the basic instructions used on KV-10/16/24/40, KV-
700 and KZ-300/350.

Icon Name Function See page

Enter NO contact Enters an NO (Normally Open) contact. 6-59

Enter NC contact Enters an NC (Normally Closed) contact. 6-59

Enter NO contact
Enters NO contact OR. 6-59
OR
Enter NC contact
Enters NC contact OR. 6-59
OR

Enter coil Enters the OUT instruction (output coil). 6-61

Enter NC contact
Enters the OUB instruction (output reversed coil). 6-61
coil
Enter vertical
Enters a vertical connecting line. 6-78
connecting line
Delete vertical
Deletes a vertical connecting line. 6-80
connecting line
Enter horizontal
Enters a horizontal connecting line. 6-78
connecting line
Delete horizontal
Deletes a horizontal connecting line. 6-80
connecting line

6-6
 6-2 Outline of Tool Bar Functions

Instructions 2
This tool bar groups together additional instructions used on KV-10/16/24/40, KV-
700 and KZ-300/350.

Important: "LDP" and "MOV" instructions can be used only when "KV-700" or
"KV-700+M" is selected at the PLC type setting.

Icon Name Function See page

SET Enters the SET instruction. 6-63

RES Enters the RES instruction. 6-63

TMR Enters the TMR (0.1s subtraction timer) instruction. 6-65

TMS Enters the TMS (0.001s subtraction timer) instruction. 6-65

C Enters the C (add count) instruction. 6-65

LDP Enters the LDP (differential contact) instruction. 6-67

6

EDITOR
DIFU Enters the DIFU (up differential) instruction. 6-67

DIFD Enters the DIFD (down differential) instruction. 6-67

MOV Enters the MOV (move data) instruction. 6-69

LDA Enters the LDA (read data) instruction. 6-69

STA Enters the STA (store data) instruction. 6-69

CPU Positioning Instructions

This tool bar groups together instructions used by KV-700 for positioning control
built into the CPU.

Important: • To display the CPU positioning instruction tool bar, click the
"Display/hide CPU positioning instruction tool bar" icon .
• "CPU positioning instructions" can be used only when "KV-700" or
"KV-700+M" is selected at the PLC type setting.

Icon Name Function See page

PLSX Enters the PLSX (start X-axis positioning) instruction. 6-72

PLSY Enters the PLSY (start Y-axis positioning) instruction. 6-72

JOGX Enters the JOGX (X-axis jog operation) instruction. 6-72

JOGY Enters the JOGY (Y-axis jog operation) instruction. 6-72

ORGX Enters the ORGX (X-axis zero return) instruction. 6-72

ORGY Enters the ORGY (Y-axis zero return) instruction. 6-72

TCHX Enters the TCHX (X-axis point teaching) instruction. 6-72

TCHY Enters the TCHY (Y-axis point teaching) instruction. 6-72

6-7
 6-2 Outline of Tool Bar Functions

Suffix
This tool bar groups together tools for setting the radix of the data used in applied
and arithmetic operation instructions, and for setting the default format for the data
length.

Important: "Default suffix" can be used only when "KV-700" or "KV-700+M" is

selected at the PLC type setting.

Icon Name Function See page

Default suffix Sets the radix of the default when instructions are entered. 6-75

6
EDITOR

6-8
 6-3 Outline of Menu Functions

6-3 Outline of Menu Functions

This section lists the menus in Editor. For a detailed description of each function,
refer to the respective page.

File
This menu groups together file operation and printing related items.

EDITOR
Important: "Read Memory Card," "Write Memory Card" and "Output unit
specification CSV file" can be used only when "KV-700" or "KV-
700+M" is selected at the PLC type setting.

Item Function See page

New project Create new projects, and opens ladder program. 6-27
Open ladder Opens already saved ladder programs. 6-36
Close ladder Closes the ladder program currently being edited. 
Overwrites and saves the ladder program currently being edited to the current
Save ladder 6-34
project folder.
Creates a new project folder, and saves the ladder program currently being
Save ladder as 6-35
edited under a new name.
Verifies the ladder program currently being edited against other ladder
File-file verify 6-42
programs.
Read Memory Card Reads ladder programs from Memory Card. 4-15
Write Memory Card Saves the ladder program currently being edited to Memory Card. 4-15
Save Mnemonic List Saves the ladder program currently being edited as a mnemonic list. 6-38
Read Mnemonic List Opens the mnemonic list of already saved ladder programs. 6-39
Output unit Outputs the pint assignments and a list of comments for each of the set units
6-41
specification CSV file as a CSV file.
Print Prints the ladder program. 6-161
Print preview Displays a print preview of the ladder program. 6-170
Printer setup Sets up the printer to be used. 6-172
Last used file Displays the names of the last five recently edited files.
Change PLC type Changes the PLC type of the ladder program currently being edited. 6-29

6-9
 6-3 Outline of Menu Functions

Item Function See page

Auto-save setup Sets the ladder program auto-save function. 6-32
Sets so that the ladder program currently being edited is automatically read
Auto-read 6-31
when KV BUILDER is started up.
Input user Sets the various user information of the ladder program that corresponds to
6-30
information the cover sheet print function.
Exit Exits KV BUILDER. 1-43

Edit
This menu groups together items used when making ladder programs.

6
EDITOR

Important: "LDP" and "MOV" instructions can be used only when "KV-700" or
"KV-700+M" is selected at the PLC type setting.

Item Function See page

Undo Cancels the previous operation to restore the previous state. 6-83
Redo Cancels an undone operation. 6-83
Direct instruction input Opens the direct entry dialog box. 6-56
Delete instruction Deletes the symbol at the cursor. 6-74
NO contact input Enters a NO (Normally Open) contact. 6-59
NC contact input Enters an NC (Normally Closed) contact. 6-59
NO contact OR input Enters NO contact OR. 6-59
Instruction input 1

NC contact OR input Enters NC contact OR. 6-59

Coil input Enters the OUT instruction (output coil). 6-61
NC contact coil input Enters the OUT instruction (output reversed coil). 6-61
Vertical connecting line Enters a vertical connecting line. 6-78
Horizontal connecting line Enters a horizontal connecting line. 6-78
Horizontal connect line down to Enters horizontal connecting lines down to the last rung of
6-78
end of rung the program.
Delete vertical connecting line Deletes a vertical connecting line. 6-80
Delete horizontal connecting Deletes a horizontal connecting line.
6-80
line

6-10
 6-3 Outline of Menu Functions

Item Function See page

SET Enters the SET instruction. 6-63
RES Enters the RES instruction. 6-63
TMR Enters the TMR (0.1s subtraction timer) instruction. 6-65
Instruction input 2

TMS Enters the TMS (0.001s subtraction timer) instruction. 6-65

C Enters the C (add count) instruction. 6-65
LDP Enters the LDP (differencial contact) instruction. 6-67
DIFU Enters the DIFU (up differencial) instruction. 6-67
DIFD Enters the DIFD (down differencial) instruction. 6-67
MOV Enters the MOV (move data) instruction. 6-69
LDA Enters the LDA (read data) instruction. 6-69
STA Enters the STA (store data) instruction. 6-69
PLSX Enters the PLSX (start X-axis positioning) instruction. 6-71
PLSY Enters the PLSY (start Y-axis positioning) instruction. 6-71
CPU positioning

JOGX Enters the JOGX (X-axis jog operation) instruction. 6-71

6
instruction

JOGY Enters the JOGY (Y-axis jog operation) instruction. 6-71

ORGX Enters the ORGX (X-axis zero return) instruction. 6-71

EDITOR
ORGY Enters the ORGY (Y-axis zero return) instruction. 6-71
TCHX Enters the TCHX (X-axis point teaching) instruction. 6-71
TCHY Enters the TCHY (Y-axis point teaching) instruction. 6-71
Changes the device for the instruction at the cursor position. 6-45
Instruction palette/Change operand If there is no device at the cursor position, the instruction 6-50
palette is displayed. 6-76
Cut Cuts the selected range. 6-90
Copy Copies the selected range. 6-90
Paste Pastes cut data to the cursor position. 6-91
Insert loopback ladder Automatically loopbacks the ladder from the cursor position. 1-19
Insert free rung Inserts a free rung at the cursor position. 6-93
Delete rung Deletes the rung at the cursor position. 6-94
6-78
Edit connecting line Switches to the connecting line edit mode.
6-80
Edit list Enters ladder programs in mnemonic format in block units. 6-84
Opens the Positioning Unit pack instruction palette so that
Pack palette 9-7
you can enter Positioning Unit KV-H20S/H40S instruction.

6-11
 6-3 Outline of Menu Functions

Comment
This menu groups together items for editing device comments and rung comments,
and items for setting transfer to KV-10/16/24/40, KV-700 and KZ-300/350.

6 Item Function See page

Edit comment/label Opens the Edit Comment dialog box for entry of device comments. 6-102
EDITOR

Opens the multi comment window, and writes the device comments. This
Multi comment window 6-111
enables you to edit comments while editing ladders.
Edit rung comment Writes a rung comment to the current cursor position. 6-118
Rung Set Sets rung comment conversion. 6-119
comment
conversion Release Cancels rung comment conversion. 6-119

Read other file

Reads comment data from other ladder files. 6-112
comments
Save comments in text
Saves comment data in text format. 6-114
format
Read comments in text
Reads comment data in text format. 6-114
format
Change label Changes the label name at the current cursor position. 6-110
Change comment Changes the device comment at the current cursor position. 6-110
Sets up for moving device comments to the KV-10/16/24/40, KV-700 and
Comment move setup 6-121
KZ-300/350.

6-12
 6-3 Outline of Menu Functions

Find and replace

This menu groups together items used when making ladder programs.

EDITOR
Item Function See page
Rung/step No. Jumps to the specified rung or step. 6-122
Top Jumps to the start rung of the ladder program. 6-123
End Jumps to the end rung of the ladder program. 6-123
Registered rung Jumps to the registered rung. 6-123
Register rung Registers the rung at the current cursor position as the jump destination. 6-123
Previous block Jumps to the circuit block before the current cursor position. 6-126
Next block Jumps to the circuit block following the current cursor position. 6-126
Jump

Previous symbol Jumps to the symbol before the current cursor position. 6-127
Next symbol Jumps to the symbol following the current cursor position. 6-127
Top of rung Jumps to the start of the rung at the current cursor position. 6-128
End of rung Jumps to the end of the rung at the current cursor position. 6-128
Change: Jumps to the previous program change block from the current cursor
6-129
Prev block position.
Change:
Jumps to the next program change block from the current cursor position. 6-129
Next block
Find Opens the Search dialog box to search for devices. 6-130
Replace operand Replaces devices such as relay Nos. 6-132
Replace range Replaces devices such as relay Nos. in an area selected by the cursor. 6-134
Converts the LD instruction on the ladder program currently being edited to
NO/NC 6-136
the LDB instruction, and vice versa.
Displays the device used/unused list for devices on the ladder program
Use status 6-137
currently being edited.

6-13
 6-3 Outline of Menu Functions

Monitors/Simulator
This menu groups together items Monitors, Simulator and communications related
items.

Important: "Unit No. setup", "Modem setup", "PC modem setup", "KV-L20
modem setup", "Ethernet settings", "1 USB port", "2 Serial port", "3
6 Modem mode", "4 Ethernet port" and "Password setup" can be used
only when "KV-700" or "KV-700+M" is selected at the PLC type
setting.
EDITOR

Item Function See page

Serial port Sets the detailed settings of the serial port. 7-20
PLC communications parameter setup

Unit No. setup Specifies the unit No. of the communications destination KV-L20. 7-22
PC modem Sets the modem currently connected to the personal computer in the
7-23
setup modem communications mode.
Modem
setup KV-L20
Sets the modem currently connected to the KV-L20 in the modem
modem 7-26
communications mode.
setup
Sets details when performing communications with KV-700 over
Ethernet settings 7-32
Ethernet.
1 USB port Communications with the KV-700 is performed using the USB port. 7-20
2 Serial port Communications with the KV-700 is performed using the serial port. 7-20
3 Modem mode Communications with the KV-700 is performed using a modem. 7-28
4 Ethernet port Communications with the KV-700 is performed over Ethernet. 7-20
Reads ladder programs from the KV-10/16/24/40, KV-700 and KZ-
PLC Monitor 7-39
300/350 for monitoring.
Converts ladder programs currently being edited, and moves them to
Convert→ Move → Monitor 7-40
the KV-10/16/24/40, KV-700 and KZ-300/350.
Reads ladder programs from the KV-10/16/24/40, KV-700 and KZ-
Read program from PLC 7-41
300/350.
Verifies ladder programs in the KV-10/16/24/40, KV-700 and KV-
Verify with PLC program 7-42
300/350 with ladder programs currently being edited.
Password setup Sets a password to ladder programs currently being edited. 6-146
Edit offline device Edits device values in an offline state. 7-43
Converts ladder programs currently being edited, and moves to the
Simulator 8-14
simulator screen.

6-14
 6-3 Outline of Menu Functions

Convert
This menu groups together items relating to ladder conversion and checking of
errors.

Important: "Clear invalid operands" can be used only when "KV-700" or "KV-
700+M" is selected at the PLC type setting.

Item Function See page

Convert Converts the ladder program currently being edited. 6-141
Clears invalid operands that are created when device assigned units are
Clear invalid operands 6-143
deleted by Unit Editor.
Error display Redisplays the error details that occurred during conversion. 6-142
Checks whether or not there are redundant coils in the ladder program
Redundant coil check 6-145
currently being edited.

6
View

EDITOR
This menu groups together items used when making ladder programs.

Important: "Add-in", "Suffix", "Device for unit" and "Clear back color of changes"
can be used only when "KV-700" or "KV-700+M" is selected at the
PLC type setting.

Item Function See page

6-45
Instruction palette Opens the instruction palette that can be entered from the symbol list.
6-50
Displays the circuit library that can be registered and pasted by the user to
Circuit library 6-96
the ladder circuit.
Standard 6-26
Edit 6-26
Convert/move 6-26
Display 6-26
Pack instruction 6-26
Toolbar

Instruction palette 6-26

Selects the toolbar to be displayed.
Add-in 6-26
Instruction 1 6-26
Instruction 2 6-26
CPU positioning
6-26
instruction
Suffix 6-26

6-15
 6-3 Outline of Menu Functions

Item Function See page

Status bar Displays the status bar. 6-26
View mode Sets display items in the edit screen. 6-22
Enlarge Enlarges the display scale of the ladder program. 6-22
Reduce Reduces the display scale of the ladder program. 6-22
Label Sets the device display of the ladder program to label display. 6-25
Sets the device display of the ladder program to display with device
Comment 6-25
comments.
Device for unit Displays devices in the ladder program by device for unit annotation. 6-24
Change ladder color Changes the display color of the edit screen. 6-173
Changes the display color of devices assigned to each unit on Unit Editor
Change unit color 6-175
and the ladder program.
Clear back color of Clears the background color of the (program change display to be displayed
7-155
changes on the) circuit edited by online editing.
Extend Pack Extends all pack instructions currently closed on the ladder. 9-9
Expand Pack off Closes all pack instructions currently extended on the ladder. 9-9

Tools
6 This menu groups together environment setup items when making ladder programs
and respective setup software.
EDITOR

Important: • "MOTION BUILDER

(Japanese)" and "PROTOCOL
BUILDER (Japanese)" can be
used only when "KV-700" or
"KV-700+M" is selected at the
PLC type setting, and the
respective software is installed.
• "KV/KZ-350→KV-700 ladder
conversion" can be used only
when "KV-10(16)A/D", "KV-
24(40)A/D" or "KZ-350/300" is
selected at the PLC type
setting.

Item Function See page

Extended ladder Enables use of extended ladder notation that allows multiple output
6-82
mode instructions to be written to a single ladder rung.
Link both screens Displays ladder diagrams that are set for linked multiple screen display. 6-20
Unit Editor Sets the connected unit. 5-27
Unit Viewer Displays a list of devices currently assigned to each unit. 6-139
Edit CPU positioning
Sets the parameters of the CPU built-in positioning function. 6-147
parameters
MOTION BUILDER Starts up MOTION BUILDER (Japanese), the parameter setup software for
—
(Japanese) the Positioning Unit KV-H20.
A function for setting up parameters on the Positioning Unit KV-
Pos unit simple setup 9-13
H20S/H40S/H20G
PROTOCOL BUILDER Starts up PROTOCOL BUILDER (Japanese), the protocol macro function
—
(Japanese) setup software for the Multi-communications Unit KV-L20.
KV/KZ-350→KV-700 Converts the ladder data created for KV-10/16/24/40 and KZ-300/350 to data 6-152
ladder conversion for the KV-700. 6-159
Starts the panel setup software "Panel Editor" for the display function built-in
PANEL EDITOR 10-2
panel installation type PLC "KV-P" series.
Option Sets up the device auto-replacement function. 6-144

6-16
 6-3 Outline of Menu Functions

Window
This menu groups together items relating to display of ladder windows.

Item Function See page

Open new window Opens a new ladder edit window. 
Cascade Cascades opened ladder edit windows. 
Side by side Displays opened ladder edit windows side by side. 
Align icons Cleans up minimized ladder edit windows. 
1Sample.ldc (opened
file name)
Selects the window to set as the active window when two or more ladder edit
windows are opened.
 6

EDITOR
Help
This menu groups together how to operate KV BUILDER and how to use instruction.

Item Function See page

About Displays the version of KV BUILDER currently installed. 
Operation method Displays Help for how to operate KV BUILDER. 1-50
Shortcut list Displays a list of shortcut keys available on KV BUILDER. A-74
Displays instructions available on KV-10/16/24/40 and KV-700, and
Instructions A-16
explanations of these instructions.
User's Manual Displays the KV BUILDER User's Manual. 1-50

6-17
 6-4 About the Edit Screen

6-4 About the Edit Screen

This section describes how to view screens displayed in Editor and how to use
functions.

Names of Screen Parts and Functions

When KV BUILDER is started up, the ladder program window is not displayed; only
the main window is displayed. In the main window, you can make new ladder
program files, open previously made ladder program files, and display the ladder
program window.

[Tip]
When the auto-reading function is set, currently set files are automatically read
and displayed when Editor is started up.
"Setting Auto-reading of Files" page 6-31
6
EDITOR

Main window title bar Menu bar

Displays the name of the file being Displays the menu for executing
edited in the current window. commands.

Toolbar
The toolbar contains buttons for
executing instructions.
Clicking a button executes the
instruction.

Main window
This is the entire Editor screen.

Status display bar

Displays an explanation of the
currently selected functions and
Ladder program window key states.
This window is for entering instructions and
editing ladder programs.

6-18
 6-4 About the Edit Screen

Rung No.
This is the No. of the rung in the ladder diagram.

Instruction symbol
Symbol of instruction

Step No.
This is the step No. of the ladder diagram.
The step No. is displayed only after program
conversion, and display disappears when the
ladder diagram is modified.

Title bar 6
Displays the name of the file being edited.

EDITOR
Connecting line

Cursor
Select devices and other
elements. The cursor
moves to the left, right, top
and bottom.

6-19
 6-4 About the Edit Screen

About the Ladder Program window screen

Contact

Rung No.
Step No.
Scroll bar
Cursor

• To view parts of the window hidden from view, use the scroll bar or
keys.

Cursor movement
key: Moves the cursor.
PageUp PageDown key: Moves the cursor one page (screen) at a time.
6 Ctrl+ key: Moves the cursor one block at a time.
+ Tab key:
Shift Moves the cursor to the previous symbol.
EDITOR

Tab key: Moves the cursor to the next symbol.

Home key: Moves the cursor to the start of the rung.
End key: Moves the cursor to the end of the rung.

„ Monitoring ladder programs outside of the screen display area

If you move the mouse cursor to between the window frame and the section at
the top right of the scroll bar, the mouse cursor will change to . Now, if you
move the mouse cursor downwards in this state with the right mouse button
pressed, the window will be split into two parts. Each of these parts can display
other locations within the ladder program.
To switch the active parts of this split screen, either click the desired part with the
mouse, or press the Shift + F6 keys.

Note: When the mouse cursor is displayed as , the window size merely
changes and cannot be set to a split screen.
[Tip]
Two split screens can be scrolled interlocked with each other. This is handy
when displaying a long ladder diagram in a single operation.
Select {Tool (T)} {Link both screens (D)} from Menu to mark this menu item.

6-20
 6-4 About the Edit Screen

„ About the current window

The currently selected active window is called the "current window."
There are two ways of selecting the window to work in when two or more
windows are displayed in various mode screens (Editor, Monitors, etc.).
(The color of the title bar of the regular current window differs from other
windows.)

• Click the title bar of the window you want to set as the current window.
• All opened windows are displayed when {Window (W)} is selected from
Menu. In this state, select the title of the window you want to set as the
current window.

EDITOR

6-21
 6-5 View Modes

6-5 View Modes

This section describes how to change the display size and select display-related
items.

Changing the View Size

View (V) Enlarge (E) Ctrl + PageDown
Reduce (R) Ctrl + PageUp

There are five ways of changing the size at which ladder diagrams are viewed.
When Editor is first started up, the view size is 100%.
Change the view size by the following procedure.

The view size can also be changed in the Change View Mode dialog box.

6 1 Select either {View

(V)} {Enlarge (E)}
or {Reduce (R)}.
EDITOR

The display size is

enlarged or reduced.

Other procedure
Reducing the view size
Press the Ctrl + PageUp keys.
Enlarging the view size
Press the Ctrl + PageDown keys.

Changing the View Mode

View (V) View mode (D)
Set display settings in more details using the View Mode dialog box. Change the
display mode by the following procedure.

1 Select {View (V)}

{View mode (D)}
from Menu bar.
The View Mode
dialog box is
displayed.

Other procedure
Click the button.

6-22
 6-5 View Modes

2 Set the various items referring to the table below, and click the "OK"
button.
To disable the settings and close the dialog box, click the "Cancel" button.

EDITOR
Displays at twice (largest view size) the standard size. Select this setting
200%
when text is small and difficult to read.
150% Displays at 1.5 times the standard size.
120% Displays at 1.2 times the standard size.
View size
100% (std) Standard size
Smallest view size. Select this setting to check overall movement when the
80% number of cells that can be displayed in a single screen increases to the
maximum number.
XYM Displays the device name of the ladder diagram by XYM.
Signed decimal constants Displays decimal constants as signed constants in ladder diagrams.
Device label Displays the label name of each device in the ladder diagram.
Comment Displays comments in the ladder diagram.
Grid Displays the grid lines of cells in the edit screen.
Devices for units Displays device names in the ladder program by device for unit annotation.
Displays CM without displaying pack instructions when extending pack
Device annotation at pack inst.
instructions.
Comment 1 Displays comment 1.
Comment
Comment 2 Displays comment 2.
type
Comment 3 Displays comment 3.
Editing screen Reflects settings on edit screen of current window.
Mode Browse screen Reflects settings on verify screen of current window.
setup
range Both Reflects settings on both edit screen and verify screen of current window.
All windows Reflects settings on all windows.
* "Current window" refers to the currently selected active window.

6-23
 6-5 View Modes

Displaying Devices for Units

View (V) Device for unit (N) Shift + (Space)

Display the device name of symbols on Unit Editor expressed as devices for units
by the following procedure.
"Expressing devices for units" refers to expression of relays assigned in Unit Editor
as the "nth terminal of the nth connected unit."
For example, the 5th input relay No. at the input unit next to the CPU is expressed
as "0001-0005" and the 31st relay No. of the 3rd output unit from the CPU is
expressed as "03-00115".

Unit No.: Connection No. of unit assigned a number 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and so forth

6 starting from the CPU
Unit relay No.: Relay No. assigned the number of occupied relays starting from
EDITOR

00000

The device name of symbols on Unit Editor are expressed as devices for units by
the following procedure.

1 Select {View (V)} {Device for unit (N)}.

Device names are expressed as devices for units.

Other procedure
Press the Shift + (Space) keys.

6-24
 6-5 View Modes

Displaying/Hiding Comments
View (V) Comment (C) Ctrl + (Space)

Toggle between display and hiding of device comments on Editor.

The display comment is "comment 1".

Toggle between display and hiding of comments by the following procedure.

1 Click the button.

Each click of this icon toggles between display and hiding of comments.

button

Other procedure

Press the Ctrl + (Space) keys.

6

EDITOR
Displaying Labels
View (V) Label (L) Ctrl + Backspace
Display labels instead of device names for symbols on Editor.
Display labels by the following procedure.

1 Select {View (V)} {Label (L)}.

This displays labels instead of the device name.

Other procedure
Press the Ctrl + Backspace keys.

[Tip]
Labels can be used instead of device names when inputting symbols or
finding/replacing symbols. For example, devices names can be written as
follows when the label "SW1" is assigned to device 0000:

Substitute label display for 0000: SW1

Substitute label display for LD _ 0000 LD_: SW1 (_ stands for space)

6-25
 6-5 View Modes

Displaying/Hiding Tool Bars/Status Bar

View (V) Toolbar (T)
Status bar (S)
You can toggle between display and hiding of tool bars/status bar.

Tool bar

6
EDITOR

Toggle between display and hiding of tool bars/status bar by the following
procedure.

1 Select {View (V)} from Menu, and select the desired display setting.

Marked: Display
Unmarked: Hide

[Tip]
• To display more detailed types of tool bars, select {Tool bar (T)}.
• As the default setting, all items other than "CPU positioning instructions" are
marked. Each click of an item toggles between display and hide.

6-26
 6-6 File Management

6-6 File Management

This section describes how to create new ladder programs, and how to save and
read ladder program, code, comments, and mnemonic lists.
Creating New Projects
File (F) New project (N) Ctrl + N
When KV BUILDER is first started up, the ladder program window is not displayed.
Before you create a new ladder program, you must first create a new project.
Create new projects by the following procedure.

1 Select {File (F)} {New project (N)}.

The Input Project Name dialog box is
displayed.
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + N keys.

2 Enter the name of the new project and 6

where it is to be stored, and click the

EDITOR
"OK" button.

To change the directory, click the "Set" button, select the new directory,
and click the "OK" button.
If the "Reg special dev" checkbox is marked, the contact comments of special
devices such as CR and CM are automatically registered.

The Change PLC Type dialog box is displayed.

[Tip]
• When you create a new project, you cannot create a
project having the same name as an already existing
project. If you enter a duplicate project name, the
message "The project already exists." will be displayed.
• Folder directories can be specified by entering a full path
such as "c:\test1". Enter only the
project name. Specify the
directory at "Directory" at the
bottom of the dialog box. If a
character such as "\" that cannot
be used in file names is used,
the error message "Use characters allowed in file names." is displayed, and
the project file cannot be created.
• File names (project names) can be up to 70 characters long. Characters
entered beyond 70 characters will be ignored.

6-27
 6-6 File Management

3 Select the target PLC type for which

the ladder program is to be made,
and click the "OK" button.
The ladder program is displayed.
"Setting and changing the PLC type"
page 6-29

• The name of the ladder program that is displayed is the same as the name of
the project folder.
• When "KV-700" or "KV-700+M are selected as the PLC type, the
confirmation box for starting up Unit Editor is displayed. Click the "Yes"
button.

6
EDITOR

Note: Before exiting editing of a ladder program, be sure to save any edits to file.

Important: Ladder programs made specifically for "KV-10(16)A/D", "KV-

24(40)A/D" or "KZ-350/300" as the target PLC type are compatible
with LADDER BUILDER for KZ, and cannot be read on KZ-LADDER
(PC98, DOS/V).

[Tip]
The following shows PLC type settings and corresponding models.
• KV-700: Select this to use the KV-700.
• KV-700+M: Select this to use a KV-700 with extended memory (OP-
42138).
• KV-10(16)A/D: Select this to use KV-10AR/AT/ATP, KV-10DR/DT, KV-
16AR/AT/ATP or KV-16DR/DT.
• KV-24(40)A/D: Select this to use KV-24AR/AT/ATP, KV-24DR/DT, KV-
40AR/AT/ATP or KV-40DR/DT.
• KZ-350/300: Select this to use the KZ-350 or KZ-300.

„ Ladder program file names

File names for ladder programs conform to a format exclusive to KV BUILDER
and are appended with the "ldc" extender.

6-28
 6-6 File Management

Setting and changing the PLC type

File (F) Change PLC type (K)
When you create a new file, a dialog box for setting the type of PLC in use is
displayed.

Note: • The PLC type for ladder programs created for KV-10/16/24/40 and KZ-
300/350 cannot be changed for use on the KV-700.
• To use ladder programs created for KV-10/16/24/40 and KZ-300/350 on
KV-700, use the KV/KZ-350→KV-700 conversion function.
"Converting Ladder Programs for KZ-300/350" page 6-152
"Converting Ladder Programs for KV-10/16/24/40" page 6-159

1 Select the type of connected PLC,

and click the "OK" button.
To change the PLC type while KV
BUILDER is in use, select {File (F)}
6
{Change PLC type (K)} from Menu.

EDITOR
[Tip]
The following shows PLC type settings and corresponding models.
• KV-700: Select this to use the KV-700.
• KV-700+M: Select this to use a KV-700 with extended memory (OP-
42138).
• KV-10(16)A/D: Select this to use KV-10AR/AT/ATP, KV-10DR/DT, KV-
16AR/AT/ATP or KV-16DR/DT.
• KV-24(40)A/D: Select this to use KV-24AR/AT/ATP, KV-24DR/DT, KV-
40AR/AT/ATP or KV-40DR/DT.
• KZ-350/300: Select this to use the KZ-350 or KZ-300.

If the type of connected PLC is not correctly set, the error message "Wrong PLC
type code" is displayed during communications with the KV-10/16/24/40, KV-700
and KZ-300/350, preventing the ladder programs from being transferred to the PLC
or preventing use of monitor functions. Incorrect setting of the PLC type also causes
the PLC to malfunction.

[Tip]
When the PLC type is set to "KV-10(16)A/D", "KV-24(40)A/D" or KZ-350/300",
the ladder program data that you have made can be shared on LADDER
BUILDER for KZ.

6-29
 6-6 File Management

Inputting user information

File (F) input user information
On KV BUILDER, information relating to ladder programs for each project can be
registered as user information. User information is displayed as reference
information when projects are opened, and can be printed in the form of a cover
sheet when the ladder program is printed.
"Reading files" page 6-36
"Setting printing of cover sheet" page 6-163

Enter user information by the following procedure.

1 Select {File (F)} {Input user information} in

order from the menu.
The User Information dialog box is displayed.

6
EDITOR

2 Enter the user information.

Enter the time stamp of the ladder file as the

creation date.

Enter the creation date.

Enter the title name of the ladder file.

Enter the author of the ladder file.

Enter additional descriptions for ladder files and

other memos.

3 Click the "OK" button.

This saves the user information.

6-30
 6-6 File Management

Setting Auto-reading of Files

File (F) Auto-read (J)
You can specify files to be automatically read simultaneously when Editor is started
up.

[Tip]
• This feature is useful for always reading the same files.
• Up to 16 files can be set to be automatically read.

Set auto-reading by the following procedure.

1 Display the ladder program to

be set to be automatically read.

Note: To set a new ladder program

that is currently being made to
6
be automatically read, the

EDITOR
program must first be saved to
file.

2 Select {File (F)} {Auto-read (J)} in that order.

The confirmation dialog box is displayed.

3 Click the "Yes" button.

This sets the currently displayed ladder
program to be automatically read.
If there are any other ladder programs to
be set for auto-reading, repeat steps 1 to 3 above.

[Tip]
Up to 16 files can be set to be automatically read. If more than 16 files are set,
the message "Cannot set any more." is displayed. You can cancel auto-read
setting of files to which auto-read is already set so that new files can be set for
automatic reading.

6-31
 6-6 File Management

„ Canceling the auto-read setting

1 Display the ladder program whose auto-read setting is to be canceled.

2 Select {File (F)} {Auto-read (J)} in that order.

The confirmation dialog box is displayed.

3 Click the "Yes" button.

This cancels the auto-read setting
of the currently displayed ladder
program.

Setting Auto-saving of Files

File (F) Auto-save setup (U)
6 "Auto-save" makes a backup (copy) of ladder diagrams, comments and labels that
are currently being edited at fixed intervals.
EDITOR

When auto-save is set, files are automatically backed up at the preset time intervals.

Important: Auto-backup files are saved only for use at the next startup when KV
BUILDER ends in error. The backup file will be lost if you exit KV
BUILDER without using "Save as" to save the auto-backup file.

[Tip]
The following illustrates how auto-save works.

• When KV BUILDER ends normally

• When KV BUILDER ends in error

6-32
 6-6 File Management

Set auto-save by the following procedure.

1 Select {File (F)} {Auto-save setup(U)}.

The Auto-save Setup dialog box is displayed.

EDITOR
2 Mark the [Autosave] checkbox, and enter the auto-save interval.

Mark the checkbox. Enter the auto-save

This checkbox is marked interval. Default is 5
in the default setting. minutes.

[Tip]
Auto-save files are appended with the ".$dc" extender, and are generated inside
the project folder containing the ladder program currently being edited.

3 Click the "OK" button.

This enables the auto-save setting.

„ Canceling the auto-save setting

1 Select {File (F)} {Auto-save setup(U)}.

The Auto-save Setup dialog box is displayed.

2 Unmark the [Autosave] checkbox, and click the "OK" button.

This disables the auto-save setting.

Unmark this checkbox.

6-33
 6-6 File Management

Saving, Reading and Deleting Files

Saving Files
File (F) Save ladder (S) Ctrl + S
Save ladder as (A)
Saves a created ladder program.
There are two modes for saving ladder programs: "Save ladder" and "Save ladder
as".

Save ladder: Overwrites the ladder program currently being edited under the same
name.

Other procedure
• Click the button.

6 • Press the Ctrl + S keys.

EDITOR

Save ladder as: Saves the ladder program currently being edited under a different
name.

„ Saving ladder diagrams

1 Select {File (F)} {Save ladder (S)}.

This saves the ladder program currently
being edited to the current project folder.

6-34
 6-6 File Management

„ Saving ladder diagrams under a different name

1 Select {File (F)} {Save ladder as (A)}.

The Input Project Name dialog box is
displayed

2 Specify the project name and where

it is to be stored to save.
To change the directory, click the
"Set" button, select the new
directory, and click the "OK" button.

EDITOR
The Change PLC Type dialog box is displayed.

3 Click the "OK" button.

This creates the project folder, and saves the ladder program.

[Tip]
• Project folders cannot be saved under the same name
as an already created project. If you enter the project
using the same name, the message "That project
already exists." is displayed and the project is not
created.

• To overwrite the project using an already entered project name, delete the old
project folder before executing "Save ladder as."
"Deleting project folders" page 6-37

6-35
 6-6 File Management

Reading files
File (F) Open ladder (O) Ctrl + O
Read a saved ladder program and display it in the ladder program window.

Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + O keys.

1 Select {File (F)} {Open ladder (O)}.

The Open dialog box is displayed.

2 Specify the ladder program to read.

6 Specify the project folder

in which the ladder
program to be read is
saved. The default
EDITOR

setting is "Project".

Specify the file name.

Specify "Ladder diagram
file(*.ldc)" as it is as the file type.

Displays the user information

currently entered to the ladder
program to be read.

Specify the folder containing the ladder program to read.

Look in (I)
Normally, "Project" is opened.
File name (N) Enter the name of the ladder program to read.
Files of type (T) Specify the "Ladder diagram file(*.ldc)."
User info (I) Displays the user information entered at Input user info.

[Tip]
You can also specify ladder programs by entering the file name or by selecting
with the mouse from the list of files.

3 Click the "Open" button.

This opens the ladder program.

Note: • Ladder programs for KV-700 cannot be read when ladder programs for
KV-10/16/24/40 and KZ-300/350 are displayed.
• Ladder programs for KV-10/16/24/40 and KZ-300/350 cannot be read
when ladder programs for KV-700 are displayed.
• To read a ladder program for a different PLC type, first close the ladder
program currently displayed in the ladder program window, then read the
ladder program for the different PLC type.

6-36
 6-6 File Management

Deleting project folders

File (F) Open ladder (O) Ctrl + O
Delete already created project folders.

Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + N keys.

1 Select {File (F)} {Open ladder (O)}.

The Open dialog box is displayed.

2 Specify the project folder to delete.

Specify the project folder

6
in which the ladder

EDITOR
program to be deleted is
saved. The default
setting is "Project".

Specify the folder in which the ladder program to delete is saved.

Look in (I)
Normally, "Project" is opened.

3 Press the Delete key.

This deletes the project folder.

6-37
 6-6 File Management

Saving and Reading Mnemonic Lists

File (F) Save Mnemonic List (T)
Read Mnemonic List (I)
Save or read ladder programs to and from mnemonic lists. Mnemonic lists are
normally in text format, and are appended with the ".mnm" extender.

Note: This menu item is not displayed unless the ladder program window is
displayed.

Saving mnemonic lists

Save ladder programs currently being edited as a mnemonic list (text format) save
by the following procedure.
[Tip]
Mnemonic lists are automatically created when ladder programs are converted.

6 1 Select {File (F)} {Save Mnemonic List (T)}.

The Save As dialog box is displayed.
EDITOR

2 Specify the storage location of the mnemonic list.

Specify the project file to

save the mnemonic list to.

Specify the file name. Specify "Mnemonic

file(*.mnm)" as it is as
the file type.

Look in (I) Specify the project folder to save the mnemonic list to.
File name (N) Enter the name of the mnemonic list.
Files of type (T) Specify "Mnemonic file(*.mnm)".

[Tip]
The file is automatically appended with the extender ".mnm" when the file name
is set even if it is not specified when the file name is entered.

6-38
 6-6 File Management

3 Click the "Save" button.

The Select Comment Type dialog box is
displayed.

4 Select the comment to append to the list from the Select Comment Type
dialog box.

5 Click the "OK" button.

This saves the ladder program as a mnemonic list.

Reading mnemonic lists

Read mnemonic lists (text format) to the ladder program currently being edited by
6
the following procedure.

EDITOR
1 Select {File (F)} {Read Mnemonic List (I)}.
The confirmation dialog box is displayed.

• This menu item is not displayed unless the ladder program window is displayed.
• When a mnemonic list is read, it is read to the ladder program currently being
edited. For this reason, the ladder program is lost. If you need the ladder
program, either save the ladder program under a new name, or create a new
folder and read the mnemonic list to the new folder before you read the
mnemonic list.
"Saving, Reading and Deleting Files" page 6-34
"Creating New Projects" page 6-27

2 Click the "Yes" button

The Open dialog box is displayed.

6-39
 6-6 File Management

3 Specify the mnemonic list to read.

Specify the project folder

in which the mnemonic list
to be read is saved.

Specify the file name. Specify "Mnemonic

file(*.mnm)" as it is as
the file type.

Look in (I) Specify the project folder to read the mnemonic list to.
File name (N) Enter the name of the mnemonic list.
Files of type (T) Specify "Mnemonic file(*.mnm)".
6
4 Click the "Open" button.
EDITOR

This displays the ladder file.

An error is displayed and the ladder is not

displayed if the file you specified is not a
mnemonic file or the file is damaged.

6-40
 6-6 File Management

Saving Unit Specifications as CSV Files

File (F) Output unit specification CSV file
Save pin assignments and the list of comments for connected units as a CSV format
file by the following procedure.

1 Select {File (F)} {Output unit specification

CSV file}.
The Save As dialog box is displayed.

2 Specify the storage location of the CSV file.

6

EDITOR
Specify the directory to
save the CSV file to.

Specify the file name.

Specify "CSV file(*.csv)"
as it is as the file type.

Save in (I) Specify the location to save the CSV file to.
File name (N) Enter the name of the CSV file.
Save as type (T) Specify the "CSV file(*.csv)".

3 Click the "Save" button.

This displays the CSV file.

Sample printout

6-41
 6-6 File Management

Verifying Files
File (F) File-file verify (F)
Verify the contents of the ladder program currently being edited against the contents
of a saved ladder program file.
Verify the contents of the ladder program by the following procedure.

1 Select {File (F)} {File-file verify (F)}.

The Open dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the file to verify.

Specify the project folder

in which the ladder
6 program to be verified is
saved.
EDITOR

Specify the file name. Specify "Ladder diagram

file(*.ldc)" as it is as the
file type.

Look in (I) Specify the desired ladder program to verify.

File name (N) Enter the name of the desired ladder program to verify.
Files of type (T) Specify "Ladder diagram file(*.ldc)."

[Tip]
You can also specify ladder programs by entering file name or by selecting with
the mouse from the list of files.

3 Click the "Open" button.

This verifies the ladder programs. The results of verification are displayed in a
dialog box. If there is a difference between the ladder programs, "Verification
error" is displayed.

4 Click the "OK" button.

This displays the Error List dialog box when there is a difference between the
ladder programs.

When there are no differences: When there are differences:

[Tip]
Ladder program files are verified by mnemonics. Verification errors are
sometimes output even in programs that perform the same operation.

6-42
 6-6 File Management

5 If you select the error from the error list, and click the "Jump" button, the
display jumps to the difference that you selected. To close the Error
Display dialog box, click the "Close" button.

Displays the difference

(verify error line).
L0008
↑ ↑
Line Line No.

Select and click the

difference. The cursor Closes the Error
moves to the selected Display dialog box.
difference.

[Tip] 6
To redisplay a closed Error Display dialog box, click the button.

EDITOR

6-43
 6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines

6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines

This section describes how to enter and delete instructions and connecting lines
from ladder diagrams.

Entering Instructions
Ladder symbols are automatically entered when an instruction is specified.
There are four ways of entering instructions.

• By selecting and entering instruction symbols from the Instruction palette

window
"Entering instructions from the instruction palette" page 6-45

6
EDITOR

• By selecting and specifying instruction types and instruction codes from

the Instruction palette window
"Selecting instructions for entry (instruction palette)" page 6-50

6-44
 6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines

• By entering the initial letter of the instruction, and directly entering the
instruction by a mnemonic from the dialog box that is displayed
"Directly entering instructions by mnemonic" page 6-56

• By directly entering from an icon or menu (some instructions only)

"Directly entering instructions" page 6-59

EDITOR
Entering instructions from the instruction palette
View (V) Instruction palette (H)
Enter instructions from the instruction palette.
Symbols that are actually displayed can be entered to the ladder diagram by
dragging-and-dropping them from the Instruction Pallet window. This allows you to
enter instructions as if you are drawing a ladder diagram.

1 Move the cursor to the cell on the ladder program that you want to enter
an instruction to, and double-click that cell.

Double-click

Other procedure
• Select {View (V)} {Instruction Palette (H)} from Menu in that order.
• Select {Edit (E)} {Change Operand/Instruction Palette (W)} from Menu in
that order.
• Click the button.
• Select a cell on the ladder diagram that does not contain an instruction, and
press the key.
[Tip]
• Ladder programs can be made with the instruction palette displayed at all
times.
• If you select a cell containing an instruction, and press the key, the Change
Operand dialog box is displayed.
"Changing Operands" page 6-76
• If you are not yet accustomed to creating ladder programs or programming
instructions, you can perform these operations reliably without any mistakes if
you enter using the Instruction Pallet window.

6-45
 6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines

2 Specify the instruction.

1Click to select the symbol

to enter from the list.

2Select the suffix and

differential type (single-
scan execution) of
instructions to be entered
from the "Suffix/derivative"
radio button.

6
EDITOR

Displays the symbol to be

displayed on the symbol
display list reduced.
You can select the instructions to be displayed in
the symbol display list by group.
[List] is marked as the default setting. So, all
instructions are displayed. Instructions can be
displayed by group by unmarking the [List]
checkbox.

6-46
 6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines

[Tip]
• "Suffix/derivative" can be set when an instruction that can be set is selected. If
an instruction that cannot be set is selected, "Suffix/derivative" are displayed in
gray and cannot be set. The default suffix is "U". This default can be changed
by specifying the default suffix.
"Specifying the Default Suffix" page 6-75
• Types of instructions and actual instructions provided on KV-700

Type of Instruction Instruction

One-shot execution when ON
LD, LDB, AND, ANB, OR, ORB, LDP, LDF,
ANP, ANF, ORP, ORF, BLD, BLDB, BAND,
BANB, BOR, BORB, LD=, LD<, LD>, LD<=,
LD>=, LD<>, AND=, AND<, AND>, AND<=,
AND>=, AND<>, OR=, OR<, OR>, OR<=,
Basic instruction
OR>=, OR<>, OUT, OUB, SET, RES, KEEP,
DIFU, DIFD, ONDL, OFDL, SHOT, FLIK,
ALT, BOUT, BOUB, BSET, BRES, TMR,
6
TMH, TMS, C, ITVL, UDC, UDT, END,

EDITOR
ENDH
SFT, MEMSW, STP, STE, STG, JMP, ENDS,
Applied instruction W-ON, W-OFF, W-UE, WDE, MC, MCR,
CALL, SBN, RET, FOR, NEXT, BREAK
DW, LDA, STA, TMIN, MOV, BMOV, FMOV, @DW, @LDA, @STA, @TMIN, @MOV,
ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV, INC, DEC, ROOT, @BMOV, @FMOV, @ADD, @SUB,
CMP, ZCMP, ANDA, ORA, EORA, COM, @MUL, @DIV, @INC, @DEC, @ROOT,
NEG, SRA, SLA, RRA, RLA, WSR, WSL, @CMP, @ZCMP, @ANDA, @ORA,
TBCD, TBIN, MPX, DMX, GRY, RGRY, @EORA, @COM, @NEG, @SRA, @SLA,
DISN, UNIN, DISB, UNIB, SWAP, XCH, @RRA, @RLA, @WSR, @WSL, @TBCD,
FLOAT, INTG, DISF, UNIF, EXP, LOG, RAD, @TBIN, @MPX, @DMX, @GRY, @RGRY,
Operation instruction DEG, SIN, COS, TAN, ASIN, ACOS, ATAN, @DISN, @UNIN, @DISB, @UNIB,
ASC, RASC, DASC, RDASC, SMOV, SADD, @SWAP, @XCH, @FLOAT, @INTG,
SCMP, DISS, UNIS, LEN, RCOM @DISF, @UNIF, @EXP, @LOG, @RAD,
@DEG, @SIN, @COS, @TAN, @ASIN,
@ACOS, @ATAN, @ASC, @RASC,
@DASC, @RDASC, @SMOV, @SADD,
@SCMP, @DISS, @UNIS, @LEN,
@RCOM
HKEY, BCNT, DCNT, SER, MAX, MIN, AVG,
ZRES, FIFOW, FIFOR, EXT, WTIME, SEC,
Extended instruction RSEC, AJST, ARES, ACLR, HSP, DI, EI,
INT, RETI, CTH, CTC, PLSX, PLSY, JOGX,
JOGY, ORGX, ORGY, TCHX, TCHY

6-47
 6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines

• Types of instructions and actual instructions provided on KV-10/16/24/40 and

KZ-300/350

Type of Instruction Instruction

One-shot execution when ON
LD, LDB, AND, ANB, OR, ORB, OUT, OUB,
Basic instruction SET, RES, KEEP, DIFU, DIFD, TMR, TMH,
TMS, C, ITVL, UDC, END, ENDH
SFT, MEMSW, STP, STE, STG, JMP, ENDS,
Applied instruction W-ON, W-OFF, W-UE, W-DE, MC, MCR,
CALL, SBN, RET, FOR, NEXT
DW, LDA, STA, TMIN, ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV, @DW, @LDA, @STA, @TMIN, @ADD,
INC, DEC, ROOT, CMP, ANDA, ORA, @SUB, @MUL, @DIV, @INC, @DEC,
EORA, COM, SRA, SLA, RRA, RLA, TBCD, @ROOT, @CMP, @ANDA, @ORA,
Operation instruction
TBIN, MPX, DMX, ASC, RASC @EORA, @COM, @SRA, @SLA, @RRA,
@RLA, @TBCD, @TBIN, @MPX, @DMX,
@ASC, @RASC
Extended instruction HKEY, HSP, DI, EI, INT, RETI, CTH, CTC
6
• Data memory and internal register values are handled as follows according to
EDITOR

suffix:

.U Values are handled as 16-bit (0 to 65535)

unsigned binary data.
.S Values are handled as 16-bit (-32768 to 32767)
signed binary data.
.D Values are handled as 32-bit (0 to 4294967295)
unsigned binary data.
.L Values are handled as 32-bit (-2147483648 to 2147483647)
signed binary data.
.F Values are handled as floating -3.4E38 ≤ n ≤ -1.4E-45
point type real number data. n=0
1.4E-45 ≤ n ≤ 3.4E38
(number of effective digits: 7)

• The default suffix can be registered.

"Specifying the Default Suffix" page 6-75
"KV-700 Series Instructions Reference Manual"

Note: Suffixes are not provided for KV-10/16/24/40 and KZ-300/350. The suffix
function is available only for the KV-700.

6-48
 6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines

3 Specify the operand.

Click the "No.1 operand" button, and enter the operand valid for the instruction
that you specified.
Enter the device type at "Type" and numerical value at "Value".

1Click the "No.1 operand"

button. "Type" and "Value"
that can be entered
become available. Also, an
explanation of the selected
operand is displayed on
the operand guide below.

2Click the type of device

from "Type". Only types
that can be selected are
displayed. Also, an
explanation of the selected
operand is displayed on 6
the operand guide below.

EDITOR
3Select the mnemonic for
the instruction to enter
from the [Mnemonic]
pulldown menu. Also, an
explanation of the selected
instruction is displayed on
4You can also enter operands by clicking the the operand guide below.
"No.2 operand" or "No.3 operand" button
according to the specified instruction, and
repeating steps 2 and 3.

[Tip]
"Type" and "Value" can be entered directly from the keyboard. Before you
directly enter type and value from the keyboard, change the setting of the
Windows Japanese FEP (front end processor) to enable entry of single-byte
alphanumeric characters.

Types of device selection items under operand "Type"

Type Device Name

R I/O relay, internal auxiliary relay
CR Control relay (selectable only on KV-700)
T Timer
C Counter
DM Data memory
CM Control relay (selectable only on KV-700)
TM Temporary data memory
#TM Indirect selection
CTH High-speed counter
CTC High-speed counter comparator
# Decimal constant
$ Hex constant

6-49
 6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines

4 Drag-and-drop the
symbol selected in step
2 at the desired location
where you want to place
the instruction.
This enters the symbol.

Other procedure
Click the "OK" button or "Wr" or "Insert (I)" button.

Inserts the symbol at the cursor Enters the symbol at

position. the cursor position,

6 Discards the settings, and closes

and close the
instruction palette.
The symbol already
the Instruction Palette window.
entered at the cursor
EDITOR

position will be
Overwrites the symbol at the cursor position. overwritten.

[Tip]
If you click the "OK" button or "Wr" or "Insert (I)" buttons without specifying the
operand, the unspecified operand is indicated as "???". This is handy if you want
to prepare only the ladder circuit in advance when relay assignments are not
fixed.

???
C000 When the No.3 operand is not specified in the C instruction:
0001

Selecting instructions for entry (instruction palette)

Edit (E) Instruction palette/Change operand (W)
Use the tree hierarchy of the Instruction Pallet window to select and enter
instructions.
In the tree hierarchy, instruction codes are organized by group and type. Select the
instruction group or instruction type, and then select the specific instruction. You can
also specify devices by operand.

1 Move the cursor to the cell on the ladder program that you want to enter
an instruction to, and double-click that cell.

Double-click

Other procedure
• Select {View (V)} {Instruction Palette (H)} from Menu in that order.
• Select {Edit (E)} {Instruction palette/Change operand (W)} from Menu in
that order.
• Click the button.
• Select a cell on the ladder diagram that does not contain an instruction, and
press the key.

6-50
 6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines

[Tip]
• Ladder programs can be made with the instruction palette displayed at all
times.
• To display the Change Operand dialog box, select a cell containing an
instruction, and press the key.
"Changing Operands" page 6-76
• If you are not yet accustomed to creating ladder programs or programming
instructions, you can perform these operations reliably without any mistakes if
you enter in the Instruction Pallet window.

2 Unmark the [Palette] checkbox

on the instruction palette.
This displays the instructions as a
tree.

3 Specify the instruction.

6
2Click the mnemonic to

EDITOR
reflect the selected
mnemonic in the content
on the right side of the
Instruction Pallet window.
Also, an explanation of the
selected instruction
displayed in the instruction
guide.

Group 3Select the suffix and

Instruction type differential type (single-
Mnemonic scan execution) of
instructions to be entered
from the "Suffix/derivative"
radio button.

1Click to display
the lower layer.

[Tip]
• "Suffix/derivative" can be set when an available instruction is selected. If an
instruction that is not available is selected, "Suffix/derivative" are displayed in
gray and cannot be set. The default suffix is "U". This default can be changed
by specifying the default suffix.
"Specifying the Default Suffix" page 6-75
• The instruction list is organized in the following tree hierarchy:

6-51
 6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines

• Types of instructions and actual instructions provided on the KV-700.

Type of Instruction Instruction

One-short execution when ON
LD, LDB, AND, ANB, OR, ORB, LDP, LDF,
ANP, ANF, ORP, ORF, BLD, BLDB, BAND,
BANB, BOR, BORB, LD=, LD<, LD>, LD<=,
LD>=, LD<>, AND=, AND<, AND>, AND<=,
AND>=, AND<>, OR=, OR<, OR>, OR<=,
Basic instruction
OR>=, OR<>, OUT, OUB, SET, RES, KEEP,
DIFU, DIFD, ONDL, OFDL, SHOT, FLIK,
ALT, BOUT, BOUB, BSET, BRES, TMR,
TMH, TMS, C, ITVL, UDC, UDT, END,
ENDH
SFT, MEMSW, STP, STE, STG, JMP, ENDS,
Applied instruction W-ON, W-OFF, W-UE, WDE, MC, MCR,
CALL, SBN, RET, FOR, NEXT, BREAK
DW, LDA, STA, TMIN, MOV, BMOV, FMOV, @DW, @LDA, @STA, @TMIN, @MOV,
ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV, INC, DEC, ROOT, @BMOV, @FMOV, @ADD, @SUB,
6 CMP, ZCMP, ANDA, ORA, EORA, COM, @MUL, @DIV, @INC, @DEC, @ROOT,
NEG, SRA, SLA, RRA, RLA, WSR, WSL, @CMP, @ZCMP, @ANDA, @ORA,
TBCD, TBIN, MPX, DMX, GRY, RGRY, @EORA, @COM, @NEG, @SRA, @SLA,
EDITOR

DISN, UNIN, DISB, UNIB, SWAP, XCH, @RRA, @RLA, @WSR, @WSL, @TBCD,
FLOAT, INTG, DISF, UNIF, EXP, LOG, RAD, @TBIN, @MPX, @DMX, @GRY, @RGRY,
Operation instruction DEG, SIN, COS, TAN, ASIN, ACOS, ATAN, @DISN, @UNIN, @DISB, @UNIB,
ASC, RASC, DASC, RDASC, SMOV, SADD, @SWAP, @XCH, @FLOAT, @INTG,
SCMP, DISS, UNIS, LEN, RCOM @DISF, @UNIF, @EXP, @LOG, @RAD,
@DEG, @SIN, @COS, @TAN, @ASIN,
@ACOS, @ATAN, @ASC, @RASC,
@DASC, @RDASC, @SMOV, @SADD,
@SCMP, @DISS, @UNIS, @LEN,
@RCOM
HKEY, BCNT, DCNT, SER, MAX, MIN, AVG,
ZRES, FIFOW, FIFOR, EXT, WTIME, SEC,
Extended instruction RSEC, AJST, ARES, ACLR, HSP, DI, EI,
INT, RETI, CTH, CTC, PLSX, PLSY, JOGX,
JOGY, ORGX, ORGY, TCHX, TCHY

6-52
 6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines

• Types of instructions and actual instructions provided on PLCs on the KV-

10/16/24/40, KZ-300/350.

Type of Instruction Instruction

One-short execution when ON
LD, LDB, AND, ANB, OR, ORB, OUT, OUB,
Basic instruction SET, RES, KEEP, DIFU, DIFD, TMR, TMH,
TMS, C, ITVL, UDC, END, ENDH
SFT, MEMSW, STP, STE, STG, JMP, ENDS,
Applied instruction W-ON, W-OFF, W-UE, W-DE, MC, MCR,
CALL, SBN, RET, FOR, NEXT
DW, LDA, STA, TMIN, ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV, @DW, @LDA, @STA, @TMIN, @ADD,
INC, DEC, ROOT, CMP, ANDA, ORA, @SUB, @MUL, @DIV, @INC, @DEC,
EORA, COM, SRA, SLA, RRA, RLA, TBCD, @ROOT, @CMP, @ANDA, @ORA,
Operation instruction
TBIN, MPX, DMX, ASC, RASC @EORA, @COM, @SRA, @SLA, @RRA,
@RLA, @TBCD, @TBIN, @MPX, @DMX,
@ASC, @RASC
Extended instruction HKEY, HSP, DI, EI, INT, RETI, CTH, CTC

• Data memory and internal register values are handled as follows according to 6
suffix:

EDITOR
.U Values are handled as 16-bit (0 to 65535)
unsigned binary data.
.S Values are handled as 16-bit (-32768 to 32767)
signed binary data.
.D Values are handled as 32-bit (0 to 4294967295)
unsigned binary data.
.L Values are handled as 32-bit (-2147483648 to 2147483647)
signed binary data.
.F Values are handled as floating -3.4E38 ≤ n ≤ -1.4E-45
point type real number data. n=0
1.4E-45 ≤ n ≤ 3.4E38
(number of effective digits: 7)

• The default suffix can be registered.

"Specifying the Default Suffix" page 6-75
"KV-700 Series Instructions Reference Manual"

Other procedure
You can enter instructions by selecting the group of instructions from the group
radio button to the right of the [Instruction Palette], and selecting the required
instruction from the [Instruction Type] or [Mnemonic] pulldown list.

1Select the group of the 2Select the type of instruction to

enter from the [Instruction
instruction to enter from the Type] pulldown list.
"Group" radio button.
3Select the mnemonic for the
4Select the suffix and instruction to enter from the
differential type (single-scan [Mnemonic] pulldown menu.
execution) of instructions to Also, an explanation of the
be entered from the selected instruction is displayed
"Suffix/derivative" radio on the instruction guide below.
button.

6-53
 6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines

• The default suffix can be registered.

"Specifying the Default Suffix" page 6-75
"KV-700 Series Instructions Reference Manual"

Note: Suffixes are not provided for KV-10/16/24/40 and KZ-300/350. The suffix
function is available only for the KV-700.

3 Specify the operand.

Click the "No.1 operand" button, and enter the operand valid for the instruction
that you specified.
Enter the device type at "Type" and numerical value at "Value".

1Click the "No.1 operand"

button. "Type" and "Value"
6 that can be entered
become available. Also, an
explanation of the selected
EDITOR

operand is displayed on
the operand guide below.

2Click the type of device

from "Type". Only types
that can be selected are
displayed. Also, an
explanation of the selected
operand is displayed on
the operand guide below.

3Select the "Value" to enter

from "Value". Also, an
explanation of the input
range for the selected
operand is displayed in the
operand range guide
4You can also enter operands by clicking the below.

"No.2 operand" or "No.3 operand" button

according to the specified instruction, and
repeating steps 2 and 3.

[Tip]
"Type" and "Value" can be entered directly from the keyboard. Before you
directly enter type and value from the keyboard, change the setting of the
Windows Japanese FEP (front end processor) to enable entry of single-byte
alphanumeric characters.

6-54
 6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines

Types of device selection items under operand "Type"

Type Device Name

R I/O relay, internal auxiliary relay
CR Control relay (selectable only on KV-700)
T Timer
C Counter
DM Data memory
CM Control relay (selectable only on KV-700)
TM Temporary data memory
#TM Indirect selection
CTH High-speed counter
CTC High-speed counter comparator
# Decimal constant
$ Hex constant

6
4 Click the "OK" button or "Wr" or "Insert (I)" button.

EDITOR
This enters the symbol.
Inserts the symbol at the cursor Enters the symbol at
position. the cursor position,
and close the
instruction palette.
Discards the settings, and closes
The symbol already
the Instruction Palette window.
entered at the cursor
position will be
Overwrites the symbol at the cursor position. overwritten.

[Tip]
If you click the "OK" button or "Wr" or "Insert (I)" button without specifying the
operand, the unspecified operand is indicated as "???". This is handy if you want
to prepare only the ladder circuit in advance when relay assignments are not
fixed.

???
C000 When the No.3 operand is not specified in the C instruction:
0001

6-55
 6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines

Directly entering instructions by mnemonic

Edit (E) Instruction input 1 (1) Direct instruction input (D) Esc
Directly enter instructions by mnemonic.
When you enter an instruction in the dialog box that is displayed, a symbol for that
instruction is displayed on the ladder program.

Enter instructions by the following procedure.

[Tip]
This method of entry is faster than using the Instruction Pallet window to enter
instructions.

There are three ways of displaying the dialog box.

• Select {Edit (E)}
{Instruction
input 1 (1)}
{Direct
instruction
6 input (D)} from
Menu in that
EDITOR

order.
• Select a cell on the ladder program that you want to enter an instruction to,
and enter the initial letter of the required instruction.

• Select the cell on the ladder program to enter the instruction to, and press
the Esc key.

Directly enter instructions by the following procedure.

1 Display the dialog box.

2 Enter the instruction from the keyboard.

Note: Enter instructions in mnemonic format and leave a single-byte space as

the delimiter between the instruction and the device name (operand).

[Tip]
The following table shows how instructions can be abbreviated.
Instruction Text String Abbreviations
LD, AND A, X
LDB, ANDB B, LDI, LDNOT, ANI, ANDNOT
ORB ORI, ORNOT

6-56
 6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines

Instruction Text String Abbreviations

OUT O, Y
OUB OB
SET S
RES R, RST
TMR T, TIM
TMH TH, TIMH
TMS TS
C CNT
UDC CNTR
DIFU PLS, U
DIFD PLF, D
MC IL
MCR ILC
END E, FEND
ENDH
EORA
H
XORA, XOR
6
RETI IRET

EDITOR
INT I
W-UE WUE, WU
W-DE WDE, WD
W-ON WON
W-OFF WOFF
ADD +
SUB −
MUL *

The following instructions can be abbreviated only when "KV-700" or "KV-700+M" is

set the PLC type.

Instruction Text String Abbreviations

LDP, ANP P
LDF, ANF F
LD<, AND< <
LD>, AND> >
LD<=, AND<= <=
LD>=, AND>= >=
LD<>, AND<> <>
LD=, AND= =
BLD, BAND BA
BLDB, BANB BB
BOUT BO
BOUB BOB
BSET BS
BRES BR

6-57
 6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines

3 Click the "OK" or "Ins (I)" button.

This enters the instruction.
Clicking "OK" overwrites the instruction, while clicking "Insert (I)" inserts the
instruction at the cursor position.

Inserts the instruction at the cursor position.

Cancels entry, and closes the dialog box.

Here you can enter device comments for Enters the instruction at the cursor position. The instruction
the operands of entered instructions. already entered at the cursor position will be overwritten.

[Tip]
If you click the "OK" button or "Ins (I)" button without specifying the operand, the
unspecified operand is indicated as "???".

6 ???
C000
When the No.2 and No.3 operands are not
specified in the C instruction:
???
EDITOR

„ Correcting/changing entered instructions

Correct/change entered instructions by the following procedure.

1 Move the cursor to the instruction to be changed, and press the Esc key.

2 Enter the instruction from the keyboard.

Mnemonic No.2 operand

No.1 operand No.3 operand

Clicking this button changes
the cursor position.

3 Click the OK" or "Ins (I)" button.

This enters the instruction.
Clicking "OK" overwrites the instruction, while clicking "Ins (I)" inserts the
instruction at the cursor position.

Inserts the instruction at the cursor position.

Cancels entry, and closes the dialog box.

Enters the instruction at the cursor position. The instruction

already entered at the cursor position will be overwritten.

6-58
 6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines

Directly entering instructions

Directly enter instructions at the current cursor position.

Entering NO contacts/NC contacts

Edit (E) Instruction 1 (1) NO contact input (A) F5

NC contact input (B) Shift + F4

NO contact OR input (O) F5

NC contact OR input (I) Shift + F4

Enter NO contacts, NC contacts, NO contact ORs, or NC contact ORs by the

following procedure.

1 Select the cell to enter the instruction to.

6
2 Select {Edit (E)} {Instruction input 1 (1)}, and select the type of contact

EDITOR
to enter from the sub-menu.
The Change Operand dialog box is displayed.

Other procedure
Instructions can also be entered by the following procedure.

6-59
 6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines

3 Specify the operand.

Click the "No.1 operand" button, and enter the operand valid for the instruction
that you specified.
Enter the device type at "Type" and numerical value at "Value".

[Tip]
"Type" and "Value" can be entered directly from the keyboard.

1Click the "No.1 operand"

button. "Type" and "Value"
that can be entered
become available. Also, an
2Click the type of device explanation of the selected
operand is displayed on
from "Type". Only types the operand guide below.
that can be selected are
displayed. Also, an
explanation of the selected
6 operand is displayed on
the operand guide below.
3Select the "Value" to enter
from "Value". Also, an
explanation of the input
EDITOR

range for the selected

operand is displayed in the
operand range guide
below.

Types of device selection items under operand "Type"

Type Device Name

R I/O relay, internal auxiliary relay
CR Control relay (selectable only on KV-700)
T Timer
C Counter
DM Data memory
CM Control relay (selectable only on KV-700)
TM Temporary data memory
#TM Indirect selection
CTH High-speed counter
CTC High-speed counter comparator
# Decimal constant
$ Hex constant

4 Click the "OK" button.

This enters the symbol.

Enters the symbol at the cursor position. The symbol already

entered at the cursor position will be overwritten.

Discards the settings, and closes the Change Operand dialog box.

[Tip]
If you click the "OK" button without specifying the operand, the unspecified
operand is indicated as "???". This is handy if you want to prepare only the
ladder circuit in advance when relay assignments are not fixed.
???
When the No.1 operand is not specified in the LD instruction:

6-60
 6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines

Entering coils

Edit (E) Instruction input 1 (1) Coil input (C) F7

NC contact coil input (R) Shift + F7

Enter coils or NC contact coils by the following procedure.

1 Select the cell to enter the instruction to.

2 Select {Edit (E)}

{Instruction input 1
(1)}, and select the
type of contact to
enter from the sub-
menu.
The Change Operand
dialog box is displayed.
6

EDITOR
Other procedure
Coils can also be entered by the following procedure.

3 Specify the operand.

Click the "No.1 operand" button, and enter the operand valid for the instruction
that you specified.
Enter the device type at "Type" and numerical value at "Value".
[Tip]
"Type" and "Value" can be entered directly from the keyboard.

1Click the "No.1 operand"

button. "Type" and "Value"
that can be entered
become available. Also, an
2Click the type of device explanation of the selected
operand is displayed on
from "Type". Only types the operand guide below.
that can be selected are
displayed. Also, an
explanation of the selected
operand is displayed on
the operand guide below.
3Select the "Value" to enter
from "Value". Also, an
explanation of the input
range for the selected
operand is displayed in the
operand range guide
below.

6-61
 6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines

Types of device selection items under operand "Type"

Type Device Name

R I/O relay, internal auxiliary relay
CR Control relay (selectable only on KV-700)
T Timer
C Counter
DM Data memory
CM Control relay (selectable only on KV-700)
TM Temporary data memory
#TM Indirect selection
CTH High-speed counter
CTC High-speed counter comparator
# Decimal constant
$ Hex constant

6 4 Click the "OK" button.

This enters the symbol.
EDITOR

Enters the symbol at the cursor position. The symbol already

entered at the cursor position will be overwritten.

Discards the settings, and closes the Change Operand dialog box.

[Tip]
If you click the "OK" button without specifying the operand, the unspecified
operand is indicated as "???". This is handy if you want to prepare only the
ladder circuit in advance when relay assignments are not fixed.

???
When the No.1 operand is not specified in the OUT instruction:

6-62
 6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines

Entering sets/resets

( SET ) Edit (E) Instruction input 2 (2) SET (1) Alt + F1

( RES ) RES (2) Alt + F2
Enter sets and resets by the following procedure.

1 Select the cell to enter the instruction to.

2 Select {Edit (E)}

{Instruction input 2 (2)},
and select the instruction
from the sub-menu.
The Change Operand dialog
box is displayed.

Other procedure 6
Instructions can also be entered by the following procedure.

EDITOR
3 Specify the operand.
Click the "No.1 operand" button, and enter the operand valid for the instruction
that you specified.
Enter the device type at "Type" and numerical value at "Value".

[Tip]
"Type" and "Value" can be entered directly from the keyboard.

1Click the "No.1 operand"

button. "Type" and "Value"
that can be entered
become available. Also, an
2Click the type of device explanation of the selected
operand is displayed on
from "Type". Only types the operand guide below.
that can be selected are
displayed. Also, an
explanation of the selected
operand is displayed on
the operand guide below.
3Select the "Value" to enter
from "Value". Also, an
explanation of the input
range for the selected
operand is displayed in the
operand range guide
below.

6-63
 6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines

Types of device selection items under operand "Type"

Type Device Name

R I/O relay, internal auxiliary relay
CR Control relay (selectable only on KV-700)
T Timer
C Counter
DM Data memory
CM Control relay (selectable only on KV-700)
TM Temporary data memory
#TM Indirect selection
CTH High-speed counter
CTC High-speed counter comparator
# Decimal constant
$ Hex constant

6 4 Click the "OK" button.

This enters the symbol.
EDITOR

Enters the symbol at the cursor position. The symbol already

entered at the cursor position will be overwritten.

Discards the settings, and closes the Change Operand dialog box.

[Tip]
If you click the "OK" button without specifying the operand, the unspecified
operand is indicated as "???". This is handy if you want to prepare only the
ladder circuit in advance when relay assignments are not fixed.

???
( SET ) When the No.1 operand is not specified in the SET instruction:

6-64
 6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines

Entering timers and counters

T000 Edit (E) Instruction input 2 (2) TMR (3) Alt + F3

T
S 000 TMS (5) Alt + F5
C000 C (6) Alt +0
Enter timers and counters by the following procedure.

1 Select the cell to enter the instruction to.

2 Select {Edit (E)}

{Instruction input 2 (2)},
and select the instruction
from the sub-menu.
The Change Operand
dialog box is displayed.

6
Other procedure

EDITOR
Instructions can also be entered by the following procedure.

3 Specify the operand.

Click the "No.1 operand" button, and enter the operand valid for the instruction
that you specified.
Enter the device type at "Type" and numerical value at "Value".

[Tip]
"Type" and "Value" can be entered directly from the keyboard.

1Click the "No.1 operand" 2Click the type of device

button. "Type" and "Value"
from "Type". Only types
that can be entered
that can be selected are
become available. Also, an
displayed. Also, an
explanation of the selected
explanation of the selected
operand is displayed on
operand is displayed on
the operand guide below.
the operand guide below.

4For timer instructions, click

the "No.2 operand" button,
3Select the "Value" to enter
and for counter from "Value". Also, an
instructions, click the "No.2 explanation of the input
operand" and "No.3 range for the selected
operand" buttons, and operand is displayed in the
operand range guide
repeat steps 2 and 3 to
below.
enter operands.

6-65
 6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines

Types of device selection items under operand "Type"

Type Device Name

R I/O relay, internal auxiliary relay
CR Control relay (selectable only on KV-700)
T Timer
C Counter
DM Data memory
CM Control relay (selectable only on KV-700)
TM Temporary data memory
#TM Indirect selection
CTH High-speed counter
CTC High-speed counter comparator
# Decimal constant
$ Hex constant

6 4 Click the "OK" button.

This enters the symbol.
EDITOR

Enters the symbol at the cursor position. The symbol already

entered at the cursor position will be overwritten.

Discards the settings, and closes the Change Operand dialog box.

[Tip]
If you click the "OK" button without specifying the operand, the unspecified
operand is indicated as "???". This is handy if you want to prepare only the
ladder circuit in advance when relay assignments are not fixed.

???
T000 When the No.2 operand is not specified in the TMR instruction:

6-66
 6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines

Entering differential contacts and outputs

Edit (E) Instruction input 2 (2) LDP (7) Alt + F7

DIFU DIFU (8) Alt + F8
DIFU DIFD (9) Alt + F9
Enter differential contact and outputs by the following procedure.

Note: "LDP" can be used only when "KV-700" or "KV-700+M" is selected at the
PLC type setting.

1 Select the cell to enter the instruction to.

2 Select {Edit (E)} {Instruction input 2 (2)}, and select the instruction
from the sub-menu.
6
The Change Device dialog box is displayed.

EDITOR
Other procedure
Instructions can also be entered by the following procedure.

6-67
 6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines

3 Specify the operand.

Click the "No.1 operand" button, and enter the operand valid for the instruction
that you specified.
Enter the device type at "Type" and numerical value at "Value".

[Tip]
"Type" and "Value" can be entered directly from the keyboard.

1Click the "No.1 operand"

button. "Type" and "Value"
that can be entered
become available. Also, an
2Click the type of device explanation of the selected
operand is displayed on
from "Type". Only types the operand guide below.
that can be selected are
displayed. Also, an
explanation of the selected
operand is displayed on 3Select the "Value" to enter
6 the operand guide below.
from "Value". Also, an
explanation of the input
EDITOR

range for the selected

operand is displayed in the
operand range guide
below.

Types of device selection items under operand "Type"

Type Device Name

R I/O relay, internal auxiliary relay
CR Control relay (selectable only on KV-700)
T Timer
C Counter
DM Data memory
CM Control relay (selectable only on KV-700)
TM Temporary data memory
#TM Indirect selection
CTH High-speed counter
CTC High-speed counter comparator
# Decimal constant
$ Hex constant

4 Click the "OK" button.

This enters the symbol.

Enters the symbol at the cursor position. The symbol already

entered at the cursor position will be overwritten.

Discards the settings, and closes the Change Operand dialog box.

[Tip]
If you click the "OK" button without specifying the operand, the unspecified
operand is indicated as "???". This is handy if you want to prepare only the
ladder circuit in advance when relay assignments are not fixed.
???
DIFU When the No.1 operand is not specified in the DIFU instruction:

6-68
 6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines

Entering data move instructions

MOV
Edit (E) Instruction input 2 (2) MOV (0) Alt + F10

LDA LDA (<) Alt + F11

STA STA (>) Alt + F12
Enter data move instructions by the following procedure.

Note: "MOV" can be used only when "KV-700" or "KV-700+M" is selected at the
PLC type setting.

1 Select the cell to enter the instruction to.

2 Select {Edit (E)} {Instruction input 2 (2)}, and select the instruction
from the sub-menu. 6
The Change Operand dialog box is displayed.

EDITOR
Other procedure
Instructions can also be entered by the following procedure.

6-69
 6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines

3 Specify the operand.

Click the "No.1 operand" button, and enter the operand valid for the instruction
that you specified.
Enter the device type at "Type" and numerical value at "Value".

[Tip]
"Type" and "Value" can be entered directly from the keyboard.

1Click the "No.1 operand" button. "Type" and

"Value" that can be entered become available.
Also, an explanation of the selected operand
is displayed on the operand guide below.

2Click the type of device from "Type". Only

types that can be selected are displayed.
6 Also, an explanation of the selected operand
is displayed on the operand guide below.
EDITOR

3Select the "Value" to enter from "Value". Also,

an explanation of the input range for the
selected operand is displayed in the operand
range guide below.

4 For the MOV instruction, click the "No.2 operand" button and
repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter the operand.

Types of device selection items under operand "Type"

Type Device Name

R I/O relay, internal auxiliary relay
CR Control relay (selectable only on KV-700)
T Timer
C Counter
DM Data memory
CM Control relay (selectable only on KV-700)
TM Temporary data memory
#TM Indirect selection
CTH High-speed counter
CTC High-speed counter comparator
# Decimal constant
$ Hex constant

6-70
 6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines

4 Click the "OK" button.

This enters the symbol.

Enters the symbol at the cursor position. The symbol already

entered at the cursor position will be overwritten.

Discards the settings, and closes the Change Operand dialog box.

[Tip]
If you click the "OK" button without specifying the operand, the unspecified
operand is indicated as "???". This is handy if you want to prepare only the
ladder circuit in advance when relay assignments are not fixed.

MOV
When the No.2 operand is not specified in
DM0000 ???
the MOV instruction:

6
Entering CPU positioning instructions

EDITOR
[ PLSX ] Edit (E) CPU positioning instruction (3) PLSX (1) Alt +1
[ PLSY ] PLSX (2) Alt +2
JOGX JOGY
CW CW JOGX (3) Alt +3
CCW CCW
HIGH HIGH JOGY (4) Alt +4
ORGY (5) Alt +5
[ ORGX ]
[ ORGY ] ORGY (6) Alt +6
[ TCHX ] TCHX (7) Alt +7
[ TCHY ] TCHY (8) Alt +8

Enter CPU built-in positioning parameters by the following procedure.

Note: • CPU positioning parameters can be used only when "KV-700" or "KV-
700+M" is selected at the PLC type setting.
• Normally, the CPU positioning parameter tool bar is not displayed. To
display the tool bar, either click the button (display/hide CPU
positioning parameter tool bar), or select {View (V)} {Tool bar (T)}
{CPU positioning instruction (3)} from menu.
• To use CPU built-in positioning parameters, positioning parameters must
be set separately in addition to entry of instructions.
"Starting Up Edit CPU Positioning Parameter" page 6-147

6-71
 6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines

1 Select the cell to enter the

instruction to.

2 Select {Edit (E)} {CPU

positioning instruction (3)},
and select the instruction to
enter from the sub-menu.
The Change Operand dialog
box is displayed.
Other procedure
Instructions can also be entered by the following procedure.

6
EDITOR

[Tip]
The JOGX, JOGY, ORGX, ORGY, TCHX and TCHY instructions do not have
operands. For this reason, the Change Operand dialog box is not displayed;
only symbols are displayed.

3 Specify the operand.

Click the "No.1 operand" button, and enter the operand valid for the instruction
that you specified.
Enter the device type at "Type" and numerical value at "Value".
[Tip]
"Type" and "Value" can be entered directly from the keyboard.

1Click the "No.1 operand"

button. "Type" and "Value"
that can be entered
become available. Also, an
2Click the type of device explanation of the selected
operand is displayed on
from "Type". Only types the operand guide below.
that can be selected are
displayed. Also, an
explanation of the selected
operand is displayed on
the operand guide below.
3Select the "Value" to enter
from "Value". Also, an
explanation of the input
range for the selected
operand is displayed in the
operand range guide
below.

6-72
 6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines

Types of device selection items under operand "Type"

Type Device Name

R I/O relay, internal auxiliary relay
CR Control relay (selectable only on KV-700)
T Timer
C Counter
DM Data memory
CM Control relay (selectable only on KV-700)
TM Temporary data memory
#TM Indirect selection
CTH High-speed counter
CTC High-speed counter comparator
# Decimal constant
$ Hex constant

4 Click the "OK" button.

6
This enters the symbol.

EDITOR
Enters the symbol at the cursor position. The symbol already
entered at the cursor position will be overwritten.

Discards the settings, and closes the Change Operand dialog box.

[Tip]
If you click the "OK" button without specifying the operand, the unspecified
operand is indicated as "???". This is handy if you want to prepare only the
ladder circuit in advance when relay assignments are not fixed.
???
[ PLSX ] When the No.1 operand is not specified in the PLSX instruction:

6-73
 6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines

Delete Instruction
Edit (E) Instruction input 1 (1) Delete instruction (E) (Space) / Delete

Delete entered instructions by the following procedure.

1 Select {Edit (E)} {Instruction input 1 (1)} {Delete instruction (E)}

from Menu in that order.

Other procedure
• Select the cell on the ladder program to enter the instruction, and press the
6 (Space) key.

• Select the cell on the ladder program to enter the instruction, and press the
EDITOR

Delete key.

6-74
 6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines

Specifying the Default Suffix

Specifying the default suffix in advance frees you from the need to enter the suffix
when you are entering instructions. The default suffix when KV BUILDER is first
started up is ".U" (values are handled as unsigned binary data).

[Tip]
Once the default suffix is set, it is automatically stored to KV BUILDER, and so it
is enabled when other files are edited.

Important: The default suffix can be specified only when "KV-700" or "KV-
700+M" is selected at the PLC type setting.

Specify the default suffix by the following procedure.

1 Select the suffix to set as the default from the [Suffix] pulldown list. 6
This sets the default suffix.

EDITOR
[Tip]
• Even if the default suffix is set, the default suffix you have set can be ignored
and a different suffix can be entered by direct entry.
• If the instruction you have entered does not match the default suffix, the suffix
".U" (values are handled as unsigned binary data) is set to the instruction.
• Data memory and internal register values are handled as follows according to
suffix:

.U Values are handled as 16-bit (0 to 65535)

unsigned binary data.
.S Values are handled as 16-bit (-32768 to 32767)
signed binary data.
.D Values are handled as 32-bit (0 to 4294967295)
unsigned binary data.
.L Values are handled as 32-bit (-2147483648 to 2147483647)
signed binary data.
.F Values are handled as floating -3.4E38 ≤ n ≤ -1.4E-45
point type real number data. n=0
1.4E-45 ≤ n ≤ 3.4E38
(number of effective digits: 7)

6-75
 6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines

Changing Operands
Edit (E) Instruction palette/Change operand (W)
Change the operand at the current cursor position by the following procedure.

1 Select the cell containing the instruction whose operand is to be

changed.

2 Select {Edit (E)} {Instruction

palette/Change operand (W)}.
The Change Operand dialog box is
displayed.
Other procedure
Press the key.
[Tip]
6 If you select a cell not containing an instruction, and press the key, the
Instruction palette window is displayed.
EDITOR

"Entering instructions from the instruction palette" page 6-45

3 Specify the operand.

Click the "No.1 operand" button, and enter the operand valid for the instruction
that you specified.
Enter the device type at "Type" and numerical value at "Value".
[Tip]
"Type" and "Value" can be entered directly from the keyboard.

1Click the "No.1 operand" button. "Type" and

"Value" that can be entered become available.
Also, an explanation of the selected operand
is displayed on the operand guide below.

2Click the type of device from "Type". Only

types that can be selected are displayed.
Also, an explanation of the selected operand
is displayed on the operand guide below.

3Select the "Value" to enter from "Value". Also,

an explanation of the input range for the
selected operand is displayed in the operand
range guide below.

4 You can also enter operands by clicking the "No.2 operand" or "No.3 operand" button
according to the specified instruction, and repeating steps 2 and 3.

6-76
 6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines

Types of device selection items under operand "Type"

Type Device Name

R I/O relay, internal auxiliary relay
CR Control relay (selectable only on KV-700)
T Timer
C Counter
DM Data memory
CM Control relay (selectable only on KV-700)
TM Temporary data memory
#TM Indirect selection
CTH High-speed counter
CTC High-speed counter comparator
# Decimal constant
$ Hex constant

4 Click the "OK" button.

6
This enters the symbol.

EDITOR
Changes the operand at the cursor position.

Discards the settings, and closes the Change Operand dialog box.

[Tip]
If you click the "OK" button without specifying the operand, the unspecified
operand is indicated as "???". This is handy if you want to prepare only the
ladder circuit in advance when relay assignments are not fixed.

??? When the No.2 and No.3 operands are not

C000 specified in the C instruction:
???

6-77
 6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines

Entering/Deleting Connecting Lines

Edit (E) Edit connecting line (K) Ctrl +K, ¥
Instruction input 1 (1) Vertical connecting line (V) F8 , /

Horizontal connecting line (H) F9 ,

Horizontal connect line down to end of rung (-) Alt +

Entering connecting lines
There are three ways of entering connecting lines.

„ By pressing keys
F8 , / : Draws a connecting line downwards from the cursor
position.
F9 , : Draws a connecting line to the right from the cursor
position.

6 Alt + : Draws a connecting line to the left, right, top or bottom

matched to the arrow key direction.
EDITOR

Ctrl + Tab , Alt + : Draws a connecting line to the rung end from the cursor
position.

„ By clicking icons
: Draws a connecting line downwards from the cursor position.
: Draws a connecting line to the right from the cursor position.

„ By using the mouse and arrow keys in the Connecting Line Edit mode
In the Connecting Line Edit mode, you can use the mouse and arrow keys to
draw connecting lines.
Enter the Connecting Line Edit mode by the following procedure.
To return to the regular edit mode from the Connecting Line Edit mode, perform
the same operation.

1 Click on the ladder

program window with the
right mouse button, and
select {Edit connecting line
(K)} from the menu that is
displayed.

Other procedure
• Select {Edit (E)} {Edit connecting
line (K)} from Menu.
• Press the Ctrl + K keys.
• Press the ¥ key.

6-78
 6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines

In the Connecting Line Edit mode, draw connecting lines by the following procedure.

1 Enter the Connecting Line Edit mode.

The cursor changes shape.

Normal Edit mode Connecting Line Edit mode

[Tip]
In the Connecting Line Edit mode, "Edit connecting line (K)" in the menu is
marked.
6

EDITOR
2 Move the mouse cursor to the start position on the connecting line.

3 Drag the mouse from the start position on the connecting line to the final
position on the connecting line.
This draws the connecting line.

Drag mouse.

Other procedure
When drawing connecting lines using the arrow keys, press the at the first
position, and finally press the key after moving by the arrow key in the
direction that you want to draw the connecting line.

6-79
 6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines

Deleting connecting lines

Edit (E) Edit connecting line (K) Ctrl +K, ¥
Delete vertical connecting line (X) Shift + F8
Delete horizontal connecting line (Y) Shift + F9

Delete connecting lines.

„ By pressing keys
Shift + F8 : Deletes vertical connecting lines to the left of the
cursor position.
(Space) : Deletes the horizontal connecting line at the cursor
position.
Backspace : Deletes the horizontal connecting line at the cursor
position.

6 Delete : Deletes the horizontal connecting line at the cursor

position.
+ Alt + : Deletes a connecting line to the left, right, top or
EDITOR

Shift
bottom matched to the arrow key direction.

„ By clicking icons
: Deletes vertical connecting lines to the left of the cursor position.
: Deletes horizontal connecting lines at the cursor position.

„ By using the mouse and arrow keys in the Connecting Line Edit mode
In the Connecting Line Edit mode, you can use the mouse and arrow keys to
delete connecting lines.
Enter the Connecting Line Edit mode by the following procedure.
To return to the regular edit mode from the Connecting Line Edit mode, perform
the same operation.

1 Click on the ladder

program window with the
right mouse button, and
select {Edit connecting line
(K)} from the menu that is
displayed.

Other procedure
• Select {Edit (E)} {Edit connecting
line (K)} from Menu.
• Press the Ctrl + K keys.
• Press the ¥ key.

6-80
 6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines

In the Connecting Line Edit mode, delete connecting lines by the following
procedure.

1 Enter the Connecting Line Edit mode.

The cursor changes shape.

Normal Edit mode Connecting Line Edit mode

[Tip]
In the Connecting Line Edit mode, "Edit connecting line (K)" in the menu is
marked.
6

EDITOR
2 Move the mouse cursor to the first position on the connecting line to be
deleted.

3 Drag the mouse from the first position on the connecting line to the final
position on the connecting line with the Shift key held down.
This deletes the connecting line.

Drag mouse.
Other procedure
To delete connecting lines by the arrow keys, move with the arrow key with the
Shift + Alt keys held down.

6-81
 6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines

Extended Ladder mode

Tool (T) Extended ladder mode (G) Ctrl + G
On the KV-10/16/24/40, KV-700 and KZ-300/350, instructions can be entered on an
extended ladder. In the case of regular ladder notation, only one output instruction
such as OUT or TMR can be programmed to a single rung. However, when
extended ladder language is used, two or more output instructions can be
programmed to a single rung. This reduces the total number of rungs in the ladder
program, makes the instruction processing sequence easier to understand.
For example, the ladder program changes as follows when programming ON delay
timers to the ladder diagram in the Extended Ladder mode.

6
EDITOR

When you select the Extended Ladder mode, and program an output instruction to
the ladder program, the cursor automatically moves to the right without jumping to
the right edge of the rung so that you can continue entering instruction. If the
instruction entry mode is not the Extended Ladder mode, the cursor automatically
jumps to the right edge of the rung when you enter an output instruction.
The default ladder mode when KV BUILDER is first started up is the regular ladder
mode; the Extended Ladder mode is not selected.
For example, the ladder changes as follows when programming the OUT instruction
to the ladder diagram in the Extended Ladder mode.

• When the Extended Ladder mode is not selected (default)

The OUT instruction moves to the right edge of the ladder after the OUT
instruction is entered.

• When the Extended Ladder mode is selected

The cursor moves to the adjacent cell after the OUT instruction is entered.

[Tip]
The Extended Ladder mode setting is automatically saved to KV BUILDER. For
this reason, the setting is enabled when KV BUILDER is next started up.

6-82
 6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines

Enable the Extended Ladder mode by the following procedure.

1 Select {Tool (T)} {Extended ladder mode (G)}.

This enables the Extended Ladder mode.
To disable the Extended Ladder mode, repeat the same procedure.

Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + G keys.

[Tip] 6
When the Extended Ladder mode is enabled, {Extended ladder mode (G)} is

EDITOR
displayed marked.

Canceling Edit Operations

Undoing the previous edit operation (Undo)
Edit (E) Undo (U) Ctrl + Z
Cancel the previous operation (symbol entry, move or copy) to return to the previous
state.

[Tip]
If an undo is not possible, the button is displayed gray and cannot be selected.

Important: The following operations cannot be undone:

• Replacing of operands
• NO/NC contact conversion
• Reading/saving of programs, mnemonic and other files
• Changing of labels and comments

Redoing the previous undo operation (Redo)

Edit (E) Redo (R) Ctrl + Y
Cancel the previous undo operation.

[Tip]
If a redo is not possible, the button is displayed gray and cannot be selected.

6-83
 6-8 Editing Mnemonic Lists

6-8 Editing Mnemonic Lists

This section describes how to display circuits in ladder diagrams as a mnemonic list
by individual block, and how to directly edit mnemonic descriptions.

Displaying and Editing Mnemonic Lists

Displaying and editing mnemonic lists
Edit (E) Edit List (L) Ctrl + D
Display specified blocks in mnemonic lists or edit mnemonic lists to enter
instructions by the following procedure.

1 Move the cursor to a specific block of the

mnemonic list to be displayed, or to a
specific cell for inserting/replacing edited
details in the mnemonic list.
6
EDITOR

2 Select {Edit (E)} {Edit List (L)} from

Menu.
This displays the Edit List window.

Other procedure
• Press the Ctrl + D keys.

3 Edit mnemonic descriptions in the Edit List

window.
The step Nos. of currently converted blocks
are displayed, so there is no need to enter the
step No. when entering new instructions.
"Executing Conversion" page 6-141

Note: The maximum number of mnemonics that can be edited at a single time in
the Edit List window is 10,000 characters including line feed codes and
spaces. When editing of mnemonics exceeding this limit, quit editing, and
edit the next block of mnemonics.

6-84
 6-8 Editing Mnemonic Lists

Ending editing of mnemonic lists

End editing of mnemonic lists.

„ Inserting an edited mnemonic list at the cursor position and ending editing

1 End editing of mnemonic lists, and then click the "Insert" button.
The Edit List window is closed, and the edited details are inserted at the cursor
position on the ladder diagram.

„ Replacing an edited mnemonic list with the ladder block at the cursor
position and ending editing

1 End editing of mnemonic lists, and then click the "Replace block" button.
The Edit List window is closed, and the edited details are overwritten on the 6
circuit block at the cursor position in the ladder diagram.

EDITOR
Format of mnemonic lists
Mnemonic lists are configured in the following format:

Note: • Comments cannot be edited in mnemonic lists.

• There is no need to enter step Nos. and comments when editing
mnemonic lists.
• If the format of the mnemonic list is different, the message "Illegal
number of instructions or operands" is displayed and the mnemonic list
cannot be converted.

6-85
 6-8 Editing Mnemonic Lists

Copying, Moving and Deleting Areas

Use the cut-and-paste function to copy, move and delete areas in mnemonic lists.

[Tip]
Cut-and-paste is a standard method of editing in Windows.

1 Move the cursor to the first

part of the area to be
copied, moved or deleted.

6
2
EDITOR

Drag to the final position

of the selected area.
The selected area is
displayed in blue.

Other procedure
"Dragging" refers to moving the cursor to the final position with the Shift key
held down with the keys, and releasing the keys followed by the
Shift key at the final position.

3 Perform paste, copy and paste operations.

"Copying, Moving and Deleting" page 6-87

[Tip]
Key entry operations
Cutting
Ctrl + X key: Cuts and copies the selected range to the cut buffer.
Copying
Ctrl + C key: Copies the selected range to the cut buffer.
Pasting
Ctrl + V key: Pastes the selected range pasted to the cut buffer.

6-86
 6-9 Copying, Moving and Deleting Ladder Programs

6-9 Copying, Moving and Deleting Ladder Programs

This section describes how to copy, move and delete selected areas in the ladder
diagram, and how to insert and delete rungs.

Copying, Moving and Deleting

Copy, move or delete areas selected on the ladder diagram.
Use the cut-and-paste function to copy, move or delete selected areas in ladder
diagrams.

[Tip]
Cut-and-paste is a standard method of editing in Windows.

Selecting areas
To copy, move or delete an area, you must first select the area.
There are two ways of selecting an area.
6
Note: You cannot copy, move and delete data in the Connecting Line Edit mode.

EDITOR
If the mode is the Connecting Line Edit mode, select {Edit (E)} {Edit
connecting line (K)} from Menu beforehand, and set the regular edit mode.

Make sure that this item is not marked.

Connecting Line Edit mode Normal Edit mode

„ Selecting with the mouse

Select the area with the mouse.

1 Move the mouse to

the first cell to be
selected and click.
The cursor is displayed.

6-87
 6-9 Copying, Moving and Deleting Ladder Programs

2 Drag to the final position of the area to select.

The selected area is displayed in yellow.

• Selecting by cells
Drag the pointer horizontally to the desired cell.

• Selecting by rungs
Drag the pointer vertically to the rung to the desired rung.
6
EDITOR

Note: • Single cells cannot be selected to straddle multiple rungs.

• When cells are selected one cell at a time from right to left or rungs are
selected one rung at a time from bottom to top or vice versa, the left edge
cell and top edge or bottom edge rungs, respectively, cannot be selected.

[Tip]
To cancel a selection, click any position on the ladder diagram.

„ Selecting using keys

1 Move the cursor to the first cell to be selected by the arrow keys.

6-88
 6-9 Copying, Moving and Deleting Ladder Programs

2 Press the arrow key with the Shift key held down, and move the cursor
to the final cell of the area to be selected.
The selected area is displayed in yellow.

• Selecting by cells
Move the pointer to the desired cell using the keys.

• Selecting by rungs
Move the pointer to the desired cell using the keys. 6

EDITOR
Note: • Single cells cannot be selected to straddle multiple rungs.

• When cells are selected one cell at a time from right to left or rungs are
selected one rung at a time from bottom to top or vice versa, the left edge
cell and top edge or bottom edge rungs, respectively, cannot be selected.

3 Release the Shift key at the final cell of the area to be selected.

[Tip]
To cancel a selection, press the arrow key again.

6-89
 6-9 Copying, Moving and Deleting Ladder Programs

Copying, moving and deleting areas

Edit (E) Cut (T) Ctrl +X
Copy (C) Ctrl +C
Paste (P) Ctrl +V
Copy, move or delete selected areas.

„ Copying selected areas

Copy selected areas by the following procedure.

1 Specify the area, and select {Edit (E)} {Copy (C)} from Menu.

6
EDITOR

Other procedure
• Select {Copy (C)} from the menu
displayed by clicking the right mouse
button.
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + C keys.

„ Moving and deleting areas

Move or delete selected areas by the following procedure.

1 Specify the area, and select {Edit (E)} {Cut (T)} from Menu.

Other procedure
• Select {Cut (T)} from the menu
displayed by clicking the right mouse
button.
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + X keys.

6-90
 6-9 Copying, Moving and Deleting Ladder Programs

„ Pasting copied or cut ladder data

Once ladder data is copied or cut, it is saved temporarily to the cut buffer.
Paste ladder data saved to the cut buffer to other ladder diagrams by the
following procedure.

1 Select {Edit (E)} {Paste (P)} from Menu.

Other procedure 6
• Select {Paste (T)} from the

EDITOR
menu displayed by clicking the
right mouse button.
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + V keys.

„ Combining cut and paste with copy operations

Copy and move ladders by combining cut and paste with copy operations.

1 Specify the area and copy or paste the area.

2 Select the cell to which the copied details are to be pasted.

3 Paste the copied details.

Note: If the number of copied cells is greater than the

space at the copy destination, the message
"Cannot write to that position." is displayed, and
only the number of copied cells that fit in the copy
destination space are pasted.

[Tip]
Once data is cut, it is temporarily saved to the cut buffer. If you perform a paste
operation once more after a delete operation, the deleted ladder data can be
pasted again. Copied or cut ladder data can also be pasted repeatedly.

6-91
 6-9 Copying, Moving and Deleting Ladder Programs

„ Copying from other files

Ladder programs can be copied or moved from other program windows when
two or more ladder program windows are displayed.
Copy from other files by the following procedure.

1 Select the copy source ladder program window.

This makes this window the current window.

6
EDITOR

2 Specify and copy the selected area.

"Copying selected areas" page 6-90

6-92
 6-9 Copying, Moving and Deleting Ladder Programs

3 Select the copy source ladder program window.

This makes this window the current window.

4 Paste the selected

6
area.

EDITOR
This copies the selected
ladder program area.
"Pasting copied or cut
ladder data" page 6-91

Note: Device comments in ladder programs are not copied if you copy ladder
programs from one ladder program to another using the copy function. To
copy ladder programs with device comments intact, do not use the copy
function; execute "Read other file comments".
"Reading Comments from Other Files" page 6-112

Inserting and Deleting Rungs

Insert free rungs in the ladder diagram or delete the current rung.
Inserting free rungs
Edit (E) Insert free rung (O) Shift +
1 Move the cursor to the rung where the free rung is to be inserted.

6-93
 6-9 Copying, Moving and Deleting Ladder Programs

[Tip]
To insert two or more rungs
as a group, select the
desired number of rungs to
insert. In the example below,
two free rungs are inserted.
"Selecting areas" page 6-87

2 Select {Edit (E)} {Insert free rung (O)}

from Menu.
This inserts a free rung at the selected rung.

6
EDITOR

Other procedure
• Press the Shift + keys.
• Click the right mouse button, and select
{Insert free rung (O)} from the menu this is
displayed.

Deleting rungs
Edit (E) Delete rung (Y) Shift + Delete
1 Move the cursor to the rung to delete.

[Tip]
To delete two or more rungs
as a group, select the
desired number of rungs to
delete. In the example
below, two free rungs are
deleted.
"Selecting areas" page 6-87

6-94
 6-9 Copying, Moving and Deleting Ladder Programs

2 Select {Edit (E)} {Delete rung (Y)} from Menu.

This deletes the selected rung.

Other procedure
• Press the Shift + Delete keys.
6

EDITOR

6-95
 6-10 Circuit Libraries

6-10 Circuit Libraries

The circuit library is a function that allows the user to freely register and paste any
prepared ladder circuit. This section describes how circuit library operations.

Cautions When Using Circuit Library

Pay attention to the following points when using circuit library:

• Two types of circuit libraries are available: for KV-10/16/24/40 and KZ-300/350,
and for KV-700. When the KV-700 is used, the circuit library for KV-10/16/24/40
and KZ-300/350 cannot be used; and when KV-10/16/24/40 and KZ-300/350 is
used, the circuit library for KV-700 cannot be used.
• The number of circuits that can be registered to circuit library is not limited. This is
dependent on the amount of free space on the hard disk in use.
• Circuits already containing entered device Nos. and circuits not containing
6 entered device Nos. for which the pending operand is indicated by "???" can be
registered to the circuit library.
EDITOR

• Circuits are registered to the circuit library one rung at a time.

How a Circuit Library is Structured

Circuit libraries are structured as follows:

Circuit library
Sample: Several sample circuits that can immediately used are
registered here. For details on registered circuits, see "List of
Circuits Registered to Circuit Library" (A-70).
User: This folder is for registering circuit libraries made by the user.
As the default, no user circuit libraries are registered.

[Tip]
Circuit libraries have been added on as a feature of KV-BUILDER Ver.3. When
registering circuits when using Ver.2, import these additional circuit libraries (file
name "KV700Sample01.lib).
When not registering circuit libraries in Ver.2, circuit libraries are automatically
updated when Ver.3 is installed.
"Importing and Exporting Circuit Libraries" page 6-100

6-96
 6-10 Circuit Libraries

Displaying Circuit Libraries and Other Functions

View (V) Circuit library (B)
Display the circuit library on the edit screen by the following procedure.

1 Select {View (V)} {Circuit library (B)} in order from the Menu.
The circuit library is displayed.

[Tip]
Ladder programs can be edited with circuit library displayed.

Other procedure 6
• Click the button.

EDITOR
„ Circuit library functions

Displays a list of registered circuits as a tree.

Circuits can be registered by dragging-and-dropping
circuits onto the display area.

In the circuit library, registered circuits can be

organized in folders by group or by
application. To create a folder, click the right
mouse button at the desired location, and
select [New folder] from Menu.

Registered circuits with device comments are displayed by

@ icons, and registered circuits without device comments
are displayed by @ icons.

To name a registered circuit, either double-

click the circuit name field and enter the
name, or select the circuit, click the right
mouse button, and select [Rename] in the
menu that appears.

Displays rung comments when the circuit is selected if a

rung comment is entered in the registered circuit. Browsing
a preview of rung comments facilitates viewing of the target
circuit.

6-97
 6-10 Circuit Libraries

Registering Circuits
Register the circuit to the circuit library by the following procedure.

1 Move the cursor to the first rung of

the range to register as a circuit
with the circuit library displayed.

2 Drag to the final rung to be

registered.
The selected range is displayed
inverted in yellow.

Note: Be sure to select the range by individual rungs as circuits are registered to
6 the circuit library in rungs.
EDITOR

Other procedure
Move the cursor to the final rung of the range with the keys with the Shift
key held down, and release the keys and Shift key in order at the final
rung.

3 Click the mouse on any rung of the circuit selected in yellow, and drop
the selected circuit at the desired position on the circuit library tree.
The selected circuit is registered on the circuit library under the name "new
circuit."
To change the name, double-click the circuit name.

Deleting Registered Circuits

Paste registered circuits from the circuit library by the following procedure.

1 Move the cursor to the circuit to delete

from the circuit library, and click the right
mouse button to display the menu and
select [Delete].

6-98
 6-10 Circuit Libraries

Pasting Registered Circuits

Paste registered circuits in the circuit library by the following procedure.

1 Move the cursor to the circuit to paste on the circuit library.

2 Drag and drop the circuit

on the edit screen at the
desired paste location
with the mouse clicked.
This pastes the circuit on
the edit screen.
When pasting circuits with
comments, device
comments are also pasted.

6
[Tip]

EDITOR
The confirmation dialog box is displayed if
circuits with comments are pasted when
comments for devices registered to the
circuit library are already registered on the
ladder program to be pasted. To overwrite
comments, select the "Yes" button, and to
cancel overwriting of comments, select the
"No" button.
„ Replacing operands in registered circuits
Use the range replace function to change operands in a registered circuit after it
has been replaced.
1 Paste the registered
circuit.

2 Select {Find/Replace (K)}

{Replace range (A)} from the Menu
with the pasted circuit displayed in
yellow.
The Replace Range dialog box is
displayed.

Other procedure
Click the right mouse button, and select [Replace range (A)] in the menu that is
displayed.

6-99
 6-10 Circuit Libraries

3 Enter the new operand to each device.

Operands are replaced after being shifted by the width for the conversion
destination operand No. from the conversion source operand Nos.
Make the conversion destination
device No. entry the active entry.

Enter the conversion destination

device No.

[Example]
6 When the operand No. of the relay before replace is 1000 and the operand No.
of the relay after replace is 1008.:
EDITOR

All relays in the selected range become a No. obtained by adding eight.

4 Click the "OK" button.

This executes the replace within the
selected range.
After the replace ends, the number of
replaced operands is displayed.

Importing and Exporting Circuit Libraries

Import and export circuit libraries so that already prepared circuit libraries can be
used on other PCs.

„ Importing circuit libraries

Import circuit libraries by the following procedure.

1 Click the right mouse button on the circuit library, and select [Import]
from the menu that is displayed.
This displays the Open dialog box.

6-100
 6-10 Circuit Libraries

2 Specify the library file to read.

Specify the folder

containing the library file
to read.

Specify "Library file

Specify the file name. (*.lib)" as it is as the file
type.

3 Click the "Open" button.

This displays the library file.
6
„ Exporting circuit libraries

EDITOR
Export circuit libraries by the following procedure.
1 Click the right mouse button on the circuit library, and select [Export]
from the menu that is displayed.
This displays the Save As dialog box.

2 Specify the directory to save the circuit library file to.

Specify the directory to

save the library file to.

Specify "Library file

Specify the file name. (*.lib)" as it is as the file
type.

3 Click the "Save" button.

This saves the library file.

6-101
 6-11 Inputting Comments and Labels

6-11 Inputting Comments and Labels

This section describes how to append comments and labels to devices, change
already appended comments, and how to append and change rung comments.

Editing Comments and Labels

Comment (C) Edit comment/label (D) Ctrl + F7
"Labels," "Comment 1," "Comment 2" and "Comment 3" are appended to devices.
A label is used instead of a device name, and instructions can be entered using the
label as an operand.
Comments are appended to devices when editing ladder diagrams to make it easier
to tell what the device does. Comments can be displayed on the ladder diagram,
and each of the Monitors and Simulator.

[Tip]
6 Labels can be used instead of device names when inputting symbols or
finding/replacing symbols. For example, devices names can be written as follows
EDITOR

when the label "SW1" is assigned to device 0000:

Substitute label display for 0000: SW1
Substitute label display for LD _ 0000 LD_: SW1 (_ stands for space)

Note: Labels cannot be entered from the instruction palette.

Comment and label operations are performed in the Edit Comments/Labels dialog
box. This dialog box displays a list of devices by type, which allows you to edit two
more comments as a group. Labels and comments can be changed after directly
selecting the device to be changed on the ladder diagram.
"Directly Changing Comments and Labels on Ladder Diagrams" page 6-109

Note: Device comments can be transferred to the KV-10/16/24/40, KV-700 and

KZ-300/350. To transfer device comments to the KV-10/16/24/40 and KZ-
300/350, execute "Comment move setup" separately.
"Setting Transfer of Comments" page 6-121

The ladder program cannot be edited while the Edit Comments/Labels dialog box is
open and comments or labels are being edited.
To edit the ladder program while viewing the list of device comments, use the "multi
comment window." Three multi comment windows can be opened simultaneously.
"Multi Comment Window" page 6-111

6-102
 6-11 Inputting Comments and Labels

Editing comments and labels

„ Editing comments and labels in the list by device type
Comment (C) Edit comment/label (D) Ctrl + F7
Edit comments and labels in the list by device type by the following procedure.
1 Select {Comment (C)} {Edit
comment/label (D)} from Menu.
This displays the Edit Comments/Labels
dialog box. The example dialog box
below displays a list of relays.
Other procedure
Click the button.

Comment display preview area on ladder diagram Device display range selection buttons

Read device selection area

Device list display
6
condition setup

EDITOR
Label/comment entry area Current entered text
count display area

Device list display area

Displays Help. Exits comment editing.

[Tip]
Devices used on the ladder diagram are prefixed by an asterisk "∗".
2 Specify the type and No. of the device to edit, and click the "Edit" button.
The cursor is displayed at comment 1 in the label/comment entry area, and
entry is possible.

1 Select the device to be edited from the "Read

device" radio button.
When selecting relays and data memory, select the
range of device Nos. to be displayed by the device
display range selection buttons.

3 Click the "Edit" button.

2 Select the range of devices for entering comments
at [Device list display area].

Other procedure
Enter the label/comment directly in the [Device name] field for the device No.,
and click the label/comment entry area to be entered.

6-103
 6-11 Inputting Comments and Labels

[Tip]
The devices to be displayed in the list can be narrowed down in the Device list
display condition setting.
[Reg devices only]: Devices to which labels/comments are registered are
displayed.
[Used devices only]: Devices in use on the ladder program are displayed.
If neither of these checkboxes are marked, all devices are displayed.
If both of these checkboxes are marked, devices that satisfy both conditions are
displayed.

3 Enter or change labels/comments.

6
[Tip]
EDITOR

• The following shows the types and number of characters that can be entered.
Label: Up to eight single-byte alphabetic characters (Spaces and
commas are not allowed.)
Comment 1: Up to 32 single-byte characters (Can be displayed in the KV-700
access window and on KV-D20/30.)
Comment 2: Up to 32 single-byte characters
Comment 3: Up to 32 single-byte characters
• The number of single-byte characters in the currently entered comment is
displayed on the right of the comment entry area.
• On KV BUILDER, device comments can be automatically
registered to special devices (relays, CRs, DMs, CM, etc.
to which fixed functions are already registered).
To register device comments, click "Reg special devices
(B)" in the Edit Comments/Labels dialog box.
Register special device comments of the PLC type in use
to Comment 1.
Also, when editing by unit, functions assigned to devices on special units can
be registered to Contact Comments automatically as unit device comments. To
register, click [Reg units devices] in the Edit Comments/Labels dialog box.
Register device functions currently being edited to Comment 1.
• The maximum number of characters in
comments on the ladder diagram is 16
single-byte characters on the KV-
10/16/24/40 and KZ-300/350, and 24
single-byte characters on the KV-700.
How entered comments will be displayed
on the ladder program can be checked in
the preview area.

4 Click the "Write" button.

This writes the labels/comments you have entered.

6-104
 6-11 Inputting Comments and Labels

[Tip]
• The limits for display of comments on ladder programs are as follows: 16
characters on the KV-10/16/24/40 and KZ-300/350, and 24 characters on the
KV-700.
• To display labels and comments you have written, you must first switch the
display mode. Select {View (V)} from Menu, and then select {Label (L)} or
{Comment (C)} from the sub-menu. You can also set comment display by the
button.
"View Modes" page 6-22

EDITOR
Label

Comment

„ Editing comments and labels by individual unit on the list display.

Edit comments and labels in the list by individual unit by the following procedure.

1 Select {Comment (C)} {Edit

comment/label (D)} from Menu.
This displays the Edit Comments/Labels
dialog box. The example dialog box
below displays a list of relays.

2 Mark the checkbox by the edit item at "Unit select", and select the unit to
edit from the dropdown menu.

3 Enter or change labels/comments.

6-105
 6-11 Inputting Comments and Labels

[Tip]
• The following shows the types and number of characters that can be entered.
Label: Up to eight single-byte alphabetic characters (Spaces and
commas are not allowed.)
Comment 1: Up to 32 single-byte characters (Can be displayed in the KV-700
access window and on KV-D20/30.)
Comment 2: Up to 32 single-byte characters
Comment 3: Up to 32 single-byte characters
• The number of single-byte characters in the currently entered comment is
displayed on the right of the comment entry area.
• On KV BUILDER, device comments can be automatically
registered to special devices (relays, CRs, DMs, CM, etc. to
which fixed functions are already registered).
To register device comments, click "Reg special devices
(B)" in the Edit Comments/Labels dialog box.
Also, when editing by unit, functions assigned to devices on
special units can be registered to Contact Comments
6 automatically as unit device comments. To register, click [Reg units devices] in
the Edit Comments/Labels dialog box. Register device functions currently
being edited to Comment 1.
EDITOR

• The maximum number of characters in

comments on the ladder diagram is 16
single-byte characters on the KV-
10/16/24/40 and KZ-300/350, and 24
single-byte characters on the KV-700.
How entered comments will be displayed
on the ladder program can be checked in
the preview area.

4 Click the "Write" button.

This writes the labels/comments you have entered.
[Tip]
• The limits for display of comments on ladder programs are as follows: 16
characters on the KV-10/16/24/40 and KZ-300/350, and 24 characters on the
KV-700.
• To display labels and comments you have written, you must first switch the
display mode. Select {View (V)} from Menu, and then select {Label (L)} or
{Comment (C)} from the sub-menu. You can also set comment display by the
button.
"View Modes" page 6-22

Label

Comment

6-106
 6-11 Inputting Comments and Labels

Copying labels/comments from other devices

1 Move the cursor to the copy source device, and click the
"Copy" button.

2 Move the cursor to the copy destination device, and click the "Write"
button.
[Tip]
If you click the "Exchange" button instead of the "Write" button, the comment of
the currently selected device is swapped with the content of the entry area.

Note: Labels cannot be copied. If you paste the comment

of a device to which a label is entered using the 6
"Copy" button, the message "Specified label is

EDITOR
already used." is displayed. If you click the "OK"
button to close the dialog box, only the comments
will be copied.

Deleting registered labels/comments

Delete only registered devices.

1 Select the device to delete in the

device list display area, and click the
"Delete selected rung" button.
To select non-continuous areas, select the areas with the Ctrl key held
down.
Other procedure
Press the Delete key.

[Tip]
To delete the comments of all devices, click the "Delete all" button. The
confirmation message is displayed. Click the "Yes" button.

6-107
 6-11 Inputting Comments and Labels

Block copying, moving and deleting comments of other devices

1 Select the range of devices

whose comments are to be
block-copied from the
device list display area.
"Selecting areas" page 6-87

1 Select the device 2 Click the "Block

comment range. edit (M)" button.

2 Click the "Block edit (M)" button.

The Edit Block dialog box is displayed.
3 Select the comment type by the radio button.
All: Selects comments 1, 2 and 3.
6 Comment 1: Selects only comments 1.
(Comments 2 and 3 are ignored.)
Comment 2: Selects only comments 2.
EDITOR

(Comments 1 and 3 are ignored.)

Comment 3: Selects only comments 3.
(Comments 1 and 2 are ignored.)
4 To block-copy comments, click the "Copy (C)" button, and to block-move
or block-delete comments, click the "Cut (X)" button.
[Tip]
If you clicked the "Cut (X)" button, the selected devices are cut. If you are block-
deleting comments, the block-delete procedure ends with step 4, and there is no
need to proceed to step 5.

5 Specify the first device

of the copy or move
destination in the
device list display
area.

1 Select the leading 2 Click the "Block

device. edit (M)" button.

6 Click the "Block edit (M)" button.

The Edit Block dialog box is displayed.
7 Click the "Paste (P)" button.
This pastes the device comments for the number
of devices specified in the device range in step 1
starting from the device No. selected in step 5.

[Tip]
Only devices of the selected type are overwritten.
If you pasted only comment 2 type comments, the information of comment 1 and
3 type comments, remains as it is. When All comments is pasted, all comments
are overwritten.

6-108
 6-11 Inputting Comments and Labels

Moving and copying comments between comment types

Select Comment 1 (or 2 or 3) at Type in the Edit Block dialog block, and click the
"Cut (X)" or "Copy (C)" button. Next, select Comment 1 (or 2 or 3), and click the
"Paste (P)" button. In this way, you can move (copy) comments between
comment types.

1 Select the range of

devices whose
comments are to be
block-copied from the
device list display
area.
"Setting Device
Assignments" page 5-
75

2 Click the "Block edit 1 Select the range. 2 Click the "Block
(M)" button. edit (M)" button. 6
The Edit Block dialog

EDITOR
box is displayed.

3 Select comment 1 (2 or 3).

Comment 1: Selects only comments 1.
(Comments 2 and 3 are ignored.)
Comment 2: Selects only comments 2.
(Comments 1 and 3 are ignored.)
Comment 3: Selects only comments 3.
(Comments 1 and 2 are ignored.)

4 To copy comments, click the "Copy (C)" button, and to move comments,
click the "Cut (X)" button.

5 Specify the first

device of the copy or
move destination in
the device list display
area.

6 Click the "Block edit

(M)" button.
The Edit Block dialog
box is displayed.
1 Select the leading 2 Click the "Block
device. edit (M)" button.

7 Select the type of comment to paste, and

click the "Paste (P)" button.
This pastes the device comments for the
number of devices specified in the device range
in step 1 starting from the device No. selected in
step 5.

6-109
 6-11 Inputting Comments and Labels

Directly Changing Comments and Labels on Ladder Diagrams

Comment (C) Change label (B) Ctrl +B
Change comment (J) Ctrl +M
Directly enter labels or comments on the ladder program by the following procedure.

1 Move the cursor to the device to enter labels

or comments to.

2 To enter a label, select {Comment

(C)} {Change label (B)} from
Menu, and to enter a comment,
6 select {Comment (C)} {Change
comment (J)} from Menu.
EDITOR

The Change label or Change

comment dialog box is displayed.

Other procedure
• Changing labels
Press the Ctrl + B keys
• Changing comments
Press the Ctrl + M keys

[Tip]
• Which of Comments 1 to 3
can be changed is determined
by the settings in the View
Display Mode dialog box
displayed by {View (V)}
{View mode (D)}. (Default is
Comment 1.)
"View Modes" page 6-22
• Registered characters are
displayed when labels and
comments are already
registered to devices.

3 Enter the label or comment on the keyboard.

6-110
 6-11 Inputting Comments and Labels

4 Click the "OK" button.

This writes the label or comment.
0 Writes the label or comment to the
device at the cursor position.

Cancels changes to label or

comment, and closes the dialog box.

Writes the details you have set.

[Tip]
The maximum number of characters in comments on the ladder program is 16 single-byte
characters on the KV-10/16/24/40 and KZ-300/350, and 24 single-byte characters on the KV-700.
6
Multi Comment Window

EDITOR
Comment (C) Multi comment window (M)
• You can edit ladder programs while viewing the list of device comments.

1 Select {Comment (C)} {Multi comment

window (M)}.
The Multi comment window (M) is displayed.

Other procedure
• Click the window.

• Up to three multi comment windows can be opened simultaneously.

Different devices or same devices can be displayed and edited in separate multi comment windows.
While you are editing the same device, any editing changes will be reflected in individual windows.
Device selection
You can select from the following nine
devices:
Relay (R)
Data memory (DM)
Timer (TM)
Counter (C)
Temporary memory (TM)
Control relay (CR)
Control memory (CM)
Comparator (CTC)
High-speed counter (CTH)

• The comments/labels entry/display area can be

resized.

• You can resize the window by dragging the mouse at

the bottom right corner of the multi comment window.

6-111
 6-11 Inputting Comments and Labels

• Comments and labels can be edited (copy-and-pasted, cut or deleted) on

individual lines. To select a range of comments and labels, either click with the
right mouse button and open the menu, or edit with the shortcut keys (copy
(Ctrl+C), paste (Ctrl+V) or cut (Ctrl+X)). You can also delete the content of a
selected range by pressing the DEL key.

• The Edit Comments/Labels dialog box cannot be used while a multi comment
window is open.

Reading Comments from Other Files

Comment (C) Read other file comments (O)

Read only comments from other ladder program files.

Comment file extenders are as follows:
Comment 1: ".rcm"
6 Comment 2: ".cm2"
Comment 3: ".cm3"
EDITOR

[Tip]
Only comments 1 are displayed in the KV-D20/D30 and KV-700 access windows.
Also, only comments 1 can be transferred to the KV-10/16/24/40, KV-700 and
KZ-300/350.
"Setting Transfer of Comments" page 6-121

Read comments by the following procedure.

Note: • This menu item is not displayed unless the ladder program window is
displayed.
• Only comments are read by this function; the ladder program is not read.

1 Select {Comment (C)} {Read other file comments (O)}.

The Open dialog box is displayed.

6-112
 6-11 Inputting Comments and Labels

2 Specify the comment file to read.

Specify the project folder

to which the comment file
to be read is saved.
Select one of "Comment
1 file(*.rcm)", "Comment
2 file(*.cm2)" or
Specify the file name. "Comment 3 file(*.cm3)"
as the file type.

[Tip]
Comment files can also be specified by entering the file name, and by selecting
the comment file to be read from the file list with the mouse.

3 Click the "Open" button. 6

This reads the comment to the ladder program currently being edited, and

EDITOR
displays the numbers of comments that have been read.

Note: • When comments are read from other files, the comments are read to the
ladder program currently being edited. For this reason, the comments in
the ladder program currently being edited are overwritten. If you need the
comments in the ladder program currently being edited, you must first
save them separately by "Saving comments in text format" before you
execute reading of comments from other files.
"Saving and Reading Comments in Text Format" page 6-114
• The following illustrates how comments are overwritten. In the following
example, the ladder B comments of timers 000 to 010 and data
memories DM1000 to 1012 disappear as they are overwritten with the
comments of ladder A.

4 Click the "OK" button.

6-113
 6-11 Inputting Comments and Labels

Saving and Reading Comments in Text Format

Comment (C) Save comments in text format (E)
Read comments in text format (P)
Save labels or comments in the ladder program currently being edited in text format,
or read already saved text format comment files.

About the format of text format comment files.

Comment files are regular text format files, and are appended with the ".txt"
extender. CSV format (".csv" extender) files can also be read as text format files.

6
EDITOR

• Text in comment files is delimited by a comma ",". Short comment files can be
read even if text is not inserted between commas. For example, when only
Comment 1 is entered for relay 00000, the comment file is described as follows:
"00000,, Comment 1 ,,"
• When comments are saved, they are automatically saved and assigned a text
string of fixed length. (Parts of files in which comments are not entered are
described as blank spaces.)
• The following shows the type of characters and number of characters used in
comment files.
Name of Label Eight alphabet characters can be entered. Spaces and commas cannot be entered.
Comment 1
Comment 2 32 characters can be entered. (Commas cannot be entered.)
Comment 3
"Editing Comments and Labels" page 6-102

Saving comments
Save labels or comments in the ladder program currently being edited in text format
by the following procedure.

1 Select {Comment (C)} {Save comments in text format (E)}.

The Save As dialog box is displayed.

6-114
 6-11 Inputting Comments and Labels

2 Specify the comment save destination.

Specify the folder

(directory) to save
comments to.

Specify either of "Text

Specify the file name. file(*.txt)" or "CSV
file(*.csv)" as the file type.

[Tip]
The file is automatically appended with the extender ".txt" or ".csv" when the file
name is set even if it is not specified when the file name is entered.

3 Click the "Save" button. 6

This saves the comments to file.

EDITOR
Reading comments
Read already saved comment files by the following procedure.

1 Select {Comment (C)} {Read comments in text format (P)}.

The Open dialog box is displayed.

2 Specify the comment file to read.

Specify the folder

(directory) in which
comment files to be read
are saved.

Specify either of "Text

Specify the file name. file(*.txt)" or "CSV
file(*.csv)" as the file type.

[Tip]
Comment files can also be specified by entering the file name, and by selecting
the comment file to be read from the file list with the mouse.

6-115
 6-11 Inputting Comments and Labels

3 Click the "Open" button.

This reads the comment to the ladder program currently being edited, and
displays the numbers of comments that have been read.

Note: • When comments are read from other files, the comments are read to the
ladder program currently being edited. For this reason, the comments in
the ladder program currently being edited are overwritten. If you need the
comments in the ladder program currently being edited, you must first
save them separately by "Saving comments in text format" before you
execute reading of comments from other files.
"Saving and Reading Comments in Text Format" page 6-114
• The following illustrates how comments are overwritten. In the following
example, the ladder B comments of timers 000 to 010 and data
memories DM1000 to 1012 disappear as they are overwritten with the
comments of ladder A.

6
EDITOR

4 Click the "OK" button.

Reading and saving comments files on other software

Comment files saved in CSV format can be imported and read in spreadsheet
software or database software. Alternatively, comments edited or saved in
spreadsheet software or database software can be imported and read in KV
BUILDER.
When handling comment files in spreadsheet software or database software,
specify CSV format with commas used as the delimiter to delimit each of the items
in the file as the format of the file.

[Example]
Reading comment files in the spreadsheet software Microsoft Excel 97

1 First, save the comment file on KV BUILDER in CSV format.

"Saving and Reading Comments in Text Format" page 6-114

6-116
 6-11 Inputting Comments and Labels

2 Start up Excel, and select {Files of type} "Comma delimited file" in the
Open File dialog box.

Specify the folder

(directory) in which
comment files to be read
are saved.
Specify a comma
delimited file.

Specify the file name.

[Tip]
Comment files can also be specified by entering the file name, and by selecting
the comment file to be read from the file list with the mouse. 6
[Example]

EDITOR
Saving comment files in the spreadsheet software Microsoft Excel97

Note: When you create comments in Excel, be sure to enter each of the items to
individual cells. When not entering items to a cell, leave the cell blank.

1 Select [File type] "CSV (Comma delimited)" in the Save File As dialog
box that is displayed when you save the file.

Specify the folder

(directory) to save the
comment file to.
Specify
"CSV(Comma
delimited)".
Specify the file name.

Note: The file is automatically appended with the extender ".csv" when the file
name is set even if it is not specified when the file name is entered.

2 Click the "Save" button.

This saves the comments as a comment file.
Read the saved comment file on KV BUILDER.
"Saving and Reading Comments in Text Format" page 6-114

6-117
 6-11 Inputting Comments and Labels

Editing Rung Comments

Comment (C) Edit rung comment (L) Ctrl +
Describe rung comments to each rung on the ladder program.
Rung comments are appended to rungs when editing ladder diagrams to make it
easier to tell what each circuit block does. Rung comments can be displayed on the
ladder diagram, and each of the Monitors and Simulator. Rung comments can also
be used as an index when executing a search.
"Searching for Instructions and Operands" page 6-130

Note: • Rung comments cannot be transferred to the KV-10/16/24/40 and KZ-

300/350. When ladder programs are read from the KV-10/16/24/40 and
KZ-300/350, rung comments are not included in the transferred data.
• Rung comments can be transferred to the KV-700. To transfer rung
comments to the KV-700, execute "Comment move setup".
"Setting Transfer of Comments" page 6-121

Enter rung comments or change entered comments by the following procedure.

6
1 Move the cursor to the rung where the
EDITOR

rung comment is to be entered or

changed.

2 Select {Comment (C)} {Edit rung

comment (L)} from Menu.
The Edit Rung Comment dialog box is
displayed.
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + keys.
[Tip]
To edit an already entered rung comment, double-click on the rung comment.
This displays the Edit Rung Comment dialog box.

3 Enter or change the comment on the keyboard.

[Tip]
Up to 70 single-byte characters can be displayed in rung comments per single
rung. Characters exceeding this limit are displayed after being automatically fed
to the next line.
Rung comments extending over any number of multiple lines can be edited by
inserting line feeds at the desired locations.

6-118
 6-11 Inputting Comments and Labels

4 Click the "Insert" button.

This adds a new rung, writes the rung comment, and displays the rung comment on
the ladder diagram.
If you click the "Overwr" button, the rung comment on the rung where the cursor is
currently located is overwritten.

Note: If you click the "Overwr" button, the ladder diagram on the rung where the
cursor is currently located is deleted. Before overwriting on the ladder
program, first make sure that it is OK to delete the ladder diagram.

Turning Ladders into Rung Comments

Comment (C) Rung comment convertion(N) Set (S) Ctrl +Q
Release (R) Ctrl +W
If ladders are set to be handled as rung comments, parts handled as comments are
ignored in ladder operation when the ladder program is converted. Temporarily set 6
this function, for example, to disable execution of specific ladder rungs during
debugging.

EDITOR
Set and cancel conversion of ladders into rung comments by the following
procedure.

1 Select the rung to be set for conversion to a comment, or the range of

rungs in which rung conversion is to be canceled.
"Selecting areas" page 6-87

2 Set or cancel conversion of ladders into rung comments.

The selected rung is converted to a comment. When rung conversion is
canceled, the previous state is returned to.

To set conversion: Select {Comment (C)} {Rung comment conversion

(N)} {Set (S)} from Menu.
To cancel conversion: Select {Comment (C)} {Rung comment conversion
(N)} {Release (R)} from Menu.

6-119
 6-11 Inputting Comments and Labels

Other procedure
Setting rung comments
• Select "Rung comment - Set (S)" from the menu that is displayed by clicking
the right mouse button.
• Press the Ctrl + Q keys.
Canceling rung comments
• Select "Rung comment - Release (R)" from the menu that is displayed by
clicking the right mouse button.
• Press the Ctrl + W keys.

6
EDITOR

Note: • Rung converted ladders cannot be transferred to the KV-10/16/24/40

and KZ-300/350. When ladder programs are transferred to the KV-
10/16/24/40 and KZ-300/350, and are then read again, rung converted
ladders are not displayed.
• Rung converted ladders can be transferred to the KV-700. To transfer
rung converted ladders to the KV-700, execute "Comment move setup".
"Setting Transfer of Comments" page 6-121

6-120
 6-11 Inputting Comments and Labels

Setting Transfer of Comments

Comment (C) Comment move setup (K)
Set the range of comments to transfer to the PLC.
[Tip]
The default setting is "move comment." So, this setting need not be changed.
Important: • When transferring comments together with programs to the PLC, be
sure to set the range of comments to transfer.
• Up to 1,000 comments can be transferred on the KV-10/16/24/40
and KZ-300/KZ-350, and up to 5,000 comments (10,000 comments
when memory is expanded) can be transferred on the KV-700.
When comments that exceed these limits have been set, comments
are transferred up to the maximum number of transferable
comments and are transferred to the PLC in the preset device list
order.
• Rung comments can be transferred only to the KV-700; they cannot
be transferred to the KV-10/16/24/40 and KZ-300/350. When rung
comments are transferred, about 15 to 85 bytes (about 5 to 29
steps) of program memory is used up for each single rung
comment. 6
Set the range of comments to be transferred by the following procedure.

EDITOR
1 Select {Comment (C} {Comment
move setup (K)} from Menu.
The Comment Move Setup dialog box
is displayed.

2 Enter the range of comments to transfer for each device.

Enter the range to move.

Displays the number of

Selects whether or not comments currently set for
to move the device moving.
comments.
Clicking this button selects
Selects whether or not all comments currently
to move the rung entered in the ladder
comments. (This is program.
not available when the
KV-10/16/24/40 and
KZ-300/350 are Discards the setting and
used.) closes the dialog box.

Important: • The comment transfer range setting is not available when the KV-
700 is used.
• Only Comment 1 type comments can be transferred to the PLC.
Comment 2 and 3 type comments are not transferred even if they
are set.

3 Click the "OK" button.

This sets the range of comments to transfer.

6-121
 6-12 Jump, Find and Replace

6-12 Jump, Find and Replace

This section describes jumping to any position on the ladder diagram, searching for
instructions and operands, and replacing operands and NO/NC contacts.

Jump
Jump to any position by specifying the rung No. or step in the ladder program, or
jump to the start or end of a rung. This function is used to immediately change the
editing position.

Jumping to specified rungs or steps

Find/Replace (K) Jump (J) Rung/step No. (L)

Specify the rung No. or step No. in the ladder diagram to jump to a specific position
by the following procedure.
6
1
EDITOR

Select {Find/Replace (K)} {Jump (J)} {Rung/step No. (L)} from

Menu.
The Rung/Step No. dialog box is displayed.

Other procedure
• Press the number keys directly on the keyboard.

2 Enter either the jump destination rung No. or step No.

3 To jump to a specified rung No., click the "Rung" button. To jump to a

specified step No., click the "Step" button.
This displays the specified rung or step. The cursor also moves to the specified
rung.

[Tip]
• To cancel a jump, click the "Jump" button.
• The final rung or step is displayed if you specify a No. greater than the final
rung No. or step No.

Note: To jump by step Nos., the program must already have been converted.

6-122
 6-12 Jump, Find and Replace

Jumping to the top or bottom rungs of ladder programs

Find/Replace (K) Jump (J) Top (T) Ctrl + Home
End (B) Ctrl + End
Jump to the top or bottom rung of ladder programs by the following procedure.
„ Jumping to top rung

1 Select {Find/Replace (K)} {Jump (J)} {Top (T)} from Menu.

The cursor jumps to the top of the ladder diagram.

Other procedure
6
Press the Ctrl + Home keys.

EDITOR
„ Jumping to bottom rung

1 Select {Find/Replace (K)} {Jump (J)} {End (B)} from Menu.

The cursor jumps to the bottom of the ladder diagram.

Other procedure
Press the Ctrl + End keys.

Jumping to registered rungs

Find/Replace (K) Jump (J) Registered rung (R) Ctrl +J
Register rung (A) Ctrl +L
Register rungs together with comments in advance, and specify the jump
destination from the list of registered rungs so that you can jump to a specified jump
destination.

[Tip]
This function is used to jump repeatedly to the same rung, or when you cannot
tell where you are in a ladder program just by looking at the rung No.

Note: • Register rungs for each ladder program.

• Registered rung settings are also saved when the ladder program is
saved.
• Registered rung settings are not transferred to the KV-10/16/24/40, KV-
700 and KZ-300/350.

6-123
 6-12 Jump, Find and Replace

„ Registering rungs
Register rungs to jump to by the following procedure.

1 Move the cursor to the rung to register.

2 Select {Find/Replace (K)} {Jump (J)} {Register rung (A)} from Menu.
The Register Rung dialog box is displayed.

6
EDITOR

Other procedure
Press the Ctrl + L keys.

3 Enter the comment of the rung to be registered in the [Comment] field.

Displays the rung No. at the cursor position. When a rung No.
is entered, the No. is registered.

Enter the comment here.

[Tip]
Up to 70 single-byte characters can be entered to a comment.

4 Click the "Register" button.

This registers the rung.

Registers the rung. Cancels registration.

[Tip]
Up to 32 rungs can be registered in a single ladder program. If you attempt to
register more than this number of rungs, the oldest registered rung is
automatically deleted, and the new rung is registered.

6-124
 6-12 Jump, Find and Replace

„ Jumping to registered rungs

Jump to registered rungs by the following procedure.

1 Select {Find/Replace (K)} {Jump (J)} {Registered rung (R)} from

Menu.
The Registered Rung dialog box is displayed.

Other procedure
Press the Ctrl + J keys.

2 Click and select the rung to jump to from the list of currently displayed 6
rung Nos. and comments, and click the "Jump" button.

EDITOR
The specified rung is displayed, and the cursor moves to the specified rung.

Cancels the jump to a registered rung. Jumps to a registered rung.

„ Deleting registered rungs

1 Select {Find/Replace (K)} {Jump (J)} {Registered rung (R)} from

Menu.
The Registered Rung dialog box is displayed.

Other procedure
Press the Ctrl + J keys.

2 Click the "Delete rung" button.

This deletes the registered rung at the cursor
position.

6-125
 6-12 Jump, Find and Replace

Jumping to the previous/next block

Find/Replace (K) Jump (J) Previous block (P) Ctrl +
Next block (P) Ctrl +
Jump to the circuit block following or preceding the circuit block where the cursor is
currently located by the following procedure.

„ Jumping to the previous circuit block

Jump to the previous circuit block by the following procedure.

1 Select {Find/Replace (K)} {Jump (J)} {Previous block (P)} from

Menu.

6
EDITOR

Other procedure
Press the Ctrl + keys.

Note: You cannot jump to the previous circuit block from the comment rung.

„ Jumping to the next circuit block

Jump to the next circuit block by the following procedure.

1 Select {Find/Replace (K)} {Jump (J)} {Next block (P)} from Menu.

Other procedure
Press the Ctrl + keys.

Note: You cannot jump to the next circuit block from the comment rung.

6-126
 6-12 Jump, Find and Replace

Jumping to previous/next symbols

Find/Replace (K) Jump (J) Previous symbol (W) Shift + Tab
Next symbol (F)
Jump to the symbol following or preceding the symbol where the cursor is currently
located by the following procedure.

„ Jumping to previous symbols

Jump to the previous symbol by the following procedure.

1 Select {Find/Replace (K)} {Jump (J)} {Previous symbol (W)} from

Menu.

EDITOR
Other procedure
Press the Shift + Tab keys.

Note: You cannot jump to the previous symbol from the comment rung.

„ Jumping to next symbols

Jump to the next symbol by the following procedure.

1 Select {Find/Replace (K)} {Jump (J)} {Next symbol (F)} from Menu.

Other procedure
Press the Tab key.

Note: You cannot jump to the next symbol from the comment rung.

6-127
 6-12 Jump, Find and Replace

Jumping to the start and end of rungs

Find/Replace (K) Jump (J) Top of rung (H) Home

End of rung (E) End

Jump to the start or end of rungs where the cursor is located by the following
procedure.

„ Jumping to the start of rungs

Jump to the start of rungs by the following procedure.

1 Select {Find/Replace (K)} {Jump (J)} {Top of rung (H)} from Menu.

6
EDITOR

Other procedure
Press the Home key.

„ Jumping to the end of rungs

Jump to the end of rungs by the following procedure.

1 Select {Find/Replace (K)} {Jump (J)} {End of rung (E)} from Menu.

Other procedure
Press the End key.

6-128
 6-12 Jump, Find and Replace

Jumping to previous/next program change blocks

Find/Replace (K) Change: Prev block (O) Ctrl +
Change: Next block (Q) Ctrl +
The following describes the procedure for jumping to the previously changed circuit
block or next changed circuit block from the current cursor position.

„ Jumping to previous program change blocks

Jump to the previous program change block by the following procedure.

1 Select {Find/Replace (K)} {Jump (J)} {Change: Prev block (O)} from
Menu.

EDITOR
Other procedure
Press the Ctrl + keys.

„ Jumping to next program change blocks

Jump to the next program change block by the following procedure.

1 Select {Find/Replace (K)} {Jump (J)} {Change: Next block (Q)} from
Menu.

Other procedure
Press the Ctrl + keys.

6-129
 6-12 Jump, Find and Replace

Searching for Instructions and Operands

Find/Replace (K) Find (S) Ctrl + F
Search for a specified instruction or operand, and batch-display all instructions or
operands that satisfy the search conditions by the following procedure. A list of rung
comments can also be displayed, so this function can also be used as an index for
ladder programs.
1 Select {Find/Replace (K)}
{Find (S)} from Menu.

Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + F keys.

Moves the cursor of the searched device.

Closes the search results list display area, and

6 displays the Find dialog box reduced.
EDITOR

Search results list display area

[Tip]
The regular display/reduced display setting for the Find dialog box is saved to
KV BUILDER. For this reason, the setting is enabled when KV BUILDER is next
started up.

2 Enter the instruction or operand to search.

Only instructions or operands can be searched for by leaving the other entry
field blank.
If the Find dialog box is opened above a cursor position where an instruction is
currently entered, the instruction or operand at the cursor is displayed as
selected.

Enter the instruction to search here.

Enter the operand to search here.

Clicking the button to the right of the instruction and operand entry field
displays a pulldown menu which displays a history of the last ten searches.
[Tip]
To search timer, counter, or high-speed counter instructions, enter the TMR or C
instructions. To search operands, enter T0 or C0.

6-130
 6-12 Jump, Find and Replace

3 Click the "Find" button.

This starts the search. When the search ends, a list of instructions that satisfy
the search conditions is displayed. Move the cursor to the top of these
instructions, and click the instruction displayed in the list. This displays the
instructions selected in the ladder program.

Of the rung comments in the ladder program, searches rung comments written
continuously to multiple rungs excluding comments from the 2nd rung onwards.

Displays the selected Searches rung comments in the ladder program.

instruction in the
ladder program when
an instruction is Moves the cursor, and displays the next instruction that
selected from the matches the search conditions.
search results list.
Starts the search.
Ends the search.

Searches "???" operands and

devices that were not converted by
the ladder conversion function in the
ladder program.
6

EDITOR
A list of the search results is displayed here.

• There are two ways of displaying a list of search results:

• Instructions and operands

The cell No. is assigned a number 0, 1, 2, 3 and so forth to 9 from the left edge.
• Rung comments, top rung comment

The cell No. is fixed to 0.

[Tip]
• Ladder programs can be edited with the Find dialog box displayed.
• Nothing is displayed if the specified instruction or operand is not found.
• Two or more Find dialog boxes can be displayed.
• Searches are executed on the current window. To search other ladder
programs, switch the current window. The search conditions are inherited over
even if the current window is switched.
• If the Find dialog box is opened with the cursor displayed on a ladder symbol,
the operand of the selected instruction is automatically entered.

4 To perform a search again, click the "Find" button.

This updates the search results.
To quit the search, click the "Close" button.

6-131
 6-12 Jump, Find and Replace

Replacing Operands
Find/Replace (K) Replace operand (R) Ctrl + R
Batch replace operands with other operands by the following procedure.

Note: The operand replace function also works on invalid operands.

Replaced invalid operands are cleared after a replace is executed. If two
types of operands, legitimate operands and invalid operands, exist as the
replace source operand, both operands are replaced.
Example) If DM1000 is replaced with DM2000 when an invalid operand
exists at DM1000, both are replaced with DM2000.

1 Select {Find/Replace (K)} {Replace operand (R)} from Menu.

The Replace Operand dialog box is displayed.

6
EDITOR

Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + R keys.

2 Enter the before and after operand, replacement width and replacement
range.

Specify the range of rung Nos. to replace by rung No. In the default setting,
the entire range in the ladder program is automatically entered.

When this checkbox is marked, the confirmation message at

conversion is not displayed.

Enter the operand before

replacement.
When this checkbox is
Enter the operand after marked, the
replacement. confirmation message
is displayed when the
replace was not
possible.

Enter the replacement width (replacement When this checkbox is marked, the comment
range from operand before replacement). or label also moves matched to replacement
of the operand.

[Tip]
What is the "replacement width?"
The replace width refers to the extent that operands are to be replaced.
For example, if "3" is specified when converting "03000" to "00500", operands
"03000 to 03002" are replaced to "05000 to 05002".

6-132
 6-12 Jump, Find and Replace

3 Click the "OK" button.

The operand specified at [Before] is specified by the brown cursor, and the
confirmation message "Replace matching operand in this instruction?" is
displayed.

Note: When "Move comment/label" is selected, all comments for devices in the
set range are replaced. When converting from 00000 to 00010, the
6
comment of 00000 disappears, and all comments of 00010 become the

EDITOR
source 00000 comments.

[Tip]
• To cancel the replace, click the "Cancel" button.
• The confirmation message is not displayed if the "Replace all" checkbox is
marked.

4 Click the "Yes" button.

This replaces the operand with the operand specified at [After].
After the replace ends, the number of replaced operands is displayed. If you
click "No", the device at the current cursor position is not replaced, and the
next replace position is moved to. Clicking "Cancel" closes the dialog box and
ends the replace.

5 Click the "OK" button.

This closes the dialog box.

6-133
 6-12 Jump, Find and Replace

Replacing a Range of Operands

Find/Replace (K) Replace range (A)
Replace all operands in any selected range with other operands by the following
procedure.
1 Move the cursor to the first rung of the range in which operands are to be
replaced.

6
EDITOR

2 Drag to the final rung of the range to select.

The selected range is inverted in yellow.

Note: The range can be selected by individual rungs.

Other procedure
Move the cursor to the final rung of the range with the keys with the Shift
key held down, and release the keys and Shift key in order at the final
rung.

3 Select [Find/Replace (K)] [Replace

range (A)] from Menu.
The Replace Range dialog box is
displayed.
Other procedure
Click the right mouse button, and select
[Replace Range (A)] from the menu that is displayed.

6-134
 6-12 Jump, Find and Replace

4 Enter the new operand to each device.

Operands are replaced after being shifted by the width for the conversion
destination operand No. from the conversion source operand Nos.
Make the conversion destination
device No. entry the active entry.

Enter the conversion destination

device No.

[Example]
When the operand No. of the relay before replace is 1000 and the operand No. 6
of the relay after replace is 1008, all relays in the selected range become a No.

EDITOR
obtained by adding eight.

5 Click the "OK" button.

This executes the replace within the selected range.
After the replace ends, the number of replaced operands is displayed.

6-135
 6-12 Jump, Find and Replace

Converting NO/NC Contacts

Find/Replace (K) NO/NC (M) Ctrl + A
Logically convert NO contacts (LD) of the specified operand to NC contacts and vice
versa by the following procedure.

1 Select {Find/Replace (K)} {NO/NC (M)} from Menu.

The NO/NC Conversion dialog box is displayed.

Other procedure
6 • Press the Ctrl + A keys.
EDITOR

2 Enter the operand to convert.

Enter the operand to search here.

When this checkbox is marked, the confirmation message

at conversion is not displayed.

3 Click the "OK" button.

The operand specified at [Operand] is
specified by the brown cursor, and the
confirmation message "Convert this
contact?" is displayed.

[Tip]
• To cancel the replace, click the "Cancel"
button.
• The confirmation message is not displayed if the "Replace all" checkbox is
marked.

4 Click the "Yes" button.

This converts the NO contacts to NC contacts, and vice versa.
After the replace ends, the number of converted operands is displayed.
If you click "No", the device at the current cursor position is not replaced, and
the next replace position is moved to. Clicking "Cancel" closes the dialog box
and ends the replace.

5 Click the "OK" button.

This closes the dialog box.

6-136
 6-13 Displaying Use Status

6-13 Displaying Use Status

This section describes how to display a list of relays, timers and counters,
comparators, data memories, and temporary memories currently used in the ladder
program while it is being edited.

Displaying the use status of devices as a list

Find/Replace (K) Use status (V) Ctrl + E
Display a list of relays, control relays, timers and counters, comparators, high-speed
counters, data memories and control memories, and temporary memories currently
used in the ladder program while it is being edited by the following procedure.

1 Select {Find/Replace (K)} {Use status (V)} from Menu.

The Display Use Status dialog box is displayed.

EDITOR
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + E keys.

2 Check the use status.

Select the PLC type.

Displays the usage status.
{ : Used
Updates to the latest
• : Unused
information.
The following are displayed at
the device name field only for
Closes the Display Use relays:
Status dialog box. X : Input relay
Y : Output relay
Sets the search buttons M : Internal auxiliary relay
below to search for S : Relays for special units
unused devices. This allows you to confirm
which applications relays are
assigned to.
Searches up or down for
used devices from the
current cursor position.

Displays the devices in the Display Usage Status dialog box in device for unit notation.

Note: When the KV-700 is used, the X, Y, M and S guides are displayed based
upon the relay assignment settings in Unit Editor. If the relay assignments
are not set, all relays from relay 1000 onwards are displayed as "M".

6-137
 6-13 Displaying Use Status

[Tip]
• The ladder program can be edited while the Display Use Status dialog box is
displayed.
• Device Nos. are displayed as follows.
Example) 00000 to 00015 are displayed as follows:

6
EDITOR

6-138
 6-14 Unit Viewer

6-14 Unit Viewer

This section describes how to display a list of relays and data memories assigned to
units in Unit Editor when KV-700 is in use.

Displaying Unit Viewer

Tools (T) Unit Viewer (V) F2

Display a list of relays or data memories assigned to units in Unit Editor by the
following procedure.

Note: • Unit Viewer can be used only when "KV-700" or "KV-700+M" is selected
at the PLC type setting.
• Nothing is displayed if relays or data memories are not assigned on Unit
Editor.
"UNIT EDITOR" page 5-1
6
1 Select {Tools (T)} {Unit Viewer (V)} from Menu.

EDITOR
The [Unit Viewer] dialog box is displayed.

Other procedure
• Press the F2 key.
• Click the button.

2 Confirm the setting status.

Closes Unit Viewer. Sets the view options. Displays the number of DMs for which the unit is selected.

Displays the DM Nos. for which the

unit is selected.

Displays the number of relays

occupied by the unit.

Displays the relay No. assigned to

the unit.

Displays the unit No. Displays the unit name.

and unit color.

[Tip]
You can edit ladder programs while the Unit Viewer dialog box is displayed.

6-139
 6-14 Unit Viewer

Changing Display Items

Change the items to be displayed in the Unit Viewer dialog box.

1 Select {Tools (T)} {Unit Viewer (V)} from Menu.

The [Unit Viewer] dialog box is displayed.

Other procedure
• Press the F2 key.
• Click the button.
6
2 Click the "View options" button.
EDITOR

The Display Options dialog box is displayed.

3 Mark the checkbox of the display items, and click the "OK" button.
The item to display is changed.

6-140
 6-15 Conversion

6-15 Conversion
This section describes how to convert ladder programs created using Editor so that
they can be used on KV-10/16/24/40, KV-700 and KZ-300/350.

Executing Conversion
Conversion (A) Convert (C) Ctrl + F9
Programs created on Editor cannot be transferred to KV-10/16/24/40, KV-700 and
KZ-300/350 as they are in their generic ladder program state.
To transfer a ladder program to KV-10/16/24/40, KV-700 and KZ-300/350, it must
first be converted to machine code.
[Tip]
If you select {Monitor/Simulator (M)} {Convert→Transfer→Monitor (W)}, the
ladder program is automatically converted to machine code and the machine
code is transferred to the KV-10/16/24/40, KV-700 and KZ-300/350 without
actually executing conversion.
Convert ladder programs by the following procedure.
1 Make the ladder program to be converted the current window.
6
2 Select {Conversion (A)} {Convert (C)} from Menu.

EDITOR
This converts the ladder program, and the confirmation message is displayed.

Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + F9 keys.

If conversion ends successfully, how much memory

on the transfer destination unit is occupied by the
converted ladder program is displayed as a
percentage (%).

• Amount of used program area:

Amount of memory used when only the ladder program not
containing rung comments is transferred to the PLC
• Amount of used program + rung comment area:
Amount of memory used when the entire ladder program
containing rung comments is transferred to the PLC
• Amount of used device comments:
How much (%) of the number of device comments that can be
transferred to the PLC have been registered
[Tip]
If an error occurs during conversion, the message
"Conversion error" is displayed. You can check the details of
errors that occur.
"Displaying Errors" page 6-142

3 Click the "OK" button.

6-141
 6-15 Conversion

Displaying Errors
Conversion (A) Error display (E) Ctrl + F10
If an error occurs during conversion, the message "Conversion error" is displayed.
You can check the details of errors that occur.

1 If an error occurs, the message "Conversion error" is

displayed.

2 Click the "OK" button.

The Error Display window is displayed.

3 Check the error code and details of the error.

6 "Error Messages" page A-2

EDITOR

Rung where
error occurred Content of error

Error code

Jumps to rung in program where the error occurred. Closes the Error Display
window.

[Tip]
To re-display the error list, select {Convert (A)} {Error display (E)} from Menu.

Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + F10 keys.

6-142
 6-15 Conversion

Clearing Invalid Operands

Convert (A) Clear invalid operands (A)
Sometimes invalid operands are generated if you change the unit settings after
making a ladder program.
Clear invalid operands by the following procedure.

Note: This function can be used only when "KV-700" or "KV-700+M" is selected
at the PLC type setting.

[Tip]
Invalid operands
When the KV-700 is in use, relays and DMs are assigned in Unit Editor. Unit
setup information is linked to the ladder program. So, when unit setup
information is changed, the change is linked to automatically change the relays
and DM Nos. on the ladder program. However, when a unit to which relays and
DMs are assigned is deleted, this means that relays and DMs assigned to the
6
unit exist on the ladder program even though that unit does not exist. Relays and

EDITOR
DMs whose relationship with the unit has been discontinued in this way are
called "invalid operands."
Ladder programs containing invalid operands are not converted properly. To
cancel invalid operands, either use the "clear invalid operand function," or
individually check each of the invalid operands, and reset the unit assignments.

1 Select {Convert (A)} {Clear invalid operands (A)} from Menu.

The confirmation message is displayed.

2 Click the "Execute" button.

This clears invalid operands.
To cancel clearing of invalid operands, click the "Stop" button.

[Tip]
Invalid operands can be searched.
"Searching for Instructions and Operands" page 6-130

6-143
 6-15 Conversion

Setting the Device Auto-conversion Function

Tool (T) Option (O)
KV BUILDER is provided with the "device auto-conversion function." This function
automatically replaces the device Nos. on the ladder program matched to changes
made when assigned devices are changed on a unit to which devices have already
been assigned on Unit Editor.

Note: • The device auto-conversion function can be used only when "KV-700" or
"KV-700+M" is selected at the PLC type setting.
• When the device auto-conversion function is not used, change the
assigned devices set on Unit Editor, and then manually change the
device Nos. on the ladder.

Set the device auto-conversion function by the following procedure.

6 1 Select {Tool (T)} {Option (O)} from Menu.

EDITOR

The Options dialog box is displayed.

2 Mark the "Auto-convert ladder devices by changing unit

configuration(A)" checkbox.
This sets the device auto-conversion mode. If the checkbox is unmarked, the
device auto-conversion mode is not used.

3 Click the "OK" button.

The Options dialog box is displayed.

6-144
 6-15 Conversion

Checking for Redundant Coils

Convert (A) Redundant coil check (D)
Check for locations to which redundant coils are programs in the ladder program.

[Tip]
• Locations in the ladder program to which redundant coils are programmed do
not result in an error after conversion is performed.
• When two or more OUT or OUB instructions are used on the same output relay,
output is performed giving precedence to the last programmed instruction. (In
the following example, output 00500 does not turn ON even if either of inputs
00000 turns ON.)

6
• The redundant coil check is judged by four instructions: OUT, OUB, DIFU

EDITOR
Note:
and DIFD.
• Some ladder programs sometimes run as if redundant coils have been
programmed even if an error is not found in the redundant coil check.

Check for redundant coils by the following procedure.

1 Make the ladder program targeted for the redundant coil check the
current window.

2 Select {Convert (A)} {Redundant coil check (D)} from Menu.

Locations where redundant coils are programmed are checked, and the
confirmation message is displayed.

3 Click the "OK" button.

[Tip]
When a redundant coil is
found in the check, the Error
List window is displayed, and
you can check the operands
and rung No. where the
redundant coil is programmed.
"Displaying Errors" page 6-142

6-145
 6-15 Conversion

Setting a Password
Monitor/Simulator (M) Password setup(P)
The "password setting function" is for inhibiting reading and writing of unit setup
information, programs and comments stored in KV-700 memory.
When a password is set, reading and writing cannot be performed unless the
correct password is entered. Set a password if unauthorized reading or overwriting
of ladder programs will pose a problem.
Register and delete passwords by the following procedure.

Note: The "password setting function" can be used only when "KV-700" or "KV-
700+M" is selected at the PLC type setting.

1 Select {Monitor/Simulator (M)} {Password setup(P)} from Menu.

The Password Setup dialog box is displayed.

6
EDITOR

2 Enter the password, and click the "OK" button. To delete an already
registered password, delete the displayed password, and click the "OK"
button.

Enter the password Cancels registration and

to register. returns to the Editor.

[Tip]
You can enter up to six single-byte alphanumeric characters for passwords.

If you forget your password, either execute an all clear in the KV-700 CPU Unit's
access window, or overwrite the ladder program. Either of these methods clears
the password. Note that when a password is cleared, all settings and user
programs are also cleared. We recommend backing up ladder programs to which
a password has been set beforehand so that forgetting the password poses no
problems.

The following table shows the range of protection when a password is registered
and the ladder program is transferred to the KV-700.
Operation Range of Protection
PC → KV-700 Overwritable
KV-700 → PC Password protection
PC Memory Card → KV-700 Overwritable
KV-700 → Memory Card Readable
PC → Memory Card Overwritable
Memory Card → PC Password protection

KV-700
Memory Card

6-146
 6-16 Starting Up External Tools

6-16 Starting Up External Tools

This section describes how to start up Edit CPU Positioning Parameters, MOTION
BUILDER (Japanese) and PROTOCOL BUILDER (Japanese), and the KV/KZ-
300→KV-700 ladder conversion function.

Starting Up Edit CPU Positioning Parameter

Tools (T) Edit CPU positioning parameters (I) F3
What is "Edit CPU positioning parameters?"
The KV-700 CPU Unit has a pulse output function for positioning and speed control.
This function allows you to control stepping motors or pulse type AC servo motors,
for example.
"Edit CPU positioning parameters" is used for setting startup speed, operation
speed, acceleration/deceleration time, and other parameters that are set for
trapezoidal control.
There are two types of parameters: point parameters and system parameters.

Point parameters: These are the basic parameters in trapezoidal control for 6
setting travel destination points (positions), operation and

EDITOR
startup speed, and acceleration/deceleration time.
System parameters: These are the parameters for setting sensor input and pulse
output, comparators, and zero return/jog operation.

Main functions
• 32 point parameters can be preset on KV-BUILDER. If more than 32 point
parameters are set, the content of control memories (CM) is overwritten by the
ladder program.
• You can select from two control methods: position control and speed control. You
can also set incremental values and absolute values for the target values and
travel amounts.
• Pulse for two axes can be output, and pulse frequencies within the range 50Hz to
100000Hz are supported on both axes.
• Both 1 pulse and 2 pulses are supported as the pulse output mode. Select the
pulse output mode that best suits the driver method for the connected mode.

Start up Edit CPU Positioning Parameters by the following procedure.

Note: Edit CPU Positioning Parameters can be used only when "KV-700" or
"KV-700+M" is selected at the PLC type setting.

1 Select {Tools (T)} {Edit CPU positioning parameters (I)} from Menu.
The Edit CPU Positioning Parameter window is displayed.

Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the F3 key.

6-147
 6-16 Starting Up External Tools

Reflects the changes in the settings, and closes the Edit CPU positioning parameter screen.

Undoes the Displays Help.

previous operation.

Copies the selected range. Applies the settings to the current content.

Pastes copied details. Cancels changes to settings, and closes the

Edit CPU Positioning Parameter screen.
Adjusts the height of the line in the
setting area.

Adjusts the width of the column in the setting area.

Displays the CM No. assigned to each parameter.

Displays the System Parameter Setup dialog box.

2 Edit point parameters.

Set operation for each point. For details on each item, see "10-2 Setting Up
6 Parameters and Executing Instructions" (page 10-4) in the KV-700 CPU Unit
Manual.
(2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
EDITOR

(1)

Function Name Setting Range Default

(1) Point No. 0 to 31
Incremental positioning
Absolute positioning
(2) Operation mode Incremental positioning
Speed control CW
Speed control CCW
(3) Target value/travel -2147483648 to 2147483647 0
(4) Startup speed 50 to 65535 200
(5) Acceleration/deceleration time 0 to 4000 500
(6) Run speed 50 to 100000 50000
(7) Stop sensor use ON/OFF None
(8) Stop sensor pulses 0 to 65535 0

Parameters that are set are stored in CM (control memory) on the CPU Unit. Point
parameters are shared for both the X- and Y-axes.

If the checkbox is marked, the CM Nos. currently assigned to each

parameter are displayed as shown above.

6-148
 6-16 Starting Up External Tools

3 Click the "Sys Params" button.

The details of the [I/O Setup] tab in the Edit CPU positioning parameters dialog
box are displayed.
For details on each item, see "10-2 Setting Up Parameters and Executing
Instructions" (page 10-4) in the KV-700 CPU Unit Manual.

(1)
Storage location
device name

(3)
(2)
(5)
(4)
(7)
(6)
(9)
(8)

6
(10)

EDITOR
Storage location (11)
device name

Function Name Setting Range Default

(1) Axis X-axis, Y-axis 
Input setting
CR3002
(2) X-axis CR3002
IN000 to IN003
Home
CR3102
(3) Y-axis CR3102
IN000 to IN003
CR3003
(4) X-axis CR3003
IN000 to IN003
Stop
CR3103
(5) Y-axis CR3103
IN000 to IN003
(6) X-axis CR3000 (fixed) CR3000
LS CW
(7) Y-axis CR3100 (fixed) CR3100
(8) X-axis CR3001 (fixed) CR3001
LS CCW
(9) Y-axis CR3101 (fixed) CR3101
Output setting
(10) Output mode 1-pulse output, 2-pulse output 1-pulse output
(11) Zero return dir CCW, CW CCW

6-149
 6-16 Starting Up External Tools

4 Click the [Comparator Setup] tab.

The details of the [Comparator Setup] tab are displayed. Set each of the items.
For details on each item, see "10-2 Setting Up Parameters and Executing
Instructions" (page 10-4) in the KV-700 CPU Unit Manual.

(1)

(2)
(3)

Storage location
device name
(4)
(5)
6
EDITOR

Function Name Setting Range Default

(1) Axis X-axis, Y-axis 
Comparator 0
Not used
Stop sensor
(2) Function Not used
Limit switch CW
Limit switch CCW
(3) Set value -2147483648 to 2147483647 0
Comparator 1
Not used
Stop sensor
(4) Function Not used
Limit switch CW
Limit switch CCW
(5) Set value -2147483648 to 2147483647 0

6-150
 6-16 Starting Up External Tools

5 Click the [Zero Return/Jog] tab.

The details of the [Zero Return/Jog] tab are displayed. Set each of the items.
For details on each item, see "10-2 Setting Up Parameters and Executing
Instructions" (page 10-4) in the KV-700 CPU Unit Manual.

(1)

(2)
(3)
(4) Storage location
device name

(5)
(6)
(7)
6

EDITOR
(8)
(9)

Function Name Setting Range Default

(1) Axis selection X- axis, Y-axis
Zero return
(2) Start speed 50 to 65535 200
(3) Accel time 0 to 4000 500
(4) Run speed 50 to 100000 50000
JOG
(5) Start speed 50 to 65535 200
(6) Accel time 0 to 4000 500
(7) Run speed 50 to 100000 50000
CM defaults for changing setting value
(8) Chng curr value -2147483648 to 2147483647 0
(9) Chng run speed 50 to 100000 0

6 When you have finished setting each of the parameters, click the "OK"
button.
This closes the Edit CPU positioning parameters screen.
The point parameters and system parameters that you set are saved to file.
Program positioning instructions in the ladder program for use.
"Entering CPU positioning instructions" page 6-71
"10-2 Setting Up Parameters and Executing Instructions" (page 10-4) in the
"KV-700 Series User's Manual"

6-151
 6-16 Starting Up External Tools

Converting Ladder Programs for KZ-300/350

Tools (T) KV/KZ-350→KV-700 ladder conversion (3)
Convert ladder programs created for the KZ-300/350 so that they can be used on
the KV-700.
Note: Only ladder programs created on LADDER BUILDER for KZ can be
converted. To convert ladder programs created on KZ LADDER, read the
ladder program on LADDER BUILDER for KZ and then re-save the
program.

Cautions during conversion of ladder programs for KZ-300/350

Each of the units are converted as follows when conversion of ladder programs for
KZ-300/350 is executed.
For details on the conversion rules of each of the units, refer to "Appendix 4 List of
Conversion Rules" (page A-59).

Units for KZ-300/350 Units for KV-700 Remarks

6 KZ-U4 KV-U7
Conversion is not performed as the unit is built into KV-
KZ-U5 None
700.
EDITOR

KZ-300/350 KV-700
KZ-C16X KV-B16XA
KZ-C32X KV-C32XA Units are automatically converted for corresponding
KZ-C32T KV-C32TA devices.
KZ-B16R
KV-B16RA
KZ-B16S
Units are automatically converted for corresponding
devices. Only the placement register (DM9191 to
KZ-H2 KV-H20
DM9197) is not converted. The information of this
register becomes invalid operands.
KZ-L2 KV-L20 The unit is only placed, and devices and modes are not
VT-L16Z KV-L20 converted.
Units are only placed; device conversion is not
KZ-TH4/TC4 KV-TF40
performed.
Units are automatically converted for corresponding
KZ-R1A KL-N20Z
devices. One KL-N20Z is assigned to one KZ-R1A.
Units are automatically converted for corresponding
KL-N20Z (remote I/O devices.
KL-N20V (remote I/O mode)
mode) Note, however, that device area of connection
information is not converted.
KL-N20Z (PLC link mode) KL-N20V (PLC link mode) Unit is only placed; it is not converted.
D/A outputs are converted at a ratio of one KV-DA40 for
two KZ-AN6s.
KZ-AN6 KV-AD40, KV-DA40 When one KV-AN6 is converted to one KV-DA40, the
ladder program is converted to channels 0 and 1, and
nothing is assigned to channels 2 and 3.

When ladder program are converted, device Nos. on the KV-700 are assigned to
30000 onwards, and data memories are assigned to DM10000 onwards. (The
"device assignment settings" in the option settings on Unit Editor are not reflected in
the conversion.)

6-152
 6-16 Starting Up External Tools

Automatically setting corresponding units

Automatically convert ladder programs for the KV-700 by the following procedure.

1 Select {File (F)} {Open ladder (O)} from

Menu.
The Open dialog box is displayed.
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + O keys.

2 Select the ladder program that was created for KZ-300/350, and click the
"Open (O)" button.
This opens the ladder program.
"Reading files" page 6-36

Specify the folder in which

the ladder program to be
6
read is saved. The default

EDITOR
setting is "Project".
Specify "Ladder diagram
Specify the file name. file(*.ldc)" as it is as the file
type.

Displays the user information

currently entered to the
ladder program to be read.

Specify the folder containing the ladder program to read.

Look in (I)
Normally, "Project" is opened.
File name (N) Enter the name of the ladder program to read.
Files of type (T) Specify the "Ladder diagram file(*.ldc)."
User info (U) Displays the user information entered at Input user info.

3 Select {Tools (T)} {KV/KZ-350→KV-700 ladder conversion (3)} from

Menu.
The confirmation message is displayed.

4 Click the "OK" button.

The Input Project Name dialog box is
displayed.

5 Enter the name of the new project

to be created, and click the "OK"
button.
This starts up Unit Editor.

6-153
 6-16 Starting Up External Tools

6 Set the unit configuration that was used in the read ladder program from
the unit configuration window.
"UNIT EDITOR" page 5-1

Select the upper row to place the unit.

6
EDITOR

7 When special units are used,

select the units, and enter the
settings from the unit setup
window.

8 Select {Convert (P)} {Generate

KV-700 Unit (G)} from Menu.
The system configuration of the KV-
700 is automatically generated from
the system configuration prepared
for the KZ-300/350.

Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + A keys.

9 Select {File (F)} {Save (S)} from Menu.

This exits Unit Editor, and the ladder program is
automatically converted based upon the system
configuration created for KV-700.
"List of Conversion Rules" page A-59

6-154
 6-16 Starting Up External Tools

Manually setting corresponding units

Manually convert ladder programs for the KV-700 by the following procedure.

1 Select {File (F)} {Open ladder (O)} from

Menu.
The Open dialog box is displayed.
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + O keys.

2 Select the ladder program that was created for KZ-300/350, and click the
"Open (O)" button.
This opens the ladder program.
"Reading files" page 6-36

Specify the folder in which

the ladder program to be
6
read is saved. The default

EDITOR
setting is "Project".
Specify "Ladder diagram
Specify the file name. file(*.ldc)" as it is as the file
type.

Displays the user information

currently entered to the
ladder program to be read.

Specify the folder containing the ladder program to read.

Look in (I)
Normally, "Project" is opened.
File name (N) Enter the name of the ladder program to read.
Files of type (T) Specify the "Ladder diagram file(*.ldc)."
User info (U) Displays the user information entered at Input user info.

3 Select {Tools (T)} {KV/KZ-350→KV-700 ladder conversion (3)} from

Menu.
The confirmation message is displayed.

4 Click the "OK" button.

The Input Project Name dialog box is
displayed.

5 Enter the name of the new project

to be created, and click the "OK"
button.
This starts up Unit Editor.

6-155
 6-16 Starting Up External Tools

6 Set the unit configuration that was used in the read ladder program from
the unit configuration tree.
"UNIT EDITOR" page 5-1

Select the upper row to place the unit.

6
EDITOR

7 When special units are used,

select the units, and enter the
settings from the unit setup
window.

6-156
 6-16 Starting Up External Tools

8 Select the lower row, and create the unit configuration for the KV-700.
"UNIT EDITOR" page 5-1

Select the lower row to place the unit.

EDITOR
9 Assign the relays/DMs of the unit on the KV-700 side.
"Automatically Assigning Relays/DMs for Placed Units" page 5-31
"Manually Assigning Relays/DMs for Placed Units" page 5-32

10 Select {Conversion (P)} {KZ-350→KV-700 conv (T)} from Menu.

The Specify Unit Conversion Destination dialog box is displayed.

Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + T keys.

6-157
 6-16 Starting Up External Tools

11 Specify the units to be converted from the KZ-300/350 system to the KV-
700 system.

1 Select the conversion source Displays comments when the

unit from the dropdown list. selected conversion source unit
Convertible units are displayed contains a comment.
below.
3 Registers the unit on the
Displays which selected selected KV-700 system side as
conversion source unit on the the conversion destination.
KV-700 system is specified to as
the conversion destination.
Deletes registration.
2 Click the "Position" column to
select the unit to convert.

6 Displays convertible units on the KV-700 system side from the selected units for KZ-300/350.
Position: Placement position of unit (number of rows, and position from left side)
Unit name: Unit model No.
EDITOR

Number of relays: Number of specified conversion destination relays/Number of relays occupied by the unit
Number of DMs: Number of specified conversion destination DMs/Number of DMs occupied by the unit

12 Click the "OK" button.

This closes the Specify Unit Conversion Destination dialog box.

13 Select {File (F)} {Save (S)} from Menu.

This exits Unit Editor, and automatically converts the ladder program.

6-158
 6-16 Starting Up External Tools

Converting Ladder Programs for KV-10/16/24/40

Tool (T) KV/KZ-350→KV-700 ladder conversion (3)
Convert ladder programs created for the KV-10/16/24/40 so that they can be used
on the KV-700 by the following procedure.

1 Select {File (F)} {Open ladder (O)} from

Menu.
The Open dialog box is displayed.
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + O keys.

2 Select the ladder program that was created for KV-10/16/24/40, and click
the "Open (O)" button.
"Reading files" page 6-36

6
Specify the folder in which

EDITOR
the ladder program to be
read is saved. The default
setting is "Project".
Specify "Ladder diagram
Specify the file name. file(*.ldc)" as it is as the file
type.

Displays the user information

currently entered to the
ladder program to be read.

Specify the folder containing the ladder program to read.

Look in (I)
Normally, "Project" is opened.
File name (N) Enter the name of the ladder program to read.
Files of type (T) Specify the "Ladder diagram file(*.ldc)."
User info (U) Displays the user information entered at Input user info.

3 Select {Tool (T)} {KV/KZ-350→KV-700 ladder conversion (3)} from

Menu.
The confirmation message is displayed.

4 Click the "OK" button.

The input Project Name dialog box
is displayed.

6-159
 6-16 Starting Up External Tools

5 Enter the name of the new project

to be created, and click the "OK"
button.
The ladder program is automatically converted.
"List of Conversion Rules" page A-59

Starting Up MOTION BUILDER (Japanese)

Tools (T) MOTION BUILDER (M) F11

Start up the Parameter Setup Software MOTION BUILDER (Japanese) for the
Positioning Unit. For details of operations, refer to the MOTION BUILDER
(Japanese) User's Manual.

6 Note: • MOTION BUILDER (Japanese) can be used only when "KV-700" or

"KV-700+M" is selected at Unit setting, and MOTION BUILDER
EDITOR

(Japanese) is installed.
• To use MOTION BUILDER (Japanese), the Positioning Unit must be
placed above Unit Editor in advance.
If MOTION BUILDER (Japanese) is started up in a system that does not
include the Positioning Unit, the message "Unit setting information does
not contain target mode." will be displayed and MOTION BUILDER
(Japanese) will not be started up.
"UNIT EDITOR" page 5-1

Starting Up PROTOCOL BUILDER (Japanese)

Tools (T) PROTOCOL BUILDER (P) F12

Start up the KV-L20 Communications Macro Support Software PROTOCOL

BUILDER (Japanese) for the Positioning Unit. For details of operations, refer to the
PROTOCOL BUILDER (Japanese) User's Manual.

Note: • PROTOCOL BUILDER (Japanese) can be used only when "KV-700" or

"KV-700+M" is selected at Unit setting, and PROTOCOL BUILDER
(Japanese) is installed.
• To use PROTOCOL BUILDER (Japanese), KV-L20 must be placed
above Unit Editor in advance, and the operation mode must be set to
"PROTOCOL BUILDER (Japanese) mode."
If PROTOCOL BUILDER (Japanese) is started up in a system in which
the KV-L20 is not set on the Unit Editor, the message "There is no Multi-
communication Unit having a PROTOCOL BUILDER (Japanese) and
mode setup port." will be displayed and PROTOCOL BUILDER
(Japanese) will not be started up.
"UNIT EDITOR" page 5-1

6-160
 6-17 Printing Ladder Programs

6-17 Printing Ladder Programs

This section describes how to print ladder diagrams, mnemonic lists, labels and
comments, reference information, device use status, and parameters.
Executing Printing
File (F) Print (P) Ctrl + P
A PC environment that supports printing is required to print information. Enable
printing from your PC by referring to the User's Manual for your PC.
The following eight items of information can be printed:
• Cover sheet (user information)
• Ladder diagrams
• Mnemonic lists
• Labels, comments and verify information
• Device use status
• CPU positioning parameters
• Unit specifications
• List of unit relays/DMs
6
To print information, set the information to be printed beforehand.

EDITOR
1 Select {File (F)} {Print (P)} from Menu.
The Print/Print Preview dialog box is displayed.

Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + P keys.

2 Set the details to be printed. To print an item, select "ON", and to cancel
printing, select "OFF".

Sets whether or Detailed Print

not to print. Setup screen

Prints using the

above settings.

[Tip]
As the default setting, only ladder diagrams are set to be printed.

6-161
 6-17 Printing Ladder Programs

3 Set in detail the range to be printed according to your printing

requirements. If necessary, click the "Details" button of items to be
printed.

The printing setup screen is displayed.

"Setting printing of cover sheet" page 6-163
"Setting printing of ladder diagrams" page 6-164
"Setting printing of mnemonic lists" page 6-165
"Setting printing of labels, comments and verify information" page 6-166
"Setting printing of device use status" page 6-167
"Setting printing of CPU positioning parameters" page 6-168
"Setting printing of unit specifications" page 6-169
"Setting printing of unit relay/DM lists" page 6-169

6 4 Click the "Apply" button.

The Print dialog box is displayed.
EDITOR

Note: When setting are changed, and the "Cancel" button is clicked, the changed
settings are invalidated.

[Tip]
When "XYM," "Signed of decimal constants" and "Grid" are set in the display
mode, details are printed at the set view mode.
"View Modes" page 6-22

5 Click the "OK" button.

This executes printing of the details you set.

6-162
 6-17 Printing Ladder Programs

„ Setting printing of cover sheet

Specify the type of

font and font size
for each print items.

Select the desired

print items.

Opens the User Info

Input dialog box.

Item Set Details Default

Font used for printing (Only fonts currently
Program Font MS Sans Serif
registered to the PC in use can be selected.)
name
Size Size of font to be printed 12
Font
Font used for printing (Only fonts currently
MS Sans Serif
6
Creation date registered to the PC in use can be selected.)
Size Size of font to be printed 12

EDITOR
Font used for printing (Only fonts currently
Font MS Sans Serif
Title name registered to the PC in use can be selected.)
Size Size of font to be printed 20
Font used for printing (Only fonts currently
Font MS Sans Serif
Author registered to the PC in use can be selected.)
Size Size of font to be printed 12
Font used for printing (Only fonts currently
Font MS Sans Serif
Memo registered to the PC in use can be selected.)
Size Size of font to be printed 12

12 points and 20 points are roughly equal to 4.233 mm and 7.056 mm, respectively.
At 12 points, a single 2-byte character is roughly 3.8 mm square, and at 20 points
roughly 6.3 mm square. (This also varies slightly according to the precision of your
printer.)

Sample printout

6-163
 6-17 Printing Ladder Programs

„ Setting printing of ladder diagrams

Select the type of comments

to print.

Set whether or not to print

cross reference information.

Item Set Details (input range) Default

Comment Comment 1/comment 2/comment 3/OFF Comment 1
Verify information ON/OFF OFF

Enter the rung No. to start printing from. Specify the number of
printed rungs per page.
Enter the rung No. to stop printing at.
6 Select the type of
comments to print.
Select whether to print operands on ladder
EDITOR

diagrams displayed as devices or labels.

Set whether or not to print cross reference

information.

Set whether or not to print block by block.

Item Set Details (input range) Default

Start rung No. Rung No. from which printing is started 1
End rung No. Rung No. at which printing ends Last rung on editing screen
Rungs per page Number of rungs to print per page 17
Print device Device name/label name Device name
Block delimiter Reflect (delimit ON)/Ignore (delimit OFF) Reflect
Color printing ON/OFF OFF
Grid printing ON/OFF ON

Sample printout

[Tip]
Color printing is possible when a color printer is used to printing only ladder
diagrams.

6-164
 6-17 Printing Ladder Programs

„ Setting printing of mnemonic lists

Enter the step No. to start printing from. Specify the number of
printed lines per page.
Enter the step No. to stop printing at.
Select the type of
comments to print.
Select whether to print operands on
ladder diagrams displayed as devices
or labels.

Item Set Details (input range) Default

Start step Step No. from which printing is started 0
End step Step No. at which printing ends 65534
Lines/page Number of lines to print per page (30 to 120) 60
Comment Comment 1/comment 2/comment 3/OFF Comment 1
Devices Device name/label name Device name
6
Sample printout

EDITOR

6-165
 6-17 Printing Ladder Programs

„ Setting printing of labels, comments and verify information

Only device to which comments

are entered and that are used
on ladder programs are printed.

6
EDITOR

Item Set Details (input range)

Print only comment entry

devices

Mark the checkbox of the

device to be printed. Specify the setup
range to be printed.

Specify the number of

rungs per page.
Set whether or not to print
cross reference information.

[Tip]
All devices are set to be printed as the default.
Item Set Details (input range)
Relay
Timer Range of use for each PLC type (entire usable range)
Counter
High-speed counter 
Comparator 
Data memory Range of use for each PLC type (entire usable range)
Temporary memory 
Control relay
Range of use for each PLC type (entire usable range)
Control memory
Number of rungs (30 to 120) printed per
Rungs/page 70
page
Verify information ON/OFF ON

6-166
 6-17 Printing Ladder Programs

[Tip]
Control relays and control memories are displayed only when "KV-700" or "KV-
700+M" is selected at the PLC type setting.

Sample printout

„ Setting printing of device use status

6

EDITOR
Mark the checkbox of the
device to be printed.

[Tip]
• As the default setting, all devices are set to be printed as the default.
• "Other" includes timers, counters, high-speed counters, comparators, and
temporary memories.
• Control relays and control memories are displayed only when "KV-700" or
"KV-700+M" is selected at the PLC type setting.

Sample printout

6-167
 6-17 Printing Ladder Programs

„ Setting printing of CPU positioning parameters

[Tip]
As the default setting, CPU positioning parameters are set to be printed in the
CM display.

Sample printout

6 Point parameter
EDITOR

System parameter

6-168
 6-17 Printing Ladder Programs

„ Setting printing of unit specifications

Prints the unit specifications

of special units.

Prints unit specifications on

a new page for each unit.

Item Set Details Default

Special units Prints special units. Printing OFF
New page per unit Inserts a page break between units. Page between units

Sample printout

EDITOR
„ Setting printing of unit relay/DM lists

Sample printout

6-169
 6-17 Printing Ladder Programs

Preview
File (F) Print preview (V)
Display a preview of what will be printed by the following procedure.

1 Select {File (F)} {Print preview (V)} from

Menu.
The Print/Print Preview dialog box is displayed.

Other procedure
Click the button.

6
2 Set the details to be printed. To print an item, select "ON", and to cancel
EDITOR

printing, select "OFF".

"Executing Printing" page 6-161

Sets whether or Detailed Print

not to print. Setup screen

Prints using the

above settings.

[Tip]
As the default setting, only ladder diagrams are set to be printed as the default.

6-170
 6-17 Printing Ladder Programs

3 Click the "Apply" button.

This displays the print preview.

Executes printing. Closes the print

preview.

Displays the next

page. Reduces the
display size.

Displays the
previous page. Enlarges the
display size.

EDITOR
Specifies the number of preview pages to be displayed on screen at once.

[Tip]
Clicking the "Print" button displays the details to be printed.

6-171
 6-17 Printing Ladder Programs

Setting Up the Printer

File (F) Printer setup (R)
Set the size of paper to be printed and the printing orientation (horizontal or vertical).
Set up the printer by the following procedure.

1 Select {File (F)} {Printer setup (R)} from

Menu.
The Print/Print Preview dialog box is displayed.

6
EDITOR

2 Click the "Properties (P)" button.

This displays the Printer Properties.

Important: The properties that are displayed vary according to the printer you are
using.

3 Set up the printer.

[Tip]
For details on how to set up the printer, refer to the User's Manual for the printer.

6-172
 6-18 Changing the Screen Display Color

6-18 Changing the Screen Display Color

KV BUILDER allows you to change the colors used in screen layouts. This section
describes how to change the display colors used on screen.

Changing Screen Display Colors

View (V) Change ladder color (Z)
Set the color of screen layouts on KV BUILDER by the following procedure.

1 Select {View (V)} {Change ladder color (Z)} from Menu.

The Change Ladder Diagram Color dialog box is displayed.

EDITOR
2 Select the items whose color is to be changed from the [Selected area]
field, and click the button at [Col] to select the color.

Directly click to select

the part to re-color.

Select the part to be

re-colored from the
pulldown menu. The currently set
color is displayed.
To change the
Discards the settings, color, click and
and returns the settings specify the color.
to their defaults.

[Tip]
• Once colors are set, the colors are enabled when KV BUILDER is next started
up as they are saved on KV BUILDER.
• To return colors to their defaults after they have been saved, click the
"Defaults" button.

6-173
 6-18 Changing the Screen Display Color

3 Select the color from the basic colors, and click the "OK" button.

Select the color to be

changed.

If the desired color is

not displayed, click
"Define Custom Colors
>>" and create the
desired color.

6 [Tip]
EDITOR

If you cannot find the color you want in the basic colors, click the "Define Custom
Colors >>" button to create your own colors. Specify colors by tint and
brightness, and add more colors by clicking the "Add to Custom Colors" button.
Additional colors are added to [Custom Colors].

Set the tint.

Set the
brightness.

The newly created color

is displayed here.

Adds newly
created colors.

4 Click the "OK" button.

6-174
 6-18 Changing the Screen Display Color

Changing Unit Colors

View (V) Change unit color (U)
Set the color of units that are displayed on Unit Editor. If you assign a relay from Unit
Editor, the corresponding device on the ladder diagram is displayed in the color you
have set for the unit.
Set this item by the following procedure.

[Tip]
Unit display colors can be changed in either Editor or Unit Editor.
The colors of units are reflected in both applications after they are changed.
"Setting Unit Color" page 5-77

1 Select {View (V)} {Change unit color (U)} from Menu.

The Change Unit Color dialog box is displayed.
6

EDITOR
2 Select the item whose color is to be changed from the dropdown list, and
click the button at [Col] to select the color.

Select the area to be re-colored The currently set color is displayed. To

from the pulldown menu. change the color, click and specify the color.

Discards the settings and returns

the settings to their defaults.

[Tip]
• Once colors are set, the colors are enabled when KV BUILDER is next started
up as they are saved on KV BUILDER.
• To return colors to their defaults after they have been saved, click the "Restore
defaults" button.

6-175
 6-18 Changing the Screen Display Color

3 Select the color from the basic colors, and click the "OK" button.

Select the color to be

changed.

If the desired color is

not displayed, click
"Define Custom Colors
>>" and create the
desired color.

6 [Tip]
EDITOR

If you cannot find the color you want in the basic colors, click the "Define Custom
Colors >>" button to create your own colors. Specify colors by tint and
brightness, and add more colors by clicking the "Add to Custom Colors" button.
Additional colors are added to [Custom Colors].

Set the tint.

Set the
brightness.

The newly created color

is displayed here.

Adds newly
created colors.

4 Click the "OK" button.

6-176
 6-18 Changing the Screen Display Color

Setting Animation of Title Screen

Tools (T) Option (O)
KV BUILDER executes an animation sequence on the title screen when it is started
up.
If you find this animation sequence a nuisance as it takes a long time to complete,
you can cancel it by the following procedure. Once canceled, the animation
sequence will not be executed when KV BUILDER is next started up.

1 Select {Tools (T)} {Option (O)} from Menu.

The Options dialog box is displayed.

EDITOR
2 Unmark the [Display startup title] checkbox.
This disables display of the title screen.
To enable animation at startup, mark the checkbox.

3 Click the "OK" button.

The Options dialog box is displayed.

6-177
Chapter 7
MONITOR
This chapter describes Monitor functions and how to use them.

7-1 Outline of Monitor Functions............................................ 7-2

7-2 Outline of Tool Bar Functions........................................... 7-4

7-3 Outline of Menu Functions................................................ 7-9

7-4 Communicating with PLCs ............................................. 7-18

7-5 Starting Up and Exiting Monitors ................................... 7-39

7-6 Ladder Monitor................................................................. 7-46

7-7 Setting Up and Operating PLCs ..................................... 7-68

7-8 Batch Monitor................................................................... 7-73

7-9 Registration Monitor........................................................ 7-84

7-10 Custom Monitor ............................................................. 7-103

7-11 High-speed Timer Chart Monitor .................................. 7-106

7-12 Unit Monitor.....................................................................7-116

7-13 Batch Change................................................................. 7-139

7-14 Online Edit Functions.................................................... 7-149

 7-1 Outline of Monitor Functions

7-1 Outline of Monitor Functions

This section describes an outline of monitor functions and cautions to pay attention
to when using monitors.

Outline of Functions
"Monitors" compile (convert) ladder programs created on Unit Editor, transfers them
to the PLC (KV-10/16/24/40 Basic Unit, KV-700 CPU Unit, KZ-300/350 CPU Unit)
where they are actually executed, and checks their operating status. You can also
transfer ladder programs on actually connected PLCs to the PC, decompile and
actually execute them to check their operating status.

Monitors allow you to perform the following operations:

• Check the operating status of ladder programs in real time in the form of a ladder
diagram or high-speed time chart
• Select the PLC operation mode
• Forcibly turn input contacts ON/OFF on the Monitor screen by inhibiting input
7 refreshing
• Easily change the setting values and current values of device data and
MONITOR

timers/counters
• Save/read a specified range of device current values to floppy disk or Memory
Card
• Return some devices to their defaults.

Monitor Restrictions
• After a Monitor is stopped, do not disconnect the PLC and connect a different PLC
with the Monitor window still displayed.
The content of the ladder program on the PLC will no longer match the Ladder
Monitor on the Monitor window, and operation will no longer be normal.
• Operation slows down when there are lots of devices to monitor. Either minimize
or close windows that do not need to be monitored. Minimized windows are not
monitored.
• Minimizing the entire Monitor window stops monitor operation. To resume
monitoring, either select {Start Monitor} from Menu, or click .
"Starting the Monitor" page 7-66
• Registration Monitor time charts do not function using the scan time of the PLC.
• Other windows are not monitored when monitoring of a high-speed time chart is
being executed.
• Up to 1,000 comments can be transferred on the KV-10/16/24/40 and KZ-
300/KZ-350, and up to 5,000 comments (10,000 comments when memory is
expanded) can be transferred on the KV-700.
"Setting Transfer of Comments" page 6-121

7-2
 7-1 Outline of Monitor Functions

Cautions during Communications

• Before starting a Monitor, connect the PC and the PLC using the connector cables,
and make sure that the Monitor's serial port is correctly set. If the serial port is not
correctly set, the "Check PLC connection line" error is displayed when the Monitor
is started up, and monitoring is not possible. Serial port defaults are COM port No.
"1" and baud rate "38400 bps". These defaults must be changed if the serial port
is to be used at other settings.
"7-4 Communicating with PLCs" page 7-13
• Do not disconnect cables connected to the PLC during Monitor execution. Doing
so might cause a communications error or reset the PLC.
• Do not perform communications in operating environments where intense noise is
generated. Communication errors will occur.
• If the communications line is disconnected or communications is aborted while the
ladder program is being written, the ladder program on the KV-10/16/24/40 Basic
Unit, KV-700 CPU Unit, KZ-300/350 CPU Unit may become damaged.
• When communication errors frequently occur, change the baud rate to a lower
value.
"Appendix-9 Remedies for Frequently Occurring Communications Errors" page
A-88 7

MONITOR
Cautions when the USB Port Is Used
• When connecting to the USB port using the USB cable, leave the KV-700 turned
ON.
• To use the USB port, a USB-compatible OS such as Windows 98 must already be
installed on the PC.
• When using the KV-700 by a USB connection, directly connect the KV-700 to the
USB port on the PC. Do not connect the KV-700 via a USB hub.
• When communications cannot be performed properly due to unstable or
interrupted communications caused by noise, disconnect the USB cable
connected to the KV-700 from the PC and insert it again. If communications is
unstable or noise frequently occurs in the operating environment, attach a ferrite
core to the USB cable. Attaching ferrite cores along the entire length of the USB
cable will prove more effective in inhibiting noise.

7-3
 7-2 Outline of Tool Bar Functions

7-2 Outline of Tool Bar Functions

This section lists the functions displayed on the tool bar on Monitors. For a detailed
description of each function, see the page indicated for each function.

Standard
The following table shows icons displayed on the tool bar that visually represent
frequently performed operations on Monitor screens.

Important: "High-speed Time Chart Monitor," "Serial port," "USB" and "Calendar
timer setup" can be used only when "KV-700" or "KV-700+M" is
selected.

Icon Name Function See page

Return to Editor Exits the Monitor and returns to the Unit Editor screen. 7-153

Start online editing Starts online editing. 7-150

Transfer online Transfers the details edited by online editing to the main unit, and
7-152
7 editing returns to the Monitor.
Cancels online editing, discards the edited details, and returns to
Cancel online editing 7-153
the Monitor.
MONITOR

Display at bottom of Displays Ladder Monitor at the bottom of the screen regardless of
7-54
Ladder Monitor its active/inactive state.
Ladder Monitor Opens the Ladder Monitor window. 7-46

Registration Monitor Opens the Registration Monitor window. 7-84

Batch Monitor Opens the Batch Monitor window. 7-73

Batch Change Opens the Batch Change window. 7-139

High-speed Time Executes the High-speed Time Chart Monitor for registered devices
7-106
Chart Monitor in the currently open Registration Monitor window.
Find Groups together search items on the Ladder Monitor. 7-64

Enlarge display Enlarges the display ratio of the ladder diagram. 7-49

Reduce display Reduces the display ratio of the ladder diagram. 7-49
Display/hide Switches display/hide of the device comment on the ladder
7-52
comment diagram.
Communicates with the KV-10/16/24/40, KV-700 and KZ-300/350
Serial port 7-18
using the serial point.
USB Communicates with the KV-700 using the USB port. 7-18

Ethernet Communicates with the KV-700 over Ethernet. 7-18

Indicates that communications with the KV-10/16/24/40, KV-700
Stop monitor and KZ-300/350 are being performed. Clicking this icon stops 7-66
communications with the KV-10/16/24/40, KV-700 and KZ-300/350.
Indicates that communications with the KV-10/16/24/40, KV-700
Start monitor and KZ-300/350 are not being performed. Clicking this icon starts 7-66
communications with the KV-10/16/24/40, KV-700 and KZ-300/350.
Sets the KV-10/16/24/40, KV-700 and KZ-300/350 to the Run
RUN 7-68
mode.

7-4
 7-2 Outline of Tool Bar Functions

Icon Name Function See page

Sets the KV-10/16/24/40, KV-700 and KZ-300/350 to the Program
STOP 7-68
mode.
Calendar timer setup Sets the KV-700 calendar timer. 7-70
Set time chart Sets the number of graduations on the time chart on the
7-100
graduations Registration Monitor.
Help Displays Help for how to operate KV BUILDER. 1-50

Unit Monitor
Unit Monitor monitors and displays the states of individual units based upon the unit
connection information stored on the KV-700.

Important: "Unit Monitor" can be used only when "KV-700" or "KV-700+M" is

selected at the PLC type setting.

Icon Name Function See page

 Unit Monitor Selects the unit and displays the Unit Monitor. 7-116
7

MONITOR
Custom Monitor
Custom Monitor monitors and displays the internal states of the special functions of
the KV-700 CPU Unit.

Important: "Custom Monitor" can be used only when "KV-700" or "KV-700+M" is

selected at the PLC type setting.

Icon Name Function See page

 Custom Monitor Selects an item and displays the Custom Monitor. 7-103

7-5
 7-2 Outline of Tool Bar Functions

Display
This tool bar groups additional operations that are used in online editing.

Important: The "View" tool bar can be displayed and used only during online
editing.

Icon Name Function See page

Undo Cancels the previous operation to restore the previous state. 6-83

Redo Cancels an undone operation. 6-83

View mode Sets the screen display items. 7-49

Displays a list of used/unused devices on the ladder program
Usage status display 6-137
currently being edited.
Unit Viewer Displays a list of devices currently assigned to each unit. 6-139
Extended ladder Enables extended ladder annotation for enabling multiple writing of
6-82
mode output instructions to a single ladder rung.

7 Instruction Palette
This tool bar groups together the instruction palette for freely pasting instructions to
MONITOR

ladder diagrams, and CPU built-in positioning functions.

Important: The "Instruction palette" can be displayed and used only during online
editing.

Icon Name Function See page

Displays circuit libraries in which the user can register and paste
Circuit library 6-96
ladder circuits as desired.
Opens a palette of instructions that can be entered from the symbol 6-45
Instruction palette
list. 6-50
Edit CPU positioning
Sets the parameters of the CPU built-in positioning function. 6-147
parameters
Display/hide CPU
Displays and hides the toolbar for CPU built-in positioning function
positioning 6-71
instructions.
instruction toolbar

7-6
 7-2 Outline of Tool Bar Functions

Instructions 1
This tool bar groups together basic instructions.

Important: The "Instructions 1" tool bar can be displayed and used only during
online editing.

Icon Name Function See page

Enter NO contact Enters an NO (Normally Open) contact. 6-59

Enter NC contact Enters an NC (Normally Closed) contact. 6-59

Enter NO contact
Enters NO contact OR. 6-59
OR
Enter NC contact
Enters NC contact OR. 6-59
OR

Enter coil Enters the OUT instruction (output coil). 6-61

Enter NC contact
Enters the OUB instruction (output reversed coil). 6-61
coil
Enter vertical
Enters a vertical connecting line. 6-78
connecting line
Delete vertical
Deletes a vertical connecting line. 6-80
7
connecting line

MONITOR
Enter horizontal
Enters a horizontal connecting line. 6-78
connecting line
Delete horizontal
Deletes a horizontal connecting line. 6-80
connecting line

Instructions 2
This tool bar groups together additional instructions.

Important: The "Instructions 2" tool bar can be displayed and used only during
online editing.

Icon Name Function See page

SET Enters the SET instruction. 6-63

RES Enters the RES instruction. 6-63

TMR Enters the TMR (0.1s subtraction timer) instruction. 6-65

TMS Enters the TMS (0.001s subtraction timer) instruction. 6-65

C Enters the C (add count) instruction. 6-65

LDP Enters the LDP (differential contact) instruction. 6-67

DIFU Enters the DIFU (up differential) instruction. 6-67

DIFD Enters the DIFD (down differential) instruction. 6-67

MOV Enters the MOV (move data) instruction. 6-69

LDA Enters the LDA (read data) instruction. 6-69

STA Enters the STA (store data) instruction. 6-69

7-7
 7-2 Outline of Tool Bar Functions

CPU Positioning Instructions

This tool bar groups together the positioning instructions built into the CPU.

Important: The "CPU Positioning Instructions" tool bar can be displayed and
used only during online editing.

Icon Name Function See page

PLSX Enters the PLSX (start X-axis positioning) instruction. 6-72

PLSY Enters the PLSY (start Y-axis positioning) instruction. 6-72

JOGX Enters the JOGX (X-axis jog operation) instruction. 6-72

JOGY Enters the JOGY (Y-axis jog operation) instruction. 6-72

ORGX Enters the ORGX (X-axis zero return) instruction. 6-72

ORGY Enters the ORGY (Y-axis zero return) instruction. 6-72

TCHX Enters the TCHX (X-axis point teaching) instruction. 6-72

7 TCHY Enters the TCHY (Y-axis point teaching) instruction. 6-72

MONITOR

Suffix
This tool bar groups together tools for setting the radix of the data used in applied
and arithmetic operation instructions, and for setting the default format for the data
length.

Important: The "Suffix" tool bar can be displayed and used only during online
editing.

Icon Name Function See page

Default suffix Sets the radix of the default when instructions are entered. 6-75

7-8
 7-3 Outline of Menu Functions

7-3 Outline of Menu Functions

This section lists the functions displayed on Monitor menus. For a detailed
description of each function, see the page indicated for each function.

File
This menu groups Monitor window operations and printing related items.

MONITOR
Item Function See page
Ladder Monitor Opens the Ladder Monitor window. 7-46
Registration Monitor Opens the Registration Monitor window. 7-84
Batch Monitor Opens the Batch Monitor window. 7-73
Batch Change Opens the Batch Change window. 7-139
7-77
Opens the window of each of the already saved Registration Monitor,
Open window 7-89
Batch Monitor and Batch Change windows.
7-142
Save window Saves the currently active window. 
7-76
Save window as... Saves the currently active window under a new name. 7-88
7-141
Print Prints the currently active Registration Monitor window. 7-102
Displays a preview of the currently active Registration Monitor 7-101
Print preview
window.
Printer setup Sets the printer to print from. 7-101
Return to Editor Exits the Monitor and returns to the Editor screen. 7-44

7-9
 7-3 Outline of Menu Functions

Edit
This menu groups together items that are used when creating ladder programs by
online editing.

Important: The "Edit" menu can be displayed and used only during online
editing.

Item Function See page

Undo Cancels the previous operation to restore the previous state. 6-83
7 Redo Cancels an undone operation. 6-83
Direct instruction input Opens the direct entry dialog box. 6-56
MONITOR

Delete instruction Deletes the symbol at the cursor. 6-74

NO contact input Enters a NO (Normally Open) contact. 6-59
NC contact input Enters an NC (Normally Closed) contact. 6-59
NO contact OR input Enters NO contact OR. 6-59
Instruction input 1

NC contact OR input Enters NC contact OR. 6-59

Coil input Enters the OUT instruction (output coil). 6-61
NC contact coil input Enters the OUT instruction (output reversed coil). 6-61
Vertical connecting line Enters a vertical connecting line. 6-78
Horizontal connecting line Enters a horizontal connecting line. 6-78
Horizontal connect line to end Enters horizontal connecting lines to the last rung of the
6-78
of rung program.
Delete vertical connecting line Deletes a vertical connecting line. 6-80
Delete horizontal connecting Deletes a horizontal connecting line.
6-80
line
SET Enters the SET instruction. 6-63
RES Enters the RES instruction. 6-63
TMR Enters the TMR (0.1s subtraction timer) instruction. 6-65
Instruction input 2

TMS Enters the TMS (0.001s subtraction timer) instruction. 6-65

C Enters the C (add count) instruction. 6-65
LDP Enters the LDP (differencial contact) instruction. 6-67
DIFU Enters the DIFU (up differencial) instruction. 6-67
DIFD Enters the DIFD (down differencial) instruction. 6-67
MOV Enters the MOV (move data) instruction. 6-69
LDA Enters the LDA (read data) instruction. 6-69
STA Enters the STA (store data) instruction. 6-69

7-10
 7-3 Outline of Menu Functions

Item Function See page

PLSX Enters the PLSX (start X-axis positioning) instruction. 6-71
PLSY Enters the PLSY (start Y-axis positioning) instruction. 6-71
CPU positioning

JOGX Enters the JOGX (X-axis jog operation) instruction. 6-71

instruction

JOGY Enters the JOGY (Y-axis jog operation) instruction. 6-71

ORGX Enters the ORGX (X-axis zero return) instruction. 6-71
ORGY Enters the ORGY (Y-axis zero return) instruction. 6-71
TCHX Enters the TCHX (X-axis point teaching) instruction. 6-71
TCHY Enters the TCHY (Y-axis point teaching) instruction. 6-71
Changes the device for the instruction at the cursor position. 6-45
Instruction palette/Change operand If there is no device at the cursor position, the instruction 6-50
palette is displayed. 6-76
Cut Cuts the selected range. 6-90
Copy Copies the selected range. 6-90
Paste Pastes cut data to the cursor position. 6-91
Insert free rung Inserts a free rung at the cursor position. 6-93
Delete rung Deletes the rung at the cursor position. 6-94
Opens the palette for entering pack instructions for
Pack palette 9-7
Positioning Unit KV-H20S/H40S/H20G.
7

MONITOR
Comment
This menu groups together items for editing device comments and rung comments
in online editing.

Important: The "Comment" menu can be displayed and used only during online
editing.

Item Function See page

Edit rung comment Writes a rung comment to the current cursor position. 6-118
Rung Set Sets rung comment conversion. 6-119
comment
conversion Release Cancels rung comment conversion. 6-119

Change comment Changes the device comment at the current cursor position. 6-110

7-11
 7-3 Outline of Menu Functions

Search
This menu groups search items on the Ladder Monitor.

Important: The "Use status" tool bar can be displayed and used only during

7 online editing.
MONITOR

Item Function See page

Rung/step No. Moves the cursor to the specified rung or step. 7-58
Top Moves the cursor to the top rung of the ladder file. 7-59
End Moves the cursor to the end rung of the ladder file. 7-59
Moves the cursor to the circuit block before the current cursor
Previous block 7-60
position.
Moves the cursor to the circuit block following the current cursor
Next block 7-60
position.
Previous symbol Moves to the symbol before the current cursor position. 7-61
Jump

Next symbol Moves to the symbol following the current cursor position. 7-61
Moves the cursor to the start of the rung at the current cursor
Top of rung 7-62
position.
Moves the cursor to the end of the rung at the current cursor
End of rung 7-62
position.
Jumps to the previous program change block from the current cursor
Change: Prev block 7-63
position.
Jumps to the next program change block from the current cursor
Change: Next block 7-63
position.
Find Opens the Find dialog box for searching for devices. 7-64
Displays the device used/unused list for devices on the ladder
Use status 6-137
program currently being edited.

7-12
 7-3 Outline of Menu Functions

PLC
This menu groups operation items on the KV main unit.

Important: "Calendar timer setup" and "Clear CM for KV-D30" can be used only
when "KV-700" or "KV-700+M" is selected at the PLC type setting.

Item Function See page

7
Sets KV-10/16/24/40, KV-700 and KZ-300/350 to the Run mode
RUN 7-68
(operating state).

MONITOR
Sets KV-10/16/24/40, KV-700 and KZ-300/350 to the Program mode
PROGRAM 7-68
(stopped state).
Inhibits external input processing to KV-10/16/24/40, KV-700 and
Inhibit input refreshing 7-69
KZ-300/350.
Inhibits external output from KV-10/16/24/40, KV-700 and KZ-
Inhibit output 7-69
300/350.
Calendar timer setup Sets the calendar timer built-in KV-700. 7-70
Clears all DM (data memory) values held by KV-10/16/24/40, KV-
Clear all devices

Clear all DMs 7-72

700 and KZ-300/350 to "0".
Sets all relays held by a power interruption by KV-10/16/24/40, KV-
Clear all hold relays 7-72
700 and KZ-300/350 to OFF.
Clears all current values of counters held by KV-10/16/24/40, KV-
Clear all counters 7-72
700 and KZ-300/350 to "0".
Clear CM for KV-D30 Clears control memory (CM0000 to CM0499) used by KV-D30. 7-72

7-13
 7-3 Outline of Menu Functions

Monitor
This menu groups items relating to operations in the Monitor modes.

Important: "High-speed Time Chart Monitor" can be used only when "KV-700" or
"KV-700+M" is selected at the PLC type setting.

Item Function See page

Starts communications with KV-10/16/24/40, KV-700 and KZ-
Start monitor 7-66
300/350, and sets the online mode.
Stops communications with KV-10/16/24/40, KV-700 and KZ-
Stop monitor 7-66
7 300/350, and sets the offline mode.
Copies the attributes of the device at the cursor on the Registration
Copy device attribute 7-94
Monitor.
Registration
MONITOR

Monitor

Sort device Sorts Registration Devices on the Registration Monitor. 7-97

Delete device Deletes the device at the cursor from the Registration Monitor. 7-96
Changes the number of graduations on the time chart on the
Time chart scale setup 7-100
Registration Monitor.
High-speed Time Chart Opens the High-speed Time Chart Monitor of registration devices in
7-106
Monitor the currently opened Registration Monitor.

Online Edit
This menu groups together items that are used in online editing.

Important: The "Online Edit" menu can be used only when"KV-700" or "KV-
700+M" is selected.

Item Function See page

Start Starts online editing. 7-150
Transfers the details edited by online editing to the main unit, and
Transfer 7-152
returns to the Monitor.
Cancels online editing, discards the edited details, and returns to the
Cancel 7-153
Monitor.
Settings Sets clearing of the program change display in online editing. 7-154

7-14
 7-3 Outline of Menu Functions

Setting
This menu sets the serial ports on the PC.

Important: "Unit No. setup," "Modem setup," "PC modem setup," "KV-L20
modem setup," "1 USB port," "2 Serial port," "3 Modem mode" and "4
Ethernet port" can be used only when "KV-700" or "KV-700+M" is
selected at the PLC type setting.

Item Function See page

Serial port Sets up the serial port in detail. 7-20 7
Unit No. setup Specifies the unit No. of the communications destination KV-L20. 7-22

MONITOR
Sets the modem currently connected to the PC in the modem
PC modem setup 7-23
Modem

communications mode.
setup

Sets the modem currently connected to KV-L20 in the modem

KV-L20 modem setup 7-23
communications mode.
Sets details when performing communications with KV-700 over
Ethernet settings 7-31
Ethernet.
1 USB port Communications with KV-700 is performed using the USB port. 7-18
2 Serial port Communications with KV-700 is performed using the serial port. 7-18
3 Modem mode Communications with KV-700 is performed using the modem. 7-23
4 Ethernet port Performs communications with KV-700 over Ethernet. 7-18

7-15
 7-3 Outline of Menu Functions

View
This menu groups items that are used when creating ladder diagrams.

Important: • "Standard," "Unit monitor," "Custom monitor" and "Device for unit"
7 can be used only when "KV-700" or "KV-700+M" is selected at the
PLC type setting.
• "Display," "Instruction palette," "Instruction 1," "Instruction 2," "CPU
MONITOR

positioning instruction" and "Suffix" can be displayed and used only

during online editing.

Item Function See page

Standard
Unit monitor
Custom monitor
Display
Toolbar

Instruction palette Selects the toolbar to be displayed. 7-53

Instruction 1
Instruction 2
CPU positioning instruction
Suffix
Dialog bar Displays the dialog bar. 7-53
Status bar Displays the status bar. 7-53
View mode Sets the display items in the edit screen. 7-49
Ladder at bottom Displays the Ladder Monitor window at the bottom at all times. 7-54
Enlarge Enlarges the ladder display ratio. 7-49
Reduce Reduces the ladder display ratio. 7-49
Label Displays devices in the ladder program as labels. 7-52
Comment Displays devices in the ladder program with device comments. 7-52
Displays devices in the ladder program in device for unit
Device for unit 7-51
annotation.
Clears the background color of the (program change display to be
Clear back color of changes 7-155
displayed on the) circuit edited by online editing.

7-16
 7-3 Outline of Menu Functions

Tools
The tools menu groups together various settings and setup software items that are
used when creating ladder programs in online editing.

Important: The "Tools" menu can be displayed and used only during online
editing.

Item Function See page

Enables use of extended ladder notation that allows multiple output
Extended ladder mode 6-82
instructions to be written to a single ladder rung.
Unit Viewer Displays a list of devices currently assigned to each unit. 6-139
Edit CPU positioning
Sets the parameters of the CPU built-in positioning function. 6-147
parameters

Window
This menu groups items relating to display of the ladder window. 7

MONITOR
Item Function See page
Cascade Cascades opened windows. 
Side by side Displays opened windows side by side. 
Align icons Cleans up minimized windows. 
1 Ladder Monitor Selects the window to set as the active window when two or more

(open Monitor window) ladder edit windows are opened.

Help
This menu groups Help such as how to operate KV BUILDER and how to use
instructions.

Item Function See page

About Displays the KV BUILDER version information. —
Operation method Displays Help for how to operate KV BUILDER. 1-50
Shortcut list Displays a list of shortcut keys available on KV BUILDER. A-74
Displays instructions available on KV-10/16/24/40, KV-700 and
Instructions A-16
KZ-300/350, and explanations of these instructions.
User's Manual Displays the KV BUILDER User's Manual. 1-50

7-17
 7-4 Communicating with PLCs

7-4 Communicating with PLCs

This section describes how to transfer ladder program you have created on the Unit
Editor to and from the PLC.

Setting PLC Communications Parameters

To communicate with a PLC, the COM port on the PC connected to the PLC and the
baud rate must be set.

[Tip]
Communications settings are saved on KV BUILDER, and are reflected in
parameters when KV BUILDER is next started up.

„ When a ladder program is already open

Monitor/Simulator (M) PLC communications parameter setup (T) Serial port (S)
Unit No. setup (M)
Modem setup (T) PC modem setup (P)
KV-L20 modem setup (L)

7 Ethernet setup (I)

1 USB port
MONITOR

2 Serial port
3 Modem mode
4 Ethernet port
When a ladder program is already open, perform communications setup on models
currently set on the ladder program.

1 Select {Monitor/Simulator (M)} {PLC communications parameter setup

(T)} from Menu in the Editor screen, and set up the communications
items.

For details on the communications items, refer to the following pages:

Serial port: "Serial port detailed setting" page 7-20
Unit No. setup: "Setting the Unit No." page 7-22
Modem setup: "Modem Communications" page 7-23
Ethernet setup: "Ethernet Communications" page 7-31
1 USB port
2 Serial port
: "Selecting the Communications Port" page 7-20
3 Modem mode
4 Ethernet port

7-18
 7-4 Communicating with PLCs

„ When a ladder program is not opened

Select {Monitor/Simulator (M)} {PLC comm params setup (T)}

Set the communications port on the PC and other settings in the Monitor Setup
mode.
Start up the Setup mode by the following procedure.

1 Select {Monitor/Simulator (M)}

{PLC comm params setup (T)} from
Menu in the Editor screen.
The Set PLC Communications
Parameter Setup dialog box is
displayed.

2 Select the PLC type to

set communications
to.
There are two
communications 7
settings for KV-

MONITOR
10/16/24/40 and for KV-700. Set each of these settings.

3 Click the "OK" button to apply the

communications settings.
The Monitor starts up in the Setup mode.

4 After you have finished setting

communications, return to Unit Editor.
To return to the Editor mode, select {File (F)}
{Return to Editor (E)} from Menu.

Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + F1 keys.

7-19
 7-4 Communicating with PLCs

Selecting the Communications Port

You can select the communications port to be used for the Monitor when the KV-700
is used.
Three communications ports are available:

• Serial port: The RS-232C terminal (the PC's serial port) is used for
communications.
• USB port: The USB port is used for communications. Using the USB port
allows you to monitor operation at a speed higher than that
afforded by the serial port.
A PC with a USB port and pre-installed with Windows 98 (SE),
Windows Me, Windows 2000, or Windows XP is required.
Note: • The Add New Hardware Wizard dialog box is displayed only when the
KV-700 is connected to the PC's USB port for the first time. In this dialog
box, install the driver.
"1-5 Installing the USB Driver" page 1-25
• Modem mode: This mode is required for monitoring remote ladder
programs via a telephone line and modem using a KV-L20.

• Ethernet port: This port is required for monitoring ladder programs over
Ethernet using the KV-LE20.
7
Select the communications port by the following procedure.
MONITOR

1 Select {Settings (R)}

the Monitor menu,
and select the port or
mode to set.
The selected port or
mode checkbox is
marked.

Other procedure
USB port
• Click the button.
Serial port
• Click the button.
Ethernet port
• Click the button.

Serial port detailed setting

Settings (R) 2 Serial port (S)
Set the COM port and baud rate to be used by the Monitor.
Set the COM port details by the following procedure.

Important: Make these settings when the Monitor has stopped (not
communicating). Serial port details cannot be set when the monitor is
operating (communicating).

7-20
 7-4 Communicating with PLCs

1 Make sure that {Settings (R)}

{2 Serial port} are marked.
If this is not marked, select "2
Serial port".

Other procedure
Click the button.

2 Select {Settings
(R)} {Serial port
(S)} from the
Monitor menu.
Serial Port COM
Setup dialog box is
displayed.

3 Set the COM port and baud rate to be used.

Sets the COM port to be used. 7

MONITOR
Sets the baud rate (transmission speed).

Discards the setting and closes the dialog box.

Selects the COM port No. to which the cable is selected. Default is "COM1". The
"COM port" refers to the serial port, and the RS-232C interface is used for
COM port
communications. The number of available COM ports varies according to the
model type of the PC to be used.
Select the baud rate from "AUTO", "9600", "19200", "38400" and "57600" in the
case of the KV-10/16/24/40 and KZ-300/KZ-350, and from "9600", "19200",
"38400" and "57600" in the case of KV-700. (Baud rates not supported on the PC
Baud rate you are using cannot be set.) The default baud rate for KV-10/16/24/40 is
"AUTO", and for KV-700 is "38400". The "baud rate" refers to the transmission
speed, and expresses the number of bits that can be sent per second. The larger
the baud rate, the faster data can be sent.

Note: If the COM port selected in the Serial Port COM Setup dialog box is not
displayed or the number of currently displayed COM ports is less than the
actual number of COM ports, Windows may not be correctly recognizing
the COM port. Set Windows so that it correctly recognizes the COM port.
Either refer to the User's Manual for the PC you are using or contact your
dealer.

4 Click the "OK" button.

This sets the COM port and baud rate to be used.

7-21
 7-4 Communicating with PLCs

Setting the Unit No.

Settings (R) Unit No. setup (M)
With KV BUILDER, the Nos. of multiple KV-L20s connected in a multi-drop
configuration can be specified, and ladder programs can be moved to multiple KV-
700 series units and monitored on a PC.

Important: • The unit No. can be set when the Monitor has stopped (i.e. not
communicating), and "2 Serial port" is selected as the
communications port.
7 • The unit No. cannot be selected when the monitor is operating (i.e.
communicating) or when a port other than "2 Serial port" is selected
as the communications port.
MONITOR

1 Select {Settings (R)} {Unit

No. setup (M)} from Menu.
The Unit No. Setup dialog box
is displayed.

2 Set the unit No. of the KV-L20 at the communications destination.

Sets the unit No. of the

communications destination KV-L20.

Discards the setting and closes the

dialog box.

[Tip]
The unit No. is the No. set at "Node No." in the KV-L20 Setup window in Unit
Editor.
"KV-L20 User's Manual"
"Chapter 5 Unit Editor" page 5-1

Note: The unit No. can be specified as 0 to F at the "Unit No." setting. However,
only 0 to 9 can be set in Unit Editor.

3 Click the "OK" button.

This sets the unit No.

7-22
 7-4 Communicating with PLCs

Modem Communications
In the Modem mode, remote PLCs are monitored. Also, refer to the KV-L20 Multi-
communications Unit User's Manual.

Outline of Modem mode

The Modem mode is set to use a modem to monitor a remote PLC (PLC located at a
remote location) via a telephone line.
To communicate with a PLC in the Modem mode, a modem must be connected to
the PC on which KV BUILDER is installed, and a KV-L20 Multi-communications Unit
must be connected to the PLC.
"KV-L20 User's Manual"

MONITOR
Initializing the modem

Settings (R) Modem Setup (T) PC modem setup (P)

KV-L20 modem setup (L)

Set the modem's initialization command and type of telephone line before you start
communicating.
Set each of these in "PC modem setup" and "KV-L20 modem setup" described
below.
"KV-L20 User's Manual"

„ PC modem setup
Settings (R) Modem setup (T) PC modem setup (P)

1 Select {Settings (R)} {Modem setup (T)} {PC modem setup (P)} from
Menu.
The PC side modem setup dialog box is displayed.

7-23
 7-4 Communicating with PLCs

2 Set the modem type and initialization command.

You can set two or more modem types.

Select the modem model.

Enter the modem initialization command.

Registers the entered initialization command.

Deletes the selected initialization command.

• Click the "Register" button after entering the initialization command when
registering a new initialization command.
PLC type • Select a currently connected modem when it is already registered.
• Click the "Delete" button after selecting the modem to delete the currently
registered modem.
Enter the modem initialization command. This command differs according to the
7 Initialize
type of modem.
MONITOR

[Tip]
• Initialization commands
"AT commands" are commands for controlling modem operation. All AT
commands are prefixed by "AT".
AT commands are used on KV BUILDER or KV-L20 to control the modem.
To use a modem, use AT commands to make settings so that data
transactions are handled correctly between the PLC and the modem at the
communications destination. This setting is called the "initialization
command." The initialization command varies according to the modem.

• Setting initialization commands

Initialization commands are already registered on the following PLC types.
You can set initialization commands just by selecting the PLC type name from
the PLC pulldown list.
Type Manufacturers Model No. KV-L20 Side PC Side
AIWA PV-BW5610 { {
I/O Data Devices DFML-560E { {
Box
Omron ME5614D { {
Melco IGM-B56KH { {
AIWA PV-JF56E6 —* {
Card
Omron ME5614C/W —* {
* Settings are available on KV-L20 but cannot be used.

Register initialization commands to PLC types that are not

pre-registered with initialization commands by the following
procedure.
Enter the "AT&F" command (restore defaults command),
check for any differences from the factory settings, and
then enter the initialization command.
You can specify multiple initialization commands by
continuously entering the desired commands.
The example on the left shows defaults "echoback OFF,"
"CD ON only at carrier detection" and "detection of dial
tone OFF".

7-24
 7-4 Communicating with PLCs

[Tip]
• General AT commands
AT commands sometimes differ according to the type of modem. Be sure to
check the AT commands listed in the User's Manual of the modem you are to
use.
AT command Description
E0 Echoback OFF
Q0 Return result code.
V1 Return result code as alphabet.
&C0 Turn ON CD only at carrier detection.
&S0 Always turn DR ON.
&D2 Cut line when ER turns OFF.
¥Q3 Control flow by RS-CS
¥N3 Set to auto-retriable mode.
X3 Busy tone detection (detection of dial tone OFF)
¥J0 Set terminal to fixed speed.
S0=2 Automatic incoming call at 2nd call
%C3 Automatically select MNP Class 5, V.42bis.

7
3 Set the telephone line and other communications settings.

MONITOR
Specifies the type of telephone line.

Set this when an external originator is

required.

Sets the redial wait time.

Sets the baud rate for communications with

modem.

Push Select this in the case of a push line to emit a tone.

Telephone line
Dial Select this in the case of a dial line to emit a pulse.
Select this when communicating with an external line. Enter the No. to
ON
Ext. line originator append when placing a call on an external line to "external line No.".
OFF Select this when not communicating with an external line.
Modem connection Set the wait time when the other party is connected to by dialing within
Dial wait time
setup the range 0 to 120 seconds. Default is 10 seconds.
Set the baud rate when communicating with the modem.
Baud rate Select from "9600", "19200", "38400", "57600" and "115200". Default is
"9600".

Important: When it takes a long time for the other modem to respond, the line is
sometimes disconnected before the response is made if you set a
short dial wait time. Be sure to set the dial wait time to a value longer
than the modem response time.

7-25
 7-4 Communicating with PLCs

4 Click the "OK" button.

Saves the modem settings,

and closes the dialog box.

Discards the modem settings,

and closes the dialog box.

[Tip]
The "OK" button cannot be clicked if the modem type or commands have not
been set. To close the dialog box without changing the settings, click the
"Cancel" button.

7 „ KV-L20 modem setup

Settings (R) Modem setup (T) KV-L20 modem setup (L)
MONITOR

1 Make sure that the monitor has stopped (i.e. is not communicating).

2 Select {Settings (R)} {Modem setup (T)} {KV-L20 modem setup (L)}
from Menu.
The Set KV-L20 Modem dialog box is displayed.

3 Set the modem type and initialization command.

You can set two or more modem types.

Select the modem model.

Enter the modem initialization command.

Registers the entered initialization command.

Deletes the selected initialization command.

• Click the "Register" button after entering the initialization command when
registering a new initialization command.
PLC type • Select a currently connected modem when it is already registered.
• Click the "Delete" button after selecting the modem to delete when
deleting the currently registered modem.
Enter the modem initialization command. This command differs according to
Initialize
the type of modem.

7-26
 7-4 Communicating with PLCs

[Tip]
• Initialization commands
"AT commands" are commands for controlling modem operation. All AT
commands are prefixed by "AT".
AT commands are used on KV BUILDER or KV-L20 to control the modem.
To use a modem, use AT commands to make settings so that data
transactions are handled correctly between the PLC and the modem at the
communications destination. This setting is called the "initialization
command." The initialization command varies according to the modem.
• Setting initialization commands
Initialization commands are already registered on the following PLC types.
You can set initialization commands just by selecting the PLC type name from
the PLC pulldown list.
Type Manufacturers Model No. KV-L20 Side PC Side
AIWA PV-BW5610 { {
I/O Data Devices DFML-560E { {
Box
Omron ME5614D { {
Melco IGM-B56KH { {
AIWA PV-JF56E6 —* {
Card
Omron ME5614C/W —* {
* Settings are available on KV-L20 but cannot be used.

Register initialization commands to PLC types that are not pre-registered with
7
initialization commands by the following procedure.

MONITOR
Enter the "AT&F" command (restore defaults command), check for any
differences from the factory settings, and then enter the initialization
command.
You can specify multiple initialization commands by continuously entering the
desired commands.
The following example shows defaults "echoback OFF," "CD ON only at
carrier detection" and "detection of dial tone OFF":

• General AT commands
AT commands sometimes differ according to the type of modem. Be sure to
check the AT commands listed in the User's Manual of the modem you are to
use.
AT command Description
E0 Echoback OFF
Q0 Return result code.
V1 Return result code as alphabet.
&C0 Turn ON CD only at carrier detection.
&S0 Always turn DR ON.
&D2 Cut line when ER turns OFF.
¥Q3 Control flow by RS-CS
¥N3 Set to auto-retriable mode.
X3 Busy tone detection (detection of dial tone OFF)
¥J0 Set terminal to fixed speed.
S0=2 Automatic incoming call at 2nd call
%C3 Automatically select MNP Class 5, V.42bis.

7-27
 7-4 Communicating with PLCs

4 Click the "End" button.

A dialog box is displayed.

5 Click the "OK" button.

"Connecting" is displayed, and the settings are transferred to the KV-L20.

Transfers the settings to

the KV-L20.

Discards the settings, and

closes the dialog box.

Important: Settings made on the KV-L20 Multi-communications Unit are actually

saved on the KV-700 CPU Unit. If a preset KV-L20 and KV-700 CPU
Unit combination has been changed, the modem at the KV-L20 must
be set once again.

7 Communications in Modem mode

Settings (R) 3 Modem mode
MONITOR

To monitor a remote PLC via a telephone line, set the Modem mode, and call the
modem to which the other PLC is connected to enable communications.

Important: To communicate in the Modem mode, connect the modem to the PC,
and connect the KV-L20 Multi-communications Unit to the modem at
the PLC to be monitored. The modem initialization command and
telephone line type must also be set beforehand.
"Serial port detailed setting7421" page 7-14
"Initializing the modem7432" page 7-17

Perform communications in the Modem mode by the following procedure.

1 Select {Settings (R)}

{3 Modem mode} from
Menu.
Modem mode is marked to
indicate that the Modem mode
is selected.

[Tip]
• To cancel the Modem mode, select {Settings (R)} {1 USB port} or {2 Serial
port} from Menu. The item is unmarked to indicate that the Modem mode is
selected.
• The Modem mode can be selected only when {PLC communications
parameter setup (T)} is selected on Unit Editor, and the Monitor Setup mode
has been started.

7-28
 7-4 Communicating with PLCs

2 Select {File (F)} {Return to Editor (E)} from

Menu.
The Unit Editor is displayed.
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + F1 keys.

3 Select one of
{Monitor/Simulator
(M)} {PLC Monitor
(M)} / {Convert
→Move→Monitor
(W)} / {Read program from PLC (R)} from Menu.
The Line Connection dialog box is displayed.

4 Select the peer destination to be connected from the Peer destination

pulldown list.
Nothing is displayed in the Peer destination pulldown list if a connection
7
destination has not been registered.

MONITOR
"Registering peer destinations" page 7-25

Selects the peer

destination to connect to.

„ Ending communications
End communications by the following procedure.

1 Either select {Monitor (M)} {Exit Monitor (E)} or {File (F)} {Return to
Editor (E)} from Menu.
Disconnects the telephone line, and ends communications.
Other procedure
To end the Monitor
• Click the button.
• Press the F5 key.
To return to the Unit Editor
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + F1 keys.
[Tip]
• The telephone line is disconnected and communications ended even if the
Monitor is minimized.
• To start communications again, open the Line Connection dialog box by
{Monitor (M)} {Start Monitor (S)}, and click the "Connect" button.

7-29
 7-4 Communicating with PLCs

„ Registering peer destinations

When the Line Connection dialog box is displayed for the first time, no peer
destinations are registered to the Peer destination pulldown list. Register peer
destinations by the following procedure.

1 Enter the peer destination's name at "Peer" in the Line Connection dialog
box, and enter the peer destination's telephone No. at "Tel No.".

Enter the name of the peer

destination to connect to.

Enter the telephone No. of the

peer destination to connect to.

Enter the name of the peer destination to connect to. One telephone No. can be
Peer
registered to one peer destination.

7 Tel No.
Enter the telephone No. of the peer to connect to.
When external line emission is used, enter only the telephone No. of the peer
destination without entering the external line No.
MONITOR

2 Click the "Reg" button.

This registers the peer destinations you entered.

[Tip]
To enter two or more peer destinations, repeat steps 1 and 2.

7-30
 7-4 Communicating with PLCs

Ethernet Communications
This item monitors KV-700s networked over Ethernet (LAN). For details, refer to the
KV-LE20 User's Manual.

Outline of Ethernet Communications

Ethernet Communications allows you to monitor KV-700s networked over Ethernet.
To perform Ethernet communications, the personal computer to be used or KV-700
to be monitored must already be connected on the same network.
"KV-LE20 User's Manual"

Ethernet line (LAN)

KEYENCE KV-700
0 16
1 17
2 18
3 19
4 20
5 21
6 22
7 23
8 24
9 25
10 26
11 27
12 28
HYPER ACCESS WINDOW 13 29
14 30
15 31

RUN
STOP

CARD RD SD USB

SERIAL

KV-LE20 PC 7

MONITOR
Note: • When unit information has been changed, and data is transferred to the
KV-LE20 over Ethernet, data transfer must be executed twice in
succession. Transfer data in the following order:

- Transfer of unit information

- Transfer of ladder programs

• When unit information has been changed on Unit Editor, KV-LE20 (KV-
700) is initialized when the unit information is transferred, so
communications is temporarily discontinued. Perform transfer again to
write the remaining data (ladder program).
When the IP address and port No. have been changed on Unit Editor,
communications must be temporarily discontinued, and transfer
performed again on the new IP address and port No.

7-31
 7-4 Communicating with PLCs

Setting Ethernet
Settings (R) Ethernet settings (I)
Set communications using Ethernet. For details on the setup on KV-LE20, refer to
the KV-LE20 User's Manual.

1 Select {Settings
(R)} {4 Ethernet
port} from the
Monitor menu.
Ethernet is checked,
and the display
indicates that
Ethernet
communications is
selected.
Other procedure
Click the button.

7 2 Select {Settings
(R)} {Ethernet
settings (I)} from
MONITOR

the Monitor menu.

The Ethernet
Settings dialog box
is displayed.

3 Enter the IP address and port No. of the connection destination KV-700.

Executes registration or calling of the connection

destinations in the registration file.

Tests whether a device is connected by sending

a ping to the port No. of the entered IP address.

[Tip]
Registered connection destinations can be selected from the menu by using Edit
connection destination.
"Editing the Connection Destination" page 7-33

Note: The IP address port No. cannot be changed in the Monitor mode; it can be
changed only in the Editor mode or Setup mode.

4 Click the "OK" button.

This sets the connection destination.

7-32
 7-4 Communicating with PLCs

Editing the Connection Destination

Register the connection destination in Ethernet communications.

Note: A "connection destination" is the name given to the connection conditions

for a preset connection device and the personal computer. The "connection
destination list" is a file to which the settings of two or more connection
destinations are saved as a group. When creating a connection destination,
a connection destination can be specified just by selecting the connection
destination from the connection destination list. Connection destination list
files can also be used from other programs such as PROTOCOL BUILDER
(Japanese), MOTION BUILDER (Japanese) and DATA BUILDER.

„ Adding connection destinations

Display the Add Connection Destination dialog box, and add connection
destinations.

1 Select {Settings
(R)} {4 Ethernet
port} from the
Monitor menu.
Ethernet is checked,
7
and the display

MONITOR
indicates that
Ethernet
communications is
selected.

Other procedure
Click the button.

2 Select {Settings
(R)} {Ethernet
settings (I)} from
the Monitor menu.
Ethernet Settings
dialog box is
displayed.

3 Click the "List dest" button.

The Connection Destination List dialog box is displayed.

7-33
 7-4 Communicating with PLCs

4 Click the "Add"

button.
The Add Connection
Destination dialog box
is displayed.

Note: If the connection destination list file is located in another folder, click the
"Browse" button to specify the connection destination list file.

5 Enter the name of the connection destination, IP address and port No.

Enter the connection destination name.

7 Enter the IP address or port No. of the

connection destination.
MONITOR

6 Click the "OK" button.

This adds the
connection destination
you set to the list.

„ Editing connection destinations

Edit connection destinations on Ethernet.
Edit the connection destinations currently displayed in the Add Connection
Destination dialog box.

1 Select the connection

destination list to edit,
and click the "Edit"
button.
The Edit connection
destinations dialog box
for the connection
destination you selected
is displayed.

7-34
 7-4 Communicating with PLCs

2 Enter the name of the connection destination, IP address and port No.

Enter the connection destination name.

Enter the IP address or port No. of the

connection destination.

3 Click the "OK" button.

This changes the
setting for the
connection destination.

MONITOR
„ Deleting connection destinations list to delete, and click the "Delete"
button.
Delete connection destinations on Ethernet.

1 Select the connection destination

The confirmation dialog
box is displayed.

2 Click the "OK" button.

This deletes the connection destination.

7-35
 7-4 Communicating with PLCs

„ Selecting connection destinations

Select connection destinations on Ethernet.
Select the connection destination currently displayed in the Add Connection
Destination dialog box.

1 Select the connection destination, and click the "Select" button.

The Ethernet Settings
dialog box for the
selected connection
destination is
displayed.

2 Click the "Close" button.

7 This reflects the settings.

MONITOR

Testing the Connection

Test whether or not a connection destination is operating properly using "ping" or
"tracert". "ping" and "tracert" executed on the Communications Test dialog box,
functions in the same way as the Ping and Tracert commands that are executed
from the MS-DOS prompt.
ping: This sends an IP packet to the specified IP address. You can check
whether or not the connection destination is operating properly by ping
being returned from the connection destination. The ping command also
displays the return time and packet loss ratio, so you can estimate the
speed to the connection destination using these results.
tracert: Displays the path from host to host. This allows you to check the status of
routers on the path from the host to the connection destination, and search
for bottle necks on the path by judging the response time from each router.

„ Testing connection destinations

Test whether or not a connection destination is operating properly using "ping" or
"tracert".

1 Select {Settings (R)} {4 Ethernet port} from Monitor menu.

Ethernet is checked, and the
display indicates that Ethernet
communications is selected.

Other procedure
Click the button.

7-36
 7-4 Communicating with PLCs

2 Select {Settings (R)} {Ethernet settings (I)} from Monitor menu.

Ethernet Settings dialog box is
displayed.

3 Enter the IP address and port No. of the connection destination KV-700.

Executes registration or calling of the connection

destinations in the registration file.

Tests whether a device is connected by sending

a ping to the port No. of the entered IP address.

Other procedure
Select the connection
destination to test, and
click the "Select" button. 7
The Ethernet Settings

MONITOR
dialog box for the
selected connection
destination is displayed.

[Tip]
Registered connection destinations can be selected from the menu by using Edit
connection destination.
"Editing the Connection Destination" page 7-33

Note: The IP address port No. cannot be changed in the Monitor mode; it can be
changed only in the Editor mode or Setup mode.

4 Click the "Test conn" button.

The Communications Test dialog box is
displayed.

5 Click the "Ping" or "Tracert" button to

test the connection destination.

Executes a ping to the connection destination.

Executes a tracert to the connection destination.

Displays the ping or tracert results.

7-37
 7-4 Communicating with PLCs

z "Ping" button
The execution results are displayed at Result.

Communications time (typical value) Communications out time (typical value)

Pinging 192.168.1.1 with 32 bytes of data: Pinging 192.168.1.1 with 32 bytes of data:

Reply from 192.168.1.1: bytes=32 time=20msTTL=64 Request timed out.

Reply from 192.168.1.1: bytes=32 time=10msTTL=64 Request timed out.
Reply from 192.168.1.1: bytes=32 time=10msTTL=64 Request timed out.
Reply from 192.168.1.1: bytes=32 time 10msTTL=64 Request timed out.

Ping statistics for 192.168.1.1: Ping statistics for 192.168.1.1:

Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss), Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 0, Lost = 4 (100% loss),
Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds: Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds:
Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 20ms, Average = 10ms Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0ms

Note: • "Ping" sometimes cannot be used depending on the router setting. For
details, contact the network administrator.
7 • If you find a problem in the execution results, contact the network
administrator, and remedy the problem.
MONITOR

z "Tracert" button
The execution results are displayed at Result.

Communications time (typical value) Communications out time (typical value)

Tracing route to 192.168.1.1 over a maximum of Tracing route to 192.168.1.1 over a maximum of
30 hops 30 hops

1 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms 192.168.1.1 1 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms 192.168.1.254
2 * * * Request timed out.
Trace complete. 3 * * * Request timed out.
4 * * * Request timed out.
5 * * ← "Cancel" button clicked here

Note: For details on the execution results, contact the network administrator.

6 After checking the results, click the "Close" button.

7-38
 7-5 Starting Up and Exiting Monitors

7-5 Starting Up and Exiting Monitors

This section describes how to start up Monitors, how to view screens that are
displayed in Monitors, and the functions of each screen.

Starting Up and Exiting Monitors

Reading and monitoring programs
Monitor/Simulator (M) PLC monitor (M) Ctrl + F1
Transfer the ladder program on the PLC to the PC for reverse conversion, and
display and monitor the ladder program. Make sure that the PC is correctly
connected to the PLC before performing the following operation.

[Tip]
When a ladder program is read, it is read to the project folder "PlcMon".
Ladder programs are deleted from this project folder if the Monitor is exited
without saving the ladder program. To save a ladder program, name the program
and save it to the required folder.

Important: The PLC communications parameter must be set correctly before

using a Monitor for the first time.
"Setting PLC Communications Parameters" page 7-18 7
Transfer ladder programs from the PLC and start up Monitors by the following

MONITOR
procedure.

1 Select {Monitor/Simulator
(M)} {PLC monitor (M)}
from the Unit Editor menu.
The Move Program dialog box
is displayed.
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + F1 keys.

2 Select the type of connected PLC and the items to be read.

The Monitor window is displayed, and transfer of the program from the PLC is
displayed as a progress bar.

Note: Be sure to select "Unit setup information" and "Program" setting items to
be read.

3 The Monitor starts up automatically when transfer ends successfully.

7-39
 7-5 Starting Up and Exiting Monitors

Transferring and monitoring ladder programs

Monitor/Simulator (M) Convert→Move→Monitor (W) Ctrl + F8
Convert the ladder program created on Unit Editor to machine code, and transfer
the machine code to program area in PLC memory. Before you start this operation,
connect the PC to the PLC to enable communications. Transfer the ladder program
by the following procedure.

1 Set the ladder

program to transfer
to the current
window.

2 Select {Monitor/Simulator (M)} {Convert→Move→Monitor (W)} from

Menu.
This converts the Ladder Program created on Unit Editor, and displays the
Monitor window.
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + F8 keys.
[Tip]
7 • If an error is found in the program during program
conversion, the message "Conversion error" is
displayed, the error dialog box is displayed, and
MONITOR

transfer is aborted. Check the details of the error,

correct the ladder program, and repeat step 2.
"Displaying Errors" page 6-142
• If conversion is not performed correctly, the message
"Conversion error. Cannot transfer." is displayed. Click the "OK" button to
display a list of errors, eliminate the cause of the error, and execute program
transfer again.

3 Specify the content of the

program to transfer and the
transfer mode.
The Transfer Program dialog box is
displayed. Specify the items to
transfer to the PLC. If the PLC to
transfer the ladder program from is
in the Run mode, select whether to
transfer in the Program mode or
write while the PLC is running.
• "Move in program mode"
checkbox is unmarked
The ladder program and CPU positioning parameters are written with the PLC in the
Run mode. Unit setup information and device comments cannot be transferred from
the PLC. The program that was being executed before transfer is started continues to
execute until writing of the ladder program and CPU positioning parameters ends.
• "Move in program mode" checkbox is marked
PLC operation stops, and the ladder program is written in the Program mode.

Writing the ladder program while the PLC is in the Run mode may cause a major
hazard depending on the states of control devices connected to the PLC.

4 The Monitor starts up when transfer ends successfully.

[Tip]
When there is no difference between the program already on the PLC and the
ladder program to transfer, nothing is written, and the ladder program is
monitored as it is.

7-40
 7-5 Starting Up and Exiting Monitors

Reading programs
Monitor/Simulator (M) Read program from PLC (R) Ctrl + F5
Decompile (convert) the ladder program that has been sent to the PLC, and write it
to Unit Editor. Before you start this operation, connect the PC to the PLC to enable
communications. Read the ladder program by the following procedure.

1 Set the ladder program window to read the PLC program to the current
window from the Unit Editor screen.

If a ladder program is already located to the ladder program window to which a

different ladder program is to be read, the ladder program already in the window will
be overwritten with the new ladder program to be read and will be lost. To prevent
this, create a new ladder program window by "New" beforehand, make the new
window you have created the current window, and then read the ladder program.

2 Select
{Monitor/Simulator 7
(M)} {Read
program from PLC

MONITOR
(R)} from Menu.
The confirmation
dialog box is displayed.
To cancel reading, click the "No (N)" button.

Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + F5 keys.

3 Click the "Yes" button.

The Move Program
dialog box is displayed.

4 Select the program to read.

This decompiles (converts) the program,
and transfer of the program from the PLC
is displayed as a progress bar.

7-41
 7-5 Starting Up and Exiting Monitors

Verifying the PLC program

Monitor/Simulator (M) Verify with PLC program (V)
Verifies the content of the ladder program on Unit Editor with the ladder program
currently stored on PLC memory.
Before you start this operation, connect the PC to the PLC to enable
communications.
Verify the content of the ladder program on Unit Editor with the ladder program
currently stored on PLC memory by the following procedure.

1 Select {Monitor/Simulator (M)} {Verify with PLC program (V)} from

Menu in the Unit Editor screen.
The Move Program dialog box is displayed.

7
MONITOR

2 Click the "Exec" button.

This verifies the program, and
displays the Compare Results
dialog box.

3 Click the "Details" button.

The verify results details are
displayed.

7-42
 7-5 Starting Up and Exiting Monitors

Editing devices offline

Monitor/Simulator (M) Edit office device (D)
Edit a specified device without communicating with the PLC.
This function is used to create multiple data tables beforehand for changeover, for
example.
It is also used for displaying data saved by the high-speed time chart.

Note: • Only the Batch Change and High-speed Time Chart Monitor windows are
displayed in offline device editing. Ladder Monitor, Registration Monitor
and Batch Monitor windows cannot be opened.
• The Batch Change and High-speed Time Chart Monitor windows cannot
be opened if the Monitor Setup mode is started up by selecting
{Monitors/Simulator (M)} {PLC communications parameter setup (T)}
from the Unit Editor menu.

1 Select
{Monitor/Simulator
(M)} {Edit offline
device (D)} from the
Unit Editor menu. 7
The confirmation
dialog box is

MONITOR
displayed.

2 Click the "OK" button.

The Device Setup mode of the Monitor is
started up.

3 Either edit the device, or display the data

saved by the high-speed time chart.
• To edit the device, select {File (F)} {Batch
Change (H)} from the Monitor menu.
The batch change window opens.
"Batch Change" page 7-139

Other procedure
Click the button.

• To display the data saved by the high-speed time chart, select {Monitor
(M)} {High-speed Time Chart Monitor (H)} from the Monitor menu.
"High-speed Time Chart Monitor" page 7-106

Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + H keys.

7-43
 7-5 Starting Up and Exiting Monitors

End Monitors
File (F) Return to Editor (E) Ctrl + F1
End a Monitor and return to the Unit Editor.

1 Select {File (F)} {Return to Editor (E)}

from Menu.

Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + F1 keys.

Important: KV BUILDER itself cannot be exited directly from a Monitor.

To exit KV BUILDER, first return to Unit Editor, and then select {File
7 (F)} {Exit (X)} from the Unit Editor menu.
MONITOR

[Tip]
To move to monitoring of
the same ladder
program again, select
{Monitor/Simulator (M)}
{Convert
→Move→ Monitor (W)} from the Unit Editor menu.
If the ladder program is the same as the ladder program on the PLC, the screen
moves to the Monitor without the ladder program being transferred.

7-44
 7-5 Starting Up and Exiting Monitors

Names of Screen Parts and Functions

When a Monitor is started up, the Ladder Monitor window of the ladder program that
was being edited on Unit Editor is displayed. If the Batch Monitor or Registration
Monitor was opened when Ladder Monitor window was last ended, the Batch
Monitor window or Registration Monitor window is also displayed.

Main window title bar

Displays the name of the ladder program file Ladder Monitor window
currently being monitored. page 7-47

Menu bar
Displays the menu for
executing commands. Main window
Overall monitor screen
Toolbar
The toolbar contains Batch change window
buttons for executing page 7-140
instructions. Only
frequently used Registration Monitor
instructions are window
provided on this page 7-87
toolbar. Clicking a
button executes the
instruction.
Batch Monitor window
page 7-76 7
Unit Monitor window

MONITOR
page 7-116

Dialog bar Status display bar

On this bar, you can register devices, Displays an explanation of the currently
substitute devices and setting values, reset selected functions and the Monitor
timers/counters, and perform other operations. operating status.

The names and functions of parts in each of the following windows are as follows:

• Ladder Monitor window page 7-47

• Batch Monitor window page 7-76
• Registration Monitor window page 7-87
• Batch change window page 7-140
• Unit Monitor window page 7-116

7-45
 7-6 Ladder Monitor

7-6 Ladder Monitor

This section describes how to start and stop the Ladder Monitor, and screens that
are displayed while Ladder Monitor is being executed.

Outline of Ladder Monitor

The following operations are possible on Ladder Monitor:

• Turning bit devices ON/OFF

• Using the dialog bar to change current values
• Setting the scan time

Ladder Monitor window

File (F) Ladder Monitor (L)
Display the Ladder Monitor window.
The Ladder Monitor window is automatically displayed when the Ladder Monitor is
started up from Unit Editor. So, the following procedure is normally not required.
7
Display a closed Ladder Monitor window by the following procedure.
MONITOR

1 Select {File (F)} {Ladder Monitor (L)} from Menu.

This displays the closed Ladder Monitor window.

Other procedure
Click the button.

[Tip]
• Only one closed Ladder Monitor window can be opened.
• A Ladder Monitor window cannot be selected when a Ladder Monitor window
is already opened.

7-46
 7-6 Ladder Monitor

Ladder Monitor window

Cursor
Rung No.
Scroll bar

Step No.

Contact

• To view parts of the window hidden from view, use the scroll bar or
keys.
• When the PLC is set to the Run mode, display of device values and states
changes successively matched to execution of the ladder program.

Cursor movement
key: Moves the cursor.
PageDown PageUp key: Moves the cursor one page (screen) at a time.
Ctrl + key: Moves the cursor one block at a time.
7
Home key: Moves the cursor to the start of the rung.

MONITOR
Esc key: Moves the cursor to the end of the rung.

„ Monitoring a ladder program outside of the screen display area

If you move the mouse cursor to between the window frame and the section at
the top right of the scroll bar, the mouse cursor will change to . Now, if you
move the mouse cursor downwards in this state with the right mouse button
pressed, the window will be split into two parts. Each of these parts can display
other locations within the ladder program. So, you can monitor two separate
parts within the same ladder program at the same time.
To switch the active parts of this split screen, either click the desired part with the
mouse, or press the Shift + F6 keys.

Important: When the mouse cursor is displayed as , the window size merely
changes and cannot be set to a split screen.

7-47
 7-6 Ladder Monitor

Status display
During Ladder Monitor execution, the PLC mode, scan time and other information
are displayed in the status display area of the Monitor window.

KV-700 status display

Status display area

Communications indicator
Rotates during communications. The faster the indicator rotates, the faster communications
is being performed. Scan time Baud rate
7 Displays the scan time in 0.1 msec units. Displays the baud rate.
MONITOR

PLC mode Communications port

Displays the PLC run mode. Displays the name of the communications port currently being used for communications.

KV-10/16/24/40 and KZ-300/350 status display

Status display area

Communications indicator Monitor overall registration consumption

Rotates during communications. The faster the indicator Displays the monitor registration consumption of
rotates, the faster communications is being performed. the overall monitor window.
Scan time
Displays the scan time in 0.1 msec units.
Registration consumption
PLC mode Displays the monitor registration
Displays the PLC run mode. consumption in the current window.

[Tip]
The fewer monitored devices there are, the faster monitoring is performed. If
monitoring is slow, minimize unwanted windows.

7-48
 7-6 Ladder Monitor

Changing view size and view mode

Changing the view size
View (V) Enlarge (E) Ctrl + PageDown
Reduce (R) Ctrl + PageUp

There are five ways of changing the size at which ladder diagrams are viewed.
When Editor is first started up, the display size is 100%.
Change the view size by the following procedure.

The view size can also be changed in the Change View Mode dialog box.
For details on how to change the view mode, see the item below.

1 Select either {View (V)} {Enlarge (E)} or {Reduce (R)}.

The view size is enlarged or reduced.

MONITOR
Other procedure
Reducing the view size
Press the Ctrl + PageUp keys.
Enlarging view size
Press the Ctrl + PageDown keys.

Changing the view mode

View (V) View mode (V)
Set display settings in more details using the View Mode dialog box. Change the
view mode by the following procedure.

1 Select {View (V)} {View mode (V)} from Menu bar.

The View Mode Setup dialog box is displayed.

7-49
 7-6 Ladder Monitor

2 Set the various items referring to the table below, and click the "OK"
button.
To disable the settings and close the dialog box, click the "Cancel" button.

7
MONITOR

Displays at twice (largest display size) the standard size. Select this setting
200%
when text is small and difficult to read.
150% Displays at 1.5 times the standard size.
120% Displays at 1.2 times the standard size.
View size
100% (std) Standard size
Smallest display size. Select this setting to check overall movement when
80% the number of cells that can be displayed in a single screen increases to the
maximum number.
XYM Displays the device name of the ladder diagram by XYM.
Signed decimal constants Displays decimal constants as signed constants in ladder diagrams.
Device label Displays the label name of each device in the ladder diagram.
Comment Displays comments in the ladder diagram.
Grid Displays the grid lines of cells in the edit screen.
Device for units Displays device names in the ladder program by device for unit annotation.
Comment 1 Displays comment 1. (Can be transferred to the PLC.)
Comment
Comment 2 Displays comment 2. (Cannot be transferred to the PLC.)
type
Comment 3 Displays comment 3. (Cannot be transferred to the PLC.)
Editing screen Reflects settings on edit screen of current window.
Mode Browse screen Reflects settings on verify screen of current window.
setup
range Both Reflects settings on both edit screen and verify screen of current window.
All windows Reflects settings on all windows.
* "Current window" refers to the currently selected active window.

7-50
 7-6 Ladder Monitor

Displaying Devices for Units

View (V) Device for unit (N) Shift + (Space)

Display the device name of symbols on the Ladder Monitor expressed as devices
for units by the following procedure.
"Expressing devices for units" refers to expression of relays assigned in Unit Editor
as the "nth terminal of the nth connected unit."
For example, the 5th input relay No. at the input unit next to the CPU is expressed
as "0001-0005" and the 31st relay No. of the 3rd output unit from the CPU is
expressed as "03-00115".

Unit No.: Connection No. of unit assigned a number 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and so forth

starting from the CPU
Unit relay No.: Relay No. assigned the number of occupied relays starting from
00000
7

MONITOR
The device name of symbols on the Ladder Monitor are expressed as devices for
units by the following procedure.

1 Select {View (V)} {Device for unit (N)}.

Device names are expressed as devices for units.

Other procedure
Press the Shift + (Space) keys.

7-51
 7-6 Ladder Monitor

Displaying/Hiding Comments
View (V) Comment (C) Ctrl + (Space)

Toggle between display and hiding of device comments on the Ladder Monitor.
The display comment is "comment 1".

Toggle between display and hiding of comments by the following procedure.

1 Click the button.

Each click of this icon toggles between display and hiding of comments.

button

Comment hidden Comment displayed

Other procedure
7 Press the Ctrl + (Space) keys.
MONITOR

Displaying Labels
View (V) Label (L) Ctrl + Backspace
Display labels instead of device names for symbols on the Ladder Monitor.
Display labels by the following procedure.

1 Select {View (V)} {Label (L)}.

This displays labels instead of the device name.

Other procedure
Press the Ctrl + Backspace keys.

[Tip]
Labels can be used instead of device names when inputting symbols or
finding/replacing symbols. For example, device names can be written as follows
when the label "SW1" is assigned to device 0000:

Substitute label display for 0000: SW1

Substitute label display for LD _ 0000 LD_: SW1 (_ stands for space)

7-52
 7-6 Ladder Monitor

Displaying/hiding tool bar, status bar and dialog bar

View (V) Toolbar (T)
Dialog bar (D)
Status bar (S)
You can toggle display of the tool bar, status bar and dialog bar between displayed
and hidden.

Toolbar

Dialog bar

Status bar
7

MONITOR
Toggle display by the following procedure.

1 Select {View (V)} from Menu, and select the item to view.

Marked: Displayed
Unmarked: Hidden

[Tip]
If you select {Toolbar (T)} when using the KV-700, a more detailed type of tool
bar is displayed.

7-53
 7-6 Ladder Monitor

Displaying the Ladder Monitor window at the bottom of the screen

View (V) Ladder at bottom (K)
The Ladder Monitor window can be displayed at the bottom of the Registration
Monitor or other windows at all times. If the Ladder Monitor window is set to be
displayed at the bottom at all times, you drag-and-drop devices to register them to
each Monitor even if the Registration Monitor or Batch Monitor windows are
overlapping the Ladder Monitor window.

Set the Ladder Monitor to be displayed at the bottom by the following procedure.

1 Select {View
(V)} {Ladder
at bottom (K)}
from Menu.

Other procedure
Click the button.

[Tip]
To undo this setting, follow the same procedure to unmark the item.
7 Selecting Devices
In the Ladder Monitor window, you can select devices and change their current
MONITOR

values and setting values.

There are two ways of selecting a device, by using the mouse or by using keys.

„ Using the mouse to select devices

1 Move the mouse cursor to the device and click to
select.
The cursor turns gray to indicate that the device is
selected

„ Using keys to select devices

1 Move the arrow key to the device to select with the cursor in a green
state, and press the key.
The cursor turns gray to indicate that the device is selected.
key

„ Changing current values, etc.

When a device is selected, you can use the dialog bar to change its current value,
and manipulate the device in other ways.
"Changing Current Value/Setting Values/Attributes" page 7-56

Note: When the cursor is displayed gray, key operations on the Ladder Monitor
window are not possible. To move the cursor by the arrow keys, or to turn
devices ON/OFF by the (Space) key, press the Esc key once to cancel
selection of the cursor and then operate the keys.

7-54
 7-6 Ladder Monitor

Turning Bit Devices ON/OFF

Turn bit devices ON/OFF. There are two ways of switching the ON/OFF state of bit
devices, by using the mouse or using keys.

Note: • The ON/OFF states of timer/counter contacts and external I/O relays
cannot be switched.
• Before switching the ON/OFF states of external I/O relays, inhibit input
refreshing.
"Inhibiting input refreshing" page 7-69

„ Using the mouse to turn devices ON/OFF

1 Move the mouse cursor to the device to turn ON/OFF and click to select.
The contact changes color to indicate that the device ON/OFF state has
changed.

OFF state ON state

7

MONITOR
„ Using keys to turn devices ON/OFF

1 Move the arrow key to the device to turn ON/OFF with the cursor in a
green state, and press the (Space) key.
The contact changes color to indicate that the device ON/OFF state has
changed.

OFF state ON state

Note: When the cursor is displayed gray, key operations on the Ladder Monitor
window are not possible. To move the cursor by the arrow keys, or to turn
devices ON/OFF by the (Space) key, press the Esc key once to cancel
selection of the cursor and then operate the keys.

7-55
 7-6 Ladder Monitor

Changing Current Values/Setting Values/Attributes

Use the dialog bar to change the current value, setting value or attributes (radix,
comment) of the currently selected device. The dialog bar is located at the bottom of
the screen, and devices can be registered in the Batch Monitor and Registration
Monitor.
"7-8 Batch Monitor" page 7-73
"7-9 Registration Monitor" page 7-84

[Tip]
The shortcut for changing the radix is Ctrl + E .
Each press of the Ctrl + E shortcut key combination toggles between decimal
(#) and hexadecimal ($).

Change current values, setting values or attributes (radix, comment) by the

following procedure.

1 Select the device to change from the

Ladder Monitor window.
The values of the device selected in the
current value box and setting value box
(displayed only for timers and counters) are
displayed.
7 "Selecting Devices" page 7-54
MONITOR

[Tip]
In the case of instructions such as the "LD="
for which a single cell contains multiple
devices, each click of that cell switches the
device to be selected.

2 Change the radix, current value and setting value in the dialog bar.
Radix Current value write button Setting value write button

Current value write box Setting value write box

[Tip]
• The Tab key moves the cursor in the forward direction, while the Tab + Shift
keys moves the cursor in the backward direction.
• The key functions as follows:
When the cursor is at Type or No.: New values are registered.
When the cursor is at bit, radix or comment: Values are written to the current
device.
Note: • The attribute (comment) box is displayed on the dialog bar only when the
Batch Monitor or Registration Monitor is active. The attribute (comment)
box is not displayed when the Ladder Monitor is active. To change the
type of comment to be displayed, select {View (V)} {View mode (V)}
from Menu.
"Changing the view mode" page 7-49
• "Impossible setting value." is displayed if
illegal data is entered.

7-56
 7-6 Ladder Monitor

3 Click the "Wr current value" button or "Value" button.

• This changes the current value and setting value.

Setting items and values that can be set

Settable Values
Item Description
Ladder Monitor Batch Monitor/Registration Monitor
Relay, control relay, timer, counter, comparator,
Select the type of
Type  high-speed counter, data memory, control
device.
memory, temporary data memory, trimmer No.
No. Enter the device No.  Settable Nos. vary according to device.
1*1, 16, 32*2
*1 Devices other than relay cannot be set to "1".
*2 When KV-10/16/24/40 is used,
Bit Select bit length of data. 
timers/counters cannot be set to "32". When
KV-700 is used, timer/counter and digital
trimmer values are fixed to "32".
Decimal Binary*3, Octal, Decimal, -Decimal*4, Hex, ASCII,
Attribute

Hex FLOAT (floating point real number)*5

*3 When the bit is set to "32", "2" cannot be set.
Select current value of
*4 Values are expressed as signed binary (2's complement).
device/display method
Rad
(Hex/Bin) of setting
value.
*5 This can be set only when KV-700 is used.
• When the bit is set to "1", the radix can not be changed to other 7
than "2".
• Changes made to radix are reflected to the overall window

MONITOR
(Registration Monitor for each selected device).
Select type of comment
Comment Comment 1/comment 2/comment 3/none
to be displayed.
Wr current
Enter current value. Up to 17 digits (32 bits) can be entered.
value
Can be set only in case of timers and counters. Up to 17 digits (32
Value Enter setting value.
bits) can be entered.

[Tip]
• Of the number of bits and radix settings, the number of bits is given priority.
(For example, if the number of bits is changed to "1" with the number of bits set
to "16" and the radix set to "decimal," the radix is changed to "binary.")
• In the case of both 16-bit and 32-bit bit devices, only numbers whose
lowermost two digits are "00" can be registered.
• When Bit is set to "32", the 16 bits lower than an even-numbered device No.
becomes the upper 16 bits.
• The "Reset" button is displayed only when timers or counters are selected.
• Bit value devices are reset when PLC operation is executed even if the
ON/OFF state of bit devices or current values or setting values are changed
with PLC operation stopped. If this happens, change the state of the devices
during program operation.
• Timer and counter setting values cannot be changed when the program is
write-protected.

„ Canceling settings

1 Click the "Cancel" button on the dialog bar.

7-57
 7-6 Ladder Monitor

„ Returning timer/counter current values to their defaults

1 Click the "Reset" button on the dialog

bar.

Jump and Search

Jumps to any specified program rung No. or step, and searches for instructions and
devices using instructions or operands as search keys. Executes a cross-reference
search from the current position.

Jumping to specified rungs or steps

Find (E) Jump (J) Rung/step No. (L)
Specify the rung No. or step No. in the ladder diagram to jump to a specific position
by the following procedure.

7 [Tip]
This item can be selected only when the Ladder Monitor is active.
MONITOR

1 Select {Find (E)} {Jump (J)} {Rung/step No. (L)} from Menu.
The Rung/Step No. dialog box is displayed.

2 Enter either the jump destination

rung No. or step No.

3 To jump to a specified rung No., click the "Rung" button. To jump to a

specified step No., click the "Step" button.
This displays the specified rung or step. The cursor also moves to the specified
rung.

[Tip]
• To cancel a jump, click the "Jump" button.
• The final rung or step is displayed if you specify a No. greater than the final
rung No. or step No.

7-58
 7-6 Ladder Monitor

Jumping to the top or bottom rungs of ladder programs

Find (E) Jump (J) Top (T) Ctrl + Home
End (B) Ctrl + End
Jump to the top or bottom rung of ladder programs by the following procedure.

„ Jumping to top rung

1 Select {Find (E)} {Jump (J)} {Top (T)} from Menu.

The cursor jumps to the top of the ladder diagram.

Other procedure
Press the Ctrl + Home keys.
7
„ Jumping to bottom rung

MONITOR
1 Select {Find (E)} {Jump (J)} {End (B)} from Menu.
The cursor jumps to the bottom of the ladder diagram.

Other procedure
Press the Ctrl + End keys.

7-59
 7-6 Ladder Monitor

Jumping to the previous/next block

Find (E) Jump (J) Previous block (P) Ctrl +
Next block (N) Ctrl +
Jump to the circuit block following or preceding the circuit block where the cursor is
currently located by the following procedure.

„ Jumping to the previous circuit block

Jump to the previous circuit block by the following procedure.

1 Select {Find (E)} {Jump (J)} {Previous block (P)} from Menu.

7
MONITOR

Other procedure
Press the Ctrl + keys.

Note: You cannot jump to the previous circuit block from the comment rung.

„ Jumping to the next circuit block

Jump to the next circuit block by the following procedure.

1 Select {Find (E)} {Jump (J)} {Next block (N)} from Menu.

Other procedure
Press the Ctrl + keys.

Note: You cannot jump to the next circuit block from the comment rung.

7-60
 7-6 Ladder Monitor

Jumping to previous/next symbols

Find (E) Jump (J) Previous symbol (W) Shift + Tab
Next symbol (F) Tab

Jump to the symbol following or preceding the symbol where the cursor is currently
located by the following procedure.

„ Jumping to previous symbols

Jump to the previous symbol by the following procedure.

1 Select {Find (E)} {Jump (J)} {Previous symbol (W)} from Menu.

MONITOR
Other procedure
Press the Shift + Tab keys.

Note: You cannot jump to the previous symbol from the comment rung.

„ Jumping to next symbols

Jump to the next symbol by the following procedure.

1 Select {Find (E)} {Jump (J)} {Next symbol (F)} from Menu.

Other procedure
Press the Tab key.

Note: You cannot jump to the next symbol from the comment rung.

7-61
 7-6 Ladder Monitor

Jumping to the start and end of rungs

Find (E) Jump (J) Top of rung (H) Home

End of rung (E) End

Jump to the start or end of rungs where the cursor is located by the following
procedure.

„ Jumping to the start of rungs

Jump to the start of rungs by the following procedure.

1 Select {Find (E)} {Jump (J)} {Top of rung (H)} from Menu.

7
MONITOR

Other procedure
Press the Home key.

„ Jumping to the end of rungs

Jump to the end of rungs by the following procedure.

1 Select {Find (E)} {Jump (J)} {End of rung (E)} from Menu.

Other procedure
Press the End key.

7-62
 7-6 Ladder Monitor

Jumping to the previous/next program block

Find (E) Jump (J) Change: Prev block (O) Ctrl +
Change: Next block (Q) Ctrl +
Jump to the previous circuit block changed by online editing operation or the next
circuit block changed by online editing from the current cursor position.

„ Jumping to the previous program change block

Jump to the previous program change block by the following procedure.

1 Select {Find (E)} {Jump (J)} {Change: Prev block (O)} from Menu

MONITOR
Other procedure
Press the Ctrl + keys.

„ Jumping to the next program change block

Jump to the next program change block by the following procedure.

1 Select {Find (E)} {Jump (J)} {Change: Next block (Q)} from Menu.

Other procedure
Press the Ctrl + keys.

7-63
 7-6 Ladder Monitor

Searching for instructions and operands

Find (E) Find (S) Ctrl + F
Search for a specified instruction or operand, and batch-display all instructions or
operands that satisfy the search conditions by the following procedure. A list of rung
comments can also be displayed, so this function can also be used as an index for
ladder programs.

1 Select {Find (E)} {Find (S)} from Menu.

Other procedure
Press the Ctrl + F keys.
Moves the cursor of the searched device.

Closes the search results list display area, and

displays the Search dialog box reduced.

7
MONITOR

Search results list display area

[Tip]
The regular display/reduced display setting for the Search dialog box is saved to
KV BUILDER. For this reason, the setting is enabled when KV BUILDER is next
started up.

2 Enter the instruction or operand to search.

Only instructions or operands can be searched for by leaving the other entry
field blank.
If the Search dialog box is opened above a cursor position where an instruction
is currently entered, the instruction or operand at the cursor is displayed as
selected.

Enter the instruction to search here.

Enter the operand to search here.

[Tip]
To search timer, counter, or high-speed counter instructions, enter the TMR or C
instructions. To search operands, enter T0 or C0.

7-64
 7-6 Ladder Monitor

3 Click the "Find" button.

This starts the search. When the search ends, a list of instructions that satisfy
the search conditions is displayed. Move the cursor to the top of these
instructions, and click the instruction displayed in the list. This displays the
instructions selected in the ladder program.

Of the rung comments in the ladder

program, searches rung comments written
continuously to multiple rungs excluding
comments from the 2nd rung onwards. Searches rung comments in the ladder program.

Moves the cursor, and displays the next instruction that

matches the search conditions.

Starts the search.

Ends the search.

Searches "???" operands and

devices that were not converted by
the ladder conversion function in the
ladder program.

Displays the selected instruction in

the ladder program when an
instruction is selected from the
7
search results list.

MONITOR
A list of the search results is displayed here.

• There are two ways of displaying a list of search results:

• Instructions and operands

The cell No. is assigned a number 0, 1, 2, 3 and so forth to 9 from the left edge.
• Rung comments, top rung comment

The cell No. is fixed to 0.

[Tip]
• Nothing is displayed if the specified instruction or operand is not found.
• Two or more Search dialog boxes can be displayed.
• If the Search dialog box is opened with the cursor displayed on a ladder
symbol, the operand of the selected instruction is automatically entered.

4 To perform a search again, click the "Find" button.

This updates the search results.
To quit the search, click the "Close" button.

7-65
 7-6 Ladder Monitor

Starting the Monitor

Monitor (M) Start monitor (S) F4

Start communications with the PLC, and display the operating status of the PLC in
each window.
Start the Monitor by the following procedure.

[Tip]
• Monitoring is not possible if a compile (conversion) error occurs. Before you
start Ladder Monitor, make sure that the ladder program you have made can
be compiled (converted) properly.
• When Ladder Monitor is started from Unit Editor, the Monitor is already in a
started state.

Select {Monitor (M)}

{Start monitor (S)} from
Menu.
This starts the Monitor

7 Other procedure
• Click the (green) button.
MONITOR

• Press the F4 key.

Do not disconnect cables connected to the PLC during Monitor execution. Doing so
might cause a communications error or reset the PC.

Exiting the Monitor

Monitor (M) Stop monitor (E) F5

Stop communications with the PLC.

Stop the Ladder Monitor by the following procedure.

Select {Monitor (M)}

{Stop monitor (E)} from
Menu.
This stops the monitor.

Other procedure
• Click the (red) button.
• Press the F5 key.

[Tip]
Minimizing each window on the Ladder Monitor automatically stops the Monitor
in that window. The Monitor is automatically resumes by restoring a minimized
window to its original size or maximizing it.

7-66
 7-6 Ladder Monitor

PLC Error Check

The PLC is checked for errors at all times during Monitor execution. If an error
occurs on the PLC, the corresponding error message is displayed.
"1 Error Messages"page A-2

MONITOR

7-67
 7-7 Setting Up and Operating PLCs

7-7 Setting Up and Operating PLCs

This section describes how to set up and operate PLCs on KV BUILDER.

Setting the PLC Run mode

Set the operation mode of the KV-10/16/24/40 Basic Unit, KV-700 CPU Unit and
KZ-300/350 CPU Unit. When a Monitor is first started up, the operation mode is the
PLC operation mode that was active when the Monitor was first started.
To change the operation mode, either select the respective mode from {PLC (P)}
from Menu, or click the button.

Operating the PLC (Run mode)

PLC (P) RUN (R) Shift + F7
In the Run mode, the ladder program is executing (running) normally.

1 Select {PLC (P)} {RUN (R)} from

Menu.
This sets the PLC to the Run mode.

7 Other procedure
• Click the button.
MONITOR

• Press the Shift + F7 keys.

[Tip]
The Run mode can be confirmed by the access window on the PLC lighting
(green).

Note: The KV-700 CPU Unit cannot be operated if the RUN/PROG selector
switch on the CPU Unit is set to PROG.
"KV-700 series User's Manual"

Stopping PLC operation (Program mode)

PLC (P) PROGRAM (P) Shift + F8
In this mode, program execution stops, and all outputs are OFF.

1 Select {PLC (P)} {PROGRAM

(P)} from Menu.
This sets the PLC to the Program
mode.
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Shift + F8 keys.

[Tip]
The Run mode can be confirmed by the access window on the PLC lighting
(red).

7-68
 7-7 Setting Up and Operating PLCs

Setting Inhibit Input Refreshing and Inhibit Output

The KV-10/16/24/40 Basic Unit and KV-700 CPU Unit have an inhibit input
refreshing function and an inhibit output function.

Inhibit input refreshing

PLC (P) Inhibit input refreshing (I)
When input refreshing is inhibited, reading of PLC input relays (called "input
refreshing") is stopped. In this state, external input relays can be forcibly turned
ON/OFF on the Monitor, which enables debugging while confirming an actual
externally connected test machine.
Set inhibit input refreshing by the following procedure.

1 Select {PLC (P)} {Inhibit input

refreshing (I)} from Menu with the
Monitor started.
This item is marked when it is set.
To cancel setting of this item, select
the item again. The item is
unmarked.
7
[Tip]

MONITOR
• The inhibit input refreshing setting is valid on all external input relays.
• The inhibit input refreshing setting becomes invalid when the PLC operation
mode is changed from Program to Run, or the power is turned OFF then ON
again.

Inhibit output
PLC (P) Inhibit output (O)
When output is inhibited, output from external output terminals is not performed
even if the ladder program is executed.
Set this item if actual output of output relays will cause the external load to
malfunction, for example, in debugging of ladder programs using an actual test
machine.
Set output inhibit by the following procedure.

1 Select {PLC (P)} {Inhibit

output} from Menu with the
Monitor started.
This item is marked when it is set.
To cancel setting of this item, select
the item again. The item is
unmarked.

[Tip]
• The inhibit output setting is valid on all external outputs.
• The inhibit output setting becomes invalid when the PLC operation mode is
changed from Program to Run, or the power is turned OFF then ON again.

7-69
 7-7 Setting Up and Operating PLCs

Setting the Calendar Timer

PLC (C) Calendar timer setup (C)
Set the calendar timer built into the KV-700 CPU Unit by either of the following two
ways:
• By adjusting to the PC's clock
• By entering the date and time

Important: • This setting is possible only when "KV-700" or "KV-700+M" is

selected at the PLC type setting.
• The calendar timer range that can be set on KV BUILDER is
00:00:00 January 1, 2000 to 23:59:59 December 31, 2037

„ Adjusting to the PC's clock

Adjust the calendar timer built into the KV-700 CPU Unit to the PC's clock.
Set this item by the following procedure.

1 Select {PLC (P)} {Calendar

timer setup (C)} from Menu.
7 The Set PLC Calendar Timer Setup
dialog box is displayed.
MONITOR

2 Make sure that the "Set to PC clock"

checkbox is marked, and click the "Set to
PLC" button.
The calendar timer built into the KV-700 CPU
Unit is matched to the PC's clock and changed.

„ Entering the date and time

Manually enter the date and time in the PLC Calendar Timer Setup display box.
Set this item by the following procedure.

1 Select {PLC (P)} {Calendar

timer setup (C)} from Menu.
The PLC Calendar Timer Setup
dialog box is displayed.

2 Unmark the "Set to PC clock" checkbox, and

click the Date pulldown list.
The calendar is displayed.

7-70
 7-7 Setting Up and Operating PLCs

3 Double-click the date to set from the calendar.

The date is entered.

Displays the previous and

next months.

Displays today's date based

upon your PC's clock.

4 Click hours, minutes or seconds, and set using the buttons.

MONITOR
Click the item to set. Set by the / buttons.
The selected item is displayed inverted.

5 Click the "Set to PLC" button.

The calendar timer is changed to the date and time that you set.

7-71
 7-7 Setting Up and Operating PLCs

Clear All Devices

PLC (P) Clear all devices (L) Clear all DMs (D)
Clear all hold relays (H)
Clear all counters (C)
Initialize devices on the PLC. By clearing all devices, you can initialize data memory,
hold relays, and counters.
Initialize device settings by the following procedure.

1 Select {PLC (P)}

{Clear all devices (L)}
from Menu, and
specify the device to
be initialized.
The confirmation dialog
box is displayed.

7 2 Click the "Yes" button.

This clears all devices.
MONITOR

To cancel clearing, click the "No" button.

[Tip]
The message "Cannot execute unless
switched to PROG. Switch to PROG?" is
displayed if the PLC operation mode is
the Run mode when clearing a device.
To clear all devices after setting the
Program mode, click the "Yes" button. To
cancel clearing of all devices, click the "No" button.

Clearing Control Memory (CM) for KV-D30

PLC (P) Clear CM for KV-D30 (D)
Initializes control memory (CM) area that is currently used by operator panel KV-
D30.
Initialize control memory for KV-D30 by the following procedure.

1 Select {PLC (P)} {Clear CM for

KV-D30} from Menu.
This clears control memory, and the
execution status is displayed as a
progress bar.

7-72
 7-8 Batch Monitor

7-8 Batch Monitor

Batch Monitor displays the current values of all devices, ON/OFF states of contacts,
and registered comments by device type. This section describes operations
possible on Batch Monitor.

Outline of Batch Monitor

Batch Monitor has the following functions:
• Batch display of current values, setting values and contacts of all devices
and ON/OFF states of coils by device type
• Display of all currently registered comments
• Switching of bit device ON/OFF states
• Changing of current values on the dialog bar
Batch Monitor Display
File (F) Batch Monitor (I)
To display the Batch Monitor window, you must first select the device on Ladder
Monitor. The registered details in the Batch Monitor can also be set to save by
device type so that they can be called up whenever necessary.

Display a new Batch Monitor window by the following below.

1 Select the device to be displayed in the Ladder Monitor window.

7
Clicking the device causes the cell to change color to gray to indicate that the

MONITOR
device is selected.

2 Select {File (F)} {Batch Monitor (I)} from

Menu.
This opens the Batch Monitor window.
Other procedure
Click the button.

[Tip]
A new window is opened each time that this operation is executed.

A list of devices is displayed in

the Batch Monitor window
starting from the device that you
selected.
The selected device is displayed
inverted to indicate that it is
selected.

[Tip]
If the Batch Monitor window is opened when a device has not been selected by
the cursor, the window is opened for the device displayed in the dialog bar.

7-73
 7-8 Batch Monitor

Registering Devices
Display devices can be changed if a device is registered on an already displayed
Batch Monitor. There are two ways of registering devices:
• By dragging the device from the Ladder Monitor window
• By specifying the device in the dialog bar

„ Dragging devices from the Ladder Monitor window

Drag-and-drop devices from the Ladder Monitor window to register them to
Batch Monitor. Displaying Ladder Monitor at the bottom of the screen by
selecting {View (V)} {To bottom of ladder (K)} from Menu, or by clicking the
button to display the Ladder Monitor at the bottom of the screen is useful as it
allows you to drag devices even if the registration destination Batch Monitor
window is overlapping the Ladder Monitor window.

1 Select the device to display in the Ladder Monitor window and keep the
mouse down in a clicked state.
The mouse cursor shape changes as shown below.

7
MONITOR

2 Drag the mouse cursor onto the Batch Monitor window.

Drag

3 Drop the device into the Batch Monitor window.

A list of devices of the same type as the selected device is displayed in the
Batch Monitor window. The selected device also is displayed inverted to
indicate that it is selected.

7-74
 7-8 Batch Monitor

„ Specifying devices in the dialog bar

On the dialog bar, you can register new devices or change the settings of the
currently selected device.

You can set the following items on the dialog bar:

• Device type
• Device No.
• Number of bits
• Radix
• Comment display mode
• Current value
• Setting value (possible only on timers and counters)

1 Specify the destination to start registering devices to.

Make the window of the Monitor for registering devices to the current window.

2 Set the device to register on the dialog bar.

Device No. Radix
Device type Data bit length Comment
7

MONITOR
[Tip]
• The Tab key moves the cursor in the forward direction, while the Tab + Shift
keys move the cursor in the backward direction.
• The key functions as follows:
When the cursor is at Type or No.: New values are registered.
When the cursor is at bit, radix or comment: Values are written to the current
device.
• When the type is selected by "R" (relay) or "DM" (data memory) when the KV-
700 is used, and the No. button is clicked, a list of relays and data
memories currently assigned to each unit is displayed. Select the desired relay
or data memory from the list to monitor relays or data memory for each unit.

Note: If you enter a device No. outside of the

allowable setting range, the message
"Impossible device No. value" is displayed.

3 Click the "Reg" button.

This registers the device having the details you set to the Batch Monitor
window.

„ Canceling settings

1 Click the "Cancel" button.

The setting is canceled.

7-75
 7-8 Batch Monitor

About the Batch Monitor Window

Device No. Comment

Current value State

Setting value

• To view hidden parts of the display, use the scroll bar or the PageUp or PageDown
keys.
• You can move the cursor using the keys.
• The current values change in keeping with Monitor execution.

Current value display format

Display Format Bit Radix Sign

B1 1 2 Unsigned B: Bit
7 B16 16 2 Unsigned O: Bit
O16 16 8 Unsigned D: Unsigned binary
MONITOR

O32 32 8 Unsigned S: Signed binary

D16 16 10 Unsigned H: Hex
D32 32 10 Unsigned A: ASCII
S16 16 10 Signed F: Floating point type real
number
S32 32 10 Signed
H16 16 16 Signed
H32 32 16 Signed
A16 16 ASCII ―
A32 32 ASCII ―
F16 16 FLOAT ―
F32 32 FLOAT ―

Saving/Reading Batch Monitor Window

Saving the Batch Monitor window
File (F) Save window as... (A)
Save the Batch Monitor window by the following procedure.

1 Click the Batch Monitor window to save to make it the current window.

7-76
 7-8 Batch Monitor

2 Select {File (F)} {Save window as... (A)} from

Menu.
The Save As dialog box is displayed.

3 Specify the folder (directory) to save the window to and the file name.

Specify the folder

(directory) to save to.

Specify the file name.

Specify "Batch Monitor
(*.kal)" as the file type.
7

MONITOR
Specify the folder (directory) to which the Batch Monitor window is to be saved. Normally,
Save in (I)
the project folder to which the currently monitored ladder is to be saved opens.
File name (N) Enter the name of the monitor window to be saved.
Save as type (T) Specify "Batch monitor (*.kal)".

Note: Current values and setting values are not saved. To save these values, use
batch change.
"7-13 Batch Change" page 7-139

[Tip]
The file is automatically appended with the extender ".kal" when the file name is
set even if it is not specified when the file name is entered.

4 Click the "Save" button.

This saves the Batch Monitor window.

Reading Batch Monitor files

File (F) Open window (O)
Read Batch Monitor files by the following procedure.

1 Select {File (F)} {Open window (O)} from

Menu.
The Open dialog box is displayed.

7-77
 7-8 Batch Monitor

2 Select "Batch Monitor" from the Files of type pulldown list.

3 Specify the folder (directory) to read the file from and the file name.

Specify the folder

(directory) containing
the file to read.

Specify the file name. Make sure that the file

type is "Batch
Monitor(*.kal)."

7
Specify the folder (directory) to which the Batch Monitor window is saved. Normally, the
MONITOR

Look in (I)
project folder to which the currently monitored ladder is to be saved opens.
File name (N) Enter the name of the monitor window to be read.
Files of type (T) Specify "Batch monitor (*.kal)".

4 Click the "Open" button.

This opens the Batch Monitor window.

7-78
 7-8 Batch Monitor

Selecting and Changing Devices

In the Batch Monitor window, you can select devices and change the ON/OFF
states of bit devices and current values.
There are two ways of selecting a device, by using the mouse or by using keys.

Selecting devices
Select devices by the following procedure.

„ Using the mouse to select devices

1 Move the mouse cursor to the device and click to select.

The cursor turns gray to indicate that the device is selected

MONITOR
„ Using keys to select devices

1 Move the cursor to the device to select using the keys with the
cursor the same color as the title bar, and press the key.
The cursor turns gray to indicate that the device is selected

7-79
 7-8 Batch Monitor

Turning bit devices ON/OFF

Turn bit devices ON/OFF by the following procedure.

„ Using the mouse to turn devices ON/OFF

1 Move the cursor to the device whose state is to be turned ON/OFF, and
double-click the device.
This switches the ON/OFF display of the device.
ON state OFF state
Double-click

„ Using keys to turn devices ON/OFF

1 Move the cursor to the device whose is to be turned ON/OFF using the
7 keys with the cursor the same color as the title bar, and press the
space bar.
MONITOR

This switches the ON/OFF display of the device.

ON state OFF state
(Space) key

„ Using the bit cursor to turn each device ON/OFF

The bit cursor appears on screen when the device is a bit device whose display
attributes are set to 16-bit, binary number.

1 Move the bit cursor to the device

whose state is to be turned ON/OFF
and double-click the device.
This switches the "_" "0" display.
ON/OFF states can be switched for
each bit device.

Other procedure
Move the cursor to the device whose is to be turned ON/OFF using the
keys with the cursor the same color as the title bar, and press the space bar.

7-80
 7-8 Batch Monitor

Changing current values/setting values/attributes

On the dialog bar, you can register new devices or change the settings of the
currently selected device.

You can set the following items on the dialog bar:

• Device type
• Device No.
• Number of bits
• Radix
• Comment display mode
• Current value
• Setting value (possible only on timers and counters)
• Resetting of timer/counter current value

1 Make the Monitor window in which to change device settings the current
window.

MONITOR
2 Move the cursor to the device to be changed and click the device.

3 Change the radix, comment, current value and setting value on the dialog
bar.
Current value write button
Radix Comment Setting value write button

Current value write box Setting value write box

[Tip]
• The Tab key moves the cursor in the forward direction, while the Tab + Shift
keys move the cursor in the backward direction.
• The key functions as follows:
When the cursor is at Type or No.: New values are registered.
When the cursor is at bit, radix or comment: Values are written to the current
device.

Note: " Impossible setting value." is displayed if

illegal data is entered.

7-81
 7-8 Batch Monitor

4 Click the "Wr current value" button or "Value" button.

• This changes the current value and setting value.

Setting items and values that can be set

Settable Values
Item Description
Ladder Monitor Batch Monitor/Registration Monitor
Relay, control relay, timer, counter,
comparator, high-speed counter,
Type Select the type of device. 
data memory, control memory,
temporary data memory, trimmer No.
No. Enter the device No.  Settable Nos. vary according to device.
1*1, 16, 32*2
*1 Devices other than relay cannot be set
to "1".
Bit Select bit length of data.  *2 When KV-10/16/24/40 is used,
timers/counters cannot be set to "32".
When KV-700 is used, timer/counter
and digital trimmer values are fixed to
"32".
Decimal
7 Binary*3, Octal, Decimal, -Decimal*4, Hex,
Attribute

Hex ASCII, FLOAT (floating point real number)*5

*3 When the bit is set to "32", "2" cannot be set.
MONITOR

Select current value of *4 Values are expressed as signed binary (2's complement).
Rad device/display method *5 This can be set only when KV-700 is used.
(Hex/Bin) of setting value.
• When the bit is set to "1", the radix can be changed to other
than "2".
• Changes made to radix are reflected to the overall window
(Registration Monitor for each selected device).
Select type of comment to
Comment Comment 1/comment 2/comment 3/none
be displayed.
Wr current
Enter current value. Up to 17 digits (32 bits) can be entered.
value
Can be set only in case of timers and counters. Up to 17 digits (32
Value Enter setting value.
bits) can be entered.

[Tip]
• Of the number of bits and radix settings, the number of bits is given priority.
(For example, if the number of bits is changed to "1" with the number of bits set
to "16" and the radix set to "decimal," the radix is changed to "binary.")
• In the case of both 16-bit and 32-bit bit devices, only numbers whose
lowermost two digits are "00" can be registered.
• When Bit is set to "32", the 16 bits lower than an even-numbered device No.
becomes the upper 16 bits.
• The "Reset" button is displayed only when timers or counters are selected.
• Bit value devices are reset when PLC operation is executed even if the
ON/OFF state of bit devices or current values or setting values are changed
with PLC operation stopped. If this happens, change the state of the devices
during program operation.
• Timer and counter setting values cannot be changed when the program is
write-protected.

7-82
 7-8 Batch Monitor

„ Canceling settings
1 Click the "Cancel" button on the dialog bar.

„ Returning timer/counter current values to their defaults

1 Click the "Reset" button on the dialog bar.

Resetting device values

Reset the selected device and return it to its defaults by the following procedure.

[Tip]
Resetting devices resets only the device on the rung containing the cursor. To
reset all devices, select {PLC (P)} {Clear all devices (L)} {Clear all DMs
(D)} / {Clear all hold relays (H)} / {Clear all counters (C)} from Menu.
"Clear All Devices" page 7-72
7
1 Click the device to be reset.

MONITOR
This selects the device.

2 Click the right mouse button.

This displays Menu.

3 Select "Reset" from Menu.

This resets the current values of the currently selected device to their defaults.

7-83
 7-9 Registration Monitor

7-9 Registration Monitor

Registration Monitor is for registering any device, and displaying the current values
and time charts of registered devices. This monitor comes in handy for batch-
checking different types of devices. This section describes how to view and operate
Registration Monitor.

Outline of Registration Monitor

Registration Monitor has the following functions:

• Registration of 128 devices in a single window

• Changing the position of registered devices
• Display of registered devices (both bit devices and word devices) as a time
chart
• Display of bit device ON/OFF states and comments
• ON/OFF switching of bit devices
7 • Changing current values using the dialog bar
MONITOR

Note: Time charts do not operate according to the scan time of the PLC. Also,
only one vertical cursor on the time chart is displayed.
To display a more accurate time chart, use the High-speed Time Chart
Monitor.
"7-11 High-speed Time Chart Monitor" page 7-106

Displaying Registration Monitor

File (F) Registration Monitor (T)
Registration Monitor registers multiple devices and displays a time chart of these
devices.

Display a new Registration Monitor window by the following procedure.

1 Select {File (F)} {Registration

Monitor (T)} from Menu.
The Registration Monitor window opens.

Other procedure
Click the button.

[Tip]
A new window is opened each time that this operation is executed.

7-84
 7-9 Registration Monitor

Registering Devices
To monitor devices by Registration Monitor, devices must first be registered. There
are two ways of registering devices:

• By dragging-and-dropping devices from the Ladder Monitor window

• By specifying the device on the dialog bar

„ Dragging devices from the Ladder Monitor window

Drag-and-drop devices from the Ladder Monitor window to register devices by
the following procedure.

1 Select {File (F)} {Registration

Monitor (T)} from Menu.
The Registration Monitor window opens.
Other procedure
Click the button.

[Tip]
A new window is opened each time that this operation is executed.
7
2 Select the device to display in the Ladder Monitor
window, and keep the mouse down in a clicked

MONITOR
state.
The mouse cursor shape changes.
[Tip]
If you click the mouse with the Ctrl key held down, the mouse cursor changes
shape to , and all devices displayed in the screen can be registered to
Registration Monitor.

3 Drag to the top of the Registration Monitor

window.

4 Drop at the top of the Registration Monitor window.

This registers the selected device(s) in the Registration Monitor window.

[Tip]
Initially, the time chart is displayed. To display comments, select the type of
comment by [Comment] on the dialog bar.

7-85
 7-9 Registration Monitor

„ Specifying devices in the dialog bar

On the dialog bar, you can register new devices or change the settings of the
currently selected device.

You can set the following items on the dialog bar:

• Device type
• Device No.
• Number of bits
• Radix
• Comment display mode
• Current value
• Setting value (possible only on timers and counters)

1 Specify the destination to start registering devices to.

Make the window of the Monitor for registering devices to the current window.

2 Set the device to register on the dialog bar.

7 Device No. Radix

Device type Data bit length Comment
MONITOR

[Tip]
• The Tab key moves the cursor in the forward direction, while the Tab + Shift
keys move the cursor in the backward direction.
• The key functions as follows:
When the cursor is at Type or No.: New values are registered.
When the cursor is at bit, radix or comment: Values are written to the current
device.
• When the type is selected by "R" (relay) or "DM" (data memory) when the KV-
700 is used, and the No. button is clicked, a list of relays and data
memories currently assigned to each unit is displayed. Select the desired relay
or data memory from the list to monitor relays or data memory for each unit.

Note: If you enter a device No. outside of the

allowable setting range, the message
"Device No. too large" is displayed.

3 Click the "Reg" button.

This registers the device having the details you set to the Batch Monitor
window.

„ Canceling settings

1 Click the "Cancel" button.

The setting is canceled.

7-86
 7-9 Registration Monitor

About the Registration Monitor Window

Device No. Bit device state Vertical cursor Time chart

Current value Setting value Comment

• If many devices have been registered, you can display them more easily by
opening multiple windows.
• The vertical cursor on the time chart can be moved by the keys. 7
• When Registration Monitor is executed, the current values and time chart

MONITOR
change successively matched to the operation speed.

Note: One gradation on the time chart does not correspond to a single scan.
The gradation is for a single communication sequence on the monitor.
To display a more accurate time chart marked for each scan, use the
High-speed Time Chart Monitor.
"7-11 High-speed Time Chart Monitor" page 7-106

Current value display format

Display Format Bit Radix Sign

B1 1 2 Unsigned B: Bit
B16 16 2 Unsigned O: Bit
O16 16 8 Unsigned D: Unsigned binary
O32 32 8 Unsigned S: Signed binary
D16 16 10 Unsigned H: Hex
D32 32 10 Unsigned A: ASCII
S16 16 10 Signed F: Floating point type real
number
S32 32 10 Signed
H16 16 16 Signed
H32 32 16 Signed
A16 16 ASCII ―
A32 32 ASCII ―
F16 16 FLOAT ―
F32 32 FLOAT ―

7-87
 7-9 Registration Monitor

Saving/Reading Registration Monitors

Saving Registration Monitor
File (F) Save window as... (A)
Registration Monitor windows to which devices have been registered can be saved
to file.

Save Registration Monitor window by the following procedure.

1 Click the Registration

Monitor window to save to
make it the current
window.

2 Select {File (F)} {Save window as... (A)} from

Menu.
The Save As dialog box is displayed.

7
MONITOR

3 Specify the folder (directory) to save the window to and the file name.

Specify the folder

(directory) containing
the file to read.

Specify the file name. Specify "Registration

Monitor(*.kre)" as the
file type.

Specify the folder (directory) to which the Registration Monitor window is to be saved.
Save in (I)
Normally, the project folder to which the currently monitored ladder is to be saved opens.
File name (N) Enter the name of the monitor window to be saved.
Save as type (T) Specify "Registration Monitor (*.kre)".

Note: Current values/setting values are not be saved. To save these values, use
batch change.
"7-13 Batch Change" page 7-139
[Tip]
The file is automatically appended with the extender ".kre" when the file name is
set even if it is not specified when the file name is entered.

4 Click the "Save" button.

This saves the Registration Monitor window.

7-88
 7-9 Registration Monitor

Reading Registration Monitor files

File (F) Open window (O)
Read Registration Monitor files by the following procedure.

1 Select {File (F)} {Open window (O)} from

Menu.
The Open dialog box is displayed.

2 Select "Registration Monitor" from the [Files of type] pulldown list.

[Tip]
7
The default is "Registration Monitor".

MONITOR
3 Specify the folder (directory) to read the file from and the file name.

Specify the folder

(directory) containing
the file to read.

Specify the file name. Specify "Registration

Monitor(*.kre)" as the
file type.

Specify the folder (directory) to which the Registration Monitor window is to be saved.
Look in (I)
Normally, the project folder to which the currently monitored ladder is to be saved opens.
File name (N) Enter the name of the monitor window to be read.
Files of type (T) Specify "Registration Monitor (*.kre)".

4 Click the "Open" button.

This opens the Registration Monitor window.

7-89
 7-9 Registration Monitor

Selecting and Changing Devices

In the Batch Monitor window, you can select devices and change the ON/OFF
states of bit devices and current values.
There are two ways of selecting a device, by using the mouse or by using keys.

Note: To use Registration Monitor, devices must first be registered.

For details on how to register devices, see "Displaying Registration
Monitor" (page 7-84).

Selecting devices
Select devices by the following procedure.

„ Using the mouse to select devices

1 Move the mouse cursor to the device and click to select.

The cursor turns gray to indicate that the device is selected
7
MONITOR

„ Using keys to select devices

1 Move the cursor to the device to select using the keys with the
cursor the same color as the title bar, and press the key.
The cursor turns gray to indicate that the device is selected

7-90
 7-9 Registration Monitor

Turning bit devices ON/OFF

Turn bit devices ON/OFF by the following procedure.
„ Using the mouse to turn devices ON/OFF
1 Move the cursor to the device whose state is to be turned ON/OFF, and
double-click the device.
This switches the ON/OFF display of the device.
ON state OFF state
Double-click

„ Using keys to turn devices ON/OFF

1 Move the cursor to the device whose is to be turned ON/OFF using the
keys with the cursor the same color as the title bar, and press the
space bar.
This switches the ON/OFF display of the device. 7
ON state OFF state

MONITOR
(Space) key

Changing current values/setting values/attributes

On the dialog bar, you can register new devices or change the settings of the
currently selected device.

You can set the following items on the dialog bar:

• Device type
• Device No.
• Number of bits
• Radix
• Comment display mode
• Current value
• Setting value (possible only on timers and counters)
• Resetting of timer/counter current value

1 Make the Monitor window in which to change device settings the current
window.

7-91
 7-9 Registration Monitor

2 Move the cursor to the device to be changed and click the device.

3 Change the radix, comment, current value and setting value on the dialog
bar.
Current value write button
Radix Comment Setting value write button

Current value write box Setting value write box

[Tip]
• The Tab key moves the cursor in the forward direction, while the Tab + Shift
keys move the cursor in the backward direction.
• The key functions as follows:
When the cursor is at Type or No.: New values are registered.
When the cursor is at bit, radix or comment: Values are written to the current
device.
Note: "Impossible current value." is
7 displayed if illegal data is entered.
MONITOR

4 Click the "Write current value" button or "Setting value" button.

• This changes the current value and setting value.

Setting items and values that can beset

Settable Values
Item Description
Ladder Monitor Batch Monitor/Registration Monitor
Relay, control relay, timer, counter,
comparator, high-speed counter,
Type Select the type of device. 
data memory, control memory,
temporary data memory, trimmer No.
No. Enter the device No.  Settable Nos. vary according to device.
1*1, 16, 32*2
*1 Devices other than relay cannot be set
to "1".
Bit Select bit length of data.  *2 When KV-10/16/24/40 is used,
timers/counters cannot be set to "32".
When KV-700 is used, timer/counter
and digital trimmer values are fixed to
"32".
Attribute

Decimal Binary*3, Octal, Decimal, -Decimal*4, Hex,

Hex ASCII, FLOAT (floating point real number)*5
*3 When the bit is set to "32", "2" cannot be set.
Select current value of *4 Values are expressed as signed binary (2's complement).
Rad device/display method *5 This can be set only when KV-700 is used.
(Hex/Bin) of setting value. • When the bit is set to "1", the radix can be changed to other
than "2".
• Changes made to radix are reflected to the overall window
(Registration Monitor for each selected device).
Select type of comment to
Comment Comment 1/comment 2/comment 3/none
be displayed.
Wr current
Enter current value. Up to 17 digits (32 bits) can be entered.
value
Can be set only in case of timers and counters. Up to 17 digits (32
Value Enter setting value.
bits) can be entered.

7-92
 7-9 Registration Monitor

[Tip]
• Of the number of bits and radix settings, the number of bits is given priority.
(For example, if the number of bits is changed to "1" with the number of bits set
to "16" and the radix set to "Decimal," the radix is changed to "Binary.")
• In the case of both 16-bit and 32-bit bit devices, only numbers whose
lowermost two digits are "00" can be registered.
• When Bit is set to "32", the 16 bits lower than an even-numbered device No.
becomes the upper 16 bits.
• The "Reset" button is displayed only when timers or counters are selected.
• Bit value devices are reset when PLC operation is executed even if the
ON/OFF state of bit devices or current values or setting values are changed
with PLC operation stopped. If this happens, change the state of the devices
during program operation.
• Timer and counter setting values cannot be changed when the program is
write-protected.

„ Canceling settings

1 Click the "Cancel" button on the dialog bar.

7

MONITOR
„ Returning timer/counter current values to their defaults

1 Click the "Reset" button on the dialog bar.

7-93
 7-9 Registration Monitor

Copying device attributes

Monitor (M) Registration monitor (M) Copy device attribute (C)

Only the attributes (number of bits, radix and comments) of other devices can be
copied.
This feature is used to change only attributes to the same as those for other already
existing devices with the device type and Nos. as they are.
Copy device attributes by the following procedure.

1 Click the device to set as the copy source,

The device is selected.

Other procedure
7 To copy from the keyboard, select the copy source device, and press the Esc
key.
MONITOR

2 Click the copy destination device with the right mouse

button.
The menu is displayed.
Other procedure
To copy from the keyboard, move the cursor to the copy
destination device.
Note: Do not use the left mouse button to specify the copy destination. Clicking
the left mouse button specifies the copy source.

3 Select "Copy attribute" from Menu.

This copies the attributes.

Other procedure
Select {Monitor (M)} {Registration monitor (M)} {Copy device attribute (C)}.

7-94
 7-9 Registration Monitor

Moving devices
Ctrl +
Ctrl +
The device at the currently selected cursor position can be moved to another
position by dragging-and-dropping to change the order of devices.
Move devices by the following procedure.

1 Move the mouse cursor to the move source device.

2 Move the mouse cursor to the device below the position where you want
7
to move it to with the mouse held down (drag).

MONITOR
3 Release the left mouse button (drop).
The selected device is inserted at the mouse cursor position.

Other procedure
Moving devices up
Press the Ctrl + keys.
Moving devices down
Press the Ctrl + keys.

7-95
 7-9 Registration Monitor

Deleting devices
Monitor (M) Registration monitor (M) Delete device (D)
Delete the device at the currently selected cursor position by the following
procedure.

1 Click the device to delete.

This selects the device.

7 2 Click the device to delete with the right mouse button.

The menu is displayed.
MONITOR

3 Select "Delete" from Menu.

This deletes the selected device. The selection cursor moves to the device
under the deleted device.

Other procedure
Select {Monitor (M)} {Registration monitor (M)} {Delete device (D)} from
Menu.

7-96
 7-9 Registration Monitor

Sorting devices
Monitor (M) Registration monitor (M) Sort device (S)

Sort devices by type and No.

When devices are sorted, the sort by type order is as follows:

KV series KV-700 series

Relay R (relay)
Timer CR (control relay)
Counter DM (data memory)
Comparator CM (control memory)
High-speed counter TM (temporary memory)
Data memory T (timer)
Temporary memory C (counter)
Trimmer No. CTC (high-speed counter comparator)
 CTH (high-speed counter)
 TRM (trimmer No.)

Sort devices by type and No. by the following procedure. 7

MONITOR
1 Click on Registration Monitor with the right mouse
button.
The menu is displayed.

2 Select "Sort device" from Menu.

The devices are sorted in the [Type] list order on the dialog bar.

Other procedure
Select {Monitor (M)} {Registration monitor (M)} {Sort device (S)} from
Menu.

7-97
 7-9 Registration Monitor

Resetting devices
Set selected devices to return them to their defaults by the following procedure.

[Tip]
By resetting a device, only the devices on the rung containing the cursor are
reset. To reset all devices, select {PLC(P} {Clear all devices (L)} {Clear all
DMs (D)} / {Clear all hold relays (H)} / {Clear all counters (C)} from Menu.
"Clear All Devices" page 7-72

1 Click the device to reset.

The device is selected.

7
MONITOR

2 Click the right mouse button.

The menu is displayed.

3 Click "Reset" from Menu.

This returns the current value of the selected device to its default.

7-98
 7-9 Registration Monitor

Time Chart Operations

This item describes time charts that are displayed in Registration Monitor.
Time charts display a log of chronological values in real time when Registration
Monitor is executed. This allows you to check the timing that the ON/OFF states of
contacts of currently registered devices are switched and other program operating
statuses.
Note: Time charts do not function in PLC scan units, and only one vertical cursor
on the time chart is displayed.
To display higher accuracy time charts, use High-speed Time Chart
Monitor.
"7-11 High-speed Time Chart Monitor" page 7-106

„ How to view time charts

A time chart of all currently registered devices is displayed on screen. When a
time chart for a contact is displayed, the ON or OFF states of the contact are
displayed. When a time chart for a word device is displayed, changes in word
values can be ascertained on screen.
• When monitoring bit devices
When value has not changed When value has changed

MONITOR
Time chart is displayed as " " when ON and as " " when Time chart is displayed as " " to indicate that the value has
OFF to indicate that the value has not changed. changed.

• When monitoring word devices

When value has not changed When value has changed

Time chart is displayed as " " to indicate that the value has Time chart is displayed as " " to indicate that the value has
not changed. changed.
The time axis on the time chart advances from right to left. In other words, newer
values are displayed as you advance to the right. The cursor on the time chart
expresses the section indicated as the "Current value," and you can change the
position of the current value by moving the cursor.
The gradation of the time chart is unique to the Monitor and is not related to the
scan time.

7-99
 7-9 Registration Monitor

„ Moving the vertical cursor

The vertical cursor is displayed by clicking the gradation section.

The vertical cursor can be moved by either of two ways:

• By clicking on the cursor pointer, and moving (dragging) to the move

destination with the mouse button held down, and then releasing the
mouse button (dropping)
• By pressing the Esc key, setting the cursor on the device to blue, and
then using the keys

[Tip]
• The value where the vertical cursor is located is displayed as the current value.
When there is no vertical cursor, the true current value is displayed. The
current value can be changed and entered when there is no vertical cursor.
The vertical cursor can be made to disappear by clicking the device whose
value is to be changed.
• The vertical cursor disappears when the ON/OFF state of device contacts, or
current values/setting values are changed.

7 Setting the number of time chart gradations

Monitor (M) Registration monitor (M) Time chart scale setup (C)
MONITOR

The gradation is located at the top of the time chart, and any number of gradations
can be set within the range 1 to 511.
The default number of gradations is 32 for a single screen.
When contacts turn ON/OFF at long intervals, for example, the time chart can be
made easier to view by adjusting the number of gradations.
Set the number of gradations by the following procedure.

1 Display the Registration Monitor whose number of gradations is to be

changed, and click the Monitor to make it the active window.

2 Select {Monitor (M)} {Registration monitor (M)} {Time chart scale

setup (C)} from Menu.
The Time Chart Scale Setup dialog box is displayed.

Other procedure
Click the button.

7-100
 7-9 Registration Monitor

3 Set the number of gradations within the range 1 to 511. (Default is 32.)
The number of gradations on the time chart changes to the newly set number.

Specify the number of gradations.

Discards the setting and closes

the dialog box.

When "32" is set (default) When "100" is set

[Tip]
If there are too many gradations and they 7
do not fit inside the window, the message

MONITOR
"Please enter an integer between 1 and
511." will be displayed. If this happens,
either widen the window, or reduce the
number of gradations.

Printing Registration Monitor

The content of Registration Monitor can be printed. This item describes how to do
this.

Important: Check the following before you start to print the content of
Registration Monitor.
• Make sure that the printer is connected correctly.
→ Check the connection between the PC and the printer by
referring to the User's Manuals.
• Select {File (F)} {Printer setup (R)} from
Menu, and make sure that the printer is set
correctly.
→ If the printer is not set correctly, correct the
settings to match the printer connected to
the PC.

Preview
File (F) Print preview (V)
Check the contents to be printed in the preview screen by the following procedure.

1 Make the Registration Monitor window to be printed the current window.

7-101
 7-9 Registration Monitor

2 Select {File (F)} {Print preview (V)} from Menu.

This displays a preview of the Registration Monitor
window.

Executes printing. Closes the print preview.

Displays the next page. Reduces the display size.

Displays the previous page. Enlarges the display size.

Switches between 1-page

7 or 2-page display.
MONITOR

Executing printing
File (F) Print (P)
Execute printing by the following procedure.
1 Make the Registration Monitor window to be printed the current window.

2 Select {File (F)} {Print (P)} from Menu.

The Print dialog box is displayed.

3 Click the "OK" button.

This prints the Registration
Monitor window.

[Tip]
If the Registration Monitor window is not printed properly, check the printer
settings and the printer connection.

7-102
 7-10 Custom Monitor

7-10 Custom Monitor

If you use Custom Monitor, you can use the functions of Registration Monitor to
customize Registration Monitor windows to have specially selected devices. This
section describes Custom Monitor functions.

Custom Monitor Features

• Windows can be easily called up in all ladder programs if the directory of
Registration Monitor windows is set to the Custom Monitor registration folder.
• Monitor windows for special functions built into the KV-700 CPU Unit are already
provided as defaults to facilitate monitoring of the CPU.

Important: Custom Monitor can be used only when "KV-700" or "KV-700+M" is

selected at the PLC type setting.

Displaying Custom Monitor

Ctrl +R 7
Display Custom Monitor by the following procedure.

MONITOR
1 Select the window to display from the monitor pulldown list.
The selected Custom Monitor window is displayed to enable monitoring.

Displays the windows currently registered to Custom Monitor.

[Tip]
The following windows are registered as defaults to Custom Monitor.

Window name Function

CPU positioning X-axis monitor This is the X-axis monitor of the CPU built-in simple positioning function.
CPU positioning Y-axis monitor This is the Y-axis monitor of the CPU built-in simple positioning function.
CPU built-in I/O This is the I/O monitor built into the CPU.
Access window This is the monitor of the access window alarm function and user messages.
Frequency counter This is the monitor of frequency monitor function.

7-103
 7-10 Custom Monitor

2 Click the "Show" button.

The selected Custom Monitor window is displayed.

7
Registering Custom Monitors
MONITOR

Windows other than the default windows can be registered by registering Custom
Monitors.
Register Custom Monitors by the following procedure.

1 Select {File (F)} {Registration Monitor (T)} from

Menu.
The Registration Monitor window is displayed.

2 Register the device.

"Registering Devices" page 7-74

3 Select the Registration Monitor window to be registered as Custom

Monitor and click the right mouse button.
The menu is displayed.

4 Select the "Register to Custom Monitor" from Menu.

The Save As dialog box is displayed.

7-104
 7-10 Custom Monitor

5 Specify the file name to save the Custom Monitor to.

Specify the
"CpuMon2" folder as
it is.

Specify the file name. Specify "Registration

Monitor(*.kre)" as it is
as the file type.

Note: Registration Monitor files (*.kre) in the "CpuMon2" folder under the folder
pre-installed with KV BUILDER are registered as Custom Monitors. These
files cannot be registered as Custom Monitor files if the "File name" and
"File type" are changed.

[Tip]
The file is automatically appended with the extender ".kre" when the file name is 7
set even if it is not specified when the file name is entered.

MONITOR
6 Click the "Save" button.
This saves the Custom Monitor.

7-105
 7-11 High-speed Time Chart Monitor

7-11 High-speed Time Chart Monitor

High-speed Time Chart Monitor enables you to monitor external inputs/outputs or
device states in scan units. This section describes High-speed Time Chart Monitor
functions.

Features
• High-speed Time Chart Monitor display differs from the Registration Monitor time
chart display in that data can be sampled in real time at almost the scan time of
the PLC.
• Trigger conditions can be set to facilitate setting of traps during debugging.
• Up to 16384 data items can be sampled and saved to file.
• Bit pattern search function enables searching in time charts by ON/OFF
conditions.

Important: High-speed Time Chart Monitor can be used only when "KV-700" or
"KV-700+M" is selected at the PLC type setting.

Displaying High-speed Time Chart Monitor

7 Monitor (M) High-speed Time Chart Monitor (H) Ctrl + H
High-speed Time Chart Monitor is started up with Registration Monitor displayed.
MONITOR

For this reason, devices that are monitored by High-speed Time Chart Monitor must
be registered to Registration Monitor in advance.

Display High-speed Time Chart Monitor by the following procedure.

1 Display Registration
Monitor, and register
devices for which High-
speed Time Chart
Monitor is to be
displayed.
"Displaying Registration
Monitor" page 7-84
"Registering Devices"
page 7-74

2 Select {Monitor (M)} {High-

speed Time Chart Monitor (H)}
from Menu.
Of the devices currently registered to
Registration Monitor, up to 16 bit devices only are automatically displayed from
the top of the list in the order that they were registered.

Other procedure
Click the button.

[Tip]
Devices exceeding 16 devices on the Registration Monitor are discarded. If the
number of devices is less than 16, all devices are registered.

7-106
 7-11 High-speed Time Chart Monitor

Names and Functions of Parts in High-speed Time Chart Monitor

(13) Trigger attribute guide (2) Display ratio setting
(4) Cursor A (6) Trigger point

(14) Trigger mode selector switch (5) Cursor B

(21) Monitor start switch

(3) Monitor registration
contact
(20) Recording cycle
(12) Trigger attribute
setup (18) Sets the sampling
conditions.
(1) Chart diagram
(22) Sets fixed scan
time running.

(16) Trigger conditions

(23) File save/read
(15) "Amount of data switch
following trigger" (7) Sampling
cursor information display
(17) Trigger condition
search. (24) Close switch
7
(9) Current position view

MONITOR
(19) Lost area (10) Scroll switch (8) Cursor setting switch
(11) Cursor jump switch

(1) Chart diagram

The sampled time chart is displayed as white lines. The lower line indicates OFF
and the upper line indicates ON.
The time on the gradation varies according to the setting of (20) "Recording
cycle" set in the pulldown list.

(2) Display ratio setting

Specify the dot width of the gradation that is displayed for the time chart.
Specify how may dots on the PC screen display are taken up by a single
gradation on the time chart.
The display ratio can be set within the range ×1 to ×9 (default: ×2). Set a large
value when the device to be monitored is to be turned ON and OFF within a short
time, and a small value when the device is to be turned ON and OFF within a
long time to facilitate viewing of time charts.

(3) Monitor registration contact

Indicates the contacts to be monitored on High-speed Time Chart Monitor.

[Tip]
Contacts to be monitored cannot be registered in the High-speed Time Chart
Monitor window. Contacts are registered in the Registration Monitor window. To
change the details of registered contacts, the High-speed Time Chart Monitor
window must be closed, the contacts to be monitored in the Registration Monitor
window must be registered again, and the High-speed Time Chart Monitor
window must be opened again.

7-107
 7-11 High-speed Time Chart Monitor

(4) Cursor A
This cursor is displayed in yellow.
By combining this cursor with cursor B, you can check the timing between
registered devices and response delay.
There are two ways of moving this cursor, by moving the mouse to the cursor
position and dragging or by turning (8) "Cursor setting switch" ON and clicking
the move destination.
Set cursor setting switch to ON, move mouse and click. Move mouse to cursor position, and drag.

7
MONITOR

The cursor position and

distance between cursors A
and B can be checked at (7)
"Sampling information display"
below.

(5) Cursor B
This cursor is displayed in blue.
By combining this cursor with cursor A, you can check the timing between
registered devices and response delay.
There are two ways of moving this cursor, by moving the mouse to the cursor
position and dragging or by turning (8) "Cursor setting switch" ON and clicking
the move destination.
Set cursor setting switch to ON, move mouse and click. Move mouse to cursor position, and drag.

The cursor position and

distance between cursors A
and B can be checked at (7)
"Sampling information display"
below.

7-108
 7-11 High-speed Time Chart Monitor

(6) Trigger point

This point is displayed in white.
The point to which a trigger is applied
is displayed when sampling is
performed with a trigger applied.
The absolute position of the trigger
point and the date it was applied can
be checked at (7) "Sampling
information display" below.

(7) Sampling information display

This displays information about the currently displayed time chart.

Top: Expresses the position* at the left edge of the currently

displayed time chart.
A: Expresses the position* of cursor A.
7
B: Expresses the position* of cursor B.

MONITOR
|A-B|: Expresses the distance and time between cursor A
and B.
Lost: Displays the number of lost data from sampled 32
sampling point data.
Max: Displays the maximum number of lost data.
CycleTime: Expresses the mean value of the scan time for each 32
sampling points.
TrigPoint: Displays the position* where the trigger was applied.
[XX/XX/XX XX: XX: XX]: Displays the date that the trigger was applied.
* The position is displayed taking the point when the monitor start switch was
pressed as position 0.

Note: An error of several ms occurs in the time displayed by |A-B| depending on

the lost sampling data and the display performance of the PC. Also,
accurate times are not displayed for roughly the first 30 scan's worth of
data.

(8) Cursor setting switch

This switch sets display and movement of cursors A and B. Each press of this
switch toggles between ON and OFF.
Pressing switch A: Clicking on the chart display screen moves
cursor A to that clicked point.
Pressing switch B: Clicking on the chart display screen moves
cursor B to that clicked point.
Pressing switches A and B: Clicking on the chart display screen moves
cursors A and B with the A-B distance intact.
No switch pressed: Clicking on the chart display screen does not
result in any change.

7-109
 7-11 High-speed Time Chart Monitor

(9) Current position view

Displays the position of the currently displayed data in the overall sampled chart.
The display position can be changed by using the scroll bar at the bottom of the
view.

Band (gray): Currently displayed area

Line (yellow): Position of cursor A
Line (blue): Position of cursor B
Line (white): Trigger point
(10) Scroll switch
This switch scrolls the time chart screen. Move the selected cursor when (8)
"Cursor setting switch" is ON.
: Scrolls the time chart screen one half screen to the left.
: Scrolls the time chart screen one dot to the left.
: Scrolls the time chart screen one dot to the right.

7 : Scrolls the time chart screen one half screen to the right.

(11) Cursor jump switch

MONITOR

This switch jumps the cursor to the cursor A, cursor B or cursor trigger position.

[Tip]
The cursor cannot be made to jump if there is no cursor.

(12) Trigger attribute setup

Set the ON/OFF attributes when the trigger for a contact registered to a Monitor
is used.
: Not set (not used as trigger condition)
: ON setting (Trigger is applied when ON.)
: OFF setting (Trigger is applied when OFF.)

(13) Trigger attribute guide

This is a guide for the trigger attribute switches set in (12) "Trigger attribute setup".

: Not set (not used as trigger condition)

: ON setting (Trigger is applied when ON.)

: OFF setting (Trigger is applied when OFF.)
(14) Trigger mode selector switch
This switch selects whether or not to apply a trigger. When the trigger conditions
match with a trigger applied, sampling automatically stops after the data
specified at (15) '"Amount of data following trigger" cursor is sampled.
A pressed button state indicates that a trigger is applied.
: Trigger is applied.
: Trigger is not applied.

7-110
 7-11 High-speed Time Chart Monitor

(15) "Amount of data following trigger" cursor

Set the amount of data to be sampled after a preset trigger
is applied.
When the cursor is at the right edge, sampling is
automatically stopped after roughly 16000 data items
following the trigger point are sampled.
When the cursor is at the left edge, sampling is
automatically stopped after roughly 250 data items
following the trigger point are sampled.
The default cursor position is the left edge.

[Tip]
The overall number of data items that can be sampled in a
single operation by a trigger is 16384. The amount of sampled
data before the trigger is applied decreases as the cursor
moves to the right edge.

(16) Trigger conditions

Set the trigger conditions when (14) "Trigger mode selector
switch" is set to ON.
AND: Trigger is applied when all conditions match.
7
OR: Trigger is applied when one of the conditions is satisfied.

MONITOR
(17) Search trigger condition
Searches positions that match the conditions set at (12) "Trigger attribute setup"
and (16) "Trigger conditions".
: Searches leftwards.
: Searches rightwards.

(18) Set sampling conditions

• "Record failed area" button

When this button is set to ON, the range of lost data is displayed blank. When
this button is set to OFF, the time chart is displayed with lost data areas
ignored.
With the High-speed Time Chart Monitor, data is sometimes lost due to the
processing capabilities of the PC in use or the scan time of the KV-700. Use
this button to set whether or not to display lost data on screen.

[Tip]
If lost areas are ignored, the number of valid data items increases as only data
that could be sampled is displayed. However, each of the points of cursors A and
B that are displayed in the sampling information display differ from the actual
elapsed time.

• "Inhibit waveform display during recording" button

When this button is set to ON, the waveform is not displayed during sampling.
As the waveform is not drawn on screen, PC performance increases, which
results in less lost data compared with normal operation.

(19) Lost area

Displays the range of lost data as a blank when the "Lost area record" button is
set to ON.

7-111
 7-11 High-speed Time Chart Monitor

(20) Recording cycle

Sets the recording cycle of the time chart.
Select from one of seven cycles: SCAN, 1ms, 2ms, 5ms, 10ms,
20ms and 50ms.
When "SCAN" is set, data is sampled at the scan time of the KV-
700 that is being sampled.
When a recording cycle other than "SCAN" is set, data is sampled
at the set time if the set sampling time is longer than the actual scan
time. If the set sampling time is shorter than the actual scan time,
data is sampled at the scan time.

[Example]
If "1ms" is set as the recording cycle when the scan time is 2ms, data is sampled
every "2ms" scan time as the recording cycle set here is shorter than the scan
time.

(21) Monitor start switch

This switch starts and stops monitoring. Each press of this switch toggles start
and stop.
7
MONITOR

(22) Set fixed scan time running

This setting runs the KV-700 at fixed scan time.
Normally, the scan time increases and decreases according to the execution
state of instructions and I/O ON/OFF states. When a time chart is displayed with
the recording cycle set to "SCAN", the time per gradation loses uniformity. So, to
perform measurement at a uniform time, set fixed scan time running to enabled.
This ensures that the ladder program is always executed at a uniform time with a
wait applied even if the ladder execution time is set to a fast value.
Measurement is possible at equidistant intervals even if the recording cycle is set
to "SCAN" by setting fixed scan time running to enabled.
Set the fixed scan time to a value faster than the actual scan time. If a slower
value is set, the ladder program is executed at the actual scan time. Also, if the
processing speed of the PC in use cannot keep up with the scan time, resulting
in lost data, data loss can be suppressed by applying a wait to the scan time in
the fixed scan time running setting.

Note: This setting is cleared by turning the KV-700 ON and OFF, or by switching
between the Run and Program modes. Also, this setting is invalid if the
ladder program contains the fixed scan time setting.

7-112
 7-11 High-speed Time Chart Monitor

Enable (22) "Set fixed scan time running" by the following procedure.

1 Click the "Set fixed scan PLC" button.

The Fixed Scan Setup dialog box is displayed.

2 Mark the "Use fixed scan" checkbox, and enter the scan time.

Mark this checkbox.

Enter the scan time in ms.

7

MONITOR
3 Click the "Set to PLC" button.
This enables the fixed scan time function.

[Tip]
To disable the fixed scan time function, unmark the "Use fixed scan" checkbox,
and click the "Set to PLC" button.

7-113
 7-11 High-speed Time Chart Monitor

(23) File save/read switch

This switch saves/reads samples time charts.

Note: Time charts cannot be saved or read while they are being recorded. Before
saving or reading a time chart, wait for execution of High-speed Time Chart
Monitor to stop

„ Saving time charts

Save time charts by the following procedure.

1 Click the file Save/Load switch "Save" button.

The Save As dialog box is displayed.

7 2 Specify the folder (directory) and file name to save the time chart to.
MONITOR

Specify the folder

(directory) to save to.

Specify the file name. Specify "Time Chart

Files(*.tcf)" as it is as
the file type.

Specify the folder (directory) to which the time chart is to be saved. Normally, the project
Save in (I)
folder to which the currently monitored ladder is to be saved opens.
File name (N) Enter the name of the time chart to be saved.
Save as type (T) Specify "Time Chart Files (*.tcf)".

[Tip]
The file is automatically appended with the extender ".tcf" when the file name is
set even if it is not specified when the file name is entered.

7-114
 7-11 High-speed Time Chart Monitor

„ Reading time charts

Read time charts by the following procedure.

1 Click the file Save/Load switch "Load" button.

The Open dialog box is displayed.

2 Specify the file to read.

Specify the folder in

which the time chart
to read is saved.

Specify the file name. Specify "Time Chart

7
Files(*.tcf)" as it is as

MONITOR
the file type.

Specify the folder (directory) to which the time chart to read is saved. Normally, the project
Look in (I)
folder containing the ladder program being monitored is opened.
File name (N) Enter the name of the time chart to be read.
Files of type (T) Specify the "Time Chart Files (*.tcf)".

[Tip]
• Time charts can also be specified by entering the file name and by selecting
the time chart to read with the mouse from the file list.
• Time charts can be read even with the Monitor offline.
"Editing devices offline" page 7-43
• Registration Monitor must be opened before opening Time Chart Monitor to
read a file even if a time chart is being monitored.

(24) Close switch

This switch closes the High-speed Time Chart Monitor window.

7-115
 7-12 Unit Monitor

7-12 Unit Monitor

Unit Monitor differs from Registration Monitor and Batch Monitor in that it displays in
an optimum manner units on which relays and DM values are to be monitored. This
section describes how to view and operate Unit Monitor.
Features
Unit Monitor differs from Registration Monitor and Batch Monitor in that it acts as a
window for displaying in an optimum manner units on which relays and DM values
are to be monitored.

Features of Unit Monitor are as follows:

• DMs and relays assigned to each unit can be displayed in the order in which
they were registered.
• Monitoring is simple as display formats and layouts are provided as tem-
plates for each unit.
• Only selected units can be monitored merely by selecting the desired units,
and you need not worry about the assignment status of relays and DMs.

7 Note: Unit Monitor can be used only when "KV-700" or "KV-700+M" is selected at
the PLC type setting.
MONITOR

Displaying Unit Monitor

Ctrl +U
Display units to be monitored by the following procedure.

1 Select the units to be displayed from the unit pulldown list.

A window of the selected units is displayed and can be monitored.

Connection No. of
unit. Units are
assigned a number
1, 2, 3 and so forth
Unit names
from the unit next to
the KV-700 CPU
unit.

[Tip]
Only currently registered units are displayed in the Unit Monitor pulldown list.

Note: Units enclosed by parentheses "( )" are PLC types not supported by Unit
Monitor. These units will not be displayed in the Unit Monitor window even
if they are selected.

2 Click the "Display" button.

The Unit Monitor window of the selected units opens.

7-116
 7-12 Unit Monitor

About Unit Monitor Windows

This item describes each of the units that are displayed.
For details of unit functions and how to set these functions, refer to the User's Man-
ual for the respective unit.

16-, 32- and 64-point Unit Monitor

„ 16 I/O Unit Monitor

(3) Comment display area (4) Unit information

(1) Leading relay No. (8) Input time constant

(2) ON/OFF state display (5) Relay No.

MONITOR
(6) Word display value (7) "Annotation format selector" button

„ 32 I/O Unit Monitor

(3) Comment display area (4) Unit information

(1) Leading relay No. (8) Input time constant

(5) Relay No.

(2) ON/OFF state
display

(7) "Annotation format

selector" button

(6) Word display value

7-117
 7-12 Unit Monitor

„ 64 I/O Unit Monitor

(9) Channel selector tab (4) Unit information

(1) Leading relay No.

(8) Input time constant

(2) ON/OFF state

display

(3) Comment display

area
(5) Relay No.

(7) "Annotation format

selector" button

(6) Word display value

7 Name Function
(1) Leading relay No. Displays the leading relay No. assigned to the selected unit. The No. reflects the content
MONITOR

set on the Unit Editor.

The leading relay No. is displayed for each channel (16 points).
(2) ON/OFF state dis- Displays the ON/OFF state of the relay.
play OFF: Gray
ON: Blue for an input unit and green for an output unit
(3) Comment display Displays the device comment of the relay. Only one comment is displayed as the type of
area comment.
Comments are not displayed when ladder programs have been read from the KV-700 or
when comments are not transferred to the KV-700.
When the ladder program has been transferred to the KV-700 and is being monitored, this
area indicates that comments have been input even if comments have not been transferred
to the KV-700.
(4) Unit information Displays the information (unit connection No. and PLC name) of the selected unit.
(5) Relay No. Displays which relay No. (nth relay No.) the relay is starting from the leading relay No. at
"(1) Leading relay No.".
(6) Word display This area is for displaying the value expressed in words for relays on each channel.
value
(7) "Annotation for- This button selects one of three annotation formats for "word display value": "decimal (un-
mat switching" signed)", "decimal (signed)" and "Hex".
(8) Input time con- Displays the input time constant of the unit set on the Unit Editor.
stant When an output unit is being monitored, "−−−" is displayed as an input time constant does
not exist.
(9) Channel selector This tab switches the channel to be monitored. For "00 to 31", the lower two channels of a
tab 64-point unit are displayed, and for "32 to 63" the upper two channels are displayed.

Important: • The "(8) Input time constant" setting cannot be changed on Unit
Monitor.
• When the "(8) Input time constant" setting has been changed while
monitoring on the access window, the new setting will not be re-
flected in the Unit Monitor display. To reflect the new setting in the
Unit Monitor display, close and open the Unit Monitor window again.

7-118
 7-12 Unit Monitor

A/D Conversion Unit Monitor, D/A Conversion Unit Monitor

„ A/D Conversion Unit Monitor

(2) Comment display area (6) Unit information (8) Comparator lower limit value display area

(5) Setting unit (7) Hold button (9) Comparator upper limit value display area

(1) Channel display

(12)Broken line detection lamp

(3) Current value (11) Comparator upper limit

display area lamp ON state

(4) Assigned device (10) Comparator lower limit

lamp ON state

(13) Current value (17)"Upper/lower limit value

display mode read" button
setting area

(14) Error message

(18) "Upper/lower limit value
write" button 7
display area
(19) "Read settings again"

MONITOR
(15) Input capture data display area (16) Input capture lamp button

Name Function
(1) Channel display Indicates the currently displayed channel.
(2) Comment display Displays the device comment of data memory corresponding to the data whose current
area value is displayed.
(3) Current value dis- Displays the data in the current value display mode.
play area
(4) Assigned device Displays the data memory and relay No. currently assigned to the data display, button or
lamp.
(5) Setting unit Displays the unit corresponding to the input signal range when "analog data" is displayed in
the current value display mode.
(6) Unit information Displays the connection No. and PLC name of the currently displayed unit.
(7) Hold button When this button is ON, peak/bottom hold values are stored to special data.
(Note) When operating hold relays in the ladder program, operations from the Unit Monitor
are sometimes impossible.
(8) Comparator lower Display the comparator upper/lower limit values.
limit value display The upper/lower limit values can be changed.
area
To display the latest values, click the (17) "Upper/lower limit value read" button. To write
(9) Comparator upper newly changed values to the CPU, click the (18) "Upper/lower limit value write" button.
limit value display
area

7-119
 7-12 Unit Monitor

Name Function
(10) Comparator lower This lamp lights when "special data" is below the comparator lower limit value.
limit lamp ON This lamp is OFF in ladder programs.
state
This lamp is not displayed when the comparator function is not set.
(11) Comparator upper This lamp lights when "special data" is above the comparator upper limit value.
limit lamp ON This lamp is OFF in ladder programs.
state
This lamp is not displayed when the comparator function is not set.
(12) Broken line detec- This lamp lights when the input current is 2mA or less in the 4 to 20mA input signal range.
tion lamp It also lights when the input voltage is 0.5V or less in the 1 to 5V input signal range.
This lamp is OFF in ladder programs.
This lamp is not displayed when the broken line detection function is not set.
(13) Current value dis- This area sets the data to be displayed in the current value display area.
play mode setting A/D conversion data: Values obtained by A/D converting input signals to "0 to 4000/-4000
area to +4000".
Special data: Values obtained by scaling, peak/bottom hold processing and aver-
aging.
Analog data: Value obtained by converting "A/D conversion data" to volt-
age/current values.
(14) Error message Displays error details when errors occur.
display area
7 (15) Input capture data This area displays captured data.
display area
MONITOR

(16) Input capture This lamp lights when input capture data is stored. Trigger inputs are invalid while this lamp
lamp is lit.
This lamp is OFF in ladder programs.
This lamp is not displayed when the input capture function is not set.
(17) "Upper/lower limit Reads comparator upper/lower limit values for all channels from the CPU Unit.
value read" button
(18) "Upper/lower limit Writes the comparator upper/lower limit values for all channels currently displayed in the
value write" but- comparator upper/lower limit value display area to the CPU Unit.
ton (Note) When upper/lower limit values are being written from the ladder program, writing
from the Unit Monitor sometimes is not possible.
(19) "Read settings Updates all items currently displayed in the Unit Monitor to the latest information.
again" button

Note: When a setting is changed after Unit Monitor has started, the new setting is
not reflected in the Unit Monitor window. To reflect the setting, update the
displayed information by the "Upper/lower limit value read" and "Up-
per/lower limit value write" buttons.

7-120
 7-12 Unit Monitor

„ D/A Conversion Unit Monitor

(2) Comment display area (6) Unit information (7) Alarm lower limit value display area

(5) Setting unit (8) Alarm upper limit value display area

(1) Channel display

(10)Upper limit alarm lamp

(3) Current value (9) Lower limit alarm lamp

display area

(4) Assigned device

(11) Current value (13) "Upper/lower limit value

display mode read" button
setting area
(14) "Upper/lower limit value
(12) Error message write" button
display area 7
(15) "Read settings again" button

MONITOR
Name Function
(1) Channel display Indicates the currently displayed channel.
(2) Comment display Displays the device comment of data memory corresponding to the data whose current
area value is displayed.
(3) Current value dis- Displays the data by the current value display mode.
play area
(4) Assigned device Displays the data memory and relay No. currently assigned to the data display, button or
lamp.
(5) Setting unit Displays the unit corresponding to the input signal range when "analog data" is displayed
by the current value display mode.
(6) Unit information Displays the connection No. and PLC name of the currently displayed unit.
(7) Alarm lower limit Display the alarm upper/lower limit values.
value display but- The upper/lower limit values can be changed.
ton
To display the latest values, click the (17) "Upper/lower limit value read" button. To write
(8) Alarm upper limit newly changed values to the CPU, click the (18) "Upper/lower limit value write" button.
value display but-
ton
(9) Lower limit alarm This lamp lights when "output data" is the alarm upper limit value or less.
lamp This lamp is OFF in ladder programs.
This lamp is not displayed when the upper/lower limit alarm function is not set.

7-121
 7-12 Unit Monitor

Name Function
(10) Upper limit alarm This lamp lights when "output data" is the alarm upper limit value or more.
lamp This lamp is OFF in ladder programs.
This lamp is not displayed when the upper/lower limit alarm function is not set.
(11) Current value dis- Sets the data to be displayed to the currently value display area.
play mode setting Output data: Original value (0 to 4000/-4000 to +4000) to be D/A converted
area
Or, value obtained by scaling the original value (when scaling function is used)
Analog data: Value obtained by converting the original value to be D/A converted to volt-
age/current values
(12) Error message Displays error details when errors occur.
display area
(13) "Upper/lower limit Reads alarm upper/lower limit values for all channels from the CPU Unit.
value read" button
(14) "Upper/lower limit Writes the alarm upper/lower limit values for all channels currently displayed in the alarm
value write" but- upper/lower limit value display area to the CPU Unit.
ton (Note) When upper/lower limit values are being written from the ladder program, writing
from the Unit Monitor sometimes is not possible.
(15) "Read settings Updates all items currently displayed in the Unit Monitor to the latest information.
again" button

7 Note: When a setting is changed after Unit Monitor has started, the new setting is
not reflected in the Unit Monitor window. To reflect the setting, update the
MONITOR

displayed information by the "Upper/lower limit value read" and "Up-

per/lower limit value write" buttons.

7-122
 7-12 Unit Monitor

KL Unit Monitor
„ When displaying the address connection status list

(2) Number of communicating addresses display (3) "Display mode selector" button

(4) Unit information

(5) "Display only

receive/send
(1) KL master unit range" checkbox
setup content
display

MONITOR
(6) Error history display area (7) Error status display area (8) Address information display area

Name Function
(1) KL master unit Displays the address setup content of the KL master unit KL-N20V.
setup content
display
(2) Number of com- Displays the number of addresses on which communications is being performed with the
municating ad- KL-N20V.
dresses display
(3) "Display mode Switches the display content of KL Unit Monitor.
selector" button List: Lists the assignment status of each address and connections status.
Details: Displays items for the list and the ON/OFF status of I/O for each address.
(4) Unit information Displays the connection No. and PLC name of the currently selected unit.

7-123
 7-12 Unit Monitor

Name Function
(5) "Display only re- Displays only the address area to which monitoring of the currently display address is actu-
ceive/send range" ally set for send and receive on the master unit side.
checkbox When area is secured in order send area and receive area, addresses from the leading
address of the send area through to the final address of the receive area are displayed.
When area is secured in order receive area and send area, addresses from the leading
address of the receive area through to the final address of the send area are displayed.
When the send area and receive area not continuous and are free areas, those free areas
are also displayed.
By marking this checkbox, the number of addresses to be monitored is reduced, and the
response speed in communications between KV BUILDER and the CPU Unit increases.
When sending and receiving data with the PLC, for example, when the PLC link comprises
multiple PLCs, the master unit does not acquire information. For this reason, address areas
where data is being sent and received between PLCs is not displayed.
(6) Error history dis- This area displays a history of errors such as the broken line error that occurs on the KL
play area link. The error history is cleared when the PLC is turned OFF.
This area displays the address where the broken line error occurred and the number of
times the error occurred for each individual address up to 9 times. Information for only up to
10 errors can be displayed at a time. Information is deleted from the oldest occurring error.
(7) Error status dis- Displays the content of the error currently occurring in the KL link.
play area Nothing is displayed when an error is not occurring.

7 (8) Address informa-

tion display area
Displays the settings and connection status of each monitored address by two addresses at
a time.
Unit icons display the assignment state of each address, while the numbers to the side
MONITOR

display the address No. If one of the addresses is a broken line or not connected, that
address is displayed as "XX". The meanings of color coding are as follows:
Blue: Address currently assigned to receive (input) area
Green: Address currently assigned to send (output) area
Gray: Unused address
Red: Address on which a broken line has occurred

7-124
 7-12 Unit Monitor

„ When displaying the address connection status details

(1) KL master unit setup content display

(2) Number of communicating addresses display

(3) "Display mode selector" button

(4) Unit information

(5) "Display only receive/send

range" checkbox

(8) Address information display

area

(10) Assigned device No. display

area

(11) Data information display area

(9) Data display format setting area

7

MONITOR
(12)Comment display area

(6) Error history display area (7) Error status display area

Name Function
(1) KL master unit Displays the address setup content of the KL master unit KL-N20V.
setup content
display
(2) Number of com- Displays the number of addresses on which communications is being performed with the
municating ad- KL-N20V.
dresses display
(3) "Display mode Switches the display content of KL Unit Monitor.
selector" button List: Lists the assignment status of each address and connections status.
Details: Displays items for the list and the ON/OFF status of I/O for each address.
(4) Unit information Displays the connection No. and PLC name of the currently selected unit.

7-125
 7-12 Unit Monitor

Name Function
(5) "Display only re- Displays only the address area to which monitoring of the currently display address is actu-
ceive/send range" ally set for send and receive on the master unit side.
checkbox When area is secured in order send area and receive area, addresses from the leading
address of the send area through to the final address of the receive area are displayed.
When area is secured in order receive area and send area, addresses from the leading
address of the receive area through to the final address of the send area are displayed.
When the send area and receive area not continuous and are free areas, those free areas
are also displayed.
By marking this checkbox, the number of addresses to be monitored is reduced, and the
response speed in communications between KV-BUILDER and the CPU Unit increases.
When sending and receiving data with the PLC, for example, when the PLC link comprises
multiple PLCs, the master unit does not acquire information. For this reason, address areas
where data is being sent and received between PLCs is not displayed.
(6) Error history dis- This area displays a history of errors such as the broken line error that occurs on the KL
play area link. The error history is cleared when the PLC is turned OFF.
This area displays the address where the broken line error occurred and the number of
times the error occurred for each individual address up to 9 times. Information for only up to
10 errors can be displayed at a time. Information is deleted from the oldest occurring error.
(7) Error status dis- Displays the content of the error currently occurring in the KL link.
play area Nothing is displayed when an error is not occurring.

7 (8) Address informa-

tion display area
Displays the settings and connection status of each monitored address by two addresses at
a time.
Unit icons display the assignment state of each address, while the numbers to the side
MONITOR

display the address No.

Blue: Address currently assigned to receive (input) area
Green: Address currently assigned to send (output) area
Gray: Unused address
Red: Address on which a broken line has occurred
(9) Data display for- Displays the display format of the data (I/O information) of each monitored address by two
mat setting area addresses at a time.
In all, five setup items are provided. Setup items are displayed in order by double-clicking
the address field whose setting is to be changed.
When you move the cursor to the desired setup item, and
click the right mouse button, a drop-down menu appears,
and you can change the setting to the desired value. You can
select two or more addresses at the same time by pressing
the Ctrl key with the Shift key held down.
H16: Displays the data of the address at the current cursor position in Hex. (default)
D16: Displays the data of the address at the current cursor position in unsigned decimal.
S16: Displays the data of the address at the current cursor position in signed decimal.
B16: Displays all of the 16 bits of each individual line of the address at the current cursor
position.
B01: Displays the bits of each individual line of the address at the current cursor position.
(10) Assigned device Displays the relays or DM Nos. currently assigned to each address by two addresses at a
No. display area time.
The leading DM or relay No. currently assigned to each address is displayed. Individual bit
Nos. are displayed to the side of the lamp only when the display format is set to "B01".
When a relay is selected, the last two digits of the relay No. are displayed.

7-126
 7-12 Unit Monitor

Name Function
(11) Data information Displays the data (I/O information) of each monitored address by two addresses at a time.
display area The content that is displayed varies according to the setting of (9) Data display format set-
ting area.
H16: Displays in Hex. (value range: $0000 to $FFFF)
D16: Displays in unsigned decimal. (value range: 0 to 65535)
S16: Displays in signed decimal. (value range: -32767 to 32767)
B16: Displays all 16 bits. (o: ON, • : OFF. Rightmost bit is 0nth bit, and bits are delimited by
a line every 4 bits.)
B01: Displays individual bits (o: ON, −: OFF)
(12) Comment display Displays the device comments currently input to each DM (relay).
area Comments are not displayed when ladder programs have been read from the KV-700 or
when comments are not transferred to the KV-700.
When the ladder program has been transferred to the KV-700 and is being monitored, this
area displays that comments have been input even if comments have not been transferred
to the KV-700.

Note: • Settings cannot be written on KL Unit Monitor. Change settings in the ac-
cess window or on Unit Editor.
• More information can be obtained by setting [Details] by the [Display
mode selector switch]. However, monitoring may slow down depending 7
on the baud rate as the amount of information increases.

MONITOR

7-127
 7-12 Unit Monitor

Positioning Unit Monitor

(4) Point No. display (16) Moving relays

(3) Run state display (15) Available relays (17) Positioned relays
(5) Current coordinates
(18) Error relays
(6) Current speed
(19)CW limit switch
ON state

(7) M code output state (20)CCW limit switch

ON state

(8) Current number of (21)Home sensor ON

repeats state

(9) Counter value (2) Leading DM No. (23)"Error reset" (22) Stop sensor ON state
button
(10) Error code
(14) "Home position" (1) Leading
button relay No.
(11) "Start running" button
7 (13) "Decelerate stop" (24) "Forced stop" button
(12) "Zero return" button button
MONITOR

Name Function
(1) Leading relay No. Displays the leading No. of the relays assigned to the selected KV-H20.
The No. reflects the content set on Unit Editor.
(2) Leading DM No. Displays the leading No. of the DMs assigned to the selected KV-H20.
The No. reflects the content set on Unit Editor.
(3) Run state display This is the current run state.
Stopped: Operation has stopped, or system is standing by for the M code or continu-
ous operation instruction.
Running: Pulse output is in progress.
Dwell: System is standing by during a preset dwell.
Zero return: Zero return is in progress.
Move to home: Movement to home position is in progress.
(4) Point No. display This is the point No. currently being run. "0" indicates a non-operation state. 1 to 400 indi-
cates that each point No. is being executed, and 501 to 900 indicates that auxiliary arc is
being executed on points 1 to 400. In the servo ready state, the previous value remains
active, and the new point No. is displayed when the servo ready input turns ON.
(5) Current coordi- Displays the current coordinates.
nates
(6) Current speed This is the current operating speed. This speed includes acceleration and deceleration.
(7) M code output This is the No. of the M code that is currently being output.
state
(8) Current number of Number of repeat executions. "0" is displayed by initial execution for which repeat is not set.
repeats When the number of repeats exceeds 65535, the display returns to "0".
(9) Counter value Current value of the KV-H20 built-in high-speed counter
(10) Error code Displays the No. of the error that occurred on the KV-H20.

7-128
 7-12 Unit Monitor

Name Function
(11) "Start running" Starts operation.
button
(12) "Zero return" but- Performs a zero return.
ton
(13) "Decelerate stop" Performs a decelerated stop.
button
(14) "Home position" Return the current position to the home position.
button
(15) Available relays This indicates that the KV-H20 is correctly communicating with the CPU Unit and that the
KV-H20 is in an operable state.
"ON" is displayed for operable relays, and "OFF" is displayed for inoperable relays.
(16) Moving relays Displays whether or not pulse output is in progress on the KV-H20.
"ON" is displayed when pulse output is in progress, and "OFF" is displayed when it is not in
progress.
(17) Positioned relays This turns ON when point operation on KV-H20 is completed.
"ON" is displayed when operation is completed, and "OFF" is displayed when it is not com-
pleted.
(18) Error relays This turns ON when an error occurs on the KV-H20 side. Details of errors are displayed at
(10) Error code.
"ON" is displayed when an occur has occurred, and "OFF" is displayed when it has not
occurred.
7
(19) CW limit switch Displays the ON/OFF status of the CW limit switch currently connected to the input con-

MONITOR
ON state nector on KV-H20.
(20) CCW limit switch Displays the ON/OFF status of the CCW limit switch currently connected to the input con-
ON state nector on KV-H20.
(21) Home sensor ON Displays the ON/OFF status of the home sensor currently connected to the input connector
state on KV-H20.
(22) Stop sensor ON Displays the ON/OFF status of the stop sensor currently connected to the input connector
state on KV-H20.
(23) "Error reset" but- This button resets the error. When an error is cleared, the forced stop relay also is turned
ton OFF.
(24) "Forced stop" Immediately stops operation
button

For safety's sake, use the KV-H20 at a location where an emergency stop switch
connected to the KV-H20 can be immediately operated. This is because the "Forced
stop" button in Unit Monitor does not operate when a communications error occurs.

7-129
 7-12 Unit Monitor

High-speed Counter Unit Monitor

(3) Preset value

(4) CTC0 set value (1) Operation mode (17) Preset value "Change" button

(16) Present value

(5) CTC1 set value
"Change" button
(2) Present (15) OUT indicator
value
(6) Ring counter set value

(7) Capture 0 present value

(8) Capture 1 present value

(9) Frequency counter value

(10) Rotation speed

measurement value

7 (11) Over (under) flow

indicator
(14) Enable input (19) "Re-load setting"
MONITOR

(13) Preset input indicator indicator button

(21) Error message display (12) "Reset" button (18) Operation enable (20) "Write setting"
area button button

Name Function
(1) Operation mode Displays the operation mode currently selected on Unit Editor.
(2) Present value Displays the count current value.
(3) Preset value Displays the preset value.
Displays comparator setting value 0. Values can also be written to comparator setting
(4) CTC0 set value
value 0.
Displays comparator setting value 1. Values can also be written to comparator setting
(5) CTC1 set value
value 1.
Displays the ring counter upper limit setting value. The ring counter upper limit setting
(6) Ring cntr set val value can also be written. When the ring counter is not used, the background of the nu-
merical value display is gray.
(7) Capture 0 value Display the count value obtained by input capture.
(8) Capture 1 value
(9) Freq cntr val Displays the measurement results when the frequency count mode is used.
(10) Rot spd meas. val Displays the measurement results when the rotation meter mode is used.
(11) Over (under) flow Displays ON/OFF of the overflow relay.
(12) "Reset" button Resets the overflow control relay.
(13) Preset input indica- Displays ON/OFF of external preset inputs.
tor
(14) Enable input indi- Displays ON/OFF of external enable inputs.
cator
(15) OUT indicator Displays ON/OFF of external outputs OUT0 and OUT1 of KV-SC20.

7-130
 7-12 Unit Monitor

Name Function
(16) Present value Clicking the present value "Change" button displays the [Change Present Value] dialog box.
"Change" button Clicking the "Write" button in the [Change Present Value] dialog box changes the count
present value.

Enter the value for changing

the count present value.

Writes the numerical value

entered in the present value
change field to the count
present value.

(17) Preset value Clicking the preset value "Change" button displays the [Change Preset Value] dialog box.
"Change" button Clicking the "Write" button in the [Change Preset Value] dialog box changes the preset
value. Clicking the "Preset" button changes the preset value, and simultaneously executes
the preset operation.

Executes preset operation.

Enter the value for changing

the preset value. 7
Writes the numerical value

MONITOR
entered in the preset value
change field to the preset
present value.

These items turn gray and cannot be used in operations other than preset count and the
enable integration count mode.
(18) Ope enable button Enables count operation. Each press of the button toggles the operation enable relay ON
and OFF.
(19) "Re-load setting" Reads the comparator setting value of the assigned DM and the ring counter setting values
button from KV-SC20.
(20) "Write setting" Writes the setting value to KV-SC20. Settings are updated.
button
(21) Error message Displays the details of the error when an error occurs.
display area

7-131
 7-12 Unit Monitor

Ethernet Unit Monitor

(1) (6)
(2)
(7)
(3)
(4) (8)
(5) (9)

Name Function
7 (1) IP address Displays the IP address of the selected KV-LE20.
Set this in Unit Editor.
Communications setting
MONITOR

(2) Subnet Displays the subnet mask of the subnet to which the selected KV-LE20 belongs.
display area

mask Set this in Unit Editor.

(3) Default Displays the IP address of the computer (or network device) that is set as the gateway when
gateway the network is configured using a gateway.
Set this in Unit Editor.
(4) Port No. Displays the port No. used when KV-LE20 is communicating with a KVB and DB.
(KVB, DB) Set this in Unit Editor.
(5) Port No. Displays the port No. used when KV-LE20 uses host link functions for communication.
(host link) Set this in Unit Editor.
(6) KVB, DB Displays the number of sockets used for communications with the KVB or PC applications
Socket use status display

such as DB, connection confirmation tools, or ActiveX controls. 0 means unused. The
maximum value is 8.
(7) Host link Displays the number of sockets used by TCP for communications with the host link. 0
area

means unused. The maximum value is 2.

(8) KV socket The number of sockets used for communications on the KV socket is displayed. When this
is set to disabled on Unit Editor, "Disabled" is displayed. When TCP or UDP is set to en-
abled, the number of TCP/UDP sockets in use is displayed. (The maximum value is 4.)
(9) FTP Displays the number of sockets used for FTP communications. When this is set to disabled
on Unit Editor, "Disabled" is displayed. When it is set to enabled, the number of sockets is
displayed.

7-132
 7-12 Unit Monitor

(10)
(11)

(12)
(13)

Name Function 7
(10) Send count Displays the number of IP packets sent by KV-LE20 to other terminals

MONITOR
Communications (nodes).
state display
area (11) Receive count Displays the number of IP packets received by KV-LE20 from other termi-
nals (nodes).
(12) RX time-out Displays the allowable time until recovery after communications is discon-
tinued. Set time-out in the "RX time-out" field on Unit Editor.
Time setting
display area (13) Keep alive Displays the time interval that the connection established state is moni-
tored (keep alive function) during TCP communications.
Set this in Unit Editor.

(15) (14)
(16)
(17) (24)
(18) (25)
(19) (26)
(20) (27)
(21) (28)
(22) (29)
(23) (30)

7-133
 7-12 Unit Monitor

Name Function
(14) Targeted monitor This area is for selecting the target to be monitored.
selection area • When [KV socket] is set to "TCP enabled" on Unit Editor, select which of TCP0 or
TCP1 to monitor.
When [KV socket] is set to "TCP enabled", UDP cannot be selected.
• When [KV socket] is set to "UDP enabled" on Unit Editor, only UDP can be selected.
When [KV socket] is set to "UDP enabled", TCP0 and TCP1 cannot be selected.
• When [KV socket] is set to "Disabled" on Unit Editor, one of TCP0, TCP1 and UDP
cannot be selected, and all items in the KV socket status display area are displayed
gray.
(15) Self port No. Displays the port No. current used by the selected KV-LE20 for communications. The
displayed No. range is 0 to 65535.
(16) Comm dest IP Displays the IP address of the communications destination.
add
(17) Comm dest port Displays the port No. of the communications destination.
No.
(18) Req time-out Displays the time limit from the TCP active open request relay or send/receive relay
turning ON up to completion of processing.
(19) Connection state Displays which state the TCP connection is in.
(20) TX data length Displays the length of the send data in bytes. The maximum value when TCP is used is
KV socket status display area

7 (21) RX data length

400 and when UDP is used is 1472.
Displays the length of the data to receive in bytes. The maximum value when TCP is
(req) used is 400 and when UDP is used is 1472.
MONITOR

(22) RX data length Displays the length of the actually received data in bytes. The maximum value when
(res) TCP is used is 400 and when UDP is used is 1472.
(23) RX store dest Displays which (nth) byte in the receive area the received data should be written.
offset
Request Lights while the passive open request relay is ON.
R+0 (TCP0)
R+8 (TCP1)
End Lights while the passive open end relay is ON.
(24) Passive open R+100 (TCP0)
R+108 (TCP1)
End code * The end code is entered after passive open processing ends.
DM+28 (TCP0) When the end code is "0", this means that passive open processing
ended successfully. When the end code is other than "0", an error
DM+448 (TCP1)
has occurred. Remedy the error as required.
Request Lights while the active open request relay is ON.
R+1 (TCP0)
R+9 (TCP1)
End Lights while the active open end relay is ON.
(25) Active open R+101 (TCP0)
R+109 (TCP1)
End code * The end code is entered after active open processing ends. When
DM+29 (TCP0) the end code is "0", this means that active open processing ended
successfully. When the end code is other than "0", an error has
DM+449 (TCP1)
occurred. Remedy the error as required.
* The end code is updated only when the end relay turns ON.

7-134
 7-12 Unit Monitor

Name Function
Request Lights while the open request relay is ON.
R+0
End Lights at end of open processing.
(26) Open (UDP) R+100
End code * The end code is entered after open processing ends. When the end
DM+27 code is "0", this means that open processing ended successfully.
When the end code is other than "0", an error has occurred. Reme-
dy the error as required.
Request Lights while the send request relay is ON.
R+2 (TCP0)
R+10 (TCP1)
R+1 (UDP)
End Lights while the send processing end relay is ON.
R+102 (TCP0)
(27) Send
R+110 (TCP1)
R+101 (UDP)
End code * The end code is entered after send processing ends. When the end
DM+30 (TCP0) code is "0", this means that send processing ended successfully.
DM+450 (TCP1) When the end code is other than "0", an error has occurred. Reme-
dy the error as required.
KV socket status display area

DM+28 (UDP)
Request Lights while the receive request relay is ON. 7
R+3 (TCP0)

MONITOR
R+11 (TCP1)
R+2 (UDP)
End Lights when receive processing ends.
R+103 (TCP0)
(28) Receive
R+111 (TCP1)
R+102 (UDP)
End code * The end code is entered after receive processing ends. When the
DM+31 (TCP0) end code is "0", this means that receive processing ended suc-
DM+451 (TCP1) cessfully. When the end code is other than "0", an error has oc-
curred. Remedy the error as required.
DM+29 (UDP)
Request Lights while the close request relay is ON.
R+4 (TCP0)
R+12 (TCP1)
R+3 (UDP)
End Lights when close processing ends.
R+104 (TCP0)
(29) Close
R+112 (TCP1)
R+103 (UDP)
End code * The end code is entered after close processing ends. When the
DM+32 (TCP0) end code is "0", this means that close processing ended success-
DM+452 (TCP1) fully. When the end code is other than "0", an error has occurred.
Remedy the error as required.
DM+30 (UDP)
(30) Opened R+105 (TCP0) Lights while the opened relay is ON.
R+113 (TCP1)
R+104 (UDP)
* The end code is updated only when the end relay turns ON.

Note: When unit settings have been changed, for example, in the access window
after Unit Monitor was started up, those changes are not reflected in Unit
Monitor. To reflect those changes, exit Unit Monitor and start it up again.

7-135
 7-12 Unit Monitor

Temperature Controller Unit Monitor

(3) (1) (6) (7)

(2)
(8)
(4) (9)
(10)
(5)

(13)

(11) (12)

Name Function
7 (1) Unit information Displays the connection No. and model name of the currently displayed unit.
(2) Channel display Displays the currently displayed channel.
MONITOR

(3) Comment display Displays the device comment of the data memory corresponding to the measurement value
area of the currently displayed channel.
(4) "Details" button Displays the [Detailed view mode] window for the currently displayed channel.
(5) Measurement Displays the measured current temperature.
value display area
(6) Setting value Displays the (target) temperature setting. The setting value can be changed. To display the
display area latest value, click the (12) "Re-load setting" button. To write changed values to the CPU
Unit, click the (13) "Write setting" button.
(7) Output amount Displays the output amount (control output ON percentage).
display area
(8) Control output Displays the control output ON/OFF state.
indicator When OFF: gray
When ON: green
(9) Auto-tuning Displays the auto-tuning state. Lights during auto-tuning.
status indicator When OFF: gray
When ON: green
(10) Alarm output Displays the alarm output ON/OFF state.
indicator When OFF: gray
When ON: yellow
(11) Error message Displays the details of the error when an error occurs.
display area
(12) "Re-load setting" Updates all items currently displayed on the TF40 Unit Monitor and in the [Detailed view
button mode] window to values currently stored on the CPU Unit.
(13) "Write setting" Writes the setting values of all channels currently displayed in (6) Setting value display area
button to the CPU Unit.
(Note) While the [Detailed view mode] window is displayed, setting values that have been
changed in the [Detailed view mode] window are not written to the CPU Unit, and all items
are updated to the latest values currently stored on the CPU Unit. (Setting values in the
process of being changed are lost.) Also, writing on the Unit Editor is not possible while
setting values are being written on the ladder program.

7-136
 7-12 Unit Monitor

„ [Detailed view mode] window

(3)

(4)
(2)
(1)
(5)
(6)
(8)
(7)
(9) (10)

Name Function
(1) Measurement Displays the measured current temperature.
value display area
(2) Setting value
display area
Displays the (target) temperature setting. The setting value can be changed. To display the
latest value, click the (26) "Re-load setting" button. To write changed values to the CPU
7
Unit, click the (27) "Write setting" button.

MONITOR
(3) Output amount Displays the output amount (control output ON percentage).
display area
(4) Cool output Displays the output amount (control output ON percentage) when heat/cooling control is
amount display used.
area
(5) Control output Displays the control output ON/OFF state.
indicator When OFF: gray
When ON: green
(6) Cooling control Displays the cooling control output ON/OFF state when heat/cooling control is used.
output indicator When OFF: gray
When ON: green
(7) Alarm output Displays the alarm output ON/OFF state.
indicator When OFF: gray
When ON: yellow
(8) Alarm type Displays the action type for alarm output.
display area
(9) Alarm setting Displays the alarm setting temperature for alarm output. The alarm setting value can be
value display area changed. To display the latest value, click the (26) "Re-load setting" button. To write
changed values to the CPU Unit, click the (27) "Write setting" button.
(10) Alarm hysteresis Displays the hysteresis for alarm output.
display area

(13)

(14)

(12)
(11) (19)

(17) (20)

(15)
(18)
(16)

7-137
 7-12 Unit Monitor

Name Function
(11) Proportional band Displays the setting value for proportional band (P). The proportional band can be changed. To
display area display the latest value, click the (26) "Re-load setting" button. To write changed values to the
CPU Unit, click the (27) "Write setting" button.
(12) Integration time Displays the setting value for integration time (I). The integration time can be changed. To display
display area the latest value, click the (26) "Re-load setting" button. To write changed values to the CPU Unit,
click the (27) "Write setting" button.
(13) Derivative time Displays the setting value for derivative time (D). The derivative time can be changed. To display
display area the latest value, click the (26) "Re-load setting" button. To write changed values to the CPU Unit,
click the (27) "Write setting" button.
(14) Control cycle dis- Displays the ON/OFF cycle (cycle time) for control output.
play area
(15) Cooling control Displays the ON/OFF cycle (cycle time) for cooling control output during heat/cooling control.
cycle display area
(16) Cooling coefficient Displays the percentage for cooling control output with respect to the heat side during
display area heat/cooling control. The cooling coefficient can be changed. To display the latest value, click the
(26) "Re-load setting" button. To write changed values to the CPU Unit, click the (27) "Write
setting" button.
(17) Auto-tuning state Displays the auto-tuning state. Lights during auto-tuning.
indicator When OFF: gray
When ON: green
(18) "Start Auto-tuning" Clicking this button when its display is OFF starts auto-tuning. Clicking this button when its dis-
button play is ON (auto-tuning in progress), stops auto-tuning.
(19) ON/OFF control Displays the hysteresis for control output during ON/OFF control.
hysteresis display
area
(20) Cooling ON/OFF Displays the hysteresis for control output for cooling control output during heat/cool ON/OFF
hysteresis display control.
area
7
MONITOR

(24)

(22)
(25)
(21)
(26)
(23)
(27)

Name Function
(21) Measurement value Displays the bias temperature to be added to the measurement value. The measurement value
bias display area bias can be changed. To display the latest value, click the (26) "Re-load setting" button. To write
changed values to the CPU Unit, click the (27) "Write setting" button.
(22) Manual reset dis- Displays the output amount compensation value when integrated operation is OFF. This is en-
play area abled and can be changed only when the integration time is set to "0s". To display the latest
value, click the (26) "Re-load setting" button. To write changed values to the CPU Unit, click the
(27) "Write setting" button.
(23) Deadband display Displays the deadband in which heat output and cool output is not performed during heat/cool
area control.
(24) Operation status Displays the status of temperature control operation. Lights when temperature control is in op-
indicator eration.
When OFF: gray
When ON: green
(25) "Start operation" Clicking this button when its display is OFF starts temperature control operation. Clicking this
button button when its display is ON (auto-tuning in progress), stops temperature control operation.
(26) "Re-load setting" Updates all items currently displayed on the TF40 Unit Monitor and in the [Detailed view mode]
button window to values currently stored on the CPU Unit.
(27) "Write setting" Writes all setting values in the currently selected [Detailed view mode] window to the CPU Unit.
button (Note) While the [Detailed view mode] window is displayed, setting values that have been
changed in the [Detailed view mode] window are not written to the CPU Unit, and all items are
updated to the latest values currently stored on the CPU Unit. (Setting values in the process of
being changed are lost.) Also, writing on the Unit Editor is not possible while setting values are
being written on the ladder program.

7-138
 7-13 Batch Change

7-13 Batch Change

The batch change function batch-rewrites device values on the PLC and saves
them to file. This section describes how to operate the Batch Change window.

Displaying Batch Change

File (F) Batch Change (H)
The Batch Change function batch-reads a specified range of specified devices from
the PLC, changes the current values of the devices, and writes them back to the
PLC. It also saves the settings of devices that have been read from the PLC so that
these saved settings can be read later from file.
Perform batch changes by the following procedure.

1 Select {File (F)} {Batch Change (H)} from

Menu.
The Batch Change window is displayed.

Other procedure
7
Click the button.

MONITOR
[Tip]
• Two or more Batch Change windows can be displayed at the same time.
• The device type that is initially displayed in the Batch Change window is the
device that was selected when the Batch Change window was opened. If the
Batch Change window was opened without a device type selected, data
memory is displayed in the Batch Change window.

7-139
 7-13 Batch Change

2 Select the device to read on the dialog bar, and

click the "Reg" button.
All of the selected devices are read to the Batch
Change window.

"File read" button

Reads the text file of the
device contents that were
Change saved by batch change.
Changes the entire content of the "File write" button
devices in the selected range. Saves the content of devices
in the selected range to a
Enter the value. text file.
Device range "MMC read" button
Specifies the range of Reads the content of devices
devices to read. saved to Memory Card by
batch change.
Device "MMC write" button
Type and No. of device Saves the content of devices
in the selected range to
Memory Card.
Current value
Current value of device

7 Comment "PLC write" button

Displays comment if registered. Writes the content of devices
MONITOR

in the selected range to PLC.

"PLC read" button
Reads the content of devices
from PLC.

[Tip]
• You can move between items by the Tab key (forwards) and the Tab + Shift
keys (backwards).
• Clicking the "×" mark at the top right of the window closes the Batch Change
window.
• "NG" is displayed if an illegal setting value is entered.
• Only one continuous range can be read to a
single Batch Change window. Other ranges
cannot be read at the same time to the same
window. To read a different range, select {File
(F)} {Batch Change (H)} from Menu, open a new Batch Change window,
specify the range of devices on the dialog bar to register the devices, and read
the devices.
• Only the current values of timers and counters can be manipulated. Setting
values cannot be manipulated.

7-140
 7-13 Batch Change

Saving/Reading Batch Change Windows

Saving Batch Change windows
Save the currently displayed Batch Change window to file.

1 Make the Batch Change window you want to save the current window.

2 Select {File (F)} {Save window as... (A)}

from Menu.
The Save As dialog box is displayed.

3 Specify the folder (directory) to save the window to and the file name.

MONITOR
Specify the folder
(directory) to save to.

Specify the file name. Specify "Batch

change(*.kdv)" as the
file type.

Specify the folder (directory) to which the Batch Change window is to be saved. Normally,
Save in (I)
the project folder to which the currently monitored ladder is to be saved opens.
File name (N) Enter the name of the Batch Change window to be saved.
Save as type (T) Specify "Batch change (*.kdv)".

[Tip]
• The file is automatically appended with the extender ".kdv" when the file name
is set even if it is not specified when the file name is entered.
• All values of devices selected in a Batch Change window saved to file are
saved regardless of the specified range of devices.

4 Click the "Save" button.

This saves the Batch Change window.

7-141
 7-13 Batch Change

Reading Batch Change windows

Read Batch Change windows saved to file.

1 Select {File (F)} {Open window (O)} from

Menu.
The Open dialog box is displayed.

2 Select "Batch change (*.kdv)" from the File type pulldown list.

7
MONITOR

3 Specify the folder (directory) to read the file from and the file name.

Specify the folder

(directory) containing
the file to read.

Specify the file name. Make sure that the file

type is "Batch
change(*.kdv)."

Specify the folder (directory) to which the Batch Change window is saved. Normally, the
Look in (I)
project folder to which the currently monitored ladder is to be saved opens.
File name (N) Enter the name of the Batch Change window to be read.
Files of type (T) Specify "Batch change (*.kdv)".

4 Click the "Open" button.

This opens the Batch Change window.

7-142
 7-13 Batch Change

Writing/Reading Devices to and from PLCs

Writing devices to PLC
Write device values in the Batch Change window to the PLC.

Note: This item cannot be used if you have specified a device that cannot be
written to the PLC.

1 Enter the range of devices to write

in the "Device rng" fields.

[Tip]
You can also specify the range of
devices to write by dragging with the
mouse.

2 Click the "Wr PLC" button.

The devices in the specified range are written.
7

MONITOR
Important: • Only one continuous range can be written to a PLC. Other ranges
cannot be written at the same time to the PLC. To write a different
range, specify the range again, and write that specified range, or
open another Batch Window and write the devices in that window.
• Writing to a PLC takes longer than reading from a PLC.

Reading devices from PLC

Read the values of devices on the PLC to the Batch Change window.

1 Enter the range of devices to read

in the "Device rng" fields.

[Tip]
You can also specify the range of
devices to read by dragging with the
mouse.

2 Click the "Rd PLC" button.

The data of the specified devices is read from the
PLC and displayed in the Batch Change window.

[Tip]
In this state, you can use the dialog bar to change attributes (radix, bit values
and comments).
"Changing Current Value/Setting Value/Attributes" page 7-56

7-143
 7-13 Batch Change

Saving/Reading Devices from and to Files

Saving device values to file
Save device values in the Batch Change window to file.

1 Enter the range of devices to save

in the "Device rng" fields.

[Tip]
You can also specify the range of
devices to save by dragging with the
mouse.

2 Click the "Wr File" button.

The Save As dialog box is
displayed.

7
3 Specify the folder (directory) to save the window to and the file name.
MONITOR

Specify the folder

(directory) to save to.

Specify "Text
Specify the file name. file(*.txt)" or "Comma
delimited file(*.csv)"
as the file type.

Specify the folder (directory) to which the device value file is to be saved. Normally, the
Save in (I)
project folder to which the currently monitored ladder is to be saved opens.
File name (N) Enter the name of the device value file to be saved.
To save in text format, specify "Text file (*.txt)", and to save in table format, specify "Comma
Save as type (T)
delimited file (*.csv)".

4 Click the "Save" button.

This saves the device values to file.

7-144
 7-13 Batch Change

„ Printing saved device values

Print saved device values.

1 When device values have

been saved in text format,
text files (*.txt) are read
from the Windows memo
pad, Editor or word
processing software.
When device values have
been saved in tabulated
format, CSV files (*.csv) are
read in EXCEL or other
spreadsheet software.

[Tip]
If you use EXCEL or other spreadsheet software, device values can be further
edited to create graphs.
7
2 Execute printing in the software that was used for

MONITOR
reading the file.

A list of devices is printed.

7-145
 7-13 Batch Change

Reading device values from files

Read files containing saved device values to the Batch Change window.

1 Click the "Rd File" button.

The Open dialog box is
displayed.

2 Specify the folder (directory)

to read the device values from and the file name.

Specify the folder

(directory) containing
the file to read.

Specify "Text
Specify the file name. file(*.txt)" or "Comma

7 delimited file(*.csv)"
as the file type.
MONITOR

Specify the folder (directory) to which the device value file is saved. Normally, the project
Look in (I)
folder to which the currently monitored ladder is to be saved opens.
File name (N) Enter the name of the device value file to be read.
To read in text format, specify "Text file (*.txt)", and to read in table format, specify "Comma
Files of type (T)
delimited file (*.csv)".

3 Click the "Open" button.

This reads saved device values.

7-146
 7-13 Batch Change

Saving/Reading Devices Values to Memory Card

Saving devices values to Memory Card
Save device values in the Batch Change window to Memory Card.
Note: • Device values can be saved to Memory Card only when "KV-700" or
"KV-700+M" is selected at the PLC type setting.
• Only relays, control relays, DMs and CMs can be saved to Memory Card.
Other devices cannot be used even if selected.

1 Enter the range of devices to save

in the "Device rng" fields.

[Tip]
You can also specify the range of
devices to save by dragging with the
mouse.

2 Click the "Wr MMC" button.

The Memory Card dialog box is displayed.
7

MONITOR
3 Specify the folder to save device values to.

Select the drive assigned to

Memory Card.
Create new folder.

Displays the type of files

Select the folder (directory) and devices currently saved
to save data to. to the selected folder.
Files and devices whose
display is active already
exist in the folder.

[Tip]
• To save device values to a new folder, click the "New"
button, and enter the folder name. This creates a new
project folder.

• The Memory Card dialog box

displays the types of devices
and files currently saved to
the selected folder. This
information is displayed using the following abbreviations:
UNIT: Unit setting information
PROG: Ladder program
CMT: Device comments
CPUM: CPU positioning function parameter file
DM: DM values
CM: CM values
R: Relay ON/OFF states
CR: Control relay ON/OFF states

7-147
 7-13 Batch Change

4 Click the "OK" button.

The data of the device range specified in the Batch Change window is saved to
Memory Card.
Note: If you save the same type of device data to a folder already containing
device data, the device data in that folder will be overwritten with the data
you are about to save. To prevent this, either specify a different folder, or
create a new folder.

Reading device values from Memory Card

Read files from Memory Card containing saved device values to the Batch Change
window.
Note: • Device values can be read from Memory Card only when "KV-700" or
"KV-700+M" is selected at the PLC type setting.
• Only relays, control relays, DMs and CMs can be read from Memory
Card. Other devices cannot be used even if selected.

Specify the type of device to read in the "Device range" field.

[Tip]
You can also specify the range of devices to read by dragging-and-dropping with
the mouse.

7 1 Click the "Rd MMC" button.

The Memory Card dialog box is displayed.
MONITOR

2 Specify the folder to read.

Select the drive assigned to

Select the folder (directory) Memory Card.
to read data from.

Displays the type of files

and devices currently saved
to the selected folder.

[Tip]
• The Memory Card dialog box
displays the types of devices
and files currently saved to
the selected folder. This
information is displayed using the following abbreviations:
UNIT: Unit setting information
PROG: Ladder program
CMT: Device comments
CPUM: CPU positioning function parameter file
DM: DM values
CM: CM values
R: Relay ON/OFF states
CR: Control relay ON/OFF states

3 Click the "OK" button.

This reads device values from Memory Card.

7-148
 7-14 Online Edit Functions

7-14 Online Edit Functions

This section describes the online edit functions for changing the KV-700 ladder
program during monitoring.

Outline of Functions
Online edit functions allow you to change the ladder program directly on the KV
BUILDER monitor screen. These handy functions allow you to change simple
programs or perform site adjustment during final debugging during programming.

Important: Online edit functions can be used only when "KV-700" or "KV-700+M"
is selected as the model type.

Online Edit Features

The features of online edit are as follows:

• The ON/OFF states of devices and changes in values can be checked in real time
in the same way as the monitor screen even during while in online edit.
→ Debugging while checking the operating status of devices is possible in real
7
time.

MONITOR
• Edit locations are displayed in light blue so that you can instantly check which cell
has been corrected.
→ Changes can be performed easily, for example, if devices are found not to be
operating normally as a result of a change.
• All screens can be edited while in online edit.
→ Even when setting interlocks to two or more circuits, editing is possible as if
you are in the Editor mode without switching the edit circuit.

Cautions Upon Using the Online Edit Function

As the online edit function changes program while the PLC is in the Run mode,
equipment may be seriously damaged or personnel may be seriously injured if
online edit is used in the wrong way. Thoroughly check the following points to
ensure correct used of this function:
• Before using online edit, thoroughly check the peripheral equipment, and use in a
state that will prevent physical injury or damage if equipment operate
unexpectedly.
• Do not add circuits (e.g. execution condition B contact circuits) that operate
immediately after a program is transferred. Doing so might cause equipment to
run away.
• Do not delete outputs that are ON. Doing so might cause hold the output in an ON
state.

7-149
 7-14 Online Edit Functions

Important: • Online edit functions cannot be used while Monitors are stopped.
• If a Monitor is forcibly ended due to a personal computer error
during online editing or transfer of the ladder program, ladder
programs that have not been transferred to the main unit are
discarded.
• When a rewrite is made in the Run mode, device comments are not
transferred.
• Some of the shortcut key assignments changes from those in the
Monitor mode.
• The ON/OFF states and values of devices currently monitored
during online editing, are displayed based on the ladder program
(program currently running on KV-700) before online editing was
started. Up till transfer, operation is such that program states
currently being edited by online editing are not reflected. To run on a
program after adding or changing by online editing, transfer must be
performed.

Starting/Editing Online Edit

Online Edit (O) Start (S) F10

Start up online edit on the monitor screen.

7 1 Select {Online Edit (O)} {Start (S)} from Menu.
MONITOR

The title bar on the ladder

program window changes to
"Ladder Monitor Online edit
in progress" from "Ladder
Monitor" to indicate that
online edit is active.

Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the F10 key.
[Tip]
Even during online editing, the ON/OFF states and values of devices continue to
be monitored in real time.

2 Edit the ladder program.

Edit the ladder program in the same way as in the Editor mode.
"Chapter 6 Editor" page 6-1

The background of added or changed cells is displayed in light blue to indicate

that the program has been changed.
"Setting Clearing of Program Change Display" page 7-154

7-150
 7-14 Online Edit Functions

Available edit functions are restricted in the Online Edit mode.

The following table shows the functions that are available in the Editor mode and
Online Edit mode.

Online
Menu Item Editor
Editing
Edit Undo, Redo { {
Instruction input { {
CPU positioning instruction { {
Instruction palette/Change operand { {
Cut, Copy, Paste { {
Insert free rung { {
Delete rung { {
Edit connecting line { ×
Edit list { ×
Comment Edit comment/label { ×
Edit rung comment { {
Rung comment set/release { {
Read other file comments { × 7
Read/save comments in text format { ×
{ ×

MONITOR
Change label
Change comment { {
Comment move setup { ×
Find/Replace Jump { {
Jump to change block × {
Find { {
Replace operand, Replace range { ×
NO/NC { ×
Use status { {
Convert Convert { ×
Redundant coil check { ×
Clear invalid operands { ×
Error display { ×
View Instruction palette { {
Circuit library { {
Tools Extended ladder mode { {
Unit Editor { ×
Unit Viewer { {
Edit CPU positioning parameters { {
MOTION BUILDER (Japanese)/PROTOCOL BUILDER  
(Japanese)
Help Editor Help { {

7-151
 7-14 Online Edit Functions

Transferring the Ladder Programs

Online Edit (O) Transfer (T) F11

Transfer the ladder program edited by online editing to the main unit.

1 Select {Online Edit

(O)} {Transfer (T)}
from Menu.
This executes
conversion of the
ladder program.
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the F11 key.
[Tip]
• If an error occurs in the program during program
conversion, the message "Conversion error" is
displayed, the error dialog box is displayed, and
transfer is discontinued. Check the error details, correct
the program, and execute program transfer again.
7 "Displaying errors" page 6-142
• If conversion does not end successfully, the message "Conversion error.
MONITOR

Cannot transfer." is displayed. Click the "OK" button to display a list of errors.
Eliminate the cause of the error, and execute program transfer again.

2 Specify the details in the program to transfer and the transfer mode.
This displays the Move Program
dialog box. Specify the items to
transfer to the PC main unit. If the
PLC main unit is in the Run mode,
select whether to transfer in the
Program mode or to write while in the
Run mode.
• "Move in program mode"
checkbox not marked
The ladder program and CPU
positioning parameters are written
with the PLC in the Run mode. Unit setup information and contact comments
cannot be transferred. Until writing ends, the program before transfer
continues to be executed.
• "Move in program mode" checkbox marked
PLC operation is stopped, and the program is written in the Program mode.

When writing in the Run mode, serious danger may occur

depending on the state of the controller connected to the
PLC. Take particular care with this.
3 When transfer ends successfully, the Monitor screen is redisplayed.
The display at the top left of the window changes to "Ladder Monitor" from
"Ladder Monitor Online edit in progress", and the Monitor is started.

7-152
 7-14 Online Edit Functions

Stopping Online Editing

Cancel online editing and return to the Monitor or Editor.

Stopping online editing and returning to a Monitor

Online Edit (O) Cancel (C) Shift + F11

Stop online editing and return to a Monitor.

1 Select {Online Edit (O)} {Cancel (C)} from Menu.

The confirmation
dialog box is
displayed.

Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Shift + F11 keys.
7
2

MONITOR
Click the "OK" button.
The edited details are discarded, and the Monitor
screen is redisplayed.
To continue online editing without canceling the
current task, click the "Cancel" button.

Stopping online editing and returning to the Editor

File (F) Return to Editor (E) Ctrl + F1
Stop online editing and return to the Editor.

1 Select {File (F)} {Return to Editor (E)} from Menu.

The Editor screen is redisplayed. Details
currently being edited are carried over as they
are.

Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + F1 keys.

7-153
 7-14 Online Edit Functions

Setting Clearing of Program Change Display

Online Edit (O) Settings (S) F12

The background color of cells added or changed by online editing is displayed in

light blue to indicate that the program has been changed. Set the timing that this
program change display is automatically cleared.

1 Select {Online Edit (O)} {Settings (T)} from Menu.

The Online
Edit Setup
dialog box is
displayed.

Other procedure
Press the F12 key.

2 Select the timing to clear the background color for the program change
7 display.
The background color is cleared at the timing of the item whose checkbox you
MONITOR

marked.

Item Description
Auto (monitor → Online Edit) Clear the change background color when the
monitoring state is switched to online editing.
Auto (monitor → Editor) Clear the change background color when the
monitoring state is switched to the Editor.

Note: If a checkbox is not marked, the background color for the program change
display is not cleared. For this reason, manually clear the background color.
To manually clear the background color, select {View (V)} {Clear back
color of changes (U)}.
"Clearing the Background Color in Program Change Display" page 7-155

3 When you have finished the setting, click the "OK" button.
This closes the Set Online Edit Setup dialog box.

7-154
 7-14 Online Edit Functions

Clearing the Background Color in Program Change Display

View (V) Clear back color of changes (U)

The background color of cells added or changed by online editing is displayed in

light blue to indicate that the program has been changed. This items clears this
program change display.

Note: When automatic clear is set in the online editing settings, the background
color is automatically cleared to the program change display. To set
automatic clear, select {Online Edit (O)} {Settings (S)} from Menu.
"Setting Clearing of Program Change Display" page 7-154

1 Select {View (V)} {Clear back color of changes (U)} from Menu.
This clears the background color for the program change display.

MONITOR

7-155
Chapter 8
SIMULATOR
This chapter describes the functions of Simulator, and how to use Simulator,
Ladder Monitor, Batch Monitor and Registration Monitor.

8-1 Outline of Simulator Functions ........................................ 8-2

8-2 Outline of Tool Bar Functions........................................... 8-7

8-3 Outline of Menu Functions................................................ 8-8

8-4 Starting Up and Exiting Simulator.................................. 8-14

8-5 Executing Simulator ........................................................ 8-16

8-6 Ladder Monitor................................................................. 8-29

8-7 Batch Monitor................................................................... 8-48

8-8 Registration Monitor........................................................ 8-59

 8-1 Outline of Simulator Functions

8-1 Outline of Simulator Functions

This section outlines Simulator functions and precautions when using Simulator

Outline of Functions
"Simulator" simulates operation of ladder programs you create on Editor without
actually connecting to a PLC.
Simulator enables you to perform the following operations:

• Confirm the operating state of programs in the Ladder Monitor or

Registration Monitor as time charts or in real time in the Batch Monitor
• Simulate continuous scan/continuous step or single step/single scan by
various execution modes
• Undo functions such as reverse step and reverse continuous step are
available to enable efficient debugging
• Easily change the setting values or current values of timer, counters or
devices
• Forcibly set or reset contacts

Simulator Restrictions
8 Common restrictions
• The high-speed counter is not supported on Simulator.
SIMULATOR

• The direct clock pulse function is not supported on Simulator.

• The positioning control function is not supported on Simulator.
• Operation of the interrupt program is subject to the following restrictions:

INT CTC0 to INT CTC3 Interrupt program does not run.

INT 0000 to INT 0003 The interrupt program is executed at the start of a scan.
The timing edge is switched by 2206 ON/OFF. During switching, TM30 is not
INT 0003
swapped with the current value of CTH1.

• The scan time is longer than in actual operation as simulation is performed on

Windows. Pay attention to this point when setting times on timers.
• The cycle time display varies slightly according to the type of PC even when
running the same ladder program as the same operation as the PLC is simulated
internally on the PC you are using.

8-2
 8-1 Outline of Simulator Functions

Restrictions when using KV-10/16/24/40 and KZ-300/350

„ Special devices supported by Simulator
The table below summarizes the special auxiliary relays supported by Simulator.

Special auxiliary relays

Relay No. Function

2002 Always ON
2003 Always OFF
2004 0.01sec clock pulse (duty 50%)
2005 0.1sec clock pulse (duty 50%)
2006 1.0sec clock pulse (duty 50%)
2007 OFF for 1 scan only at start of operation
2008 ON for 1 scan only at start of operation
2009 ON when the result of arithmetic operation is a negative value or overflow
2010 ON when the result of arithmetic operation is "0"
2011 ON when the result of arithmetic operation is a plus value
2012 ON when the result of arithmetic operation is an error
Rising edge Falling edge Both edges
2402*
INT0 interrupt polarity 2402 OFF ON OFF ON
2403
2403 OFF OFF ON ON
Rising edge Falling edge Both edges 8
2404*
INT1 interrupt polarity 2404 OFF ON OFF ON

SIMULATOR
2405
2405 OFF OFF ON ON
Rising edge Falling edge Both edges
2410*
INT2 interrupt polarity 2410 OFF ON OFF ON
2411
2411 OFF OFF ON ON
Rising edge Falling edge Both edges
2412*
INT3 interrupt polarity 2412 OFF ON OFF ON
2413
2413 OFF OFF ON ON
* Supported only when KV-10/16/24/40 is used

8-3
 8-1 Outline of Simulator Functions

„ Device states when Simulator is stopped

Stopping operation on Simulator is the equivalent of switching from the Run to
the Prog mode on an actual PLC. Each of the devices operate as follows when
Simulator is stopped.
Device State
2002: ON
2003 to 2008: State held
*1
Relay 1000 to 1915: Depending on MEMSW setting
*1
3000 to 6915: Depending on MEMSW setting
Other: OFF
DM State held
TM 0
Contact: OFF
T Registered items: Current value is same as setting value.
Unregistered items: Current value 0
C Contact and current value held
CTH State held
CTC State held
*1 For details on the MEMSW setting, refer to the "KV Series User's Manual."

8 „ Device states when operation is reset

Resetting Simulator clears all devices.
SIMULATOR

Each of the devices operate as follows when Simulator is reset.

Device State
2002： ON
Relay
Other： OFF
DM 0
TM 0
Contact: OFF
T Registered items: Current value is same as setting value.
Unregistered items: Current value 0
Contact: OFF
C
Current value: 0
CTH State held
CTC State held

8-4
 8-1 Outline of Simulator Functions

Restrictions when KV-700 is used

„ Special devices supported by Simulator
The following table shows the control relays and control memory that are
supported on Simulator.

Supported control relays (CR)

Device State
CR2002 Always ON
CR2003 Always OFF
CR2004 10ms clock pulse (duty 50%)
CR2005 100ms clock pulse (duty 50%)
CR2006 1s clock pulse (duty 50%)
CR2007 OFF for 1 scan only at start of operation
CR2008 ON for 1 scan only at start of operation
CR2009 ON when the result of arithmetic operation is a negative value or overflow
CR2010 ON when the result of arithmetic operation is "0"
CR2011 ON when the result of arithmetic operation is a plus value
CR2012 ON when the result of arithmetic operation is an error
Rising edge Falling edge Both edges
CR2402
INT0 interrupt polarity CR2402 OFF ON OFF ON
CR2403
CR2403 OFF OFF ON ON 8
Rising edge Falling edge Both edges
CR2404

SIMULATOR
INT1 interrupt polarity CR2404 OFF ON OFF ON
CR2405
CR2405 OFF OFF ON ON
Rising edge Falling edge Both edges
CR2410
INT2 interrupt polarity CR2410 OFF ON OFF ON
CR2411
CR2411 OFF OFF ON ON
Rising edge Falling edge Both edges
CR2412
INT3 interrupt polarity CR2412 OFF ON OFF ON
CR2413
CR2413 OFF OFF ON ON
CR3502 Zero suppress setting of DASC instruction
CR3503 + signed abbreviated setting of DASC instruction
* CR devices other than the above are the same as internal auxiliary relays on the Simulator.

Supported control memory (CM)

Simulator supports the same CM as DM.

8-5
 8-1 Outline of Simulator Functions

„ Device states when Simulator is stopped

Stopping operation on Simulator is the equivalent of switching from the Run to
the Prog mode on an actual PLC. Each of the devices operate as follows when
Simulator is stopped.
Device State
*1
Relay Depending on MEMSW setting
CR2002: ON
CR CR2003 to CR2008: State held
Other: OFF
DM State held
CM State held
TM 0
Contact: OFF
T Registered items: Current value is same as setting value.
Unregistered items: Current value 0
C Contact and current value held
CTH State held
CTC State held
*1 For details on the MEMSW setting, refer to the "KV-700 Series Instruction Reference Manual."

„ Device states when operation is reset

8 Resetting Simulator clears all devices.
Each of the devices operate as follows when Simulator is reset.
SIMULATOR

Device State
Relay OFF
CR2002: ON
CR
Other: OFF
DM 0
CM 0
TM 0
Contact: OFF
T Registered items: Current value is same as setting value.
Unregistered items: Current value 0
Contact: OFF
C
Current value: 0
CTH Current value: 0
CTC Contact: OFF

8-6
 8-2 Outline of Tool Bar Functions

8-2 Outline of Tool Bar Functions

This section lists the functions displayed on the tool bar on the Simulator. For a
detailed description of each function, see the page indicated for each function.

Standard
The following table lists icons displayed on the tool bar that visually represent
frequently performed operations on Simulator.

Icon Name Function See page

Return to Editor Exits the Simulator and returns to the Editor screen. 8-15

Display at bottom of Displays the Ladder Monitor at the bottom of the screen regardless of
8-36
Ladder Monitor display/hide state.
Ladder Monitor Opens the Ladder Monitor window. 8-29

Registration Monitor Opens the Registration Monitor window. 8-59

Batch Monitor Opens the Batch Monitor window. 8-48

Enlarge display Enlarges the display ratio of the ladder diagram. 8-31

Reduce display Reduces the display ratio of the ladder diagram. 8-31

Execute reverse
continuous scan
Continuously performs step execution in the reverse direction. 8-26
8
Execute reverse single
Executes one program step (one instruction) in the reverse direction. 8-26
step

SIMULATOR
Execute single step Executes one program step (one instruction). 8-23

Execute continuous
Continuously performs step execution. 8-24
scan
High-speed step
Performs step execution instantaneously to the specified step. 8-25
execution
Pause Pauses Simulator operation. (PAUSE) 8-28

Stop Stops Simulator operation. (PROGRAM) 8-28

Execute single scan Executes the program for one scan. 8-17

Execute continuous
Executes the program continuously. (RUN) 8-16
scan
Break conditions Sets stop conditions for continuous scan/continuous stop execution. 8-18

Scan time Sets the scan time. 8-21

Wait time Sets the operation wait time. 8-20

Set time chart Sets the number of graduations in the time chart display on the
8-75
graduations Simulator.
Reset Resets all devices on the Simulator. 8-28

Help Displays Help for how to operate KV BUILDER. 1-50

8-7
 8-3 Outline of Menu Functions

8-3 Outline of Menu Functions

This section lists the functions displayed on Simulator menus. For a detailed
description of each function, see the page indicated for each function.

File
This menu groups file operations and printing related items.

8 Ladder Monitor
Item
Opens the Ladder Monitor window.
Function See page
8-29
Registration Monitor Opens the Registration Monitor window. 8-59
SIMULATOR

Batch Monitor Opens the Batch Monitor window. 8-48

Opens the window of each of the already saved Registration Monitor, 8-53
Open window
Batch Monitor. 8-64
8-52
Save window Saves the currently active window.
8-63
8-52
Save window as Saves the currently active window under a new name.
8-63
Print Prints the currently active Registration Monitor window. 8-77
Displays a preview of the currently active Registration Monitor
Print preview 8-76
window.
Printer setup Sets the print to print from. 8-76
Return to Editor Exits the Simulator and returns to the Editor screen. 8-15

8-8
 8-3 Outline of Menu Functions

Search
This menu groups search items on the Ladder Monitor.

Item Function See page

Rung/step No. Moves the cursor to the specified rung or step. 8-40
Top Moves the cursor to the top rung of the ladder file. 8-41
End Moves the cursor to the end rung of the ladder file. 8-41
Moves the cursor to the circuit block before the current cursor
Previous block 8-42
position.
Moves the cursor to the circuit block following the current cursor
8
Jump

Next block 8-42

position.
Previous symbol Moves to the symbol before the current cursor position. 8-43

SIMULATOR
Next symbol Moves to the symbol following the current cursor position. 8-43
Moves the cursor to the start of the rung at the current cursor
Top of rung 8-44
position.
Moves the cursor to the end of the rung at the current cursor
End of rung 8-44
position.
Find Opens the Find dialog box for searching for devices. 8-45

8-9
 8-3 Outline of Menu Functions

Run
This menu groups items relating to operations on Simulator.

Item Function See page

Cont scan Executes the program continuously. (RUN) 8-16

8 1 scan
Cont step
Executes the program for one scan.
Continuously performs step execution.
8-17
8-24
1 step Executes one program step (one instruction). 8-23
SIMULATOR

High-speed step Performs step execution instantaneously to the specified step. 8-25
Back cont step Continuously performs step execution in the reverse direction. 8-26
Back 1 step Executes one program step (one instruction) in the reverse direction. 8-26
Pause Pauses Simulator operation. (PAUSE) 8-28
Stop Stops Simulator operation. (PROGRAM) 8-28
Reset Resets all devices on the Simulator. 8-28
Clear all DMs Clears all currently held DM (data memory) values to "0". 8-47
Clear all
devices

Clear all hold relays Clears all relays currently held at a power interruption to "0". 8-47
Clear all counters Clears all currently values of currently held counters to "0". 8-47

8-10
 8-3 Outline of Menu Functions

Settings
This menu groups the various settings on Simulator.

Item Function See page

Break
conditions
Set break

Registers the device to be used in the break condition. 8-18

conditions
Sets the break execution condition by the OR condition of the registered
OR conditions 8-18
device.
Delete break conditions Deletes the device to be used by the registered break condition. 8-19
Copy device Copies the device attributes at the current cursor position in the Registration
8-68
attributes Monitor.
Registration

Sort devices Sorts the registered devices on the Registration Monitor. 8-71
monitor

Deletes devices at the current cursor position in the Registration Monitor

Delete device
from the Registration Monitor.
8-70
8
Time chart scale Changes the number of gradations in the time chart in the Registration
8-75

SIMULATOR
setup Monitor.
Resets the registered devices on the Batch Monitor or Registration Monitor
Reset devices in monitors 8-72
to their defaults.
Wait time Sets the operation wait time. 8-20
Scan time Sets the scan time. 8-21
Watchdog timer Sets the watchdog timer. 8-22

8-11
 8-3 Outline of Menu Functions

View
This menu groups items that are used when creating ladder diagrams.

Important "Devices for units" can be used only when "KV-700" or "KV-700+M" is
selected at the PLC type setting.

Item Function See page

Toolbar Displays the tool bar. 8-35
Dialog bar Displays the dialog bar. 8-35
8 Status bar Displays the status bar. 8-35
View mode Sets the display items in the edit screen. 8-32
SIMULATOR

Ladder at bottom Displays the Ladder Monitor window always at the bottom. 8-36
Enlarge Enlarges the ladder display ratio. 8-31
Reduce Reduces the ladder display ratio. 8-31
Label Displays devices in the ladder program as labels. 8-34
Comment Displays devices in the ladder program with device comments. 8-34
Device for units Displays devices in the ladder program in device for unit annotation. 8-33

Window
This menu groups items relating to display of the ladder window.

Item Function See page

Cascade Cascades opened edit windows. 
Side by side Displays opened edit windows side by side. 
Align icons Cleans up minimized edit windows. 
1 Ladder Monitor (open Selects the window to set as the active window when two or more monitor

Monitor window) windows are opened.

8-12
 8-3 Outline of Menu Functions

Help
This menu groups Help such as how to operate KV BUILDER and how to use
instructions.

Item Function See page

About Displays the KV BUILDER version information. —
Operation method Displays Help for how to operate KV BUILDER. 1-50
Shortcut list Displays a list of shortcut keys available on KV BUILDER. A-74
Displays instructions available on KV-10/16/24/40, KV-700 and
Instructions A-16
KZ-300/350, and explanations of these instructions.
User's Manual Displays the KV BUILDER User's Manual. 1-50

SIMULATOR

8-13
 8-4 Starting Up and Exiting Simulator

8-4 Starting Up and Exiting Simulator

This section describes how to start up Simulator, how to view screens that are
displayed in Simulator, and the functions of each screen.

Starting Up and Exiting Simulator

Starting up Simulator
Monitor/Simulator (M) Simulator (S) Ctrl + F2
Start up Simulator by the following procedure.

1 Display the ladder program to be simulated in the Editor, and make it the
current window.

8
2 Select {Monitor/Simulator (M)} {Simulator (S)} from Menu.
SIMULATOR

This displays the Simulator screen and the ladder program that was displayed
on Unit Editor.

Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + F2 keys.

Note: Simulator will not start if a conversion error occurs. Correct the erroneous
section of the ladder program to eliminate the conversion error, and restart
Simulator.
"Displaying Errors" page 6-142

[Tip]
When Simulator is run on a previously executed ladder program, Simulator starts
up in the previous window display state.

8-14
 8-4 Starting Up and Exiting Simulator

Exiting Simulator
File (F) Return to Editor (E) Ctrl + F1
Exit Simulator and return to Unit Editor.
When Simulator has been executed again to clear device values and return to Unit
Editor, Simulator settings are returned to their defaults.

1 Select {File (F)} {Return to Editor (E)} from Menu.

Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + F1 keys.

Names of Screen Parts and Functions

When Simulator is started up, the Ladder Monitor window for the ladder program
that was being edited on Unit Editor is displayed. The Batch Monitor window and
Registration Monitor window are also displayed if these monitor windows were
previously displayed. There are also two other windows, the mnemonic window and
break condition window, each of which can be selected from menus.

Main window title bar

8
Displays the name of the ladder program file
Main window

SIMULATOR
currently being simulated.
Overall Simulator screen
Menu bar
Displays the menu for
executing commands.
Ladder Monitor window
page 8-29
Toolbar
The toolbar contains
Batch Monitor window
buttons for executing
page 8-48
instructions. Only
frequently used
instructions are Registration Monitor window
provided on this page 8-59
toolbar. Clicking a
button executes the
instruction.

Dialog bar Status display bar

On this bar, you can register devices, Displays an explanation of the currently selected
substitute devices and setting values, reset functions and the Monitor operating status.
timers/counters, and perform other
operations.

The following describes the names of parts of each window and their functions.
• Ladder Monitor window page 8-29
• Batch Monitor window page 8-48
• Registration Monitor window page 8-59

8-15
 8-5 Executing Simulator

8-5 Executing Simulator

This section describes how to execute Simulator.

Scan Execution
This section describes scan execution.

Outline of scan execution function

"Scan execution" refers to executing a program in single scans (cycles) at a time
from initialization through to end processing.
There are two scan execution modes, "continuous scan execution" and "1 scan
execution." Of these, "continuous scan execution" is the same operation as "RUN"
on a Monitor program.
The scan time or watchdog timers can be set, and current values or setting values
can be changed.

Continuous scan execution

Run (P) Cont Scan (J) F5

Execute the program continuously.

The same state as if the PLC is in the Run mode is entered. Continuous scan
8 execution is used for regular debugging of ladder programs.
SIMULATOR

8-16
 8-5 Executing Simulator

Execute continuous scan by the following procedure.

1 Select {Run (P)} {Cont Scan (J)}

from Menu.
The operating status is displayed in the
Ladder Monitor window.
"Ladder Monitor window" page 8-29

Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the F5 key.

Executing Single Scan

Run (P) 1 scan (T) F9

Executes the program for one scan only. When single scan execution is performed
when a continuous scan is executed, operation is paused.
Executing a single scan enables you to check operation involving detailed operation
so that ladder functions can be checked the moment that specific relays turn ON.

SIMULATOR
Execute a single scan by the following procedure.

1 Select {Run (P)} {1 scan (T)} from

Menu.
"Ladder Monitor window" page 8-29

Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the F9 key.

Important: • If single scan operation is performed during step execution, the

program is executed from the current step up to the step to which
END or ENDH is programmed.
• If a scan is executed, reverse step execution no longer functions.
"Back 1 step execution" "Execute back continuous step" page 8-26

8-17
 8-5 Executing Simulator

Setting Break Conditions

Settings (R) Set break conditions (B) Break conditions (B)
OR conditions (O)
A "break condition" is a condition used for stopping ladder program execution during
continuous scan or continuous step execution. You can specify a break condition for
each device. Setting break conditions in this way is used for partially confirming
operating states and for debugging ladder programs. Operation can be checked
faster if breaks are used together with the step execution function.
Set break conditions by the following procedure.

1 Select {Settings (R)} {Set

break conditions (B)}
{Break conditions (B)} from
Menu.
The Register break conditions dialog box and break conditions window are
displayed.
Other procedure
Click the button.

AND and OR conditions can be set. The default break condition is OR. To set an
AND condition, first select {OR conditions (O)} to unmark the OR condition.

[Tip]
AND and OR conditions can also be selected from the
8 shortcut menu. To display this menu, click on the break
condition window with the right mouse button.
SIMULATOR

2 When the device to set a

break condition to is a bit
device, select "Bit". When
it is a word device, select
"Word".
3 Specify the device name and break condition. When the device is a word
device, specify the break condition by calculating comparison.

Bit devices
Device name Specifies the device name.
ON Takes contact ON as the break condition.
Conditions
OFF Takes contact OFF as the break condition.

Word devices
Device name Specifies two device names.
Takes "righthand device greater than lefthand
＜
device" as the break condition.
Takes "lefthand device equal to righthand device"
＝
as the break condition.
Compare Takes "lefthand device greater than righthand
＞
conditions device" as the break condition.
Takes "righthand device greater than and equal
≦
to lefthand device" as the break condition.
Takes "lefthand device greater than and equal to
≧
righthand device" as the break condition.

8-18
 8-5 Executing Simulator

4 Click the "Register" button.

The break conditions that you specified are registered, and are displayed in the
break conditions window.

Displays the content in the break

conditions window.

Closes the Register break conditions

dialog box.

5 To set multiple break conditions, repeat steps 2 to 4.

6 When you finished registering all break conditions, click the "End"
button.
The Register break conditions dialog box is closed.

When ladder program execution is stopped by a break

condition, the rungs that satisfy the break conditions are
displayed inverted in red when OR conditions are set. All
rungs are displayed inverted in red when AND conditions
are set.

Changing and deleting registered details

All registered break conditions are displayed in the break conditions window.
Registered break conditions can be changed or deleted from this window.
8
„ Changing registered break conditions

SIMULATOR
Settings (R) Delete break conditions (B)
1 Move the cursor to the break condition to set and double-click.
The Register/change break conditions dialog box is displayed.

2 Set the new

break condition,
and click the
"Change"
button.
This changes the
break condition of the rung where the cursor is located.

[Tip]
New break conditions can be registered by clicking the "Register" button.

„ Deleting registered break conditions

Delete registered break conditions by the following procedure.

1 Select the break condition to be deleted with the

cursor, click the right mouse button, and select
[Delete] from the menu that is displayed.

Other procedure
• Move the cursor to the break condition to be deleted, and select {Settings (R)}
{Delete break conditions (B)} from the menu.
• Move the cursor to the break condition to be deleted, and press the Delete key.

8-19
 8-5 Executing Simulator

Setting the wait time

Settings (R) Wait time (W)
Set the time that a wait is to be applied during scan execution.
Waits can be set on all operations in Simulator, and wait time settings can be
changed, for example, to adjust the execution speed of the ladder program if it is too
fast or too slow.

Set the wait time by the following procedure.

1 Select {Settings (R)} {Wait

time (W)} from Menu.
The Wait Time dialog box is
displayed.

Other procedure
Click the button.

2 Set the wait time within the range 0 to 10000 ms. (Default is 90 ms.)

8
Set the wait time.
SIMULATOR

Discards the setting and closes the

dialog box.

3 Click the "OK" button.

This sets the wait time.

8-20
 8-5 Executing Simulator

Setting the scan time

Settings (R) Scan time (S)
Set the scan execution and step execution time.
Normally, scan execution is performed using the value calculated by the actual scan
time of the PC. Setting a time value (fixed scan time) virtually fixed using the scan
time function allows you to check timing closer to actual operation. (only values
virtually fixed during step execution)
Set the scan time by the following procedure.

1 Select {Settings (R)} {Scan

time (S)} from Menu.
The Scan Time dialog box is
displayed.

Other procedure
Click the button.

2 Set the scan time within the range 0 to 5000 msec.

Mark the [Fixed scan]

8
checkbox to set a fixed scan.

SIMULATOR
Set the scan time.

Discards the setting and

closes the dialog box.

Note: The value set at Scan time is not enabled when the Fixed scan checkbox is
not marked.

[Tip]
Default is 10 msec during step execution. During scan execution, the scan time
is the actual time that it takes to perform scan execution.

3 Click the "OK" button.

This sets the scan time.

„ About fixed scan

Normally, the scan time during Simulator execution varies according to the
performance of the PC. When the fixed scan mode is set, ladder program
execution can be simulated at the same scan time as the scan time that is used
for virtual processing on the PC. Set fixed scan when simulating execution of
ladder programs where priority is given to the scan time such as ladder programs
where timers that are shorter than the Simulator's scan time are set.

8-21
 8-5 Executing Simulator

Setting the watchdog timer

Settings (R) Watchdog timer (D)
A "watchdog timer" is for detecting arithmetic calculation blockages caused by PLC
or program abnormalities or when long programs are executed. Watchdog timers
allow you to discover infinite loops in ladder programs. Default is 3000 msec (3
seconds).

Important: A watchdog error occurs when the scan time exceeds "watchdog
timer setting value" + "wait time."

Set watchdog timers by the following procedure.

1 Select {Settings (R)}

{Watchdog timer (D)} from
Menu.
The Watchdog Timer Setup dialog
box is displayed.

8 2 Enter a watchdog timer value within the range 500 (0.5 seconds) to 5000
(5 seconds) msec.
SIMULATOR

Enter the value of the watchdog timer within

the range 500 (0.5 sec) to 5000 (5 sec) msec.

Note: The performance of the PC you are using sometimes causes the scan time
to increase even on normal ladder programs, which causes the watchdog
error to occur. If this error occurs, try setting the watchdog timer to a larger
value.

Step Execution
This section describes step execution.
Outline of step execution function
"Step execution" is the simulation of the ladder program one instruction at a time.
During step execution, mnemonics are displayed and you can check the currently
executing rung of the ladder program.
You can also view the operating status of programs from a specified input through to
output by specifying break conditions or setting breakpoints together with step
execution. This allows you to find bugs faster. With programs comprising a
combination of multiple arithmetic calculation instructions, this is useful for finding
the cause when results are in error even though correct values have been entered.
There are five step execution modes: "continuous step," "1 step," "high-speed step,"
"back continuous step" and "back 1 step."

8-22
 8-5 Executing Simulator

About the Mnemonic list window

When step execution is performed, the current position is scrolled and displayed
matched to the step execution speed as the values and ON/OFF states of devices
successively change in the Ladder Monitor window. The Mnemonic list window is
also displayed, and the currently executing mnemonic rung is displayed reversed in
blue.
ON/OFF state of cursor position
*: ON state –: OFF state

Value of internal register at

Execution rung cursor (blue) cursor position
Displays the currently executing rung
reversed in blue.

Current cursor position

Displays the current cursor position.

Break point cursor (yellow)

Displays the break point.
Double-clicking this cursor
displays the break point
reversed in yellow. When this
cursor overlaps the current
cursor position, it is displayed
Rung No. Operand reversed in red.
Mnemonic

1 step execution 8
Run (P) 1 step (W) F8

SIMULATOR
Execute the ladder program one step at a time. Execution of the ladder program
stops when single step execution is performed during scan operation.

1 step = instruction

Execution returns to
the top of the program
when execution Each press of executes
reaches ENDH. one instruction.

Execute the ladder program one step at a time by the following procedure.

1 Select {Run (P)} {1 step (W)} from

Menu.
The Mnemonic list window is displayed,
and the currently executing rung of the
ladder program is displayed inverted.
For details on names and functions of
parts in the mnemonic list window, see
"About the Mnemonic list window" above.
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the F8 key.

8-23
 8-5 Executing Simulator

Continuous step execution

Run (P) Cont step (S) Shift + F8

Execution returns to the top

of the program when Continuously executes a
execution reaches ENDH. single instruction.

Perform continuous step execution by the following procedure.

1 Select {Run (P)} {Cont step (S)} from Menu.

The Mnemonic list window is displayed, and the currently executing rung is
displayed reversed.
"About the Mnemonic list window" page 8-23
In the Ladder Monitor window, the currently executing rung is scrolled and
displayed matched to the continuous step execution speed.
8 "Ladder Monitor window" page 8-29
SIMULATOR

Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Shift + F8 keys.

8-24
 8-5 Executing Simulator

[Tip]
• When split screen is selected, the currently executing rung is scrolled and
displayed matched to the continuous step execution speed only in the upper
screen.
Use the lower screen to check only movement of certain, specific sections of
the program.
"Cursor movement" page 8-30
• If the continuous step execution speed is too fast, making it difficult to check
the content of the ladder program, set a wait time to adjust execution speed.
"Setting the wait time" page 8-20

High-speed step execution

Run (P) High-speed step (K) Shift + F9
If you specify how many steps high-speed step execution is to be performed, step
execution is performed momentarily without the interim execution results being
displayed. When high-speed step execution has been performed to the last step,
execution stops at the first step of the ladder program.
This execution mode is useful when the section of the ladder program you want to
simulate is at the end of a long program, for example.

8
Executes the program

SIMULATOR
until the specified step.

Perform high-speed step execution by the following procedure.

1 Select {Run (P)} {High-speed step

(K)} from Menu.
The Execute High-speed Steps dialog
box is displayed.
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Shift + F9 keys.

2 Specify how far (how many steps) high-speed step execution is to be

performed by entering the step No., and click the "OK" button.

0
Enter the No. of the step to
be executed.

Discards the setting and

closes the dialog box.

8-25
 8-5 Executing Simulator

Back 1 step execution

Run (P) Back 1 step (A) F7
Execute ladder programs one step at a time in the reverse direction on steps that
have been executed in the single step execution, continuous step execution or
high-speed step execution mode.

Execution returns
to ENDH when
execution reaches Each press of executes
the top of the one instruction.
program.

Perform back single step operation by the following procedure.

1 Select {Run (P)} {Back 1 step (A)} from

Menu.

8 Other procedure
• Click the button.
SIMULATOR

• Press the F7 key.

[Tip]
When back single step execution is executed, all states such as the states of bus
lines or the values of devices that have changed as a result of program
execution, or the values of devices entered by the user return to the states that
were active before the ladder program was executed.
Debugging can be proceeded with efficiently as the operations (changes in
operation caused by ON/OFF switching of contacts or word device values) of
ladder programs you have created can be restored for confirmation of each
single instruction.
Execute back continuous step
Run (P) Back cont step (Y) Shift + F7
Execute ladder programs continuously in the reverse direction on steps that have
been executed in the single step execution, continuous step execution or high-
speed step execution mode.

Execution returns
to ENDH when
execution reaches
the top of the Continuously executes a
program. single instruction.

8-26
 8-5 Executing Simulator

Perform back continuous step execution by the following procedure.

1 Select {Run (P)} {Back cont step

(Y)} from Menu.
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Shift + F7 keys.
Specifying breakpoints
A "breakpoint" refers to a position where
execution of the ladder program is made to stop. If a breakpoint is specified,
execution automatically stops at that point during continuous step execution.
For example, if breakpoints are set beforehand to check the details of operation at a
specific step in the ladder program, execution stops at preset steps at each scan,
making it easier to check ladder program execution.

Specify the breakpoint by the following procedure.

1 Move the cursor to the rung you want to

specify, and double-click.
The breakpoint cursor is displayed in yellow.
Other procedure
8

SIMULATOR
Press the (Space) key.
[Tip]
• The cursor changes color to red when you
specify the cursor position on the currently
executing rung, or when program execution
has stopped at a breakpoint.
• Two or more breakpoints can be specified in a single ladder program.

„ To re-execute operation by breakpoint

1 Perform continuous step execution again.
Resume operation.
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Shift + F8 keys.

„ To cancel specified breakpoints

Cancel specified breakpoints.
1 Move the cursor to the rung programmed with a breakpoint, and double-
click.
This clears the breakpoint cursor.
Other procedure
Press the (Space) key.

8-27
 8-5 Executing Simulator

Stopping and Resetting Execution

Stop/reset scan execution and step execution.
Stopping/pausing execution
Run (P) Stop (E) Shift + F5
Pause (P) F4

Stop or pause execution by the following procedure.

1 Select {Run (P)} {Stop (E)} from

Menu.
To pause operation, select {Pause
(P)}.
When Stop is selected, all types of
operation are stopped, and output is
cleared. When Pause is selected, all
types of operations are paused.
Other procedure
Stop
• Click the button.
• Press the Shift + F5 keys.
Pause

8 • Click the button.

• Press the F4 key.
SIMULATOR

[Tip]
Back step execution cannot be performed once execution is stopped. To perform
back step execution after execution has been stopped, perform step execution
again. Back step execution can be continued if execution has been paused.
Reset
Run (P) Reset (R) F10

Return current values to their defaults by the following procedure.

1 Select {Run (P)} {Reset (R)} from

Menu.
The confirmation dialog box is
displayed.
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the F10 key.

2 Click the "Yes" button.

Execution is stopped if the ladder program is being
executed.
Processing is the same as when the PLC is turned
OFF then ON again.
To abort the reset, click "No".

8-28
 8-6 Ladder Monitor

8-6 Ladder Monitor

This section describes the screen of the Ladder Monitor that is displayed when
Simulator is executed, how to perform scan execution and step execution, and how
to change current values and setting values.

Outline
Ladder Monitor functions are as follows:

• Scan execution of ladder programs

• Step execution of mnemonics
• ON/OFF switching of bit devices
• Use of the dialog bar to change current values
• Display of all currently registered comments
• Setting of break conditions
• Setting of scan time
• Setting of watchdog timer

Ladder Monitor window

File (F) Ladder monitor (L) 8
Display the Ladder Monitor window.

SIMULATOR
The Ladder Monitor window is automatically displayed when the Ladder Monitor is
started up from Unit Editor. So, the following procedure is normally not required.

Display a closed Ladder Monitor window by the following procedure.

1 Select {File (F)} {Ladder monitor (L)} from Menu.

This displays the closed Ladder Monitor window.

Other procedure
Click the button.

[Tip]
• Only one closed Ladder Monitor window can be opened.
• A Ladder Monitor window cannot be selected when a Ladder Monitor window
is already opened.

8-29
 8-6 Ladder Monitor

Ladder Monitor window

Cursor
Rung No.
Scroll bar

Step No.

Contact

• To view hidden parts of the display, use the scroll bar or the keys.
• When scan execution or step execution is performed, device values, ON/OFF
indications, and other state change successively matched to execution of the
ladder program.
• When step execution is performed, the screen is scrolled and displayed, and the
cursor on the currently executing rung moves matched to execution of the ladder
program. The mnemonic list window also appears to display the currently
indicating step.

„ Cursor movement
key: Moves the cursor.
PageDown PageUp key: Moves the cursor one page (screen) at a time.
+ key: Moves the cursor one block at a time.
8 Ctrl

Home key: Moves the cursor to the start of the rung.

SIMULATOR

Esc key: Moves the cursor to the end of the rung.

[Tip]
Monitoring a ladder program outside of the screen display area
If you move the mouse cursor to between the window frame and the section at
the top right of the scroll bar, the mouse cursor will change to . Now, if you
move the mouse cursor downwards in this state with the right mouse button
pressed, the window will be split into two parts. Each of these parts can display
other locations within the ladder program. So, you can monitor two separate
parts within the same ladder program at the same time.
To switch the active parts of this split screen, either click the desired part with the
mouse, or press the Shift + F6 keys.

Important: • When the mouse cursor is displayed as , the window size merely
changes and cannot be set to a split screen.
• Only the upper screen is scrolled during step execution.

8-30
 8-6 Ladder Monitor

About status display

During scan or step execution, the current operating status and scan time are
displayed in the status display area of the main window.

Currently executing step No. Displays Running/Stop/Paused.

Displays the currently executing run mode. Scan time

[Tip]
"Scan" and "step execution" are displayed respectively for "continuous scan
execution" and "continuous step execution" in the Run mode.

Changing view size and view mode

Changing the View Size
View (V) Enlarge (E) Ctrl + PageDown
Reduce (R) Ctrl + PageUp

There are five ways of changing the size at which ladder diagrams are viewed.
When Editor is first started up, the view size is 100%.
Change the view size by the following procedure.
8

SIMULATOR
"Changing the View Mode" page 8-32

1 Select either {View (V)} {Enlarge (E)} or {Reduce (R)}.

The display size is enlarged or reduced.

Other procedure
Reducing the view size
Press the Ctrl + PageUp keys.
Enlarging the view size
Press the Ctrl + PageDown keys.

8-31
 8-6 Ladder Monitor

Changing the View Mode

View (V) View mode (V)
Set display settings in more details using the View Mode dialog box. Change the
display mode by the following procedure.

1 Select {View (V)} {View

mode (V)} from Menu bar.
The View Move dialog box is
displayed.

2 Set the various items referring

to the table below, and click
the "OK" button.
To disable the settings and close
the dialog box, click the "Cancel"
button.

8
SIMULATOR

Displays at twice (largest display size) the standard size. Select this setting
200%
when text is small and difficult to read.
150% Displays at 1.5 times the standard size.
120% Displays at 1.2 times the standard size.
View size
100% (std) Standard size
Smallest display size. Select this setting to check overall movement when
80% the number of cells that can be displayed in a single screen increases to the
maximum number.
XYM Displays the device name of the ladder diagram by XYM.
Signed decimal constant Displays decimal constants as signed constants in ladder diagrams.
Device label Displays the label name of each device in the ladder diagram.
Comment Displays comments in the ladder diagram.
Grid Displays the grid lines of cells in the edit screen.
Device for units Displays device names in the ladder program by device for unit annotation.
Comment 1 Displays comment 1. (Can be transferred to the PLC.)
Comment
Comment 2 Displays comment 2. (Cannot be transferred to the PLC.)
type
Comment 3 Displays comment 3. (Cannot be transferred to the PLC.)
Editing screen Reflects settings on edit screen of current window.
Mode Browse screen Reflects settings on verify screen of current window.
setup
range Both Reflects settings on both edit screen and verify screen of current window.
All windows Reflects settings on all windows.
* "Current window" refers to the currently selected active window.

8-32
 8-6 Ladder Monitor

Displaying Devices for Units

View (V) Devices for units (N) Shift + (Space)

Display the device name of symbols on the Ladder Monitor expressed as devices
for units by the following procedure.
"Expressing devices for units" refers to expression of relays assigned in Unit Editor
as the "nth terminal of the nth connected unit."
For example, the 5th input relay No. at the input unit next to the CPU is expressed
as "0001-0005" and the 31st relay No. of the 3rd output unit from the CPU is
expressed as "03-00115".

Unit No.: Connection No. of unit assigned a number 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and so forth

starting from the CPU
Unit relay No.: Relay No. assigned the number of occupied relays starting from
00000

SIMULATOR
The device name of symbols on the Ladder Monitor are expressed as devices for
units by the following procedure.

1 Select {View (V)} {Devices for units (N)}.

Device names are expressed as devices for units.

Other procedure
Press the Shift + (Space) keys.

8-33
 8-6 Ladder Monitor

Displaying/Hiding Comments
View (V) Comment (C) Ctrl + (Space)

Toggle between display and hiding of device comments on the Ladder Monitor.
The display comment is "comment 1".

Toggle between display and hiding of comments by the following procedure.

1 Select {View (V)} {Comment (C)}.

Each click of this icon toggles between display and hiding of comments.

button

8 Comment hidden Comment displayed

SIMULATOR

Other procedure

Press the Ctrl + (Space) keys.

Displaying Labels
View (V) Label (L) Ctrl + Backspace
Display labels instead of device names for symbols on the Ladder Monitor.
Display labels by the following procedure.

1 Select {View (V)} {Display Label (L)}.

This displays labels instead of the device name.

Other procedure
Press the Ctrl + Backspace keys.

8-34
 8-6 Ladder Monitor

[Tip]
Labels can be used instead of device names when inputting symbols or
finding/replacing symbols. For example, devices names can be written as follows
when the label "SW1" is assigned to device 0000:

Substitute label display for 0000: SW1

Substitute label display for LD _ 0000 LD_: SW1 (_ stands for space)

Displaying/hiding toolbar, status bar and dialog bar

View (V) Toolbar (T)
Dialog bar (D)
Status bar (S)
You can switch display of the tool bar, status bar and dialog bar between displayed
and hidden.

Toolbar

Dialog bar
8

SIMULATOR
Status bar

Switch display by the following procedure.

1 Select {View (V)} from Menu, and select the item to view.

Marked: Displayed
Unmarked: Hidden

8-35
 8-6 Ladder Monitor

Displaying the Ladder Monitor window at the bottom of the screen

View (V) Ladder at bottom (K)
The Ladder Monitor window can be displayed at all times at the bottom of the
mnemonic list or other windows. If the Ladder Monitor window is set to be displayed
at the bottom at all times, you drag-and-drop devices to register them to each
Monitor even if the Registration Monitor or Batch Monitor windows are overlapping
the Ladder Monitor window.

Set the Ladder Monitor to be displayed at the bottom by the following procedure.

1 Select {View (V)} {Ladder at

bottom (K)} from Menu.

Other procedure
Click the button.

[Tip]
To undo this setting, follow the same procedure to unmark the item.

Selecting Devices
In the Ladder Monitor window, you can select devices and change their current
values and setting values.
8 There are two ways of selecting a device, by using the mouse or by using keys.

„ Using the mouse to select devices

SIMULATOR

1 Move the mouse cursor to the device and click to

select.
The cursor turns gray to indicate that the device is
selected

„ Using keys to select devices

1 Move the arrow key to the device to select with the cursor in a green
state, and press the key.
The cursor turns gray to indicate that the device is selected.
key

„ Changing current values, etc.

When a device is selected, you can use the dialog bar to change its current value,
and manipulate the device in other ways.
"Changing Current Values/Setting Values/Attributes" page 8-38

Note: When the cursor is displayed gray, key operations on the Ladder Monitor
window are not possible. To move the cursor by the arrow keys, or to turn
devices ON/OFF by the (Space) key, press the Esc key once to cancel
selection of the cursor and then operate the keys.

8-36
 8-6 Ladder Monitor

Turning Bit Devices ON/OFF

Turn bit devices ON/OFF. There are two ways of switching the ON/OFF state of bit
devices, by using the mouse or using keys.

„ Using the mouse to turn devices ON/OFF

1 Move the mouse cursor to the device to turn ON/OFF and click to select.
The contact changes color to indicate that the device ON/OFF state has
changed.

OFF state ON state

Note: Timer and counter contacts cannot be switched ON/OFF.

„ Using keys to turn devices ON/OFF

8
1 Move the arrow key to the device to turn ON/OFF with the cursor in a

SIMULATOR
green state, and press the (Space) key.
The contact changes color to indicate that the device ON/OFF state has
changed.

OFF state ON state

Note: • When the cursor is displayed gray, key operations on the Ladder Monitor
window are not possible. To move the cursor by the arrow keys, or to turn
devices ON/OFF by the (Space) key, press the Esc key once to cancel
selection of the cursor and then operate the keys.
• Timer and counter contacts cannot be switched ON/OFF.

8-37
 8-6 Ladder Monitor

Changing Current Values/Setting Values/Attributes

Use the dialog bar to change the current value, setting value or attributes (radix,
comment) of the currently selected device. The dialog bar is located at the bottom of
the screen, and devices can be registered in the Batch Monitor and Registration
Monitor.
"Batch Monitor" page 8-48
"Registration Monitor" page 8-59

[Tip]
The shortcut for changing the radix is Ctrl + E .
Each press of the Ctrl + E shortcut key combination toggles between decimal
(#) and hexadecimal ($).

Change current values, setting values or attributes (radix, comment) by the

following procedure.

1 Select the device to change from the

Ladder Monitor window.
The values of the device selected in the
current value box and setting value box
(displayed only for timers and counters) are
displayed.
"Selecting Devices" page 8-36

8
2
SIMULATOR

Change the radix, current value and setting value in the dialog bar.
Current value write button Setting value write button

Radix Current value write box Setting value write box

[Tip]
• The Tab key moves the cursor in the forward direction, while the Tab + Shift
keys moves the cursor in the backward direction.
• The key functions as follows:
When the cursor is at Type or No.: New values are registered.
When the cursor is at bit, radix or comment: Values are written to the current
device.
Note: • The attribute (comment) box is displayed on the dialog bar only when the
Batch Monitor or Registration Monitor is active. The attribute (comment)
box is not displayed when the Ladder Monitor is active. To change the
type of comment to be displayed, select {View (V)} {View mode (V)}
from Menu.
"Changing the View Mode" page 8-32
• "Impossible current value" is displayed if
illegal data is entered.

8-38
 8-6 Ladder Monitor

3 Click the "Wr current value" button or "Value" button.

• This changes the current value and setting value.

Setting items and values that can be set

Settable Values
Item Description
Ladder Monitor Batch Monitor/Registration Monitor
Relay, control relay, timer, counter, comparator,
Select the type of
Type  high-speed counter, data memory, control
device.
memory, temporary data memory, trimmer No.
No. Enter the device No.  Settable Nos. vary according to device.
1*1, 16, 32*2
*1 Devices other than relay cannot be set to "1".
*2 When KV-10/16/24/40 is used,
Bit Select bit length of data. 
timers/counters cannot be set to "32". When
KV-700 is used, timer/counter and digital
trimmer values are fixed to "32".
Decimal Binary*3, Octal, Decimal, -Decimal*4,
Attribute

Hex Hex
*3 When the bit is set to "32", "2" cannot be set.
Select current value of
*4 Values are expressed as signed binary (2's complement).
device/display method
Radix • When the bit is set to "1", the radix can not be changed to other
(Hex/Bin) of setting
value. than "2".
• Changes made to radix are reflected to the overall window
(Registration Monitor for each selected device).
• The current value is cleared when the radix is changed.
Comment
Select type of comment
to be displayed.
Comment 1/comment 2/comment 3/none 8
Wr current
Enter current value. Up to 17 digits (32 bits) can be entered.

SIMULATOR
value
Can be set only in case of timers and counters. Up to 17 digits (32
Value Enter setting value.
bits) can be entered.

[Tip]
• Of the number of bits and radix settings, the number of bits is given priority.
(For example, if the number of bits is changed to "1" with the number of bits set
to "16" and the radix set to "Decimal," the radix is changed to "Binary.")
• In the case of both 16-bit and 32-bit bit devices, only numbers whose
lowermost two digits are "00" can be registered.
• When Bit is set to "32", the lower 16 bits from an even-numbered device No.
becomes the upper 16 bits.
• The "Reset" button is displayed only when timers or counters are selected.
• Bit value devices are reset when PLC operation is executed even if the
ON/OFF state of bit devices or current values or setting values are changed
with PLC operation stopped. In this case, either pause operation and change
the device state, or change the device state while the program is running.

„ Canceling settings
1 Click the "Cancel" button on
the dialog bar.

„ Returning timer/counter current

values to their defaults
1 Click the "Reset" button on the dialog bar.

8-39
 8-6 Ladder Monitor

Jump and Search

Jumps to any specified program rung No. or step, and searches for instructions and
devices using instructions or operands as key words. Executes a cross-reference
search from the current position.

Jumping to specified rungs or steps

Find (E) Jump (J) Rung/step No. (L)
Specify the rung No. or step No. in the ladder diagram to jump to a specific position
by the following procedure.

[Tip]
This item can be selected only when the Ladder Monitor is active.

1 Select {Find (E)} {Jump (J)} {Rung/step No. (L)} from Menu.
The Jump to Specified Rung dialog box is displayed.

8
SIMULATOR

2 Enter either the jump destination rung No. or step No.

3 To jump to a specified rung No., click the "Rung" button. To jump to a

specified step No., click the "Step" button.
This displays the specified rung or step. The cursor also moves to the specified
rung.

[Tip]
• To cancel a jump, click the "Jump" button.
• The final rung or step is displayed if you specify a No. greater than the final
rung No. or step No.

8-40
 8-6 Ladder Monitor

Jumping to the top or bottom rungs of ladder programs

Find (E) Jump (J) Top (T) Ctrl + Home
End (B) Ctrl + End
Jump to the top or bottom rung of ladder programs by the following procedure.

„ Jumping to top rung

1 Select {Find (E)} {Jump (J)} {Top (T)} from Menu.

The cursor jumps to the top of the ladder diagram.

Other procedure
Press the Ctrl + Home keys.

„ Jumping to bottom rung

8
1 Select {Find (E)} {Jump (J)} {End (B)} from Menu.

SIMULATOR
The cursor jumps to the bottom of the ladder diagram.

Other procedure
Press the Ctrl + End keys.

8-41
 8-6 Ladder Monitor

Jumping to the previous/next block

Find (E) Jump (J) Previous block (P) Ctrl +
Next block (P) Ctrl +
Jump to the circuit block following or preceding the circuit block where the cursor is
currently located by the following procedure.

„ Jumping to the previous circuit block

Jump to the previous circuit block by the following procedure.

1 Select {Find (E)} {Jump (J)} {Previous block (P)} from Menu.

8 Other procedure
Press the Ctrl + keys.
SIMULATOR

Note: You cannot jump to the previous circuit block from the comment rung.

„ Jumping to the next circuit block

Jump to the next circuit block by the following procedure.

1 Select {Find (E)} {Jump (J)} {Next block (P)} from Menu.

Other procedure
Press the Ctrl + keys.

Note: You cannot jump to the next circuit block from the comment rung.

8-42
 8-6 Ladder Monitor

Jumping to previous/next symbols

Find (E) Jump (J) Previous symbol (W) Shift + Tab
Next symbol (F) Tab

Jump to the symbol following or preceding the symbol where the cursor is currently
located by the following procedure.

„ Jumping to previous symbols

Jump to the previous symbol by the following procedure.

1 Select {Find (E)} {Jump (J)} {Previous symbol (W)} from Menu.

Other procedure 8
Press the Shift + Tab keys.

SIMULATOR
Note: You cannot jump to the previous symbol from the comment rung.

„ Jumping to next symbols

Jump to the next symbol by the following procedure.

1 Select {Find (E)} {Jump (J)} {Next symbol (F)} from Menu.

Other procedure
Press the Tab key.

Note: You cannot jump to the next symbol from the comment rung.

8-43
 8-6 Ladder Monitor

Jumping to the start and end of rungs

Find (E) Jump (J) Top of rung (H) Home

End of rung (E) End

Jump to the start or end of rungs where the cursor is located by the following
procedure.

„ Jumping to the start of rungs

Jump to the start of rungs by the following procedure.

1 Select {Find (E)} {Jump (J)} {Top of rung (H)} from Menu.

8
Other procedure
SIMULATOR

Press the Home key.

„ Jumping to the end of rungs

Jump to the end of rungs by the following procedure.

1 Select {Find (E)} {Jump (J)} {End of rung (E)} from Menu.

Other procedure
Press the End key.

8-44
 8-6 Ladder Monitor

Searching for instructions and operands

Find (E) Find (S) Ctrl + F
Search for a specified instruction or operand, and batch-display all instructions or
operands that satisfy the search conditions by the following procedure. A list of rung
comments can also be displayed, so this function can also be used as an index for
ladder programs.

1 Select {Find (E)} {Find (S)} from Menu.

Other procedure
• Press the Ctrl + F keys.
• Click the button.

Moves the cursor of the searched device.

Closes the search results list display area, and

displays the Search dialog box reduced.

Search results list display area

8

SIMULATOR
[Tip]
The regular display/reduced display setting for the Find dialog box is saved to KV
BUILDER. For this reason, the setting is enabled when KV BUILDER is next
started up.

2 Enter the instruction or operand to search.

Only instructions or operands can be searched for by leaving the other entry
field blank.
If the Find dialog box is opened above a cursor position where an instruction is
currently entered, the instruction or operand at the cursor is displayed as
selected.

Enter the instruction to search here.

Enter the operand to search here.

[Tip]
To search timer, counter, or high-speed counter instructions, enter the TMR or C
instructions. To search operands, enter T0 or C0.

8-45
 8-6 Ladder Monitor

3 Click the "Find" button.

This starts the search. When the search ends, a list of instructions that satisfy
the search conditions is displayed. Move the cursor to the top of these
instructions, and click the instruction displayed in the list. This displays the
instructions selected in the ladder program.

Of the rung comments in the

ladder program, searches rung
comments written continuously
to multiple rungs excluding Searches rung comments in the ladder program.
comments from the 2nd rung
onwards.
Moves the cursor, and displays the next instruction that
matches the search conditions.

Starts the search.

Ends the search.

Searches "???" operands and

devices that were not converted by
the ladder conversion function in the
ladder program.

Displays the selected instruction in

the ladder program when an
instruction is selected from the
search results list.

8 A list of the search results is displayed here.

SIMULATOR

• There are two ways of displaying a list of search results:

• Instructions and operands

The cell No. is assigned a number 0, 1, 2, 3 and so forth to 9 from the left edge.
• Rung comments, top rung comment

The cell No. is fixed to 0.

[Tip]
• Nothing is displayed if the specified instruction or operand is not found.
• Two or more Find dialog boxes can be displayed.
• If the Find dialog box is opened with the cursor displayed on a ladder symbol,
the operand of the selected instruction is automatically entered.

4 To perform a search again, click the "Find" button.

This updates the search results.
To quit the search, click the "Close" button.

8-46
 8-6 Ladder Monitor

Clearing All Devices

Run (P) Clear all devices (L) Clear all DMs (D)
Clear all hold relays (H)
Clear all counters (C)
Data memories, hold relays and counters can be initialized by clearing all devices.
Initialize device settings by the following procedure.

1 Select {Run (P)} {Clear all devices (L)} from Menu, and select the
devices to be cleared.
The confirmation device dialog box is displayed.

SIMULATOR
2 Click the "Yes" button.
This clears all devices.
Clicking "No" cancels clearing of all devices.

[Tip]
If you execute clear all devices, the "Cannot execute unless switch to STOP.
Switch to STOP?" message is displayed when the operation mode is the Run
mode.
To set to the Stop mode before executing clear all devices, click the "Yes" button.
To cancel clearing all devices, click the "No" button.

8-47
 8-7 Batch Monitor

8-7 Batch Monitor

Batch Monitor displays the current values of all devices, ON/OFF states of contacts,
and registered comments by device type. This section describes operations
possible on Batch Monitor.

Outline of Batch Monitor

Batch Monitor has the following functions:
• Batch display of current values, setting values and contacts of all devices
and ON/OFF states of coils by device type
• Display of all currently registered comments
• Switching of bit device ON/OFF states
• Changing of current values on the dialog bar
Batch Monitor window
File (F) Batch monitor (I)
To display the Batch Monitor window, you must first select the device on Ladder
Monitor. The registered details in the Batch Monitor can also be set to save by
device type so that they can be called up whenever necessary.

Display a new Batch Monitor window by the following below.

1 Select the device to be displayed in the Ladder Monitor window.

Clicking the device causes the cell to change color to gray to indicate that the
8 device is selected.
SIMULATOR

2 Select {File (F)} {Batch monitor (I)} from

Menu.
This opens the Batch Monitor window.
Other procedure
Click the button.

[Tip]
A new window is opened each time that this operation is executed.

A list of devices is displayed in

the Batch Monitor window
starting from the device that
you selected.
The selected device is
displayed inverted to indicate
that it is selected.

[Tip]
If the Batch Monitor window is opened when a device has not been selected by
the cursor, the window is opened for the device displayed in the dialog bar.

8-48
 8-7 Batch Monitor

Registering Devices
Display devices can be changed if a device is registered on an already displayed
Batch Monitor. There are two ways of registering devices:
• By dragging the device from the Ladder Monitor window
• By specifying the device in the dialog bar

„ Dragging devices from the Ladder Monitor window

Drag-and-drop devices from the Ladder Monitor window to register them to
Batch Monitor. Displaying Ladder Monitor at the bottom of the screen by
selecting {View (V)} {To bottom of ladder (K)} from Menu, or by clicking the
button to display the Ladder Monitor at the bottom of the screen is useful as it
allows you to drag devices even if the registration destination Batch Monitor
window is overlapping the Ladder Monitor window.

1 Select the device to display in the Ladder Monitor window and keep the
mouse down in a clicked state.
The mouse cursor shape changes as shown below.

SIMULATOR
2 Drag the mouse cursor onto the Batch Monitor window.

Drag

3 Drop the device into the Batch Monitor window.

A list of devices of the same type as the selected device is displayed in the
Batch Monitor window. The selected device also is displayed inverted to
indicate that it is selected.

8-49
 8-7 Batch Monitor

„ Specifying devices in the dialog bar

On the dialog bar, you can register new devices or change the settings of the
currently selected device.

You can set the following items on the dialog bar:

• Device type
• Device No.
• Number of bits
• Radix
• Comment display mode
• Current value
• Setting value (possible only on timers and counters)

1 Specify the destination to start registering devices to.

Make the window of the Monitor for registering devices to the current window.

2 Set the device to register on the dialog bar.

Device No. Radix
Device type Data bit length Comment

8
SIMULATOR

[Tip]
• The Tab key moves the cursor in the forward direction, while the Tab + Shift
keys move the cursor in the backward direction.
• The key functions as follows:
When the cursor is at Type or No.: New values are registered.
When the cursor is at bit, radix or comment: Values are written to the current
device.
• When the type is selected by "R" (relay) or "DM" (data memory) when the KV-
700 is used, and the No. button is clicked, a list of relays and data
memories currently assigned to each unit is displayed. Select the desired relay
or data memory from the list to monitor relays or data memory for each unit.

Note: If you enter a device No. outside of the

allowable setting range, the message "Device
No. too large" is displayed.

3 Click the "Reg" button.

This registers the device having the details you set to the Batch Monitor
window.

„ Canceling settings

1 Click the "Cancel" button.

The setting is canceled.

8-50
 8-7 Batch Monitor

About the Batch Monitor Window

Device No. Current value Comment

• To view hidden parts of the display, use the scroll bar or the PageUp or PageDown
keys.
• You can move the cursor using the keys.
• The current values change in keeping with Monitor execution.

Current value display format

Display Format Bit Radix Sign

B1 1 2 Unsigned B: Bit
B16 16 2 Unsigned O: Bit
O16 16 8 Unsigned D: Unsigned binary 8
O32 32 8 Unsigned S: Signed binary

SIMULATOR
D16 16 10 Unsigned H: Hex
D32 32 10 Unsigned A: ASCII
S16 16 10 Signed F: Floating point type real
number
S32 32 10 Signed
H16 16 16 Signed
H32 32 16 Signed
A16 16 ASCII ―
A32 32 ASCII ―
F16 16 FLOAT ―
F32 32 FLOAT ―

8-51
 8-7 Batch Monitor

Saving/Reading Batch Monitor Window

Saving the Batch Monitor window
File (F) Save window as (A)
Save the Batch Monitor window by the following procedure.

1 Click the Batch Monitor window to save to make it the current window.

2 Select {File (F)} {Save window as (A)} from Menu.

The Save As dialog box is displayed.

8
3 Specify the folder (directory) to save the window to and the file name.
SIMULATOR

Specify the folder

(directory) to save to.

Specify the file name.

Specify "Batch Monitor
(*.kal)" as the file type.

Specify the folder (directory) to which the Batch Monitor window is to be saved. Normally,
Save in (I)
the project folder to which the currently simulator ladder is to be saved opens.
File name (N) Enter the name of the monitor window to be saved.
Save as type (T) Specify "Batch monitor (*.kal)".

Note: • An empty file is created during continuous scan execution.

• The current value and setting values are not saved.

[Tip]
The file is automatically appended with the extender ".kal" when the file name is
set even if it is not specified when the file name is entered.

4 Click the "Save" button.

This saves the Batch Monitor window.

8-52
 8-7 Batch Monitor

Reading Batch Monitor files

File (F) Open window (O)
Read Batch Monitor files by the following procedure.

1 Select {File (F)} {Open window (O)} from Menu.

The Open dialog box is displayed.

2 Select "Batch Monitor(*.kal)" from the Files of type pulldown list.

3 Specify the folder (directory) to read the file from and the file name.

Specify the folder

(directory) containing
8
the file to read.

SIMULATOR
Specify the file name. Make sure that the file
type is "Batch
Monitor(*.kal)."

Specify the folder (directory) to which the Batch Monitor window is saved. Normally, the
Look in (I)
project folder to which the currently simulator ladder is to be saved opens.
File name (N) Enter the name of the monitor window to be read.
Files of type (T) Specify "Batch Monitor (*.kal)".

4 Click the "Open" button.

This opens the Batch Monitor window.

8-53
 8-7 Batch Monitor

Selecting and Changing Devices

In the Batch Monitor window, you can select devices and change the ON/OFF
states of bit devices and current values.
There are two ways of selecting a device, by using the mouse or by using keys.

Selecting devices
Select devices by the following procedure.

„ Using the mouse to select devices

1 Move the mouse cursor to the device and click to select.

The cursor turns gray to indicate that the device is selected

8
„ Using keys to select devices
SIMULATOR

1 Move the cursor to the device to select using the keys with the
cursor the same color as the title bar, and press the key.
The cursor turns gray to indicate that the device is selected

8-54
 8-7 Batch Monitor

Turning bit devices ON/OFF

Turn bit devices ON/OFF by the following procedure.

„ Using the mouse to turn devices ON/OFF

1 Move the cursor to the device whose state is to be turned ON/OFF, and
double-click the device.
This switches the ON/OFF display of the device.
ON state OFF state

Double-click

„ Using keys to turn devices ON/OFF

1 Move the cursor to the device whose is to be turned ON/OFF using the
keys with the cursor the same color as the title bar, and press the
space bar.
8
This switches the ON/OFF display of the device.

SIMULATOR
ON state OFF state

(Space) key

„ Using the bit cursor to turn each device ON/OFF

The bit cursor appears on screen when the device is a bit device whose display
attributes are set to 16-bit, binary number.

1 Move the bit cursor to the device

whose state is to be turned ON/OFF
and double-click the device.
This switches the "." "0" display.
ON/OFF states can be switched for
each bit device.

Other procedure
Move the cursor to the device whose is to be turned ON/OFF using the
keys with the cursor the same color as the title bar, and press the space bar.

8-55
 8-7 Batch Monitor

Changing current values/setting values/attributes

On the dialog bar, you can register new devices or change the settings of the
currently selected device.

You can set the following items on the dialog bar:

• Device type
• Device No.
• Number of bits
• Radix
• Comment display mode
• Current value
• Setting value (possible only on timers and counters)
• Resetting of timer/counter current value

1 Make the Monitor window in which to change device settings the current
window.

8
2 Move the cursor to the device to be changed and click the device.
SIMULATOR

3 Change the radix, comment, current value and setting value on the dialog
bar.
Current value write button
Radix Comment Setting value write button

Current value write box Setting value write box

[Tip]
• The Tab key moves the cursor in the forward direction, while the Tab + Shift
keys move the cursor in the backward direction.
• The key functions as follows:
When the cursor is at Type or No.: New values are registered.
When the cursor is at bit, radix or comment: Values are written to the current
device.

Note: "Impossible current value" is

displayed if illegal data is entered.

8-56
 8-7 Batch Monitor

4 Click the "Write current value" button or "Setting value" button.

• This changes the current value and setting value.

Setting items and values that can be set

Settable Values
Item Description
Ladder Monitor Batch Monitor/Registration Monitor
Relay, control relay, timer, counter, comparator,
Select the type of
Type  high-speed counter, data memory, control
device.
memory, temporary data memory, trimmer No.
No. Enter the device No.  Settable Nos. vary according to device.
1*1, 16, 32*2
*1 Devices other than relay cannot be set to "1".
*2 When KV-10/16/24/40 is used,
Bit Select bit length of data. 
timers/counters cannot be set to "32". When
KV-700 is used, timer/counter and digital
trimmer values are fixed to "32".
Decimal Binary*3, Octal, Decimal, -Decimal*4,
Attribute

Hex Hex
*3 When the bit is set to "32", "2" cannot be set.
Select current value of
*4 Values are expressed as signed binary (2's complement).
device/display method
Rad • When the bit is set to "1", the radix can not be changed to other
(Hex/Bin) of setting
value. than "2".
• Changes made to radix are reflected to the overall window
(Registration Monitor for each selected device).
• The current value is cleared when the radix is changed.
Comment
Select type of comment
to be displayed.
Comment 1/comment 2/comment 3/none 8
Wr current
Enter current value. Up to 17 digits (32 bits) can be entered.

SIMULATOR
value
Can be set only in case of timers and counters. Up to 17 digits (32
Set value Enter setting value.
bits) can be entered.

[Tip]
• Of the number of bits and radix settings, the number of bits is given priority.
(For example, if the number of bits is changed to "1" with the number of bits set
to "16" and the radix set to "Decimal," the radix is changed to "Binary.")
• In the case of both 16-bit and 32-bit bit devices, only numbers whose
lowermost two digits are "00" can be registered.
• When Bit is set to "32", the lower 16 bits from an even-numbered device No.
becomes the upper 16 bits.
• The "Reset" button is displayed only when timers or counters are selected.
• Bit value devices are reset when PLC operation is executed even if the
ON/OFF state of bit devices or current values or setting values are changed
with PLC operation stopped. In this case, either pause operation and change
the device state, or change the device state while the program is running.

„ Canceling settings

1 Click the "Cancel" button on the dialog bar.

8-57
 8-7 Batch Monitor

„ Returning timer/counter current values to their defaults

1 Click the "Reset" button on the dialog bar.

Resetting Devices
Settings (R) Reset (R)
Reset the selected device and return its settings to their defaults by the following
procedure.

[Tip]
By resetting devices, only the device on the rung where the cursor is located is
reset. To reset all devices, select {Run (P)} {Reset (R)} from Menu.
"Reset" page 8-28

1 Click the device to be reset.

This selects the device.

8
SIMULATOR

2 Click the right mouse button.

This displays Menu.

3 Select "Reset" from Menu.

This resets the current values of the currently selected device to their defaults.

Other procedure
Select {Settings (R)} {Reset devices in monitors
(R)} from Menu.

8-58
 8-8 Registration Monitor

8-8 Registration Monitor

Registration Monitor is for registering any device, and displaying the current values
and time charts of registered devices. When step execution is performed, the
current states are displayed in real time so that program operation can be checked.
This section describes how to view and operate Registration Monitor.

Outline of Registration Monitor

Registration Monitor has the following functions:

• Registration of 128 devices in a single window

• Changing the position of registered devices
• Display of registered devices (both bit devices and word devices) as a time
chart
• Display of bit device ON/OFF states and comments
• ON/OFF switching of bit devices
• Changing current values using the dialog bar

Displaying Registration Monitor

File (F) Registration monitor (T)
Registration Monitor registers multiple devices and displays a time chart of these
8
devices.

SIMULATOR
Display a new Registration Monitor window by the following procedure.

1 Select {File (F)} {Registration monitor (T)} from Menu.

The Registration Monitor window opens.

Other procedure
Click the button.

[Tip]
A new window is opened each time that this operation is executed.

8-59
 8-8 Registration Monitor

Registering Devices
To simulate devices by Registration Monitor, devices must first be registered. There
are two ways of registering devices:

• By dragging-and-dropping devices from the Ladder Monitor window

• By specifying the device on the dialog bar

„ Dragging devices from the Ladder Monitor window

Drag-and-drop devices from the Ladder Monitor window to register devices by
the following procedure.

1 Select {File (F)} {Registration monitor (T)}

from Menu.
The Registration Monitor window opens.

Other procedure
Click the button.

[Tip]
A new window is opened each time that this operation is executed.

2 Select the device to display in the Ladder Monitor

8 window, and keep the mouse down in a clicked
state.
SIMULATOR

The mouse cursor shape changes.

[Tip]
If you click the mouse with the Ctrl key held down, the
mouse cursor changes shape to , and all devices
displayed in the screen can be registered to Registration Monitor.

3 Drag to the top of the Registration

Monitor window.

4 Drop at the top of the

Registration Monitor window.
This registers the selected
device(s) in the Registration
Monitor window.

[Tip]
Initially, the time chart is displayed. To display comments, select the type of
comment by [Comment] on the dialog bar.

8-60
 8-8 Registration Monitor

„ Specifying devices in the dialog bar

On the dialog bar, you can register new devices or change the settings of the
currently selected device.

You can set the following items on the dialog bar:

• Device type
• Device No.
• Number of bits
• Radix
• Comment display mode
• Current value
• Setting value (possible only on timers and counters)

1 Specify the destination to start registering devices to.

Make the window of the Monitor for registering devices to the current window.

2 Set the device to register on the dialog bar.

Device No. Radix
Device type Data bit length Comment

8
[Tip]

SIMULATOR
• The Tab key moves the cursor in the forward direction, while the Tab + Shift
keys move the cursor in the backward direction.
• The key functions as follows:
When the cursor is at Type or No.: New values are registered.
When the cursor is at bit, radix or comment: Values are written to the current
device.

Note: If you enter a device No. outside of the

allowable setting range, the message "Device
No. too large" is displayed.

3 Click the "Register" button.

This registers the device having the details you set to the Batch Monitor
window.

„ Canceling settings

1 Click the "Cancel" button.

The setting is canceled.

8-61
 8-8 Registration Monitor

About the Registration Monitor Window

Device No. Bit device state Vertical cursor

Cursor Current value Setting value Comment

Time chart

• If many devices have been registered, you can display them more easily by
opening multiple windows.
• The vertical cursor on the time chart can be moved by the keys.
• When Simulator is executed, current values and the time chart change
successively matched to the Simulator execution speed.
8
[Tip]
SIMULATOR

One memory in the time chart corresponds to one scan.

Current value display format

Display Format Bit Radix Sign

B1 1 2 Unsigned B: Bit
B16 16 2 Unsigned O: Bit
O16 16 8 Unsigned D: Unsigned binary
O32 32 8 Unsigned S: Signed binary
D16 16 10 Unsigned H: Hex
D32 32 10 Unsigned A: ASCII
S16 16 10 Signed F: Floating point type real
number
S32 32 10 Signed
H16 16 16 Signed
H32 32 16 Signed
A16 16 ASCII ―
A32 32 ASCII ―
F16 16 FLOAT ―
F32 32 FLOAT ―

8-62
 8-8 Registration Monitor

Saving/Reading Registration Monitors

Saving Registration Monitor
File (F) Save window as (A)
Registration Monitor windows to which devices have been registered can be saved
to file.

Save Registration Monitor window by the following procedure.

1 Click the Registration

Monitor window to save
to make it the current
window.

2 Select {File(F)} {Save window as (A)} from

Menu.
The Save As dialog box is displayed.

8
3

SIMULATOR
Specify the folder (directory) to save the window to and the file name.

Specify the folder

(directory) containing
the file to read.

Specify "Registration
Specify the file name.
Monitor(*.kre)" as the
file type.

Specify the folder (directory) to which the Registration Monitor window is to be saved.
Save in (I)
Normally, the project folder to which the currently simulator ladder is to be saved opens.
File name (N) Enter the name of the monitor window to be saved.
Save as type (T) Specify "Registration Monitor (*.kre)".

[Tip]
The file is automatically appended with the extender ".kre" when the file name is
set even if it is not specified when the file name is entered.

4 Click the "Save" button.

This saves the Registration Monitor window.

8-63
 8-8 Registration Monitor

Reading Registration Monitor files

File (F) Open window (O)
Read Registration Monitor files by the following procedure.

1 Select {File (F)} {Open window (O)} from

Menu.
The Open dialog box is displayed.

2 Select "Registration Monitor (*.kre)" from the Files of type pulldown list.

[Tip]
The default is "Registration Monitor".

3 Specify the folder (directory) to read the file from and the file name.

8
SIMULATOR

Specify the folder

(directory) containing
the file to read.

Specify the file name. Specify "Registration

Monitor(*.kre)" as the
file type.

Specify the folder (directory) to which the Registration Monitor window is to be saved.
Look in (I)
Normally, the project folder to which the currently simulator ladder is to be saved opens.
File name (N) Enter the name of the monitor window to be read.
Files of type (T) Specify "Registration Monitor (*.kre)".

4 Click the "Open" button.

This opens the Registration Monitor window.

8-64
 8-8 Registration Monitor

Selecting and Changing Devices

In the Batch Monitor window, you can select devices and change the ON/OFF
states of bit devices and current values.
There are two ways of selecting a device, by using the mouse or by using keys.

Note: To use Registration Monitor, devices must first be registered.

For details on how to register devices, see "Displaying Registration
Monitor" (page 8-59).

Selecting devices
Select devices by the following procedure.

„ Using the mouse to select devices

1 Move the mouse
cursor to the device
and click to select.
The cursor turns gray to
indicate that the device
is selected

„ Using keys to select devices 8

1 Move the cursor to the

SIMULATOR
device to select using
the keys with
the cursor the same
color as the title bar,
and press the key.
The cursor turns gray to
indicate that the device is selected

Turning bit devices ON/OFF

Turn bit devices ON/OFF by the following procedure.

„ Using the mouse to turn devices ON/OFF

1 Move the cursor to the device whose state is to be turned ON/OFF, and
double-click the device.
This switches the ON/OFF display of the device.
ON state OFF state

Double-click

8-65
 8-8 Registration Monitor

„ Using keys to turn devices ON/OFF

1 Move the cursor to the device whose is to be turned ON/OFF using the
keys with the cursor the same color as the title bar, and press the
space bar.
This switches the ON/OFF display of the device.

ON state OFF state

(Space) key

Changing current values/setting values/attributes

On the dialog bar, you can register new devices or change the settings of the
currently selected device.
You can set the following items on the dialog bar:
• Device type • Radix Number of bits
• Device No. • Comment display mode
• Number of bits • Current value
• Setting value (possible only on timers and counters)
8 • Resetting of timer/counter current value

1 Make the Monitor

SIMULATOR

window in which to
change device settings
the current window.

2 Move the cursor to the device to be changed and click the device.

3 Change the radix, comment, current value and setting value on the dialog bar.
Current value write button
Radix Comment Setting value write button

Current value write box Setting value write box

[Tip]
• The Tab key moves the cursor in the forward direction, while the Tab + Shift
keys move the cursor in the backward direction.
• The key functions as follows:
When the cursor is at Type or No.: New values are registered.
When the cursor is at bit, radix or comment: Values are written to the current
device.

Note: "Impossible current value" is

displayed if illegal data is entered.

8-66
 8-8 Registration Monitor

4 Click the "Wr current value" button or "Set value" button.

• This changes the current value and setting value.

Setting items and values that can beset

Settable Values
Item Description
Ladder Monitor Batch Monitor/Registration Monitor
Relay, control relay, timer, counter,
comparator, high-speed counter,
Type Select the type of device. 
data memory, control memory,
temporary data memory, trimmer No.
No. Enter the device No.  Settable Nos. vary according to device.
1*1, 16, 32*2
*1 Devices other than relay cannot be set
to "1".
Bit Select bit length of data.  *2 When KV-10/16/24/40 is used,
timers/counters cannot be set to "32".
When KV-700 is used, timer/counter
and digital trimmer values are fixed to
"32".
Attribute

Decimal Binary*3, Octal, Decimal, -Decimal*4, Hex,

Hex ASCII, FLOAT (floating point real number)*5
*3 When the bit is set to "32", "2" cannot be set.
Select current value of *4 Values are expressed as signed binary (2's complement).
Rad device/display method *5 This can be set only when KV-700 is used.
(Hex/Bin) of setting value. • When the bit is set to "1", the radix can be changed to other
than "2".
• Changes made to radix are reflected to the overall window 8
(Registration Monitor for each selected device).
Select type of comment to

SIMULATOR
Comment Comment 1/comment 2/comment 3/none
be displayed.
Wr current
Enter current value. Up to 17 digits (32 bits) can be entered.
value
Can be set only in case of timers and counters. Up to 17 digits (32
Set value Enter setting value.
bits) can be entered.

[Tip]
• Of the number of bits and radix settings, the number of bits is given priority.
(For example, if the number of bits is changed to "1" with the number of bits set
to "16" and the radix set to "Decimal," the radix is changed to "Binary.")
• In the case of both 16-bit and 32-bit bit devices, only numbers whose
lowermost two digits are "00" can be registered.
• When Bit is set to "32", the 16 bits lower than an even-numbered device No.
becomes the upper 16 bits.
• The "Reset" button is displayed only when timers or counters are selected.
• Bit value devices are reset when PLC operation is executed even if the
ON/OFF state of bit devices or current values or setting values are changed
with PLC operation stopped. If this happens, change the state of the devices
during program operation.
• Timer and counter setting values cannot be changed when the program is
write-protected.

„ Canceling settings
1 Click the "Cancel" button on the dialog bar.

8-67
 8-8 Registration Monitor

„ Returning timer/counter current values to their defaults

1 Click the "Reset" button on the dialog bar.

Copying device attributes

Monitor (M) Registration monitor (M) Copy device attributes (C)

Only the attributes (number of bits, radix and comments) of other devices can be
copied.
This feature is used to change only attributes to the same as those for other already
existing devices with the device type and Nos. as they are.
Copy device attributes by the following procedure.

1 Click the device

to set as the
copy source.
The device is
selected.

Other procedure
To copy from the keyboard, select the copy source device, and press the Esc
key.
8
2 Click the copy destination device with the right mouse
SIMULATOR

button.
The menu is displayed.
Other procedure
To copy from the keyboard, move the cursor to the copy
destination device.

Note: Do not use the left mouse button to specify the copy destination. Clicking
the left mouse button specifies the copy source.

3 Select "Copy attributes" from Menu.

This copies the attributes.

Other procedure
Select {Monitor (M)}
{Registration monitor (M)}
{Copy device attributes
(C)}.

8-68
 8-8 Registration Monitor

Moving devices
Ctrl +
Ctrl +
The device at the currently selected cursor position can be moved to another
position by dragging-and-dropping to change the order of devices.
Move devices by the following procedure.

1 Move the mouse cursor to the move source device.

2 Move (drag) the mouse cursor to the device below the position where
you want to move it to with the mouse held down.

SIMULATOR
3 Release the left mouse button (drop).
The selected device is inserted at the mouse cursor position.

Other procedure
Moving devices up
Press the Ctrl + keys.
Moving devices down
Press the Ctrl + keys.

8-69
 8-8 Registration Monitor

Deleting devices
Monitor (M) Registration monitor (M) Delete device (D)
Delete the device at the currently selected cursor position by the following
procedure.

1 Click the device to delete.

This selects the device.

2 Click the device to delete with the right mouse button.

The menu is displayed.

8
3 Select "Delete" from Menu.
SIMULATOR

This deletes the selected device. The selection cursor moves to the device
under the deleted device.

Other procedure
Select {Monitor (M)} {Registration monitor (M)} {Delete device (D)} from
Menu.

8-70
 8-8 Registration Monitor

Sorting devices
Monitor (M) Registration monitor (M) Sort devices (S)

Sort devices by type and No.

When devices are sorted, the sort by type order is as follows:

KV series KV-700 series

Relay R (relay)
Timer CR (control relay)
Counter DM (data memory)
Comparator CM (control memory)
High-speed counter TM (temporary memory)
Data memory T (timer)
Temporary memory C (counter)
Trimmer No. CTC (high-speed counter comparator)
 CTH (high-speed counter)
 TRM (trimmer No.)

Sort devices by type and No. by the following procedure.

1 Click on Registration Monitor with the right mouse 8

button.

SIMULATOR
The menu is displayed.

2 Select "Sort d10evices" from Menu.

The devices are sorted in the [Type] list order on the dialog bar.

Other procedure
Select {Monitor (M)} {Registration monitor (M)} {Sort devices (S)} from
Menu.

8-71
 8-8 Registration Monitor

Resetting devices
Settings (R) Reset devices in monitors (R)
Set selected devices to return them to their defaults by the following procedure.

[Tip]
By resetting a device, only the devices on the rung containing the cursor are
reset. To reset all devices, select {Run (E)} {Reset (R)} from Menu.
"Reset" page 8-28

1 Click the device to reset.

The device is selected.

8
2 Click the right mouse button.
SIMULATOR

The menu is displayed.

3 Click "Reset" from Menu.

This returns the current value of the selected device to its default.

Other procedure
Select {Settings (R)} {Reset devices in monitors (R)} from Menu.

8-72
 8-8 Registration Monitor

Time Chart Operations

This item describes time charts that are displayed in Registration Monitor.
Time charts display a log of chronological values in real time when Registration
Monitor is executed. When reverse step execution is performed after having
performed continuous step execution, the time chart that is displayed is
symmetrically opposite.
When high-speed step execution is performed, progress up to the specified step is
not displayed, and the time chart of only one gradation moves. The time chart is not
displayed symmetrically even if reverse step execution is performed.

„ How to view time charts

A time chart of all currently registered devices is displayed on screen. When a
time chart for a contact is displayed, the ON or OFF states of the contact are
displayed. When a time chart for a word device is displayed, changes in word
values can be ascertained on screen.

• When monitoring bit devices

When value has not changed When value has changed

SIMULATOR
Time chart is displayed as " " when ON and as " " Time chart is displayed as " " to indicate that the
when OFF to indicate that the value has not changed. value has changed.

• When monitoring word devices

When value has not changed When value has changed

Time chart is displayed as " " to indicate that the Time chart is displayed as " " to indicate that the
value has not changed. value has changed.

The time axis on the time chart advances from right to left. In other words, newer
values are displayed as you advance to the right. The cursor on the time chart
expresses the section indicated as the "current value," and you can change the
position of the current value by moving the cursor.
The details indicated by the time chart gradation differ as follows during scan
execution and step execution:

During scan execution: One gradation indicates one scan.

During step execution: One gradation indicates one instruction.

8-73
 8-8 Registration Monitor

The time chart changes color when the execution mode is changed:

During scan execution: green

During step execution: purple

„ Moving the vertical cursor

The vertical cursor is displayed when the gradation is clicked.
The vertical cursor can be moved by one of two ways:

• By clicking on the cursor pointer, and moving (dragging) to the move

destination with the button held down and releasing (dropping) the
button
• By pressing the Esc key, to set the cursor on the device to blue, and
moving by the or key
8
[Tip]
SIMULATOR

• The active state of the vertical cursor is switched by the Tab key.
• The value at the position where an active vertical cursor is located is displayed
as the current value. Even if a reset is performed, the value at the position
where the vertical cursor is located is displayed as the current value. When
there is no vertical cursor, the true current value is displayed. Changes to the
current value can be entered when there is no vertical cursor.
The vertical cursor disappears by clicking a device whose values are to be
changed. In the Registration Monitor, the vertical cursor can be manipulated
only when the monitor has stopped.
• The vertical cursor disappears when device contact ON/OFF states, or current
values and setting values are changed.

8-74
 8-8 Registration Monitor

Setting the number of time chart gradations

Settings (R) Registration monitor (M) Time chart scale setup (C)
The gradation is located at the top of the time chart, and any number of gradations
can be set within the range 1 to 511.
One gradation indicates one scan during scan execution, and indicates one
instruction during step execution.
The default number of gradations is 32 for a single screen.
When contacts turn ON/OFF at long intervals, for example, the time chart can be
made easier to view by adjusting the number of gradations.
Set the number of gradations by the following procedure.

1 Display the Registration

Monitor whose number of
gradations is to be
changed, and click the
Monitor to make it the
active window.

2 Select {Settings (R)}

{Registration monitor (M)}
{Time chart scale setup
(C)} from Menu.
The Time Chart Scale Setup 8
dialog box is displayed.

SIMULATOR
Other procedure
Click the button.

3 Set the number of gradations within the range 1 to 511. (Default is 32.)
The number of gradations on the time chart changes to the newly set number.

Specify the number of gradations.

Discards the setting and closes

the dialog box.

When "32" is set (default) When "100" is set

[Tip]
If there are too many gradations and they do not fit
inside the window, the message "Please enter an
integer between 1 to 511" will be displayed. If this
happens, either widen the window, or reduce the
number of gradations.

8-75
 8-8 Registration Monitor

Printing Registration Monitor

The content of Registration Monitor can be printed. This item describes how to do
this.

Important: Check the following before you start to print the content of
Registration Monitor.
• Make sure that the printer is connected correctly.
→ Check the connection between the PC and the printer by
referring to the User's Manuals.
• Select {File (F)} {Printer setup (R)} from
Menu, and make sure that the printer is set
correctly.
→ If the printer is not set correctly, correct
the settings to match the printer
connected to the PC.

Preview
File (F) Print preview (V)

8 Check the contents to be printed in the preview screen by the following procedure.

1
SIMULATOR

Make the Registration Monitor window to be printed the current window.

2 Select {File (F)} {Print preview (V)} from Menu.

This displays a preview of the Registration Monitor
window.

Executes printing. Closes the print preview.

Displays the next page. Reduces the display size.

Displays the previous page. Enlarges the display size.

Switches between 1-page

or 2-page display.

8-76
 8-8 Registration Monitor

Executing printing
File (F) Print (P)
Execute printing by the following procedure.

1 Make the Registration Monitor window to be printed the current window.

2 Select {File (F)} {Print (P)} from Menu.

The Print dialog box is displayed.

3 Click the "OK" button.

This prints the Registration Monitor window.
8

SIMULATOR

[Tip]
If the Registration Monitor window is not printed properly, check the printer
settings and the printer connection.

8-77
Chapter 9
KV-H20S/H40S/H20G
POSITIONING UNIT EXTENDED FUNCTIONS
This chapter describes how to use the KV-H20S/H40S/H20G Positioning Unit
extended functions on KV BUILDER.

9-1 Outline of Positioning Unit Extended Functions ...........9-2

9-2 Positioning Unit Extended Functions Tool Bar and Menu

..................................................................................9-4

9-3 Positioning Unit Pack Instructions ...............................9-6

9-4 Positioning Unit/Simple Setup ................................... 9-13

9-5 Positioning Unit/Unit Monitor..................................... 9-20

 9-1 Outline of Positioning Unit Extended Functions

9-1 Outline of Positioning Unit Extended Functions

Handy functions for when the Positioning Unit is used have been added on to the
KV-H1WE. This section briefly describes these extended functions.

Outline of Positioning Unit Pack Instructions

The Positioning Unit pack instructions have the same function as the main ladder
program that is made when Positioning Unit KV-H20S/H40S/H20G is used.
This allows you to reduce ladder programming man-hours by swapping sections of
ladder program scripts, that up till now spanned several rungs, with a simple
instruction. Ladder programs are also easier to view as you can tell which operation
the rungs perform just by looking at the name of the instruction.

Conventional ladder program

9
KV-H20S/H40S/H20G POSITIONING UNIT EXTENDED FUNCTIONS

Ladder Program with Positioning Unit pack instruction script

"Positioning Unit Pack Instructions" page 9-6

Outline of Positioning Unit/Simple Setup

This function is for setting up Positioning Unit KV-H20S/H40S/H20G parameters.
This function groups together frequently used parameters that are required for the
Positioning Unit to simplify setup. This function also allows you to transfer
parameters to the Positioning Unit from the KV-H1WE.

Note: To use Positioning Unit/Simple Setup, KV-H1HW (MOTION BUILDER

Ver.2) (Japanese) must be installed.

9-2
 9-1 Outline of Positioning Unit Extended Functions

Outline of Unit Monitor

This function displays relay or DM values in an optimum manner matched to the unit to be monitored.
The Positioning Unit KV-H20S/H40S/H20G Unit Monitor has been added on the KV-H1WE.
"9-5 Positioning Unit/Unit Monitor" page 9-20
KV-H20S Unit Monitor KV-H40S Unit Monitor

KV-H20G Unit Monitor

KV-H20 KV-H20S/H40S/H20G Device Conversion KV-H20S/H40S/H20G POSITIONING UNIT EXTENDED FUNCTIONS

This function is for converting
devices so that programs made for KV-H20
the KV-H20 can be used on the
KV-H20S/H40S/H20G. Devices
can be converted by operation on
the Unit Editor.
(1) Click on H20 with the right
mouse button to select
H20S/H40S/H20G.
(2) This converts each of the
devices on the ladder.
(3) On the KV-H40S, the X1/Y1
devices are converted.

9-3
 9-2 Positioning Unit Extended Functions Tool Bar and Menu

9-2 Positioning Unit Extended Functions Tool Bar and Menu

This section describes the tool bar and menu when extended functions "Positioning
Unit pack instructions" and Positioning Unit Simple Setup" are used.

Tool Bar/Menu
Icon Name Function See page
Opens the palette for entering Positioning
Pack palette 9-6
Unit pack instructions.
Pos unit simple Opens the Positioning Unit/Simple Setup
9-13
setup window.

When calling up extended functions from the tool bar

Positioning Unit pack instructions Positioning Unit/Simple Setup

When calling up extended functions from the menu

Positioning Unit pack instruction Positioning Unit Simple Setup
9 {Edit (E)} → {Pack palette (H)} {Tools (T)} → {Pos unit simple setup
Shift + F3 }
KV-H20S/H40S/H20G POSITIONING UNIT EXTENDED FUNCTIONS

9-4
 9-2 Positioning Unit Extended Functions Tool Bar and Menu

How to open a function with the right

mouse button
When the mouse cursor is on the edit screen,
click with the right mouse button to open the
pop-up menu, and select the desired
function.

Pack palette/simple setup window

Pack palette

KV-H20S/H40S/H20G POSITIONING UNIT EXTENDED FUNCTIONS

"9-3 Positioning Unit Pack Instructions" page 9-6

Simple setup window

"9-4 Positioning Unit/Simple Setup" page 9-13

9-5
 9-3 Positioning Unit Pack Instructions

9-3 Positioning Unit Pack Instructions

This section describes the basic structure of the Positioning Unit pack instructions
and how to use this function.

Structure of Pack Instructions

Positioning Unit pack instructions are made up of two sections, an entry section and
an expanded section.

<Entry section>
Though this section is displayed on Ladder Editor as a pack instruction symbol, it
functions as the CM bit out instruction on an actual ladder program.

<Expanded section>
This is the ladder block that is programmed with the actual processing script.
Ladders in this section can be displayed but not edited. The structure of this section
is such that entry of pack instructions is accepted as the bit load instruction.

The CM No./bit position that is set by the bit out instruction in the entry section are
the same values as the CM No./bit position that is set by the bit load instruction in
the expanded section.

Pack instruction symbol

Entry area

9 Expansion
area
KV-H20S/H40S/H20G POSITIONING UNIT EXTENDED FUNCTIONS

Actual ladder

Same CM No. bit position

Pack Instruction Restrictions

• Positioning Unit pack instructions are exclusively for Positioning Unit
H20S/H40S/H20G, and can be used only when Positioning Unit
H20S/H40S/H20G is set on the Unit Editor.
• One bit of CM is used for each single Positioning Unit pack instruction.
CM3700 to CM3899 (200 CMs) are used for the Positioning Unit pack instructions.
So, the maximum number of Positioning Unit pack instructions that can be used is
3200.
An error will occur during editing is the number of programmed Positioning Unit
pack instructions exceeds 3200.

9-6
 9-3 Positioning Unit Pack Instructions

Entering Pack Instructions

There are two ways of entering pack instructions.

Entering instructions from the pack palette ..........................................................................................

Edit (E) Pack palette (H)
Enter instructions from the pack palette.

1 Bring the cursor to the cell on the ladder where you want to enter the
instruction, and open the pack palette.

2 Select the unit setting, axis setting, and instruction, and enter the device
or numerical value in the parameter setting.

(1) Select the unit from the list of units currently set on Unit Editor.

(2) Select the operation axis.

KV-H20S/H40S/H20G POSITIONING UNIT EXTENDED FUNCTIONS

(3) Select the instruction. (4) Select the parameter.

The parameter item
changes according to the
instruction you select.

9-7
 9-3 Positioning Unit Pack Instructions

3 Click the "OK" button.

The pack instruction is entered on the ladder justified to the right.

(1) Unit No. (3) Instruction

(2) Axis No. (4) Parameter

Directly entering pack instructions using mnemonics

Direct entry of the following Positioning Unit pack instructions is supported.
"Directly entering instructions by mnemonic" page 6-56

Positioning Unit pack instructions that can be entered directly

Symbol Operation Key Entry
9 No.1 operand No.2 operand No.3 operand
P-PLS Start of operation Unit No. (number) Axis No. Point No.
(X1/Y1/X2/Y2)* (number/device)
KV-H20S/H40S/H20G POSITIONING UNIT EXTENDED FUNCTIONS

P-ORG Zero return Unit No. (number) Axis No.

(X1/Y1/X2/Y2)*
P-HOME Home position Unit No. (number) Axis No.
(X1/Y1/X2/Y2)*
* On the KV-H20S/H20G, only X1/Y1 are provided.
1 Enter the instruction from the keyboard.

If the dialog box is not displayed even after an instruction is entered, display
the dialog box by following the procedure in "Directly entering instructions by
mnemonic" (page 6-56).

2 Click the " " button or " " button.

The pack instruction is entered on the ladder justified to the right.

9-8
 9-3 Positioning Unit Pack Instructions

Expanding Pack Instructions

This section describes how to check the expanded section (actual ladder structure)
of a pack instruction when checking actual ladder programs.
Expanding/turning off individual pack instructions
The target pack instruction is expanded by clicking the guide button [+] on the left
side of the ladder rung to which a pack instruction symbol is entered with the
mouse.

Pack instruction closed state

Each click of the guide pointer switches between these two states.

Pack instruction expanded state 9

KV-H20S/H40S/H20G POSITIONING UNIT EXTENDED FUNCTIONS

When a pack instruction is expanded, the guide button changes to [–].
The expanded pack instruction is turned off by clicking the [–] guide button.
Expanding/turning off all pack instructions
View (V) Expand Pack (S)
Expand Pack off (H)
You can set the display state of all pack instruction symbols on the ladder in the
view mode settings.

Expands all pack instructions on the ladder.

Turns expansion of all pack instructions on the ladder.

Note: An expand error occurs and the pack instruction cannot be expanded when
a "pending operand" is used for Positioning Unit pack instruction devices.

9-9
 9-3 Positioning Unit Pack Instructions

Displaying pack instruction symbols in device annotation during expansion

View (V) View mode (D)
Pack instruction symbols are displayed as CM bit out instructions during expansion
when the [Device annotation at pack inst. (P)] checkbox is marked.

OFF ON

Expand Expand
9
KV-H20S/H40S/H20G POSITIONING UNIT EXTENDED FUNCTIONS

9-10
 9-3 Positioning Unit Pack Instructions

List of Positioning Unit Pack Instructions

List of Positioning Unit Pack Instructions
Compatible units: HV-H20S/H40S

Brief Description of Processing

Direct
Mnemonic Symbol S1 : Unit No. (common)
Input
S2 : Axis selection (common)

Start operation
P-PLS {
Starts operation at point No. specified by S3 .
Resume operation
P-RPLS x
Resumes operation.
Zero return
P-ORG {
Executes a zero return.
Home position
P-HOME {
Moves to home position.
Write current coordinates
P-PADJ Writes the value specified by S3 to the current x
coordinates.
Change speed
P-VADJ Takes the value specified by S3 as the operation x
speed.
Change system parameters
P-SPSET Writes the value specified by S4 to the item of x
S3 (*1) in system parameters.

P-VPSET
Change speed parameter
x
9
Writes the value specified by S4 to the item of
S3 (*2) in speed parameters.

KV-H20S/H40S/H20G POSITIONING UNIT EXTENDED FUNCTIONS

Change point parameter
P-PPSET Sets S4 (*3) in the point No. specified by S3 to the x
value of S5 .
Change all point parameters
Changes all setting values of the item specified by
S4 (*3).
S3 writes the leading point No., S5 the leading
P-APSET device for storing the setting value to be changed, x
and S6 the number of points to be changed.
S7 specifies the leading work area No. The
number of occupied devices changes according to
the item selected at S4 (*3).
*1 "Origin coordinates" or "Home coordinates" can be set.
*2 Set between No.1 to No.16.
*3 "Target coordinates", "Repeat shift", "Next point" and "Dwell time" can be set.

9-11
 9-3 Positioning Unit Pack Instructions

Brief Description of Processing

Direct
Mnemonic Symbol S1 : Unit No. (common)
Input
S2 : Axis selection (common)
Change sync parameter control point
DPSET Changes the control point of the sync parameter x
No. specified by S3 . For S4 , specify the leading
device for storing the setting value to be changed.
Change all cam switch parameters
Writes the leading cam switch parameter No. to
S3 , and the number of data items to be changed
CPSET x
to S4 . For S5 , specify the leading DM area for
storing setting values, and for S6 specify the
leading work area No.

Cautions when Using Pack Instructions

The following describes the cautions to observe when using pack instructions.

Cautions when using the Editor

When pack instructions are not expanded (regular edit mode)
• Actual ladder circuit sections in pack instructions are not targeted in search
and jump operations.
• Rung Nos. are counted excluding rung Nos. in actual ladder circuit sections in
pack instructions.

9
When pack instructions are expanded
KV-H20S/H40S/H20G POSITIONING UNIT EXTENDED FUNCTIONS

• Expanded pack instructions cannot be edited.

• Instructions and operands in actual ladder circuit sections of pack instructions
can be searched for or jumped to.
• Rung Nos. are counted including rung Nos. in actual ladder circuit sections in
pack instructions.

Note: An expand error occurs and the pack instruction cannot be expanded when
a "pending operand" is used for Positioning Unit pack instruction devices.

Cautions when using the Monitor

Operations during online editing are the same as those when the Editor is used.

9-12
 9-4 Positioning Unit/Simple Setup (Japanese)

9-4 Positioning Unit/Simple Setup (Japanese)

This section describes the basic method of use of Positioning Unit/Simple Setup.

What Is "Positioning Unit/Simple Setup?"

This function is for setting up Positioning Unit KV-H20S/H40S/H20G parameters.
This function allows you to group together only frequently used parameters that are
required for the Positioning Unit so that you can simply set up the ladder program in
the ladder programming screen.

You can set the following parameters in Simple Setup:

• Point parameters ....... Set the operation mode, target value/travel, operation
speed, use of stop sensor, and specified number of stop
sensor pulses for each point.
• System parameters ... Set items related to I/O settings, zero return/jog, and
operation speed. These parameters are related in
common to all operations.
• Speed parameters ..... Set speed Nos.1 to 16.

Restrictions when Using Positioning Unit/Simple Setup

• Positioning Unit/Simple Setup can be used when Positioning Unit KV-
H20S/H40S/H20G is selected with Positioning Unit parameter setup software 9
MOTION BUILDER (KV-H1HW) Ver.2 (Japanese) is installed.

KV-H20S/H40S/H20G POSITIONING UNIT EXTENDED FUNCTIONS

• The Simple Setup function is not supported on the Positioning High-speed
Counter Unit KV-H20.
• Transfer of parameters is not supported in the modem mode.

9-13
 9-4 Positioning Unit/Simple Setup (Japanese)

Starting Up and Editing in Positioning Unit/Simple Setup

Tools (T) Pos unit simple setup (S) Shift + F3

1 Open the Positioning Unit/Simple Setup window.

Select {Tools (T)} {Pos unit simple setup (S)} from the menu.

Displays the DM No. when the DM display

Select the unit to edit. checkbox is marked when indirect parameter are
(INDEX 0 to 15) is used.

Displays the edit axis of

the point parameter. Displays the unit details.

Prints the settings. Displays Help.

Pastes the copied content.

9
Copies the selected content. Displays the
"System
KV-H20S/H40S/H20G

Parameters" dialog
Returns to the box.
previous operation.
Displays the "Speed Parameters" dialog box.

Reflects the settings, and closes the "Positioning Unit Simple Setup" screen.
Positioning Unit Extended Functions

Cancels the changes to the settings, and closes the "Positioning Unit Simple Setup"
screen

2 Set the operation for each point.

Point Parameters

For details on setting items, refer to the "KV-H20S/H40S User's Manual

(Japanese)" and "KV-H20G User's Manual (Japanese)."

9-14
 9-4 Positioning Unit/Simple Setup (Japanese)

System Parameters
System parameter setting items are classified into three types. For details on
each of the setting items, refer to the "KV-H20S/H40S User's Manual" and "KV-
H20G User's Manual."
I/O settings

Zero return/jog

Operation speed
9

KV-H20S/H40S/H20G POSITIONING UNIT EXTENDED FUNCTIONS

Speed Parameters

9-15
 9-4 Positioning Unit/Simple Setup (Japanese)

Positioning Unit/Simple Setup and Other Functions

Printing settings
1 Click the print button in the Positioning Unit/Simple Setup window.

The Print Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Set the details of the print setting items.

(1) Select the display (7) Sets the printing

details. settings for the
Detailed settings point parameters
of point in detail.
parameters are
displayed on the
right side of the
screen.
(8) Discards the
(2) Select the print settings, and
details. closes the Print
Settings dialog
box.
(3) Displays a
preview (for
checking how the (5) Saves the (6) Prints the
print will be made settings. settings.
on paper).
9 (4) Sets the printer.

3 Click the "Print" button.

KV-H20S/H40S/H20G

This prints the details you set.

Details of the Print Settings dialog box
(1) Display details
The settings of each of the parameters are displayed when you mark the
respective radio button.
Positioning Unit Extended Functions

Point parameters System parameters Speed parameters

(2) Selection of print details

Mark the checkbox of each of the parameters you want to print.

9-16
 9-4 Positioning Unit/Simple Setup (Japanese)

(3) Preview
Mark the checkbox of each of the parameters you want to print.

Displays the Displays the Starts printing.

top page. next page.

Displays the Displays the

previous page. last page.

Changes the preview display factor.

Each click toggles between entire
view and 100% view. You can also
select from display factor from the
pulldown menu by clicking the
↑ Example of system parameter button on the right.
preview

(4) Printer setting

Sets the printer to output from.

(5) Save settings

Saves the print parameter settings.
9
(6) Print

KV-H20S/H40S/H20G POSITIONING UNIT EXTENDED FUNCTIONS

Starts printing of the parameters that you set.

(7) Point parameter detailed settings

Sets the print details of point parameters.

Sets the print range.

Sets printing of only settings that have

been changed from their defaults.

(8) Close
Discards settings, and closes the Print Settings dialog box.

9-17
 9-4 Positioning Unit/Simple Setup (Japanese)

Loading/transferring settings
This section describes how to load Positioning Unit/Simple Setup settings from the
PLC and transfer the settings to the PLC.

1 Load/transfer the ladder program.

2 Mark the "Positioning Unit parameter" checkbox in the Transfer Program

window.
The Positioning Unit parameters are loaded/transferred after you have
transferred the ladder program.

3 To select the unit to transfer the parameters to, click the "Unit Setup"
9 button.
The Select Unit window is displayed. Mark the checkbox of the unit to transfer
KV-H20S/H40S/H20G

to.
Positioning Unit Extended Functions

This button allows you to set

the range of parameters to
transfer.

Note: • Positioning Unit parameters cannot be transferred when parameters are

transferred by modem.
• Positioning Unit parameters can be transferred to Memory Card.
• Positioning Unit parameters can be verified with those on the PLC.
• Positioning Unit parameters are transferred even if they have not been
modified.

9-18
 9-4 Positioning Unit/Simple Setup (Japanese)

Appropriating settings from other project files

1 Click the "Details" button in the Simple Setup window.

2 Double-click the specified parameter file.

KV-H20S/H40S/H20G POSITIONING UNIT EXTENDED FUNCTIONS

3 Load positioning parameters from other project files.

Note: When positioning parameters from another project file are loaded, that file
is copied to the current project.

9-19
 9-5 Positioning Unit/Unit Monitor

9-5 Positioning Unit/Unit Monitor

This section describes each of the items in the Unit Monitor screen.
The screens used in the following descriptions are those displayed in the Unit
Monitor for KV-H40S/KV-H20G. On the Unit Monitor for the KV-H20S, the X2 and
Y2 axes are not displayed. Otherwise, the screens are the same as those displayed
in the Unit Monitor for KV-H40S/KV-H20G.

Description of Unit Monitor Screen Items

KV-H40S (18) Operable relays

(1) Run state display (19) Positioning

completed relays
(2) Point No. display
(20) Error in progress
(3) Current coordinates relays
(4) Current speed (21) CW limit switch
ON state
(5) M code output state
(22) CCW limit switch
(6) Repeat count
ON state
(7) Error code
(23) Origin sensor ON
(8) Emergency stop state
input
(24) Stop sensor ON
(9) Button display (A) state

(10) Relay No. display

9 (11) "Operation
running" button
(12) "Decelerate and stop" button (15) "Forced stop" button
KV-H20S/H40S/H20G POSITIONING UNIT EXTENDED FUNCTIONS

(13) "Zero return" button (16) "Reset error" button

(14) "Home position" button (17) "Enable operation" button

KV-H20G

(25) High-speed
counter current (27) Cam switch
value monitor button

(26) Sync monitor button

9-20
 9-5 Positioning Unit/Unit Monitor

Name Function
(1) Run state display Displays the current run state.
Stopped : Operation is stopped, or the unit is standing by for an M code or
continuous operation instruction.
Running : Pulse is being output.
Dwell : The unit is standing by for the preset dwell time.
Zero return : Zero return is being executed on the unit.
Move to home : The unit is moving to home.
(2) Point No. display Displays the point No. where an operation is currently being executed. 0 indicates a
non-operation state. 1 to 400 indicate point Nos., while 501 to 900 indicate that an
auxiliary arc is being executed on points 1 to 400. In a servo ready standby state, the
unit stands by at the previously active value, and the new point No. is displayed when
servo ready input turns ON.
(3) Current coordinates Displays the current coordinates.
(4) Current speed This is the current operation speed. This speed includes acceleration and deceleration.
(5) M code output state This is the No. of the M code that is currently being output.
(6) Repeat count This is the number of repeated executions. At the first execution that is not repeated,
"0" is displayed. The count returns to "0" when it reaches "65535".
(7) Error code Displays the number of the error that occurred.
(8) Emergency stop input Displays the ON/OFF state of the emergency stop input that is connected to the input
connector.
(9) Button display Displays/hides the buttons at (A) above.
KV-H40S

KV-H20S/H40S/H20G POSITIONING UNIT EXTENDED FUNCTIONS

When "Hide" is set
(10) Relay No. display Display items by an assigned relay No.
(11) "Start running" button Resumes operation.
(12) "Decelerate and stop" button Decelerates and stops the current operation.
(13) "Zero return" button Executes a zero return.
(14) "Home position" button Returns the axes to the home position.
(15) "Forced stop" button Immediately stops operation.
Turns the forced stop relay ON.
(16) "Reset error" button Resets the error. When the error is cleared, the forced stop relay is also turned OFF.
(17) "Enable operation" button Turns the start operation relay ON.
(18) Operable relays Displays whether communications is being performed correctly with the CPU unit, and
whether operation is possible. If operation is possible, "ON" is displayed. Otherwise,
"OFF" is displayed.

9-21
 9-5 Positioning Unit/Unit Monitor

Name Function
(19) Positioning completed relays This relay turns ON when point operation is completed. When operation is completed,
"ON" is displayed, and when operation is not completed, "OFF" is displayed.
(20) Error in progress relays This relay turns ON when an error occurs. The details of the error are displayed at "(7)
Error code." When an error has occurred, "ON" is displayed. When an error has not
occurred, "OFF" is displayed.
(21) CW limit switch ON state Displays the ON/OFF state of the CW limit switch that is connected to the input
connector.
(22) CCW limit switch ON state Displays the ON/OFF state of the CCW limit switch that is connected to the input
connector.
(23) Origin sensor ON state Displays the ON/OFF state of the origin sensor that is connected to the input
connector.
(24) Stop sensor ON state Displays the ON/OFF state of the stop sensor that is connected to the input connector.
(25) High-speed counter current Displays the current value of the high-speed counter.
value "KV-H20G User's Manual (Japanese)"
(26) "Sync" button Displays the sync monitor screen. This monitor is displayed when the sync function is
used.

9
KV-H20S/H40S/H20G POSITIONING UNIT EXTENDED FUNCTIONS

"KV-H20G User's Manual (Japanese)"

(27) "Cam" button Displays the cam switch monitor screen. This monitor is displayed when the cam
switch function is used.

"KV-H20G User's Manual (Japanese)"

Note: For safety's sake, use the KV main unit at a location where the emergency
stop switch connected to the KV main unit can be immediately operated.
The "Forced stop" button on the Unit Monitor does not operate if a
communications error occurs.

9-22
Chapter 10
KV-P SERIES PANEL EDITOR
This chapter describes how to display the two panels "data access panel" and
"message panel" on the KV-P series, and the operation of the switches in
these panels.

10-1 Starting Up and Exiting Panel Editor .......................... 10-2

10-2 Panel Editor .............................................................. 10-4

10-3 System Parameters ................................................... 10-8

10-4 Setting the Data Access Panel ................................. 10-12

10-5 Setting the Message Panel ...................................... 10-14

 10-1 Starting Up and Exiting Panel Editor

10-1 Starting Up and Exiting Panel Editor

This section describes how to start up and exit the KV-P series Panel Editor.

How to Start Up Panel Editor

Selecting or creating a new project

1 Select {File} {New

project}.
The Input Project Name
dialog box is displayed.

2 Enter the project name, and

click the "OK" button.

"Creating New Projects"

(page 6-27)

3 Enter the model, and click the

"OK" button.
Select KV-P16.

10
KV-P SERIES PANEL EDITOR

Starting Up Panel Editor

1 Select
{Tools (T)}
{PANEL
EDITOR
(F12)} in
that order
from the
menu.
This starts
up Panel Editor.
[Tip]
The System Parameters dialog box is displayed if you start Panel Editor for the
first time after having created a new project.

Other procedure
• Press the F12 key.
• Click the button.

10-2
 10-1 Starting Up and Exiting Panel Editor

How to Exit Panel Editor

Closing Panel Editor
1 Click the "OK" button.
This exits Panel Editor.

10

KV-P SERIES PANEL EDITOR

10-3
 10-2 Panel Editor

10-2 Panel Editor

Panel Editor is used for setting the data access panel, data access switches,
message panel, and the various functions on the KV-P series.

The following describes the functions of each of the areas on Panel Editor.

(1) Menu buttons

(3) Data access panel

system parameters
area
(2) Panel preview area
(4) Message panel
system parameters
area

(5) Panel edit area

Item Function
(1) Menu buttons Set the display details of each panel or change the settings using
the buttons at the top of the Panel Editor.
"Menu Buttons" (page 10-5)

10 (2) Panel preview

area
This preview area allows you to check how the page currently
being edited or edited pages will be displayed on the panel even if
a KV-P series main unit is not connected.
KV-P SERIES PANEL EDITOR

"Panel preview" (page 10-5)

(3) Data access This area displays the basic settings of the data access panel.
panel system Setting values displayed on a white background can be changed in
parameters area this screen. Setting values displayed on a gray background are
automatically assigned.
"Data access panel system parameters" (page 10-9)
(4) Message panel This area displays the basic settings of the message panel. Setting
system values displayed on a white background can be changed in this
parameters area screen. Setting values displayed on a gray background are
automatically assigned.
"Message panel system parameters" (page 10-10)
(5) Panel edit area This area is for setting the pages within the range page No.0 to
page No.128.
"Panel edit (Data access panel on edit)" (page 10-12)
"Panel edit (Message panel on edit)" (page 10-14)

10-4
 10-2 Panel Editor

Menu Buttons
Ladder Edit view
This button allows you to resize the panel so that you can edit the ladder program
while referencing details in panel editing.

Clicking "Ladder Edit view" button moves the Panel Editor to the right
side of the screen. The left and right areas are now displayed at the top
and bottom, respectively.

To return to the regular size, click the "Return" button.

These areas display both the settings of the data access panel and
message panel, and are handy when editing ladders.
Regular display Ladder edit view

When KV BUILDER is in the Editor mode, settings currently displayed

in the ladder edit view can be edited (modified). When KV BUILDER is
in the Monitor mode, settings are only displayed and cannot be edited.

Data access panel

The panel edit area switches to the area for editing the data access panel.
"10-4 Setting the Data Access Panel" (page 10-12)
Message panel
The panel edit area switches to the area for editing the message panel.
10
"10-5 Setting the Message Panel" (page 10-14)

KV-P SERIES PANEL EDITOR

Panel preview
This preview allows you to check how the page currently being edited or edited
pages will be displayed on the panel if a KV-P series main unit is not available.
During editing of the data access panel During editing of the message panel

Only the following switch operations can be simulated.

• Clicking on the data access panel switches to the next page whose NEXT
group setting is set to "Standard".
• Clicking on the data access panel clears the timer or counter current values.
• Clicking function switches ( to ) to which the message panel plate
display is set inverts the display of that plate.

10-5
 10-2 Panel Editor

Print/print preview
This button displays the Print/Print Preview dialog box.
This section describes the settings in the KV-P16 Print Setup dialog box.
For details on how to execute printing, see "6-17 Printing Ladder Programs " (page
6-161).

■ KV-P16 Panel Editor print settings

(1) Print system parameters

(2) Print data access panel

(3) Print message panel

Item Description Default

(1) Print system Determines whether or not to print the system
ON
parameters parameters.
(2) Print data access Determines whether to print all pages settings or to
Print all
panel print only the settings of specified pages.
(3) Print message Determines whether to print all pages settings or to
Print all
panel print only the settings of specified pages.

[Tip]
10 All page settings are set to be printed as the default setting.
KV-P SERIES PANEL EDITOR

Load device comment

This button loads device comments from the ladder program currently being edited.
1 On the "panel edit
area" specify the page
to load the device
comments to the
display data plate.
Click [Page No.] or [Page callup device (relay)].

f you specify multiple

rungs as in the figure on
the right, the device
comments of "page
callup devices (relays)"
in that range are loaded.

2 Click the " " button.

The device comments are loaded from the ladder program currently being
edited to the display data plate of the selected page.

10-6
 10-2 Panel Editor

Option
This button sets the display details of the panel edit area.
Mark the checkboxes of the items to display, and click the "OK" button.

For details of display items on the data access panel, see "10-4 Setting the Data
Access Panel" (page 10-12).
For details of display items on the message panel, see "10-5 Setting the Message
Panel" (page 10-14).

Select display of this item.

10
"OK" button

KV-P SERIES PANEL EDITOR

This button enables (applies) the settings made on Panel Editor, and returns to KV
BUILDER. Clicking this button, however, does not save the settings to the PC.
Settings are automatically saved as additional information of that ladder program
when the ladder program is saved on KV BUILDER.

"Cancel" button
Disables the details set on Panel Editor, and returns to KV BUILDER.

"Help" button
Displays the Panel Editor online help.
If you use Help, you can enter an item (keyword) that you are not sure about to
search for an explanation.

10-7
 10-3 System Parameters

10-3 System Parameters

The System Setting window is displayed when Panel Editor is started up for the first
time after creating a new project.
Set "page callup device: leading relay/DM" and other items in this window. Values
set in this window are reflected in each of the panel settings.
System Parameters Window

(1) Data access panel

system parameters

(2) Message panel

system parameters

(3) Switch/buzzer
configuration

(4) "Auto" button (5) "OK" button (6) "Cancel" button

Item Function
(1) Data access Sets the following details:
panel system • Page callup devices on the data access panel
parameters • Data memory (DM) for storing the currently displayed page No.
• Data memory (DM) for storing reset operations
10 • Data memory (DM) for storing the time that the backlight is
turned OFF
"Data access panel system parameters" page 10-9
KV-P SERIES PANEL EDITOR

(2) Message panel Sets the following details:

system • Page callup devices on the data access panel
parameters • Data memory (DM) for storing the currently displayed page No.
"Message panel system parameters" page 10-10
(3) Switch/buzzer Sets the following details:
configuration • Relays to be assigned to switches
• Relays for turning on buzzers (sound emitted when switch is
pressed)
"Switch/buzzer configuration" page 10-11
(4) "Auto" button When the "Auto" button is clicked, the leading device is
automatically set.
(5) "OK" button Enables (applies) the details set in the System Parameters dialog
box, and returns to the Panel Editor.
(6) "Cancel" button Disable the details set in the System Parameters dialog box, and
returns to the Panel Editor.

10-8
 10-3 System Parameters

Data access panel system parameters

(1) Page call dev:

leading relay/DM

(2) On display page No. DM

(3) RESET configuration DM

Item Function
(1) Page call dev: Sets the page callup device on the data access panel.
leading relay/DM When a relay is set (128 relays are occupied leading from the
relay No. that is set)
• The relay that is set is assigned to page No.1, and continuous
relays are automatically assigned to subsequent pages.
When a data memory (DM) is set (one DM is occupied)
• The data memory (DM) that is set becomes the storage
destination of the "page No. to be displayed in the panel."
(2) On display page The data memory (DM) that is set becomes the storage destination
No. DM of the "page No. currently displayed in the data access panel."
• When page No.0 to page No.127 is displayed on the panel, the
value of the "On display page No. DM" becomes 0 to 127 (that
is, the page No. is stored as it is).
• When page No.128 is displayed on the panel, a value obtained
by adding 1000 to the page No. of the currently stored message
panel is stored to "message display page save DM". For
example, if the value of the On display page No. DM is "1016",
this means that "page No.16" on the message panel is currently
displayed on the data access panel.
(3) RESET
configuration DM
The data memory (DM) that is set becomes the storage destination
of "operation when " " switch is pressed."
10
Backlight OFF When the data memory (DM) of the "RESET configuration DM" is

KV-P SERIES PANEL EDITOR

time setting DM set, the next data memory is assigned as the backlight OFF time
setting DM. (When the RESET configuration DM is set to
"DM1471", the backlight OFF time setting DM is automatically
assigned to "DM1472".)

10-9
 10-3 System Parameters

Message panel system parameters

(1) Page call dev:

leading relay/DM

(2) On display page No. DM

Item Function
(1) Page call dev: Sets the page callup device on the message panel.
leading relay/DM When a relay is set (128 relays are occupied leading from the
relay No. that is set)
• The relay that is set is assigned to page No.1, and continuous
relays are automatically assigned to subsequent pages.
When a data memory (DM) is set (one DM is occupied)
• The data memory (DM) that is set becomes the storage
destination of the "page No. to be displayed in the panel."
(2) On display page The data memory (DM) that is set becomes the storage destination
No. DM of the "page No. currently displayed in the message panel."
• When page No.0 to page No.127 is displayed on the panel, the
value of the "On display page No. DM" becomes 0 to 127 (that
is, the page No. is stored as it is).
• When page No.128 is displayed on the panel, a value obtained
by adding 1000 to the page No. of the currently stored data
access panel is stored to "data display page save DM". For
example, if the value of the On display page No. DM is "1016",
this means that "page No.16" on the message panel is currently
displayed on the message panel.

10
KV-P SERIES PANEL EDITOR

10-10
 10-3 System Parameters

Switch/buzzer configuration

(1) Switch leading relay

Item Function
(1) Switch leading When the leading switch assignment relay No. is set, continuous
relay relays are as set as follows to switches or functions. (11 relays are
occupied leading from the relay No. that is set)
Example) When internal relay 04600 is set as the leading switch
assignment relay No.
Relay No. Switch/Function
04600 Switch
04601 Switch
04602 Switch
04603 Switch
04604 Switch
04605 Switch
04606 Switch
04607 Switch
04608 Switch
04609 Switch
04610 Buzzer setting

10

KV-P SERIES PANEL EDITOR

10-11
 10-4 Setting the Data Access Panel

10-4 Setting the Data Access Panel

Edit the details to be displayed on the KV-P series data access panel.

Edit the details to be displayed on the data access panel.

(1) Data access panel

system parameters
display area
(2) Panel preview

(3) Panel edit (Data

access panel on edit)

Item Function
(1) Data access This area displays the basic settings of the data access panel.
panel system Setting values displayed on a white background can be changed in
parameters this screen. Setting values displayed on a gray background are
display area automatically assigned. To change the settings, refer to "System
Parameters" (page 10-8).
10 (2) Panel preview This preview area allows you to check how the page currently
being edited or edited pages will be displayed on the panel even if
KV-P SERIES PANEL EDITOR

a KV-P series main unit is not connected.

"Panel preview" (page 10-5)
(3) Panel edit (Data Edits the display details of the data access panel.
access panel on Items that are displayed change according to the option settings.
edit)
"Option" (page 10-7)

10-12
 10-4 Setting the Data Access Panel

Panel edit (Data access panel on edit)

The items that are displayed change according to the option settings. This section
describes all of the items.
"Option" (page 10-7)

Item Function
Page No. Multiple sets of details to be displayed on the data access panel
are available and are managed by page No. Page No.1 to No.128
can be used.
Page call device Displays "relays" or "data memories (DM)" for calling up each
page.
Display device The current value and setting value of the device set here are
displayed on the second line of the data access panel.
Data plate Enter the text to be displayed on the data access panel.
Font color Select one of "green," "red" or "orange" as the text of the font color
to be displayed.
Disp mode Select the background of the text to be displayed.
Scroll speed Select one of "OFF," "standard" or "fast" as the scroll speed.
Blink Set whether or not to display text blinking.
NEXT group Select one of "standard", "pro" or "free" as the page group.
Data length Set whether to handle the length of display data as 1 word or 2
words.
Data format Select either of "unsigned," "signed" or "Hex" as the format of
display data.
Decimal Set the number of digits past the decimal point when displaying
data.
Change data Set whether or not data displayed on the data access panel can be
changed by the data access keys.
Display setting value Select whether or not to display setting values when the display
device is a timer or a counter.
10

KV-P SERIES PANEL EDITOR

10-13
 10-5 Setting the Message Panel

10-5 Setting the Message Panel

Edit the details to be displayed on the KV-P series message panel.

Edit the details to be displayed on the message panel.

(2) Panel preview

(1) Message panel
system parameters
display area

(3) Panel edit (Message

panel on edit)

Item Function
(1) Message panel This area displays the basic settings of the message panel. Setting
system values displayed on a white background can be changed in this
parameters screen. Setting values displayed on a gray background are
display area automatically assigned. To change the settings, refer to "System
Parameters" (page 10-8).
10 (2) Panel preview This preview area allows you to check how the page currently
being edited or edited pages will be displayed on the panel even if
KV-P SERIES PANEL EDITOR

a KV-P series main unit is not connected.

"Panel preview" (page 10-5)
(3) Panel edit Edits the display details of the message panel.
(Message panel Items that are displayed change according to the option settings.
on edit)
"Option" (page 10-7)

10-14
 10-5 Setting the Message Panel

Panel edit (Message panel on edit)

The items that are displayed change according to the option settings. This section
describes all of the items.
"Option" (page 10-7)

Item Function
Page No. Multiple sets of details to be displayed on the message panel are
available and are managed by page No. Page No.1 to No.128 can
be used.
Page call device Displays "relays" or "data memories (DM)" for calling up each
page.
Priority display page Select "Priority" to display this page preferentially without waiting
for display of other pages when this page is displayed.
Font size Select from "X1", "X2" or "X4" as the size of characters in display
messages.
Message Enter the text to be displayed on the message panel.
Font color Select one of "green," "red" or "orange" as the text of the font color
to be displayed.
Disp mode Select the background of the text to be displayed.
Scroll speed Select one of "OFF," "standard" or "fast" as the scroll speed.
Blink Set whether or not to display text blinking.
Function switch Enter the plate of each of the , or function
plate switches.
NEXT group Select one of "standard", "pro" or "free" as the page group.
Data length Set whether to handle the length of display data as 1 word or 2
words.
Data format Select either of "unsigned," "signed" or "Hex" as the format of
display data.
Decimal Set the number of digits past the decimal point when displaying
data.
Change data Set whether or not data displayed on the data access panel can be 10
changed by the data access keys.

KV-P SERIES PANEL EDITOR

Display setting value Select whether or not to display setting values when the display
device is a timer or a counter.

10-15
Appendices
Refer to error message tables if trouble occurs during operation or if you want
to find out how to remedy errors that occur during programming.
Refer to lists of instructions, device Nos., sample programs and the table of
circuits registered to the circuit library as required during programming. A list
of shortcut key commands is also provided as a quick reference.

1 Error Messages .................................................................. A-2

2 List of Instructions........................................................... A-16

3 List of Device Nos. ........................................................... A-42

4 List of Conversion Rules................................................. A-59

5 List of Sample Programs................................................. A-70

6 List of Circuits Registered to Circuit Library ................ A-71

7 List of Shortcut Key Commands .................................... A-74

8 Programming Hints.......................................................... A-85

9 Remedies for Frequently Occurring Communications

Errors ................................................................................ A-88

10 Index.................................................................................. A-90
 1 Error Messages

1 Error Messages
This appendix describes error messages that are displayed during operation and
how to remedy error messages that are displayed.

System Errors
These error messages are displayed when the overall system (including Windows)
becomes unstable.

If any of the following error messages is displayed, immediately save the

required file, temporarily exit KV BUILDER, then reboot Windows.
If these errors occur frequently, contact your sales agent.

Error message Error message

Cannot open document. Cannot free machine code memory.
Cannot get font. Jump failed
Cannot make window. ClrList execution error
Start from Editor. AddList execution error
Window is not there to open. GetList execution error
Failed to initialize window Empty program
Could not obtain information relating to window. Illegal specified list type
Monitor handle was not registered. Illegal write rung position
Simulator handle was not registered. Illegal write column position
Ladder data error Display start rung data in error
Failed to write cell data Cannot find program you are attempting to delete.
Failed to read cell data Content of rung cut buffer in error
Illegal LDKPRG.DLL content Program information acquisition error
Illegal LCK.DLL content Reverse conversion failed
Failed to acquire device context Change failed
Failed to write device Failed to acquire comment
Device information access error Comment area is disabled.
Failed to acquire machine code Insufficient memory for macro information
APPENDICES

List access error Illegal element

Parameter acquisition error

A-2
 1 Error Messages

Memory Errors
This error messages are displayed when Windows runs out of memory.

If any of the following message is displayed, either exit other applications that
are running, or increase memory.

Error message Error message

Not enough memory Insufficient memory. Restart after existing other
Global memory acquisition error applications.

Cannot secure memory Cannot register new programs LDKPRG.DLL.

Insufficient memory for list Cannot secure memory for new rung

File Errors
These error messages are displayed when a file is damaged.

If any of the following messages is displayed, check the disk using

SCANDISK. Repair any abnormalities that are found. Then, re-install KV
BUILDER.

Error message Error message

Could not open ladder diagram file. Failed to read text file.
Failed to read ladder diagram file. Failed to write text file.
Failed to write ladder diagram file. Could not open comment file
Could not open comment file. Illegal LDKPRG.DLL content
Failed to read file. Illegal LCK.DLL content
Failed to write file.
Could not open text file.

APPENDICES

A-3
 1 Error Messages

Installer Errors
These error messages are displayed if the file is not found at the appropriate place.
Something has probably caused the file in the folder (directory) at the installation
destination to be deleted.

If any of these messages is displayed, re-install KV BUILDER.

Error message Error message

Cannot load LDKPRG.DLL Error LBK.KSU : Failed to read text file
Cannot load LCK.DLL. Error LBK.EMS : Failed to read text file
Failed to start Monitor Error LBK.KSU : Failed to write text file
Failed to start Simulator
Could not find required DLL file “xxx.DLL.”

Errors That Occur on Editor

These error messages are displayed on Editor.

Error message Cause Remedy

Reverse conversion error A syntax error occurred when the Display the Error List (See "Displaying
program was read from KV-10/16/24/40, errors" on page 6-142), check the
KV-700 or KZ-300/350 for conversion to error, and change the program.
a ladder diagram. See "List of Conversion Rules" on
page A-59.
Conversion error A syntax error occurred at end of editing. Display the Error List (See "Displaying
errors" on page 6-142), check the
error, and change the program.
Specified label is already used. The specified label is already assigned Specify different labels for each
to another device. device.
Cannot insert any more as there are The program cannot be edited as it is too Limit the number of rungs in the
too many lines large. ladder program to 29998.
Number of illegal instructions or The number of entered operands is Check the format of the instruction
operands either too many or too few for that according to the manual or Help.
APPENDICES

instruction.
Operand x : Unavailable device An unavailable device has been
specified.
Instruction does not exist Wrong instruction mnemonic Check the instruction specifications
Illegal No.1 operand The range of operands is outside the according to the manual or Help.
Illegal No.2 operand settable range.

Illegal No.3 operand

Cannot write to comment rung The file might be corrupted. Check the disk for any errors using
Illegal comment file format SCANDISK or other diagnostics
function.
Illegal file format. Reading will be
canceled.

A-4
 1 Error Messages

Error message Cause Remedy

Cannot read CPU positioning Either the file has not be made by CPU Make a CPU positioning parameter
parameter setup file. positioning parameter editing, or the file setup file by CPU positioning
has been deleted. parameter edit.
That project already exists. A project of the same name exists. Change the project name.
Use characters allowed as file An illegal program name has been used. Use only characters that are allowed
names.(\\ / : * ? "" < > | characters in file names.
cannot be used)"
Illegal operand The Unit has been deleted from ladder Search for invalid operands using the
conversion or from Unit Editor. batch search function, and correct the
ladder program.
See "Clearing Invalid Operands" on
page 6-143.
PLC type code error. On KV An attempt was made to read a ladder Use LADDER BUILDER for KZ to
BUILDER, files other than KV- file for a PLC type setting not supported convert the ladder file to a PLC type
10(16), KV-24(40), KZ-350/300, KV- by KV BUILDER. supported by KV BUILDER, and read
700, KV-700+M cannot be handled. the file on KV BUILDER.
Different PLC mode. Perform after An attempt was made to open a file for Files for KV-700 and files for KV-
closing all documents of different KV-10/16/24/40 or KZ-300/350 when a 10/16/24/40 or KZ-300/350 cannot be
PLC type mode. file for KV-700 was open. Or, the reverse opened at the same time.
operation was attempted.
Program too large. Cannot transfer The program to transfer is too large. Disable transfer of rung comments to
to PLC. compress the ladder program to
transfer.
Amount of device comments too Volume of device comments is too large. Either cancel transfer of device
large. Cannot transfer to PLC. comments, or compress the volume of
comments to transfer at the comment
transfer setting.
File: contains an invalid path. A file in the project folder was read by This is automatically corrected from
"auto-read" or "last used file", however the next startup.
the folder was deleted.

APPENDICES

A-5
 1 Error Messages

Errors That Occur by Conversion

These error messages are displayed during conversion.
Eliminate the cause of the error, and then execute conversion.
Error message Cause Remedy
Will abort due to insufficient memory Ran out of memory for conversion. Make sure that there is enough
memory or free space on hard disk.
Too many errors. Processing will be Conversion was canceled as 100 or Remedy each of the errors.
canceled. more errors occurs during conversion.
First operand is not necessary. Wrong instruction mnemonic Check the instruction specifications
Second operand is not necessary. (This error frequently occurs when the according to the manual or Help.
Third operand is not necessary. mnemonic list is edited with the file
First operand is the wrong type. opened in a third-party editor or word
processor.)
Second operand is the wrong type.
Third operand is the wrong type.
The value of the first operand is
invalid.

The value of the second operand is

invalid.

The value of the third operand is

invalid.

First operand is missing.

Second operand is missing.
Third operand is missing.
Instruction is duplicated. Single-use instructions are used twice or Limit use of these instructions or
more. operands to once only.
Operand is duplicated. Single-use operands are used twice or
more.
Cannot use in interrupt. An illegal instruction was used in the Change the program, and process the
interrupt program. program by other methods.
Instruction position error The sub-routine or interrupt program Program the program between the
was programmed before the END END and ENDH instructions.
instruction.
Sub-routine nesting overflow The number of nested sub-routines Change the program so that the
exceeds the nesting level of four. number of nested sub-routines is four
or less.
Undefined sub-routine The program has ended with a called Program the sub-routine program
sub-routine still undefined. between the END and ENDH
instructions.
Sub-routine No. is duplicated. Two or more sub-routines of the same Sub-routines of the same No. cannot
APPENDICES

No. are defined. be defined in duplicate. Change the

program so that only one sub-routine
of the same No. is defined.
Pair instruction nesting overflow The number of nested instructions Change the program so that the
programmed in the program exceeds the number of nested instructions
nesting limit. programmed in the program is within
the nesting limit.
Illegal pair instruction response Instructions that must be used in pairs Change the program that these
are not programmed as a pair. instructions are programmed in pairs.
STG instruction is connected in The program contains a block OR- Do not OR-connect (serially) to the
parallel. connected (serially) to the STG STG instruction.
instruction.
No END instruction The END instruction cannot be found in Program the END instruction in the
the program up to the ENDH instruction. program before the ENDH instruction.
No ENDH instruction The ENDH instruction is not Program the ENDH instruction at the
programmed at the final rung of the final rung of the program.
program.
STG instruction position error The STG instruction is not programmed Program the STG instruction at the
at the start of the block. start of the block.
SFT instruction operand error The range of SFT instruction operands is Change the operands to within the
outside the settable range. settable range.

A-6
 1 Error Messages

Error message Cause Remedy

No corresponding CTH instruction The program does not contain the Program the corresponding CTH
corresponding CTH instruction even instruction in the program up to the
though the CTC instruction is used. END instruction.
Corresponding instruction undefined The program does not contain the Program the corresponding
corresponding instruction even though instruction in the program up to the
timer, counters, and other contacts are END instruction.
used.
Cannot use in sub-routine An unavailable instruction is Change the program, and process the
programmed in the sub-routine. program by other methods.
Wrong PLC type Wrong instruction mnemonic Check the instruction specifications
Illegal 1st rung (This error frequently occurs when the according to the manual or Help.
Mnemonic is incorrect. mnemonic list is edited with the file
opened in a third-party editor or word
Illegal No.1 operand processor.)
Illegal No.2 operand
Illegal No.3 operand
Token after mnemonic is
unnecessary.
Token after first operand is
unnecessary.
Token after second operand is
unnecessary.
Token after third operand is
unnecessary.
KV code file was not generated.
No ladder drawing This error cannot be corrected in the Check the instruction specifications,
Too many instructions ladder program as instructions are not and re-program again.
arranged correctly.
No preceding block to connect
No following block to connect
Instructions not pair
Wrong use of CON instruction
Illegal multi-input element connection
Output elements cannot be
connected in parallel.
Input element for connecting to
output line APPENDICES
Output element for connecting to bus
line
Terminal element not for connection
to output line
Parallel connection block too long The block cannot be converted to a Change the circuit to reduce the
ladder program as the serial connection number of instructions in the serial
block contains too many instructions. connection block.
Maximum block line is exceeded. The ladder diagram contains a block Change the program so that blocks
comprising over 100 rungs. comprise less than 100 rungs.
No connection Instruction symbols are not located on Program instruction symbols on the
the path between bus lines. path between bus lines.
Illegal short-circuit Two points that must not be short- Do not short these points.
circuited are shorted.
Illegal parallel connection The serial connection between blocks is Change the circuit to ensure a correct
incorrect. serial connection.
Illegal connection Instruction symbols are connected in the Change the circuit to correct the
wrong way. connection.

A-7
 1 Error Messages

Errors That Occur on Simulator

These error messages are displayed on Simulator.

Error message Cause Remedy

Cannot fit in graduations. Widen The scale having the specified gradation Widen the Registration Monitor
Registration Monitor window cannot be drawn as the Registration window.
Monitor window is not wide enough.

System Errors (displayed on Monitor)

If any of these messages occurs, exit and then reboot KV BUILDER.
If these messages occur frequently, re-install KV BUILDER. If this does not
remedy the problem, contact your sales agent.

Error message Error message

Illegal LDKPRG.DLL content SHARE.EXE not loaded, or shared area locked
Failed to initialize window Locking of locked area is requested.
Failed to acquire device context Cannot display binary in 32 bits.
Hardware error Monitor handle was not registered

File-related Errors (displayed on Monitor)

If any of these messages occurs, make sure that the file displayed in the
message or the file that was being operated on before the message was
displayed is at the specified location. If it is not at the specified location, re-
install KV BUILDER, or re-specify the location containing the specified file.

Error message Error message

Cannot find file Failed to read file
Cannot access disk. Illegal path Failed to write file
Too many opened files Failed to read previous transfer program data
File accessing is inhibited. Probable cause is that file Failed to write window state
to be installed was opened in Editor.
APPENDICES

Cannot read program. Failed to transfer

Illegal file handle is used. Write-protected. Force operation?
Active directory cannot be deleted. Failed to save latest transferred file
Directory full Start from Editor.
File pointer setup error File is corrupted. Failed to read file
Disk full. Delete unwanted file and then try again. Invalid unit setup information. Check setup on Unit
Reached end of file Editor.
Failed to save work state Write protected. Cannot write.

A-8
 1 Error Messages

Errors That Occur When Monitor is Started Up and Communications Errors

These error messages are displayed when a Monitor is started or communications
is being performed.

Error message Cause Remedy

PLC type does not match. The PLC type set in the ladder program Correctly set the PLC type at "PLC
does not match the PLC type at the type".
communications destination.
Wrong password The wrong password has been entered. Enter the correct password.
Processing is aborted as PLC state The PLC state changed during program Return to editing, and transfer the
has changed. transfer. program again.
USB communications is unstable. USB communications is unstable. Exit the Monitor, re-connect USB
Disconnect then connect USB cable, cable connections, and retry
and start communications again. communications.
If this error re-occurs frequently, re-
install the USB driver.
See "9 Remedies for Frequently
Occurring Communications Errors"
(page A-88)
Cannot open USB. The USB port cannot be opened. Make sure that the USB driver is
correctly installed on the Device
Manger in the Control Panel.
Re-install the USB driver if it is already
installed.
USB port is disconnected. The USB port can no longer be used. Check the USB cable connection, and
make sure that the driver is installed
on the Device Manager.
Failed to acquire PLC information PLC information could not be obtained at Check the communications line
Failed to read unit setup information start of communications. connection and communications
from PLC settings.
COM port cannot be opened. The communications port (COM) can no Make sure that the COM port selected
longer be used. on the Device Manager can be used,
and that the COM port is not being
used by other applications.
Modem is not connected, or not ON. The modem did not return the response. Check the modem connection and
power supply.
Connection target busy The connected device is busy. Wait a while before retrying the APPENDICES
connection.
NO CARRIER Communications between the modem Check the connections.
NO DIAL and connected devices is not successful.

A-9
 1 Error Messages

Errors during Ethernet Communications

The following errors are displayed during communications using the Ethernet setup
or the Ethernet port.

Error message Cause Remedy

Communications port cannot be Cannot establish connection with the set Check the connection settings,
opened. port. connection path, connector cables,
and each of the port settings and
states for devices connected to the
personal computer.
Illegal device No. An illegal value was entered for the Enter the correct value.
device No.
Enter address. A value has not been entered to the IP Enter the IP address.
address at the Ethernet connection.
Illegal IP address An illegal value was entered for the IP Enter the correct IP address.
address at the Ethernet connection.
Illegal port No. An illegal value was entered for the port Enter a value within the range 0 to
No. at the Ethernet connection. 65535 for the port No.
**This file does not exist. Either open Either there is no connection destination Either make a new connection
existing file, or create new file. list file to reference, the file is opened, or destination list file, or retry the
the file is read-only. operation after eliminating the cause
on the left.
Connection destination name Text strings containing "=" cannot be Enter a text string that does not
contains illegal characters. entered for the connection destination contain "=".
name.
Illegal address specification An illegal value was entered for the IP Enter the correct IP address.
address at the Ethernet connection.
APPENDICES

A-10
 1 Error Messages

PLC Unit Errors

These errors are displayed when an error occurs on the KV-700 CPU Unit, KV-
10/16/24/40 Basic Unit and KZ-350/300 CPU Unit.

Error message Cause Remedy

Illegal instruction code error The ladder program contains an Correct the ladder.
unsupported instruction.
Unsupported device used error An unspecified instruction is
programmed to an operand whose
device is unsupported.
Device No. out-of-range error The device No. specified to the operand
is in error.
Object size exceeded error The ladder object size exceeds the Reduce the ladder size.
capacity.
Code size exceeded error The ladder code size exceeds the
capacity.
Unit setup information error The extended/special unit settings are Use the ladder support software or
corrupted. Memory Card to register the unit
No unit setup information error The unit setup information is not setup information.
registered.
Unit not connected error Extended/special units are set in the unit Turn the KV OFF, and connect the
setup information though they are not extended/special units set on Unit
actually connected. Editor.
Bus BSI error Bus communications might have Remove any sources of noise. If this
stopped due to noise. error re-occurs, contact your agent.
Number of units error The number of actually connected units Turn the KV OFF, and connect the
differs from the number of extended/special units set in Unit
special/extended units set in Unit Editor. Editor.
Extended bus communications error Bus communications might have Remove any sources of noise. If this
stopped due to noise. error re-occurs, contact your agent.
End unit not connected error The end unit is not connected. Turn the KV OFF, and connect the
end unit.
Flash memory error The flash ROM has reached the end of Contact your agent.
its service life.
RAM error Hardware malfunction
Change extended memory error Extended memory has been removed or Perform an all clear.
inserted. APPENDICES
Backup battery voltage drop error The backup battery voltage has Replace the backup battery.
dropped.
Memory error RAM content is corrupted as backup Replace the backup battery, and
battery voltage has dropped. perform an all clear.
Calendar timer error The clock value might be corrupted as Replace the backup battery, check the
backup battery voltage has dropped. clock value, and reset the clock as
necessary.
NMI error Hardware malfunction Contact your agent.
Memory Card error The Memory Card might be corrupted. Execute SCANDISK. Use a new
Operation may have stopped due to Memory Card. Remove any sources
magnetism or noise. of magnetism or noise.
Watchdog timer error Hardware error Turn the KV OFF. If this does not
Stack overflow remedy the problem, a probable
cause might be a malfunction.
Contact your agent.

A-11
 1 Error Messages

Error message Cause Remedy

System error System protection error occurred. If this error occurs frequently, contact
Device range error your agent.

Resource error
Error buffer overflow The number of system internal errors Clear the error, and turn the power on.
exceeds 16. If this error occurs frequently, contact
your agent.
Error buffer error An error occurred in the system internal Clear the error, and turn the power on.
buffer error. If this error occurs frequently, contact
your agent.
Auto read error Automatic reading failed. Operation may Remove any sources of magnetism or
have stopped due to magnetism or noise.
noise.
Write-protect might be enabled. Disable the memory switch.
File contents might have a problem. Store the program and data file in a
format matched to the environment.
No message error System protection error occurred. If this error occurs frequently, contact
your agent.
Unit type error The type of actually connected units Turn the KV OFF, and connect the
differs from the number of extended/special units set on Unit
special/extended units set in Unit Editor. Editor.
PLC initial state The PLC is initialized.
Cycle time error The scan time is 300 ms or faster. Review the program.
Make sure that there are not too many
repeated operations by the FOR to
NEXT instructions.
Check to see if the interrupt program
is not being executed at a fast scan
speed.
No program error The program is not registered. Register the program and then
continue operation.
CALL nest error The number of nested sub-routines This error occurs during ladder
exceeds the nesting level of four. execution. Review the ladder paying
FOR next error The number of nested FOR to NEXT attention to how sub-routines are used
instructions exceeds the nesting level of and how the INT instruction is used.
eight.
INT nest error Five or more interrupts occurred This error occurs during ladder
APPENDICES

simultaneously. execution. Review the ladder paying

attention to how the INT instruction is
used.
MPS nest error The number of nested MPS to MPP This error occurs during ladder
instructions exceeds the nesting level of execution. Review the ladder paying
eight. attention to how sub-routines are used
and how the INT instruction is used.
BREAK error The number of BREAK instructions This error occurs during conversion.
between FOR and NEXT exceeds eight. Limit the number of BREAK instruction
(When the BREAK instruction is nested, between FOR and NEXT to eight.
the total number of nested instructions
exceeds eight.)
Convert error Conversion (ladder conversion) failed. Correct the ladder.

A-12
 1 Error Messages

Errors That Occur on Unit Editor

These errors are displayed when an error occurs during operation of Unit Editor.
Explanations are omitted for errors that do not require an explanation excluding
serious errors. Detailed descriptions are displayed in the message area. Follow the
instructions of these descriptions to remedy the error.

„ Errors that are displayed when KV BUILDER is started up

Error message Cause Remedy
%s must be reset as there is no PLC link information could not be To save the unit setup information, the
data in the unit setup information. acquired from the unit setup information. PLC link and addresses must be set
again.

„ File access errors

Error message Cause Remedy
Failed to read xxx information. The file is damaged or an attempt was Either open the correct file, or make
Failed to write xxx information. made to open another file. the file in Unit Editor again.

„ Operation messages
These messages are displayed when an error occurs during setting up of units.

Error message Cause Remedy

Cannot enter address as CPU Relays, DMs, etc. were set without a Place the CPU Unit first.
cannot be found. CPU Unit placed.
Could not open Clipboard. The Clipboard is in use by other Wait a while before trying again.
processes when copying KL address
information.
Cannot open unit setup file. Check The file specified in the previous Import Enter the name of the new file.
file name. dialog box is deleted.
Cannot open unit setup file. Verify The unit setup information file could not Check the detailed message in the
detailed message? be opened. message display area, and remove APPENDICES
the cause of the error.
Cannot enter as slave is registered. An attempt was made to directly enter Delete all slave device setups before
Either delete slave, or change slave the addresses without the slave device directly entering the addresses.
setup. setup deleted.
The start relay/DM No. of the An attempt was made to manually enter Determine the relay/DM Nos. of the
master must be entered to enter the the address of the slave device before master before manually entering the
address of the slave. determining the relay/DM Nos. of the address of the slave device.
master.

A-13
 1 Error Messages

Error message Cause Remedy

Cannot select as slave is being An attempt was made to change the Change and save the settings on the
setup. Either close slave setup settings in the main window on a KL master in the slave setup window.
window, or set in slave setup (QL) unit on which the slave is currently
window. being edited.
Cannot change as slave is being
setup. Either close slave setup
window, or set in slave setup
window.
KL connection setup is already The address setup software is already Use the address setup software that
started up. started up. is started up to set the addresses.
Cannot save this unit setup The unit setup information file is too The unit configuration must be
information as setup information of large. reduced. This problem can be solved
unit is too large. Reduce number of by adding on memory.
units and try again.

„ Unit configuration error check

These errors occur during execution of relay/DMs assignments and address
checks.

Error message Cause Remedy

Cannot find CPU. The CPU Unit does not exist or the Install the CPU Unit.
Extension Unit is incorrectly configured. Check the placed state of the
Extension Unit.
This error might occur when the
Extension Unit is connected when the
auto-layout function is turned OFF.
This error is not displayed when
operations are performed with the
auto-layout function turned ON.
Lower limit of scale value exceeds Entered values exceed the upper/lower Specify a value lower than the upper
upper limit. limit value range. limit value as the lower limit value.
Connection information of unit from The Extension Unit is incorrectly Check the configuration of the
rung onwards is illegal. Check configured. Extension Unit.
connection state. This error might occur when the
Extension Unit is connected when the
auto-layout function is turned OFF.
APPENDICES

This error is not displayed when

operations are performed with the
auto-layout function turned ON.
Input address straddles output Input address areas overlap output Set the areas so that input address
address area. address areas. areas do not overlap output address
areas.
QL address of slave having input The addresses of the input slave devices The response time differs between
relays is defined straddling over are defined straddling 32 boundaries. high-speed addresses and low-speed
high-speed/low-speed addresses. (This is not an error.) addresses. Set the response time
again if this causes a problem.
QL address of slave having output The addresses of the output slave The response time differs between
relays is defined straddling over devices are defined straddling 32 high-speed addresses and low-speed
high-speed/low-speed addresses. boundaries. (This is not an error.) addresses. Set the response time
again if this causes a problem.

A-14
 1 Error Messages

Error message Cause Remedy

Might not match actual number of When a setting is made for Pay attention to the number of relays
used relays as inter-PLC communications between PLCs. The in use.
communications is set to ON. number of relays is calculated from the
number of addresses. For this reason,
the number of relays sometimes does
not match the number of actually used
when an 8-I/O unit is used. (This is not
an error.)

„ Printing related errors

These errors occur when an attempt is made to execute printing.
If these messages are displayed, re-install the latest printer driver, and execute
printing again. If this does not remedy the error, change the printer.

Error message
As this printer does not support clipping. Might not print out correctly.
As this printer cannot plot rectangles. Cannot print correctly.
As this printer cannot plot lines. Cannot print correctly.

APPENDICES

A-15
 2 List of Instructions

2 List of Instructions
This appendix lists instructions and a description what they do. For details, refer to
the KV-700 Series Instruction Reference Manual, KZ-300/350 User's Manual, or KV
Series User's Manual, or Help.

Basic Instructions

Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction KV-10/16/24/40
KV-700
KZ-300/350
Contact instructions

Treats a device as an NO contact, and connects it

LD ○ ○
to the left bus line.

Treats a device as an NC contact, and connects it

LDB ○ ○
to the left bus line.

Treats a device as an NO contact, and connects it

AND ○ ○
serially to a circuit.

Treats a device as an NC contact, and connects it

ANB ○ ○
serially to a circuit.

Treats a device as an NO contact, and connects it

OR ○ ○
in parallel to a circuit.

Treats a device as an NC contact, and connects it

ORB ○ ○
in parallel to a circuit.

Contacts
Connects a device to the left bus line as an NO
LDP ○ 
contact that turns ON for one scan at its up edge.

Connects a device to the left bus line as an NO

LDF contact that turns ON for one scan at its down ○ 
edge.
APPENDICES

Connects a device serially to a circuit as an NO

ANP ○ 
contact that turns ON for one scan at its up edge.

Connects a device serially to a circuit as an NO

ANF contact that turns ON for one scan at its down ○ 
edge.

Connects a device in parallel to a circuit as an NO

ORP ○ 
contact that turns ON for one scan at its up edge.

Connects a device in parallel to a circuit as an NO

ORF contact that turns ON for one scan at its down ○ 
edge.

A-16
 2 List of Instructions

Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction KV-10/16/24/40
KV-700
KZ-300/350
Bit contact instructions
Connects a device to the left bus line as a contact that
BLD ○ 
relays the ON/OFF states of specified bits on the device.

Connects a device to the left bus line as a contact that

BLDB inverts and relays the ON/OFF states of specified bits on ○ 
the device.

Connects a device serially to a circuit as a contact that

BAND ○ 
relays the ON/OFF states of specified bits on the device.
Bit Connects a device serially to a circuit as a contact that
contacts BANDB inverts and relays the ON/OFF states of specified bits on ○ 
the device.

Connects a device in parallel to a circuit as a contact that

BOR ○ 
relays the ON/OFF states of specified bits on the device.

Connects a device in parallel to a circuit as a contact that

BORB inverts and relays the ON/OFF states of specified bits on ○ 
the device.

Turns ON when condition S1 = S2 is established.

.U/.S
Turns OFF when condition S1 ≠ S2 is established.
= Turns ON when condition [ S1 +1y S1 ]=[ S2 +1y S2 ] is ○ 
established.
.D/.L Turns OFF when condition [ S1 +1y S1 ]≠[ S2 +1y S2 ] is
established.
Turns ON when condition S1 < S2 is established.
.U/.S
Turns OFF when condition S1 ≥ S2 is established.
< Turns ON when condition [ S1 +1y S1 ]<[ S2 +1y S2 ] is ○ 
established.
.D/.L Turns OFF when condition [ S1 +1y S1 ]≥[ S2 +1y S2 ] is
established.
Turns ON when condition S1 > S2 is established.
.U/.S
Turns OFF when condition S1 ≤ S2 is established.
> Turns ON when condition [ S1 +1y S1 ]>[ S2 +1y S2 ] is ○ 
established.
.D/.L Turns OFF when condition [ S1 +1y S1 ]≤[ S2 +1y S2 ] is
Compare established.
contacts Turns ON when condition S1 ≠ S2 is established. APPENDICES
.U/.S
Turns OFF when condition S1 = S2 is established.
<> Turns ON when condition [ S1 +1y S1 ]≠[ S2 +1y S2 ] is ○ 
established.
.D/.L Turns OFF when condition [ S1 +1y S1 ]=[ S2 +1y S2 ] is
established.
Turns ON when condition S1 ≤ S2 is established.
.U/.S
Turns OFF when condition S1 > S2 is established.
<= Turns ON when condition [ S1 +1y S1 ]≤[ S2 +1y S2 ] is ○ 
established.
.D/.L Turns OFF when condition [ S1 +1y S1 ]>[ S2 +1y S2 ] is
established.
Turns ON when condition S1 ≥ S2 is established.
.U/.S
Turns OFF when condition S1 < S2 is established.
>= Turns ON when condition [ S1 +1y S1 ]≥[ S2 +1y S2 ] is ○ 
established.
.D/.L Turns OFF when condition [ S1 +1y S1 ]<[ S2 +1y S2 ] is
established.

A-17
 2 List of Instructions

Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction KV-10/16/24/40
KV-700
KZ-300/350
Output instructions

OUT Outputs the previous ON/OFF state. ○ ○

OUB Inverts and outputs the previous ON/OFF state. ○ ○

SET Turns the device ON and holds it in this state. ○ ○

RES Turns the device OFF. ○ ○

Sets and resets the target relay according to SET

KEEP ○ ○
and RES inputs.

Scans the target relay once (up differential) at the

DIFU ○ ○
up edge of the previous state.
Output
Scans the target relay once (down differential) at
DIFD ○ ○
the down edge of the previous state.

ONDL The target relay performs ON delay operation. ○ 

OFDL The target relay performs OFF delay operation. ○ 

SHOT The target relay performs one-shot operation. ○ 

The target relay performs operation of the flicker

FLIK ○ 
circuit.

The target relay performs operation of the

ALT ○ 
alternate circuit.
APPENDICES

A-18
 2 List of Instructions

Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction KV-10/16/24/40
KV-700
KZ-300/350
Bit output instructions

Outputs the previous state to the specified bit of

BOUT ○ 
the reference word device.

Inverts and outputs the previous state to the

BOUB ○ 
specified bit of the reference word device.
Bit
output
Turns the specified bit of the reference word
BSET ○ 
device ON and holds this state.

Turns the specified bit of the reference word

BRES ○ 
device OFF.

Timer/counter instructions
Operation unit 100 ms 32-bit countdown ON delay
TMR ○ ○
timer
Operation unit 10 ms 32-bit countdown ON delay
Timers TMH ○ ○
timer
Operation unit 1 ms 32-bit countdown ON delay
TMS ○ ○
timer

Counter C 32-bit addition counter ○ ○

.U ○
Interval Sets the mode, and measures the pulse interval
ITVL ○
timer and DM average values.
.S 

Increments the current value of the counter

specified by S by 1 at the up edge of up input.
Decrements the current value of the counter
specified by S by 1 at the up edge of down
Up-down input.
UDC ○ ○
counter
Counter UDC n turns ON at 1-digit APPENDICES
incrementing/decrementing of the current value.
The current value is reset to 0 when reset input
turns ON.
Operation unit 10 ms up/down timer.
The current value of the timer specified by n is
incremented by 1 every 10 ms when up input is
ON.
Up-down
UDT The current value of the timer specified by n is ○ 
timer
decremented by 1 every 10 ms when up input is
ON.
The current value is held when up and down
inputs both turn ON or OFF.

A-19
 2 List of Instructions

Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction KV-10/16/24/40
KV-700
KZ-300/350
Connection/end instructions

Indicates the end of the regular program (main

END ○ ○
routine program).
End

NEDH Indicates the end of the entire program. ○ ○

Indicates a series connection following an output

CON ○ ○
instruction.

Stores the input state and arithmetic operation

MPS ○ ○
flag to memory.

MRD Reads contents stored to memory by MPS. ○ ○

Reads contents stored to memory by MPS, and

MPP ○ ○
clears memory.

Connect

ANL Connects the contact block in series. ○ ○

ORL Connects the contact block in parallel. ○ ○

APPENDICES

A-20
 2 List of Instructions

Applied Instructions

Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction KV-10/16/24/40
KV-700
KZ-300/350
Shift instruction
The ON/OFF state of data inputs is loaded at the
up edge of clock input.
That state is shifted from D1 to the relay
Shift SFT specified by D2 in sync with the clock pulse. ○ ○
When reset input is ON, all relays from D1 to
D2 turn OFF.
The state is not shifted to relays D2 +1 onwards.
Memory switch instruction

Memory
MEMSW Sets a memory switch. ○ ○
switch

Step instructions

Executes the entire program up to the STE

STP instruction when the relay indicated by the ○ ○
operand is ON.
Step
This instruction is used in a pair with the STP
STE instruction, and indicates the end of the program ○ ○
to be executed by step operation.
Stage processing instructions

STG Executes the instruction in the STG block. ○ ○

Turns the relay of the currently executing stage

JMP ○ ○
OFF, and jumps to the specified stage.

ENDS Ends the relay of the currently executing stage. ○ ○

APPENDICES
Stage
Sets D with S ON when the execution
processing W-ON ○ ○
condition is ON.

Sets D with S OFF when the execution

W-OFF ○ ○
condition is ON.

Sets D at the up edge of S when the

W-UE ○ ○
execution condition is ON.

Sets D at the down edge of S when the

W-DE ○ ○
execution condition is ON.

A-21
 2 List of Instructions

Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction KV-10/16/24/40
KV-700
KZ-300/350
Flow instructions

MC Sets the master control relay. ○ ○

Master
control
MCR Ends the MC instruction. ○ ○

CALL Executes the specified No. sub-routine program. ○ ○

Sub- SBN Indicates the start of the sub-routine program. ○ ○

routine

RET Ends the sub-routine program. ○ ○

Repeatedly executes the instruction sequence

FOR between the FOR and NEXT instructions for the ○ ○
specified number of times in a single scan.

Repetition NEXT Indicates the end of the repeat range. ○ ○

Forcibly ends repeated execution between the

BREAK ○ 
FOR and NEXT instructions.
APPENDICES

A-22
 2 List of Instructions

Arithmetic Operation Instructions

Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction KV-10/16/24/40
KV-700
KZ-300/350
* Note: Arithmetic operation instructions preceded with @ are differential execution type instructions.

Executes the instruction only once at the up edge

@††† ○ ○
of the execution condition.

Data move instructions

.U Writes 16-bit data. ○
.S S → D 
DW ○
.D Writes 32-bit data. 
.L [ S y S +1]→[ D y D +1] 
.U Writes 16-bit data to the 16-bit internal register. ○
.S S → 16-bit internal register 
LDA ○
.D Writes 32-bit data to the 32-bit internal register. 
.L [ S y S +1]→ 32-bit internal register 
.U Writes the content of the 16-bit internal register. ○
.S 16-bit internal register → D 
STA ○
.D Writes the content of the 32-bit internal register. 
.L 32-bit internal register →[ D y D +1] 
Writes digital trimmer values to the 32-bit internal
TMIN .U register. ○ ○
Digital trimmer→ 32-bit internal register
.U Moves 16-bit data.
.S S → D
MOV ○ 
.D Moves 32-bit data.
.L [ S y S +1]→[ D y D +1]

Moves 16-bit data in blocks.

BMOV ○ 

APPENDICES

Batch moves the same 16-bit data to a specified

.U device.

.S

FMOV ○ 
Batch moves the same 32-bit data to a specified
.D device.

.L

A-23
 2 List of Instructions

Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction KV-10/16/24/40
KV-700
KZ-300/350
Arithmetic/comparison instructions
Adds 16-bit data.
.U ○
16-bit 16-bit
internal register + S = internal register
.S 16 bits 16 bits
(1 word)
16 bits 
ADD Adds 32-bit data. ○
.D Upper Lower Upper Lower 
32-bit
internal register + S +1 S = 32-bit
internal register
.L 32 bits 32 bits 32 bits 
(2 words)

Subtracts 16-bit data.

.U ○
16-bit 16-bit
internal register – S = internal register
16 bits 16 bits 16 bits
.S (1 word) 
SUB ○
Subtracts 32-bit data.
.D Upper Lower Upper Lower 
32-bit 32-bit
internal register – S +1 S = internal register
.L 32 bits 32 bits 32 bits 
(2 words)

Multiplies 16-bit data.

.U 32-bit internal register ○
16-bit
internal register × S = Upper Lower
16-bit
16 bits 16 bits TM000 internal register
(1 word)
32 bits
.S (2 words)

MUL * The upper 16 bits are stored to both the upper 16 bits of the ○
32-bit internal register and to the TM000.

.D Multiplies 32-bit data. 

Upper Lower Upper 32 bits Lower 32 bits

×
32-bit 32-bit
internal register S +1 S = TM001 TM000 internal register
.L 32 bits 32 bits 64 bits 
(2 words)

Divides 16-bit data.

.U Upper Lower 32-bit internal register ○
TM000 16-bit
internal register ÷ S = Upper Lower
16-bit
32 bits 16 bits TM000 internal register
(2 words) (1 word)
32 bits
(2 words)
Remainder: TM001
.S 16 bits
(1 word) 
* The upper 16 bits of the quotient are stored to both the upper
DIV 16 bits of the 32-bit internal register and to the TM000. ○
APPENDICES

Divides 32-bit data.

.D TM001 TM000 32-bit
÷ S +1 S

internal register
64 bits 32 bits
(2 words)
32-bit
= TM001 TM000 internal register Remainder: TM003 TM002
.L 64 bits 32 bits 
(2 words)

.U ○
Increments D by 1 and stores the result to D .
.S 
INC ○
.D Increments [ D y D +1] by 1 and stores the result to 
.L [ D y D +1]. 
.U ○
Decrements D by 1 and stores the result to D .
.S 
DEC ○
.D Decrements [ D y D +1] by 1 and stores the result to 
.L [ D y D +1]. 

A-24
 2 List of Instructions

Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction KV-10/16/24/40
KV-700
KZ-300/350
Arithmetic/comparison instructions (continued)

.U Calculates the square root of 16-bit data. ○

Upper Lower

.S T000 Internal register = 16-bit internal register


32 bits 16 bits
ROOT ○
.D Calculates the square root of 32-bit data. 
Upper 32 bits Lower 32 bits Upper Lower

.L TM001 TM000 32-bit internal register = 32-bit internal register


64 bits 32 bits

Compares 16-bit data.

Comparison Result Arithmetic Flag State
.U Value in 16-bit internal register is smaller than
○
CR2009→ON
specified range.
2009
16-bit internal register< S
Value in 16-bit internal register is within
CR2010→ON
specified range.
2010
16-bit internal register= S
.S Value in 16-bit internal register is greater than 
CR2011→ON
specified range.
2011
16-bit internal register> S
CMP ○
Compares 32-bit data.
Comparison Result Arithmetic Flag State
.D Value in 32-bit internal register is smaller than 
CR2009→ON
specified range.
2009
32-bit internal register<[ S y S +1]
Value in 32-bit internal register is within
CR2010→ON
specified range.
2010
32-bit internal register=[ S y S +1]
.L Value in 32-bit internal register is greater than
CR2011→ON

specified range.
2011
32-bit internal register>[ S y S +1]

Compares 16-bit data.

Comparison Result (when S1 < S2 ) Arithmetic Flag State
.U Value in 16-bit internal register is smaller than
specified range. CR2009→ON
16-bit internal register< S1 < S2
Value in 16-bit internal register is within
specified range. CR2010→ON
S1 ≤16-bit internal register≤ S2
.S Value in 16-bit internal register is greater than
specified range. CR2011→ON
S1 < S2 <16-bit internal register

ZCMP Compares 32-bit data. ○ 

Comparison Result (when
.D [ S1 y S1 +1]<[ S2 y S2 +1])
Arithmetic Flag State
Value in 32-bit internal register is smaller than
specified range. CR2009→ON
32-bit internal register<[ S1 y S1 +1]<[ S2 y S2 +1]
Value in 32-bit internal register is within APPENDICES
specified range. CR2010→ON
[ S1 y S1 +1]≤32-bit internal register≤[ S2 y S2 +1]
.L Value in 32-bit internal register is greater than
specified range. CR2011→ON
[ S1 y S1 +1]<[ S2 y S2 +1]<32-bit internal register

Logical arithmetic instructions

Calculates the logical AND of the 16-bit data.
.U ○
16-bit internal register ⋂ S
ANDA ○
Calculates the logical AND of the 32-bit data.
.D 
32-bit internal register ⋂ [ S y S +1]
Calculates the logical OR of the 16-bit data.
.U ○
16-bit internal register ⋃ S
ORA ○
Calculates the logical OR of the 32-bit data.
.D 
32-bit internal register ⋃ [ S y S +1]
Calculates the exclusive logical OR of the 16-bit data.
.U ○
16-bit internal register ∀ S
EORA ○
Calculates the exclusive logical OR of the 32-bit data.
.D 
32-bit internal register ∀ [ S y S +1]

A-25
 2 List of Instructions

Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction KV-10/16/24/40
KV-700
KZ-300/350
Logical arithmetic instructions
Inverts the state of each bit of the 16-bit internal
.U ○
register.
COM ○
Inverts the state of each bit of the 32-bit internal
.D 
register.

Inverts the sign of the data in 16-bit internal

.U
register.
NEG ○ 
Inverts the sign of the data in 32-bit internal
.D
register.
Data shift instructions
Shifts the data in the 16-bit internal register to the
right by the number of specified bits.
bit bit ( n –1) bit
15 0
16-bit
internal register 1110100000011001

.U ○
16-bit
internal register 0000011101000000 1100 1
Upper n bit Delete

"0" is stored. 1
SRA CR2009
(Carry) ○
Shifts the data in the 32-bit internal register to the
right by the number of specified bits.
bit bit ( n –1) bit
31 32-bit internal register 0

11101000000 110011110 10000001100 1

.D 32-bit internal register 
00000111010 000001100 11110100000 0 1100 1
Upper n bit Delete

1
"0" is stored.
CR2009
(Carry)

Shifts the data in the 16-bit internal register to the

left by the number of specified bits.
APPENDICES

bit bit (16— n ) bit

15 0
16-bit
internal register 1110100000011001

.U ○
16-bit
internal register 1110 100000011001 00000
Delete Upper n bit

1 "0" is stored.
SLA CR2009 ○
(Carry)

Shifts the data in the 32-bit internal register to the

left by the number of specified bits.
bit bit (32– n ) bit
31 32-bit internal register 0

11101000000 110011110 10000001100 1

.D 32-bit internal register 
1110 100000011001 111010000 00110010000 0
Delete Upper n bit

1
"0" is stored.
CR2009
(Carry)

A-26
 2 List of Instructions

Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction KV-10/16/24/40
KV-700
KZ-300/350
Data shift instructions (continued)
Rotates the data in the 16-bit internal register to
the right by the number of specified bits.
bit bit
CR2009 15 0
16-bit
0 1111000000001111 internal register
Flag state varies according
to result of previous arith- (Rotated once)
metic operation.

.U CR2009 ○
1 0111100000000111
(Carry)
Rotated n times (Above processing is repeated n times.)
bit bit
CR2009 15 0
16-bit
0 1111011110000000 internal register
(Carry)

RRA ○
Rotates the data in the 32-bit internal register to
the right by the number of specified bits.
bit bit bit bit
CR2009 31 16 15 32-bit internal register 0

0 11110000000011110000000000001111
Flag state varies according
to result of previous arith- (Rotated once)
metic operation.

.D CR2009 
1 01111000000001111000000000000111
(Carry)
Rotated n times (Above processing is repeated n times.)
bit bit
CR2009 31 32-bit internal register 0

0 11110111100000000111100000000000
(Carry)

Rotates the data in the 16-bit internal register to

the left by the number of specified bits.
bit bit
15 0 CR2009
16-bit
1111000000001111 0 internal register
Flag state varies according
(Rotated once) to result of previous arith-
metic operation.

.U CR2009
○
1110000000011110 1
(Carry)
Rotated n times (Above processing is repeated n times.)
bit bit
15 0 CR2009
16-bit
0000000111101111 0 internal register
(Carry)

RLA ○
Rotates the data in the 32-bit internal register to
the left by the number of specified bits. APPENDICES
bit bit bit bit
31 16 15 32-bit internal register 0 CR2009

11110000000011110000000000001111 0
Flag state varies according
(Rotated once) to result of previous arith-
metic operation.
.D CR2009

11100000000111100000000000011110 1
(Carry)
Rotated n times (Above processing is repeated n times.)
bit bit
31 32-bit internal register 0 CR2009

00000001111000000000000111101111 0
(Carry)

A-27
 2 List of Instructions

Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction KV-10/16/24/40
KV-700
KZ-300/350

Shifts 16-bit data to the right.

Before execution After execution

S 1000 0
S +1 2000 0
"0" is stored.
0
0
n1
items S + n2 1000
.U ( S +1) + n2 2000
8000
S + n1 –1 9000

n2
items 8000
( S +1 ( n1 –1) + n2 9000

WSR ○ 
Shifts 32-bit data to the right.
Before execution After execution

S +1 100000 S 0
S +3 200000 S +2 0
"0" is stored.
0
0
n1
.D
( S +1) +2 n1 100000 S +2 n2
items
( S +3) +2 n2 200000 ( S +2) +2 n2
800000
S +2 ( n1 –1) +1 900000 S +2 ( n1 –1)

n2
items 800000
( S +2 ( n1 –1) +1) +2 n2 900000 ( S +2 ( n1 –1) +2 n2

Shifts 16-bit data to the left.

Before execution After execution

S – n2 1000
( S +1) – n2 2000
n2
items

S 1000
.U S +1 2000
8000
( S + n1 –1) – n2 9000
n1
items 0
0
"0" is stored.
8000 0
S + n1 –1 9000 0

WSL ○ 
APPENDICES

Shifts 32-bit data to the left.

Before execution After execution

( S +1) –2 n1 100000 S –2 n2
( S +3) –2 n2 200000 ( S +2) –2 n2
n2
items

S +1 100000 S
.D S +3 200000 S +2
800000
( S +2 ( n1 –1) +1) –2 n2 900000 ( S +2 ( n1 –1) –2 n2
n1 0
items
0
"0" is stored.
800000 0
S +2 ( n1 –1) +1 900000 S +2 ( n1 –1) 0

A-28
 2 List of Instructions

Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction KV-10/16/24/40
KV-700
KZ-300/350
Data conversion instruction
.U Converts the content of 16-bit internal register to BCD. ○
TBCD ○
.D Converts the content of 32-bit internal register to BCD. 
Converts the content of 16-bit internal register to
.U ○
binary.
TBIN ○
Converts the content of 32-bit internal register to
.D 
binary.
Decodes on digit in 16-bit internal register to 16 bits.
n (#1)th digit
#3 #2 #1 #0
16-bit
internal register 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1

MPX 7 n ○ ○
Bit 7 of 16-bit
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 internal register is
16-bit turned ON ("1" is
internal register 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 stored) as (#1)th
digit is "0111"
(decimal 7).

Encodes to the value at the MSB position in the 16-bit

internal register.
Ignore
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
16-bit
internal register 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
DMX ○ ○

16-bit
internal register 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
"7" (hex 0111) is stored to the 16-bit internal register
as the uppermost bit of ON ("1") bits is bit 7.

Decodes binary data in 16-bit internal register to gray

.U
code.
GRY ○ 
Decodes binary data in 32-bit internal register to gray
.D
code.
Decodes gray code in 16-bit internal register to binary
.U
data.
RGRY ○ 
Decodes gray code in 32-bit internal register to binary
.D
data.
Disperses 16-bit data to nibble (4-bit) units, and stores APPENDICES
the nibbles to four word devices.
bit bit bit bit
15 8 7 0
1 2 3 4 : S bit bit bit bit
15 8 7 0
DISN 0 0 0 4 : D ○ 
0 0 0 3 : D +1
0 0 0 2 : D +2
0 0 0 1 : D +3

"0" is stored to the upper 12 bits.

Unites the lower 4 bits of four word devices to single

16-bit data.
bit bit bit
15 4 0
S : 1
S +1 : 2
UNIN +2 : 3
○ 
S
S +3 : 4

bit bit bit bit

15 8 7 0
D : 4 3 2 1

A-29
 2 List of Instructions

Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction KV-10/16/24/40
KV-700
KZ-300/350
Data conversion instructions (continued)
Disperses 16-bit data to byte (8-bit) units, and
stores the bytes to two word devices.
bit bit bit bit
15 8 7 0
DISB S : 1 2 3 4 bit
15
bit bit
8 7
bit
0
○ 
D : 0 0 3 4
D +1 : 0 0 1 2
"0" is stored to the upper bytes (8 bytes).

Unites the lower 1 byte (8 bits) of two word

devices to single 16-bit data.
bit bit bit bit
15 8 7 0
UNIB S : 3 4 ○ 
S +1 : 1 2
bit bit bit bit
15 8 7 0
D : 1 2 3 4

Swaps the upper and lower data of the 16-bit

internal register.
bit bit bit bit
15 8 7 0
Before
.U execution 1 2 3 4 16-bit internal register: $1234

After
execution 3 4 1 2 16-bit internal register: $3412
SWAP Swaps the upper and lower data of the 32-bit ○ 
internal register.
↓32-bit internal register: $12345678
bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit
31 2423 16 15 8 7 0
.D Before
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
execution

After
execution 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4
↑32-bit internal register: $56781234

Exchanges 16-bit data.

Before execution After execution
bit bit bit bit
15 S1 0 15 S1 0

.U 1 2 3 4 A B C D

bit bit bit bit

15 S2 0 15 S2 0

XCH A B C D 1 2 3 4 ○ 
APPENDICES

Exchanges 32-bit data.

Before execution After execution
bit bit bit bit
31 S1 +1 S1 0 31 S1 +1 S1 0

.D 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

bit bit bit bit

31 S2 +1 S2 0 31 S2 +1 S2 0

8 9 A B C D E F 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Floating point instructions

Converts the binary data currently stored in 16-bit
.U internal register to floating point type real number.
Before execution After execution
bit bit bit bit
15 16-bit internal register 0 31 32-bit internal register 0
.S 16-bit unsigned
Floating point type real number
binary data
Conversion FLOAT 16 bits 32 bits ○ 
Converts the binary data currently stored in 32-bit
.D internal register to floating point type real number.
bit Before execution bit bit After execution bit
31 32-bit internal register 0 31 32-bit internal register 0

.L 32-bit unsigned binary data Floating point type real number

32 bits 32 bits

A-30
 2 List of Instructions

Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction KV-10/16/24/40
KV-700
KZ-300/350
Floating point instructions (continued)
Converts the floating point type real number
.U currently stored in 16-bit internal register to binary
data.
Before execution After execution
bit bit bit bit
.S 31 32-bit internal register 0 15 16-bit internal register 0
16-bit unsigned
Floating point type real number binary data
Conversion INTG 32 bits 16 bits ○ 
Converts the floating point type real number
.D currently stored in 32-bit internal register to binary
data.
bit Before execution bit bit After execution bit
.L 31 32-bit internal register 0 31 32-bit internal register 0

Floating point type real number 32-bit unsigned binary data

32 bits 32 bits

Writes floating point type real number values.

D +1 D
DM.F S :+1.234567 Floating point type real number ○ 
32 bits
(2 words)

Writes floating point type real number values to

32-bit internal register.
LDA.F S +1 S 32-bit internal register ○ 
+1.234 +1.234
32 bits 32 bits
(2 wods)

Writes floating point type real number values in

32-bit internal register.
STA.F 32-bit internal register D +1 D ○ 
+1.234 +1.234
Move 32 bits 32 bits
(2 words)

Moves floating point type real number values.

S +1 S D +1 D
MOV.F ○ 
Floating point type real number Floating point type real number
32 bits 32 bits
(2 words) (2 words)

Moves floating point type real number values.

Move destination
D +1 D
APPENDICES
Move destination
DM00201: +1.234 :DM00200
FMOV.F S +1 S DM00203: +1.234 :DM00202 ○ 
DM00101: +1.234 :DM00100 DM00205: +1.234 :DM00204
DM00207: +1.234 :DM00206
DM00209: +1.234 :DM00208

Disperses a floating point type real number to a

mantissa and exponent.
Mantissa section:
Mantissas/
D1 +1 D1
Exponent
↑ S +1 S Signed 32-bit binary data
↓ DISF Separation 32 bits
○ 
Floating point type real number (2 words)
Floating point 32 bits
Exponent section:
conversion [Example of separation] D2
–1.234 10–3 Signed 16-bit
binary data
32 bits
Mantissa Exponent (1 word)

A-31
 2 List of Instructions

Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction KV-10/16/24/40
KV-700
KZ-300/350
Floating point instructions (continued)
Units the mantissa and exponent to form a floating
point type real number.
Mantissas/ Mantissa section:
Exponent S1 +1 S1

↑ Signed 32-bit binary data D +1 D

UNIF ○ 
↓ 32 bits
(2 words)
Coupling
Floating point type real number
Floating point Exponent section: 32 bits
S2
conversion [Coupling Floating point type integer
Signed 16-bit example] –3
binary data –1.234 10
16 bits
(1 word) Mantissa Exponent
Adds a floating point type real number.
32-bit internal register S1 +1 S1
Floating point type real number + Floating point type real number
ADD.F 2 words (32 bits) 32 bits ○ 
32-bit internal register

Floating point type real number

Arithmetic 2 words (32 bits)

operations Subtracts a floating point type real number.

32-bit internal register S +1 S
Floating point type real number – Floating point type real number
SUB.F 32 bits 32 bits (2 words) ○ 
32-bit internal register

Floating point type real number

32 bits

Multiplies a floating point type real number.

32-bit internal register S +1 S
Floating point type real number × Floating point type real number
MUL.F 32 bits 32 bits (2 words) ○ 
32-bit internal register

Floating point type real number

32 bits

Divides a floating point type real number.

32-bit internal register S +1 S
Floating point type real number ÷ Floating point type real number
DIV.F 32 bits 32 bits (2 words) ○ 
32-bit internal register

Floating point type real number

32 bits

Calculates the square root of a floating point type

real number value.
APPENDICES

Square
ROOT.F 32-bit internal register 32-bit internal register ○ 
root
Floating point type real number Floating point type real number
2 words (32 bits) 2 words (32 bits)

Compares a floating point type real number value.

Comparison Result Arithmetic Flag State
Value in internal register is smaller than
specified range. CR2009→ON
Internal register<[ S y S +1]
CMP.F Value in internal register is within specified ○ 
range. CR2010→ON
Internal register=[ S y S +1]
Value in internal register is greater than
specified range. CR2011→ON
Internal register>[ S y S +1]

Comparison Compares ranges of floating point type real

number values.
Comparison Result (when
Arithmetic Flag State
[ S1 y S1 +1]<[ S2 y S2 +1])
Value in internal register is smaller than
specified range. CR2009→ON
ZCMP.F Internal register<[ S1 y S1 +1]<[ S2 y S2 +1] ○ 
Value in internal register is within specified
range. CR2010→ON
[ S1 y S1 +1]≤Internal register≤[ S2 y S2 +1]
Value in internal register is greater than
specified range. CR2011→ON
[ S1 y S1 +1]<[ S2 y S2 +1]<Internal register

A-32
 2 List of Instructions

Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction KV-10/16/24/40
KV-700
KZ-300/350
Floating point instructions (continued)
Calculates the exponent function that takes a
floating point type real number as its quotient.
EXP 32-bit internal register 32-bit internal register ○ 

Quotient/
e ( Floating point type real number
32 bits
) Floating point type real number
32 bits

logarithm Calculates the natural logarithm of a floating point

type real number.
LOG 32-bit internal register 32-bit internal register
○ 
Log Floating point type real number
32 bits
Floating point type real number
32 bits

Converts the angle in degrees (°) of the floating

point type real number current stored to 32-bit
RAD internal register to radians. ○ 
Angle 32-bit internal register 32-bit internal register

↑ ( Floating point type real number )° ( Floating point type real number ) RAD
32 bits 32 bits
↓
Converts the angle in radians of the floating point
Radian
type real number current stored to 32-bit internal
conversion
DEG register to degrees (°). ○ 
32-bit internal registerv 32-bit internal register

( Floating point type real number ) rad. ( Floating point type real number )°
32 bits 32 bits

Calculates the sine (sin) value from the angle in

radians of the floating point type real number
SIN currently stored to 32-bit internal register. ○ 
32-bit internal register 32-bit internal register

SIN ( Floating point type real number

32 bits
) Floating point type real number
32 bits

Calculates the cosine (cos) value from the angle

in radians of the floating point type real number
Trigonometric currently stored to 32-bit internal register.
COS ○ 
functions 32-bit internal register 32-bit internal register

COS ( Floating point type real number

32 bits
) Floating point type real number
32 bits

Calculates the tangent (tan) value from the angle

in radians of the floating point type real number
TAN currently stored to 32-bit internal register. ○ 
32-bit internal register 32-bit internal register

) APPENDICES
TAN ( Floating point type real number
32 bits
Floating point type real number
32 bits

-1
Calculates the inverse sine (sin ) value of the
floating point type real number currently stored to
ASIN 32-bit internal register. ○ 
32-bit internal register 32-bit internal register

SIN–1 ( Floating point type real number

32 bits
) Floating point type real number
32 bits

-1
Calculates the inverse cosine (cos ) value of the
Inverse floating point type real number currently stored to
trigonometric ACOS 32-bit internal register. ○ 
functions 32-bit internal register 32-bit internal register
–1
COS ( Floating point type real number
32 bits
) Floating point type real number
32 bits

-1
Calculates the inverse tangent (tan ) value of the
floating point type real number currently stored to
ATAN 32-bit internal register. ○ 
32-bit internal register 32-bit internal register

TAN–1 ( Floating point type real number

32 bits
) Floating point type real number
32 bits

A-33
 2 List of Instructions

Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction KV-10/16/24/40
KV-700
KZ-300/350
Text processing instructions
Converts the lower order byte two digits in 16-bit
internal register to 2-digit ASCII text code.
3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Before 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 :16-bit internal

execution register
0 0 A 5
ASC ○ ○

3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

After 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 :16-bit internal

execution register
4 1 3 5

Reverse converts the 2-digit ASCII text code in

16-bit internal register to two numerical value
digits.
3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Before 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 :16-bit internal

execution register
RASC 3 6 4 3 ○ ○

3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

After 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 :16-bit internal

execution register
0 0 6 C

Converts 16-bit unsigned binary data to a decimal

ASCII text string.
bit bit bit bit bit bit
15 S 0 15 0 15 0
.U 16-bit unsigned binary data D 10,000's 1,000's
16 bits
D +1: 100's 10's 00H is auto-

Decimal
matically
N stored at the
D +2: 1's U (00H)
↑ L end.

↓ Converts 16-bit signed binary data to a decimal

ASCII ASCII text string.
string bit
15
bit
0

conversion bit bit D

.S S Sign 10,000's
15 0

16-bit signed binary data D +1: 1,000's 100's

16 bits No change
00H is auto- D +2: 10's 1's before and
matically after instruc-
N tion execu-
stored at the D +3: U (00H)
L tion
end.

Converts 32-bit unsigned binary data to a decimal

ASCII text string.
APPENDICES

bit bit
15 0

bit bit bit bit D 1,000,000,000's 100,000,000's

31 S +1 16 15 S 0
DASC 32-bit unsigned binary data D +1: 10,000,000's 1,000,000's
○ 
.D 32 bits
D +2: 100,000's 10,000's

D +3: 1,000's 100's

D +4: 10s 1's

N
U (00H)
D +5: L

00H is automatically No change before and after

stored at the end. instruction execution

Converts 32-bit signed binary data to a decimal

ASCII text string.
bit bit
15 0

bit bit bit bit D

31 S +1 16 15 S 0
Sign 1,000,000,000's

32-bit signed binary data D +1: 100,000,000's 10,000,000's

.L 32 bits
D +2: 1,000,000's 100,000's

D +3: 10,000's 1,000's

D +4: 100's 10s

N
1's U (00H)
D +5: L

00H is automatically
stored at the end.

A-34
 2 List of Instructions

Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction KV-10/16/24/40
KV-700
KZ-300/350
Text processing instructions (continued)
Converts a decimal ASCII text string to 16-bit
unsigned binary data.
bit bit bit bit
15 S 0 15 D 0
.U S 10,000's 1,000's 16-bit unsigned binary data

16 bits
S +1: 100's 10's
N
S +2: 1's U (00H)
L NUL (00H) is required at end of text string.

Converts a decimal ASCII text string to 16-bit

signed binary data.
bit bit bit bit
15 S 0 15 D 0

S Sign 10,000's 16-bit signed binary data

.S
16 bits
S +1: 1,000's 100's

S +2: 10's 1's

Decimal S +3:
N
U (00H)
L NUL (00H) is required at end of text string.
↑
Converts a decimal ASCII text string to 32-bit
↓
RDASC unsigned binary data. ○ 
ASCII bit bit bit bit bit bit
15 S 0 31 D +1 16 15 D 0
string S 1,000,000,000's 100,000,000's 32-bit unsigned binary data
conversion 32 bits
.D S +1: 10,000,000's 1,000,000's

S +2: 100,000's 10,000's

S +3: 1,000's 100's

S +4: 10s 1's

N
U (00H)
S +5: L NUL (00H) is required at end of text string.

Converts a decimal ASCII text string to 32-bit

signed binary data.
bit bit bit bit bit bit
15 S 0 31 D +1 16 15 D 0

S Sign 1,000,000,000's 32-bit signed binary data

32 bits
.L S +1: 100,000,000's 10,000,000's

S +2: 1,000,000's 100,000's

S +3: 10,000's 1,000's

S +4: 100's 10s

N
1's U (00H)
D +5: L NUL (00H) is required at end of text string.

Moves text strings to a specified device. APPENDICES

S : A(41H) B(42H)
S +1: C(43H) D(44H)
Move SMOV S +2: E(45H)
N
U (00H)
L D : A(41H) B(42H) ○ 
G(47H) H(48H) D +1: C(43H) D(44H)
N
I(49H) J(4AH) D +2: E(45H) U (00H)
L

16 bits 16 bits

Unites the text strings of a specified device.

S1 A(41H) B(42H)
N
S1 +1 C(43H) U (00H)
L D A(41H) B(42H)
C(43H) D(44H)
Unite SADD D +1
○ 
D +2 E(45H) F(46H)
S2 D(44H) E(45H) G(47H)
N
U (00H)
D +3 L
S2 +1 F(46H) G(47H)
N
S2 +2 U (00H)
L

A-35
 2 List of Instructions

Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction KV-10/16/24/40
KV-700
KZ-300/350
Text processing instructions (continued)
Compares text strings.
Compare
Compare
S1 A(41H) B(42H) S2 A(41H) B(42H)
S1 +1 C(43H) D(44H) S2 +1 C(43H) D(44H)
S1 +2 E(45H) F(46H) S2 +2 E(45H) F(46H)
S1 +3 G(47H) H(48H) S2 +3 G(47H) H(48H)
S1 +4 I(49H) J(4AH) S2 +4 I(49H) J(4AH) Compare is
continued
S1 +5 K(4BH) L(4CH) S2 +5 K(4BH) L(4CH) until end
N N code (NUL
S1 +6 M(4DH) U
L (00H) S2 +6 N(4EH) U
L (00H) (00H)) is
found.

When the text string resulting from comparison up

Compare SCMP to NUL (00H) is the same, the arithmetic operation ○ 
flag CR2010 turns ON.
Comparison Result Arithmetic Flag State
When (all characters in S1 )=
CR2010→ON
(all characters in S2 )
When the number of characters n is different, the
arithmetic operation flag changes as follows.
Comparison Result Arithmetic Flag State
When (ASCII code of nth characters in
S1 )<(ASCII code of nth characters in CR2009→ON
S2 )
When (ASCII code of nth characters in
S1 )>(ASCII code of nth characters in CR2011→ON
S2 )

Disperses byte unit text strings to word unit text

strings.
D 0 a(61H)
S a(61H) b(62H) D +1 0 b(62H)
DISS ○ 
S +1 c(63H) d(64H) D +2 0 c(63H)
S +2 e(65H) UL(00H)
N
D +3 0 d(64H)
D +4 0 e(65H)

Disperse/ "0" is automatically stored to the upper byte.

Unite Unites word unit text strings to byte unit text
strings.
S a(61H)
S +1 b(62H) D a(61H) b(62H)
UNIS S +2 c(63H) D +1 c(63H) d(64H) ○ 
n
items S + n –3 x(78H) D +( n /2)–1 x(78H) y(79H)
APPENDICES

N
S + n –2 y(79H) D +( n /2)–1 z(7AH) U
L (00H)
S + n –1 z(7AH) D +( n /2)–1

Counts the number of characters in a text string.

S a(61H) b(62H) D 26
16 bits
S +1 c(63H) d(64H) (1 word)
Detect text S +2 e(65H) f(66H)
string LEN ○ 
length
w(77H) x(78H)
y(79H) z(7AH)
N
U
L (00H)

Reads device comments

Comment of device specified by S
1st 2nd
D character character
3rd 4th
D +1 character character
Read Max. 32 1-byte characters

5th 6th
RCOM D +2 character character ○
comment Single-byte characters are stored
as ASCII code (1 byte) and two-
byte characters are stored as shift 31st 32nd
JIS code (2 bytes). D +15 character character
D +16 N
U
L (00H)

A-36
 2 List of Instructions

Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction KV-10/16/24/40
KV-700
KZ-300/350
Text processing instructions (continued)

Hex key
HKEY Enters hexadecimal key data. ○ ○
entry

Counts the number of bits currently ON in 16-bit

.U
internal register.
BCNT ○ 
Counts the number of bits currently ON in 32-bit
.D
internal register.
Counts the number of same data as a 16-bit
internal register in a specified range.
bit bit 16-bit internal register
15 0 bit15 bit0
Compare The number of data items
S 1234 1234 to which the same value
Compare
S +1 2345 as that of the 16-bit
.U 3456
Compare
internal register is stored
is counted. The result is
S +2
stored to the 16-bit
n items
internal register.
Compare
( n words) S 1234
Data S 4567
Compare 16-bit internal register
bit15 bit0

count S + n –1 5678
Compare Result
2

DCNT Counts the number of same data as a 32-bit ○ 

internal register in a specified range.
bit bit bit bit bit 32-bit bit
31 16 15 0 31 internal register 0
Compare
S +1 12345678 S 12345678
Compare
S +3 23456789 S +2 The number of data
Compare items to which the
34567890
.D S +5 S +4
same value as that
n items of the 32-bit internal
Compare register is stored is
(2 n words) S +2( n –3)+1 12345678 S +2( n –3) counted. The result
Compare is stored to the 32-
S +2( n –2)+1 45678901 S +2( n –2)
bit internal register.
Compare
S +2( n –1)+1 56789012 S +2( n –1) bit 32-bit bit
31 internal register 0
Result
2

Searches the number of same data as 16-bit

internal register from a specified range.
bit bit 16-bit internal register
15 0 bit15 bit0
Compare The No. of the devices to
S 1234 3456 which the same value as
Compare
S +1 2345 that of the 16-bit internal
.U S +2 3456
Compare
register is stored is
searched. The result is
stored to the 16-bit
n items
internal register.
( n words) S + n –3 1234
Compare APPENDICES
Compare 16-bit internal register
S + n –2 3456 bit15 bit0
Compare Result
S + n –1 5678 S +2

Search SER Searches the number of same data as 32-bit ○ 

internal register from a specified range.
bit bit bit bit bit 32-bit bit
31 16 15 0 31 internal register 0
Compare
S +1 12345678 S 23456789
Compare
S +3 23456789 S +2 The No. of the
Compare devices to which the
34567890
.D
S +5 S +4
same value as that
n items of the 32-bit internal
Compare register is stored is
(2 n words) S +2( n —3)+1 45678901 S +2( n —3) searched. The result
Compare is stored to the 32-
S +2( n —2 )+1 23456789 S +2( n —2)
bit internal register.
Compare
S +2( n —1)+1 56789012 S +2( n —1) bit 32-bit bit
31 internal register 0
Result
S +2

A-37
 2 List of Instructions

Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction KV-10/16/24/40
KV-700
KZ-300/350
Data processing instructions
Searches for the maximum value in a specified
range.
bit bit
15 0
S 1234

.U S +1 2345
16-bit internal register
S +2 3456 bit15 bit0
Largest value
n items 9876
is stored.
S + n —3 9876
( n words)
S + n —2 8765
S + n —1 7654

Searches for the maximum value in a specified

range.
.S

MAX ○ 
Searches for the maximum value in a specified
range.
bit bit bit bit
31 16 15 0
S +1 12345678 S
Largest
.D S +3 23456789 S +2
value
32-bit internal register
bit bit
S +5 34567890 S +4 is stored. 31 0
n items 98765432
S +2( n —3)+1 98765432 S +2( n —3)
(2 n words)
S +2( n —2)+1 87654321 S +2( n —2)
S +2( n —1)+1 76543210 S +2( n —1)

Searches for the maximum value in a specified

range.
.L

Search
Searches for the minimum value in a specified
range.
bit bit
15 0
S 1234

.U S +1 2345 16-bit internal register

S +2 3456 bit15 bit0
Smallest value
n items 1234
is stored.
S + n —3 7654
( n words)
S + n —2 8765
S + n —1 9876

Searches for the minimum value in a specified

APPENDICES

range.
.S

MIN ○ 
Searches for the minimum value in a specified
range.
bit bit bit bit
31 16 15 0
S +1 12345678 S

.D
Smallest 32-bit internal register
S +3 23456789 S +2
value bit bit
S +5 34567890 S +4 is stored. 31 0
n items 12345678
+2( n —3)+1 76543210 S +2( n —3)
(2 n words) S
S +2( n —2)+1 87654321 S +2( n —2)
S +2( n —1)+1 98765432 S +2( n —1)

Searches for the minimum value in a specified

range.
.L

A-38
 2 List of Instructions

Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction KV-10/16/24/40
KV-700
KZ-300/350
Data processing instructions (continued)
Calculates the average value of a specified range.
bit bit
15 0
S 16
S +1 256
.U S +2 4096
n items Average value is stored to
16-bit internal register.
S + n —3 16383
( n words) 16-bit internal register
S + n —2 32767 bit15 bit0
Average
S + n —1 65535 Average value

Calculates the average value of a specified range.

.S
Average
AVG ○ 
value
Calculates the average value of a specified range.
bit bit bit bit
31 16 15 0
S +1 12345678 S
S +3 23456789 S +2
.D S +5 34567890 S +4
Average value is stored to
n items
32-bit internal register.
S +2( n —3)+1 78901234 S +2( n —3)
(2 n words) bit 32-bit bit
S +2( n —2)+1 89012345 S +2( n —2) 31 internal register 0
Average
S +2( n —1)+1 90123456 S +2( n —1) Average value

Calculates the average value of a specified range.

.L

Batch
ZRES Batch-resets a specified range. ○ ○
reset

.U
FIFOW Writes data to the FIFO table. ○ 
.D
FIFO
processing
.U
FIFOR Reads data from the FIFO table. ○ 
.D
.U Extends values in 16-bit internal register to 32-bit
data.
32-bit internal register
.S 16-bit APPENDICES
internal register Upper Lower
EXT(.U/.S) 16-bit
TM000 internal register
Extension EXT ○ 

.D Extends values in 32-bit internal register to 64-bit

data.
Upper Lower
32-bit 32-bit
.L internal register TM001 TM000 internal register
EXT(.D/.L)

A-39
 2 List of Instructions

Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction KV-10/16/24/40
KV-700
KZ-300/350
Clock processing instructions
Writes the time data to the calendar timer.
bit bit
15 0

S Year 0 to 99 The bottom two digits of the calendar year are

displayed for the year.
S +1 : Month 1 to 12

S +2 : Day 1 to 31
WTIME All data is described in 16-bit binary data format.
○ 
S +3 : Hour 0 to 23

S +4 : Minute 0 to 59

S +5 : Second 0 to 59
Day of week is expressed as 0: (Sunday),
Clock S +6 : Day of week 0 to 6 1: (Monday), 2: (Tuesday), 3: (Wednesday),
4: (Thursday), 5: (Friday), and 6: (Saturday).
processing

Converts date/time format data to second format

SEC ○ 
data.

Converts second format data to date/time format

RSEC ○ 
data.

AJST Adjusts the calendar timer by ±30 seconds. ○ 

Alarm instruction

Alarm ARES Resets the alarm relay and alarm history. ○ 

High-speed processing instructions

Input time Reduces the time constant of the input relay to

HSP ○ ○
constant speed up input response.

DI Disables execution of the interrupt program. ○ ○

EI Enables execution of the interrupt program. ○ ○

Interrupts Executes the interrupt program from the INT to

INT ○ ○
the RETI instructions.
APPENDICES

RETI Indicates the end of the interrupt program. ○ ○

CTH Performs high-speed counter operation. ○ ○

High-speed
counter Compares the setting value with the current value
of the high-speed counter in the hardware, and
CTC ○ ○
sets the high-speed counter when values are
equaled.

A-40
 2 List of Instructions

Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction KV-10/16/24/40
KV-700
KZ-300/350
Positioning instructions

PLSX Starts trapezoidal control of the X-axis. ○ 

Trapezoidal
control
PLSY Starts trapezoidal control of the Y-axis. ○ 

JOGX Performs jog operation of the X-axis. ○ 

Jog
operation
JOGY Performs jog operation of the Y-axis. ○ 

ORGX Starts zero return of the X-axis. ○ 

Zero return
ORGY Starts zero return of the Y-axis. ○ 

TCHX Loads the current position of the X-axis. ○ 

Teaching
TCHY Loads the current position of the Y-axis. ○ 

APPENDICES

A-41
 3 List of Device Nos.

3 List of Device Nos.

This appendix lists relays, timers, counters, memory Nos. and special relays for
each of the PLC types. For details on each type, refer to the KV-700 Series User's
Manual, KV Series User's Manual, or KZ-300/350 User's Manual, or Help.

Relay, Timer, Counter Memory No. by Device

„ KV-10/16/24/40, KZ-300/350
Model No. KV-10 KV-16 KV-24 KV-40 KZ-300/350
Basic input relay 0000 to 0005 0000 to 0009 0000 to 0015 0000 to 0107 00000 to 0009
Extended input relay 0100 to 0415 0200 to 0415 
Basic output relay 0500 to 0503 0500 to 0505 0500 to 0507 0500 to 0515 0500 to 0503
Extended output relay 0600 to 0915 
Internal relay  0504 to 0915
1000 to 1915 1000 to 1915
Internal auxiliary relay
3000 to 15915 3000 to 6915
Special auxiliary relay 2000 to 2915
External I/O relay 16000 to 17915 7000 to 17915
Timers/counters T/C000 to 249
High-speed counter CTH0 to 1
High-speed counter
CTC0 to 3
comparator
Data memory DM0000 to 1999 DM0000 to 9999
Temporary memory TM00 to 31

„ KV-700
Model No. KV-700 KV-700+M
CPU input relay 00000 to 00009
CPU output relay 00500 to 00503
Internal relay 00504 to 00915
Extended I/O relay
01000 to 59915
Internal auxiliary relay
APPENDICES

Control relay CR0000 to 3915

Timers/counters T/C000 to 511
High-speed counter CTH0 to 1
High-speed counter
CTC0 to 3
comparator
Data memory DM00000 to 19999 DM00000 to 39999
Temporary memory TM000 to 512
Control memory CM0000 to 3999

A-42
 3 List of Device Nos.

KV-10/16/24/40 Devices
Special auxiliary relays
Attribute
Device
R: Read only Function
No.
Blank: R/W
2002 R ON at all times
2003 R OFF at all times
2004 R 10 ms clock pulse (duty 50%)
2005 R 100 ms clock pulse (duty 50%)
2006 R 1s clock pulse (duty 50%)
2007 R OFF only for 1 scan at start of operation
2008 R ON only for 1 scan at start of operation
2009 R ON when result of arithmetic operation is minus or overflows
2010 R ON when result of arithmetic operation is zero
2011 R ON when result of arithmetic operation is plus
2012 R ON at arithmetic operation execution error
2100 R CTH0 dedicated internal clock (1 µs)
2101 R CTH0 dedicated internal clock (10 µs)
2102 R CTH0 dedicated internal clock (100 µs)
ON: Execute.
2103 Automatically clear CTH0.
OFF: Do not execute.
ON: Disable output.
2104 Operation when high- Disable/enable direct output to 0500.
OFF: Enable output.
speed counter comparator
ON: Execute.
2105 CTC0 is ON Turn OFF direct output to 0500.
OFF: Do not execute.
ON: Execute.
2106 Turn ON direct output to 0500.
OFF: Do not execute.
Invert ON/OFF of output to 0500 each time that high-speed counter ON: Execute.
2107
comparator CTC0 turns ON. OFF: Do not execute.
ON: Disable output.
2108 Disable/enable direct output to 0500.
OFF: Enable output.
Operation when high-
ON: Execute.
2109 speed counter comparator Turn OFF direct output to 0500.
OFF: Do not execute.
CTC1 is ON
ON: Execute.
2110 Turn ON direct output to 0500.
OFF: Do not execute.
Invert ON/OFF of output to 0500 each time that high-speed counter ON: Execute.
2111
comparator CTC1 turns ON. OFF: Do not execute.
Automatically clear CTH0 when high-speed counter comparator CTC1 is ON: Execute.
2112
ON. OFF: Do not execute.
2113 Stepped mode 1 pulse 2X 4X 2 pulses
High speed counter CTH0 count input 2113 OFF ON OFF ON
mode selection. 2114 OFF OFF ON ON
2114
2200 R CTH1 dedicated internal clock (1 µs)
2201 R CTH1 dedicated internal clock (10 µs)
2202 R CTH1 dedicated internal clock (100 µs)
ON: Execute.
2203 Automatically clear CTH1
OFF: Do not execute.
ON: Disable output. APPENDICES
2204 Operation when high- Disable/enable direct output to 0501.
OFF: Enable output.
speed counter comparator
ON: Execute.
2205 CTC2 is ON Turn OFF direct output to 0501.
OFF: Do not execute.
ON: Execute.
2206 Turn ON direct output to 0501.
OFF: Do not execute.
Invert ON/OFF of output to 0501 each time that high-speed counter ON: Execute.
2207
comparator CTC2 turns ON. OFF: Do not execute.
ON: Disable output.
2208 Disable/enable direct output to 0501.
OFF: Enable output.
Operation when high-
ON: Execute.
2209 speed counter comparator Turn OFF direct output to 0501.
OFF: Do not execute.
CTC3 is ON
ON: Execute.
2210 Turn ON direct output to 0501.
OFF: Do not execute.
Invert ON/OFF of output to 0501 each time that high-speed counter ON: Execute.
2211
comparator CTC3 turns ON. OFF: Do not execute.
Automatically clear CTH1 when high-speed counter comparator CTC3 is ON: Execute.
2212
ON. OFF: Do not execute.
2213 Stepped mode 1 pulse 2X 4X 2 pulses
High speed counter CTH1 count input
2213 OFF ON OFF ON
mode selection.
2214 2214 OFF OFF ON ON

A-43
 3 List of Device Nos.

Attribute
Device
R: Read only Function
No.
Blank: R/W
ON: Execute.
2300 Disable external outputs (0500 to 0915, outputs used on QL)
OFF: Do not execute.
ON: Execute.
2301 Disable external input refreshing (0000 to 0415, inputs used on QL)
OFF: Do not execute.
ON: Enabled
2303 Fixed scan time operation (setting value to TM29)
OFF: Disabled
2304 R ON for 1 scan only at fixed scan time setting value exceeded
2305 Frequency counter, operation start flag
ON: Execute.
2306 Specified frequency pulse output
OFF: Do not execute.
2307 Specified frequency pulse output, error flag
2308 Motor driver stop
2309 Motor driver operating: ON/emergency stop when motor driver is turned OFF by interrupt instruction
2310 Motor driver operation start (detected by up edge)
2314 Cam switch, operation start flag
2315 Cam switch, ON at error
2400 Stepped mode Unused Up edge Down edge Level
CTH0 external signal preset 2400 OFF ON OFF ON
2401 2401 OFF OFF ON ON

2402 Stepped mode Up edge Down edge Both edges

INT0 interrupt polarity 2402 OFF ON OFF ON
2403 2403 OFF OFF ON ON

2404 Stepped mode Up edge Down edge Both edges

INT1 interrupt polarity 2404 OFF ON OFF ON
2405 2405 OFF OFF ON ON

ON: Use.
2406 CTH0 ring counter
OFF: Do not use.
ON: Ignore B phase, and count up at all times.
2407 Ignore B phase in CTH0 unstepped mode
OFF: Use B phase as per normal.
2408 Stepped mode Unused Up edge Down edge Level
CTH1 external signal preset 2408 OFF ON OFF ON
2409 2409 OFF OFF ON ON

2410 Stepped mode Up edge Down edge Both edges

INT2 interrupt polarity 2410 OFF ON OFF ON
2411 2411 OFF OFF ON ON

2412 Stepped mode Up edge Down edge Both edges

INT3 interrupt polarity 2412 OFF ON OFF ON
2413 2413 OFF OFF ON ON

ON: Use.
2414 CTH1 ring counter
OFF: Do not use.
ON: Ignore B phase, and count up at all times.
2415 Ignore B phase in CTH1 unstepped mode
OFF: Use B phase as per normal.
2500 Operation panel KV-D30 F1 (customized switch 1)
APPENDICES

2501 Operation panel KV-D30 F2 (customized switch 2)

2502 Operation panel KV-D30 F3 (customized switch 3)
2503 Operation panel KV-D30 F4 (customized switch 4)
2504 Operation panel KV-D30 LED1 (customized lamp 1)
2505 Operation panel KV-D30 LED2 (customized lamp 2)
2506 Operation panel KV-D30 LED3 (customized lamp 3)
2507 Operation panel KV-D30 LED4 (customized lamp 4)
2508 Operation panel KV-D30 green backlight
2509 Operation panel KV-D30 red backlight
ON: Japanese
2510 Operation panel KV-D30 system message
OFF: English
2511 Operation panel KV-D30 buzzer, external outputs 0.1
ON: Positive display
2512 Operation panel KV-D30, screen display setting
OFF: Negative display
2513 Operation panel KV-D30 reset relay (KV-D30 is reset at up edge, and then is forcibly turned OFF.)
ON: Display ON
2515 Error message display (content of DM1950)
OFF: Display OFF

A-44
 3 List of Device Nos.

Attribute
Device Function
No. R: Read only
Blank: R/W
ON: 10µs
2609 Input time constant of extended input unit of relay No. 0100 to 0115
OFF: 10ms
ON: 10µs
2610 Input time constant of extended input unit of relay No. 0200 to 0215
OFF: 10ms
ON: 10µs
2611 Input time constant of extended input unit of relay No. 0300 to 0315
OFF: 10ms
ON: 10µs
2612 Input time constant of extended input unit of relay No. 0400 to 0415
OFF: 10ms
ON: Clear.
2613 Clear input at extended unit broken line.
OFF: Do not clear.
2614
Reserved for system
2615
ON: Enabled (detected at up edge)
2700 KL use enable/disable
OFF: Disabled
2701 156kbit/s 625kbit/s 2.5Mbit/s 5Mbit/s
KL baud rate 2701 OFF ON OFF ON
This area is saved
2702 2702 OFF OFF ON ON
when the Program
ON: 8bit mode is switched to
2704 KL communications type data selection
OFF: 16bit the Run mode and
ON: FINAL ON when the power is
2705 KL final address unit
OFF: FINAL OFF turned OFF. (This
ON: Clear does not affect the
2706 Clear input at KL broken line
OFF: Hold MEMSW instruction.)
2707 ON at KL setting error
It will not be cleared
ON: Enabled (detected at up edge)
2708 QL use enable even by clearing all
OFF: Disabled
auxiliary relays.
2709 250kbit/s 500kbit/s 1Mbit/s 2Mbit/s Note, however, that it
QL baud rate 2709 OFF ON OFF ON will be cleared when
2710 2710 OFF OFF ON ON auxiliary relays are
ON: Clear cleared with the
2711 Clear input at QL broken line ladder program
OFF: Hold
ON: Line broken unregistered.
2712 Broken line error
OFF: Normal
Use high-speed input compensation ON: Execute.
2714 circuit OFF: Do not execute.
2715 Cam switch, ON during operation
2800 Communications port A: send break signal (sent while relay is ON)
Communications port A: receive text data
2801
ON for 1 scan only at reception of text data
Communications port A: text data download error
2802 APPENDICES
ON for 1 scan only when text data is received while 2801 is ON or when 2803 is ON
Communications port A: receive text data error
2803
ON for 1 scan only at text data receive error
2804 Communications port A: start sending text data (ON while data is being sent)
2805 Communications port B: send break signal (sent while relay is ON)
Communications port B: receive text data
2806
ON for 1 scan only at reception of text data
Communications port B: text data download error
2807
ON for 1 scan only when text data is received while 2806 is ON or when 2808 is ON
Communications port B: receive text data error
2808
ON for 1 scan only at text data receive error
2809 Communications port B: start sending text data (ON while data is being sent)
2812 Turns ON at backup battery error.
Set the input time constant of all Basic Unit inputs. ON: Set.
2813 (excluding HSP instruction use input) OFF: Do not set. (10 ms)
2814 HKEY instruction, multiple keys disabled
2815 HKEY instruction, end of scan
2900
: HKEY instruction information storage area
2915

A-45
 3 List of Device Nos.

Special Memory Lists

„ Temporary Data Memory
TM00 For arithmetic operations (DIV/MUL) Attribute R/W
TM01 For arithmetic operations (DIV) Attribute R/W
TM02
: User use Attribute R/W
TM27
Scan time (in 1 ms units) when the setting value is exceeded during fixed
TM28 Attribute R
scan time operation is entered to this memory.
TM29 Fixed scan time operation setting value Attribute R/W
TM30 Entry of CTC0 value at INT3 interruption Attribute R
Scan time measurement value (Average value of each ten scans is
TM31 Attribute R
entered to this memory.)
Attribute R: Read, W: Write

„ Data Memory for Communications

Attribute
Device
R: Read only Function
No.
Blank: R/W
DM1000
: Text receive port A
DM1099
DM1100
: Text send port A
DM1199
DM1200
: Text receive port B
DM1299
DM1300
: Text send port B
DM1399

„ Data Memory for Motor Drive

Attribute
Device
R: Read only Function
No.
Blank: R/W
Trapezoidal control, startup frequency (Hz)
DM1480
APPENDICES

(200 to 50000)
Trapezoidal control, operation frequency (Hz) Frequency (Hz)

DM1481 (200 to 50000) Value greater than startup DM1481

frequency (Operation)

Trapezoidal control, acceleration time (ms)

DM1482
(0 to 4000) DM1480 DM1485×#65536+DM1484
(Start)
Trapezoidal control, number of output pulses (Number of output pulses)

DM1484 (lower 16 bits) (0 to 65535) 2 or more when

DM1485 is 0
0 DM1482 DM1482 Time (ms)
Trapezoidal control, number of output pulses (Acceleration time) (Deceleration time)
DM1485
(upper 16 bits) (0 to 65535)
DM1486 Trapezoidal control, error code (11 to 17)

A-46
 3 List of Device Nos.

KV-700 Devices
Control Relays CR
Control relays (CR0000 to CR3999) can be used for checking the operating state of
the CPU Unit, setting input time constants, setting high-speed counters, etc.
Control relays currently reserved for the system cannot be used.

Attribute
Device
R: Read only Function
No.
Blank: R/W
CR0000 QL input relay (address 0)
: :
CR0715 QL input relay (address 127)
CR0800
: Reserved for system
CR0915
CR1000 QL output relay (address 0)
: :
CR1715 QL output relay (address 127)
ON: Enabled
CR1800 QL use enabled
OFF: Disabled
CR1801 156kbit/s 625kbit/s 2.5Mbit/s 5Mbit/s
QL baud CR1801 OFF ON OFF ON
rate
CR1802 CR1802 OFF OFF ON ON
State is also held when
ON: Clear power is turned OFF
CR1803 Clear input at QL broken line and mode is switched
OFF: Hold
between Run and
ON: Broken Program.
CR1804 QL Broken line
OFF: Normal
CR1805
: Reserved for system
CR1813
Cam switch function, ON: Absolute
CR1814
absolute/incremental OFF: Incremental
Cam switch function, cam switch function stopped when turn
CR1815
ON and OFF during operation
CR1900
: Reserved for system
CR2001 APPENDICES
CR2002 R ON at all times
CR2003 R OFF at all times
CR2004 R 10 ms clock pulse (at 50% duty)
CR2005 R 100 ms clock pulse (at 50% duty)
CR2006 R 1s clock pulse (at 50% duty)
CR2007 R OFF only for 1 scan at start of operation
CR2008 R ON only for 1 scan at start of operation
CR2009 ON when result of arithmetic operation is minus or overflows
CR2010 R ON when result of arithmetic operation is zero
CR2011 R ON when result of arithmetic operation is plus
CR2012 R ON at arithmetic operation execution error
CR2013
: Reserved for system
CR2015

A-47
 3 List of Device Nos.

Attribute
Device
R: Read only Function
No.
Blank: R/W
CR2100 R CTH0 dedicated internal clock (1 µs)
CR2101 R CTH0 dedicated internal clock (10 µs)
CR2102 R CTH0 dedicated internal clock (100 µs)
ON: Execute.
CR2103 Automatically clear CTH0.
OFF: Do not execute.
ON: Disable output.
CR2104 Operation when high- Disable/enable direct output to 00500.
OFF: Enable output.
speed counter
comparator CTC0 is ON ON: Execute.
CR2105 Turn OFF direct output to 00500.
OFF: Do not execute.
ON: Execute.
CR2106 Turn ON direct output to 00500.
OFF: Do not execute.
Invert ON/OFF of output to 00500 each time that high-speed counter ON: Execute.
CR2107
comparator CTC0 turns ON. OFF: Do not execute.
ON: Disable output.
CR2108 Disable/enable direct output to 00500.
OFF: Enable output.
Operation when high-
ON: Execute.
CR2109 speed counter Turn OFF direct output to 00500.
OFF: Do not execute.
comparator CTC1 is ON
ON: Execute.
CR2110 Turn ON direct output to 00500.
OFF: Do not execute.
Invert ON/OFF of output to 00500 each time that high-speed counter ON: Execute.
CR2111
comparator CTC1 turns ON. OFF: Do not execute.
Automatically clear CTH0 when high-speed counter comparator CTC1 is ON: Execute.
CR2112
ON. OFF: Do not execute.
CR2113 Single-phase
1X 2X 4X 2 pulses
High-speed counter W/out direction W/ direction
CR2114 CTH0 count input mode CR2113 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
selection. CR2114 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF
CR2115 CR2115 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON

CR2200 R CTH1 dedicated internal clock (1 µs)

CR2201 R CTH1 dedicated internal clock (10 µs)
CR2202 R CTH1 dedicated internal clock (100 µs)
ON: Execute.
CR2203 Automatically clear CTH1
OFF: Do not execute.
ON: Disable output.
CR2204 Operation when high- Disable/enable direct output to 00501.
OFF: Enable output.
speed counter
comparator CTC2 is ON ON: Execute.
CR2205 Turn OFF direct output to 00501.
OFF: Do not execute.
ON: Execute.
CR2206 Turn ON direct output to 00501.
OFF: Do not execute.
Invert ON/OFF of output to 00501 each time that high-speed counter ON: Execute.
CR2207
comparator CTC2 turns ON. OFF: Do not execute.
ON: Disable output.
CR2208 Disable/enable direct output to 00501.
OFF: Enable output.
Operation when high-
ON: Execute.
CR2209 speed counter Turn OFF direct output to 00501.
OFF: Do not execute.
comparator CTC3 is ON
ON: Execute.
CR2210 Turn ON direct output to 00501.
OFF: Do not execute.
Invert ON/OFF of output to 00501 each time that high-speed counter ON: Execute.
APPENDICES

CR2211
comparator CTC3 turns ON. OFF: Do not execute.
Automatically clear CTH1 when high-speed counter comparator CTC3 is ON: Execute.
CR2212
ON. OFF: Do not execute.
CR2213 Single-phase
1X 2X 4X 2 pulses
High-speed counter W/out direction W/ direction
CR2214 CTH1 count input mode CR2213 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
selection. CR2214 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF
CR2215 CR2215 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON

ON: Execute.
CR2300 Disable external outputs (including QL)
OFF: Do not execute.
ON: Execute.
CR2301 Disable external input refreshing (including QL)
OFF: Do not execute.
CR2302 Reserved for system
ON: Enabled
CR2303 Fixed scan time operation
OFF: Disabled
CR2304 R ON for 1 scan only at fixed scan time setting value exceeded
Set input time constant of all CPU Unit inputs. ON: Set.
CR2305
(Determine referring to CM1620 when ON.) OFF: Do not set. (10 ms)
CR2306 R ON at backup battery error
CR2307
: Reserved for system
CR2315

A-48
 3 List of Device Nos.

Attribute
Device
R: Read only Function
No.
Blank: R/W
CR2400 Unused Up edge Down edge Level
CTH0 external signal preset CR2400 OFF ON OFF ON
CR2401 CR2401 OFF OFF ON ON
ON: Use.
CR2402 CTH0 ring counter
OFF: Do not use.
CR2403 Reserved for system
CR2404 Unused Up edge Down edge Level
CTH1 external signal preset CR2404 OFF ON OFF ON
CR2405 CR2405 OFF OFF ON ON
ON: Use.
CR2406 CTH1 ring counter
OFF: Do not use.
CR2407
: Reserved for system
CR2413
ON: Execute.
CR2414 Specified frequency pulse output
OFF: Do not execute.
CR2415 Specified frequency pulse output, error
ON: Execute.
CR2500 Frequency counter, start of operation
OFF: Do not execute.

CR2501 Single-phase, Single-phase, 2-phase 2 pulses

Frequency counter, input source w/out direction w/ direction 1X
setting CR2501 OFF ON OFF ON
CR2502 CR2502 OFF OFF ON ON

ON: rpm
CR2503 Frequency counter, Hz/rpm switching
OFF: Hz
ON: Use.
CR2504 Frequency counter, user function for updating rpm by single rotation
OFF: Do not use.
CR2505
: Reserved for system
CR2507
ON: Execute.
CR2508 Cam switch, start of operation
OFF: Do not execute.
Cam switch, output response impossible warning (generated when output does not track during cam
CR2509
switch operation)
CR2510 R Cam switch, error
CR2511
: Reserved for system
CR2615

CR2700 Up edge Down edge Both edges

INT0 interrupt polarity CR2700 OFF ON OFF ON
CR2701 CR2701 OFF OFF ON ON APPENDICES

CR2702 Up edge Down edge Both edges

INT1 interrupt polarity CR2702 OFF ON OFF ON
CR2703 CR2703 OFF OFF ON ON

CR2704 Up edge Down edge Both edges

INT2 interrupt polarity CR2704 OFF ON OFF ON
CR2705 CR2705 OFF OFF ON ON

CR2706 Up edge Down edge Both edges

INT3 interrupt polarity CR2706 OFF ON OFF ON
CR2707 CR2707 OFF OFF ON ON

CR2708
: Reserved for system
CR2715
CR2800 Serial communications, send break signal (sent while relay is ON)
CR2801 R Serial communications, ON for 1 scan only at reception of text data
CR2802 R Serial communications, text data download error

A-49
 3 List of Device Nos.

Attribute
Device
R: Read only Function
No.
Blank: R/W
CR2803 R Serial communications, ON for 1 scan only at text data receive error
CR2804 Serial communications, start sending text data (ON while data is being sent)
ON: Perform.
CR2805 Serial communications, receive text data in word units
OFF: Do not perform.
ON: Perform.
CR2806 Serial communications, send text data in word units
OFF: Do not perform.
CR2807
: Reserved for system
CR2813
ON: Execute.
CR2814 Suppress zero during execution of DASC instruction (all suffixes)
OFF: Do not execute.
ON: Execute.
CR2815 Omit + sign during execution of DASC.S, DASC.L and DASC.F.
OFF: Do not execute.
ON: Execute.
CR2900 Access window, display user message 1
OFF: Do not execute.
ON: Execute.
CR2901 Access window, display user message 2
OFF: Do not execute.
CR2902
: Reserved for system
CR2915
CR3000 X-axis, limit switch CW input
CR3001 X-axis, limit switch CCW input
CR3002 X-axis, origin sensor input
CR3003 X-axis, stop sensor input
CR3004 R X-axis, zero return in operation
CR3005 X-axis, zero return completed
CR3006 Reserved for system
CR3007 X-axis, error/clear error
CR3008 X-axis, warning/clear warning
CR3009 X-axis, ON during pulse output/emergency stop
CR3010 X-axis, start driver operation
CR3011 X-axis, change current value request (level detection)
CR3012 X-axis, change operation speed request (level detection)
CR3013
: Reserved for system
CR3015
APPENDICES

CR3100 Y-axis, limit switch CW input

CR3101 Y-axis, limit switch CCW input
CR3102 Y-axis, origin sensor input
CR3103 Y-axis, stop sensor input
CR3104 R Y-axis, zero return in operation
CR3105 Y-axis, zero return completed
CR3106 Reserved for system
CR3107 Y-axis, error/clear error
CR3108 Y-axis, warning/clear warning
CR3109 Y-axis, ON during pulse output/emergency stop
CR3110 Y-axis, start driver operation
CR3111 Y-axis, change current value request (level detection)
CR3112 Y-axis, change operation speed request (level detection)
CR3113
: Reserved for system
CR3115

A-50
 3 List of Device Nos.

Attribute
Device No. R: Read only Function
Blank: R/W
CR3200
Logging function, trigger setting
CR3201
CR3202 Logging function, time stamp ON
CR3203 Logging function, start
CR3204 Logging function, write during operation
CR3205 Logging function, CPU buffer overflow
CR3206 Logging function, registered device error
CR3207 Logging function, write error
CR3208 Logging function, MMC data overflow
CR3209 Logging function, MMC insufficient free space
CR3210 Logging function, logging execution in progress
CR3211
: Reserved for system
CR3215
CR3300 Alarm 0
: Alarm relay :
CR3415 Alarm 31
CR3500 R Turn ON if one of alarm relays CR3300 to CR3415 is ON.
ON: Leave history.
CR3501 Leave history when alarm relay state changes to OFF from ON.
OFF: Do not leave history.
CR3502
: Reserved for system
CR3513
CR3514 HKEY instruction, multiple keys disabled
CR3515 R HKEY instruction, end of scan
CR3600
: R HKEY instruction information storage area
CR3615
CR3700 Operation panel KV-D30, F1 (customized switch 1)
CR3701 Operation panel KV-D30, F2 (customized switch 2)
CR3702 Operation panel KV-D30, F3 (customized switch 3)
CR3703 Operation panel KV-D30, F4 (customized switch 4)
CR3704 Operation panel KV-D30, LED1 (customized lamp 1)
CR3705 Operation panel KV-D30, LED2 (customized lamp 2)
CR3706 Operation panel KV-D30, LED3 (customized lamp 3)
CR3707 Operation panel KV-D30, LED4 (customized lamp 4)
CR3708 Operation panel KV-D30, green backlight (lights when ON)
CR3709 Operation panel KV-D30, red backlight (lights when ON)
ON: Japanese APPENDICES
CR3710 Operation panel KV-D30, system message display
OFF: English
ON: Sound.
CR3711 Operation panel KV-D30, sound buzzer
OFF: Turn off.
ON: Positive display
CR3712 Operation panel KV-D30, screen display setting
OFF: Negative display
ON: Enabled
CR3713 Operation panel KV-D30, enable alarm interrupt
OFF: Disabled
Operation panel KV-D30, page switching
CR3714
(Switch to page of CM0401 value is forcibly turned OFF by up edge.)
ON: Disabled
CR3715 Operation panel KV-D30, page switching by / keys disabled
OFF: Enabled
CR3800 Operation panel KV-D30, output 0 ON when panel is ON
CR3801 Operation panel KV-D30, output 1 ON when panel is ON
CR3802
: Reserved for system
CR3915

A-51
 3 List of Device Nos.

Control Memory CM
Control memories (CM0000 to CM3999) are used for setting the various special
functions of the CPU Unit. CMs reserved for the system cannot be used.

Attribute
Device
R: Read only Function
No.
Blank: R/W
CM0000 1st line display device setting
CM0001 1st line display device setting
CM0002 2nd line display device setting
CM0003 2nd line display device setting
CM0004 Operation panel KV-D30 3rd line display device setting
CM0005 page 0 3rd line display device setting
CM0006 4th line display device setting
CM0007 4th line display device setting
CM0008
Reserved for system
CM0009
CM0010 Page 1, display device setting
: Operation panel KV-D30 :
CM0189 Page 18, display device setting
CM0190 1st line display device setting
CM0191 1st line display device setting
CM0192 2nd line display device setting
CM0193 2nd line display device setting
CM0194 Operation panel KV-D30 3rd line display device setting
CM0195 page 19 3rd line display device setting
CM0196 4th line display device setting
CM0197 4th line display device setting
CM0198
Reserved for system
CM0199
CM0200 1st line display attribute setting
CM0201 1st line display attribute setting
APPENDICES

CM0202 2nd line display attribute setting

CM0203 2nd line display attribute setting
CM0204 Operation panel KV-D30 3rd line display attribute setting
CM0205 page 0 3rd line display attribute setting
CM0206 4th line display attribute setting
CM0207 4th line display attribute setting
CM0208 Template 1 setting
CM0209 Template 2 setting
CM0210 Page 1, display attribute setting
: Operation panel KV-D30 :
CM0389 Page 2, display attribute setting

A-52
 3 List of Device Nos.

Attribute
Device
R: Read only Function
No.
Blank: R/W
CM0390 1st line display attribute setting
CM0391 1st line display attribute setting
CM0392 2nd line display attribute setting
CM0393 2nd line display attribute setting
CM0394 Operation panel KV-D30 3rd line display attribute setting
CM0395 page 19 3rd line display attribute setting
CM0396 4th line display attribute setting
CM0397 4th line display attribute setting
CM0398 Template 1 setting
CM0399 Template 2 setting
CM0400 Operation panel KV-D30, move enable/disable setting
CM0401 Operation panel KV-D30, page switching setting
CM0402 Operation panel KV-D30, current display page
CM0403
: Reserved for system
CM0409
CM0410
Operation panel KV-D30, used by CM direct accessing
CM0411
CM0412
Operation panel KV-D30, used by CM direct accessing
CM0413
CM0414
Operation panel KV-D30, used by CM direct accessing
CM0415
CM0416
: Reserved for system
CM0699
CM0700 R Read from calendar (year)
CM0701 R Read from calendar (month)
CM0702 R Read from calendar (day)
CM0703 R Read from calendar (hour)
CM0704 R Read from calendar (minute)
CM0705 R Read from calendar (second)
CM0706 R Read from calendar (day of week)
CM0707 APPENDICES
: Reserved for system
CM0719
Scan time measurement value (Average value of each tens scans is entered to this
CM0720 R
memory.) (in 0.1 ms units)
CM0721 Fixed scan time operation setting value (in 1 ms units)
Scan time (in 1 ms units) when the setting value is exceeded during fixed scan time
CM0722 R
operation is entered to this memory.
CM0723
: Reserved for system
CM0999
CM1000 Number of received text data
CM1001 Received text data 1
: R :
CM1099 Received text data 99

A-53
 3 List of Device Nos.

Attribute
Device
R: Read only Function
No.
Blank: R/W
CM1100 Number of sent text data
CM1101 Received sent data 1
: R :
CM1199 Received sent data 99
CM1200
: Reserved for system
CM1399
CM1400 Cam switch function, set leading output relay No.
CM1401 Cam switch function, comparator value in multi-stage compare mode
CM1402 Cam switch function, number of pulses in cycle of device input to CTH0
CM1403 Cam switch function, absolute type input address
CM1404 R Cam switch function, current angle
CM1405 R Cam switch function, error No.
CM1406
: Reserved for system
CM1409
CM1410
Cam switch function, angle setting value for turning output relay ON/OFF
CM1411
CM1412 angle setting value for turning output +1 relay ON/OFF
: Cam switch function, :
CM1471 angle setting value for turning output +30 relay ON/OFF
CM1472
Cam switch function, angle setting value for turning output +31 relay ON/OFF
CM1473
CM1474
: Reserved for system
CM1479
CM1480 R
Frequency counter function, frequency measurement results (Hz/rpm)
CM1481 R
CM1482 Frequency counter function, measurement cycle (ms)
CM1483 Frequency counter function, average number of measurements
APPENDICES

CM1484
: Reserved for system
CM1489
CM1490
Specified frequency pulse output function, set frequency (Hz)
CM1491
CM1492
: Reserved for system
CM1499
CM1500 QL receive data 0
: R :
CM1531 QL receive data 31
CM1532 QL send data 0
: R :
CM1563 QL send data 31

A-54
 3 List of Device Nos.

Attribute
Device
R: Read only Function
No.
Blank: R/W
CM1564 Number of QL communications address
CM1565
: Reserved for system
CM1569
CM1570
: QL connection information
CM1577
CM1578
: Reserved for system
CM1599
CM1600
CTH0 ring counter upper limit value
CM1601
CM1602
CTH1 ring counter upper limit value
CM1603
CM1604
CTH0 preset input
CM1605
CM1606
CTH1 preset input
CM1607
CM1608
Reserved for system
CM1609
CM1610 R
Input capture at INT0 generation
CM1611 R
CM1612 R
Input capture at INT1 generation
CM1613 R
CM1614 R
Input capture at INT2 generation
CM1615 R
CM1616 R
Input capture at INT3 generation
CM1617 R
CM1618
Reserved for system
CM1619
CM1620 Input time constant setting
CM1621
: Reserved for system APPENDICES
CM1699
CM1700
Digital trimmer 0 upper limit value
CM1701
CM1702
Digital trimmer 1 upper limit value
CM1703
CM1704
Digital trimmer 2 upper limit value
CM1705
CM1706
Digital trimmer 3 upper limit value
CM1707
CM1708
Digital trimmer 4 upper limit value
CM1709
CM1710
Digital trimmer 5 upper limit value
CM1711

A-55
 3 List of Device Nos.

Attribute
Device
R: Read only Function
No.
Blank: R/W
CM1712
Digital trimmer 6 upper limit value
CM1713
CM1714
Digital trimmer 7 upper limit value
CM1715
CM1716
: Reserved for system
CM1719
CM1720 Access window, user message 1
CM1721
: Access window, user message 2 (max. 32 characters)
CM1737
CM1738 Access window, operation disabled setting
CM1739
: Reserved for system
CM1999
CM2000 X-axis, I/O setting
CM2001 X-axis, sensor enable
CM2002
X-axis, current value comparator 0
CM2003
CM2004
X-axis, current value comparator 1
CM2005
CM2006 X-axis, zero return: startup frequency
CM2007 X-axis, zero return: acceleration/deceleration time
CM2008
X-axis, zero return: operation frequency
CM2009
CM2010 X-axis, jog operation: startup frequency
CM2011 X-axis, jog operation: acceleration/deceleration time
CM2012
X-axis, jog operation: operation frequency
CM2013
CM2014
X-axis, change current value setting value
APPENDICES

CM2015
CM2016
X-axis, change operation speed setting value in speed control mode
CM2017
CM2018 Reserved for system
CM2019 X-axis, M code
CM2020 R
X-axis, output pulse current value
CM2021 R
CM2022 R
X-axis, output frequency current value
CM2023 R
CM2024 X-axis, error code
CM2025 X-axis, operation point No.
CM2026
: Reserved for system
CM2029

A-56
 3 List of Device Nos.

Attribute
Device
R: Read only Function
No.
Blank: R/W
CM2030 Y-axis, I/O setting
CM2031 Y-axis, sensor enable
CM2032
Y-axis, current value comparator 0
CM2033
CM2034
Y-axis, current value comparator 1
CM2035
CM2036 Y-axis, zero return: startup frequency
CM2037 Y-axis, zero return: acceleration/deceleration time
CM2038
Y-axis, zero return: operation frequency
CM2039
CM2040 Y-axis, jog operation: startup frequency
CM2041 Y-axis, jog operation: acceleration/deceleration time
CM2042
Y-axis, jog operation: operation frequency
CM2043
CM2044
Y-axis, change current value setting value
CM2045
CM2046
Y-axis, change operation speed setting value in speed control mode
CM2047
CM2048 Reserved for system
CM2049 Y-axis, M code
CM2050 R
Y-axis, output pulse current value
CM2051 R
CM2052 R
Y-axis, output frequency current value
CM2053 R
CM2054 Y-axis, error code
CM2055 Y-axis, operation point No.
CM2056
: Reserved for system
CM2059
CM2060
Target value/travel APPENDICES
CM2061
CM2062 Startup frequency
CM2063 Acceleration/deceleration time
CM2064 CPU positioning function
Operation frequency
CM2065 Point parameter 0
CM2066 Operation mode
CM2067 Number of specified stop sensor pulses
CM2068
Reserved for system
CM2069
CM2070 Point parameter 1
: CPU positioning function :
CM2369 Point parameter 30

A-57
 3 List of Device Nos.

Attribute
Device
R: Read only Function
No.
Blank: R/W
CM2370
Target value/travel
CM2371
CM2372 Startup frequency
CM2373 Acceleration/deceleration time
CM2374 CPU positioning function
Operation frequency
CM2375 Point parameter 31
CM2376 Operation mode
CM2377 Number of specified stop sensor pulses
CM2378
Reserved for system
CM2379
CM2380
: Reserved for system
CM2599
CM2600
Logging function, device type 0
CM2601
CM2602 device type 1
: Logging function, :
CM2661 device type 30
CM2662
Logging function, device type 31
CM2663
CM2664 trigger selection details 0
: Logging function, :
CM2670 trigger selection details 6
CM2671 Logging function, number of registered devices
CM2672 Logging function, Memory Card storage capacity
CM2673
: Reserved for system
CM3999
APPENDICES

A-58
 4 List of Conversion Rules

4 List of Conversion Rules

This appendix provides a list of conversion rules when the KZ-300/350→KV-700
conversion function or KV→KV-700 conversion function is used for converting
devices.
See "Converting Ladder Programs for KZ-300/350" on page 6-152.

Device Conversion Rules when KZ-300/350→KV-700 Conversion Function is Used

KZ-300/350→KV-700 Relay Conversion
Category Function (KZ-300/350) KZ-300/350 KV-700
Input relay CPU input relay 0000 to 0009 0000 to 0009
Unused 0010 to 0415 0010 to 0415
Output relay CPU output relay 0500 to 0503 0500 to 0503
Auxiliary relay Auxiliary relay 0504 to 0915 0504 to 0915
Internal auxiliary relay Internal auxiliary relay 1000 to 1915 1000 to 1915
Unused 2000 to 2001 CR2000 to CR2001
Special auxiliary relays ON at all times 2002 CR2002
and arithmetic OFF at all times 2003 CR2003
operation flag
0.01 s clock pulse 2004 CR2004
0.1 s clock pulse 2005 CR2005
1.0 s clock pulse 2006 CR2006
OFF only for 1 scan at start of operation 2007 CR2007
ON only for 1 scan at start of operation 2008 CR2008
Result of arithmetic operation is minus or an 2009 CR2009
overflow
Result of arithmetic operation is zero 2010 CR2010
Result of arithmetic operation is plus 2011 CR2011
Arithmetic operation error 2012 CR2012
Unused 2013 to 2015 CR2013 to CR2015
Special auxiliary relays CTH0 dedicated internal clock (1 µs) 2100 CR2100
for high-speed counter CTH0 dedicated internal clock (10 µs) 2101 CR2101
(0)
CTH0 dedicated internal clock (100 µs) 2102 CR2102
Automatically clear CTH0 when CTC0 is ON 2103 CR2103 APPENDICES
Enable direct output to 500 when CTC0 is ON 2104 CR2104
Turn OFF direct output to 500 when CTC0 is ON 2105 CR2105
Turn ON direct output to 500 when CTC0 is ON 2106 CR2106
Invert output to 500 when CTC1 is ON 2107 CR2107
Enable direct output to 500 when CTC1 is ON 2108 CR2108
Turn OFF direct output to 500 when CTC1 is ON 2109 CR2109
Turn ON direct output to 500 when CTC1 is ON 2110 CR2110
Invert output to 500 when CTC1 is ON 2111 CR2111
Automatically clear CTH0 when CTC1 is ON 2112 CR2112
Enable CTH0 stepped mode 2113 Unconvertible
Select CTH0 stepped mode 2114 Unconvertible
Enable external reset of CTH0 2115 Unconvertible

A-59
 4 List of Conversion Rules

Category Function (KZ-300/350) KZ-300/350 KV-700

Special auxiliary relays CTH1 dedicated internal clock (1 µs) 2200 CR2200
for high-speed counter CTH1 dedicated internal clock (10 µs) 2201 CR2201
(1)
CTH1 dedicated internal clock (100 µs) 2202 CR2202
Automatically clear CTH1 when CTC2 is ON 2203 CR2203
Enable direct output to 501 when CTC2 is ON 2204 Unconvertible
Turn OFF direct output to 501 when CTC2 is ON 2205 Unconvertible
Select edge of INT3 2206 CR2207
Invert direct output to 501 when CTC2 is ON 2207 Unconvertible
Enable direct output to 501 when CTC3 is ON 2208 CR2208
Turn OFF direct output to 501 when CTC3 is ON 2209 CR2209
Turn ON direct output to 501 when CTC3 is ON 2210 CR2210
Invert direct output to 501 when CTC3 is ON 2211 CR2211
Automatically clear CTH1 when CTC3 is ON 2212 CR2212
Enable CTH1 stepped mode 2213 Unconvertible
Select CTH1 stepped mode 2214 Unconvertible
Enable external reset of CTH1 2215 Unconvertible
Other special auxiliary Disable all relay outputs 2300 CR2300
relays Disable all relay inputs 2301 CR2301
Stop user program execution 2302 Unconvertible
Fixed scan time operation 2303 CR2303
ON for 1 scan only at fixed scan time operation 2304 CR2304
Forced reset by MEMSW 2305 Unconvertible
ON at remote broken line 2306 Unconvertible
Reserved for PC Link Unit 2307 Unconvertible
X-axis motor, driver stop 2308 Unconvertible
X-axis motor, driver operating/emergency stop 2309 Unconvertible
X-axis motor, driver operation start 2310 Unconvertible
Y-axis motor, driver stop 2311 Unconvertible
Y-axis motor, driver operating 2312 Unconvertible
Y-axis motor, driver operation start 2313 Unconvertible
ASCII text string→Binary (32-bit) conversion 2314 Unconvertible
Binary (32-bit) →ASCII text string conversion 2315 Unconvertible
Unused 2400 to 2515 2400 to 2515
APPENDICES

Used at extended ladder→regular ladder 2600 to 2608 Unconvertible

conversion
Unused 2609 to 2802 2609 to 2802
Send break signal 2803 Unconvertible
Receive text data error 2804 Unconvertible
Text data download error 2805 Unconvertible
Receive text data error 2806 Unconvertible
Start sending text data 2807 Unconvertible
Unused 2808 to 2811 2808 to 2811
Power supply error 2812 Unconvertible
0000 to 0009 input time constants 2813 CR2305
HKEY instruction, multiple keys disabled 2814 CR3514
HKEY instruction, end of scan 2815 CR3515
HKEY instruction, information storage area 2900 to 2915 CR3600 to CR3615
Internal auxiliary relay Internal auxiliary relay 3000 to 6915 3000 to 6915

A-60
 4 List of Conversion Rules

[Tip]
About Relays 7000 to 17915
• Relays currently used as internal auxiliary relays are converted with the same
relay No. intact.
• Relays assigned to units conform to the conversion rules of that unit.
About Unconvertible Devices
Relays or unconvertible special auxiliary relays occupied by units that do not
support the device conversion function are not converted and become invalid
operands with their original device Nos. intact.

KZ-300/350→KV-700 Data Memory Conversion

The table below summarizes the conversion rules for data memories not used on
special units.
Data memories assigned to special units are converted not by the following rules
but according to conversion rules for each special unit.
Whether or not data memory is assigned to special units is judged based upon the
unit configuration of the KZ-300/350 set on Unit Editor.
Category Function (KZ-300/350) KZ-300/350 KV-700
Spare For user DM0000 to DM8999 DM0000 to DM8999
For KZ-AN6 For A/D, D/A DM9000 to DM9029 DM9000 to DM9029*
Spare For user DM9030 to DM9199 DM9030 to DM9199
For For text data reception DM9200 to DM9299 Unconvertible
transmission/reception of For text data transmission DM9300 to DM9399 Unconvertible
CPU PLC port text data Unused DM9400 to DM9406 DM9400 to DM9406
For CPU positioning Motor drive error code DM9407 Unconvertible
function Startup pulse (X-axis) DM9408 Unconvertible
Operation pulse (X-axis) DM9409 Unconvertible
Acceleration time (X-axis) DM9410 Unconvertible
Number of output pulses (X-axis) 32-bit DM9411 to DM9412 Unconvertible
selection
Startup pulse (Y-axis) DM9413 Unconvertible
Operation pulse (Y-axis) DM9414 Unconvertible
Acceleration time (Y-axis) DM9415 Unconvertible
Number of output pulses (Y-axis) 32-bit DM9416 to DM9417 Unconvertible
selection
APPENDICES
Unused DM9418 to DM9499 DM9418 to DM9499
For KZ-R1A Broken line detection (unit No.) DM9500 Unconvertible
Broken line detection (channel No.) DM9501 Unconvertible
Unused DM9502 to DM9506 DM9502 to DM9506
Connection status DM9507 to DM9517 Unconvertible
Unused DM9518 to DM9599 DM9518 to DM9599
ASCII→Binary conversion Leading DM No. having ASCII text DM9600 Unconvertible
string
Leading DM for writing binary- DM9601 Unconvertible
converted values
Binary→ASCII conversion Leading DM No. for writing ASCII text DM9602 Unconvertible
string after conversion
Leading DM No. having a binary DM9603 Unconvertible
numeral value
Unused DM9604 to DM9699 DM9604 to DM9699
For KZ-L2 L2 reserved DM9700 to DM9827 DM9700 to DM9827
Unused DM9828 to DM9999 DM9828 to DM9999
* Refer to KZ-AN6 conversion rules when DM9000 to DM9029 are used on the KZ-AN6.
See "KZ-AN6→KV-AD40/DA40 Device Conversion" on page A-63.

A-61
 4 List of Conversion Rules

[Tip]
About Unconvertible Devices
Relays or unconvertible special auxiliary relays occupied by units that do not
support the device conversion function are not converted and become invalid
operands with their original device Nos. intact.

KZ-300/350→KV-700 Other Device Conversion

Category Function (KZ-300/350) KZ-300/350 KV-700
Timer Timer T000 to T249 T000 to T249
Counter Counter C000 to C249 C000 to C249
High-speed counter High-speed counter CTH0 to CTH1 CTH0 to CTH1
High-speed counter comparator High-speed counter comparator CTC0 to CTC3 CTC0 to CTC3
Temporary memory For arithmetic operation TM00 to TM01 TM00 to TM01
TM02 to TM03 TM102 to TM103
For user
TM04 to TM28 TM004 to TM028
Fixed scan time operation TM29 Unconvertible
setting value
Entry of CTC0 value at INT3 TM30 Unconvertible
interruption
Cycle time measurement value TM31 Unconvertible

[Tip]
About Unconvertible Devices
Relays or unconvertible special auxiliary relays occupied by units that do not
support the device conversion function are not converted and become invalid
operands with their original device Nos. intact.

KZ-L2→KV-L20 Device Conversion

With KZ-L2 to KV-L20 device conversion, device conversion is not performed and
the setting mode is not converted (the mode becomes an invalid operand). Units are
only placed. Change the settings and program manually.
APPENDICES

KZ-TH4/TC4→KV-TF40 Device Conversion

With conversion from KZ-TH4/TC4 to KV-TF40, device conversion is not performed.
(devices becomes invalid operands). Units are only placed. Change the settings
and program manually.

KZ-R1A→KL-N20V Device Conversion

KZ-R1A is converted to KL-N20V one unit at a time. To collectively convert two or
more KZ-R1As to a single KL-N20V, use the separate slave device information
import function after executing conversion.
See "Importing Slave Device Information" on page 5-63.

A-62
 4 List of Conversion Rules

KZ-AN6→KV-AD40/DA40 Device Conversion

„ Data Memory
Function (KZ-AN6) KZ-AN6 KV-AD40/DA40
1st unit Analog input ch0 DM9000 KV-AD40 1st unit [M]+01
ch1 DM9001 KV-AD40 1st unit [M]+06
ch2 DM9002 KV-AD40 1st unit [M]+11
ch3 DM9003 KV-AD40 1st unit [M]+16
Analog output ch0 DM9004 KV-DA40 1st unit [M]+00
ch1 DM9005 KV-DA40 1st unit [M]+04
2nd unit Analog input ch0 DM9006 KV-AD40 2nd unit [M]+01
ch1 DM9007 KV-AD40 2nd unit [M]+06
ch2 DM9008 KV-AD40 2nd unit [M]+11
ch3 DM9009 KV-AD40 2nd unit [M]+16
Analog output ch0 DM9010 KV-DA40 1st unit [M]+08
ch1 DM9011 KV-DA40 1st unit [M]+12
3rd unit Analog input ch0 DM9012 KV-AD40 3rd unit [M]+01
ch1 DM9013 KV-AD40 3rd unit [M]+06
ch2 DM9014 KV-AD40 3rd unit [M]+11
ch3 DM9015 KV-AD40 3rd unit [M]+16
Analog output ch0 DM9016 KV-DA40 2nd unit [M]+00
ch1 DM9017 KV-DA40 2nd unit [M]+04
4th unit Analog input ch0 DM9018 KV-AD40 4th unit [M]+01
ch1 DM9019 KV-AD40 4th unit [M]+06
ch2 DM9020 KV-AD40 4th unit [M]+11
ch3 DM9021 KV-AD40 4th unit [M]+16
Analog output ch0 DM9022 KV-DA40 2nd unit [M]+08
ch1 DM9023 KV-DA40 2nd unit [M]+12
5th unit Analog input ch0 DM9024 KV-AD40 5th unit [M]+01
ch1 DM9025 KV-AD40 5th unit [M]+06
ch2 DM9026 KV-AD40 5th unit [M]+11
ch3 DM9027 KV-AD40 5th unit [M]+16
APPENDICES
Analog output ch0 DM9028 KV-DA40 3rd unit [M]+00
ch1 DM9029 KV-DA40 3rd unit [M]+04
* M: Start DM No. of KV-AD40 and KV-DA40

„ Range Setting
Range KZ-AN6 KV-AD40/DA40
Input range Voltage ±5 V Voltage 0 to 5 V*
Voltage ±10 V Voltage ±10 V
Current 0 to 20 mA Current 0 to 20 mA
Output range Voltage ±5 V Voltage 0 to 5 V*
Current 4 to 20 mA Current 4 to 20 mA
Voltage ±10 V Voltage ±10 V
* Cannot be used in range –5 V to 0 V.

A-63
 4 List of Conversion Rules

„ Scaling Function
Though the KZ-AN6 handles 16-bit (0 to 65535) data, the actual valid data is the
upper 12 bits of these 16-bit data.
As the KV-AD40/DA40 handles 12-bit (0 to 4000) data, the scaling function, one
of the KV-AD40/DA40 functions, is automatically set to convert 12-bit data to
16-bit data.

Setting Range Scaling Lower Limit Value Scaling Upper Limit Value
Voltage ±5 V 0 32000
Voltage ±10 V -32000 32000
Current 0 to 20 mA -32000 32000
Current 4 to 20 mA -32000 32000

KZ-H2→KV-H20 Device Conversion

KZ-H2 and KV-H20 device assignments are completely compatible. Device
conversion operates in the same way as when operands are converted as they are.

„ I/O Relays
Function KZ-H2 KV-H20
X-axis input relay [n]00 to [n+1]15 [m]00 to [m+1]15
Y-axis input relay [n+2]00 to [n+3]15 [m+2]00 to [m+3]15
Spare relay [n+4]00 to [n+4]15 [m+4]00 to [m+4]15
X-axis output relay [n+5]00 to [n+6]15 [m+5]00 to [m+6]15
Y-axis output relay [n+7]00 to [n+8]15 [m+7]00 to [m+8]15
Spare relay [n+9]00 to [n+9]15 [m+9]00 to [m+9]15
* n: KZ-H2 leading relay No.
m: KV-H20 leading relay No.

„ Communications Register
Function KZ-H2 KV-H20
Communications register [N]+00 to [N]+251 [M]+00 to [M]+251
APPENDICES

* N: KZ-H2 leading DM No.

M: KV-H20 leading DM No.

KL-N20Z→KL-N20V Device Conversion

KL-N20Z devices are converted to KL-N20V as follows according to the mode set
on the KL-N20Z.
• Remote I/O mode
Devices are converted based upon each of the send/receive addresses
entered when the KL-N20Z is placed and upon the set number of addresses.
Note, however, that the connection information area is not converted.

• PLC Link mode

Device conversion is not executed (the mode becomes an invalid operand).
Units are only placed. Change the address settings and program manually.

A-64
 4 List of Conversion Rules

Device Conversion Rules When KV→KV-700 Conversion Function is Used

KV-10/16/24/40→KV-700 Relay Conversion
Category Function (KV-10/16/24/40) KV-10/16/24/40 KV-700
Input relay CPU input relay 0000 to 0009 0000 to 0009
CPU + Extended input relay 0010 to 0415 Unconvertible
Output relay CPU 0500 to 0503 0500 to 0503
CPU + Extended output relay 0504 to 0915 Unconvertible
Internal auxiliary Internal auxiliary relay 1000 to 1915 1000 to 1915
relay Unused 2000 to 2001 CR2000 to CR2001
Special auxiliary ON at all times 2002 CR2002
relays and OFF at all times 2003 CR2003
arithmetic
operation flag 0.01 s clock pulse 2004 CR2004
0.1 s clock pulse 2005 CR2005
1.0 s clock pulse 2006 CR2006
OFF only for 1 scan at start of operation 2007 CR2007
ON only for 1 scan at start of operation 2008 CR2008
Result of arithmetic operation is minus or an 2009 CR2009
overflow
Result of arithmetic operation is zero 2010 CR2010
Result of arithmetic operation is plus 2011 CR2011
Arithmetic operation error 2012 CR2012
Unused 2013 to 2015 CR2013 to CR2015
Special auxiliary CTH0 dedicated internal clock (1 µs) 2100 CR2100
relays for high- CTH0 dedicated internal clock (10 µs) 2101 CR2101
speed counter (0)
CTH0 dedicated internal clock (100 µs) 2102 CR2102
Automatically clear CTH0 when CTC0 is ON 2103 CR2103
Enable direct output to 500 when CTC0 is ON 2104 CR2104
Turn OFF direct output to 500 when CTC0 is 2105 CR2105
ON
Turn ON direct output to 500 when CTC0 is ON 2106 CR2106
Invert output to 500 when CTC1 is ON 2107 CR2107
Enable direct output to 500 when CTC1 is ON 2108 CR2108
Turn OFF direct output to 500 when CTC1 is 2109 CR2109 APPENDICES
ON
Turn ON direct output to 500 when CTC1 is ON 2110 CR2110
Invert output to 500 when CTC1 is ON 2111 CR2111
Automatically clear CTH1 when CTC1 is ON 2112 CR2112
Enable CTH0 stepped mode 2113 Unconvertible
Select CTH0 stepped mode 2114 Unconvertible
Unused 2115 2115
Special auxiliary CTH1 dedicated internal clock (1 µs) 2200 CR2200
relays for high- CTH1 dedicated internal clock (10 µs) 2201 CR2201
speed counter (1)
CTH1 dedicated internal clock (100 µs) 2202 CR2202
Automatically clear CTH1 when CTC2 is ON 2203 CR2203
Enable direct output to 501 when CTC2 is ON 2204 CR2204
Turn OFF direct output to 501 when CTC2 is 2205 CR2205
ON
Turn ON direct output to 501 when CTC2 is ON 2206 CR2206
Invert direct output to 501 when CTC2 is ON 2207 CR2207

A-65
 4 List of Conversion Rules

Category Function (KV-10/16/24/40) KV-10/16/24/40 KV-700

Special auxiliary Enable direct output to 501 when CTC3 is ON 2208 CR2208
relays for high- Turn OFF direct output to 501 when CTC3 is 2209 CR2209
speed counter (1) ON
Turn ON direct output to 501 when CTC3 is ON 2210 CR2210
Invert direct output to 501 when CTC3 is ON 2211 CR2211
Automatically clear CTH1 when CTC3 is ON 2212 CR2212
CTH1 stepped mode selection 2213 Unconvertible
CTH1 stepped mode selection 2214 Unconvertible
Unused 2215 2215
Other special Disable all relay outputs 2300 CR2300
auxiliary relays Disable all relay inputs 2301 CR2301
Unused 2302 2302
Fixed scan time operation 2303 CR2303
ON for 1 scan only at fixed scan time operation 2304 CR2304
Frequency counter, operation start flag 2305 Unconvertible
Enable output of specified frequency pulses 2306 Unconvertible
Specified frequency pulses output error flag 2307 Unconvertible
Motor driver stop 2308 Unconvertible
Motor, driver operating/emergency stop 2309 Unconvertible
Motor, driver operation start 2310 Unconvertible
Unused 2311 2311
Unused 2312 2312
Unused 2313 2313
Cam switch operation start 2314 Unconvertible
Cam switch error flag 2315 Unconvertible
CTH0 external signal preset 2400, 2401 CR2400, CR2401
INT0 interrupt polarity 2402, 2403 CR2700, CR2701
INT1 interrupt polarity 2404, 2405 CR2702, CR2703
CTH0 ring counter 2406 CR2402
Ignore B phase in CTH0 unstepped mode 2407 Unconvertible
CTH1 external signal preset 2408, 2409 CR2404, CR2405
INT2 interrupt polarity 2410, 2411 CR2704, CR2705
APPENDICES

INT3 interrupt polarity 2412, 2413 CR2706, CR2707

CTH1 ring counter 2414 CR2406
Ignore B phase in CTH1 unstepped mode 2415 Unconvertible
KV-D20 customized switch 2500 to 2503 Unconvertible
KV-D20 customized lamp 2504 to 2507 Unconvertible
KV-D20 2508 to 2511 Unconvertible
Reserved for system 2512, 2513 2512, 2513
Unused 2514 2514
Access window user message display 2515 CR2900
Unused 2600 to 2608 2600 to 2608
KV extension 2609 to 2613 Unconvertible
Unused 2614 to 2615 2614 to 2615
KL 2700 to 2707 Unconvertible
Enable QL use 2708 CR1800
QL baud rate 2709 to 2710 CR1801, CR1802

A-66
 4 List of Conversion Rules

Category Function (KV-10/16/24/40) KV-10/16/24/40 KV-700

Other special Clear input at QL broken line 2711 CR1803
auxiliary relay QL broken line error 2712 CR1804
Unused 2713 2713
Use high-speed input compensation circuit 2714 Unconvertible
Cam switch function, ON during operation 2715 Unconvertible
Communications port A: send break signal 2800 Unconvertible
(sent while relay is
ON)
Communications port A: receive text data 2801 Unconvertible
Communications port A: text data download 2802 Unconvertible
error
Communications port A: receive text data error 2803 Unconvertible
Communications port A: start sending text data 2804 Unconvertible
(ON while data is
being sent)
Communications port B: send break signal 2805 Unconvertible
(sent while relay is
ON)
Communications port B: receive text data 2806 Unconvertible
Communications port B: text data download 2807 Unconvertible
error
Communications port B: receive text data error 2808 Unconvertible
Communications port B: start sending text data 2809 Unconvertible
(ON while data is
being sent)
Reserved for system 2810 2810
Unused 2811 2811
Turns ON at backup battery error. 2812 Unconvertible
Set the input time constant of all CPU Unit 2813 CR2305
inputs.
HKEY instruction, multiple keys disabled 2814 CR3514
HKEY instruction, end of scan 2815 CR3515
HKEY instruction, information storage area 2900 to 2915 CR3600 to CR3615
Internal auxiliary Internal auxiliary relay 3000 to 15915 3000 to 15915
relay
Relay for QL QL input 16000 to 16715 CR0000 to CR0715
Internal auxiliary Internal auxiliary relay 16800 to 16915 16800 to 16915
relay
Relay for QL QL output 17000 to 17715 CR1000 to CR1715
Internal auxiliary Internal auxiliary relay 17800 to 17915 17800 to 17915
relay

[Tip] APPENDICES
About Unconvertible Devices
Relays or unconvertible special auxiliary relays occupied by units that do not
support the device conversion function are not converted and become invalid
operands with their original device Nos. intact.

KV-10/16/24/40→KV700 Data Memory Conversion

Function (KV-10/16/24/40) KV-10/16/24/40 KV-700
Spare (available to user) DM0000 to DM0999 DM0000 to DM0999
Text receive port A DM1000 to DM1099 Unconvertible
Text send port A DM1100 to DM1199 Unconvertible
Text receive port B DM1200 to DM1299 Unconvertible
Text send port B DM1300 to DM1399 Unconvertible
Cam switch function, save leading output relay No. DM1400 Unconvertible
Cam switch function, comparator value in multi-stage compare mode DM1401 Unconvertible
Cam switch function, number of pulses in cycle of device input to DM1402 Unconvertible
CTH0
Spare (available to user) DM1403 DM1403
Frequency counter function, measurement cycle (ms) DM1404 Unconvertible
Frequency counter function, frequency measurement results (Hz) DM1405 Unconvertible

A-67
 4 List of Conversion Rules

Function (KV-10/16/24/40) KV-10/16/24/40 KV-700

Cam switch function, Angle setting value DM1406 to DM1469 Unconvertible
Reserved for system DM1470 DM1470
Spare (available to user) DM1471 to DM1479 DM1471 to DM1479
Trapezoidal control function, startup frequency (Hz) DM1480 Unconvertible
Trapezoidal control function, operation frequency (Hz) DM1481 Unconvertible
Trapezoidal control function, acceleration time (ms) DM1482 Unconvertible
Spare (available to user) DM1483 DM1483
Trapezoidal control function, number of output pulses (lower) DM1484 Unconvertible
Trapezoidal control function, number of output pulses (upper) DM1485 Unconvertible
Trapezoidal control function, error code DM1486 Unconvertible
Spare (available to user) DM1487 to DM1499 DM1487 to DM1499
QL receive data area DM1500 to DM1531 CM1500 to CM1531
QL send data area DM1532 to DM1563 DM1532 to DM1563
QL slave device unit, number of communications addresses DM1564 CM1564
Spare (available to user) DM1565 to DM1569 DM1565 to DM1569
QL connection information DM1570 to DM1577 CM1570 to CM1577
Spare (available to user) DM1578, DM1579 DM1578, DM1579
KV-D20 display device No. DM1580 to DM1599 Unconvertible
KL receive data area DM1600 to DM1663 Unconvertible
Spare (available to user) DM1664 to DM1669 DM1664 to DM1669
Reserved for system DM1670 to DM1675 DM1670 to DM1675
KV-D20, setting of travel enable in operator mode DM1676 Unconvertible
KV-D20, area for direct access mode DM1677 to DM1679 Unconvertible
KV-D20, display device attribute DM1680 to DM1699 Unconvertible
KL send data area DM1700 to DM1763 Unconvertible
Spare (available to user) DM1764 to DM1799 DM1764 to DM1799
KL send address DM1800 Unconvertible
KL number of send addresses DM1801 Unconvertible
KL receive addresses DM1802 Unconvertible
KL number of receive addresses DM1803 Unconvertible
KL error No. DM1804 Unconvertible
KL number of connection communication addresses DM1805 Unconvertible
APPENDICES

Spare (available to user) DM1806 to DM1809 DM1806 to DM1809

KL connection information DM1810 to DM1825 Unconvertible
Spare (available to user) DM1826 to DM1899 DM1826 to DM1899
Read CTH, CTC 24-bit value DM1900 to DM1911 Unconvertible
Write CTH, CTC 24-bit current value DM1912 to DM1915 Unconvertible
Write CTC 24-bit setting value DM1916 to DM1923 Unconvertible
CTH0 preset input DM1924, DM1925 CM1604, CM1605
CTH1 preset input DM1926, DM1927 CM1606, CM1607
Input capture at INT0 generation DM1928, DM1929 CM1610, CM1611
Input capture at INT1 generation DM1930, DM1931 CM1612, CM1613
Input capture at INT2 generation DM1932, DM1933 CM1614, CM1615
Input capture at INT3 generation DM1934, DM1935 CM1616, CM1617
Specified frequency pulse output function, set frequency (Hz) DM1936 Unconvertible
Extended I/O unit connection information DM1937 Unconvertible
Digital trimmer 0 upper limit value DM1938 Unconvertible

A-68
 4 List of Conversion Rules

Function (KV-10/16/24/40) KV-10/16/24/40 KV-700

Digital trimmer 1 upper limit value DM1939 Unconvertible
Input time constant setting DM1940 CM1620
Reserved for system DM1941 to DM1943 DM1941 to DM1943
Number of instructions to be convert in a single scan during DM1944 Unconvertible
separated conversion
Spare (available to user) DM1945 to DM1949 DM1945 to DM1949
Access window user error display DM1950 CM1720
Spare (available to user) DM1951 to DM1999 DM1951 to DM1999

[Tip]
About Unconvertible Devices
Relays or unconvertible special auxiliary relays occupied by units that do not
support the device conversion function are not converted and become invalid
operands with their original device Nos. intact.

KV-10/16/24/40→KV700 Other Device Conversion

Device Function (KV-10/16/24/40) KV-10/16/24/40 KV-700
Timers T000 to T249 T000 to T249
Counters C000 to C249 C000 to C249
High-speed CTH0 to CTH1 CTH0 to CTH1
counters
High-speed CTC0 to CTC3 CTC0 to CTC3
counter
comparators
Temporary For arithmetic operation TM00 to TM01 TM00 to TM01
memories For user TM02 to TM03 TM102 to TM103
TM04 to TM27 TM004 to TM027
Scan time when setting value is exceeded TM28 Unconvertible
Fixed scan time operation setting value TM29 Unconvertible
Entry of CTC0 value at INT3 interruption TM30 Unconvertible
Scan time measurement value TM31 CM0720
APPENDICES

[Tip]
About Unconvertible Devices
Relays or unconvertible special auxiliary relays occupied by units that do not
support the device conversion function are not converted and become invalid
operands with their original device Nos. intact.

A-69
 5 List of Sample Programs

5 List of Sample Programs

This appendix describes the sample ladder programs that are installed during setup.
Sample programs are stored in "\KVBE\PROJECT".

Explanation of Sample Ladder Programs

„ Samp01: Turn lamps ON/OFF
Set device: KV-700
Program: Lamps on the KV-700 turns ON and OFF in various patterns when
the KV-700 is turned ON.

„ Samp02: Turn lamps ON/OFF

Set device: KV-10(16)A/D
Program: This program is the same as Samp01 but is intended for use on the
KV-10/16/24/40.
APPENDICES

A-70
 6 List of Circuits Registered to Circuit Library

6 List of Circuits Registered to Circuit Library

Circuits Registered to Circuit Libraries

The following lists shows the default circuits currently registered to circuit libraries.

„ For KV-10/16/24/40
Folder Name Circuit Library Name
Positioning control functions Positioning control (basic operation)
Positioning control (jog operation)
Positioning control (palletizing)
Positioning control (pitch feed)
High-speed counter function Phase difference high-speed counter (for CTH0)
Phase difference high-speed counter (for CTH1)
Frequency counter function Frequency counter
Specified frequency pulse output function Specified frequency pulse output
Cam switch function Cam switch functions
Basic circuits ON delay circuit
OFF delay circuit
One-shot circuit
Flicker circuit
Alternate circuit
32-bit arithmetic operation 32-bit signed addition
32-bit signed subtraction
32-bit unsigned multiplication
32-bit unsigned division
Data memory processing Data memory initialization
Data memory block transfer
Data memory shift
Serial communications Text data transmission/reception (for PortA)
Text data transmission/reception (for PortB)
KL-N10V Communications between KL-N10V and KL-4AD
APPENDICES
QL-R01 Reading of QL-R01 photosensor data

● Circuit libraries added in Ver.4 (kvp16Sample01.lib)

Folder Name Circuit Library Name
Exclusive to KV-P16 How to use function switches

[Tip]
Circuit libraries are added in KV-BUILDER Ver.4. If circuits were registered in
Ver.3, import the additional circuits (file name: kvp16Sample01.lib). If circuits
were no registered in Ver.3, the circuit library will automatically be updated when
you install Ver.4.

A-71
 6 List of Circuits Registered to Circuit Library

„ For KV-700
Folder Name Circuit Library Name
CPU positioning function CPU positioning function (X-axis zero return)
CPU positioning function (Y-axis zero return)
CPU positioning function (X-axis jog operation)
CPU positioning function (Y-axis jog operation)
CPU positioning function (X-axis teaching)
CPU positioning function (Y-axis teaching)
CPU positioning function (X-axis pitch feed)
CPU positioning function (Y-axis pitch feed)
CPU positioning function (X-axis palletizing)
CPU positioning function (Y-axis palletizing)
CPU positioning function (X-axis speed control)
CPU positioning function (Y-axis speed control)
CPU positioning function (X-axis M code)
CPU positioning function (Y-axis M code)
Logging function Logging (executed on the hour every hour)
Logging (bit devices)
Logging (executed every other hour)
Calendar timer Calendar timer
Frequency counter function Frequency counter (Hz count)
Frequency counter (rpm count)
Cam switch function Cam switch function (incremental type)
Cam switch function (absolute type)
Cam switch function (64 point output)
Asynchronous control function Asynchronous control
Arithmetic operation Arithmetic operation (addition)
Arithmetic operation (subtraction)
Arithmetic operation (multiplication)
Arithmetic operation (division)
CPU serial communications CPU text data transmission/reception
KV-L20 KV-L20 KV mode (text data transmission/reception)
APPENDICES

KV-L20 non-procedural mode (normal)

KV-L20 non-procedural mode (receive response)
KV-L20 non-procedural mode (clear buffer)
KV-L20 PROTOCOL BUILDER mode
QL-R01 Reading of QL-R01 photosensor data

A-72
 6 List of Circuits Registered to Circuit Library

z Circuit libraries added in Ver.3 (kv700Sample01.lib)

Folder Name Circuit Library Name
KV-SC20 up/down count mode
KV-SC20 preset count mode
KV-SC20 enable accumulate count
KV-SC20 enable count
KV-SC20 setting timer count
KV-SC20
KV-SC20 frequency count
KV-SC20 rotation speed meter
KV-SC20 change set value
KV-SC20 change count present values
KV-SC20 external output ON/OFF
KV-H20 X-axis 1-point operation
KV-H20 Y-axis 1-point operation
KV-H20 X-axis zero return
KV-H20 Y-axis zero return
KV-H20 X-axis jog operation
KV-H20 Y-axis jog operation
KV-H20
KV-H20 X-axis system parameter settings
KV-H20 Y-axis system parameter settings
KV-H20 change X-axis speed parameter settings
KV-H20 change Y-axis speed parameter settings
KV-H20 change speed during X-axis speed control
KV-H20 change speed during Y-axis speed control
KV-TF40 KV-TF40 PID control

[Tip]
Circuit libraries have been added on as a feature of KV-BUILDER Ver.3. When
registering circuits when using Ver.2, import these additional circuit libraries (file
name "KV700Sample01.lib).
When not registering circuit libraries in Ver2, circuit libraries are automatically
updated when Ver.3 is installed.
APPENDICES

A-73
 7 List of Shortcut Key Commands

7 List of Shortcut Key Commands

The following lists show the shortcut key commands used for executing specific
functions.

Unit Editor
z File

z Edit

z Convert

z Slave device setup

APPENDICES

z Display

z Window

A-74
 7 List of Shortcut Key Commands

z Operations in unit placement area

z Operations in configure unit window

z Operations in select unit window

z Operations in set unit window

z Operations in message area

APPENDICES

A-75
 7 List of Shortcut Key Commands

Unit Editor (Slave Device Setup screen)

z File

z Edit

z Convert

z Display

z Window

z Operations in slave device placement area

APPENDICES

z Operations in select unit window

z Operations in set unit window

z Operations in set address window

A-76
 7 List of Shortcut Key Commands

Editor
z File

z Edit

APPENDICES

A-77
 7 List of Shortcut Key Commands

z Comment

z Find/replace

z Monitors/Simulator
APPENDICES

z Convert

A-78
 7 List of Shortcut Key Commands

z Display

z Tools

z Help

z Operations in edit screen

APPENDICES

A-79
 7 List of Shortcut Key Commands

Monitor
z File

z Edit
APPENDICES

A-80
 7 List of Shortcut Key Commands

z Comment

z Find

z PLC

z Monitor

APPENDICES
z Online Edit

z Display

A-81
 7 List of Shortcut Key Commands

z Tools

z Help

z Operations in Ladder Monitor

z Operations in Registration Monitor

z Operations in Batch Monitor

APPENDICES

z Operations common to all other windows

A-82
 7 List of Shortcut Key Commands

Simulator
z File

z Find

z Execute

z Display

APPENDICES

z Help

A-83
 7 List of Shortcut Key Commands

z Operations in Ladder Monitor

z Operations in Registration Monitor

z Operations in Batch Monitor

z Operations in Mnemonic Monitor

APPENDICES

z Operations in break conditions window

z Operations common to all other windows

A-84
 8 Programming Hints

8 Programming Hints
This appendix describes hints and precautions when you are programming ladder
programs.

Circuits Requiring Rewriting

z The circuit shown on the
right cannot be
programmed. Rewrite the
program.

z 0500 cannot be output in

the circuit on the right.
Rewrite the program so
that 0500 can be output
for only one scan.

z In the circuit shown on

the right, two of the same
coils are used. So, the
subsequent program is
given priority and the
preceding program is
ignored.

z The circuit shown on the

right cannot be
programmed. Rewrite the APPENDICES
program.

z The circuit shown on the

right cannot be
programmed. Rewrite the
program.

A-85
 8 Programming Hints

Programming Precautions
z Output coils, timers or
counters cannot be
connected directly from the
bus line. If such a
connection is required,
insert an NC contact of an
unused internal auxiliary or
special auxiliary circuit, or
special auxiliary relay 2002
(always ON contact) as a
dummy contact.

z Contacts cannot be
connected to output lines.

z Set all contacts and coils on

the path leading to the output
line from the bus line to
eliminate any non-
connections.

z Connect in parallel to prevent

unauthorized short-circuits.
APPENDICES

z Circuit groups containing an

output coil cannot be
connected in parallel.

Note, however, that a circuit

group as shown on the right
can be connected in parallel
if each circuit is connected to
the output line.

A-86
 8 Programming Hints

Programs That Cannot be Reverse Converted

A reversion conversion error occurs if you attempt to reverse convert a ladder
program that contains a feedback in a parallel connection. (See Figure a below.)
To remedy this, either change the ladder program to eliminate the feedback, or
separate the parallel connection. (See Figure b below)

A B C D E F G

Figure a: Ladder program that will result in a reverse conversion error

A B C D E F G

A I

Figure b: Ladder program that will not result in a reverse conversion error

APPENDICES

A-87
 9 Remedies for Frequently Occurring Communications Errors

9 Remedies for Frequently Occurring Communications Errors

This appendix describes the items to check and how to remedy frequently occurring
communications errors. when monitoring KV-10/16/24/40, KV-700 and KZ-300/350
on KV BUILDER.
Note: The items that need to be set vary according to the PC you are using. For
details on how to set items, refer to the user's manual provided with the PC
you are using, or directly contact your PC manufacturer.

z Is the communications port available on Windows?

In the Device Manager on Windows, check whether or not use of the
communications port specified in KV BUILDER is enabled.
To do this, select "Settings"→"Control Panel" from the Start menu to open the
Control Panel. Next, double-click the "System" icon to open the "System
Properties" window, and click the "Device Manager" tab. This displays the
Device Manager. Make sure that nothing is assigned to the communications port.

z Is the modem assigned to the communications port?

On some PCs, a modem might already be assigned to the communications port.
APPENDICES

If it is assigned, either disable the modem connection, or set a different

communications port.

z Is the serial mouse assigned to the communications port?

When using a serial mouse on a notebook PC, the communications port will not
be enabled even if the mouse and communications cable are swapped only
during communications. When communications is performed, specify the port in
the communications setups if there are any available communications ports. If
there are no available communications port, the serial mouse must be
disconnected and the PC rebooted.

z Has infra-red communications been set?

On some PCs, infra-red communications is sometimes assigned to the
communications port. In this case, specify the port in the communications setup
if there are any available communications ports. If there are no available
communications ports, setting of infra-red communications must be disabled.

A-88
 9 Remedies for Frequently Occurring Communications Errors

z Has the USB driver been correctly installed?

If communications errors frequently occur in USB communications, turn the KV-
700 and PC OFF and then back ON again. If this does not rectify the problem,
delete the USB driver from the Device Manager, and then re-install the USB
driver.

z Are many other applications running in addition to KV BUILDER?

If communications is interrupted by processing by other applications,
communications will be discontinued for the duration of the interrupt, and a time-
out error will sometimes occur. If time-out errors frequently occur, quit all
applications except KV BUILDER, and then retry communications.

z Set the Power Save mode on the PC to OFF.

On some PCs, processing to save power is executed periodically, which causes
applications including KV BUILDER to sometimes pause. The time-out error will
sometimes occur as KV BUILDER no longer functions during power save
processing. If time-out errors frequently occur, set the Power Save mode on the
PC to OFF referring to the User's Manual provided with the PC.

z Is Ethernet set up correctly?

When communications errors frequently occur on Ethernet, check the following
points. If this does not remedy the error, contact your network administrator.

• Are the correct cables being used?

• Are the Link indicators on the personal computer and Ethernet Unit lit?
• Is the IP address correctly entered?
• Issue a ping to the communications destination IP address, and check that the
IP address exists or packet loss is occurring.

z When the message "USB cannot be used" is displayed

Disconnect and then reconnect the USB cable to see if it is recognized on
Windows. If this does not remedy the problem, select "KEYENCE KV-700" at
"System Properties" → "Device Manager" → "Universal Serial Bus", and click the APPENDICES
"Update Driver" button on the "Driver" tab. This displays the device driver update
wizard. Re-install the driver. For details on installing the driver, see "1-5 Installing
the USB Driver" page 1-25.

A-89
 10 Index

10 Index
1 step execution..................................................... 8-23 Circuit Libraries, Importing and Exporting ............6-100
16-, 32- and 64-point Unit Monitor....................... 7-117 Circuit Library, Cautions When Using ....................6-96
Circuits, Registering ...............................................6-98
[A] circuit libraries, Exporting ...............................6-101
A/D Conversion Unit Monitor ................................7-119 circuit libraries, Importing................................6-100
About Changes and Additional Functions in KV Registered Circuits, Deleting ............................6-98
BUILDER Ver.2, Ver.3, Ver.3.5, Ver.4.0 ................. 1-18 Registered Circuits, Pasting .............................6-99
About Data Compatibility ....................................... 1-18 registered circuits, Replacing operands in .......6-99
About fixed scan .................................................... 8-21 Circuits Registered to Circuit Library, List of ......... A-71
About the format of text format comment files......6-114 KV-10/16/24/40, For ........................................ A-71
Address setup window........................................... 5-51 KV-700, For ..................................................... A-72
Addresses of Placed Slave Devices, Automatically Clear All Devices .......................................... 7-72, 8-47
Assigning the ......................................................... 5-58 coils, Entering.........................................................6-61
Addresses of Placed Slave Devices, Manually comment files on other software, Reading and saving
Assigning the ......................................................... 5-58 ..............................................................................6-116
Areas, Copying, Moving and Deleting ................... 6-86 Comments
areas, Copying, moving and deleting .................... 6-90 Comments, Displaying/Hiding ....... 6-25, 7-52, 8-34
areas, Moving and deleting.............................. 6-90 Comments, Entering............................... 5-53, 5-64
copied or cut ladder data, Pasting ................... 6-91 comments, Reading........................................6-115
other files, Copying from .................................. 6-92 comments, Saving ..........................................6-114
selected areas, Copying .................................. 6-90 Comments, Setting Transfer of.......................6-121
areas, Selecting ..................................................... 6-87 comments and labels, Editing ..............................6-103
“Auto” button (Panel Editor)................................... 10-8 Comments and Labels on Ladder Diagrams, Directly
auto-load function ...................................................4-11 Changing ..............................................................6-110
comments from other files, Reading ....................6-112
[B] Common restrictions ................................................8-2
Back 1 step execution............................................ 8-26 Communications Port, Selecting the ......................7-20
Backlight OFF time setting DM.............................. 10-9 Serial port detailed setting ................................7-20
Batch Change ...................................................... 7-139 Unit No., Setting the .........................................7-22
Batch Change windows, Reading.................. 7-142 Compatible OSs .......................................................1-3
Batch Change windows, Saving .................... 7-141 Confirmation Message Display, Changing .............5-80
Batch Monitor................................................ 7-73, 8-48 Connecting lines
Batch Monitor window, Reading the ....... 7-77, 8-53 connecting lines, Deleting.................................6-80
Batch Monitor window, Saving the.......... 7-76, 8-52 connecting lines, Entering ................................6-78
APPENDICES

Bit Devices ON/OFF, Turning................................. Continuous scan execution ....................................8-16

......................... 7-55, 7-80, 7-91, 8-37, 8-55, 8-65 Continuous step execution .....................................8-24
turn devices ON/OFF, Using keys to........................ Control Memory (CM) for KV-D30, Clearing ..........7-72
........................... 7-55, 7-80, 7-91, 8-37, 8-55, 8-66 Control Memory CM .............................................. A-52
turn devices ON/OFF, Using the mouse to .............. Control Relays CR................................................. A-47
........................... 7-55, 7-80, 7-91, 8-37, 8-55, 8-65 Conversion
Blink .......................................................... 10-13, 10-15 Conversion, Errors That Occur by ..................... A-6
Break Conditions, Setting ...................................... 8-18 Conversion, Executing....................................6-141
breakpoints, Specifying ......................................... 8-27 copied or cut ladder data, Pasting..........................6-91
specified breakpoints, To cancel ...................... 8-27 CPU positioning instructions, Entering...................6-71
CPU positioning parameters, Setting printing of ..6-168
[C] Current Values/Setting Values/Attributes, Changing.....
Calendar Timer, Setting the ................................... 7-70 ................................. 7-56, 7-81, 7-91, 8-38, 8-56, 8-66
Cam switch monitor ............................................... 9-22 Currently Placed Units, Setting ..............................5-37
“Cancel” button (Panel Editor) ...................... 10-7, 10-8 cursor movement unit, Setting the .........................5-73
Change data ............................................. 10-13, 10-15 Custom Monitor ....................................................7-103
Circuit Libraries...................................................... 6-96 Custom Monitor, Displaying............................7-103
Circuit Libraries, Displaying ................................... 6-97 Custom Monitors, Registering ........................7-104

A-90
 10 Index

[D] Devices to and from PLCs, Reading ....................7-143

D/A Conversion Unit Monitor ............................... 7-121 Devices to and from PLCs, Writing ......................7-143
Data access panel, Editing the .............................. 10-5 Devices, Registering .................................... 7-74, 7-85
Data Access Panel, Setting the ........................... 10-12 differential contacts and outputs, Entering .............6-67
Data access panel system parameters ................. 10-9 Display Color, Changing the....................... 5-74, 6-176
Data access panel system parameters area ......... 10-4 Display device ......................................................10-13
Data format ............................................... 10-13, 10-15 Display mode (Panel Editor) .................... 10-13, 10-15
Data length ............................................... 10-13, 10-15 Display setting value ................................ 10-13, 10-15
Data Memory for Communications ........................A-46 DM (KV)..................................................................5-76
Data Memory for Motor Drive ................................A-46 DM/CM values, and relay and control relay ON/OFF
data move instructions, Entering ........................... 6-69 states, Saving and reading.....................................4-17
Data plate ............................................................ 10-13
data that can be saved, Types and size of ............ 4-12 [E]
Decimal................................................................ 10-15 Edit CPU Positioning Parameter, Starting Up ......6-147
Default Suffix, Specifying the................................. 6-75 Editing Comments and Labels .............................6-102
Detailed Settings of Slave Devices, Displaying..... 5-60 Editing comments and labels in the list by device type
Device Assignments, Setting................................. 5-75 ..............................................................................6-103
DM (KV) ........................................................... 5-76 Editing of Units KZ-300/350 and KV-700, Switching.....
Relay setup ...................................................... 5-75 ................................................................................5-46
device attributes, Copying ............................ 7-94, 8-68 Ethernet communications, Errors during............... A-10
Device Auto-conversion Function, Setting the .... 6-144 Ethernet port...........................................................7-20
Device Conversion, (KV-H20 KV-H20S/H40S/H20G) Ethernet Unit Monitor ...........................................7-132
................................................................................. 9-3 Ethernet, When errors frequently occur on ........... A-89
Device Nos., Lists of ..............................................A-42 End Monitors ..........................................................7-44
Control Memory CM.........................................A-52 errors, Displaying .................................................6-142
Control Relays CR ...........................................A-47 Errors That Occur on Editor .................................... A-4
Data Memory for Communications ..................A-46 Errors That Occur on Simulator .............................. A-8
Data Memory for Motor Drive...........................A-46 Execute back continuous step ...............................8-26
KV-10/16/24/40 Devices ..................................A-43 execution, Stopping/pausing ..................................8-28
KV-700 Devices ...............................................A-47 Extended Ladder mode ..........................................6-82
Relay, Timer, Counter Memory No. by Device.........
.........................................................................A-42 [F]
Special auxiliary relays ....................................A-43 File
Temporary Data Memory .................................A-46 File Errors .......................................................... A-3
device use status, Setting printing of................... 6-167 File-related Errors (displayed on Monitor) ......... A-8
device values from Memory Card, Reading ........ 7-148 files, Reading ....................................................6-36
device values from files, Reading........................ 7-146 Files, Saving .....................................................6-34 APPENDICES
device values to file, Saving ................................ 7-144 Files, Setting Auto-reading of ...........................6-31
saved device values, Printing ........................ 7-145 files, Setting auto-saving of ..............................6-32
device values to Memory Card, Saving ............... 7-147 Files, Verifying ..................................................6-42
device values, Resetting........................................ 7-83 Flow of System Operations ....................................5-21
devices, Deleting .......................................... 7-96, 8-70 folders, Structure of .........................................3-3, 4-11
devices, Moving ............................................ 7-95, 8-69 Font color ................................................. 10-13, 10-15
devices, Resetting ...............................7-98, 8-58, 8-72 Font size ...............................................................10-15
devices, Selecting............. 7-79, 7-90, 8-36, 8-54, 8-65 Font Size, Changing the.........................................5-72
select devices, Using keys to................................... free rungs, Inserting ...............................................6-93
........................... 7-54, 7-79, 7-90, 8-36, 8-54, 8-65 Free space on hard disk...........................................1-3
select devices, Using the mouse to ......................... Function switch plate............................................10-15
........................... 7-54, 7-79, 7-90, 8-36, 8-54, 8-65
devices, Sorting ............................................ 7-97, 8-71 [G]
Devices for Units, Displaying...............6-24, 7-51, 8-33 Grid...................................................... 6-23, 7-50, 8-32
devices from the Ladder Monitor window, Dragging .....
...................................................................... 8-49, 8-60 [H]
devices in the dialog bar, Specifying ............ 8-50, 8-61 “Help” button (Panel Editor)....................................10-7
devices offline, Editing ........................................... 7-43 High-speed Counter Unit Monitor.........................7-130

A-91
 10 Index

High-speed Time Chart Monitor, Displaying ........ 7-106 KZ-R1A→KL-N20V Device Conversion ................ A-62
High-speed step execution .................................... 8-25 KZ-TH4/TC4→KV-TF40 Device Conversion......... A-62
How to Exit Panel Editor ........................................ 10-3
[L]
[I] labels, comments and verify information, Setting
Installer Errors ......................................................... A-4 printing of..............................................................6-166
Instructions Labels, Displaying ............................... 6-25, 7-52, 8-34
instructions and operands, Searching for ................ ladder diagrams, Setting printing of .....................6-164
.....................................................6-130, 7-64, 8-45 Ladder Edit view.....................................................10-5
instructions by mnemonic, Directly entering .... 6-56 Ladder program is already open, When a..............7-18
instructions for entry (instruction palette), Selecting Ladder program is not opened, When a.................7-19
....................................................................... 6-50 Ladder Programs, Transferring ..............................7-40
instructions from the instruction palette, Entering.... Ladder Monitor window at the bottom of the screen,
......................................................................... 6-45 Displaying the.........................................................7-54
instructions, Deleting........................................ 6-74 ladder program while the PLC is in the Run mode,
Invalid Operands.................................................. 6-143 Writing the ..............................................................7-40
Invalid Operands, Clearing ............................ 6-143 ladder programs, device comments and unit setup
information, Saving and reading ............................4-15
[J] Ladder Programs for KV-10/16/24/40, Converting........
Jump .................................................................... 6-122 ..............................................................................6-159
Jumping to Error Rungs................................ 5-43, 5-65 Ladder Programs for KZ-300/350, Converting .....6-152
Jumping to previous/next program change blocks6-129 Ladder Rungs into Comments, Turning ...............6-119
ladder rungs that can be edited, Maximum number of
[K] ..................................................................................6-2
KV-H20 KV-H20S/H40S/H20G Device Conversion9-3 list display by individual unit, Edit by ....................6-105
KL-N20V Address Settings, Manually Enabling .... 5-80 Load device comment ............................................10-6
KL-N20Z→KL-N20V Device Conversion...............A-64
KL Unit Monitor .................................................... 7-123 [M]
When displaying the address connection status Memory Cards..........................................................4-1
details............................................................. 7-125 Memory Card, Saving and Reading Data from KV
When displaying the address connection status list BUILDER to ............................................................4-15
....................................................................... 7-123 Memory Cards, Data Stored on........................4-14
KV BUILDER, Installing ......................................... 1-21 Memory Errors......................................................... A-3
KV BUILDER, Uninstalling..................................... 1-24 Menu buttons (Panel Editor) ........................ 10-4, 10-5
KV-10/16/24/40 devices ........................................A-43 Message ...............................................................10-15
Data Memory for Communications ..................A-46 Message panel, Editing the ....................................10-5
Data Memory for Motor Drive...........................A-46 Message Panel, Setting the .................................10-14
APPENDICES

Special auxiliary relays ....................................A-43 Message panel system parameters .....................10-10

Temporary Data Memory .................................A-46 Message panel system parameters area ...............10-4
KV-10/16/24/40→KV700 conversion Message window....................................................5-20
Data Memory Conversion ................................A-67 Mnemonic lists
Other Device Conversion.................................A-69 Inhibit output .....................................................7-69
Relay Conversion.............................................A-65 mnemonic lists, Displaying and editing ............6-84
KV-700 devices......................................................A-47 mnemonic lists, Ending editing of .....................6-85
Control Memory CM.........................................A-52 mnemonic lists, Format of ................................6-85
Control Relays CR ...........................................A-47 mnemonic lists, Reading ..................................6-39
KV-700 Unit Configurations based on KZ-300/350 Unit mnemonic lists, Saving.....................................6-38
Configurations, Manually Creating ........................ 5-47 mnemonic lists, Setting printing of..................6-165
KZ-300/350→KV-700 Modem mode, Outline of ........................................7-23
Data Memory Conversion ................................A-61 Monitor
Other Device Conversion.................................A-62 Errors That Occur When Monitor is Started Up and
Relay Conversion.............................................A-59 Communications Errors ..................................... A-9
KZ-AN6→KV-AD40/DA40 Device Conversion ......A-63 Monitor, Exiting the ...........................................7-66
KZ-H2→KV-H20 Device Conversion.....................A-64 Monitor, Starting the .........................................7-66
KZ-L2→KV-L20 Device Conversion ......................A-62 MOTION BUILDER (Japanese), Starting Up .......6-160

A-92
 10 Index

[N] Placed Slave Devices, Deleting .............................5-56

NEXT group .............................................. 10-13, 10-15 Placed Slave Devices, Setting ...............................5-61
next program block, Jumping to the ...................... 7-63 Placed Units, Copying/Moving ...............................5-30
NO contacts/NC contacts, Entering....................... 6-59 Placed Units, Deleting ............................................5-29
NO/NC Contacts, Converting .............................. 6-136 PLC (Run mode), Operating the ............................7-68
PLC Communications Parameters, Setting............7-18
[O] PLC Error Check ....................................................7-67
“OK” button ................................................... 10-7, 10-8 PLC operation (Program mode), Stopping.............7-68
On display page No. DM ............................ 10-9, 10-10 PLC program, Verifying the ....................................7-42
Online Edit Features ............................................ 7-149 PLC type, Setting and changing the.......................6-29
Online Edit Function, Cautions Upon Using the .. 7-149 PLC Unit Errors ..................................................... A-11
Online Edit mode, Available edit functions in ...... 7-151 Positioning unit extended functions..........................9-1
Online Edit, Starting/Stopping ............................. 7-150 Outline ................................................................9-2
Online Editing ...................................................... 7-152 Pack Instruction ..................................................9-6
Online editing and returning to a Monitor, Stopping ...... Simple setup .....................................................9-13
....................................................................... 7-153 Tool Bar/Menu.....................................................9-4
Online editing and returning to a Editor, Stopping......... Unit Monitor ......................................................9-20
....................................................................... 7-153 Preview....................................................... 6-170, 8-76
Operands previous/next circuit block, Jumping to the ...................
Operands, Changing........................................ 6-76 ........................................................... 6-126, 7-60, 8-42
Operands, Replacing ..................................... 6-132 previous/next symbols, Jumping to ... 6-127, 7-61, 8-43
operands in registered circuits, Replacing............. 6-99 previous program change block, Jump to ..............7-63
Operating Environment and System Configuration . 1-3 Print preview (Panel Editor)....................................10-6
Compatible OSs................................................. 1-3 cover, Setting printing of .................................6-163
Free space on hard disk .................................... 1-3 CPU positioning parameters, Setting printing of .....
Option .................................................................... 10-7 ........................................................................6-168
other files, Copying from........................................ 6-92 device use status, Setting printing of..............6-167
labels, comments and verify information, Setting
printing of ........................................................6-166
[P]
ladder diagrams, Setting printing of................6-164
Pack instructions
mnemonic lists, Setting printing of..................6-165
Cautions ........................................................... 9-12
Print Preview.....................................................5-68
Entering.............................................................. 9-7
unit relay/DM lists, Setting printing of .............6-169
Expanding/turning off ......................................... 9-9
unit specifications, Setting printing of .............6-169
List of Positioning Unit Pack Instructions..........9-11
printing, Executing........................... 6-161, 7-102, 8-77
Outline................................................................ 9-2
printing details, Changing.......................................5-78
Restrictions ........................................................ 9-6
Printing Registration Monitor ...................... 7-101, 8-76 APPENDICES
Structure............................................................. 9-6
Preview .............................................................8-76
Page No.................................................... 10-13, 10-15
printing, Executing ..................... 6-161, 7-102, 8-77
Page call dev: leading relay/DM ................. 10-9, 10-10
Program Change Display, Setting Clearing of......7-154
Page call device................................................... 10-13
Program Change Display, Clearing the Background
Panel Editor .................................................. 10-1, 10-4
Color in .................................................................7-155
Panel Editor, Closing ....................................... 10-3
Programs
Panel Editor, Starting Up ................................. 10-2
ladder program while the PLC is in the Run mode,
Panel Editor, Starting Up and Exiting .............. 10-2 Writing the.........................................................7-40
Panel Editor, How to Start Up................................ 10-2 ladder programs, Transferring and monitoring .7-40
Panel edit (Data access panel on edit)..... 10-12, 10-13
programs, Reading ...........................................7-41
Panel edit (Message panel on edit) .......... 10-14, 10-15 programs, Reading and monitoring ..................7-39
Panel edit area....................................................... 10-4 Projects
Panel preview ........................................................ 10-5
project folders, About..........................................3-2
Panel preview area ................................................ 10-4 project folders, Deleting....................................6-37
Password, Setting a............................................. 6-146 project folders, Maximum number of ................4-12
PCMCIA card slot for connecting Memory Cards,
project names, Changing....................................3-5
Using the.................................................................. 4-6 projects, Copying ................................................3-6
Placed Slave Devices, Copying/Moving ................ 5-57 projects, Deleting ................................................3-6

A-93
 10 Index

Projects, Creating New .......................................... 6-27 Common restrictions...........................................8-2

PLC type, Setting and changing the ................ 6-29 Restrictions when using KV-10/16/24/40 and KZ-
projects that can be saved to 16MByte Memory Cards 300/350...............................................................8-3
(OP-42137), Maximum number of ......................... 4-13 Restrictions when using KV-700.........................8-5
PROTOCOL BUILDER (Japanese), Starting Up. 6-160 Simulator, Special devices supported by.... 8-3, 8-5
Simple Setup (Japanese) .......................................9-13
[R] Editing in Simple Setup ....................................9-14
Range of Operands, Replacing a ........................ 6-134 Other Functions ................................................9-16
Reading Registration Monitor files......................... 7-89 Outline ................................................................9-2
Recording cycle ....................................................7-112 Restrictions .......................................................9-13
Redo (Redoing the previous undo operation) ....... 6-83 Starting Up in Simple Setup .............................9-14
Redundant Coils, Checking for............................ 6-145 Single Scan, Executing ..........................................8-17
Registered Circuits, Deleting ................................. 6-98 Slave Device Information, Importing ............ 5-44, 5-63
Registered Circuits, Pasting .................................. 6-99 Slave Device Registration Wizard..........................5-62
registered details, Changing and deleting ............. 8-19 Slave Device Setup Screen ...................................5-54
registered details, Changing ............................ 8-19 Displaying ............................................... 5-44, 5-54
registered details, Deleting .............................. 8-19 Exiting ...............................................................5-54
registered rungs, Jumping to ............................... 6-123 Slave Devices, Placing ..........................................5-56
Registration Monitor...................................... 7-84, 8-59 Slave Devices, Reserving ......................................5-64
Registration Monitor files, Reading......... 7-89, 8-64 Slave device placement area ................................5-50
Registration Monitor, Saving ................... 7-88, 8-63 Special auxiliary relays.......................................... A-43
Registration Monitor, Printing ..................... 7-101, 8-76 Special devices supported by Simulator .......... 8-3, 8-5
Preview ............................................................ 8-76 specified rungs or steps, Jumping to.............................
printing, Executing .....................6-161, 7-102, 8-77 ........................................................... 6-122, 7-58, 8-40
Relay Nos. for Placed Units, Batch Assigning ...... 5-33 start and end of rungs, Jumping to the..........................
Relay setup (KV).................................................... 5-75 ........................................................... 6-128, 7-62, 8-44
Relay, Timer, Counter Memory No. by Device ......A-42 Switch assignment relay No. ................................10-11
Relays/DMs for Placed Units, Automatically Assigning Switch/buzzer configuration ........................10-8, 10-11
............................................................................... 5-31 Synchronization monitor.........................................9-22
Relays/DMs for Placed Units, Manually Assigning........ System Address Assignments, Checking ..............5-59
............................................................................... 5-32 System Configurations, Printing.............................5-66
Replacing............................................................. 6-132 System Errors ......................................................... A-2
Reset ..................................................................... 8-28 System Errors (displayed on Monitor)..................... A-8
RESET configuration DM ...................................... 10-9 System Parameters................................................10-8
Restrictions when KV-700 is used........................... 8-5 Data access panel system parameters ............10-8
Special devices supported by Simulator............ 8-5 Message panel system parameters..................10-8
Restrictions when using KV-10/16/24/40 and Switch/buzzer configuration..............................10-8
APPENDICES

KZ-300/350 .............................................................. 8-3 System Relay/DM Assignments, Checking............5-35

Special devices supported by Simulator............ 8-3
Rung Comments, Editing......................................6-118 [T]
rungs, Deleting....................................................... 6-94 Temperature Controller Unit Monitor ....................7-136
Temporary Data Memory....................................... A-46
[S] Time Chart Operations ...........................................7-99
saved device values, Printing .............................. 7-145 File save .........................................................7-114
scan time, Setting the ............................................ 8-21 time chart gradations, Setting the number of ..........
About fixed scan .............................................. 8-21 .............................................................. 7-100, 8-75
Scroll speed .............................................. 10-13, 10-15 time charts, How to view...................................8-73
Searching............................................................. 6-130 time charts, Reading.......................................7-115
selected areas, Copying ........................................ 6-90 timers and counters, Entering ................................6-65
Serial port detailed setting ..................................... 7-20 Title Screen, Setting Animation of ........................6-177
sets/resets, Entering .............................................. 6-63 top or bottom rungs of ladder programs, Jumping
settings, Canceling ........... 8-39, 8-50, 8-57, 8-61, 8-67 to the.................................................. 6-123, 7-59, 8-41
Simulator, Exiting ................................................... 8-15 Trigger attribute setup ..........................................7-110
Simulator, Starting up ............................................ 8-14 Trigger conditions ................................................. 7-111
Simulator Restrictions.............................................. 8-2

A-94
 10 Index

[U] When displaying the address connection status list .....

Undo (Undoing the previous edit operation).......... 6-83 ..............................................................................7-123
Unit Colors, Changing.......................................... 6-175 Window Display Order, Changing the ....................5-79
Unit Detailed Settings, Displaying ......................... 5-36 wiring examples................................... 1-15, 1-16, 1-17
Unit Display Scale, Changing the .......................... 5-71
Unit Editor [X]
Unit Editor Display Color, Changing the .......... 5-74 XYM..................................................... 6-23, 7-50, 8-32
Unit Editor Operations, Flow of ........................ 5-16
Unit Editor, Errors That Occur on.....................A-13
Unit Editor, Exiting............................................ 5-27
Unit Editor, Starting Up ................................... 5-26
Unit Editor Display Color, Changing the ................ 5-74
Unit Illustration Display Mode, Changing............... 5-47
Unit Monitor ..........................................................7-116
Unit Monitor (for KV-H20S/KV-H40S/KV-H20G) ... 9-20
Unit Monitor, Positioning ...................................... 7-128
Unit No., Setting the............................................... 7-22
Unit Registration Wizard, Using the....................... 5-38
Unit Setup Information and Unit Comments, Importing
............................................................................... 5-40
Unit Specifications as CSV Files, Saving .............. 6-41
unit specifications, Setting printing of .................. 6-169
Unit Viewer .......................................................... 6-139
Unit configuration window...................................... 5-19
Unit placement area............................................... 5-18
Unit selection window ........................................... 5-50
Unit setup window......................................... 5-20, 5-51
Units, Placing......................................................... 5-28
Units, Reserving .................................................... 5-42
USB, Cannot Use ..................................................A-89
USB Card Reader/Writer ......................................... 4-9
USB Driver, Installing the....................................... 1-25
use status of devices as a list, Displaying the ..... 6-137
User Data Files ........................................................ 3-4
Using keys to select devices .........................................
................................. 7-54, 7-79, 7-90, 8-36, 8-54, 8-65
Using keys to turn devices ON/OFF .............................. APPENDICES
................................. 7-55, 7-80, 7-91, 8-37, 8-55, 8-66
Using the mouse to select devices ................................
................................. 7-54, 7-79, 7-90, 8-36, 8-54, 8-65
Using the mouse to turn devices ON/OFF.....................
................................. 7-55, 7-80, 7-91, 8-37, 8-55, 8-65

[V]
vertical cursor, Moving the..................................... 8-74
view mode, Changing the ....................6-22, 7-49, 8-32
Grid ................................................6-23, 7-50, 8-32
XYM ...............................................6-23, 7-50, 8-32
view size, Changing the.......................6-22, 7-49, 8-31

[W]
wait time, Setting the ............................................. 8-20
watchdog timer, Setting the ................................... 8-22
When displaying the address connection status details
............................................................................. 7-125

A-95
Revision History
Printing Date Version Revision Details
May 2003 Ver 1.00
WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS:
(1) KEYENCE warrants the Products to be free of defects in materials and
workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of shipment. If any
models or samples were shown to Buyer, such models or samples were used
merely to illustrate the general type and quality of the Products and not to
represent that the Products would necessarily conform to said models or
samples. Any Products found to be defective must be shipped to KEYENCE
with all shipping costs paid by Buyer or offered to KEYENCE for inspection and
examination. Upon examination by KEYENCE, KEYENCE, at its sole option,
will refund the purchase price of, or repair or replace at no charge any Products
found to be defective. This warranty does not apply to any defects resulting
from any action of Buyer, including but not limited to improper installation,
improper interfacing, improper repair, unauthorized modification, misapplication
and mishandling, such as exposure to excessive current, heat, coldness,
moisture, vibration or outdoors air. Components which wear are not warranted.

(2) KEYENCE is pleased to offer suggestions on the use of its various Products.
They are only suggestions, and it is Buyer's responsibility to ascertain the
fitness of the Products for Buyer's intended use. KEYENCE will not be
responsible for any damages that may result from the use of the Products.

(3) The Products and any samples ("Products/Samples") supplied to Buyer are not
to be used internally in humans, for human transportation, as safety devices or
fail-safe systems, unless their written specifications state otherwise. Should any
Products/Samples be used in such a manner or misused in any way,
KEYENCE assumes no responsibility, and additionally Buyer will indemnify
KEYENCE and hold KEYENCE harmless from any liability or damage
whatsoever arising out of any misuse of the Products/Samples.

(4) OTHER THAN AS STATED HEREIN, THE PRODUCTS/SAMPLES ARE

PROVIDED WITH NO OTHER WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER. ALL
EXPRESS, IMPLIED, AND STATUTORY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF
PROPRIETARY RIGHTS, ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL KEYENCE AND ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES BE LIABLE TO ANY
PERSON OR ENTITY FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE,
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF INFORMATION, LOSS OR
INACCURACY OF DATA, LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF SAVINGS, THE
COST OF PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTED GOODS, SERVICES OR
TECHNOLOGIES, OR FOR ANY MATTER ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCTS,
EVEN IF KEYENCE OR ONE OF ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES WAS ADVISED
OF A POSSIBLE THIRD PARTY'S CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OR ANY OTHER
CLAIM AGAINST BUYER. In some jurisdictions, some of the foregoing
warranty disclaimers or damage limitations may not apply.

BUYER'S TRANSFER OBLIGATIONS:

If the Products/Samples purchased by Buyer are to be resold or delivered to a third
party, Buyer must provide such third party with a copy of this document, all
specifications, manuals, catalogs, leaflets and written information provided to Buyer
pertaining to the Products/Samples.